SEC Info  
    Home      Search      My Interests      Help      Sign In      Please Sign In

Separate Account A of Pacific Life Insurance Co, et al. – ‘485BPOS’ on 4/17/06

On:  Monday, 4/17/06, at 3:04pm ET   ·   Effective:  5/1/06   ·   Accession #:  892569-6-525   ·   File #s:  333-93059, 811-08946

Previous ‘485BPOS’:  ‘485BPOS’ on 4/17/06   ·   Next:  ‘485BPOS’ on 4/18/06   ·   Latest:  ‘485BPOS’ on 4/19/24   ·   5 References:   

Find Words in Filings emoji
 
  in    Show  and   Hints

  As Of                Filer                Filing    For·On·As Docs:Size              Issuer               Agent

 4/17/06  Sep Acct A of Pacific Life Ins Co 485BPOS     5/01/06    8:5.8M                                   Bowne - Biv/FASeparate Account A of Pacific Life Insurance Co. (811-08946) Pacific Innovations (333-93059)Pacific Innovations Select (333-93059)

Post-Effective Amendment
Filing Table of Contents

Document/Exhibit                   Description                      Pages   Size 

 1: 485BPOS     Pacific Innovations/Innovations Select              HTML   3.98M 
 8: EX-99.10    Exhibit 10                                          HTML      9K 
 2: EX-99.3(B)  Exhibit 3(B)                                        HTML     89K 
 3: EX-99.5(A)(2)  Exhibit 5(A)(2)                                  HTML     32K 
 4: EX-99.5(K)  Exhibit 5(K)                                        HTML     23K 
 5: EX-99.6(C)  Exhibit 6(C)                                        HTML     13K 
 6: EX-99.6(D)  Exhibit 6(D)                                        HTML     65K 
 7: EX-99.8(F)  Exhibit 8(F)                                        HTML     17K 


485BPOS   —   Pacific Innovations/Innovations Select
Document Table of Contents

Page (sequential) | (alphabetic) Top
 
11st Page   -   Filing Submission
"Table of Contents
"An Overview of Pacific Innovations
"Your Investment Options
"Your Variable Investment Options
"Your Fixed Option
"Purchasing Your Contract
"How to Apply for Your Contract
"Purchase Payments
"How Your Investments Are Allocated
"Choosing Your Investment Options
"Portfolio Optimization
"Investing in Variable Investment Options
"When Your Investment is Effective
"Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions
"Systematic Transfer Options
"Charges, Fees and Deductions
"Withdrawal Charge
"Mortality and Expense Risk Charge
"Administrative Fee
"Annual Fee
"Optional Rider Charges
"Premium Taxes
"Waivers and Reduced Charges
"Expenses of the Fund
"Annuitization, Death Benefits and Optional Death Benefit Riders
"Selecting Your Annuitant
"Annuitization
"Choosing Your Annuity Date
"Default Annuity Date and Options
"Choosing Your Annuity Option
"Your Annuity Payments
"Death Benefits
"Optional Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider (SDBR)
"Optional Premier Death Benefit Rider (PDBR)
"Optional Earnings Enhancement Guarantee (EEG) Rider
"Withdrawals
"Optional Withdrawals
"Tax Consequences of Withdrawals
"Free Look
"Other Optional Riders
"Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider
"Income Access Plus Rider
"Income Access Rider
"Guaranteed Protection Advantage 5 (GPA 5) Rider
"Guaranteed Protection Advantage (GPA) Rider
"Guaranteed Income Advantage Plus (GIA Plus) Rider
"Guaranteed Income Advantage 5 (GIA 5) Rider
"Guaranteed Income Advantage II (GIA II) Rider
"Pacific Life and the Separate Account
"Pacific Life
"Separate Account A
"Financial Highlights
"Federal Tax Status
"Taxes Payable by Contract Owners: General Rules
"Qualified Contracts
"IRAs and Other Qualified Contracts with Optional Benefit Riders
"Required Minimum Distributions
"Loans
"Withholding
"Impact of Federal Income Taxes
"Taxes on Pacific Life
"Additional Information
"Voting Rights
"Changes to Your Contract
"Changes to All Contracts
"Inquiries and Submitting Forms and Requests
"Telephone and Electronic Transactions
"Electronic Delivery Authorization
"Timing of Payments and Transactions
"Confirmations, Statements and Other Reports to Contract Owners
"Distribution Arrangements
"Service Arrangements
"Replacement of Life Insurance or Annuities
"Financial Statements
"The General Account
"General Information
"Fixed Option
"Terms Used in This Prospectus
"Contents of the Statement of Additional Information
"Appendix A: State Law Variations
"Appendix B: Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider & Income Access Plus Rider Sample Calculations
"Appendix C: Income Access Rider Sample Calculations
"Appendix D: Guaranteed Income Advantage Plus Rider Sample Calculations
"Appendix E: Portfolio Optimization Models Until May 5, 2006
"Where to Go for More Information
"An Overview of Pacific Innovations Select
"Your Fixed Options
"Performance
"Total Returns
"Yields
"Performance Comparisons and Benchmarks
"Pre-Authorized Withdrawals
"Guaranteed Income Advantage (GIA) Rider
"Distribution of the Contracts
"Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (PSD)
"DCA Plus Fixed Option
"Systematic Transfer Programs
"The Contracts and the Separate Account
"Calculating Subaccount Unit Values
"Variable Annuity Payment Amounts
"Redemptions of Remaining Guaranteed Variable Payments Under Option 2
"Corresponding Dates
"Age and Sex of Annuitant
"Death Benefit
"Joint Annuitants on Qualified Contracts
"1035 Exchanges
"Safekeeping of Assets
"Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

This is an HTML Document rendered as filed.  [ Alternative Formats ]



  e485bpos  

Table of Contents



As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on April 17, 2006.
Registrations Nos.

333-93059
811-08946

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

FORM N-4

     
REGISTRATION STATEMENT UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933
  x
 
   
Pre-Effective Amendment No. ___
  o
   
   
Post-Effective Amendment No. 29
  x
   
 
   
and/or
   
 
   
REGISTRATION STATEMENT UNDER THE INVESTMENT COMPANY ACT OF 1940
  x
 
   
   
Amendment No. 160
  x
   

(Check appropriate box or boxes)

SEPARATE ACCOUNT A
(Exact Name of Registrant)

PACIFIC LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY
(Name of Depositor)

700 Newport Center Drive
Newport Beach, California 92660
(Address of Depositor’s Principal Executive Offices) (Zip Code)

(949) 219-7286
(Depositor’s Telephone Number, including Area Code)

Charlene A. Grant
Assistant Vice President
Pacific Life Insurance Company
700 Newport Center Drive
Newport Beach, California 92660
(Name and address of agent for service)

Copies of all communications to:

     
Charlene A. Grant
Pacific Life Insurance Company
P.O. Box 9000
Newport Beach, CA 92658-9030
  Jeffrey S. Puretz, Esq.
Dechert LLP
1775 Eye Street, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-2401

Approximate Date of Proposed Public Offering

It is proposed that this filing will become effective (check appropriate box)

     
o   immediately upon filing pursuant to paragraph (b) of Rule 485
     
x   on May 1, 2006 pursuant to paragraph (b) of Rule 485
     
o   60 days after filing pursuant to paragraph (a) (1) of Rule 485
     
o   on _____________ pursuant to paragraph (a)(1) of Rule 485

If appropriate, check the following box:

     
o   this post-effective amendment designates a new effective date for a previously filed post-effective amendment.

Title of Securities Being Registered: Interests in the Separate Account Under Pacific Innovations and Pacific Innovations Select individual flexible premium deferred variable annuity contracts.

Filing Fee: None



 



Table of Contents

SEPARATE ACCOUNT A
FORM N-4
CROSS REFERENCE SHEET

         
PART A        
Item No.       Prospectus Heading
1.
  Cover Page   Cover Page
 
       
2.
  Definitions   TERMS USED IN THIS PROSPECTUS
 
       
3.
  Synopsis   AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC
INNOVATIONS AND AN OVERVIEW
OF PACIFIC INNOVATIONS
SELECT
 
       
4.
  Condensed Financial Information   YOUR INVESTMENT OPTIONS — Variable Investment Option Performance; ADDITIONAL INFORMATION — Financial Statements; FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS
 
       
5.
  General Description of Registrant, Depositor and Portfolio Companies   AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC INNOVATIONS AND AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC INNOVATIONS SELECT; PACIFIC LIFE AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT — Pacific Life, — Separate Account A; YOUR INVESTMENT OPTIONS — Your Variable Investment Options; ADDITIONAL INFORMATION — Voting Rights
 
       
6.
  Deductions   AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC INNOVATIONS AND AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC INNOVATIONS SELECT; HOW YOUR INVESTMENTS ARE ALLOCATED — Transfers and Market–timing Restrictions; CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS; WITHDRAWALS — Optional Withdrawal
 
       
      AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC INNOVATIONS AND AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC INNOVATIONS SELECT; PURCHASING YOUR CONTRACT — How to Apply for your Contract; HOW YOUR INVESTMENTS ARE ALLOCATED; ANNUITIZATION, DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS — Choosing Your Annuity Option, — Your Annuity Payments, — Death Benefits; ADDITIONAL INFORMATION — Voting Rights, — Changes to Your Contract, — Changes to ALL Contracts, — Inquiries and Submitting
 
       
7.
  General Description of Variable Annuity Contracts   AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC INNOVATIONS; AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC INNOVATIONS SELECT; PURCHASING YOUR CONTRACT — How to Apply for your Contract; HOW YOUR INVESTMENTS ARE ALLOCATED; ANNUITIZATION, DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS — Choosing Your Annuity Option, — Your Annuity Payment, — Death Benefits; OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS; ADDITIONAL INFORMATION — Voting Rights, — Changes to Your Contract, — Changes to ALL Contracts, — Inquiries and Submitting Forms and Requests, — Timing of Payments and Transactions.
 
       
8
  Annuity Period   ANNUITIZATION, DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS
 
       
9.
  Death Benefit   ANNUITIZATION, DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS — Death
Benefits
 
       
10.
  Purchases and Contract Value   AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC INNOVATIONS AND AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC INNOVATIONS SELECT; PURCHASING YOUR CONTRACT; HOW YOUR INVESTMENTS ARE ALLOCATED; PACIFIC LIFE AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT — Pacific Life; THE GENERAL ACCOUNT — Withdrawals and Transfers
 
       
11.
  Redemptions   AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC INNOVATIONS AND AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC INNOVATIONS SELECT; CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS; WITHDRAWALS; ADDITIONAL INFORMATION — Timing of Payments and Transactions; THE GENERAL ACCOUNT — Withdrawals and Transfers
 
       
12.
  Taxes   CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS — Premium Taxes; WITHDRAWALS — Optional Withdrawals, — Tax Consequences of Withdrawals; FEDERAL TAX STATUS
 
       
13.
  Legal Proceedings   Not Applicable
 
       
14.
  Table of Contents of the Statement of Additional Information   CONTENTS OF THE STATEMENT OF
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

 



Table of Contents

PART B

         
Item No.       Statement of Additional Information Heading
 
       
15.
  Cover Page   Cover Page
 
       
16.
  Table of Contents   TABLE OF CONTENTS
 
       
17.
  General Information and History   Not Applicable
 
       
18.
  Services   Not Applicable
 
       
19.
  Purchase of Securities Being Offered   THE CONTRACTS AND THE
SEPARATE ACCOUNT —
Calculating Subaccount Unit
Values, — Systematic
Transfer Programs
 
       
20.
  Underwriters   DISTRIBUTION OF THE CONTRACTS — Pacific Select Distributors, Inc.
 
       
21.
  Calculation of Performance Data   PERFORMANCE
 
       
22.
  Annuity Payments   THE CONTRACTS AND THE
SEPARATE ACCOUNT — Variable
Annuity Payment Amounts
 
       
23.
  Financial Statements   FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

PART C

Information required to be included in Part C is set forth under the appropriate Item, so numbered, in Part C to this Registration Statement.

 



Table of Contents


PACIFIC INNOVATIONS      PROSPECTUS MAY 1, 2006

Pacific Innovations is an individual flexible premium deferred variable annuity contract issued by Pacific Life Insurance Company (Pacific Life).


This Contract is not available in all states. This Prospectus is not an offer in any state or jurisdiction where we’re not legally permitted to offer the Contract.

The Contract is described in detail in this Prospectus and its Statement of Additional Information (SAI). The Pacific Select Fund is described in its Prospectus and its SAI. No one has the right to describe the Contract or the Pacific Select Fund any differently than they have been described in these documents.

You should be aware that the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) has not reviewed the Contract and does not guarantee that the information in this Prospectus is accurate or complete. It’s a criminal offense to say otherwise.

Pacific Life does not provide legal or tax advice. Any statement contained in this communication is not intended or written to be legal or tax advice, nor may it be used for the purpose of avoiding any tax penalties that may be imposed on the taxpayer. Any taxpayer should seek advice based on the taxpayer’s particular circumstances from an independent tax advisor.


This Contract is not a deposit or obligation of, or guaranteed or endorsed by, any bank. It’s not federally insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, the Federal Reserve Board, or any other government agency. Investment in a Contract involves risk, including possible loss of principal.


This Prospectus provides information you should know before buying a Contract. It’s accompanied by a current Prospectus for the Pacific Select Fund, the Fund that provides the underlying Portfolios for the Variable Investment Options offered under the Contract. The Variable Investment Options are funded by Separate Account A of Pacific Life. Please read both Prospectuses carefully, and keep them for future reference.

Here’s a list of all the Investment Options currently available under your Contract:

VARIABLE INVESTMENT OPTIONS

     
International Value
International Small-Cap
Diversified Research
Equity
American Funds® Growth-Income
American Funds® Growth
Technology
Short Duration Bond
Concentrated Growth
Diversified Bond
Growth LT
Focused 30
Health Sciences
Mid-Cap Value
Large-Cap Growth
 (formerly called Blue Chip)
Capital Opportunities
  International Large-Cap
Equity Index
Small-Cap Index
Fasciano Small Equity
Small-Cap Value
Multi-Strategy
Main Street® Core
Emerging Markets
Managed Bond
Inflation Managed
Money Market
High Yield Bond
Large-Cap Value
Comstock
Mid-Cap Growth
Real Estate
VN Small-Cap Value
FIXED OPTION
Fixed Option
   

You’ll find more information about the Contract and Separate Account A in the SAI dated May 1, 2006. The SAI has been filed with the SEC and is considered to be part of this Prospectus because it’s incorporated by reference. You’ll find a table of contents for the SAI on page 90 of this Prospectus. You can get a copy of the SAI without charge by calling or writing to Pacific Life. You can also visit the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov, which contains the SAI, material incorporated into this Prospectus by reference, and other information about registrants that file electronically with the SEC.



 


YOUR GUIDE TO THIS PROSPECTUS
       
 An Overview of Pacific Innovations   3

  12
  12
  14

  14
  14
  14

  15
  15
  16
  20
  21
  21
  22

  23
  23
  25
  25
  25
  26
  27
  27
  27

  27
  27
  28
  28
  28
  29
  31
  31
    35
    36
    37

  38
  38
  41
  41

  41
  42
  46
  50
  54
  56
  57
  60
  62

  64
  64
  65
  66

  70
  71
  73
    73
    76
    77
  79
  80
  80

  81
  81
  81
  82
  83
  84
  84
  84
  85
  85
  86
  86
  86

  86
  86
  86

  88

  90

  91

  96

  102

  104

  109

Appendix F: KETRA Provisions
  110

  Back Cover
 
2


Table of Contents

AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC INNOVATIONS

This overview tells you some key things you should know about your Contract. It’s designed as a summary only – please read this Prospectus, your Contract and the Statement of Additional Information for more detailed information.

Some states have different rules about how annuity contracts are described or administered. These rules are reflected in your Contract, or in endorsements or supplements to your Contract. The terms of your Contract and of any Rider, Endorsement or Supplement, prevail over what’s in this Prospectus.

In this Prospectus, you and your mean the Contract Owner or Policyholder. Pacific Life, we, us and our refer to Pacific Life Insurance Company. Contract means a Pacific Innovations variable annuity contract, unless we state otherwise.

Pacific Innovations Basics

An annuity contract may be appropriate if you’re looking for retirement income or you want to meet other long-term financial objectives. Discuss with your qualified investment professional whether a variable annuity, optional benefits and underlying Investment Options are appropriate for you taking into consideration your age, income, net worth, tax status, insurance needs, financial objectives, investment goals, liquidity needs, time horizon, risk tolerance and other relevant information. Together you can decide if a variable annuity is right for you.

This Contract may not be the right one for you if you need to withdraw money for short-term needs, because withdrawal charges and tax penalties for early withdrawal may apply.

You should consider the Contract’s investment and income benefits, as well as its costs.

Pacific Innovations is an annuity contract between you and Pacific Life Insurance Company. Annuity contracts have two phases, the accumulation phase and the annuitization (income) phase. The two phases are discussed below.

This Contract is designed for long-term financial planning. It allows you to invest money on a tax-deferred basis for retirement or other goals, and to receive income in a variety of ways, including a series of income payments for life or for a specified period of years.

Non-Qualified and Qualified Contracts are available. You buy a Non-Qualified Contract with “after-tax” dollars. You buy a Qualified Contract under a qualified retirement or pension plan, or an individual retirement annuity or account (IRA), or form thereof. It’s important to know that IRAs and qualified plans are already tax-deferred. Therefore, an annuity contract should be used to fund an IRA or qualified plan to benefit from the annuity’s features other than tax deferral.

Pacific Innovations is a variable annuity, which means that the value of your Contract fluctuates depending on the performance of the Investment Options you choose. The Contract allows you to choose how often you make Investments (“Purchase Payments”) and how much you add each time.

Your Right to Cancel (“Free Look”)

During the Free Look period, you have the right to cancel your Contract and return it with instructions to us or to your registered representative for a refund. The amount refunded may be more or less than the Investments you’ve made, depending on the state where you signed your application and the kind of Contract you buy.

The Accumulation Phase

The Investment Options you choose and how they perform will affect the value of your Contract during the accumulation phase, as well as the amount of your annuity payments during the income phase if you choose a variable annuitization payout.

 
3


Table of Contents

AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC INNOVATIONS

The accumulation phase begins on your Contract Date and continues until your Annuity Date. During the accumulation phase, you can put money in your Contract by making Investments, and choose Investment Options in which to allocate them. You can also take money out of your Contract by making a withdrawal.

Investments (“Purchase Payments”)

Your initial Investment must be at least $10,000 for a Non-Qualified Contract and at least $2,000 for a Qualified Contract. Additional Investments must be at least $250 for a Non-Qualified Contract and $50 for a Qualified Contract. We also call your Investments “Purchase Payments”.

Investment Options

You can ask your registered representative to help you choose the right Investment Options for your goals and risk tolerance.

You can choose from a variety of Variable Investment Options (also called Subaccounts), each of which invests in a corresponding Portfolio of the Pacific Select Fund. We’re the investment adviser for the Pacific Select Fund. We oversee the management of all the Fund’s Portfolios and manage two of the Portfolios directly. We’ve retained other portfolio managers to manage the other Portfolios. The value of each Portfolio will fluctuate with the value of the investments it holds, and returns are not guaranteed.

You can also choose any available fixed option that earns a guaranteed rate of interest of at least 3% annually.

We allocate your Investments to the Investment Options you choose. The value of your Contract will fluctuate during the accumulation phase depending on the Investment Options you’ve chosen. You bear the investment risk of any Variable Investment Options you choose.

You’ll find more about the Investment Options starting on page 12.

Transferring among Investment Options

You can transfer among Investment Options any time, subject to certain limitations until your Annuity Date without paying any current income tax. Transfers are limited to 25 for each calendar year. Only two transfers per month may involve the International Value, International Small-Cap, International Large-Cap or Emerging Markets Investment Options. If you have used all 25 transfers in a calendar year, you may make one additional transfer of all or a portion of your Variable Account Value to the Money Market Investment Option before the start of the next calendar year. You can also make systematic transfers by enrolling in our dollar cost averaging, portfolio rebalancing or earnings sweep programs. Transfers made under these systematic transfer programs or under an asset allocation program established and maintained by us are excluded from the limitation. Some restrictions may apply to transfers to or from any fixed option.

You’ll find more about transfers and transfer limitations starting on page 21.

Withdrawals

You can make full and partial withdrawals to supplement your income or for other purposes. You can withdraw a certain amount each year without paying a withdrawal charge, but any amount withdrawn in excess of this amount may incur a withdrawal charge on Investments that are less than four years old. Some restrictions may apply to making partial withdrawals from any fixed option.

In general, you may have to pay income taxes on withdrawals or other distributions from your Contract. If you’re under age 59 1/2, a 10% federal penalty tax may also apply to taxable withdrawals.

You’ll find more about withdrawals starting on page 38.

The Income Phase

The income phase of your Contract begins on your Annuity Date. Generally, you can choose to surrender your Contract and receive a single payment or you can annuitize your Contract and receive a series of income payments.

 
4


Table of Contents

You can choose fixed or variable annuity payments, or a combination of both. Variable annuity payments may not be available in all states. You can choose monthly, quarterly, semiannual or annual payments. We’ll make the income payments to your designated payee. Income distributions are always taxed to the Owner.

If you choose variable annuity payments, the amount of the payments will fluctuate depending on the performance of the Variable Investment Options you choose. After your Annuity Date, if you choose variable annuity payments, you can exchange your Subaccount Annuity Units among the Variable Investment Options up to four times in any 12-month period.

You’ll find more about annuitization starting on page 28 and annuity options available under the Contract starting on page 29.

The Death Benefit

The Contract provides a death benefit upon the first death of an Owner or the death of the sole surviving Annuitant, whichever occurs first, during the accumulation phase. Death benefit proceeds are payable when we receive proof of death and payment instructions in proper form. To whom we pay a death benefit, and how we calculate the amount of the death benefit depends on who dies first and the type of Contract you own.

You’ll find more about the death benefit starting on page 31.

Optional Riders

Optional riders are subject to availability. Before purchasing any optional benefit, you should consult with a qualified investment professional for advice on whether an optional benefit is appropriate for you.

Stepped-Up Death Benefit (SDBR) and Premier Death Benefit (PDBR) Riders

The SDBR offers you the ability to lock in market gains for your beneficiaries with a stepped-up death benefit, which is the highest Contract Value on any previous Contract Anniversary (prior to the Annuitant’s 81st birthday) adjusted for additional Purchase Payments and withdrawals. You can only buy the SDBR when you buy your Contract. The PDBR is only available on Contracts issued before May 1, 2003.

You’ll find more about the SDBR on page 35 and the PDBR on page 36.

Earnings Enhancement Guarantee (EEG) Rider

The optional EEG Rider provides for an additional amount (EEG Amount) to be included in the death benefit proceeds when such proceeds become payable as a result of the sole surviving Annuitant’s death or first death of an Owner who is also an Annuitant. You may buy the EEG Rider on the Contract Date or on the first Contract Anniversary.

If you buy the EEG Rider within 60 days after the Contract Date or within 30 days after the first Contract Anniversary, we will make the effective date of the EEG Rider coincide with that Contract Date or Contract Anniversary.

The Earnings Enhancement Guarantee (EEG) Rider, EEG Amount and EEG Charge are called the Guaranteed Earnings Enhancement (GEE) Rider, GEE Amount, and GEE Charge, respectively, in the Contract’s Rider.

You’ll find more about the EEG Rider on page 37.

Optional Living Benefit Riders

You may purchase any optional Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary. In addition, if you purchase a Rider within 60 days after the Contract Date or within 30 days after any Contract Anniversary, the Rider Effective Date will be that Contract Date or Contract Anniversary.

Some optional Riders require that your entire Contract Value be invested in an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for the Rider to remain in effect. (See the HOW YOUR INVESTMENTS ARE ALLOCATED— Portfolio Optimization section in this Prospectus.)

 
5


Table of Contents

AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC INNOVATIONS

There may be adverse consequences to taking a loan while an optional Rider is in effect. If you have an existing loan on your Contract, you should carefully consider whether an optional Rider is appropriate for you.

Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider

The optional Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider lets you withdraw up to 5% of your investments per year, lock in market gains, and may provide a credit which increases your protected amount. Subject to state availability, the optional Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider offers you, during the accumulation period, the ability to withdraw up to 5% of a Protected Payment Base (usually Purchase Payments), the potential to receive 5% of the Protected Payment Base for life, even if the Contract Value or Remaining Protected Balance is zero, and provides an Income Access Credit of 6% to your Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance for up to a five year period (provided you do not take any withdrawals during this period), when used with an asset allocation program established and maintained by us.

The Rider also provides for an additional option (the “Reset”) on any Contract Anniversary beginning with the first (1st) anniversary of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and may include an increase in the charges (up to a maximum of 1.20%) associated with the Rider. (Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance, Protected Payment Amount, Income Access Credit, Reset, and Reset Date are described in the OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS—Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider section in this Prospectus.)

The Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider is called the Enhanced Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit Rider in the Contract’s Rider.

You’ll find more about the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider on page 42.

Income Access Plus Rider

The optional Income Access Plus Rider lets you withdraw up to 5% of your investments per year, lock in market gains, and may provide a credit which increases your protected amount. Subject to state availability, the Rider offers you, during the accumulation period, the ability to withdraw up to 5% of a Protected Payment Base (usually Purchase Payments) and provides an Income Access Credit of 6% to your Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance for up to a five year period (provided you do not take any withdrawals during this period), when used with an asset allocation program established and maintained by us.

The Rider also provides for an additional option (the “Reset”) on any Contract Anniversary beginning with the first (1st) anniversary of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and may include an increase in the charges (up to a maximum of 1.20%) associated with the Rider. (Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance, Income Access Credit, Reset, and Reset Date are described in the OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS—Income Access Plus Rider section in this Prospectus.)

The Income Access Plus Rider is called the Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit Rider in the Contract’s Rider.

You’ll find more about the Income Access Plus Rider on page 46.

Income Access Rider

The optional Income Access Rider lets you withdraw up to 7% of your investments per year and lock in market gains. The optional Income Access Rider offers you, during the accumulation period, the ability to withdraw up to 7% of a Protected Payment Base (usually Purchase Payments) when used with an asset allocation program established and maintained by us.

The Rider also provides for an additional option (the “Step-Up”) on any Contract Anniversary beginning with the first (1st) anniversary of the Effective Date of the Rider or most recent Step-Up Date, whichever is later, and may include an increase in the charge (up to a maximum of 0.75%) associated with the Rider.

You’ll find more about the Income Access Rider on page 50.

 
6


Table of Contents

Guaranteed Protection Advantage 5 (GPA 5) Rider

The optional GPA 5 Rider allows for an additional amount that may be added to your Contract Value when an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for this Rider is used for a 10-year period (the “Term”).

The Rider also provides for an additional option (the “Step-Up”) on any Contract Anniversary beginning with the 5th anniversary of the Effective Date of the Rider and before the Annuity Date. If the Step-Up is elected, your 10-year Term would begin again as of the effective date of the Step-Up election, and may include an increase in the charges (up to a maximum of 0.75%) associated with the Rider.

You’ll find more about the GPA 5 Rider on page 54.

Guaranteed Protection Advantage (GPA) Rider

The GPA Rider is only available if the original Effective Date of the Rider is before April 1, 2003. The optional GPA Rider provides for an additional amount that may be added to your Contract Value when an asset allocation program, established and maintained by us for this Rider, is used for a 10-year period (the “Term”). The Term begins on the Effective Date of the Rider.

You’ll find more about the GPA Rider on page 56.

Guaranteed Income Advantage Plus (GIA Plus) Rider

The optional GIA Plus Rider offers a minimum fixed income payout, plus the ability to lock in market gains and withdraw money each year. The optional GIA Plus Rider offers a guaranteed income annuity option when an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for the GIA Plus Rider is used.

The GIA Plus Rider is called the Guaranteed Income Annuity (GIA) Rider in the Contract’s Rider.

You’ll find more about the GIA Plus Rider on page 57.

Guaranteed Income Advantage 5 (GIA 5) Rider

The optional GIA 5 Rider is no longer available for purchase. The optional GIA 5 Rider offered a guaranteed income advantage annuity option when an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for this Rider is used.

The Rider provides for an additional option (the “Step-Up”) on any Contract Anniversary beginning on the 5th anniversary of the Effective Date of the Rider and before the Annuity Date and may include an increase in the charges (up to a maximum of 0.75%) associated with the Rider.

You’ll find more about the GIA 5 Rider on page 60.

Guaranteed Income Advantage II (GIA II) Rider

The optional GIA II Rider is no longer available for purchase. The optional GIA II Rider offered a guaranteed income advantage annuity option.

The Rider provides for an additional option (the “Step-Up”) on any Contract Anniversary beginning on the 5th anniversary of the Effective Date of the Rider and before the Annuity Date and may include an increase in the charges (up to a maximum of 1.00%) associated with the Rider.

You’ll find more about the GIA II Rider on page 62.

 
7


Table of Contents

AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC INNOVATIONS

Fees and Expenses

This section of the overview explains the fees and expenses associated with your Pacific Innovations Contract.

Contract Transaction Expenses

The following describes the transaction fees and expenses that you will pay when owning your Contract. Expenses are fixed under the terms of your Contract. Premium taxes and/or other taxes, may also apply to your Contract. We generally charge premium taxes and/or other taxes when you annuitize your Contract, but there are other times when we charge them to your Contract instead. Please see your Contract for details.

         
• Maximum Withdrawal Charge (as a percentage of Purchase Payments)
    9.0% 1

Periodic Expenses

The following describes the fees and expenses that you will pay periodically during the time you own your Contract not including Portfolio fees and expenses.

  Separate Account A Annual Expenses (as a percentage of the average daily Account Value) (see TERMS USED IN THIS PROSPECTUS on page 88):
                         
• Annual Fee2
                    $30.00  
                         
Without With Stepped-Up With Premier
Rider Death Benefit Rider Death Benefit Rider

• Mortality and Expense Risk Charge3
    1.25%       1.25%       1.25%  
• Administrative Fee3
    0.15%       0.15%       0.15%  
• Death Benefit Rider Charge 3,4
    none       0.20%       0.35%  
     
     
     
 
• Total Separate Account A Annual Expenses
    1.40%       1.60%       1.75%  
     
     
     
 
Loan Expenses (interest on Contract Debt) (See LOANS on page 77):
• Loan Interest Rate5
                    2.00%  

  Optional Rider Annual Expenses (calculated as a percentage of Contract Value except for GIA Plus) (see TERMS USED IN THIS PROSPECTUS on page 88):
                 
Maximum Charge
Current Charge Percentage
Percentage

• Earnings Enhancement Guarantee (EEG) Rider Charge6
    0.25%       0.25%  
• Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider Charge7
    0.60%       1.20%  
• Income Access Plus Rider Charge7
    0.40%       1.20%  
• Income Access Rider Charge8
    0.40%       0.75%  
• Guaranteed Protection Advantage 5 (GPA 5) Rider Charge9
    0.25%       0.75%  
• Guaranteed Protection Advantage (GPA) Rider Charge10
    0.10%       0.10%  
• Guaranteed Income Advantage Plus (GIA Plus) Rider Charge11
    0.50%       0.50%  
• Guaranteed Income Advantage 5 (GIA 5) Rider Charge12
    0.40%       0.75%  
• Guaranteed Income Advantage II (GIA II) Rider Charge12
    0.70%       1.00%  
 
1
The withdrawal charge may or may not apply or may be reduced under certain circumstances. See CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS and WITHDRAWALS.
 
2
We deduct an Annual Fee on each Contract Anniversary up to your Annuity Date and when you make a full withdrawal if the Contract Value on these days is less than $50,000 after deducting any outstanding loan and interest (your Net Contract Value). See CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS.
 
3
This is an annual rate and assessed on a daily basis. The daily rate is calculated by dividing the annual rate by 365.
 
4
If you buy an Optional Death Benefit Rider, we will add this charge to the Mortality and Expense Risk Charge until your Annuity Date. The Premier Death Benefit Rider is only available on Contracts issued before May 1, 2003. See CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS.
 
8


Table of Contents

 
5
If you request a loan on your Contract, we will charge you a gross interest rate of 5.00% on your outstanding principal amount. We will credit you the amount of 3.00% on any Contract Value attributed to your Loan Account. The net amount of interest you will pay on your loan will be 2.00%. See LOANS.
 
6
If you buy the EEG Rider (subject to availability), we deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment Options on each Contract Anniversary following the date you purchase the Rider, and when you make a full withdrawal, if the EEG Rider is in effect on that date. See CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS.
 
7
If you buy the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider or the Income Access Plus Rider (subject to state availability), we deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment Options on each contract Anniversary following the Effective Date of the Rider during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect, or if the Rider is terminated. If the Rider is terminated for reasons other than death or annuitization, this charge will be deducted on the effective date of termination. Under the terms and conditions of the Rider, the annual Charge will remain the same while the Rider is in effect, unless you elect the optional Reset provision provided under the Rider. The Charge if you purchase the Rider will also be shown on the Rider in your Contract. We will waive the annual Charge if the Rider terminates as a result of death of an Owner or sole surviving Annuitant or upon full annuitization of your Contract. If the Effective Date of the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider is before July 1, 2006, the current charge percentage is equal to 0.40%. Currently, the charge percentage will remain at 0.40% even if you elect to reset the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider. However, for any future elections to reset, we reserve the right to increase the charge percentage to an amount that will not exceed the charge percentage in effect for new issues of this Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider. The optional Income Access Plus Rider is only available until the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider is available in your state.
 
8
If you buy the Income Access Rider (subject to state availability), we deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment Options on each Contract Anniversary following the Effective Date of the Rider during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect, or if the Rider is terminated. If the Rider is terminated for reasons other than death or annuitization, this charge will be deducted on the effective date of termination. Under the terms and conditions of the Rider the charge will remain the same while the Rider is in effect, unless you elect the Step-Up provisions provided under the Rider. The charge if you purchase a Rider will also be shown on the Rider in your Contract. If the Effective Date of the Rider is before March 1, 2004, the Income Access Rider Annual Charge is equal to 0.30%.
 
9
If you buy the GPA 5 Rider (subject to state availability), we deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment Options on each Contract Anniversary following the Effective Date of the Rider during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect, or if you terminate the Rider. If the Rider is terminated for reasons other than death or annuitization, this charge will be deducted on the effective date of termination. Under the terms and conditions of the Rider the charge will remain the same while the Rider is in effect, unless you elect the Step-Up provision under Rider. The charge if you purchase a Rider will also be shown on the Rider in your Contract. If the Effective Date of the GPA 5 Rider is before March 1, 2004 the Guaranteed Protection Charge is equal to 0.10%.
 
10
If you purchased the GPA Rider (subject to availability), we deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment Options on each Contract Anniversary following the Effective Date of the Rider during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect. If the Rider is terminated for reasons other than death or annuitization, this charge will be deducted on the effective date of termination. The GPA Rider is only available if the original Effective Date of the Rider is before April 1, 2003.
 
11
If you buy the GIA Plus Rider (subject to state availability), we charge the fee based on the greater of the Contract Value or the Guaranteed Income Base. We deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment Options on each Contract Anniversary and when you make a full withdrawal if the Rider is in effect on that date, or if the Rider is terminated. We will waive the annual charge if the Rider terminates as a result of death of an Owner or sole surviving Annuitant or upon full annuitization of your Contract.
 
12
If you purchased the GIA 5 or GIA II Rider, (subject to state availability) we deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment Options on each Contract Anniversary, the Annuity Date, and when you make a full withdrawal, if the Rider is in effect on that date, or when you terminate your Rider. If the Rider is terminated for reasons other than death or annuitization, this charge will be deducted on the effective date of termination. The charge if you purchase the Rider will also be shown on the Rider in your Contract. Under the terms and conditions of the Rider the charge will remain the same while the Rider is in effect, unless you elect the Step-Up provision provided under each Rider. The GIA 5 or GIA II Riders are only available if the original Effective Date of the Rider is before February 1, 2005.
 
9


Table of Contents

AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC INNOVATIONS

Total Annual Fund Operating Expenses

You will find more about the underlying Funds starting on page 12, and in the Funds’ Prospectus which accompanies this Prospectus.

This table shows the range (minimum and maximum) of fees and expenses charged by any of the Portfolios, expressed as a percentage of average daily net assets, for the year ended December 31, 2005, adjusted to reflect fees and expenses of new Portfolios.

Each Variable Account of the Separate Account purchases shares of the corresponding Funds’ Portfolio at net asset value. The net asset value reflects the investment advisory fees and other expenses that are deducted from the assets of the Portfolio. The advisory fees and other expenses are not fixed or specified under the terms of the Contract, and they may vary from year to year. These fees and expenses are described in the Funds’ Prospectus.

                 
Total Annual Portfolio Operating Expenses1 Minimum Maximum

Expenses that are deducted from the Funds’ assets, including advisory fees, 12b-1 distribution expenses and other expenses.     0.29 %     1.57 %
 
1 To help limit Pacific Select Fund expenses, Pacific Life, advisor to the Fund, has contractually agreed to reduce its investment advisory fees or otherwise reimburse each Portfolio of Pacific Select Fund, except the American Funds® Growth-Income Portfolio, for its operating expenses (including organizational expenses, but not including advisory fees, additional costs associated with foreign investing (including foreign taxes on dividends, interest, or gains), interest (including commitment fees), taxes, brokerage commissions and other transactional expenses, extraordinary expenses such as litigation expense, and other expenses not incurred in the ordinary course of each Portfolio’s business, and expenses of any counsel or other persons or services retained by the Fund’s independent trustees) that exceed an annual rate of 0.10% of a Portfolio’s average daily net assets. Such reduction or reimbursement is subject to repayment to Pacific Life, for a period of time as permitted under regulatory and/or accounting standards (currently 3 years from the end of the fiscal year in which the reimbursement took place), to the extent such expenses fall below the 0.10% expense cap in future years. Any amounts repaid to Pacific Life will have the effect of increasing such expenses of the Portfolio, but not above the 0.10% expense cap. There is no guarantee that Pacific Life will continue to cap expenses after April 30, 2007. Until May 1, 2007, or if earlier, such time as the American Funds® Growth- Income and American Funds® Growth Portfolios no longer invest substantially all of their assets in a master fund, Pacific Life will limit its total investment advisory fee to 0.36% for each Portfolio. Also, in the case of the American Funds® Growth-Income Portfolio, Pacific Life has contractually agreed to waive all or part of its investment advisory fees or otherwise reimburse the Portfolio for its ordinary operating expenses, including advisory fees, and the proportionate share of the net fees and expenses of the master fund that exceed the annual rate of 1.01% of its average daily net assets until April 28, 2008.
 
In 2005, Pacific Life was not required to make any reimbursements to any portfolios under the expense limitation agreements. All reductions or reimbursements in prior years have been fully recouped or expired as of December 31, 2005.
 
Effective May 1, 2005, Pacific Select Fund entered into an Advisory Fee Reduction Program (“Program”), which may lower the advisory fee paid to Pacific Life under the investment advisory agreement. Pursuant to this Program, Pacific Life has agreed to waive 0.00125% of its advisory fee for the period from May 1, 2005 through April 30, 2007. This reduction is reflected in the chart above. See the Pacific Select Fund Prospectus for details on fees and expenses of the Fund and on the Program.
 
10


Table of Contents

Examples

The following examples are intended to help you compare the cost of investing in your Contract with the cost of investing in other variable annuity contracts. These costs include Contract transaction expenses, the maximum periodic Contract expenses (including the combination of optional Riders whose cumulative expenses totaled more than any other combination of optional riders), Separate Account annual expenses, and Portfolio fees and expenses for the year ended December 31, 2005. Premium taxes and/or other taxes may also be applicable.

The examples assume that you invest $10,000 in the Contract for the time periods indicated. They also assume that your Investment has a 5% return each year and assumes the maximum and minimum fees and expenses of all of the Investment Options available. Although your actual costs may be higher or lower, based on these assumptions, your maximum and minimum costs would be:

•  If you surrendered your Contract:
                 
1 Year 3 Years 5 Years 10 Years
Maximum*   $1,472   $2,673   $3,204   $6,158
Minimum*   $986   $1,266   $939   $2,037

•  If you annuitized your Contract:
                 
1 Year 3 Years 5 Years 10 Years
Maximum*   $1,472   $1,953   $3,204   $6,158
Minimum*   $986   $546   $939   $2,037

•  If you did not surrender, nor annuitize, but left the money in your Contract:
                 
1 Year 3 Years 5 Years 10 Years
Maximum*   $662   $1,953   $3,204   $6,158
Minimum*   $176   $546   $939   $2,037
 
* In calculating the examples above, we used the maximum and minimum total operating expenses of all the Portfolios as shown in the Fees And Expenses section of the Fund’s Prospectus. For more information on fees and expenses, see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS in this Prospectus, and see the Fund’s Prospectus. See the FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS section in the Prospectus for condensed financial information about the Subaccounts.
 
11


Table of Contents


YOUR INVESTMENT OPTIONS

You may choose among the different Variable Investment Options and the Fixed Option.

Your Variable Investment Options

Each Variable Investment Option invests in a separate Portfolio of the Fund. For your convenience, the following chart summarizes some basic data about each Portfolio. This chart is only a summary. For more complete information on each Portfolio, including a discussion of the Portfolio’s investment techniques and the risks associated with its investments, see the accompanying Fund Prospectus. No assurance can be given that a Portfolio will achieve its investment objective. YOU SHOULD READ THE FUND PROSPECTUS CAREFULLY BEFORE INVESTING.

             
PACIFIC SELECT
PORTFOLIO
  INVESTMENT GOAL   THE PORTFOLIO’S
MAIN INVESTMENTS
  PORTFOLIO
MANAGER
International Value
  Long-term capital appreciation primarily through investment in equity securities of corporations domiciled in countries with developed economies and markets other than the U.S.   Equity securities of relatively large non-U.S. equity companies believed to be undervalued.   AllianceBernstein L.P.
International Small-Cap
  Long-term growth of capital.   Equity securities of non- U.S. companies with small market capitalizations.   Batterymarch Financial Management, Inc.
Diversified Research
  Long-term growth of capital.   Equity securities of U.S. companies and foreign companies with significant markets in the U.S.   Capital Guardian Trust Company
Equity
  Capital appreciation (current income is of secondary importance).   Equity securities of U.S. growth- oriented companies located in the U.S., or whose principal markets are in the U.S.   Capital Guardian Trust Company
American Funds®
Growth-Income
  Long-term growth of capital and income.   A master fund that invests in equity securities of both U.S. and non-U.S. companies of any size and other securities which demonstrate the potential for appreciation and/or dividends.   Capital Research and Management Company
  (adviser to the Master Growth-Income Fund)
American Funds®
Growth
  Long-term growth of capital.   A master fund that invests in equity securities of both U.S. and non-U.S. companies of any size that appear to offer superior opportunities for growth of capital.   Capital Research and Management Company
  (adviser to the Master Growth Fund)
Technology
  Long-term growth of capital.   Equity securities in the technology sector that the manager believes have or will develop products, processes or services that will provide significant technological improvements, advances or developments, as well as those expected to benefit from their extensive reliance on technology in connection with their operations and services.   Columbia Management Advisors, LLC
Short Duration Bond
  Current income (capital appreciation is of secondary importance).   High quality fixed income securities with an average portfolio duration not likely to exceed 3 years.   Goldman Sachs Asset Management, L.P.
Concentrated Growth
  Long-term growth of capital.   Equity securities selected for their growth potential.   Goldman Sachs Asset Management, L.P.
Diversified Bond
  Maximize total return consistent with prudent investment management.   Fixed income securities of varying qualities and terms to maturity of both U.S. and non-U.S. companies and derivatives relating to such securities or related indices.   J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc.
Growth LT
  Long-term growth of capital.   Equity securities of companies of any size.   Janus Capital Management LLC
Focused 30
  Long-term growth of capital.   U.S. and foreign equity securities selected for their growth potential.   Janus Capital Management LLC
Health Sciences
  Long-term growth of capital.   Equity securities of companies in the health sciences sector. Such companies include, but are not limited to, those involved with medical equipment or supplies, pharmaceuticals, biotechnology, and health care providers and service companies.   Jennison Associates LLC
Mid-Cap Value
  Capital appreciation.   Equity securities of medium-sized U.S. companies believed to be undervalued.   Lazard Asset Management LLC
Large-Cap Growth
(formerly called Blue Chip)
  Long-term growth of capital (current income is of secondary importance).   Equity securities of large companies with the potential for long-term growth of capital.   Loomis, Sayles & Company, L.P.
Capital Opportunities
  Long-term growth of capital.   Equity securities with the potential for long-term growth of capital.   MFS Investment Management
 
12


Table of Contents


             
PACIFIC SELECT
PORTFOLIO
  INVESTMENT GOAL   THE PORTFOLIO’S
MAIN INVESTMENTS
  PORTFOLIO
MANAGER
International Large-Cap
  Long-term growth of capital.   Equity securities of companies with large market capitalizations located outside the U.S.   MFS Investment Management
Equity Index
  Investment results that correspond to the total return of common stocks publicly traded in the U.S.   Equity securities of companies that are included in or representative of the S&P 500 Index® (including derivatives).   Mercury Advisors
Small-Cap Index
  Investment results that correspond to the total return of an index of small capitalization companies.   Equity securities of small companies that are included in or representative of the Russell 2000 Index (including derivatives).   Mercury Advisors
Fasciano Small Equity
  Capital appreciation.   Equity securities of small companies believed to have sustainable earnings growth.   Neuberger Berman Management Inc.
Small-Cap Value
  Long-term growth of capital.   Equity securities of small companies believed to be undervalued.   NFJ Investment Group L.P.
Multi-Strategy
  High total return.   A mix of equity and fixed income securities.   OppenheimerFunds, Inc.
Main Street® Core
  Long-term growth of capital and income.   Equity securities of large U.S. companies.   OppenheimerFunds, Inc.
Emerging Markets
  Long-term growth of capital.   Equity securities of companies that are located in countries generally regarded as “emerging market” countries.   OppenheimerFunds, Inc.
Managed Bond
  Maximize total return consistent with prudent investment management.   Medium and high-quality fixed income securities with varying terms to maturity, and derivatives relating to such securities or related indices.   Pacific Investment Management Company LLC
Inflation Managed
  Maximize total return consistent with prudent investment management.   Fixed income securities of varying maturities with a focus on inflation- indexed bonds, and forward contracts and derivatives relating to such securities.   Pacific Investment Management Company LLC
Money Market
  Current income consistent with preservation of capital.   Highest quality money market instruments believed to have limited credit risk.   Pacific Life
High Yield Bond
  High level of current income.   Fixed income securities with lower and medium-quality credit ratings and intermediate to long terms to maturity.   Pacific Life
Large-Cap Value
  Long-term growth of capital (current income is of secondary importance).   Equity securities of large U.S. companies.   Salomon Brothers Asset Management Inc
Comstock
  Long-term growth of capital.   Equity securities with the potential for long-term growth of capital and income.   Van Kampen
Mid-Cap Growth
  Long-term growth of capital.   Equity securities of medium-sized companies believed to have above- average growth potential.   Van Kampen
Real Estate
  Current income and long-term capital appreciation.   Equity securities of companies principally engaged in the U.S. real estate industry, including real estate investment trusts (REITs) and real estate operating companies (REOCs).   Van Kampen
VN Small-Cap Value
  Long-term growth of capital.   Equity securities of small companies believed to be undervalued.   Vaughan Nelson Investment Management, L.P.
 
13


Table of Contents

The Investment Adviser

We are the investment adviser for the Fund.

Your Fixed Option

Subject to availability, the Fixed Option offers you a guaranteed minimum interest rate on amounts that you allocate to this Option. Amounts you allocate to this Option, and your earnings credited are held in our General Account. For more detailed information about this Option, see THE GENERAL ACCOUNT section in this Prospectus.

PURCHASING YOUR CONTRACT

How to Apply for Your Contract

To purchase a Contract, fill out an application and submit it along with your initial Investment to Pacific Life Insurance Company at P.O. Box 100060, Pasadena, California 91189-0060 or the address indicated in your Contract specification pages if different. In those instances when we receive electronic transmission of the information on the application from your representative’s broker-dealer firm and our administrative procedures with your broker-dealer so provide, we consider the application to be received on the Business Day we receive the transmission. If the address on your Contract specification pages is different and our administrative procedures with your broker-dealer so provide, in those instances when information regarding your Investment is electronically transmitted to us by the broker-dealer, we will consider the Investment to be received by us on the Business Day we receive the transmission of the information. If your application and Investment are complete when received, or once they have become complete, we will issue your Contract within 2 Business Days. If some information is missing from your application, we may delay issuing your Contract while we obtain the missing information. However, we will not hold your initial Investment for more than 5 Business Days without your permission. In any case, we will not hold your initial Investment after 20 Business Days.

You may also purchase a Contract by exchanging your existing contract. You must submit all contracts to be exchanged when you submit your application. Call your registered representative, or call us at 1-800-722-2333, if you are interested in this option.

We reserve the right to reject any application or Investment for any reason, subject to any applicable nondiscrimination laws and to our own standards and guidelines. On your application, you must provide us with a valid U.S. tax identification number for federal and state tax reporting purposes.

The maximum age of a Contract Owner, including Joint and Contingent Owners, for which a Contract will be issued is 80. The Contract Owner’s age is calculated as of his or her last birthday. If any Contract Owner or any sole Annuitant named in the application for a Contract dies before we issue a Contract, then the application for the Contract and/or any Contract issued shall be deemed null and void. A refund will be returned to the applicant/ Owner or the applicant/ Owner’s estate. Depending on the state where your application was signed, the amount of the refund may be more or less that the initial Investment received, or any other Investment we receive in connection with an exchange or transfer. In most states, the refund will be the Contract Value based upon the next determined Accumulated Unit Value (AUV) after we receive proof of death, in proper form, of the Contract Owner or Annuitant, plus a refund of any amount used to pay premium taxes and/or any other taxes, and minus the Contract Value attributable to any additional amount as described in the CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS—Waivers and Reduced Charges section in this Prospectus.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Making Your Investments (“Purchase Payments”)

Making Your Initial Investment

Your initial Investment must be at least $10,000 if you are buying a Non-Qualified Contract, and at least $2,000 if you are buying a Qualified Contract. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum initial Investment on Qualified Contracts but reserve the right to enforce the minimum initial Investment on Qualified Contracts in the future. For Non-Qualified Contracts, if the entire minimum initial Investment is not included when you submit your application, you must submit a portion of the required Contract minimum and establish a pre-authorized checking

 
14


Table of Contents


plan (PAC). A PAC allows you to pay the remainder of the required initial Investment in equal installments over the first year. Further requirements for PAC are discussed in the PAC form. We also call each Investment you make a Purchase Payment.

You must obtain our consent before making an initial or additional Investment that will bring your aggregate Investments over $1,000,000. As of July 23, 2004, if you allocate all or part of an additional Purchase Payment to the Fixed Option, the maximum aggregate Investment you may have in the Fixed Option is currently $250,000. This limitation is subject to change at any time. Ask your registered representative about current limitations.

Making Additional Investments

If your Contract is Non-Qualified, you may choose to invest additional amounts in your Contract at any time. If your Contract is Qualified, the method of contribution and contribution limits may be restricted by the Qualified Plan. Each additional Investment must be at least $250 for Non-Qualified Contracts and $50 for Qualified Contracts. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum additional Investment amounts but we reserve the right to enforce the minimum additional Investment amounts in the future. In certain states additional Investments are limited.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Forms of Investment

Your initial and additional Investments may be sent by personal or bank check or by wire transfer. Investments must be made in a form acceptable to us before we can process it. Acceptable forms of Investments are:

  •  personal checks or cashier’s checks drawn on a U.S. bank,
 
  •  money orders and traveler’s checks in single denominations of more than $10,000 if they originate in a U.S. bank,
 
  •  third party checks when there is a clear connection of the third party to the underlying transaction, and
 
  •  wire transfers that originate in U.S. banks.

We will not accept Investments in the following forms:

  •  cash,
 
  •  credit cards or checks drawn against a credit card account,
 
  •  money orders or traveler’s checks in single denominations of $10,000 or less,
 
  •  starter checks,
 
  •  cashier’s checks, money orders, traveler’s checks or personal checks drawn on non-U.S. banks, even if the payment may be effected through a U.S. bank,
 
  •  third party checks if there is not a clear connection of the third party to the underlying transaction, and
 
  •  wire transfers that originate from foreign bank accounts.

All unacceptable forms of Investments will be returned to the payor along with a letter of explanation. We reserve the right to reject or accept any form of payment. If you make Investments by check other than a cashier’s check, your payment of any withdrawal proceeds and any refund during the “Right to Cancel” period may be delayed until we receive confirmation in our Annuities administrative office that your check has cleared.

HOW YOUR INVESTMENTS ARE ALLOCATED

Choosing Your Investment Options

You may allocate your Investments among any of the Subaccounts and any available fixed option. Allocations of your initial Investment to the Investment Options you selected will be effective on your Contract Date. Each additional Investment will be allocated to the Investment Options according to your allocation instructions in your application, or most recent instructions, if any, subject to the terms described in the WITHDRAWALS— Right to

 
15


Table of Contents


Cancel (“Free Look”) section in this Prospectus. We reserve the right to require that your allocation to any particular Investment Option must be at least $500. We also reserve the right to transfer any remaining Account Value that is not at least $500 to your other Investment Options on a pro rata basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions.

If your Contract is issued in exchange for another annuity contract or a life insurance policy, our administrative procedures may vary depending on the state in which your Contract is delivered.

Portfolio Optimization

The Service. Portfolio Optimization is an asset allocation service that we offer at no additional charge for use within this variable annuity. Asset allocation refers to the manner that investments are distributed among asset classes to help attain an investment goal. For your variable annuity, Portfolio Optimization can help with decisions about how you should allocate your Contract Value among available Investment Options. The theory behind Portfolio Optimization is that diversification among asset classes can help reduce volatility over the long term.

As part of our Portfolio Optimization service, we have developed several asset allocation models (“Portfolio Optimization Models” or “Models”), each based on different profiles of an investor’s willingness to accept investment risk. If you decide to subscribe to the Portfolio Optimization service and select one of the Portfolio Optimization Models, your initial Purchase Payment (in the case of a new application) or Contract Value, as applicable, will be allocated to the Investment Options according to the Model you select. Subsequent Purchase Payments, if allowed under your Contract, will also be allocated accordingly, unless you instruct us otherwise. If you choose, you can rebalance your Contract Value quarterly, semi-annually, or annually, to maintain the current allocations of your Portfolio Optimization Model, since changes in the net asset values of the underlying Portfolios within each Model will alter your asset allocation over time. If you also allocate part of your Purchase Payment or Contract Value that is not currently included in your Model and you elect periodic rebalancing, such amounts will not be considered when rebalancing. If you subscribe to Portfolio Optimization and elect periodic rebalancing, only the Investment Options within your Model will be rebalanced.

If you subscribe to Portfolio Optimization, we will serve as your investment adviser for the service solely for purposes of development of the Portfolio Optimization Models and periodic updates of the Models.

On a periodic basis (typically annually) or when Pacific Life believes appropriate, the Portfolio Optimization Models are evaluated and the Models are updated, as discussed below. If you subscribe to Portfolio Optimization, we will automatically reallocate your Contract Value or subsequent Purchase Payments, as applicable, in accordance with the Model you select as it is updated from time to time based on discretionary authority that you grant to us, unless you instruct us otherwise. For more information on our role as investment adviser for the Portfolio Optimization service, please see our brochure from our Form ADV, the SEC investment adviser registration form, which will be delivered to Contract Owners at the time they apply for a Contract. Please contact us if you would like to receive a copy of this brochure. In developing and periodically updating the Portfolio Optimization Models, we currently rely on the recommendations of an independent third-party analytical firm. We may change the firm that we use from time to time, or, to the extent permissible under applicable law, use no independent firm at all.

The Portfolio Optimization Models. We offer five asset allocation models, each comprised of a carefully selected combination of Investment Options (reflecting the underlying Portfolios of Pacific Select Fund). Development of the Portfolio Optimization models is a two-step process. First, an optimization analysis is performed to determine the breakdown of asset classes. Optimization analysis requires forecasting returns, standard deviations and correlation coefficients of asset classes over the desired investing horizon and an analysis using a state-of-the art program and a statistical analytical technique known as “mean-variance optimization.” Next, after the asset class exposures are known, a determination is made of how available Investment Options (underlying Portfolios) can be used to implement the asset class level allocations. The Investment Options are selected by evaluating the asset classes represented by the underlying Portfolios and combining Investment Options to arrive at the desired asset class exposures. The Portfolio-specific analysis uses historical returns-based style analysis and asset performance and regression and attribution analyses. It may also include portfolio manager interviews. Based on this analysis, Investment Options are selected in a way intended to optimize potential returns for each Model, given a particular level of risk tolerance. This process could, in some cases, result in the inclusion of an Investment Option in a Model based on its specific asset class exposure or other specific optimization factors, even where another Investment Option may have better historical performance.

 
16


Table of Contents


Periodic Updates of the Portfolio Optimization Model and Notices of Updates. Each of the Portfolio Optimization Models are evaluated periodically (generally, annually) to assess whether the combination of Investment Options within each Model should be changed to better seek to optimize the potential return for the level of risk tolerance intended for the Model. As a result of the periodic analysis, each Model may change and Investment Options may be added to a Model (including Investment Options not currently available), or Investment Options may be deleted from a Model.

When your Portfolio Optimization Model is updated, we will automatically reallocate your Contract Value (and Subsequent Purchase Payments, if applicable) in accordance with any changes to the Model you have selected. This means the allocation of your Contract Value, and potentially the Investment Options in which you are invested, will automatically change and your Contract Value (and Subsequent Purchase Payments, if applicable) will be automatically reallocated among the Investment Options in your updated Model (independently of any automatic rebalancing you may have selected). We require that you grant us discretionary investment authority to periodically reallocate your Contract Value (and Subsequent Purchase Payments, if applicable) in accordance with the updated version of the Portfolio Optimization Model you have selected, if you wish to participate in Portfolio Optimization.

When we update the Portfolio Optimizations Models, we will send you written notice of the updated Models at least 30 days in advance of the date we intend the updated version of the Model to be effective. You should carefully review these notices. If you wish to accept the changes in your selected Model, you will not need to take any action, as your Contract Value (or Subsequent Purchase Payments, if applicable) will be reallocated in accordance with the updated Model automatically. If you do not wish to accept the changes to your selected Model, you can change to a different Model or withdraw from the Portfolio Optimization service. Some of the riders available under the Contract require you to participate in an asset allocation service. If you purchased any of these riders, such riders will terminate if you withdraw from Portfolio Optimization or allocate any portion of your subsequent Purchase Payments or Contract Value to an Investment Option that is not currently included in your Model (as more fully described in each rider).

Selecting a Portfolio Optimization Model. If you choose to subscribe to the Portfolio Optimization service, you need to determine which Portfolio Optimization Model is best for you. Pacific Life will not make this decision. You should consult with your registered representative on this decision. Your registered representative can help you determine which Model is best suited to your financial needs, investment time horizon, and willingness to accept investment risk. You should periodically review these factors with your registered representative to determine if you should change Models to keep up with changes in your personal circumstances. Your registered representative can assist you in completing the proper forms to subscribe to the Portfolio Optimization service or to change to a different Model. You may, in consultation with your registered representative, utilize analytical tools made available by Pacific Life, including an investor profile questionnaire, which asks questions intended to help you or your registered representative assess your financial needs, investment time horizon, and willingness to accept investment risk. Your responses can be analyzed using the service available on the Pacific Life website. While the information from the Pacific Life website may assist you, it is your decision, in consultation with your registered representative, to select a Model or to change to a different Model, and Pacific Life bears no responsibility for this decision. You may change to a different Model at any time with a proper written request or by telephone or electronic instructions provided a valid telephone/ electronic authorization is on file with us.

Periodic Reports. Participants in the Portfolio Optimization service will periodically be sent performance information regarding the Investment Options within a selected Model. This information may also be accessed online. Information concerning the current Models is described below.

Risks. Although the Models are designed to optimize returns given the various levels of risk, there is no assurance that a Model portfolio will not lose money or that investment results will not experience volatility. Investment performance of your Contract Value could be better or worse by participating in a Portfolio Optimization Model than if you had not participated. A Model may perform better or worse than any single Investment Option or asset class or other combinations of Investment Options or asset classes. Model performance is dependent upon the performance of the component Investment Options (and their underlying Portfolios). The timing of your investment and the frequency of automatic rebalancing may affect performance. Your Contract Value will fluctuate, and when redeemed, may be worth more or less than the original cost.

A Portfolio Optimization Model may not perform as intended. Although the Models are intended to optimize returns given various levels of risk tolerance, portfolio, market and asset class performance may differ in the future

 
17


Table of Contents


from the historical performance and assumptions upon which the Models are based, which could cause the Models to be ineffective or less effective in reducing volatility.

Periodic updating of the Portfolio Optimization Models can cause the underlying Portfolios to incur transactional expenses to raise cash for money flowing out of the Portfolios or to buy securities with money flowing into the Portfolios. These expenses can adversely affect performance of the pertinent Portfolios and the Models.

Pacific Life may be subject to competing interests that have the potential to influence its decision making with regard to Portfolio Optimization. For example, one Portfolio may provide a higher advisory fee to Pacific Life than another Portfolio, and provide Pacific Life with incentive to use the Portfolio with the higher fee as part of a Portfolio Optimization Model. In addition, Pacific Life may believe that certain Portfolios may benefit from additional assets or could be harmed by redemptions. As adviser to Pacific Select Fund, we monitor performance of the Portfolios, and may, from time to time, recommend to the Fund’s Board of Trustees a change in portfolio management firm or strategy or the closure or merger of a Portfolio, all of which could impact a Model. All Fund Portfolios are analyzed by the independent third party analytical firm. We do not dictate to the third party analytical firm the number of Portfolios in a Model, the percent that any Portfolio represents in a Model, or which Portfolios may be selected (other than to require exclusion of any Portfolio that is expected to be liquidated, merged into another Portfolio, or otherwise closed). We believe our reliance on the recommendations of an independent third-party analytical firm to develop and update the Models (as described above) reduces or eliminates the potential for us to be influenced by these competing interests, but there can be no assurance of this.

Pacific Life is under no contractual obligation to continue this service and has the right to terminate or change the Portfolio Optimization service at any time.

 
18


Table of Contents

The Models. Information concerning the Portfolio Optimization Models is described below. These Models are available effective May 5, 2006. For information regarding the Portfolio Optimization Models available until May 5, 2006, see APPENDIX D in this Prospectus. You should review this information carefully before selecting or changing a Model.
                                         

    Model A
Conservative
      Model B
Moderate-Conservative
  Model C
Moderate
  Model D
Moderate-Aggressive
  Model E
Aggressive


Investor Profile

You are looking for a relatively stable investment and do not tolerate short- term market swings.   Your focus is on keeping pace with inflation and you can tolerate a moderate level of risk.   You want the opportunity for long-term moderate growth.   You want an investment that is geared for growth and are willing to accept above average risk.   You are an aggressive investor and can tolerate short-term market swings.

 Shorter Investment Time Horizon  < --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- > Longer Investment Time Horizon


Investor Objective

Primarily preservation of capital   Moderate growth   Steady growth in asset values   Moderately high growth in asset values   High growth in asset values


Risk Characteristics

There may be some losses in the values of the investment as asset values fluctuate.   There may be some losses in the values of the investment from year to year.   There will probably be some losses in the values of the underlying investments from year to year.
       
                Fluctuations in value should be less than those of the overall stock markets.   Some of these might be large, but the overall fluctuations in asset values should be less than those of the U.S. stock market.

 Lower Risk  < ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- > Higher Risk


Asset Class Target Exposure

                                                                 
Model A Model B Model C Model D Model E

Cash         10 %         6 %         1 %         2 %         2 %    

Bonds         67           50           39           18           6      

Domestic Stocks         17           32           42           56           61      

International Stocks         6           12           18           24           31      
                                                                   

Portfolio Optimization Model Target Allocations as of May 5, 2006

Model A Model B Model C Model D Model E

  International Value         3 %         5 %         5 %         5 %         12 %    

  International Small-Cap                             2           3           3      

  Diversified Research         2           4           4           4           4      

  American Funds® Growth-Income                             3           5           8      

  American Funds® Growth                   2           3           6           8      

  Short Duration Bond         23           12           8           2                

  Diversified Bond         6           5           3           2                

  Growth LT                             3           3           3      

  Mid-Cap Value         4           6           8           12           10      

  Large-Cap Growth                   5           5           4           4      

  International Large-Cap         2           6           8           13           13      

  Equity Index                             2           4           4      

  Small-Cap Index                                       2           2      

  Fasciano Small Equity                                       2           3      

  Small-Cap Value                   2           2                          

  Main Street® Core         8           7           6           4           2      

  Emerging Markets                             3           4           4      

  Managed Bond         17           14           11           3                

  Inflation Managed         16           13           11           6                

  Money Market         8           4                                    

  High Yield Bond         5           4           2                          

  Large-Cap Value         4           5           5           6           6      

  Comstock         2           4           4           4           4      

  Mid-Cap Growth                   2           2           3           3      

  Real Estate                                       3           5      

  VN Small-Cap Value                                                 2      
 

 
   Less Volatile  < ---------------------------------------------------------------- > More Volatile

 
19


Table of Contents


Investing in Variable Investment Options

Each time you allocate your Investment to a Variable Investment Option, your Contract is credited with a number of “Subaccount Units” in that Subaccount. The number of Subaccount Units credited is equal to the amount you have allocated to that Subaccount, divided by the “Unit Value” of one Unit of that Subaccount.

  Example: You allocate $600 to the Inflation Managed Subaccount. At the end of the Business Day on which your allocation is effective, the value of one Unit in the Inflation Managed Subaccount is $15. As a result, 40 Subaccount Units are credited to your Contract for your $600.

Your Variable Account Value Will Change

After we credit your Contract with Subaccount Units, the value of those Units will usually fluctuate. This means that, from time to time, your Investment allocated to the Variable Investment Options may be worth more or less than the original Investments to which those amounts can be attributed. Fluctuations in Subaccount Unit Value will not change the number of Units credited to your Contract.

Subaccount Unit Values will vary in accordance with the investment performance of the corresponding Portfolio. For example, the value of Units in the Managed Bond Subaccount will change to reflect the performance of the Managed Bond Portfolio (including that Portfolio’s investment income, its capital gains and losses, and its expenses). Subaccount Unit Values are also adjusted to reflect the Administrative Fee and applicable Risk Charge imposed on the Separate Account.

We calculate the value of all Subaccount Units on each Business Day.

Calculating Subaccount Unit Values

We calculate the Unit Value of the Subaccount Units in each Variable Investment Option at the close of the New York Stock Exchange which usually closes at 4:00 p.m. Eastern Time on each Business Day. At the end of each Business Day, the Unit Value for a Subaccount is equal to:

Y × Z

             
where
  (Y)   =   the Unit Value for that Subaccount as of the end of the preceding Business Day; and
    (Z)   =   the Net Investment Factor for that Subaccount for the period (a “valuation period”) between that Business Day and the immediately preceding Business Day.

The “Net Investment Factor” for a Subaccount for any valuation period is equal to:

(A ÷ B) - C

             
where
  (A)   =   the “per share value of the assets” of that Subaccount as of the end of that valuation period, which is equal to: a+b+c
             
where
  (a)   =   the net asset value per share of the corresponding Portfolio shares held by that Subaccount as of the end of that valuation period;
    (b)   =   the per share amount of any dividend or capital gain distributions made by each Fund for that Portfolio during that valuation period; and
    (c)   =   any per share charge (a negative number) or credit (a positive number) for any income taxes and/or any other taxes or other amounts set aside during that valuation period as a reserve for any income and/or any other taxes which we determine to have resulted from the operations of the Subaccount or Contract, and/or any taxes attributable, directly or indirectly, to Investments;

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

             
    (B)   =   the net asset value per share of the corresponding Portfolio shares held by the Subaccount as of the end of the preceding valuation period; and
    (C)   =   a factor that assesses against the Subaccount net assets for each calendar day in the valuation period the basic Risk Charge plus any applicable increase in the Risk Charge and the Administrative Fee (see the CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS section in this Prospectus).
 
20


Table of Contents


When Your Investment is Effective

Your initial Investment is effective on the day we issue your Contract. Any additional Investment is effective on the day we receive it in proper form. See the ADDITIONAL INFORMATION— Inquiries and Submitting Forms and Requests section in this Prospectus.

The day your Investment is effective determines the Unit Value at which Subaccount Units are attributed to your Contract. In the case of transfers or withdrawals, the effective day determines the Unit Value at which affected Subaccount Units are debited and/or credited under your Contract. That Unit Value is the value of the Subaccount Units next calculated after your transaction is effective. Your Variable Account Value begins to reflect the investment performance results of your new allocations on the day after your transaction is effective.

Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions

Transfers

Once your Investments are allocated to the Investment Options you selected, you may transfer your Account Value less Loan Account Value from any Investment Option to any other Investment Option. Transfers are limited to twenty-five (25) for each calendar year. Additionally, only two (2) transfers in any calendar month may involve any of the following Investment Options: International Value, International Small-Cap, International Large-Cap, or Emerging Markets.

Transfers to or from a Variable Investment Option cannot be made before the seventh calendar day following the last transfer to or from the same Variable Investment Option. If the seventh calendar day is not a Business Day, then a transfer may not occur until the next Business Day. The day of the last transfer is not considered a calendar day for purposes of meeting this requirement. For example, if you make a transfer into the Diversified Research Variable Investment Option on Monday, you may not make any transfers to or from that Variable Investment Option before the following Monday. Transfers to or from the Money Market Variable Investment Option are excluded from this limitation.

For the purpose of applying the limitations, multiple transfers that occur on the same day are considered one (1) transfer. A transfer of Account Value from the Loan Account back into your Investment Options following a loan repayment is not considered a transfer under these limitations. Transfers that occur as a result of the dollar cost averaging program, the portfolio rebalancing program, the earnings sweep program or an approved asset allocation service are excluded from these limitations. Also, allocations of Purchase Payments are not subject to these limitations.

If you have used all twenty-five (25) transfers available to you in a calendar year, you may no longer make transfers between the Investment Options until the start of the next calendar year. However, you may make one (1) transfer of all or a portion of the Account Value remaining in the Variable Investment Options into the Money Market Investment Option prior to the start of the next calendar year.

There are no exceptions to the above transfer limitations in the absence of an error by us, a substitution of Investment Options, or reorganization of underlying Portfolios, or other extraordinary circumstances.

If we deny a transfer request, we will notify your registered representative via telephone. If you (or your registered representative) request a transfer via telephone that exceeds the above limitations, we will notify you (or your registered representative) immediately.

Certain restrictions apply to any available fixed option. See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT section in this Prospectus. Transfer requests are generally effective on the Business Day we receive them in proper form, unless you request a date in the future or a systematic transfer program.

We have the right, at our option (unless otherwise required by law), to require certain minimums in the future in connection with transfers. These may include a minimum transfer amount and a minimum Account Value, if any, for the Investment Option from which the transfer is made or to which the transfer is made. If your transfer request results in your having a remaining Account Value in an Investment Option that is less than $500 immediately after such transfer, we may transfer that Account Value to your other Investment Options on a pro rata basis, relative to your most recent allocation instructions.

We reserve the right (unless otherwise required by law) to limit the size of transfers, to restrict transfers, to require that you submit any transfer requests in writing, to suspend transfers, and to impose further limits on the number

 
21


Table of Contents


and frequency of transfers you can make. We also reserve the right to reject any transfer request. Any policy we may establish with regard to the exercise of any of these rights will be applied uniformly to all Contract Owners.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Market-timing Restrictions

The Contract is not designed to serve as a vehicle for frequent trading in response to short-term fluctuations in the market. Accordingly, organizations or individuals that use market-timing investment strategies and make frequent transfers should not purchase the Contract. Such frequent trading can disrupt management of the underlying Portfolios and raise expenses. The transfer limitations set forth above are intended to reduce frequent trading. In addition, we monitor certain large transaction activity in an attempt to detect trading that may be disruptive to the Portfolios. In the event transfer activity is found to be disruptive, certain future transactions by such Contract Owners, or by a registered representative or other party acting on behalf of one or more Contract Owners, will require preclearance. Frequent trading and large transactions that are disruptive to portfolio management can have an adverse effect on Portfolio performance and therefore your Contract’s performance. Such trading may also cause dilution in the value of the Investment Options held by long-term Contract Owners. While these issues can occur in connection with any of the underlying Portfolios, Portfolios holding securities that are subject to market pricing inefficiencies are more susceptible to abuse. For example, Portfolios holding international securities may be more susceptible to time-zone arbitrage which seeks to take advantage of pricing discrepancies occurring between the time of the closing of the market on which the security is traded and the time of pricing of the Portfolios.

Our policies and procedures which limit the number and frequency of transfers and which may impose preclearance requirements on certain large transactions are applied uniformly to all Contract Owners. However, there is a risk that these policies and procedures will not detect all potentially disruptive activity or will otherwise prove ineffective in whole or in part. Further, we and our affiliates make available to our variable annuity and variable life insurance Contract Owners underlying funds not affiliated with us. We are unable to monitor or restrict the trading activity with respect to shares of such funds not sold in connection with our Contracts. In the event the Board of Trustees/Directors of any underlying fund imposes a redemption fee or trading (transfer) limitations, we will pass them on to you.

We reserve the right to restrict, in our sole discretion and without prior notice, transfers initiated by a market timing organization or individual or other party authorized to give transfer instructions on behalf of multiple Contract Owners. Such restrictions could include:

  •  not accepting transfer instructions from a registered representative acting on behalf of more than one Contract Owner, and
 
  •  not accepting preauthorized transfer forms from market timers or other entities acting on behalf of more than one Contract Owner at a time.

We further reserve the right to impose, without prior notice, restrictions on transfers that we determine, in our sole discretion, will disadvantage or potentially hurt the rights or interests of other Contract Owners; or to comply with any applicable federal and state laws, rules and regulations.

Exchanges of Annuity Units

Exchanges of Annuity Units in any Subaccount(s) to any other Subaccount(s) after the Annuity Date are limited to four in any twelve month period. See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT section in the Prospectus and THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT section in the SAI.

Systematic Transfer Options

We offer three systematic transfer options: dollar cost averaging, portfolio rebalancing, and earnings sweep. There is no charge for these options, and transfers under these options are not counted towards your total transfers in a Calendar Year however they are subject to the same requirements and restrictions as non-systematic transfers. You can have only one dollar cost averaging or earnings sweep program in effect at one time. The systematic transfer options are not available after you annuitize.

 
22


Table of Contents


Dollar Cost Averaging

Dollar cost averaging is a method in which you buy securities in a series of regular purchases instead of in a single purchase. This allows you to average the securities’ prices over time, and may permit a “smoothing” of abrupt peaks and drops in price. Prior to your Annuity Date, you may use dollar cost averaging to transfer amounts, over time, from any Investment Option with an Account Value of at least $5,000 to one or more Variable Investment Options. Each transfer must be for at least $250. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum Account Value and/or transfer amounts but we reserve the right to enforce such minimum amounts in the future. Transfers from the Fixed Option under the dollar cost averaging program are subject to a minimum duration of 12 months. Detailed information appears in the SAI.

Portfolio Rebalancing

You may instruct us to maintain a specific balance of Variable Investment Options under your Contract (e.g., 30% in the Equity Index Subaccount, 40% in the Managed Bond Subaccount, and 30% in the Growth LT Subaccount) prior to your Annuity Date. Periodically, we will “rebalance” your values in the elected Subaccounts to the percentages you have specified. Rebalancing may result in transferring amounts from a Subaccount earning a relatively higher return to one earning a relatively lower return. You may choose to have rebalances made quarterly, semiannually or annually until your Annuity Date. Portfolio rebalancing is not available after you annuitize. No fixed option is available for rebalancing. Detailed information appears in the SAI.

Earnings Sweep

You may instruct us to make automatic periodic transfers of your earnings from the Money Market Subaccount or from the Fixed Option to one or more Variable Investment Options (other than the Money Market Subaccount). Detailed information appears in the SAI.

CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS

Withdrawal Charge

No sales charge is imposed on any Purchase Payment. Your Purchase Payments may, however, be subject to a withdrawal charge. This charge may apply to amounts you withdraw under your Contract prior to the Annuity Date, depending on the length of time each Purchase Payment has been invested and on the amount you withdraw. This amount is deducted proportionately among all Investment Options from which the withdrawal occurs. No withdrawal charge is imposed on:

  •  the free withdrawal amount (see WITHDRAWALS—Free Withdrawals),
 
  •  death benefit proceeds, except as provided under the Amount of the Death Benefit: Death of a Contract Owner section, for certain non-natural Owners,
 
  •  amounts converted after the first Contract Anniversary to a life contingent Annuity Option or an Annuity Option with a period certain of at least five years that is offered under the Contract, unless guaranteed variable annuity payments under Annuity Option 2 or 4 are subsequently redeemed (see the ANNUITIZATION, DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS— Choosing Your Annuity Option section in this Prospectus),
 
  •  withdrawals by Owners to meet the minimum distribution rules for Qualified Contracts as they apply to amounts held under the Contract,
 
  •  withdrawals after the first Contract Anniversary, if the Owner or Annuitant has been diagnosed with a medically determinable condition that results in a life expectancy of twelve (12) months or less and we are provided with medical evidence satisfactory to us, or
 
  •  subject to medical evidence satisfactory to us, after 90 days from the Contract Date, full or partial withdrawals while the Owner or Annuitant has been confined to an accredited nursing home for 60 days or longer.

The waiver of withdrawal charges applies only to withdrawals made while the Owner or Annuitant is in a nursing home or within 90 days after the Owner or Annuitant leaves the nursing home. In addition, the

 
23


Table of Contents


nursing home confinement period for which you seek the waiver must begin after the Contract Date. In order to use this waiver, you must submit with your withdrawal request the following documents:

  •  a physician’s note recommending the Owner or Annuitant’s admittance to a nursing home,
 
  •  an admittance form which shows the type of facility the Owner or Annuitant entered, and
 
  •  a bill from the nursing home which shows that the Owner or Annuitant met the 60 day nursing home confinement requirement.

  An accredited nursing home is defined as a home or facility that:

  •  is operating in accordance with the law of jurisdiction in which it is located,
 
  •  is primarily engaged in providing, in addition to room and board, skilled nursing care under the supervision of a duly licensed physician,
 
  •  provides continuous 24 hour a day nursing service by or under the supervision of a registered nurse, and maintains a daily record of the patient.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section of this Prospectus.

Transfers of all or part of your Account Value from one Investment Option to another are not considered a withdrawal of an amount from your Contract, so no withdrawal charge is imposed at the time of transfer. See the HOW YOUR INVESTMENTS ARE ALLOCATED— Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions and THE GENERAL ACCOUNT sections in this Prospectus.

How the Charge is Determined

The amount of the charge depends on how long each Purchase Payment was held under your Contract. Each Purchase Payment you make is considered to have a certain “age,” depending on the length of time since that Purchase Payment was effective. A Purchase Payment is “one year old” or has an “age of one” from the day it is effective until the beginning of the day preceding your next Contract Anniversary. Beginning on the day preceding that Contract Anniversary, your Purchase Payment will have an “age of two” and increases in age on the day preceding each Contract Anniversary. When you withdraw an amount subject to the withdrawal charge, the “age” of the Purchase Payment you withdraw determines the level of withdrawal charge as follows:

         
Withdrawal
Charge as a
percentage
of the
“Age” of Payment Purchase Payments
in Years withdrawn


1
    9 %
2
    8 %
3
    8 %
4 or more
    0 %

We calculate your withdrawal charge by assuming your withdrawal is applied to Purchase Payments first, in the order your Purchase Payments were received and before any deductions for other charges due or taxes are made. The withdrawal charge will be deducted proportionately among all investment Options from which the withdrawal occurs. Unless you specify otherwise, a partial withdrawal amount requested will be processed as a “gross” amount, which means that applicable charges and taxes will be deducted from the requested amount. If a partial withdrawal amount is requested to be a “net” amount, applicable charges and taxes will be added to the requested amount and the withdrawal charges and taxes will be calculated on the grossed up amount. See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT section in this Prospectus.

The withdrawal charge is designed to reimburse us for sales commissions and other expenses associated with the promotion and solicitation of offers for the Contracts, although our actual expenses may be greater than the amount of the withdrawal charge. See the ADDITIONAL INFORMATION— Distribution Arrangements section in this Prospectus for information regarding commissions and other amounts paid to broker-dealers in connection with distribution of the Contracts.

 
24


Table of Contents


Withdrawal Enhancements

We reserve the right, in our sole discretion, to calculate your withdrawal charge on more favorable terms to you than as otherwise described in the preceding paragraphs. These withdrawal enhancements may include an acceleration of the day on which the “age” of any Purchase Payments is considered to occur or a waiver of some or all of the withdrawal charge in the event the Guaranteed Interest Rate is less than a specified rate. Although we retain the discretion to add a withdrawal enhancement, once it is added, it is binding on us and effective for any specified period we have designated. In the event of any withdrawal enhancement, we will notify the Owner within thirty (30) days of the effective date of the withdrawal enhancement. See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Mortality and Expense Risk Charge

We assess a charge against the assets of each Subaccount to compensate for certain mortality and expense risks that we assume under the Contracts (the “Risk Charge”). The risk that an Annuitant will live longer (and therefore receive more annuity payments) than we predict through our actuarial calculations at the time the Contract is issued is “mortality risk.” We also bear mortality risk in connection with death benefits payable under the Contracts. The risk that the expense charges and fees under the Contracts and Separate Account are less than our actual administrative and operating expenses is called “expense risk.”

This Risk Charge is assessed daily at an annual rate equal to 1.25% of each Subaccount’s assets. This charge may not be increased for the duration of your Contract.

The Risk Charge will stop at the Annuity Date if you select a fixed annuity. The base Risk Charge will continue after the Annuity Date if you choose any variable annuity, even though we do not bear mortality risk if your Annuity Option is Period Certain Only.

We will realize a gain if the Risk Charge exceeds our actual cost of expenses and benefits, and will suffer a loss if such actual costs exceed the Risk Charge. Any gain will become part of our General Account. We may use it for any reason, including covering sales expenses on the Contracts.

Increase in Risk Charge if an Optional Death Benefit Rider is Purchased

We increase your Risk Charge by an annual rate equal to 0.20% of each Subaccount’s assets if you purchase the Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider (SDBR) or 0.35% if your Contract was issued before May 1, 2003 and you purchased the Premier Death Benefit Rider (PDBR). The total Risk Charge annual rate will be 1.45% if the SDBR is purchased or 1.60% if the PDBR was purchased. Any increase in your Risk Charge will not continue after the Annuity Date. See the ANNUITIZATION, DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS— Death Benefits section in this Prospectus.

Administrative Fee

We charge an Administrative Fee as compensation for costs we incur in operating the Separate Account, issuing and administering the Contracts, including processing applications and payments, and issuing reports to you and to regulatory authorities.

The Administrative Fee is assessed daily at an annual rate equal to 0.15% of the assets of each Subaccount. This rate is guaranteed not to increase for the life of your Contract. A relationship will not necessarily exist between the actual administrative expenses attributable to a particular Contract and the Administrative Fee paid in respect of that particular Contract. The Administrative Fee will continue after the Annuity Date if you choose any variable annuity.

Annual Fee

We will charge you an Annual Fee of $30 on each Contract Anniversary prior to the Annuity Date, and at the time you withdraw your entire Net Contract Value (on a pro rated basis for that Contract Year) if your Net Contract Value is less than $50,000 on that date. The fee is not imposed on amounts you annuitize or on payment of death benefit proceeds. The fee reimburses certain of our costs in administering the Contracts and the Separate Account. We do not intend to realize a profit from this fee or the Administrative Fee. This fee is guaranteed not to increase for the life of your Contract.

 
25


Table of Contents


Your Annual Fee will be charged proportionately against your Investment Options. Assessments against your Variable Investment Options are made by debiting some of the Subaccount Units previously credited to your Contract. That is, assessment of the Annual Fee does not change the Unit Value for those Subaccounts. Any portion of the Annual Fee we deduct from any of our fixed options (if available under the Contract) will not be greater than the annual interest credited in excess of the option’s minimum guaranteed interest rate.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Optional Rider Charges

If you purchase an optional Rider, we will deduct the annual charge for the Rider from your Investment Options on a proportionate basis on each Contract Anniversary that the Rider remains in effect following the Effective Date of the Rider, if the Rider is terminated, and for some Riders on the Annuity Date. The annual charge for the GIA 5 and GIA II Riders will be charged on the Annuity Date if the Rider is still in effect.

The Rider charge for a Contract Year will be deducted on the Contract Anniversary following that Contract Year. The charge is the annual charge percentage, indicated in the table below, multiplied by the Contract Value, except for the GIA Plus Rider which is the annual charge percentage multiplied by the greater of the Guaranteed Income Base or the Contract Value.

If you terminate a Rider on a Contract Anniversary, the full charge will be deducted from the Contract Value. If the Rider terminates on a day other than a Contract Anniversary, a prorated charge will be based on the Contract Value, except for the GIA Plus Rider as noted above, on the day the Rider terminates. The charge will be deducted on the earlier of the day your Contract terminates or the Contract Anniversary following the day the Rider terminates.

Any portion of the Rider’s charge we deduct from any fixed option will not be greater than the annual interest credited in excess of 3%. If you make a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal during a Contract Year, we will deduct the charge from the final payment made to you.

An optional Rider charge may change if you elect a Step-Up/ Reset under the provisions of a Rider, but will never be more than the charge being charged under the then current terms and conditions of the Rider and will not be more than the maximum charge percentage, indicated in the table below, for the applicable Rider. If you do not elect an optional Step-Up/ Reset, your annual charge percentage will remain the same as it was on the Effective Date of the Rider.

Annual Charge Percentage Table

                 
Maximum Charge
Percentage if
Current Charge Step-Up/Reset
Optional Rider Percentage is elected



Earnings Enhancement Guarantee (EEG)
    0.25 %     N/A  
Lifetime Income Access Plus1
    0.60 %     1.20 %
Income Access Plus
    0.40 %     1.20 %
Income Access2
    0.40 %     0.75 %
Guaranteed Protection Advantage 5 (GPA 5)3
    0.25 %     0.75 %
Guaranteed Protection Advantage (GPA)
    0.10 %     N/A  
Guaranteed Income Advantage Plus (GIA Plus)
    0.50 %     N/A  
Guaranteed Income Advantage 5 (GIA 5)
    0.40 %     0.75 %
Guaranteed Income Advantage II (GIA II)
    0.70 %     1.00 %
 
1 If you purchased the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider and the Effective Date of the Rider is before July 1, 2006, the current charge percentage is equal to 0.40%. Currently, the charge percentage will remain at 0.40% even if you elect to reset the Rider. However, for any future elections to reset, we reserve the right to increase the charge percentage to an amount that will not exceed the charge percentage in effect for new issues of this Rider.
 
2 If you purchased the Income Access Rider and the Effective Date of the Rider is before March 1, 2004, the current charge percentage is equal to 0.30%.
 
3 If you purchased the GPA 5 Rider and the Effective Date of the GPA 5 Rider is before March 1, 2004, the current charge percentage is equal to 0.10%.
 
26


Table of Contents


Premium Taxes

Depending on your state of residence (among other factors), a tax may be imposed on your Investments at the time your Investment is made, at the time of a partial or full withdrawal, at the time any death benefit proceeds are paid, at annuitization or at such other time as taxes may be imposed. Tax rates ranging from 0% to 3.5% are currently in effect, but may change in the future. Some local jurisdictions also impose a tax.

If we pay any taxes attributable to Investments (“premium taxes”), we will impose a similar charge against your Contract Value. Premium tax is subject to state requirements. We normally will charge you when you annuitize some or all of your Contract Value. We reserve the right to impose this charge for applicable premium taxes and/or other taxes when you make a full or partial withdrawal, at the time any death benefit proceeds are paid, or when those taxes are incurred. For these purposes, “premium taxes” include any state or local premium or retaliatory taxes and, where approval has been obtained, federal premium taxes and any federal, state or local income, excise, business or any other type of tax (or component thereof) measured by or based upon, directly or indirectly, the amount of Investments we have received. We will base this charge on the Contract Value, the amount of the transaction, the aggregate amount of Investments we receive under your Contract, or any other amount, that in our sole discretion we deem appropriate.

We may also charge the Separate Account or your Contract Value for taxes attributable to the Separate Account or the Contract, including income taxes attributable to the Separate Account or to our operations with respect to the Contract, or taxes attributable, directly or indirectly, to Investments. Currently, we do not impose any such charges.

Waivers and Reduced Charges

We may agree to waive or reduce charges under our Contracts, in situations where selling and/or maintenance costs associated with the Contracts are reduced, such as the sale of several Contracts to the same Contract Owner(s), sales of large Contracts, sales of Contracts in connection with a group or sponsored arrangement or mass transactions over multiple Contracts.

We will only waive or reduce such charges on any Contract where expenses associated with the sale of the Contract and/or costs associated with administering and maintaining the Contract are reduced. We reserve the right to terminate waiver and reduced charge programs at any time, including for issued Contracts.

Expenses of the Fund

Your Variable Account Value reflects advisory fees and other expenses incurred by the various Portfolios of the Fund, net of any applicable reductions and/or reimbursements. These fees and expenses may vary. The Fund is governed by its own Board of Trustees, and your Contract does not fix or specify the level of expenses of any Portfolio. The Fund’s fees and expenses are described in detail in the Fund’s Prospectus and in its SAI.

The SEC approved a rule change which will require the Boards of Trustees/ Directors of mutual funds to determine whether a redemption fee (not to exceed 2%) or other trading (transfer) restrictions should be imposed. A redemption fee is a fee that would be charged by and paid to the Fund (not to Pacific Life). In the event the Board of Trustees/ Directors of any underlying funds imposes such fees or limitations, we will pass them on to you.

ANNUITIZATION, DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS

Selecting Your Annuitant

When you submit the application for your Contract, you must choose a sole Annuitant or Joint Annuitants. If you are buying a Qualified Contract, you must be the sole Annuitant. If you are buying a Non-Qualified Contract you may choose yourself and/or another person as Annuitant. Whether you have a sole or Joint Annuitants, you may choose a Contingent Annuitant. The Contingent Annuitant will not have any Contract benefits, including death benefit proceeds, until becoming the sole surviving Annuitant. You will not be able to add or change a sole or Joint Annuitant after your Contract is issued. However, if you are buying a Qualified Contract, you may add a Joint Annuitant on the Annuity Date. You will be able to add or change a Contingent Annuitant until your Annuity Date or the death of your sole Annuitant or both Joint Annuitants, whichever occurs first. However, once your Contingent Annuitant has become the Annuitant under your Contract, no additional Contingent Annuitant

 
27


Table of Contents


may be named. No Annuitant (Primary, Joint or Contingent) may be named upon or after reaching his or her 81st birthday. We reserve the right to require proof of age or survival of the Annuitant(s).

Annuitization

You may choose both your Annuity Date and your Annuity Option. At the Annuity Date, you may elect to annuitize some or all of your Net Contract Value, less any applicable charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes (the “Conversion Amount”), as long as such Conversion Amount annuitized is at least $10,000, subject to any state exceptions. Currently, we are not enforcing this minimum but we reserve the right to enforce it in the future. We will send the annuity payments to the payee that you designate.

If you annuitize only a portion of this available Contract Value, you may have the remainder distributed, less any applicable charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes, any applicable withdrawal charge, or any optional Rider charges. This option of distribution may or may not be available, or may be available for only certain types of Contracts. Any such distribution will be made to you in a single sum if the remaining Conversion Amount is less than $10,000 on your Annuity Date. Currently, we are not enforcing this minimum but we reserve the right to enforce it in the future. Distributions under your Contract may have tax consequences. You should consult a qualified tax adviser for information on annuitization.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

If you annuitize only a portion of your Net Contract Value on your Annuity Date, you may, at that time, have the option to elect not to have the remainder of your Contract Value distributed, but instead to continue your Contract with that remaining Contract Value (a “continuing Contract”). If this option is available, you would then choose a second Annuity Date for your continuing Contract, and all references in this Prospectus to your “Annuity Date” would, in connection with your continuing Contract, be deemed to refer to that second Annuity Date. This option may not be available, or may be available only for certain types of Contracts. You should be aware that some or all of the payments received before the second Annuity Date may be fully taxable. We recommend that you contact a qualified tax adviser for more information if you are interested in this option.

Choosing Your Annuity Date

You should choose your Annuity Date when you submit your application or we will apply a default Annuity Date to your Contract. You may change your Annuity Date by notifying us, in proper form, at least ten Business Days prior to the earlier of your current Annuity Date or your new Annuity Date. Your Annuity Date cannot be earlier than your first Contract Anniversary and must occur on or before a certain date. Adverse federal tax consequences may result if you choose an Annuity Date that is prior to an Annuitant’s attained age 59 1/2. See the FEDERAL TAX STATUS section in this Prospectus.

If you have a sole Annuitant, your Annuity Date cannot be later than his or her 95th birthday. If you have Joint Annuitants, your Annuity Date cannot be later than your younger Joint Annuitant’s 95th birthday. Different requirements may apply in some states.

If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, you may also be subject to additional restrictions. In order to meet Internal Revenue Service (IRS) minimum distribution rules, your Required Minimum Distributions (RMDs) may begin earlier than your Annuity Date. For instance, under Section 401 of the Code (for Qualified Plans) and Section 408 of the Code (for IRAs), the entire interest under the Contract must be distributed to the Owner/ Annuitant not later than the Owner/ Annuitant’s Required Beginning Date (“RBD”), or distributions over the life of the Owner/ Annuitant (or the Owner/ Annuitant and his Beneficiary) must begin no later than the RBD. For more information see the FEDERAL TAX STATUS — Required Minimum Distributions section in this Prospectus.

Default Annuity Date and Options

If you have a Non-Qualified Contract and you do not choose an Annuity Date when you submit your application, your Annuity Date will be your Annuitant’s 95th birthday or your younger Joint Annuitant’s 95th birthday, whichever applies. However some states’ laws may require a different Annuity Date. Certain Qualified Plans may require distribution to occur at an earlier age.

 
28


Table of Contents


If you have not specified an Annuity Option or do not instruct us otherwise, at your Annuity Date your Net Contract Value, less any charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes, will be annuitized (if this net amount is at least $10,000) as follows:

  •  the net amount from your fixed option will be converted into a fixed-dollar annuity, and
 
  •  the net amount from your Variable Account Value will be converted into a variable-dollar annuity directed to the Subaccounts proportionate to your Account Value in each.

If the net amount is less than $10,000, the entire amount will be distributed. If you have a Non-Qualified Contract, or if you have a Qualified Contract and are not married, your default Annuity Option will be Life with a ten year Period Certain. If you have a Qualified Contract and you are married, your default Annuity Option will be Joint and Survivor Life with survivor payments of 50%; your spouse will automatically be named your Joint Annuitant.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Choosing Your Annuity Option

You should carefully review the Annuity Options with a qualified tax adviser, and, for Qualified Contracts, reference should be made to the terms of the particular plan and the requirements of the Code for pertinent limitations regarding annuity payments, Required Minimum Distributions (“RMDs”), and other matters.

You may make three basic decisions about your annuity payments. First, you may choose whether you want those payments to be a fixed-dollar amount and/or a variable-dollar amount, subject to state availability. Second, you may choose the form of annuity payments (see Annuity Options below). Third, you may decide how often you want annuity payments to be made (the “frequency” of the payments). You may not change these selections after the Annuity Date.

Fixed and Variable Annuities

You may choose a fixed annuity with fixed-dollar amounts based on a fixed rate and the 1983a Annuity Mortality Table with the ages set back ten (10) years, a variable annuity with variable-dollar payments that vary with the Investment results of the Subaccounts you select, or you may choose both, converting one portion of the net amount you annuitize into a fixed annuity and another portion into a variable annuity.

If you select a fixed annuity, each periodic annuity payment received will be equal to the initial annuity payment, unless you select a joint and survivor life annuity with reduced survivor payments and the Primary Annuitant dies. Any net amount you convert to a fixed annuity will be held in our General Account (but not under any fixed option).

If you select a variable annuity, you may choose as many Variable Investment Options as you wish. The amount of the periodic annuity payments will vary with the investment results of the Variable Investment Options selected. After the Annuity Date, Annuity Units may be exchanged among available Variable Investment Options up to four times in any twelve-month period. How your Contract converts into a variable annuity is explained in more detail in THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT section in the SAI. If you choose the Period Certain Only Annuity Option, the variable annuity payment option is not available to you.

Annuity Options

Four Annuity Options are currently available under the Contract, although additional options may become available in the future. For other Annuity Options see the OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS section in this Prospectus.

  1.  Life Only. Periodic payments are made to the designated payee during the Annuitant’s lifetime. Payments stop when the Annuitant dies.
 
  2.  Life with Period Certain. Periodic payments are made to the designated payee during the Annuitant’s lifetime, with payments guaranteed for a specified period. You may choose to have payments guaranteed for anywhere from 5 through 30 years (in full years only).
 
  3.  Joint and Survivor Life. Periodic payments are made to the designated payee during the lifetime of the Primary Annuitant. After the death of the Primary Annuitant, periodic payments will continue to be made during the lifetime of the secondary Annuitant named in the election. You may choose to have the
 
29


Table of Contents


  payments to the surviving secondary Annuitant equal 50%, 66 2/3% or 100% of the original amount payable made during the lifetime of the Primary Annuitant (you must make this election when you choose your Annuity Option). If you elect a reduced payment based on the life of the secondary Annuitant, fixed annuity payments will be equal to 50% or 66 2/3% of the original fixed payment payable during the lifetime of the Primary Annuitant; variable annuity payments will be determined using 50% or 66 2/3%, as applicable, of the number of Annuity Units for each Subaccount credited to the Contract as of the date of death of the Primary Annuitant. Payments stop when both Annuitants have died.
 
  4.  Period Certain Only. Periodic payments are made to the designated payee over a specified period. You may choose to have payments continue for anywhere from 5 through 30 years (in full years only).

Additionally, if variable payments are elected under Annuity Option 2, you may redeem all remaining guaranteed variable payments after the Annuity Date. The amount available upon full redemption would be the present value of any remaining guaranteed variable payments at the assumed investment return, any applicable withdrawal charge will be deducted from the present value as if you made a full withdrawal, or if applicable, a partial withdrawal. For purposes of calculating the withdrawal charge and Free Withdrawal amount, it will be assumed that the Contract was never converted to provide annuity payments and any prior variable annuity payments in that Contract Year will be treated as if they were partial withdrawals from the Contract (see the CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS— Withdrawal Charge section in this Prospectus). For example, assume that a Contract was issued with a single investment of $10,000 and in Contract Year 2 the Owner elects to receive variable annuity payments under Annuity Option 2. In Contract Year 3, the Owner elects to make a full redemption of $5,000. The withdrawal charge as a percentage of the Purchase Payments with an age of 3 years is 8%. Assuming the present value of remaining guaranteed variable payments is $5,000, and the Free Withdrawal amount immediately prior to the redemption is $200, the withdrawal charge for the redemption will be $384 (($5,000 - $200) × 8%). No withdrawal charge will be imposed on a redemption if:

  •  the Annuity Option is elected as the form of payments of death benefit proceeds, or
 
  •  the Annuitant dies before the period certain has ended and the Beneficiary requests a redemption of the variable annuity payments.

Full redemptions of remaining guaranteed variable payments are explained in more detail in the SAI under THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT.

If the Annuitant dies before the guaranteed payments under Annuity Options 2 and 4 are completed, we will pay the remainder of the guaranteed payments to the first among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to receive the remainder of the guaranteed payments:

  •  the Owner;
 
  •  the Joint Owner;
 
  •  the Contingent Owner;
 
  •  the Beneficiary; or
 
  •  the Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to receive the remainder of the guaranteed payments), we will pay the remainder of the guaranteed payments to the Owner’s estate.

If the Owner dies on or after the Annuity Date, but payments have not yet been completed, then distributions of the remaining amounts payable under the Contract must be made at least as rapidly as the method of distribution that was being used at the date of the Owner’s death. All of the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract will be assumed by the first among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to assume the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract:

  •  the Joint Owner;
 
  •  the Contingent Owner;
 
  •  the Beneficiary; or
 
  •  the Contingent Beneficiary.
 
30


Table of Contents


If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to assume the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract), all of the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract will be assumed by the Owner’s estate.

For Qualified Contracts, please refer to the Choosing Your Annuity Date section in this Prospectus. If your Contract was issued in connection with a Qualified Plan subject to Title I of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (“ERISA”), your spouse’s consent may be required when you seek any distribution under your Contract, unless your Annuity Option is Joint and Survivor Life with survivor payments of at least 50%, and your spouse is your Joint Annuitant.

Your Annuity Payments

Frequency of Payments

You may choose to have annuity payments made monthly, quarterly, semiannually, or annually. The amount of a variable payment will be determined in each period on the date corresponding to your Annuity Date, and payment will be made on the next succeeding day.

Your initial annuity payment must be at least $250. See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus. Depending on the net amount you annuitize, this requirement may limit your options regarding the period and/or frequency of annuity payments.

Amount of the First Payment

Your Contract contains tables that we use to determine the amount of the first annuity payment under your Contract, taking into consideration the annuitized portion of your Net Contract Value at the Annuity Date. This amount will vary, depending on the annuity period and payment frequency you select. This amount will be larger in the case of shorter Period Certain annuities and smaller for longer Period Certain annuities. Similarly, this amount will be greater for a Life Only annuity than for a Joint and Survivor Life annuity, because we will expect to make payments for a shorter period of time on a Life Only annuity. If you do not choose the Period Certain Only annuity, this amount will also vary depending on the age of the Annuitant(s) on the Annuity Date and, for some Contracts in some states, the sex of the Annuitant(s).

For fixed annuity payments, the guaranteed income factors in our tables are based on an annual interest rate of 3% and the 1983a Annuity Mortality Table with the ages set back 10 years. If you elect a fixed annuity, fixed annuity payments will be based on the periodic income factors in effect for your Contract on the Annuity Date which are at least the guaranteed income factors under the Contract.

For variable annuity payments, the tables are based on an assumed annual investment return of 5% and the 1983a Annuity Mortality Table with the ages set back 10 years. If you elect a variable annuity, your initial variable annuity payment will be based on the applicable variable annuity income factors in effect for your Contract on the Annuity Date which are at least the variable annuity income factors under the Contract. You may choose any other annuity option we may offer on the option’s effective date. A higher assumed investment return would mean a larger first variable annuity payment, but subsequent payments would increase only when actual net investment performance exceeds the higher assumed rate and would fall when actual net investment performance is less than the higher assumed rate. A lower assumed rate would mean a smaller first payment and a more favorable threshold for increases and decreases. If the actual net investment performance is a constant 5% annually, annuity payments will be level. The assumed investment return is explained in more detail in the SAI under THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Death Benefits

Death benefit proceeds may be payable before the Annuity Date on proof of death of the sole surviving Annuitant or of any Contract Owner while the Contract is in force. If there are Joint Owners, the Contract will be owned as Joint Tenants with Right of Survivorship and not as Tenants in Common. The amount of the death benefit proceeds will be paid according to the Death Benefit Proceeds section below.

The “Notice Date” is the day on which we receive, in proper form, proof of death and instructions regarding payment of death benefit proceeds. If a Contract has multiple recipients, death benefit proceeds will be calculated when we first receive proof of death and instructions, in proper form, from any recipient. The death benefit

 
31


Table of Contents


proceeds still remaining to be paid to other recipients will fluctuate with the performance of the underlying Investment Options.

Death Benefit Proceeds

Death benefit proceeds will be payable upon receipt, in proper form, of proof of death and instructions regarding payment of death benefit proceeds. Such proceeds will equal the Death Benefit Amount reduced by any charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes and any Contract Debt. The death benefit proceeds may be payable in a single sum, as an Annuity Option available under the Contract, towards the purchase of any other Annuity Option we then offer, or in any other manner permitted by the IRS and approved by us. In addition, there may be legal requirements that limit the recipient’s Annuity Options and the timing of any payments. A recipient should consult a qualified tax adviser before making a death benefit election.

Additional provisions apply if your Contract names a Joint or Contingent Owner or Annuitant, or if the Beneficiary, Joint Owner, or Contingent Owner is your spouse. Further information about these provisions is contained in the SAI.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Nonqualified Death of Owner Distribution Rules

The Contract is intended to comply with all applicable provisions of Code Section 72(s) and any successor provision, as deemed necessary by us to qualify the Contract as an annuity contract for federal income tax purposes. If an Owner of a Non-Qualified Contract dies before the Annuity Date, distribution of the death benefit proceeds must begin within 1 year after the Owner’s death or complete distribution within 5 years after the Owner’s death. In order to satisfy this requirement, the designated recipient must receive a final lump sum payment by the fifth anniversary of the death of the Contract Owner, or elect to receive an annuity for life or over a period that does not exceed the life expectancy of the designated recipient with annuity payments that start within 1 year after the Owner’s death or, if permitted by the IRS, elect to receive a systematic distribution over a period not exceeding the beneficiary’s life expectancy using a method that would be acceptable for purposes of calculating the minimum distribution required under section 401(a)(9) of the Code. If an election to receive an annuity is not made within 60 days of our receipt of proof, in proper form, of the Owner’s death or, if earlier, 60 days (or shorter period as we permit) prior to the first anniversary of the Owner’s death, the lump sum option will be deemed elected, unless otherwise required by law. If the lump sum option is deemed elected, we will consider that deemed election as receipt of instructions regarding payment of the death benefit proceeds. If a Non-Qualified Contract has Joint Owners, this requirement applies to the first Contract Owner to die.

The Owner may designate that the Beneficiary will receive death benefit proceeds through annuity payments for life or life with Period Certain. The Owner must designate the payment method in writing in a form acceptable to us. The Owner may revoke the designation only in writing and only in a form acceptable to us. Once the Owner dies, the Beneficiary cannot revoke or modify the Owner’s designation.

If the Owner dies, regardless if they were also the Annuitant or not, the designated recipient will be the first among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds, in the following order:

  •  Joint Owner,
 
  •  Contingent Owner,
 
  •  Beneficiary, or
 
  •  Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds), the designated recipient will be the Owner’s Estate.

If the Owner is a Non-Natural Owner, the rules set forth in these Nonqualified Death of Owner Distribution Rules apply in the event of the death or change of the Primary Annuitant.

 
32


Table of Contents


Qualified Contract Death of Annuitant Distribution Rules

Under Internal Revenue Service regulations and our administrative procedures, if the Contract is owned under a Qualified Plan as defined in Sections 401, 403, 457(b) or Sections 408, or 408A of the Code and the Annuitant dies before the Required Beginning Date, the payment of any death benefit proceeds must be made to the designated recipient in accordance with one of two rules. One rule generally requires the death benefit proceeds to commence distribution by December 31 of the calendar year following the calendar year of the Annuitant’s death and continue over the life of his or her Beneficiary (the “life expectancy method”). The second rule requires distribution of the entire death benefit proceeds no later than December 31 of the calendar year in which the fifth anniversary of the Annuitant’s death falls (the “five-year rule”).

However, the life expectancy method and the five-year rule are modified if the Beneficiary is a surviving spouse. If the surviving spouse elects to continue the Contract and not do an eligible rollover to an IRA or another existing eligible plan in his or her name, then he or she will be subject to the five-year rule. However, the surviving spouse may waive the five-year requirement and elect to take distributions over his or her life expectancy, and if the surviving spouse elects to defer the commencement of required distributions beyond the first anniversary of the Annuitant’s death, the surviving spouse will be deemed to continue the Contract. In this instance, the surviving spouse may defer required distributions until the later of:

  •  December 31 of the year following the year the Annuitant died, or
 
  •  December 31 of the year in which the deceased Annuitant would have turned 70 1/2.

Further, under our administrative procedures, if the required distributions election is not received by us in good order by December 31 of the year following the Annuitant’s death or by the December of the year in which the Annuitant would have attained age 70 1/2, the lump sum option will be deemed by us to have been elected, unless otherwise required by law. If the lump sum option is deemed elected, we will treat that deemed election as receipt of instructions regarding payment of death benefit proceeds.

If the Annuitant dies after the commencement of RMDs (except in the case of a Roth IRA when RMDs do not apply) but before the Annuitant’s entire interest in the Contract (other than a Roth IRA) has been distributed, the remaining interest in the Contract must be distributed to the designated recipient at least as rapidly as under the distribution method in effect at the time of the Annuitant’s death.

The Amount of the Death Benefit: Death of Annuitant

If the sole surviving Annuitant, or first Owner who is also an Annuitant dies prior to the Annuity Date, the death benefit proceeds will be the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date, described in the Death Benefit Amount subsection below.

If the Annuitant who is not an Owner dies, the designated sole Annuitant will then be the first living person in the following order and no death benefit proceeds will be payable:

  •  a surviving Joint Annuitant, or
 
  •  a surviving Contingent Annuitant.

If there is no surviving Joint or Contingent Annuitant, the death benefit proceeds will be payable to the first among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds, in the following order:

  •  Owner,
 
  •  Joint Owner,
 
  •  Contingent Owner,
 
  •  Beneficiary, or
 
  •  Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds), the proceeds will be payable to the Owner’s Estate.

 
33


Table of Contents


If the Owner is not an Annuitant and the Owner and Annuitant die simultaneously, the death benefit proceeds will be calculated under the Death of Annuitant provisions and proceeds will be paid to the first among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds, in the following order:

  •  Joint Owner,
 
  •  Contingent Owner,
 
  •  Beneficiary, or
 
  •  Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds), the proceeds will be payable to the Owner’s Estate.

The Amount of the Death Benefit: Death of a Contract Owner

If a Contract Owner who is not an Annuitant dies before the Annuity Date, the death benefit proceeds will be equal to your Contract Value as of the Notice Date and will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds section. The death benefit proceeds will be paid to the first among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds, in the following order:

  •  Joint Owner,
 
  •  the Contingent Owner,
 
  •  the Beneficiary, or
 
  •  the Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds), the proceeds will be payable to the Owner’s estate.

If a Contract Owner who is an Annuitant dies before the Annuity Date, the amount of the death benefit will be determined in accordance with the Death Benefit Amount subsection below, and will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds section. The death benefit proceeds will be paid to the first among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds, in the following order:

  •  Joint Owner,
 
  •  Contingent Owner,
 
  •  Beneficiary, or
 
  •  Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds), the designated recipient will be the Owner’s Estate.

If you are a Non-Natural Owner of a Contract other than a Contract issued under a Qualified Plan as defined in Section 401 or 403 of the Code, the Primary Annuitant will be treated as the Owner of the Contract for purposes of the Nonqualified Death of Owner Distribution Rules. If there is a change in the Primary Annuitant prior to the Annuity Date, such change will be treated as the death of the Owner. The Death Benefit Amount will be: (a) the Contract Value, if the Non-Natural Owner elects to maintain the Contract and reinvest the Contract Value into the contract in the same amount as immediately prior to the distribution; or (b) the Contract Value, less any annual fee, withdrawal charge and charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes, if the Non-Natural Owner elects a cash distribution.

Death Benefit Amount

The Death Benefit Amount as of any Business Day before the Annuity Date is equal to the greater of:

  •  your Contract Value as of that day, or
 
34


Table of Contents


  •  your aggregate Purchase Payments reduced by an amount for each withdrawal, which is calculated by multiplying the aggregate Purchase Payments received before each withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal, including any withdrawal charge, to the Contract Value immediately prior to each withdrawal.

Optional Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider (SDBR)

Purchasing the SDBR

You may purchase the SDBR at the time your application is completed. You may not purchase the SDBR after the Contract Date. The SDBR may only be purchased if the age of each Annuitant is 75 or younger on the Contract Date.

How the SDBR Works

If you purchase the SDBR at the time your application is completed, upon the death of the sole surviving Annuitant or the first Owner who is also an Annuitant, prior to the Annuity Date, the death benefit proceeds will be equal to the greater of (a) or (b) below:

  (a)  the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date.

  The Death Benefit Amount as of any day (prior to the Annuity Date) is equal to the greater of:

  •  your Contract Value as of that day, or
 
  •  your aggregate Purchase Payments reduced by an amount for each withdrawal, which is calculated by multiplying the aggregate Purchase Payments received prior to each withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal, including any withdrawal charge, to the Contract Value immediately prior to each withdrawal.

  (b)  the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date.

  The actual Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount is calculated only when death benefit proceeds become payable as a result of the death of the sole surviving Annuitant, or the first death of an Owner who is also an Annuitant, prior to the Annuity Date and is determined as follows:
 
  First we calculate what the Death Benefit Amount would have been as of your first Contract Anniversary and each subsequent Contract Anniversary that occurs while the Annuitant is living and before the Annuitant reaches his or her 81st birthday (each of these Contract Anniversaries is a “Milestone Date”).
 
  We then adjust the Death Benefit Amount for each Milestone Date by:

  •  adding the aggregate amount of any Purchase Payments received by us since the Milestone Date, and
 
  •  subtracting an amount for each withdrawal that has occurred since that Milestone Date, which is calculated by multiplying the Death Benefit Amount before the withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of each withdrawal that has occurred since that Milestone Date including any withdrawal charge, to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal.

The highest of these adjusted Death Benefit Amounts for each Milestone Date, as of the Notice Date, is your Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount if you purchase the SDBR. Calculation of any actual Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount is only made once death benefit proceeds become payable under your Contract.

Termination

The SDBR will remain in effect until the earlier of:

  •  the date a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal is made under the Contract,
 
  •  the date death benefit proceeds become payable under the Contract,
 
  •  the date the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract, or
 
  •  the Annuity Date.
 
35


Table of Contents


The SDBR may not otherwise be cancelled.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Optional Premier Death Benefit Rider (PDBR)

If you purchased the PDBR at the time your application was completed, upon the death of the sole surviving Annuitant or the first Owner who is also an Annuitant, prior to the Annuity Date, the death benefit proceeds will be equal to the greater of (a) or (b) below:

  (a)  the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date.

  The Death Benefit Amount as of any day (prior to the Annuity Date) is equal to the greater of:

  •  your Contract Value as of that day, or
 
  •  your aggregate Purchase Payments less an adjusted amount for each withdrawal increased at an effective annual rate of 6% to that day, subject to a maximum of two times the difference between the aggregate Purchase Payments and withdrawals, including any withdrawal charge.

  The 6% annual rate of growth will take into account the timing of when each Purchase Payment and withdrawal occurred by applying a daily factor of 1.00015965 to each day’s balance. (See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus) The 6% effective annual rate of growth will stop accruing as of the earlier of:

  •  the Contract anniversary following the date the Annuitant reaches his or her 80th birthday,
 
  •  the date of death of the sole Annuitant, or
 
  •  the Annuity Date.

  To determine the adjusted amount for each withdrawal we:

  •  divide the amount of each withdrawal, including withdrawal charges, if any, by your Contract Value immediately before that withdrawal, and
 
  •  then multiply the result by your Death Benefit Amount, immediately before that withdrawal.

  (b)  the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date.

  The actual Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount is calculated only when death benefit proceeds become payable as a result of the death of the sole surviving Annuitant, or the first death of an Owner who is also an Annuitant, prior to the Annuity Date, and is determined as follows:
 
  First, we calculate what the Death Benefit Amount would have been as of the quarterly anniversary following the Contract Date and as of each subsequent quarterly anniversary that occurs while the Annuitant is living and up to and including the Contract Anniversary following the Annuitant’s 65th birthday. Quarterly anniversaries are measured from the Contract Date. After the Contract Anniversary following the Annuitant’s 65th birthday, we calculate what the Death Benefit Amount would have been as of each Contract Anniversary that occurs while the Annuitant is living and before the Annuitant reaches his or her 81st birthday. Each quarterly anniversary and each Contract Anniversary in which a Death Benefit Amount is calculated is referred to as a “Milestone Date”.
 
  We then adjust the Death Benefit Amount for each Milestone Date by:

  •  adding the aggregate amount of any Purchase Payments received by us since that Milestone Date; and
 
  •  subtracting an amount for each withdrawal that has occurred since that Milestone Date, which is calculated by multiplying the Death Benefit Amount before the withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of each withdrawal that has occurred since that Milestone Date including any withdrawal charge, to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal.

The highest of these adjusted Death Benefit Amounts as of the notice date is your Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit if the PDBR is purchased. Calculation of any actual Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit is only made once death benefit proceeds become payable under your Contract.

 
36


Table of Contents


Termination

The PDBR will remain in effect until the earlier of:

  •  the date a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal is made under the Contract,
 
  •  the date death benefit proceeds become payable under the Contract,
 
  •  the date the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract, or
 
  •  the Annuity Date.

The PDBR may not otherwise be cancelled.

Optional Earnings Enhancement Guarantee (EEG) Rider

Purchasing the EEG Rider

You may purchase the EEG Rider (subject to availability) on the Contract Date or on the first Contract Anniversary. If you buy the EEG Rider within 60 days after the Contract Date or within 30 days after the first Contract Anniversary, we will make the Effective Date of the EEG Rider coincide with that Contract Date or Contract Anniversary. The EEG Rider is also called the Guaranteed Earnings Enhancement (GEE) Rider and the EEG Amount is called the GEE Amount in your Contract’s Rider.

You may purchase the EEG Rider only if the age of each Annuitant is 75 years or younger on the date of purchase. The date of purchase is the Effective Date of the Rider as shown in your Contract.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

How the EEG Rider Works

If you purchase the EEG Rider, (subject to state availability), an Earnings Enhancement Guarantee amount (EEG Amount) is added to the death benefit proceeds when such proceeds become payable as a result of the sole surviving Annuitant’s death or first death of Owner who is also an Annuitant.

The EEG Amount is calculated as follows:

If the age of the oldest Annuitant was age 69 or younger on the Effective Date of the Rider, the EEG Amount is equal to the lesser of:

  •  40% of Earnings, or
 
  •  40% of Remaining Purchase Payments, excluding any Purchase Payments made in the 12 months prior to the date of death, adjusted for withdrawals.

If the age of the oldest Annuitant was age 70 to 75 on the Effective Date of the Rider, the EEG Amount is equal to the lesser of:

  •  25% of Earnings, or
 
  •  25% of Remaining Purchase Payments, excluding any Purchase Payments made in the 12 months prior to the date of death, adjusted for withdrawals.

For purposes of calculating the EEG Amount, Earnings are equal to the Contract Value as of the date of death minus Remaining Purchase Payments. Remaining Purchase Payments is defined as (a) or (b) below:

  (a)  If the Rider is effective on the Contract Date, Remaining Purchase Payments are equal to:

  •  the Initial Purchase Payment, plus
 
  •  any additional Purchase Payments added, minus
 
  •  the amount that each withdrawal exceeds the amount of Earnings in the Contract immediately prior to such withdrawal. Withdrawals are assumed to be taken from Earnings first, then from Purchase Payments in the order they were received.
 
37


Table of Contents


  (b)  If the Rider is effective after the Contract Date, Remaining Purchase Payments are equal to:

  •  the Contract Value on the Effective Date, plus
 
  •  any additional Purchase Payments added since the Effective Date of the Rider, minus
 
  •  the amount that each withdrawal taken after the Effective Date of the Rider exceeds the amount of Earnings in the Contract accumulated since that date. Withdrawals are assumed to be taken first from Earnings accumulated since the Effective Date of the Rider, then from Purchase Payments in the order that they were received.

If the Surviving Spouse of the deceased Owner continues the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions, then all provisions of the Rider for the Surviving Spouse will be based on the age of the Surviving Spouse on the date of death of the deceased Owner. If the Surviving Spouse is over age 75 on the date of death, the Rider will not be continued for such Surviving Spouse and the benefits and charges provided by the Rider will no longer be applied.

Termination

Once purchased, the Rider will remain in effect until the earlier of:

  •  the date a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal is made under the Contract,
 
  •  the date death benefit proceeds become payable under the Contract,
 
  •  the date the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract, or
 
  •  the Annuity Date.

The EEG Rider may not otherwise be cancelled.

Spousal Continuation

Generally, a sole designated recipient who is the Owner’s spouse may elect to become the Owner (and sole Annuitant if the deceased Owner had been the Annuitant) and continue the Contract until the earliest of the spouse’s death, the death of the Annuitant, or the Annuity Date, except in the case of a Qualified Contract which is qualified pursuant to section 403 of the Code. On the Notice Date, if the surviving spouse is deemed to have continued the Contract, we will set the Contract Value equal to the death benefit proceeds that would have been payable to the spouse as the deemed Beneficiary/ designated recipient of the death benefit proceeds (“Add-In Amount”). The Add-In Amount will be added to the Contract Value on the Notice Date. There will not be an adjustment to the Contract Value if the Contract Value is equal to or greater than the death benefit proceeds as of the Notice Date. The Add-In Amount will be allocated among Investment Options in accordance with the current allocation instructions for the Contract and may be, under certain circumstances, considered earnings. A Joint or Contingent Owner who is the designated recipient, but not the Owner’s spouse, may not continue the Contract.

WITHDRAWALS

Optional Withdrawals

You may, on or prior to your Annuity Date, withdraw all or a portion of the amount available under your Contract while the Annuitants are living and your Contract is in force. You may surrender your Contract and make a full withdrawal at any time. If you surrender your Contract it will be terminated as of the Effective Date of the withdrawal. Beginning 30 days after your Contract Date, you also may make partial withdrawals from your Investment Options at any time. Currently, we are not requiring the 30-day waiting period on partial withdrawals, but we reserve the right to require the 30-day waiting period on partial withdrawals in the future. You may request to withdraw a specific dollar amount or a specific percentage of an Account Value or your Net Contract Value. You may choose to make your withdrawal from specified Investment Options; if you do not specify Investment Options, your withdrawal will be made from all of your Investment Options proportionately. Each partial withdrawal must be $500 or more. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum partial withdrawal amount on Qualified Contracts but we reserve the right to enforce the minimum amount on Qualified Contracts in the future. Pre-authorized withdrawals must be at least $250, except for pre-authorized withdrawals distributed by Electronic Funds Transfer

 
38


Table of Contents


(EFT), which must be at least $100. If your partial withdrawal from an Investment Option would leave a remaining Account Value in that Investment Option of less than $500, we also reserve the right, at our option, to transfer that remaining amount to your other Investment Options on a proportionate basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions. If your partial withdrawal leaves you with a Net Contract Value of less than $1,000, we have the right, at our option, to terminate your Contract and send you the withdrawal proceeds described in the next section below. If your partial withdrawal request is for an amount exceeding the amount available for withdrawal, as described in the Amount Available for Withdrawal section, we have the right, at our option, to terminate your Contract and send you the amount available for withdrawal. Partial withdrawals from the Fixed Option in any Contract Year are subject to restrictions. See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT and APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS sections in this Prospectus.

Amount Available for Withdrawal

The amount available for withdrawal is your Net Contract Value (Contract Value less Contract Debt) at the end of the Business Day on which your withdrawal request is effective, less any applicable optional Rider charges, withdrawal charge, and any charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes. The amount we send to you (your “withdrawal proceeds”) will also reflect any required or requested federal and state income tax withholding. See the FEDERAL TAX STATUS and THE GENERAL ACCOUNT sections of this Prospectus.

You assume investment risk on Purchase Payments in the Subaccounts. As a result, the amount available to you for withdrawal from any Subaccount may be more or less than the total Purchase Payments you have allocated to that Subaccount.

Free Withdrawals

Subject to the amount available for withdrawal provisions as described in the withdrawal section during a Contract Year, you may withdraw free of withdrawal charge amounts up to your “Eligible Purchase Payments”. For purposes of determining the free withdrawal amounts, withdrawals of mandatory required minimums from certain Qualified Plans are included within the calculations. See Special Restrictions Under Qualified Plans.

Eligible Purchase Payments include: 10% annually of your total Purchase Payments that have an “age” of less than four years; plus any remaining portion not withdrawn from the previous Contract Year’s Eligible Purchase Payments that are derived from Purchase Payments which have an “age” of less than four years; plus 100% of all Investments that have an “age” of four years or more. Once all Purchase Payments have been deemed withdrawn, any withdrawal will be deemed a withdrawal of your Earnings and will be free of the withdrawal charge.

Qualified plans have special restrictions on withdrawals. See Special Restrictions Under Qualified Plans below. For purposes of determining the free withdrawal amounts, withdrawal of mandatory required minimums from certain Qualified Plans are included within the calculations. For those Contracts issued to a Charitable Remainder Trust (CRT), the amount available for withdrawal free of withdrawal charges during a Contract Year includes all eligible Purchase Payments plus all earnings even if all Purchase Payments have not been deemed withdrawn.

Example (Non-CRT)

          Contract Year 1

  You make an initial Purchase Payment of $100,000 and make no additional Purchase Payments over the next three Contract years. Your free withdrawal amount available in year 1 equals 10% of the total Purchase Payments made (10% of the total Purchase Payments of $100,000 equals $10,000.) If you withdraw $5,000, the remaining $5,000 of the free withdrawal amount not withdrawn in Contract Year 1 will be carried over to the next Contract Year.

          Contract Year 2

  Your free withdrawal amount for Contract Year 2 is equal to 10% of your total Purchase Payments still subject to the withdrawal charge plus any remaining free withdrawal amounts carried over from the previous Contract Year. (10% of $100,000 plus $5,000 equals $15,000) If no withdrawals are taken, the $15,000 free withdrawal amount not withdrawn in Contract Year 2 will be carried over to the next Contract Year.
 
39


Table of Contents


  Contract Year 3
 
  Your free withdrawal amount for Contract Year 3 is equal to 10% of total Purchase Payments subject to the withdrawal charge plus any remaining free withdrawal amounts carried over from the previous Contract Year. (10% of $100,000 plus $15,000 equals $25,000) If you take a $15,000 withdrawal, the remaining $10,000 of the free withdrawal amount not taken in Contract Year 3 will not be carried over to the next Contract Year because the Purchase Payment will not be subject to the withdrawal charge and the entire amount remaining will be able to be withdrawn free of withdrawal charges.

Pre-Authorized Withdrawals

If your Contract Value is at least $5,000, you may select the pre-authorized withdrawal option, and you may choose monthly, quarterly, semiannual or annual withdrawals. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum Contract Value amount but we reserve the right to enforce the minimum amount in the future. Each withdrawal must be for at least $250, except for withdrawals distributed by Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT), which must be at least $100. Each pre-authorized withdrawal is subject to federal income tax on its taxable portion and may be subject to a penalty tax of 10% or more if you have not reached age 59 1/2. See the FEDERAL TAX STATUS and THE GENERAL ACCOUNT sections in this Prospectus. Additional information and options are set forth in the SAI.

Special Requirements for Full Withdrawals

If you wish to withdraw the entire amount available under your Contract, you must either return your Contract to us or sign and submit a Withdrawal Request form or a Lost Contract Affidavit if no Withdrawal Request form is completed.

Special Restrictions Under Qualified Plans

Individual Qualified Plans may have additional rules regarding withdrawals from a Contract purchased under such a Plan. In general, if your Contract was issued under certain Qualified Plans, you may not withdraw amounts attributable to contributions made pursuant to a salary reduction agreement (as defined in Section 402(g)(3)(A) of the Code) or to transfers from a custodial account (as defined in Section 403(b)(7) of the Code) except in cases of your:

  •  severance from employment,
 
  •  death,
 
  •  disability as defined in Section 72(m)(7) of the Code,
 
  •  reaching age 59 1/2, or
 
  •  hardship as defined for purposes of Section 401 of the Code.

These limitations do not affect certain rollovers or exchanges between Qualified Plans, and do not apply to rollovers from these Qualified Plans to an individual retirement account or individual retirement annuity. In the case of tax sheltered annuities, these limitations do not apply to certain salary reduction contributions made, and investment results earned, prior to dates specified in the Code.

Hardship withdrawals under the exception provided above are restricted to amounts attributable to salary reduction contributions, and do not include investment results. This additional restriction does not apply to salary reduction contributions made, and investment results earned, prior to dates specified in the Code.

Certain distributions, including rollovers, may be subject to mandatory withholding of 20% for federal income tax and to a penalty tax of 10% or more if the distribution is not transferred directly to the trustee of another Qualified Plan, or to the custodian of an individual retirement account or issuer of an individual retirement annuity. See the FEDERAL TAX STATUS section in this Prospectus. Distributions may also trigger withholding for state income taxes. The tax and ERISA rules relating to Contract withdrawals are complex. We are not the administrator of any Qualified Plan. You should consult your qualified tax adviser and/or your Plan Administrator before you withdraw any portion of your Contract Value.

 
40


Table of Contents


Special rules may be available for victims of Hurricanes Katrina, Rita or Wilma. See the APPENDIX F: KETRA Provisions section in this Prospectus.

Effective Date of Withdrawal Requests

Withdrawal requests are normally effective on the Business Day we receive them in proper form. If you make Purchase Payments by check and submit a withdrawal request immediately afterwards, payment of your withdrawal proceeds may be delayed until we receive confirmation in our Annuities administrative office that your check has cleared.

Tax Consequences of Withdrawals

Withdrawals, including pre-authorized withdrawals, will generally have federal income tax consequences, which could include tax penalties. You should consult with a qualified tax adviser before making any withdrawal or selecting the pre-authorized withdrawal option. See the FEDERAL TAX STATUS section in this Prospectus.

Right to Cancel (“Free Look”)

You may return your Contract for cancellation and a refund during your Free Look period. Your Free Look period is usually the 10-day period beginning on the day you receive your Contract, but may vary if required by state law. The amount of your refund may be more or less than the Purchase Payments you’ve made. If you return your Contract, it will be cancelled and treated as void from your Contract Date. In most states, you will then receive a refund of your Contract Value, based upon the next determined Accumulated Unit Value (AUV) after we receive your Contract for cancellation, plus a refund of any amounts that may have been deducted as Contract fees and charges. You would keep the gains or losses on the credited amounts. Thus, an Owner who returns a Contract within the Free Look period also bears the investment risk on any additional amounts credited to the Contract. In some states we are required to refund your Purchase Payments.

For any Contract issued as an IRA returned within 7 days after you receive it, we are required to return all Purchase Payments (less any withdrawals made).

You’ll find a complete description of the Free Look period and amount to be refunded that applies to your Contract on the Contract’s cover page, or on a notice that accompanies your Contract.

If your Contract is issued in exchange for another annuity contract or a life insurance policy, our administrative procedures may vary, depending on the state in which your Contract is delivered. See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS

Some optional Riders require that your entire Contract Value be invested in an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for the Rider to remain in effect. (See the HOW YOUR INVESTMENTS ARE ALLOCATED— Portfolio Optimization section in this Prospectus.)

You may purchase any optional Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary. In addition, if you purchase a Rider within 60 days after the Contract Date or within 30 days after any Contract Anniversary, the Rider Effective Date will be that Contract Date or Contract Anniversary.

Some broker/dealers may limit their clients from purchasing some optional benefits based upon the client’s age or other factors. You should work with your investment professional to decide whether an optional benefit is appropriate for you.

There may be adverse consequences to taking a loan while an optional Rider is in effect. If you have an existing loan on your Contract, you should carefully consider whether an optional Rider is appropriate for you.

 
41


Table of Contents


Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider

Purchasing the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider

Subject to state availability, you may purchase the optional Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary if:

  •  the age of each Annuitant is eighty five (85) years or younger on the date of purchase, and
 
  •  your entire Contract Value is invested in an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for this Rider during the entire period that the Rider is in effect.

On and after October 1, 2005, subject to state availability of the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider, you may elect to exchange the Income Access Plus Rider or the Income Access Rider for the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider on any Contract Anniversary. The initial Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance under the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider will be equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. If you elect an exchange, you will be subject to the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider charge in effect at the time of the exchange. You should consult a qualified adviser for complete information and advice before making an exchange.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Lifetime Income Access Plus Terms

  Annual RMD Amount—The amount required to be distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Internal Revenue Code Section 401(a)(9) (“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.
 
  Protected Payment Amount—The maximum amount that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing the Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Amount on any day after the Rider Effective Date is equal to the lesser of:

  •  5% of the Protected Payment Base as of that day, less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year, or
 
  •  the Remaining Protected Balance as of that day.

  Protected Payment Base—An amount used to determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged except as otherwise described under the provisions of this Rider.
 
  Remaining Protected Balance—The amount available for future withdrawals made under this Rider.
 
  Income Access Credit—An amount added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance. The Income Access Credit is referred to as Annual Credit in the Contract’s Rider.
 
  Reset Date—Any Contract Anniversary beginning with the first (1st) Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, on which you elect to Reset the remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value, determined as of that Contract Anniversary.
 
  Initial Values—The initial Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance amounts are equal to:

  •  Initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract Date, or
 
  •  Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.

  The initial Protected Payment Amount on the Rider Effective Date is equal to 5% of the initial Protected Payment Base.

How the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider Works

On any day, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance, until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0). This Rider also provides for an amount (an “Income Access Credit”) to be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance.

 
42


Table of Contents


In addition, on any Contract Anniversary beginning with the first (1st) Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, you may elect to reset the Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary.

For purposes of this Rider, the term “withdrawal” includes any applicable withdrawal charges and charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes, if applicable. Amounts withdrawn under this Rider will reduce the Contract Value by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees, charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise made under the provisions of the Contract.

If your Contract is a Qualified Contract or a TSA/403(b) Contract, you are subject to restrictions on withdrawals you may take prior to a triggering event and you should consult your tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing an optional guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals and triggering events, see the FEDERAL TAX STATUS— Qualified Contracts section in the Prospectus.

Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount

While this Rider is in effect, you may withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount without reducing the Protected Payment Base, regardless of market performance, until the Remaining Protected Balance equals zero. Any portion of the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year.

If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged. The Remaining Protected Balance will decrease by the withdrawal amount immediately following the withdrawal.

If a withdrawal exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, we will adjust the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance immediately following the withdrawal, to the lesser of:

  •  the Contract Value immediately after the withdrawal, or
 
  •  the Remaining Protected Balance immediately prior to the withdrawal, less the withdrawal amount.

The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed the Protected Payment Amount.

Required Minimum Distributions

No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a result of a withdrawal, if a withdrawal made under the Rider exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:

  •  such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at that time,
 
  •  you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,
 
  •  the Annual RMD Amount is based on the previous year-end Contract Value of this Contract only, and
 
  •  no withdrawals (other than RMD withdrawals) are made from the Contract during the Contract Year.

The Remaining Protected Balance will decrease by the amount of each RMD withdrawal immediately following the RMD withdrawal.

Depletion of Contract Value

If a withdrawal (including an RMD withdrawal) does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount and reduces the Contract Value to zero, the following will apply:

  •  if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of an Owner who is a Non-Natural Owner):

      •  was age 64 or younger when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider, after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, 5% of the Protected Payment Base will be paid each year until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero, or
 
43


Table of Contents


      •  was age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, 5% of the Protected Payment Base will be paid each year until the day of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant.

  •  the payments of 5% of the Protected Payment Base will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,
 
  •  no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the Contract,
 
  •  any Remaining Protected Balance will not be available for payment in a lump sum and may not be applied to provide payments under an Annuity Option,
 
  •  the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit, and
 
  •  any payments made to you of the Remaining Protected Balance may be taxable to you as ordinary income, and if you are under the age of 59 1/2, may be subject to an additional 10% early withdrawal penalty tax.

If the Owner or sole surviving Annuitant dies and the Contract Value is zero as of the date of death, any Remaining Protected Balance will be paid to the Beneficiary under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals and payment frequency (at least annually) then in effect at the time of the Owner’s or sole surviving Annuitant’s death. If, however, the Remaining Protected Balance would be paid over a period that exceeds the life expectancy of the Beneficiary, the pre-authorized withdrawal amount will be adjusted so that the withdrawal payments will be paid over a period that does not exceed the Beneficiary’s life expectancy.

Depletion of Remaining Protected Balance

If a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) reduced the Remaining Protected Balance to zero and Contract Value remains, the following will apply:

  If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of an Owner who is a Non-Natural Owner):

  •  was age 64 or younger when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, this Rider will terminate, or
 
  •  was age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, you may elect to withdraw up to 5% of the Protected Payment Base each year until the day of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant.

If a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) made from the Contract exceeds 5% of the Protected Payment Base, this Rider will terminate.

Any death benefit proceeds to be paid to the Beneficiary from remaining Contract Value will be paid according to the Death Benefit provisions of the Contract.

Income Access Credit

On each Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date, an Income Access Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance, as of that Contract Anniversary, if:

  •  no withdrawals have occurred after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and
 
  •  that Contract Anniversary is within the first five (5) Contract Anniversaries, measured from the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later.

The Income Access Credit is equal to 6% of the total of:

  •  the Remaining Protected Balance on the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and
 
  •  the cumulative Purchase Payments received after the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later,

as of the Contract Anniversary on which the Income Access Credit is added.

 
44


Table of Contents


Once a withdrawal has occurred, no Income Access Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary following the withdrawal, unless you elect to reset the Remaining Protected Balance.

Income Access Credits will not increase your cost basis and when distributed, may be recognizable as taxable ordinary income.

Election to Reset Remaining Protected Balance

You may, on any Contract Anniversary beginning with the first (1st) Contract Anniversary, measured from the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, elect to reset the Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary.

The annual Charge percentage may change if you elect to reset the Remaining Protected Balance. However, the annual Charge percentage will never exceed the annual Charge percentage then in effect for new issues of this same Rider. If we are no longer issuing this Rider, any change in the annual Charge percentage will not result in an annual Charge percentage that exceeds the maximum annual Charge percentage. (See the CHARGES, FEES and DEDUCTIONS—Optional Rider Charges section in this Prospectus).

On each Reset Date and after any Income Access Credit is applied, we will set the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value as of the Reset Date.

The election to reset the Remaining Protected Balance must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within thirty (30) days after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset is effective. Your election to reset the Remaining Protected Balance may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance, Protected Payment Amount and Income Access Credit. We will provide you with written confirmation of your election.

On and after each Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall apply in the same manner as they applied when the Rider was originally issued. Eligibility for any Income Access Credits, the limitations and restrictions on Purchase Payments and withdrawals, the deduction of annual Charges and any future reset options available on and after the Reset Date, will again apply and will be measured from that Reset Date.

Subsequent Purchase Payments

If we receive additional Purchase Payments after the Rider Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the Purchase Payments. However, for purposes of this Rider, we reserve the right to restrict additional Purchase Payments that result in a total of all Purchase Payments received on or after the later of the first (1st) Contract Anniversary or most recent Reset Date to exceed $100,000 without our prior approval. This provision only applies if the Contract to which this Rider is attached, permits Purchase Payments after the first (1st) Contract Anniversary, measured from the Contract Date.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

If the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect and if the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, the surviving spouse may continue to take withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount under this Rider, until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero.

Termination

You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate on the earliest of:

  •  the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer invested according to an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for this Rider,
 
  •  the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of an Owner who is a Non-Natural Owner), was age 64 or younger when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later,
 
  •  the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant,
 
45


Table of Contents


  •  the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract,
 
  •  the day we are notified of a change in ownership of the Contract if the Contract is Non-Qualified, or
 
  •  the Annuity Date.

The Rider will not terminate the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of an Owner who is a Non-Natural Owner) was age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later. In this case, the Rider will terminate the day of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant.

The Rider and the Contract will not terminate the day the Contract Value is zero and you begin taking pre-authorized withdrawals of 5% of the Protected Payment Base. In this case, the Rider and the Contract will terminate:

  •  the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of an Owner who is a Non-Natural Owner) was age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, or
 
  •  the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of an Owner who is Non-Natural Owner), was age 64 or younger when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later.

If this Rider is terminated as a result of having any portion of the Contract Value no longer invested according to an asset allocation program established and maintained by us, you must wait until a Contract Anniversary that is at least one (1) year from the Effective Date of termination before this Rider may be purchased again (if available).

Sample Calculations

Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached APPENDIX B: LIFETIME INCOME ACCESS PLUS RIDER & INCOME ACCESS PLUS RIDER SAMPLE CALCULATIONS to this Prospectus. The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. The examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.

Income Access Plus Rider

Purchasing the Income Access Plus Rider

Subject to state availability, you may purchase the optional Income Access Plus Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary if:

  •  the age of each Annuitant is eighty five (85) years or younger on the date of purchase, and
 
  •  your entire Contract Value is invested in an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for this Rider during the entire period that the Rider is in effect.

On and after October 1, 2005, you may elect to exchange the Income Access Plus Rider for the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider (subject to state availability) on any Contract Anniversary. The initial Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance under the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider will be equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. If you elect an exchange, you will be subject to the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider charge in effect at the time of the exchange. You should consult with a qualified adviser for complete information and advice before making an exchange.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Income Access Plus Terms

  Annual RMD Amount – The amount required to be distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Internal Revenue Code Section 401(a)(9) (“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.
 
46


Table of Contents


  Protected Payment Amount – The maximum amount that can be withdrawn each Contract Year under this Rider without reducing the Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Amount on any day after the Rider Effective Date is equal to the lesser of:

  •  5% of the Protected Payment Base as of that day, less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year, or
 
  •  the Remaining Protected Balance as of that day.

  Protected Payment Base – An amount used to determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged except as otherwise described under the provisions of this Rider.
 
  Remaining Protected Balance – The amount available for future withdrawals made under this Rider.
 
  Income Access Credit – An amount added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance. The Income Access Credit is referred to as Annual Credit in the Contract’s Rider.
 
  Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary beginning with the first (1st) Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, on which you elect to Reset the Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value, determined as of that Contract Anniversary.
 
  Initial Values – The initial Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance amounts are equal to:

  •  Initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract Date, or
 
  •  Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.

  The initial Protected Payment Amount on the Rider Effective Date is equal to 5% of the initial Protected Payment Base.

How the Income Access Plus Rider Works

On any day, this Rider allows for withdrawals up to the Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance, until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0). This Rider also provides for an amount (an “Income Access Credit”) to be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance.

In addition, on any Contract Anniversary beginning with the first (1st) Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, you may elect to reset the Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary.

For purposes of this Rider, the term “withdrawal” includes any applicable withdrawal charges and charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes, if applicable. Amounts withdrawn under this Rider will reduce the Contract Value by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees, charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise made under the provisions of the Contract.

If your Contract is a Qualified Contract or a TSA/403(b) Contract, you are subject to restrictions on withdrawals you may take prior to a triggering event and you should consult your tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing an optional guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals and triggering events, see the FEDERAL TAX STATUS— Qualified Contracts section in the Prospectus.

Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount

While this Rider is in effect, you may withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount without reducing the Protected Payment Base, regardless of market performance, until the Remaining Protected Balance equals zero. Any portion of the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year.

If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged. The Remaining Protected Balance will decrease by the withdrawal amount immediately following the withdrawal.

 
47


Table of Contents


If a withdrawal exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, we will adjust the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance immediately following the withdrawal, to the lesser of:

  •  the Contract Value immediately after the withdrawal, or
 
  •  the Remaining Protected Balance immediately prior to the withdrawal, less the withdrawal amount.

A withdrawal may not exceed the amount available for withdrawal under the Contract if such withdrawal would exceed the Protected Payment Amount.

If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount and reduces the Contract Value to zero, the following will apply:

  •  5% of the Protected Payment Base will be paid each year until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero. The payments will be made under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency, as elected by you, but no less frequently than annually,
 
  •  no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the Contract,
 
  •  any Remaining Protected Balance will not be available for payment in a lump sum and may not be applied to provide payments under an Annuity Option, and
 
  •  the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.

If the Owner or sole surviving Annuitant dies and the Contract Value is zero as of the date of death, any Remaining Protected Balance will be paid to the Beneficiary under the series of pre-authorized withdrawals and payment frequency then in effect at the time of the Owner’s or sole surviving Annuitant’s death. If, however, the Remaining Protected Balance would be paid over a period that exceeds the life expectancy of the Beneficiary, the pre-authorized withdrawal amount will be adjusted so that the withdrawal payments will be paid over a period that does not exceed the Beneficiary’s life expectancy.

Required Minimum Distributions

On and after August 1, 2005, no adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a result of a withdrawal, if a withdrawal made under the Rider exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:

  •  such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at that time,
 
  •  you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,
 
  •  the Annual RMD Amount is based on the previous year-end Contract Value of this Contract only, and
 
  •  no withdrawals (other than RMD withdrawals) are made from the Contract during the Contract Year.

If the Contract Value is reduced to zero, RMD withdrawals will cease and any Remaining Protected Balance will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals in accordance with the terms of the Rider.

The Remaining Protected Balance will decrease by the amount of each RMD withdrawal immediately following the RMD withdrawal.

Income Access Credit

On each Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, an Income Access Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance, as of that Contract Anniversary, if:

  •  no withdrawals have occurred after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and
 
  •  that Contract Anniversary is prior to the sixth (6th) Contract Anniversary, measured from the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later.
 
48


Table of Contents


The Income Access Credit is equal to 6% of the total of:

  •  the Remaining Protected Balance on the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and
 
  •  the cumulative Purchase Payments received after the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later,

as of the Contract Anniversary on which the Income Access Credit is added.

Once a withdrawal has occurred, no Income Access Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary following the withdrawal, unless you elect to reset the Remaining Protected Balance.

Income Access Credits will not increase your cost basis and when distributed, may be recognizable as taxable ordinary income.

Election to Reset Remaining Protected Balance

You may, on any Contract Anniversary beginning with the first (1st) Contract Anniversary, measured from the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, elect to reset the Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary.

The annual Charge percentage may change if you elect to reset the Remaining Protected Balance. However, the annual Charge percentage will never exceed the annual Charge percentage then in effect for new issues of this same Rider. If we are no longer issuing this Rider, any change in the annual Charge percentage will not result in an annual Charge percentage that exceeds the maximum annual Charge percentage (see CHARGES, FEES and DEDUCTIONS—Optional Rider Charges).

On each Reset Date and after any Income Access Credit is applied, we will set the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value as of the Reset Date.

The election to reset the Remaining Protected Balance must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within thirty (30) days after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset is effective. Your election to reset the Remaining Protected Balance may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance, Protected Payment Amount and Income Access Credit. We will provide you with written confirmation of your election.

On and after each Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall apply in the same manner as they applied when the Rider was originally issued. Eligibility for any Income Access Credits, the limitations and restrictions on Purchase Payments and withdrawals, the deduction of annual Charges and any future reset options available on and after the Reset Date, will again apply and will be measured from that Reset Date.

Subsequent Purchase Payments

If we receive additional Purchase Payments after the Rider Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the Purchase Payments. However, for purposes of this Rider, we reserve the right to restrict additional Purchase Payments that result in a total of all Purchase Payments received on or after the later of the first (1st) Contract Anniversary or most recent Reset Date to exceed $100,000 without our prior approval. This provision only applies if the Contract to which this Rider is attached, permits Purchase Payments after the first (1st) Contract Anniversary, measured from the Contract Date.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

If the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect and if the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, then the provisions of this Rider will continue, unless otherwise terminated.

 
49


Table of Contents


Termination

You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate on the earliest of:

  •  the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer invested according to an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for this Rider,
 
  •  the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero,
 
  •  the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant, except as otherwise provided in the paragraph below,
 
  •  the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract, except as otherwise provided in the paragraph below, or
 
  •  the Annuity Date.

The Rider and the Contract will not terminate on the first death of an Owner or death of the sole surviving Annuitant, or the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract if, at the time of those events, the Contract Value is zero and we are making pre-authorized withdrawals of the Remaining Protected Balance under the provisions of the Rider. If we are making pre-authorized withdrawals, the Contract and the Rider will terminate on the Contract Anniversary immediately following the day the Remaining Protected Balance is zero.

If this Rider is terminated as a result of having any portion of the Contract Value no longer invested according to an asset allocation program established and maintained by us, you must wait until a Contract Anniversary that is at least one (1) year from the Effective Date of termination before this Rider may be purchased again (if available). In addition, you cannot switch from the Income Access Rider to the Income Access Plus Rider on the same Contract Anniversary. You must wait until a Contract Anniversary that is at least one (1) year from the Effective Date of termination of the Income Access Rider before the Income Access Plus Rider may be purchased.

Sample Calculations

Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached APPENDIX B: LIFETIME INCOME ACCESS PLUS RIDER & INCOME ACCESS PLUS RIDER SAMPLE CALCULATIONS to this Prospectus. The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. The examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.

Income Access Rider

Purchasing the Income Access Rider

Subject to state availability, you may purchase the optional Income Access Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary if:

  •  the age of each Annuitant is 85 years or younger on the date of purchase, and
 
  •  your entire Contract Value is invested in an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for this Rider during the entire period that the Rider is in effect.

On and after October 1, 2005, you may elect to exchange the Income Access Rider for the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider (subject to state availability) on any Contract Anniversary. The initial Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance under the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider will be equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. If you elect an exchange, you will be subject to the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider charge in effect at the time of the exchange. You should consult with a qualified adviser for complete information and advice before making an exchange.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

 
50


Table of Contents


Income Access Terms

 

  Annual RMD Amount – The amount required to be distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Internal Revenue Code Section 401(a)(9) (“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.
 
  Protected Payment Amount – The maximum amount that can be withdrawn each Contract Year under this Rider without reducing the Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Amount on any day after the Rider Effective Date is equal to the lesser of:

  •  7% of the Protected Payment Base as of that day, or
 
  •  the Remaining Protected Balance as of that day.

  Protected Payment Base – An amount used to determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged except as otherwise described under the provisions of this Rider.
 
  Remaining Protected Balance – The amount available for future withdrawals made under this Rider.
 
  Step-Up Date – Any Contract Anniversary beginning with the first (1st) Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, on which you elect to Reset the Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value, determined as of that Contract Anniversary.
 
  Initial Values – The initial Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance amounts are equal to:

  •  Initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract Date, or
 
  •  Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.

  The initial Protected Payment Amount on the Rider Effective Date is equal to 7% of the initial Protected Payment Base.

Once these initial amounts are established, the Protected Payment Base and Protected Payment Amount will remain unchanged, provided no additional Purchase Payments are received after the Effective Date of the Rider, the total amount withdrawn each Contract Year does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount and the Remaining Protected Balance is greater than 7% of the Protected Payment Base at each Contract Anniversary.

How the Income Access Rider Works

This Rider allows for withdrawals up to the Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year, regardless of market performance, until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0).

The Income Access Rider also provides that if, on any Contract Anniversary beginning with the first (1st) anniversary of the Effective Date of the Income Access Rider, the Contract Value is greater than the Remaining Protected Balance, you may elect to Step-Up (increase) the Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value.

For purposes of this Rider, the term “withdrawal” includes any applicable withdrawal charges and charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes, if applicable. Amounts withdrawn under the Income Access Rider will reduce the Contract Value by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees, charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise made under the provisions of the Contract.

If your Contract is a Qualified Contract or a TSA/403(b) Contract, you are subject to restrictions on withdrawals you may take prior to a triggering event and you should consult your tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing an optional guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals and triggering events, see the FEDERAL TAX STATUS— Qualified Contracts section in the Prospectus.

 
51


Table of Contents


Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount

While the Rider is in effect, you may make cumulative withdrawals up to the Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year without reducing the Protected Payment Base, regardless of market performance, until the Remaining Protected Balance equals zero. Any portion of the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year.

Under your Contract, you may withdraw more than the Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year. However, withdrawals of more than the Protected Payment Amount in a Contract Year will cause an immediate adjustment to the Remaining Protected Balance, the Protected Payment Base, and, at the next Contract Anniversary, the Protected Payment Amount.

If a withdrawal does not cause the total amount withdrawn during the Contract Year to exceed the Protected Payment Amount, the Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged. The Remaining Protected Balance will decrease by the withdrawal amount immediately following the withdrawal.

If a withdrawal causes the total amount withdrawn during the Contract Year to exceed the Protected Payment Amount, we will adjust the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance immediately following the withdrawal to the lesser of:

  •  the Contract Value immediately after the withdrawal, or
 
  •  the Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal, less the withdrawal amount.

The Protected Payment Amount will remain unchanged until the next Contract Anniversary, when the Protected Payment Amount for the new Contract Year is determined.

A withdrawal may not exceed the amount available for withdrawal under the Contract, if such withdrawal would cause the cumulative withdrawals for that Contract Year to exceed the Protected Payment Amount and reduce the Contract Value to zero.

If, immediately after a withdrawal, the cumulative withdrawals for that Contract Year do not exceed the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value is reduced to zero, the following will apply:

  •  the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency, as elected by you, but no less frequently than annually, until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero,
 
  •  no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the Contract,
 
  •  any Remaining Protected Balance will not be available for payment in a lump sum or may not be applied to provide payments under an Annuity Option, and
 
  •  the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.

If the Owner or sole surviving Annuitant dies and the Contract Value is zero as of the date of death, any Remaining Protected Balance will be paid to the designated Beneficiary under the series of pre-authorized withdrawals and payment frequency then in effect at the time of the Owner’s or sole surviving Annuitant’s death. If, however, the Remaining Protected Balance would be paid over a period that exceeds the life expectancy of the Beneficiary, the pre-authorized withdrawal amount will be adjusted so that the withdrawal payments will be paid over a period that does not exceed the Beneficiary’s life expectancy.

Required Minimum Distributions

On and after August 1, 2005, no adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a result of a withdrawal, if a withdrawal made under the Rider exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:

  •  such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at that time,
 
  •  you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,
 
52


Table of Contents


  •  the Annual RMD Amount is based on the previous year-end Contract Value of this Contract only, and
 
  •  no withdrawals (other than RMD withdrawals) are made from the Contract during the Contract Year.

If the Contract Value is reduced to zero, RMD withdrawals will cease and any Remaining Protected Balance will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals in accordance with the terms of the Rider.

The Remaining Protected Balance will decrease by the amount of each RMD withdrawal immediately following the RMD withdrawal.

Optional Step-Up in the Remaining Protected Balance

On any Contract Anniversary on and after August 1, 2005, you may elect to Step-Up the Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary.

The Income Access Charge may change if you elect a Step-Up, but will never exceed the Income Access Charge then being charged for this same benefit under newly issued riders. If you do not elect the optional Step-Up, the Income Access Charge on the Effective Date of the Rider will remain unchanged.

Your request for a Step-Up must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within thirty (30) days after the Contract Anniversary on which the Step-Up is effective.

On each Contract Anniversary that the Step-Up is elected, we will:

  (a)  reset the Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary,
 
  (b)  reset the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to the reset Remaining Protected Balance, and

  (c)  reset the Protected Payment Amount to equal 7% of the reset Protected Payment Base.

Once a Step-Up has been elected and is in effect, another Step-Up may not be elected until the next Contract Anniversary. We will provide you with written confirmation of your Step-Up election.

Your election to Step-Up the Remaining Protected Balance may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base and Protected Payment Amount.

On and after each Step-Up, the provisions of this Rider shall apply in the same manner as they applied when the Rider was originally issued. The limitations and restrictions on Purchase Payments and withdrawals, the deduction of annual charges and any future Step-Up options available on and after the Step-Up Date, will again apply and will be measured from that Step-Up Date.

Subsequent Purchase Payments

If we receive any additional Purchase Payments to the Contract, we will immediately increase the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the Purchase Payment. However, the Protected Payment Amount will remain unchanged until the next Contract Anniversary, when the Protected Payment Amount for the new Contract Year is determined.

For purposes of the Income Access Rider, we reserve the right to restrict additional Purchase Payments. See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

If the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect and if the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, then the provisions of this Rider will continue, unless otherwise terminated.

Termination

You cannot request a termination of the Rider, but the Rider will automatically end on the earliest of:

  •  the Contract Anniversary immediately following the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer invested according to an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for this Rider,
 
53


Table of Contents


  •  the Contract Anniversary immediately following the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero,
 
  •  the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant, except as otherwise provided in the paragraph below,
 
  •  the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract, except as otherwise provided in the paragraph below, or
 
  •  the Annuity Date.

The Rider will automatically end on the date of a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal is made under the Contract.

The Rider and the Contract will not terminate on the first death of an Owner or death of the sole surviving Annuitant, or the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract if, at the time of those events, the Contract Value is zero and we are making pre-authorized withdrawals of the Remaining Protected Balance under the provisions of the Rider. If we are making pre-authorized withdrawals, the Contract will terminate on the Contract Anniversary immediately following the day the Remaining Protected Balance is zero.

If this Rider is terminated as a result of having any portion of the Contract Value no longer invested according to an asset allocation program established and maintained by us, you must wait until a Contract Anniversary that is at least one (1) year from the Effective Date of termination before this Rider may be purchased again (if available). In addition, you cannot switch from the Income Access Plus Rider to the Income Access Rider on the same Contract Anniversary. You must wait until a Contract Anniversary that is at least one (1) year from the Effective Date of termination of the Income Access Plus Rider before the Income Access Rider may be purchased.

Sample Calculations

Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached APPENDIX C: INCOME ACCESS RIDER SAMPLE CALCULATIONS to this Prospectus. The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. The examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.

Guaranteed Protection Advantage 5 (GPA 5) Rider

Purchasing the GPA 5 Rider

Subject to availability, you may purchase the optional GPA 5 Rider on the Contract Date or on any subsequent Contract Anniversary if:

  •  the age of each Annuitant is 85 years or younger on the date of purchase,
 
  •  the date of the purchase is at least 10 years before your selected Annuity Date, and
 
  •  you use an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for this Rider during the entire period that the Rider is in effect.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

How the GPA 5 Rider Works

If you purchase the GPA 5 Rider within 60 days after the Contract Date or within 30 days after a Contract Anniversary, the Effective Date of the Rider will be that Contract Date or Anniversary. The Rider will remain in effect, unless otherwise terminated, for a 10-year period (the “Term”) beginning on the Effective Date of the Rider.

On the last day of the Term, we will add an additional amount to your Contract Value if, on that day, the Contract Value is less than a specified amount (the “Guaranteed Protection Amount”). The additional amount will be equal to the difference between the Contract Value on the last day of the Term and the Guaranteed Protection Amount. The additional amount added to the Contract Value will be considered earnings and allocated to your Investment Options according to the allocations used in your most recent asset allocation program.

 
54


Table of Contents


The Guaranteed Protection Amount is equal to (a) plus (b) minus (c) as indicated below:

  (a)  is the Contract Value at the start of the Term,
 
  (b)  is the amount of each subsequent Purchase Payment received during the first year of the Term, and

  (c)  is a pro rata adjustment for withdrawals made from the Contract during the Term. The adjustment for each withdrawal is calculated by multiplying the Guaranteed Protection Amount prior to the withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal, including any applicable withdrawal charges, premium taxes, and/or other taxes, to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal.

For purposes of determining the Contract Value at the start of the Term, if the Effective Date of the Rider is the Contract Date, the Contract Value is equal to the initial Purchase Payment. If the Effective Date of the Rider is a Contract Anniversary, the Contract Value is equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. Any subsequent Purchase Payments received after the first year of the Term are not included in the Guaranteed Protection Amount. However, the Rider charge will be based on the Contract Value which may include any subsequent Purchase Payments that are not included in the Guaranteed Protection Amount.

If, on the last day of the Term, the Contract is annuitized, the first death of an Owner or the death of the last surviving Annuitant occurs, or a full withdrawal is made, the Contract Value will reflect any additional amount owed under the GPA 5 Rider before the payment of any annuity or death benefits, or full withdrawal. No additional amount will be made if the Contract Value on the last day of the Term is greater than or equal to the Guaranteed Protection Amount.

Optional Step-Up in the Guaranteed Protection Amount

On any Contract Anniversary beginning with the fifth (5th) anniversary of the Effective Date of this Rider and before the Annuity Date, you may elect to increase (“Step-Up”) your Guaranteed Protection Amount.

If you elect the optional Step-Up, the following conditions will apply:

  •  your election of a Step-Up must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within 30 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the Step-Up is effective,
 
  •  the Guaranteed Protection Amount will be equal to your Contract Value as of the Effective Date of the Step-Up (“Step-Up Date”),
 
  •  a new 10-year Term will begin as of the Step-Up Date, and
 
  •  you may not elect another Step-Up until on or after the 5th anniversary of the latest Step-Up Date.

The Guaranteed Protection Charge (“GPA 5 Charge”) may change if you elect a Step-Up, but it will never be more than the GPA 5 Charge being charged under the then current terms and conditions of the Rider. If you do not elect any Step-Up of the Guaranteed Protection Amount during the lifetime of the Rider, your GPA 5 Charge will remain the same as it was on the Effective Date of the Rider.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

If the Owner dies during the Term and the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, then the provisions of the Rider will continue until the end of the Term.

Termination

The Rider will automatically terminate at the end of the Term, or, if earlier on:

  •  the Contract Anniversary immediately following the date any portion of the Contract Value is no longer invested in an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for the Rider,
 
  •  the Contract Anniversary immediately following the date we receive notification from the Owner to terminate the Rider,
 
  •  the date a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal is made under the Contract,
 
  •  the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the last surviving Annuitant,
 
55


Table of Contents


  •  the date the Contract is terminated according to the provisions of the Contract, or
 
  •  the Annuity Date.

If your request to terminate the Rider is received at our Service Center within thirty (30) days after a Contract Anniversary, the Rider will terminate on that Contract Anniversary.

If the GPA 5 Rider is terminated, you must wait until a Contract Anniversary that is at least one (1) year from the Effective Date of the termination before the GPA 5 Rider may be purchased again (if available).

Guaranteed Protection Advantage (GPA) Rider

Purchasing the GPA Rider

The GPA Rider is only available if the original Effective Date of the Rider is before April 1, 2003.

Subject to availability, you may purchase the optional GPA Rider on the Contract Date or on any subsequent Contract Anniversary if:

  •  the age of each Annuitant is 80 years or younger on the date of purchase,
 
  •  the date of the purchase is at least 10 years before your selected Annuity Date, and
 
  •  you use an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for this Rider during the entire period that the Rider is in effect.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

How the GPA Rider Works

If you purchase the GPA Rider within 60 days after the Contract Date or within 30 days after a Contract Anniversary, the Effective Date of the Rider will be that Contract Date or Anniversary. The Rider will remain in effect, unless otherwise terminated, for a 10-year period (the “Term”) beginning on the Effective Date of the Rider.

On the last day of the Term, we will add an additional amount to your Contract Value if, on that day, the Contract Value is less than a specified amount (the “Guaranteed Protection Amount”). The additional amount will be equal to the difference between the Contract Value on the last day of the Term and the Guaranteed Protection Amount. The additional amount added to the Contract Value will be considered earnings and allocated to your Investment Options according to the allocations used in your most recent asset allocation program.

The Guaranteed Protection Amount is equal to (a) plus (b) minus (c) as indicated below:

  (a)  is the Contract Value at the start of the Term,
 
  (b)  is a percentage of each additional Purchase Payment, as determined from the table below, paid to the Contract during the Term,
         

 Number of Years Since Percentage of Purchase Payment
 Beginning of Term Added to Guaranteed Protection Amount

1 through 4
    100 %
5
    90 %
6
    85 %
7
    80 %
8 through 10
    75 %

  (c)  is a pro rata adjustment for withdrawals made from the Contract during the Term. The adjustment for each withdrawal is calculated by multiplying the Guaranteed Protection Amount prior to the withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal, including any applicable withdrawal charges, to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal.

For purposes of determining the Contract Value at the start of the Term, if the Effective Date of the Rider is the Contract Date, the Contract Value is equal to the initial Purchase Payment. If the Effective Date of the Rider is a Contract Anniversary, the Contract Value is equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary.

 
56


Table of Contents


If, on the last day of the Term, the Contract is annuitized, the first death of an Owner or the death of the last surviving Annuitant occurs, or a full withdrawal is made, the Contract Value will reflect any additional amount owed under the GPA Rider before the payment of any annuity or death benefits, or full withdrawal.

No additional amount will be made if the Contract Value on the last day of the Term is greater than or equal to the Guaranteed Protection Amount.

On or before the end of the Term, you can elect to repurchase the Rider subject to its availability and the then current terms and conditions of the Rider provided:

  •  all Annuitant(s) are 80 years or younger at the start of the new Term, and
 
  •  the new Term does not extend beyond your selected Annuity Date.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

If the Owner dies during the Term and the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, then the provisions of this Rider will continue until the end of the Term. Subject to the terms of the Rider, the surviving spouse may repurchase the Rider for another Term at the then current terms and conditions of the Rider, provided the surviving spouse is age 80 or younger at the start of the new Term and the new Term does not extend beyond the selected Annuity Date. If the surviving spouse elects to not repurchase the Rider, it will automatically terminate the day immediately following the end of the Term.

Termination

The GPA Rider will remain in effect until the earlier of:

  •  the end of a Term,
 
  •  the Contract Anniversary immediately following the date any portion of the Contract Value is no longer invested in an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for this Rider,
 
  •  the Contract Anniversary immediately following the date we receive notification from the Owner to terminate this Rider,
 
  •  the date a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal is made under the Contract,
 
  •  the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the last surviving Annuitant,
 
  •  the date the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract, or
 
  •  the Annuity Date.

Guaranteed Income Advantage Plus (GIA Plus) Rider

Purchasing the GIA Plus Rider

Subject to state availability, you may purchase the GIA Plus Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary.

You may purchase the GIA Plus Rider only if:

  •  the age of each Annuitant is eighty (80) years or younger on the date the Rider is purchased, and
 
  •  the entire Contract Value is invested according to an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for this Rider.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

How the GIA Plus Rider Works

If you purchase the optional GIA Plus Rider, you may, prior to the Annuity Date, choose any of the Annuity Options described in your Contract, or you may choose the GIA Plus Annuity Option provided this Rider has been in effect for at least ten (10) years from its Effective Date. If you choose the GIA Plus Annuity Option, you must choose fixed annuity payments and the entire amount available for annuitization at the time you convert to the GIA Plus Annuity Option must be annuitized. The guaranteed income purchased per $1,000 of the net amount

 
57


Table of Contents


applied to the annuity payments will be based on an effective annual interest rate of 2.0% and the 1996 US Annuity 2000 Mortality Table with the age set back eight (8) years.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Annuity Payments – The annuity payments that may be elected under the GIA Plus Annuity Option are:

  •  Life Only,
 
  •  Life with 10 years or more Period Certain,
 
  •  Joint and Survivor Life, or
 
  •  20 years or more Period Certain.

The Rider contains annuity tables for each GIA Plus Annuity Option available.

On the Annuity Date, the Net Amount applied to the annuity payments under the GIA Plus Annuity Option will be equal to the greater of the Guaranteed Income Base on that day or the GIA Plus Step-Up Value on that day, less the following:

  •  applicable withdrawal charges resulting from the conversion to the GIA Plus Annuity Option,
 
  •  applicable annual charges for expenses related to other optional benefit riders attached to the Contract that are in effect as of the Annuity Date, and
 
  •  charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes.

If you elect the GIA Plus Annuity Option, the waiver of withdrawal charges as described in the Contract will not apply. (See the CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS—Withdrawal Charge section in this Prospectus)

Initial Values – The Guaranteed Income Base, GIA Plus Withdrawal Base, GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount and GIA Plus Step-Up Value are values used in determining the Net Amount applied on the Annuity Date to provide payments under the GIA Plus Annuity Option.

The initial values are determined on the Rider Effective Date as follows:

  •  if this Rider is effective on the Contract Date, the Guaranteed Income Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment.
 
  •  if this Rider is effective on a Contract Anniversary, the Guaranteed Income Base is equal to the Contract Value on that day.
 
  •  if this Rider is effective on the Contract Date, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base is equal to the total Purchase Payments received in the first 60 days since the Rider Effective Date.
 
  •  if this Rider is effective on a Contract Anniversary, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base is equal to the Contract Value on that day plus any Purchase Payments received in the first 60 days since the Rider Effective Date.
 
  •  the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for the Contract Year beginning on the Rider Effective Date is equal to 5% of the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base.
 
  •  the GIA Plus Step-Up Value is equal to the Contract Value on the Rider Effective Date.

The GIA Plus Withdrawal Base and GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount after the Rider Effective Date are recalculated only on each subsequent Contract Anniversary.

Subsequent Values – The Guaranteed Income Base, GIA Plus Withdrawal Base, GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount and GIA Plus Step-Up Value after the Rider Effective Date are determined as follows:

Limitation on Subsequent Purchase Payments – For purposes of this Rider, we reserve the right to restrict additional Purchase Payments that result in a total of all Purchase Payments received on or after the first (1st) Contract Anniversary from the Effective Date of the Rider to exceed $100,000 without our prior approval. This provision only applies if the Contract to which this Rider is attached, permits Purchase Payments after the first (1st) Contract Anniversary, measured from the Contract Date.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

 
58


Table of Contents


Guaranteed Income Base – On any day after the Rider Effective Date, the Guaranteed Income Base is equal to:

  •  the Guaranteed Income Base on the prior day, multiplied by a daily factor of 1.000133680 which is equivalent to increasing the Guaranteed Income Base at an annual growth rate of 5%, plus
 
  •  Purchase Payments received by us on that day, less
 
  •  adjustments for withdrawals made on that day.

The adjustment for each withdrawal is calculated by multiplying the Guaranteed Income Base immediately prior to the withdrawal by the percentage decrease in Contract Value as a result of the withdrawal.

However, on each Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date, if there is at least one withdrawal during the prior Contract Year and the cumulative withdrawals for that Contract Year do not exceed the sum of:

  •  the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for that Contract Year, and
 
  •  any remaining dollar amount of the prior Contract Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount,

the Guaranteed Income Base as of that Contract Anniversary will be reset to equal:

  •  the Guaranteed Income Base on the Rider Effective Date or prior Contract Anniversary, whichever is later, increased at an annual growth rate of 5%, plus
 
  •  the amount of any subsequent Purchase Payments received by us during the prior Contract Year, each increased at an annual growth rate of 5% from the effective date of that Purchase Payment, less
 
  •  the amount of cumulative withdrawals during the prior Contract Year.

The 5% annual growth rate will stop accruing as of the earlier of:

  •  the Contract Anniversary prior to the youngest Annuitant’s 81st birthday, or
 
  •  the day this Rider terminates.

GIA Plus Withdrawal Base – On each Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base is equal to:

  •  the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base determined on the Rider Effective Date, plus
 
  •  the amount of any subsequent Purchase Payments received by us after the Rider Effective Date, up through the day immediately prior to that Contract Anniversary.

GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount – On each Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for the Contract Year beginning on that Contract Anniversary is equal to 5% of the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base as of that Contract Anniversary.

GIA Plus Step-Up Value – On any day after the Rider Effective Date, the GIA Plus Step-Up Value is equal to:

  •  the GIA Plus Step-Up Value as of the prior day, plus
 
  •  Purchase Payments received by us on that day, less
 
  •  adjustment for withdrawals made on that day.

The adjustment for each withdrawal is calculated by multiplying the GIA Plus Step-Up Value immediately prior to the withdrawal by the percentage decrease in Contract Value as a result of that withdrawal.

On any Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date and prior to the youngest Annuitant’s 81st birthday, the GIA Plus Step-Up Value is set equal to the greater of:

  •  the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary, or
 
  •  the GIA Plus Step-Up Value immediately prior to that Contract Anniversary.

The GIA Plus Step-Up Value will then be adjusted for any Purchase Payments or withdrawals on that Contract Anniversary in accordance with the first paragraph of this subsection.

 
59


Table of Contents


The GIA Plus Step-Up Value on each Contract Anniversary on and after the youngest Annuitant’s 81st birthday is equal to the GIA Plus Step-Up Value immediately prior to the Contract Anniversary preceding that 81st birthday, adjusted for any Purchase Payments and withdrawals since that anniversary.

Partial Conversion of Net Contract Value for Annuity Payments – If a portion of the Net Contract Value (Contract Value less Contract Debt) is converted to provide payments under an Annuity Option described in the Contract at any time before you annuitize under the GIA Plus Annuity Option, the amount converted will be considered a “withdrawal” for purposes of determining withdrawal adjustments to the Guaranteed Income Base and GIA Plus Step-Up Value. A withdrawal charge may also apply.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

If the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect and if the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, then the provisions of this Rider will continue, unless otherwise terminated.

Termination

Except as otherwise provided below, the GIA Plus Rider will remain in effect until the earlier of:

  •  the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer invested according to an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for the Rider,
 
  •  the day we receive notification from you to terminate the Rider,
 
  •  the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant,
 
  •  the date the Contract is terminated in accordance with the terms of the Contract, or
 
  •  the Annuity Date.

Upon your request, the GIA Plus Rider may be terminated at any time. If your request to terminate the GIA Plus Rider is received at our Service Center within thirty (30) days after a Contract Anniversary, the GIA Plus Rider will terminate on that Contract Anniversary. If your request to terminate the GIA Plus Rider is received at our Service Center more than thirty (30) days after a Contract Anniversary, the GIA Plus Rider will terminate the day we receive the request.

If the GIA Plus Rider is terminated, you must wait until a Contract Anniversary that is at least one (1) year from the Effective Date of the termination before the GIA Plus Rider may be purchased again (if available). In addition, you cannot switch from the GIA 5 or GIA II Riders to the GIA Plus Rider on the same Contract Anniversary. You must wait one (1) year from the Effective Date of termination of the GIA 5 or GIA II Riders before the GIA Plus Rider may be purchased.

Sample Calculations

Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached APPENDIX D: GUARANTEED INCOME ADVANTAGE PLUS RIDER SAMPLE CALCULATIONS to this Prospectus. The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. They are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.

Guaranteed Income Advantage 5 (GIA 5) Rider

Purchasing the GIA 5 Rider

The GIA 5 Rider is only available for purchase until the GIA Plus Rider is available in your state.

Subject to availability, you may purchase the GIA 5 Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary. You may purchase the GIA 5 Rider only if:

  •  the age of each Annuitant is 80 years or younger on the date the Rider is purchased,
 
  •  the date of purchase is at least 10 years before your selected Annuity Date, and
 
60


Table of Contents


  •  the entire Contract Value is invested according to an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for this Rider.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

How the GIA 5 Rider Works

If you purchase the optional GIA 5 Rider (subject to state availability), you may choose any of the Annuity Options described in your Contract, or you may choose the GIA 5 Annuity Option provided this Rider has been in effect for at least 10 years from the later of its Effective Date or the most recent Step-Up Date. You must choose fixed annuity payments under this GIA 5 Annuity Option. The guaranteed income purchased per $1,000 of the net amount applied to the annuity payments will be based on an annual interest rate of 2.5% and the 1983a Annuity Mortality Table with the age set back 10 years. The net amount applied to the annuity payments under the GIA 5 Annuity Option will be based on the Net Guaranteed Income Base, which is described below.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Net Guaranteed Income Base – The amount applied on the Annuity Date as a single premium to provide annuity payments under the GIA 5 Annuity Option. The Net Guaranteed Income Base is equal to:

  •  the Guaranteed Income Base as of the Annuity Date, less
 
  •  any applicable withdrawal charge resulting from the conversion to the GIA 5 Annuity Option, less
 
  •  any Contract Debt, and less
 
  •  any charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes.

Guaranteed Income Base – If you purchase the GIA 5 Rider on the Contract Date, the Guaranteed Income Base is initially set on the Effective Date of the Rider. If the Rider is effective on the Contract Date, the Guaranteed Income Base is equal to the Initial Purchase Payment. If the Rider is effective on a Contract Anniversary, the Guaranteed Income Base is equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. The Guaranteed Income Base on any Business Day after the Effective Date is the Guaranteed Income Base on the prior Business Day, increased by any additions on that day as a result of any:

  •  Purchase Payments received by us, plus
 
  •  increases at an annual growth rate of 5%, plus
 
  •  additional amounts as a result of a Step-Up in the Guaranteed Income Base

and decreased by any deductions on that day as a result of any:

  •  adjustments for withdrawals.

The adjustment for each withdrawal is calculated by multiplying the Guaranteed Income Base prior to the withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal, including any applicable withdrawal charge, to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal.

Any portion of the Net Contract Value converted to provide payments under an Annuity Option, as described in the Contract, will be considered a “withdrawal” for purposes of determining any adjustment to the Guaranteed Income Base.

The 5% annual growth rate will take into account the timing of when each Purchase Payment and withdrawal occurred. This is accomplished by applying a daily factor of 1.000133681 to each day’s Guaranteed Income Base balance. The 5% annual growth rate will stop accruing as of the earlier of:

  •  the Contract Anniversary following the day the youngest Annuitant reaches his or her 80th birthday, or
 
  •  the day the GIA 5 Rider terminates.

Election of Step-Up – On any Contract Anniversary beginning with the fifth (5th) anniversary of the Effective Date of this Rider and before the Annuity Date, you may elect to increase the Guaranteed Income Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value as of the Step-Up Date.

 
61


Table of Contents


The Guaranteed Income Advantage Charge (“GIA 5 Charge”) may change if you elect a Step-Up in the Guaranteed Income Base. However, the GIA 5 Charge will never exceed the GIA 5 Charge then being offered for this same benefit under newly issued riders and will not be more than a maximum charge of 0.75%. If the Guaranteed Income Base is never stepped-up, the GIA 5 Charge established on the Effective Date of this Rider is guaranteed not to change.

Your Step-Up election must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within thirty (30) days after the Contract Anniversary on which the Step-Up is effective.

Once a Step-Up has been elected and is in effect, another Step-Up may not be elected until on or after the fifth (5th) anniversary of the latest Step-Up Date. We will provide you with written confirmation of your Step-Up election.

Guaranteed Income Advantage 5 (GIA 5) Annuity Option

The annuity payments that may be elected under the GIA 5 Annuity Option are:

  •  Life Only,
 
  •  Life with 10 years or more Period Certain,
 
  •  Joint and Survivor Life, or
 
  •  15 years or more Period Certain.

If you elect the GIA 5 Annuity Option, the waiver of withdrawal charges as described in the Contract will not apply. We will reduce the net amount applied to the annuity payments under the GIA 5 Annuity Option by any remaining withdrawal charges. The Rider contains annuity tables for each GIA 5 Annuity Option available.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

If the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect and if the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, then the provisions of this Rider will continue, unless otherwise terminated.

Termination

The GIA 5 Rider will remain in effect until the earlier of:

  •  the Contract Anniversary immediately following the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer invested according to an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for the GIA 5 Rider,
 
  •  the Contract Anniversary immediately following the day we receive notification from you to terminate the GIA 5 Rider,
 
  •  the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant,
 
  •  the date the Contract is terminated in accordance with the terms of the Contract, or
 
  •  the Annuity Date.

If your request to terminate the Rider is received at our Service Center within thirty (30) days after a Contract Anniversary, the Rider will terminate on that Contract Anniversary.

Guaranteed Income Advantage II (GIA II) Rider

Purchasing the GIA II Rider

The GIA II Rider is only available for purchase until the GIA Plus Rider is available in your state.

Subject to availability, you may purchase the GIA II Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary. You may purchase the GIA II Rider only if:

  •  the age of each Annuitant is 80 years or younger on the date the Rider is purchased, and
 
  •  the date of purchase is at least 10 years before your selected Annuity Date.
 
62


Table of Contents


See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

How the GIA II Rider Works

If you purchase the optional GIA II Rider (subject to state availability), you may choose any of the Annuity Options described in your Contract, or you may choose the GIA II Annuity Option provided this Rider has been in effect for at least ten (10) years from the later of its Effective Date or the most recent Step-Up Date. You must choose fixed annuity payments under this GIA II Annuity Option. The guaranteed income purchased per $1,000 of the net amount applied to the annuity payments will be based on an annual interest rate of 2.5% and the 1983a Annuity Mortality Table with the age set back 10 years. The net amount applied to the annuity payments under the GIA II Annuity Option will be based on the Net Guaranteed Income Base, which is described below. The Rider contains annuity tables for each GIA II Annuity Option available.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Net Guaranteed Income Base – The amount applied on the Annuity Date as a single premium to provide annuity payments under the GIA II Annuity Option. The Net Guaranteed Income Base is equal to:

  •  the Guaranteed Income Base as of the Annuity Date, less
 
  •  any applicable withdrawal charge resulting from the conversion to the GIA II Annuity Option, less
 
  •  any Contract Debt, and less
 
  •  any charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes.

Guaranteed Income Base – If you purchase the GIA II Rider, the Guaranteed Income Base is initially set on the Effective Date of the Rider. If the Rider is effective on the Contract Date, the Guaranteed Income Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment. If the Rider is effective on a Contract Anniversary, the Guaranteed Income Base is equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. The Guaranteed Income Base on any Business Day after the Effective Date is the Guaranteed Income Base on the prior Business Day, increased by any additions on that day as a result of any:

  •  Purchase Payments received by us, plus
 
  •  increases at an annual growth rate of 5%, plus
 
  •  additional amounts as a result of a Step-Up in the Guaranteed Income Base

and decreased by any deductions on that day as a result of any:

  •  adjustments for withdrawals.

The adjustment for each withdrawal is calculated by multiplying the Guaranteed Income Base prior to the withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal, including any applicable withdrawal charge, to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal.

Any portion of the Net Contract Value converted to provide payments under an Annuity Option, as described in the Contract, will be considered a “withdrawal” for purposes of determining any adjustment to the Guaranteed Income Base.

The 5% annual growth rate will take into account the timing of when each Purchase Payment and withdrawal occurred. This is accomplished by applying a daily factor of 1.000133681 to each day’s Guaranteed Income Base balance.

The 5% annual growth rate will stop accruing as of the earlier of:

  •  the Contract Anniversary following the day the youngest Annuitant reaches his or her 80th birthday, or
 
  •  the day the GIA II Rider terminates.

Election of Step-Up – On any Contract Anniversary beginning with the fifth (5th) anniversary of the Effective Date of this Rider and before the Annuity Date, you may elect to increase the Guaranteed Income Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value as of the Step-Up Date.

 
63


Table of Contents


The Guaranteed Income Advantage Charge (“GIA II Charge”) may change if you elect a Step-Up in the Guaranteed Income Base. However, the GIA II Charge will never exceed the GIA II Charge then being offered for this same benefit under newly issued riders and will not be more than a maximum charge of 1.00%. If the Guaranteed Income Base is never stepped-up, the GIA II Charge established on the Effective Date of this Rider is guaranteed not to change.

Your Step-Up election must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within thirty (30) days after the Contract Anniversary on which the Step-Up is effective.

Once a Step-Up has been elected and is in effect, another Step-Up may not be elected until on or after the fifth (5th) anniversary of the latest Step-Up Date. We will provide you with written confirmation of your Step-Up election.

Guaranteed Income Advantage II (GIA II) Annuity Option

The annuity payments that may be elected under the GIA II Annuity Option are:

  •  Life Only,
 
  •  Life with 10 years or more Period Certain,
 
  •  Joint and Survivor Life, or
 
  •  15 years or more Period Certain.

If you elect the GIA II Annuity Option, the waiver of withdrawal charges as described in the Contract will not apply. We will reduce the net amount applied to the annuity payments under the GIA II Annuity Option by any remaining withdrawal charges. The Rider contains annuity tables for each GIA II Annuity Option available.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

If the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect and if the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, then the provisions of this Rider will continue, unless otherwise terminated.

Termination

The GIA II Rider will remain in effect until the earlier of:

  •  the Contract Anniversary immediately following the day we receive notification from you to terminate the Rider,
 
  •  the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant,
 
  •  the date the Contract is terminated in accordance with the terms of the Contract, or
 
  •  the Annuity Date.

If your request to terminate the Rider is received at our Service Center within thirty (30) days after a Contract Anniversary, the Rider will terminate on that Contract Anniversary.

PACIFIC LIFE AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT

Pacific Life

Pacific Life Insurance Company is a life insurance company based in California. Along with our subsidiaries and affiliates, our operations include life insurance, annuity, pension and institutional products, mutual funds, broker-dealer operations, and investment advisory services. At the end of 2005, we had $183.5 billion of individual life insurance in force and total admitted assets of approximately $74.9 billion.

We are authorized to conduct our life insurance and annuity business in the District of Columbia and in all states except New York. Our executive office is located at 700 Newport Center Drive, Newport Beach, California 92660.

 
64


Table of Contents


We were originally organized on January 2, 1868, under the name “Pacific Mutual Life Insurance Company of California” and reincorporated as “Pacific Mutual Life Insurance Company” on July 22, 1936. On September 1, 1997, we converted from a mutual life insurance company to a stock life insurance company ultimately controlled by a mutual holding company and were authorized by California regulatory authorities to change our name to Pacific Life Insurance Company. On September 1, 2005, Pacific Life changed from a California corporation to a Nebraska corporation. Pacific Life is a subsidiary of Pacific LifeCorp, a holding company, which, in turn, is a subsidiary of Pacific Mutual Holding Company, a mutual holding company. Under their respective charters, Pacific Mutual Holding Company must always hold at least 51% of the outstanding voting stock of Pacific LifeCorp, and Pacific LifeCorp must always own 100% of the voting stock of Pacific Life. Owners of Pacific Life’s annuity contracts and life insurance policies have certain membership interests in Pacific Mutual Holding Company, consisting principally of the right to vote on the election of the Board of Directors of the mutual holding company and on other matters, and certain rights upon liquidation or dissolutions of the mutual holding company.

Our subsidiary, Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (PSD) serves as the principal underwriter (distributor) for the Contracts. PSD is located at 700 Newport Center Drive, Newport Beach, California 92660. We and PSD enter into selling agreements with broker-dealers, whose registered representatives are authorized by state insurance departments to sell the Contracts.

We may provide you with reports of our ratings both as an insurance company and as to our claims-paying ability with respect to our General Account assets.

Separate Account A

Separate Account A was established on September 7, 1994 as a separate account of ours, and is registered with the SEC under the Investment Company Act of 1940 (the “1940 Act”), as a type of investment company called a “unit investment trust.” We established the separate account under the laws of the state of California. The separate account is maintained under the laws of the state of Nebraska.

Obligations arising under your Contract are our general corporate obligations. We are also the legal owner of the assets in the Separate Account. Assets of the Separate Account attributed to the reserves and other liabilities under the Contract and other contracts issued by us that are supported by the Separate Account may not be charged with liabilities arising from any of our other business; any income, gain or loss (whether or not realized) from the assets of the Separate Account are credited to or charged against the Separate Account without regard to our other income, gain or loss.

We may invest money in the Separate Account in order to commence its operations and for other purposes, but not to support contracts other than variable annuity contracts. A portion of the Separate Account’s assets may include accumulations of charges we make against the Separate Account and investment results of assets so accumulated. These additional assets are ours and we may transfer them to our General Account at any time; however, before making any such transfer, we will consider any possible adverse impact the transfer might have on the Separate Account. Subject to applicable law, we reserve the right to transfer our assets in the Separate Account to our General Account.

The Separate Account is not the sole investor in the Fund. Investment in the Fund by other separate accounts in connection with variable annuity and variable life insurance contracts may create conflicts. See the accompanying Prospectus and the SAI for the Fund for more information.

 
65


Table of Contents


FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS

The table below is designed to help you understand how the Variable Investment Options have performed. It shows the value of a Subaccount Unit at the beginning and end of each period, as well as the number of Subaccount Units at the end of each period. A Subaccount Unit is also called an Accumulation Unit.

The information in the table for each of the five years in the period ended December 31, 2005 has been audited by Deloitte & Touche LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm. You should read the table in conjunction with the financial statements for Separate Account A, which are included in its annual report dated as of December 31, 2005.

                                                                         
With Stepped-Up
With Standard Death Benefit Death Benefit Rider With Premier Death Benefit Rider



Number of Number of Number of
Subaccount Subaccount Subaccount
AUV at AUV Units AUV at AUV Units AUV at AUV Units
Beginning at End Outstanding Beginning at End Outstanding Beginning at End Outstanding
of Year of Year at End of Year of Year of Year at End of Year of Year of Year at End of Year

International Value                                                                
2005
    $13.30       $14.35       485,440       $13.14       $14.15       114,944       $13.02       $14.00       62,355  
2004
    $11.58       $13.30       651,816       $11.47       $13.14       156,656       $11.38       $13.02       86,245  
2003
    $9.20       $11.58       813,819       $9.12       $11.47       204,191       $9.07       $11.38       106,259  
2002
    $10.83       $9.20       861,134       $10.77       $9.12       219,179       $10.72       $9.07       124,578  
2001
    $14.06       $10.83       913,569       $14.01       $10.77       249,388       $13.97       $10.72       135,937  
2000
    $16.10       $14.06       830,900       $16.06       $14.01       195,764       $16.04       $13.97       106,837  

Diversified Research1                                                                
2005
    $11.17       $11.60       495,109       $11.06       $11.46       124,479       $10.98       $11.35       86,208  
2004
    $10.19       $11.17       502,805       $10.11       $11.06       106,378       $10.05       $10.98       83,583  
2003
    $7.79       $10.19       574,890       $7.74       $10.11       120,430       $7.71       $10.05       89,681  
2002
    $10.42       $7.79       630,716       $10.38       $7.74       141,990       $10.35       $7.71       82,571  
2001
    $10.87       $10.42       663,788       $10.85       $10.38       143,436       $10.83       $10.35       100,919  
2000
    $10.00       $10.87       476,150       $10.00       $10.85       122,599       $10.00       $10.83       93,630  

Equity                                                                
2005
    $13.51       $14.19       187,465       $13.35       $13.99       73,961       $13.23       $13.85       26,661  
2004
    $13.03       $13.51       245,063       $12.90       $13.35       102,463       $12.80       $13.23       40,202  
2003
    $10.63       $13.03       313,864       $10.54       $12.90       111,821       $10.48       $12.80       52,641  
2002
    $14.66       $10.63       360,139       $14.58       $10.54       138,568       $14.51       $10.48       73,479  
2001
    $19.01       $14.66       543,137       $18.93       $14.58       165,415       $18.88       $14.51       104,893  
2000
    $25.76       $19.01       484,381       $25.71       $18.93       138,451       $25.67       $18.88       101,438  

American Funds® Growth-Income2                                                                
05/2005-12/2005
    $10.00       $10.88       222,643       $10.09       $10.87       63,092       $10.09       $10.86       45,705  

American Funds® Growth2                                                                
05/2005-12/2005
    $10.00       $11.86       391,809       $10.15       $11.84       80,331       $10.15       $11.83       39,289  

Technology3                                                                
2005
    $4.43       $5.31       121,236       $4.39       $5.26       43,871       $4.37       $5.22       14,615  
2004
    $4.33       $4.43       166,976       $4.31       $4.39       43,230       $4.29       $4.37       12,945  
2003
    $3.08       $4.33       386,513       $3.07       $4.31       69,664       $3.06       $4.29       24,553  
2002
    $5.82       $3.08       212,958       $5.81       $3.07       56,113       $5.80       $3.06       8,410  
2001
    $10.00       $5.82       144,194       $10.00       $5.81       27,093       $10.00       $5.80       12,078  

Short-Duration Bond4
                                                                       
2005
    $9.98       $10.00       461,133       $9.95       $9.95       94,112       $9.92       $9.91       35,010  
2004
    $10.00       $9.98       558,719       $9.99       $9.95       102,805       $9.98       $9.92       51,003  
2003
    $10.00       $10.00       575,417       $10.00       $9.99       108,466       $10.00       $9.98       61,377  

Concentrated Growth5
                                                                       
2005
    $4.16       $4.20       292,963       $4.12       $4.15       80,166       $4.09       $4.12       43,575  
2004
    $3.74       $4.16       390,881       $3.72       $4.12       120,066       $3.70       $4.09       55,704  
2003
    $2.65       $3.74       495,356       $2.64       $3.72       159,863       $2.63       $3.70       77,106  
2002
    $4.38       $2.65       608,093       $4.37       $2.64       173,458       $4.35       $2.63       110,387  
2001
    $6.72       $4.38       642,382       $6.71       $4.37       194,993       $6.70       $4.35       103,915  
2000
    $10.00       $6.72       635,944       $10.00       $6.71       193,330       $10.00       $6.70       87,487  

 
66


Table of Contents


                                                                         
With Stepped-Up
With Standard Death Benefit Death Benefit Rider With Premier Death Benefit Rider



Number of Number of Number of
Subaccount Subaccount Subaccount
AUV at AUV Units AUV at AUV Units AUV at AUV Units
Beginning at End Outstanding Beginning at End Outstanding Beginning at End Outstanding
of Year of Year at End of Year of Year of Year at End of Year of Year of Year at End of Year

Growth LT                                                                
2005
    $20.93       $22.23       344,276       $20.68       $21.92       116,133       $20.50       $21.69       63,775  
2004
    $19.23       $20.93       490,049       $19.04       $20.68       160,175       $18.89       $20.50       85,910  
2003
    $14.55       $19.23       654,094       $14.44       $19.04       192,592       $14.35       $18.89       110,829  
2002
    $20.78       $14.55       810,772       $20.65       $14.44       251,607       $20.56       $14.35       148,206  
2001
    $29.92       $20.78       964,288       $29.80       $20.65       276,157       $29.71       $20.56       160,026  
2000
    $38.74       $29.92       750,217       $38.67       $29.80       193,399       $38.61       $29.71       120,735  

Focused 306                                                                
2005
    $7.78       $9.36       129,565       $7.71       $9.26       48,513       $7.66       $9.19       9,743  
2004
    $6.87       $7.78       146,666       $6.82       $7.71       41,799       $6.79       $7.66       8,634  
2003
    $4.90       $6.87       168,514       $4.87       $6.82       44,822       $4.86       $6.79       11,224  
2002
    $7.03       $4.90       169,420       $7.01       $4.87       47,702       $7.00       $4.86       14,780  
2001
    $8.23       $7.03       201,749       $8.23       $7.01       52,538       $8.22       $7.00       22,130  
2000
    $10.00       $8.23       164,442       $10.00       $8.23       32,984       $10.00       $8.22       9,916  

Health Sciences7
                                                                       
2005
    $9.20       $10.46       68,915       $9.13       $10.36       28,751       $9.07       $10.28       8,500  
2004
    $8.68       $9.20       103,629       $8.62       $9.13       31,711       $8.59       $9.07       7,288  
2003
    $6.88       $8.68       133,145       $6.86       $8.62       39,052       $6.84       $8.59       9,392  
2002
    $9.10       $6.88       119,884       $9.08       $6.86       37,936       $9.07       $6.84       6,760  
2001
    $10.00       $9.10       142,534       $10.00       $9.08       34,324       $10.00       $9.07       5,099  

Mid-Cap Value                                                                
2005
    $18.91       $20.31       614,857       $18.69       $20.02       164,149       $18.52       $19.81       77,323  
2004
    $15.33       $18.91       607,665       $15.18       $18.69       164,233       $15.07       $18.52       83,812  
2003
    $12.05       $15.33       751,809       $11.95       $15.18       175,959       $11.88       $15.07       93,481  
2002
    $14.28       $12.05       761,224       $14.19       $11.95       196,209       $14.13       $11.88       105,378  
2001
    $12.78       $14.28       930,516       $12.73       $14.19       216,947       $12.69       $14.13       134,668  
2000
    $10.38       $12.78       470,899       $10.36       $12.73       128,673       $10.34       $12.69       82,254  

Large-Cap Growth8,9                                                                
2005
    $7.48       $7.59       428,833       $7.42       $7.52       127,899       $7.38       $7.46       68,958  
2004
    $7.25       $7.48       938,748       $7.21       $7.42       245,566       $7.17       $7.38       139,357  
2003
    $5.86       $7.25       958,358       $5.84       $7.21       271,162       $5.82       $7.17       134,395  
2002
    $8.03       $5.86       1,103,279       $8.01       $5.84       278,780       $8.00       $5.82       128,787  
2001
    $10.00       $8.03       1,166,467       $10.00       $8.01       272,994       $10.00       $8.00       112,661  

Capital Opportunities7                                                                
2005
    $8.38       $8.41       27,900       $8.31       $8.33       17,155       $8.26       $8.27       4,532  
2004
    $7.54       $8.38       174,857       $7.49       $8.31       50,854       $7.46       $8.26       35,052  
2003
    $6.01       $7.54       237,034       $5.99       $7.49       64,412       $5.97       $7.46       38,606  
2002
    $8.33       $6.01       299,514       $8.31       $5.99       72,100       $8.30       $5.97       37,392  
2001
    $10.00       $8.33       369,280       $10.00       $8.31       73,261       $10.00       $8.30       40,735  

International Large-Cap1                                                                
2005
    $7.62       $8.47       1,414,421       $7.55       $8.37       373,538       $7.49       $8.30       165,926  
2004
    $6.52       $7.62       1,413,793       $6.47       $7.55       359,616       $6.43       $7.49       194,645  
2003
    $5.06       $6.52       1,555,393       $5.03       $6.47       408,364       $5.01       $6.43       229,704  
2002
    $6.24       $5.06       1,518,975       $6.21       $5.03       432,067       $6.19       $5.01       243,716  
2001
    $7.74       $6.24       1,843,777       $7.72       $6.21       490,702       $7.71       $6.19       327,597  
2000
    $10.00       $7.74       1,202,801       $10.00       $7.72       298,948       $10.00       $7.71       218,938  

Equity Index                                                                
2005
    $19.35       $19.97       393,877       $19.12       $19.69       96,617       $18.95       $19.49       56,267  
2004
    $17.74       $19.35       485,073       $17.57       $19.12       97,354       $17.44       $18.95       71,606  
2003
    $14.02       $17.74       534,018       $13.91       $17.57       124,056       $13.83       $17.44       77,064  
2002
    $18.32       $14.02       733,827       $18.21       $13.91       179,278       $18.12       $13.83       114,455  
2001
    $21.14       $18.32       963,695       $21.06       $18.21       201,357       $21.00       $18.12       116,049  
2000
    $23.64       $21.14       906,008       $23.59       $21.06       162,962       $23.56       $21.00       96,281  

Small-Cap Index                                                                
2005
    $14.64       $15.06       387,943       $14.46       $14.86       115,274       $14.33       $14.70       73,029  
2004
    $12.60       $14.64       602,696       $12.48       $14.46       158,210       $12.39       $14.33       101,897  
2003
    $8.72       $12.60       436,575       $8.65       $12.48       67,891       $8.60       $12.39       51,804  
2002
    $11.22       $8.72       396,979       $11.16       $8.65       66,168       $11.11       $8.60       42,546  
2001
    $11.19       $11.22       197,957       $11.14       $11.16       34,152       $11.11       $11.11       29,667  
2000
    $11.77       $11.19       150,579       $11.75       $11.14       29,233       $11.73       $11.11       22,881  

 
67


Table of Contents


                                                                         
With Stepped-Up
With Standard Death Benefit Death Benefit Rider With Premier Death Benefit Rider



Number of Number of Number of
Subaccount Subaccount Subaccount
AUV at AUV Units AUV at AUV Units AUV at AUV Units
Beginning at End Outstanding Beginning at End Outstanding Beginning at End Outstanding
of Year of Year at End of Year of Year of Year at End of Year of Year of Year at End of Year

Fasciano Small Equity                                                                
2005
    $11.07       $11.20       242,385       $10.93       $11.05       80,503       $10.84       $10.93       21,995  
2004
    $9.43       $11.07       177,214       $9.34       $10.93       73,513       $9.27       $10.84       19,432  
2003
    $7.19       $9.43       268,930       $7.13       $9.34       98,752       $7.09       $9.27       31,490  
2002
    $9.73       $7.19       292,942       $9.67       $7.13       123,803       $9.63       $7.09       42,236  
2001
    $11.92       $9.73       248,174       $11.87       $9.67       116,458       $11.84       $9.63       48,382  
2000
    $15.31       $11.92       318,263       $15.28       $11.87       115,708       $15.26       $11.84       53,534  

Small-Cap Value4                                                                
2005
    $15.43       $17.29       177,632       $15.38       $17.20       27,568       $15.34       $17.13       13,416  
2004
    $12.57       $15.43       205,804       $12.56       $15.38       46,721       $12.55       $15.34       18,016  
2003
    $10.00       $12.57       169,825       $10.00       $12.56       38,405       $10.00       $12.55       17,350  

Multi-Strategy                                                                
2005
    $17.49       $17.90       138,836       $17.29       $17.66       39,836       $17.13       $17.47       30,025  
2004
    $16.16       $17.49       161,676       $16.00       $17.29       48,801       $15.88       $17.13       35,821  
2003
    $13.29       $16.16       208,960       $13.18       $16.00       66,444       $13.11       $15.88       36,398  
2002
    $15.50       $13.29       235,769       $15.41       $13.18       76,461       $15.34       $13.11       36,624  
2001
    $15.91       $15.50       316,790       $15.84       $15.41       85,642       $15.80       $15.34       43,025  
2000
    $16.01       $15.91       249,340       $15.98       $15.84       47,958       $15.95       $15.80       38,460  

Main Street® Core                                                                
2005
    $15.96       $16.68       439,048       $15.77       $16.45       121,078       $15.63       $16.28       71,572  
2004
    $14.77       $15.96       429,180       $14.63       $15.77       119,457       $14.52       $15.63       82,894  
2003
    $11.80       $14.77       501,228       $11.71       $14.63       144,049       $11.64       $14.52       97,490  
2002
    $16.71       $11.80       373,550       $16.61       $11.71       142,646       $16.54       $11.64       100,552  
2001
    $18.60       $16.71       486,163       $18.53       $16.61       180,975       $18.47       $16.54       127,795  
2000
    $20.22       $18.60       724,450       $20.18       $18.53       202,059       $20.15       $18.47       142,904  

Emerging Markets                                                                
2005
    $12.21       $17.03       301,377       $12.06       $16.80       84,168       $11.96       $16.62       31,082  
2004
    $9.20       $12.21       297,245       $9.11       $12.06       75,508       $9.04       $11.96       30,819  
2003
    $5.54       $9.20       234,879       $5.49       $9.11       70,810       $5.46       $9.04       34,134  
2002
    $5.79       $5.54       235,161       $5.76       $5.49       67,149       $5.73       $5.46       26,351  
2001
    $6.43       $5.79       295,240       $6.41       $5.76       85,950       $6.39       $5.73       27,845  
2000
    $10.14       $6.43       260,387       $10.12       $6.41       77,814       $10.11       $6.39       25,872  

Managed Bond                                                                
2005
    $16.08       $16.27       747,894       $15.89       $16.05       141,246       $15.75       $15.88       80,020  
2004
    $15.47       $16.08       821,361       $15.32       $15.89       153,519       $15.21       $15.75       124,002  
2003
    $14.77       $15.47       1,045,546       $14.65       $15.32       192,351       $14.57       $15.21       152,563  
2002
    $13.50       $14.77       1,524,391       $13.42       $14.65       273,426       $13.36       $14.57       219,093  
2001
    $12.76       $13.50       1,853,547       $12.71       $13.42       328,780       $12.67       $13.36       229,185  
2000
    $11.60       $12.76       931,407       $11.58       $12.71       170,784       $11.56       $12.67       107,675  

Inflation Managed                                                                
2005
    $16.88       $17.07       666,691       $16.68       $16.83       108,556       $16.53       $16.66       48,023  
2004
    $15.72       $16.88       727,471       $15.56       $16.68       109,097       $15.45       $16.53       64,305  
2003
    $14.73       $15.72       815,688       $14.61       $15.56       130,364       $14.52       $15.45       71,045  
2002
    $12.94       $14.73       942,533       $12.86       $14.61       135,716       $12.80       $14.52       103,323  
2001
    $12.58       $12.94       703,795       $12.53       $12.86       105,804       $12.49       $12.80       65,875  
2000
    $11.41       $12.58       513,300       $11.38       $12.53       79,227       $11.37       $12.49       58,293  

Money Market                                                                
2005
    $12.26       $12.43       232,160       $12.12       $12.26       31,387       $12.01       $12.13       22,445  
2004
    $12.31       $12.26       324,709       $12.19       $12.12       50,417       $12.10       $12.01       23,988  
2003
    $12.39       $12.31       428,766       $12.29       $12.19       93,959       $12.22       $12.10       47,722  
2002
    $12.39       $12.39       888,527       $12.31       $12.29       184,006       $12.26       $12.22       139,002  
2001
    $12.10       $12.39       1,082,193       $12.05       $12.31       250,652       $12.01       $12.26       204,875  
2000
    $11.55       $12.10       1,048,076       $11.53       $12.05       181,360       $11.51       $12.01       130,783  

High Yield Bond                                                                
2005
    $14.09       $14.22       232,970       $13.92       $14.03       41,360       $13.80       $13.88       21,235  
2004
    $13.06       $14.09       296,575       $12.93       $13.92       54,682       $12.83       $13.80       29,298  
2003
    $11.01       $13.06       419,312       $10.92       $12.93       69,930       $10.86       $12.83       38,353  
2002
    $11.51       $11.01       329,659       $11.44       $10.92       66,373       $11.39       $10.86       40,330  
2001
    $11.52       $11.51       310,057       $11.47       $11.44       67,597       $11.44       $11.39       44,400  
2000
    $12.13       $11.52       197,365       $12.10       $11.47       34,971       $12.09       $11.44       38,549  

 
68


Table of Contents


                                                                         
With Stepped-Up
With Standard Death Benefit Death Benefit Rider With Premier Death Benefit Rider



Number of Number of Number of
Subaccount Subaccount Subaccount
AUV at AUV Units AUV at AUV Units AUV at AUV Units
Beginning at End Outstanding Beginning at End Outstanding Beginning at End Outstanding
of Year of Year at End of Year of Year of Year at End of Year of Year of Year at End of Year

Large-Cap Value                                                                
2005
    $12.65       $13.24       591,548       $12.50       $13.06       176,731       $12.39       $12.92       74,031  
2004
    $11.67       $12.65       1,119,531       $11.55       $12.50       279,696       $11.47       $12.39       130,013  
2003
    $9.02       $11.67       1,279,499       $8.95       $11.55       307,299       $8.89       $11.47       150,451  
2002
    $11.87       $9.02       1,323,707       $11.80       $8.95       335,730       $11.75       $8.89       167,731  
2001
    $12.49       $11.87       1,388,991       $12.44       $11.80       343,633       $12.41       $11.75       176,129  
2000
    $10.99       $12.49       370,388       $10.97       $12.44       102,960       $10.95       $12.41       54,494  

Comstock6                                                                
2005
    $9.95       $10.24       476,710       $9.87       $10.14       98,473       $9.81       $10.06       25,092  
2004
    $8.62       $9.95       444,844       $8.56       $9.87       98,487       $8.52       $9.81       41,297  
2003
    $6.65       $8.62       411,986       $6.62       $8.56       99,377       $6.60       $8.52       51,040  
2002
    $8.66       $6.65       178,686       $8.64       $6.62       48,813       $8.62       $6.60       14,087  
2001
    $9.75       $8.66       238,806       $9.74       $8.64       50,417       $9.74       $8.62       16,437  
2000
    $10.00       $9.75       90,168       $10.00       $9.74       10,501       $10.00       $9.74       12,289  

Mid-Cap Growth8                                                                
2005
    $6.45       $7.49       292,874       $6.39       $7.42       68,337       $6.36       $7.36       17,528  
2004
    $5.38       $6.45       238,633       $5.34       $6.39       73,408       $5.32       $6.36       13,138  
2003
    $4.18       $5.38       319,433       $4.16       $5.34       46,408       $4.15       $5.32       17,619  
2002
    $8.01       $4.18       202,704       $7.99       $4.16       46,008       $7.98       $4.15       11,911  
2001
    $10.00       $8.01       172,014       $10.00       $7.99       32,020       $10.00       $7.98       13,270  

Real Estate                                                                
2005
    $25.00       $28.79       161,278       $24.70       $28.39       37,051       $24.48       $28.09       13,448  
2004
    $18.42       $25.00       210,162       $18.24       $24.70       47,204       $18.10       $24.48       15,233  
2003
    $13.58       $18.42       268,185       $13.48       $18.24       57,710       $13.39       $18.10       29,940  
2002
    $13.82       $13.58       275,821       $13.74       $13.48       70,497       $13.68       $13.39       46,416  
2001
    $12.91       $13.82       303,119       $12.86       $13.74       79,343       $12.82       $13.68       30,363  
2000
    $9.86       $12.91       181,524       $9.84       $12.86       64,951       $9.83       $12.82       27,672  

VN Small-Cap Value10                                                                
05/2005-12/2005
    $10.15       $11.43       26,517       $10.15       $11.41       18,144       $10.15       $11.40       3,387  

 1  This Subaccount began operations on January 03, 2000.
 2  This Subaccount began operations on May 02, 2005.
 3  This Subaccount began operations on January 03, 2001.
 4  This Subaccount began operations on May 01, 2003.
 5  This Subaccount began operations on May 01, 2000.
 6  This Subaccount began operations on October 02, 2000.
 7  This Subaccount began operations on January 04, 2001.
 8  This Subaccount began operations on January 02, 2001.
 9    Formerly called Blue Chip.
10   This Subaccount began operations on May 06, 2005.
 
69


Table of Contents


FEDERAL TAX STATUS

The following summary of federal income tax consequences is based on our understanding of current tax laws and regulations, which may be changed by legislative, judicial or administrative action. The summary is general in nature and is not intended as tax advice. Moreover, it does not consider any applicable foreign, state or local tax laws. We do not make any guarantee regarding the tax status, federal, foreign, state or local, of any Contract or any transaction involving the Contracts. Accordingly, you should consult a qualified tax adviser for complete information and advice before purchasing a Contract.

The following rules generally do not apply to variable annuity contracts held by or for non-natural persons (e.g., corporations) unless such an entity holds the contract as agent for a natural person. If a contract is not owned or held by a natural person or as agent for a natural person, the contract generally will not be treated as an “annuity” for tax purposes, meaning that the contract owner will be taxed currently on annual increases in Contract Value at ordinary income rates unless some other exception applies.

Section 72 of the Code governs the taxation of annuities in general, and we designed the Contracts to meet the requirements of Section 72 of the Code. We believe that, under current law, the Contract will be treated as an annuity for federal income tax purposes if the Contract Owner is a natural person or an agent for a natural person, and that we (as the issuing insurance company), and not the Contract Owner(s), will be treated as the owner of the investments underlying the Contract. Accordingly, no tax should be payable by you as a Contract Owner as a result of any increase in Contract Value until you receive money under your Contract. You should, however, consider how amounts will be taxed when you do receive them. The following discussion assumes that your Contract will be treated as an annuity for federal income tax purposes.

Section 817(h) of the Code provides that the investments underlying a variable annuity must satisfy certain diversification requirements. Details on these diversification requirements appear in the Fund’s SAI. We believe the underlying Variable Investment Options for the Contract meet these requirements. In connection with the issuance of temporary regulations relating to diversification requirements under Section 817(h), the Treasury Department announced that such regulations do not provide guidance concerning the extent to which you may direct your investments to particular divisions of a separate account. Such guidance may be included in regulations or revenue rulings under Section 817(d) relating to the definition of a variable contract. We reserve the right to make such changes as we deem necessary or appropriate to ensure that your Contract continues to qualify as an annuity for tax purposes. Any such changes will apply uniformly to affected Contract Owners and will be made with such notice to affected Contract Owners as is feasible under the circumstances.

For a variable life insurance contract or a variable annuity contract to qualify for tax deferral, assets in the separate accounts supporting the contract must be considered to be owned by the insurance company and not by the contract owner. Under current U.S. tax law, if a contract owner has excessive control over the investments made by a separate account, or the underlying fund, the contract owner will be taxed currently on income and gains from the account or fund. In other words, in such a case of “investor control” the contract owner would not derive the tax benefits normally associated with variable life insurance or variable annuities.

Generally, according to the IRS, there are two ways that impermissible investor control may exist. The first relates to the design of the contract or the relationship between the contract and a separate account or underlying fund. For example, at various times, the IRS has focused on, among other factors, the number and type of investment choices available pursuant to a given variable contract, whether the contract offers access to funds that are available to the general public, the number of transfers that a contract owner may make from one investment option to another, and the degree to which a contract owner may select or control particular investments.

With respect to this first aspect of investor control, we believe that the design of our contracts and the relationship between our contracts and the Portfolios satisfy the current view of the IRS on this subject, such that the investor control doctrine should not apply. However, because of some uncertainty with respect to this subject and because the IRS may issue further guidance on this subject, we reserve the right to make such changes as we deem necessary or appropriate to reduce the risk that your contract might not qualify as a life insurance contract or as an annuity for tax purposes.

The second way that impermissible investor control might exist concerns your actions. Under the IRS pronouncements, you may not select or control particular investments, other than choosing among broad investment choices such as selecting a particular Portfolio. You may not select or direct the purchase or sale of a

 
70


Table of Contents


particular investment of a Portfolio. All investment decisions concerning the Portfolios must be made by the portfolio manager for such Portfolio in his or her sole and absolute discretion, and not by the contract owner. Furthermore, under the IRS pronouncements, you may not communicate directly or indirectly with such a portfolio manager or any related investment officers concerning the selection, quality, or rate of return of any specific investment or group of investments held by a Portfolio.

Finally, the IRS may issue additional guidance on the investor control doctrine, which might further restrict your actions or features of the variable contract. Such guidance could be applied retroactively. If any of the rules outlined above are not complied with, the IRS may seek to tax you currently on income and gains from a Portfolio such that you would not derive the tax benefits normally associated with variable life insurance or variable annuities. Although highly unlikely, such an event may have an adverse impact on the fund and other variable contracts. We urge you to consult your own tax adviser with respect to the application of the investor control doctrine.

Taxes Payable by Contract Owners: General Rules

These general rules apply to Non-Qualified Contracts. As discussed below, however, tax rules may differ for Qualified Contracts and you should consult a qualified tax adviser if you are purchasing a Qualified Contract.

Distributions of net investment income or capital gains that each Subaccount receives from its corresponding Portfolio are automatically reinvested in such Portfolio unless we, on behalf of the Separate Account, elect otherwise. As noted above, you will be subject to federal income taxes on the investment income from your Contract only when it is distributed to you.

Multiple Contracts

All Non-Qualified Contracts that are issued by us, or our affiliates, to the same Owner during any calendar year are treated as one Contract for purposes of determining the amount includible in gross income under Code Section 72(e). Further, the Treasury Department has specific authority to issue regulations that prevent the avoidance of Section 72(e) through the serial purchase of Contracts or otherwise.

Taxes Payable on Withdrawals

Amounts you withdraw before annuitization, including amounts withdrawn from your Contract Value in connection with partial withdrawals for payment of any charges and fees, will be treated first as taxable income to the extent that your Contract Value exceeds the aggregate of your Investments (reduced by non-taxable amounts previously received), and then as non-taxable recovery of your Investments.

The assignment or pledge of (or agreement to assign or pledge) the value of the Contract for a loan will be treated as a withdrawal subject to these rules. Moreover, all annuity contracts issued to you in any given calendar year by us and any of our affiliates are treated as a single annuity contract for purposes of determining whether an amount is subject to tax under these rules. The Code further provides that the taxable portion of a withdrawal or other distribution may be subject to a penalty tax equal to 10% of that taxable portion unless the withdrawal is:

  •  made on or after the date you reach age 59 1/2,
 
  •  made by a Beneficiary after your death,
 
  •  attributable to your becoming disabled,
 
  •  in the form of level annuity payments under a lifetime annuity, or
 
  •  any distributions that are a part of a series of substantially equal periodic payments made (at least annually) over your life (or life expectancy) or the joint lives (or life expectancies) of you and your designated beneficiary.

Additional exceptions may apply to certain Qualified Contracts (see the Taxes Payable on Annuity Payments section).

 
71


Table of Contents


Taxes Payable on Optional Riders

It is our understanding that the charges relating to any optional death benefit rider are not subject to current taxation and we will not report them as such. However, the IRS may determine that these charges should be treated as partial withdrawals subject to current taxation to the extent of any gain and, if applicable, the 10% tax penalty. We reserve the right to report any optional death benefit rider charges as partial withdrawals if we believe that we would be expected to report them in accordance with IRS regulations.

The Contract offers an optional death benefit rider that, when combined with the Contract, may exceed the death benefit allowable under IRS Regulations. Although we believe that these regulations do not prohibit an optional death benefit rider from being added to your Contract if it is issued as a Traditional IRA, Roth IRA, or SIMPLE IRA, the law is unclear. It is possible that the IRS may disqualify the Contract if it is issued with an optional death benefit rider, which may result in certain deemed distributions, increases in taxes, or, possibly, tax penalties. You should consult with a qualified tax adviser before deciding to purchase any optional death benefit rider in connection with any IRA Contract.

Taxes Payable on Annuity Payments

A portion of each annuity payment you receive under a Contract generally will be treated as a partial recovery of Investments (as used here, “Investments” means the aggregate Investments less any amounts that were previously received under the Contract but not included in income) and will not be taxable. (In certain circumstances, subsequent modifications to an initially-established payment pattern may result in the imposition of a penalty tax.) The remainder of each annuity payment will be taxed as ordinary income. However, after the full amount of aggregate Investments has been recovered, the full amount of each annuity payment will be taxed as ordinary income. Exactly how an annuity payment is divided into taxable and non-taxable portions depends on the period over which annuity payments are expected to be received, which in turn is governed by the form of annuity selected and, where a lifetime annuity is chosen, by the life expectancy of the Annuitant(s) or payee(s). Such a payment may also be subject to a penalty tax.

Should the death of a Contract Owner cause annuity payments to cease before Investments have been fully recovered, an Annuitant (or in certain cases the Beneficiary) is allowed a deduction on the final tax return for the unrecovered Investments; however, if any remaining annuity payments are made to a Beneficiary, the Beneficiary will recover the balance of the Investments as payments are made. A lump sum payment taken in lieu of remaining monthly annuity payments is not considered an annuity payment for tax purposes. The portion of any lump sum payment to a Beneficiary in excess of aggregate unrecovered Investments would be subject to income tax.

If a Contract Owner dies before annuity payments begin, certain minimum distribution requirements apply. If a Contract Owner dies after the Annuity Date, the remaining interest in the Contract must be distributed at least as rapidly as under the method of distribution in effect on the date of death.

Generally, the same tax rules apply to amounts received by the Beneficiary as those set forth above, except that the early withdrawal penalty tax does not apply. Thus, any annuity payments or lump sum withdrawal will be divided into taxable and non-taxable portions. If the Contract Owner or Annuitant dies and within sixty days after the date on which a lump sum death benefit first becomes payable the designated recipient elects to receive annuity payments in lieu of the lump sum death benefit, then the designated recipient will not be treated for tax purposes as having received the lump sum death benefit in the tax year it first becomes payable. Rather, in that case, the designated recipient will be taxed on the annuity payments as they are received.

Any amount payable upon the Contract Owner’s death, whether before or after the Annuity Date, will be included in the estate of the Contract Owner for federal estate tax purposes. In addition, designation of a non-spouse Beneficiary who either is 37 1/2 or more years younger than a Contract Owner or is a grandchild of a Contract Owner may have Generation Skipping Transfer Tax consequences under section 2601 of the Code.

Generally, gifts of Non-Qualified Contracts prior to the annuity start date will trigger tax on the gain on the Contract, with the donee getting a stepped-up basis for the amount included in the donor’s income. The 10% penalty tax and gift tax also may be applicable. This provision does not apply to transfers between spouses or incident to a divorce, or transfers to and from a trust acting as agent for the Owner or the Owner’s spouse.

 
72


Table of Contents


Qualified Contracts

The Contracts are available to a variety of Qualified Plans. Tax restrictions and consequences for Contracts under each type of Qualified Plan differ from each other and from those for Non-Qualified Contracts. In addition, individual Qualified Plans may have terms and conditions that impose additional rules. Therefore, no attempt is made herein to provide more than general information about the use of the Contract with the various types of Qualified Plans. Participants under such Qualified Plans, as well as Contract Owners, Annuitants and Beneficiaries, are cautioned that the rights of any person to any benefits under such Qualified Plans may be subject to the terms and conditions of the Plans themselves or limited by applicable law, regardless of the terms and conditions of the Contract issued in connection therewith. Qualified Plans generally provide for the tax deferral of income regardless of whether the Qualified Plan invests in an annuity or other investment. It’s important to know that Qualified Plans such as 401(k)s, as well as IRAs, are already tax-deferred. Therefore, an annuity contract should be used to fund an IRA or Qualified Plan to benefit from the annuity’s features other than tax deferral. The other benefits of using a variable annuity to fund a Qualified Plan or an IRA include the lifetime income options, guaranteed death benefit options and the ability to transfer among investment options without sales or withdrawal charges. You should consider if the Contract is a suitable investment if you are investing through a Qualified Plan.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

The following is only a general discussion about types of Qualified Plans for which the Contracts are available. We are not the administrator of any Qualified Plan. The plan administrator and/or custodian, whichever is applicable, (but not us) is responsible for all Plan administrative duties including, but not limited to, notification of distribution options, disbursement of Plan benefits, handling any processing and administration of Qualified Plan loans, compliance regulatory requirements and federal and state tax reporting of income/ distributions from the Plan to Plan participants and, if applicable, Beneficiaries of Plan participants and IRA contributions from Plan participants. Our administrative duties are limited to administration of the Contract and any disbursements of any Contract benefits to the Owner, Annuitant, or Beneficiary of the Contract, as applicable. Our tax reporting responsibility is limited to federal and state tax reporting of income/ distributions to the applicable payee and IRA contributions from the Owner of a Contract, as recorded on our books and records. The Qualified Plan (the plan administrator or the custodian) is required to provide us with information regarding individuals with signatory authority on the Contract(s) owned. If you are purchasing a Qualified Contract, you should consult with your plan administrator and/or a qualified tax adviser. You should also consult with a qualified tax adviser and/or plan administrator before you withdraw any portion of your Contract Value.

IRAs and Other Qualified Contracts with Optional Benefit Riders

As of the date of this Prospectus, there are special considerations for purchases of any optional living or death benefit riders. IRS regulations state that Individual Retirement Accounts (IRAs) may generally not invest in life insurance contracts. We believe that these regulations do not prohibit the optional living or death benefit riders from being added to your Contract if it is issued as a Traditional IRA, Roth IRA, or SIMPLE IRA. However, the law is unclear and it is possible that a Contract that has optional living or death benefit riders and is issued as a Traditional IRA, Roth IRA, or SIMPLE IRA could be disqualified and may result in increased taxes to the Owner.

Similarly, section 401 plans, section 403(b), 457(b) annuities and IRAs (but not Roth IRAs) can only offer incidental death benefits. The Internal Revenue Service (IRS) could take the position that the enhanced death benefits provided by optional benefit riders are not incidental.

In addition, to the extent that the optional benefit riders alter the timing or the amount of the payment of distributions under a Qualified Contract, the riders cannot be paid out in violation of the minimum distribution rules of the Code.

It is our understanding that the charges relating to the optional benefit riders are not subject to current taxation and we will not report them as such. However, the IRS may determine that these charges should be treated as partial withdrawals subject to current income taxation to the extent of any gain and, if applicable, the 10% tax penalty. We reserve the right to report the rider charges as partial withdrawals if we believe that we would be expected to report them in accordance with IRS regulations.

 
73


Table of Contents


Individual Retirement Annuities (“IRAs”)

In addition to “traditional” IRAs established under Code 408, there are Roth IRAs governed by Code Section 408A and SIMPLE IRAs established under Code Section 408(p). Also, Qualified Plans under Section 401, 403(b), or 457(b) of the Code that include after-tax employee contributions may be treated as deemed IRAs subject to the same rules and limitations as traditional IRAs. Contributions to each of these types of IRAs are subject to differing limitations. The following is a very general description of each type of IRA and other Qualified Plans:

Traditional IRAs

Traditional IRAs are subject to limitations on the amount that may be contributed each year (these contribution limits are scheduled to increase over the next several years), the persons who may be eligible, and on the time when distributions must commence. Depending upon the circumstances of the individual, contributions to a traditional IRA may be made on a deductible or non-deductible basis. Failure to make mandatory distributions may result in imposition of a 50% penalty tax on any difference between the required distribution amount and the amount actually distributed. A 10% penalty tax is imposed on the amount includable in gross income from distributions that occur before you attain age 59 1/2 and that are not made on account of death or disability, with certain exceptions. These exceptions include:

  •  distributions that are part of a series of substantially equal periodic payments made (at least annually) over your life (or life expectancy) or the joint lives (or joint life expectancies) of you and your designated beneficiary,
 
  •  certain higher education expenses,
 
  •  used to pay for certain health insurance premiums or medical expenses, and
 
  •  costs related to the purchase of your first home.

Distributions of minimum amounts specified by the Code must commence by April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which you attain age 70 1/2. Additional distribution rules apply after your death.

You (or your surviving spouse if you die) may rollover funds from certain existing Qualified Plans (such as proceeds from existing insurance policies, annuity contracts or securities) into your traditional IRA if those funds are in cash. This will require you to liquidate any value accumulated under the existing Qualified Plan. Mandatory withholding of 20% may apply to any rollover distribution from your existing Qualified Plan if the distribution is not transferred directly to your traditional IRA. To avoid this withholding you should have cash transferred directly from the insurance company or plan trustee to your traditional IRA. Similar limitations and tax penalties apply to tax sheltered annuities, government plans under section 457(b), 401(k) plans, and pension and profit-sharing plans.

Special rules may be available for victims of Hurricanes Katrina, Rita or Wilma. See the APPENDIX F: KETRA Provisions section in this Prospectus.

SIMPLE IRAs

The Savings Incentive Match Plan for Employees of Small Employers (“SIMPLE Plans”) is a type of Qualified Plan. Depending upon the SIMPLE Plan, employers may make plan contributions into a SIMPLE IRA established by each eligible participant. Like other Qualified Plans, a 10% penalty tax is imposed on certain distributions that occur before you attain age 59 1/2. In addition, the penalty tax is increased to 25% for amounts received or rolled to another Qualified Plan during the 2-year period beginning on the date you first participated in a qualified salary reduction arrangement pursuant to a SIMPLE Plan maintained by the individual’s employer under Code Section 408(p)(2). Contributions to a SIMPLE IRA will include salary deferral contributions and employer contributions. Distributions from a SIMPLE IRA may be transferred over to another SIMPLE IRA tax free or may be eligible for tax free rollover to a traditional IRA, 403(b) annuity contract, contracts pursuant to section 457(b) of the Code, or other Qualified Plan after a required 2-year waiting period.

Roth IRAs

Section 408A of the Code permits eligible individuals to establish a Roth IRA. Contributions to a Roth IRA are not deductible, but withdrawals of amounts contributed and the earnings thereon that meet certain requirements are not subject to federal income tax. In general, Roth IRAs are subject to limitations on the amount that may be

 
74


Table of Contents


contributed and the persons who may be eligible to contribute and are subject to certain required distribution rules on the death of the Contract Owner. Unlike a traditional IRA, Roth IRAs are not subject to minimum required distribution rules during the Contract Owner’s lifetime. Generally, however, the amount remaining in a Roth IRA must be distributed by the end of the fifth year after the death of the Contract Owner/ Annuitant or distributed over the life expectancy of the Designated Beneficiary. The owner of a traditional IRA may convert a traditional IRA into a Roth IRA under certain circumstances. The conversion of a traditional IRA to a Roth IRA will subject the amount of the converted traditional IRA to federal income tax. Anyone considering the purchase of a Qualified Contract as a Roth IRA or a “conversion” Roth IRA should consult with a qualified tax adviser.

In accordance with recent changes in laws and regulations, at the time of either a full or partial conversion from a Traditional IRA annuity to a Roth IRA annuity, the determination of the amount to be reported as income will be based on the annuity contract’s “fair market value”, which will include all front-end loads and other non-recurring charges assessed in the 12 months immediately preceding the conversion, and the actuarial present value of any additional contract benefits.

Tax Sheltered Annuities (“TSAs”)

Section 403(b) of the Code permits public school systems and certain tax-exempt organizations to adopt annuity plans for their employees. Investments made on Contracts purchased for these employees are excludable from the employees’ gross income (subject to maximum contribution limits). Distributions under these Contracts must comply with certain limitations as to timing, or result in tax penalties. Distributions from amounts contributed to a TSA pursuant to a salary reduction arrangement, may be made from a TSA only upon attaining age 59 1/2, severance from employment, death, disability, or financial hardship. Section 403(b) annuity distributions can be rolled over to other Qualified Plans in a manner similar to those permitted by Qualified Plans that are maintained pursuant to Section 401 of the Code.

Section 457(b) Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation Plans

Government Entity

Employees of a governmental entity may defer compensation through an eligible plan under Code section 457(b). Contributions to a Contract of an eligible plan are subject to limitations. Subject to a qualifying triggering event, section 457(b) governmental plans may be transferred or rolled into another Qualified Plan. The Qualified Plan must allow the transfer or rollover. If a rollover to an IRA is completed, the assets become subject to the 10% penalty in distributions prior to age 59 1/2. Assets from other plans may be rolled into a governmental 457(b) plan if the plan allows and the investment provider is able to segregate the assets for tax reporting purposes. Consult both the distributing plan and the receiving plan prior to making this election.

Not-For-Profit

Employees of a not-for-profit entity may defer compensation through an eligible plan under Code section 457(b). Contributions to a Qualified Contract maintained under section 457(b) of the Code by an employee of a not-for-profit entity are subject to limitations, and may not be rolled over to another Qualified Plan at any time.

401(k) Plans; Pension and Profit-Sharing Plans

Qualified Plans may be established by an employer for certain eligible employees under Section 401 of the Code. These plans may be 401(k) plans, profit-sharing plans, or other pension or retirement plans. Contributions to these plans are subject to limitations. Rollover to other eligible plans may be available. Please consult your Qualified Plans Summary Plan description for more information.

Catch-Up Provision

Generally, Qualified Plan and IRA Participants over the age of 50 may contribute additional amounts as catch-up contributions if the terms of the Plan so permit.

 
75


Table of Contents


Required Minimum Distributions

The IRC and regulations provide that you cannot keep assets in qualified plans or IRAs indefinitely. Eventually they are required to be distributed; at that time (the Required Beginning Date (RBD)), Required Minimum Distributions (RMDs) are the amount that must be distributed each year.

Under Section 401 of the Code (for Qualified Plans) and Section 408 of the Code (for IRAs), the entire interest under the Contract must be distributed to the Owner/ Annuitant no later than the Owner/ Annuitant’s RBD, or distributions over the life of the Owner/ Annuitant (or the Owner/ Annuitant and his beneficiary) must begin no later than the RBD.

The RBD for distributions from a Qualified Contract maintained for an IRA under Section 408 of the Code is generally April 1 of the calendar year following the year in which the Owner/ Annuitant reaches age 70 1/2. The RBD for a Qualified Contract maintained for a qualified retirement or pension plan under Section 401 of the Code or a Section 403(b) annuity is April 1 of the calendar year following the later of the year in which the Owner/ Annuitant reached 70 1/2, or, if the plan so provides, the year in which the Owner/ Annuitant retires. There is no RBD for a Roth IRA maintained pursuant to Section 408A of the Code.

The IRS issued Final and Temporary Regulations on April 17, 2002. Effective January 1, 2003, the IRS requires that all IRA holders and Qualified Plan Participants (with one exception discussed below) use the Uniform Lifetime Table to calculate their RMDs.

The Uniform Lifetime Table is based on a joint life expectancy and uses the IRA owner’s actual age and assumes that the beneficiary is 10 years younger than the IRA owner. Note that under these final regulations, the IRA owner does not need to actually have a named beneficiary when they turn 70 1/2.

The exception noted above is for an IRA owner who has a spouse, who is more than 10 years younger, as the sole beneficiary on the IRA. In that situation, the spouse’s actual age (and life expectancy) will be used in the joint life calculation.

Under the Final Regulations, for retirement plans that qualify under Section 401 or 408 of the Code, the period elected for receipt of RMDs or annuity payments under Annuity Options 2 and 4 generally may be:

  •  no longer than the joint life expectancy of the Annuitant and Beneficiary in the year that the Annuitant reaches age 70 1/2, and
 
  •  must be shorter than such joint life expectancy if the Beneficiary is not the Annuitant’s spouse and is more than 10 years younger than the Annuitant.

Under Option 3, if the Beneficiary is not the Annuitant’s spouse and is more than 10 years younger than the Annuitant, the 66 2/3% and 100% elections specified below may not be available. The restrictions on options for retirement plans that qualify under Sections 401 and 408 also apply to a retirement plan that qualifies under Section 403(b) with respect to amounts that accrued after December 31, 1986.

If the Owner/ Annuitant dies prior to (i) his RBD, or (ii) complete distribution from the Qualified Contract, the remainder shall be distributed as provided in the “Qualified Plan Death of Annuitant Distribution Rules”. Life expectancy is initially computed by use of the Single Life Table of the Final and Temporary Regulations, issued April 17, 2002 (Regulation Section 1.401(a)(9)-9). Congress recently required the IRS to update these tables to reflect increased life expectancies. Subsequent life expectancy shall be calculated by reducing the life expectancy of the Beneficiary (or Owner/ Annuitant) by one in each following calendar year.

For calendar year 2003 and thereafter, taxpayers (and the underlying Qualified Plan) must rely on the Final and Temporary Regulations (discussed above) for determining RMDs. If any future guidance from the IRS is more restrictive than the guidance in these Final and Temporary Regulations, the future guidance will be issued without retroactive effect.

The method of distribution selected must comply with the minimum distribution rules of Code Section 401(a)(9), and the applicable proposed Regulations thereunder.

 
76


Table of Contents


Actuarial Value

In accordance with recent changes in laws and regulations, RMDs may be calculated based on the sum of the contract value and the actuarial value of any additional death benefits and benefits from optional riders that you have purchased under the Contract. As a result, RMDs may be larger than if the calculation were based on the contract value only, which may in turn result in an earlier (but not before the required beginning date) distribution under the Contract and an increased amount of taxable income distributed to the contract owner, and a reduction of death benefits and the benefits of any optional riders.

Loans

Certain Owners of Qualified Contracts may borrow against their Contracts. Otherwise loans from us are not permitted. You may request a loan from us, using your Contract Value as your only security if yours is a Qualified Contract that is:

  •  not subject to Title 1 of ERISA,
 
  •  issued under Section 403(b) of the Code, and
 
  •  permits loans under its terms (a “Loan Eligible Plan”).

You will be charged interest on your Contract Debt at a fixed annual rate equal to 5%. The amount held in the Loan Account to secure your loan will earn a return equal to an annual rate of 3%. This loan rate may vary by state.

Interest charges accrue on your Contract Debt daily, beginning on the effective date of your loan. Interest earned on the Loan Account Value accrue daily beginning on the day following the effective date of the loan, and those earnings will be transferred once a year to your Investment Options in accordance with your most recent allocation instructions.

We may change these loan provisions to reflect changes in the Code or interpretations thereof.

Special rules may be available for victims of Hurricanes Katrina, Rita or Wilma. See the APPENDIX F: KETRA Provisions section in this Prospectus.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Tax and Legal Matters

The tax and ERISA rules relating to Contract loans are complex and in many cases unclear. For these reasons, and because the rules vary depending on the individual circumstances, these loans are processed by your Plan Administrator. We urge you to consult with a qualified tax adviser prior to effecting any loan transaction under your Contract.

Generally, interest paid on your loan under a 403(b) tax-sheltered annuity will be considered non-deductible “personal interest” under Section 163(h) of the Code, to the extent the loan comes from and is secured by your pre-tax contributions, even if the proceeds of your loan are used to acquire your principal residence.

Loan Procedures

Your loan request must be submitted on our Non-ERISA TSA Application and Loan Agreement Form. You may submit a loan request 30 days after your Contract Date and before your Annuity Date. However, before requesting a new loan, you must wait thirty days after the last payment of a previous loan. If approved, your loan will usually be effective as of the end of the Business Day on which we receive all necessary documentation in proper form. We will normally forward proceeds of your loan to you within 7 calendar days after the effective date of your loan.

In order to secure your loan, on the effective date of your loan, we will transfer an amount equal to the principal amount of your loan into an account called the “Loan Account.” The Loan Account is held under the General Account. To make this transfer, we will transfer amounts proportionately from your Investment Options based, on your Account Value in each Investment Option.

 
77


Table of Contents


As your loan is repaid, a portion, corresponding to the amount of the repayment of any amount then held as security for your loan, will be transferred from the Loan Account back into your Investment Options relative to your most recent allocation instructions.

A transfer from the Loan Account back into your Investment Options following a loan repayment is not considered a transfer under the transfer limitations as stated in the HOW YOUR INVESTMENTS ARE ALLOCATED— Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions section in this Prospectus.

Loan Terms

You may have only one loan outstanding at any time. The minimum loan amount is $1,000, subject to certain state limitations. Your Contract Debt at the effective date of your loan may not exceed the lesser of:

  •  50% of your Contract Value, or
 
  •  $50,000 less your highest outstanding Contract Debt during the 12-month period immediately preceding the effective date of your loan.

You should refer to the terms of your particular Loan Eligible Plan for any additional loan restrictions. If you have other loans outstanding pursuant to other Loan Eligible Plans, the amount you may borrow may be further restricted. We are not responsible for making any determinations (including loan amounts permitted) or any interpretations with respect to your Loan Eligible Plan.

If you purchase the GPA 5, GPA, GIA Plus, GIA 5, Lifetime Income Access Plus, Income Access Plus, or the Income Access Riders, there may be adverse consequences to taking a loan while these Riders are in effect. If you have an existing loan on your Contract, you should carefully consider whether these Riders are appropriate for you.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Repayment Terms

Your loan, including principal and accrued interest, generally must be repaid in quarterly installments. An installment will be due in each quarter on the date corresponding to the effective date of your loan, beginning with the first such date following the effective date of your loan.

  Example: On May 1, we receive your loan request, and your loan is effective. Your first quarterly payment will be due on August 1.

Adverse tax consequences may result if you fail to meet the repayment requirements for your loan. You must repay principal and interest of any loan in substantially equal payments over the term of the loan. Generally, the term of the loan will be 5 years from the effective date of the loan. However, if you have certified to us that your loan proceeds are to be used to acquire a principal residence for yourself, you may request a loan term of 30 years. In either case, however, you must repay your loan prior to your Annuity Date. If you elect to annuitize (or withdraw) your Net Contract Value while you have an outstanding loan, we will deduct any Contract Debt from your Contract Value at the time of the annuitization (or withdrawal) to repay the Contract Debt.

You may prepay your entire loan at any time. If you do so, we will bill you for any unpaid interest that has accrued through the date of payoff. Your loan will be considered repaid only when the interest due has been paid. Subject to any necessary approval of state insurance authorities, while you have Contract Debt outstanding, we will treat all payments you send us as Investments unless you specifically indicate that your payment is a loan repayment or include your loan payment notice with your payment. To the extent allowed by law, any loan repayments in excess of the amount then due will be applied to the principal balance of your loan. Such repayments will not change the due dates or the periodic repayment amount due for future periods. If a loan repayment is in excess of the principal balance of your loan, any excess repayment will be refunded to you. Repayments we receive that are less than the amount then due will be returned to you, unless otherwise required by law.

If we have not received your full payment by its due date, we will declare the entire remaining loan balance in default. At that time, we will send written notification of the amount needed to bring the loan back to a current

 
78


Table of Contents


status. You will have sixty (60) days from the date on which the loan was declared in default (the “grace period”) to make the required payment.

If the required payment is not received by the end of the grace period, the defaulted loan balance plus accrued interest and any withdrawal charge will be withdrawn from your Contract Value, if amounts under your Contract are eligible for distribution. In order for an amount to be eligible for distribution from a TSA funded by salary reductions you must meet one of five triggering events. The triggering events are:

 

  •  attainment of age 59 1/2,
 
  •  severance from employment,
 
  •  death,
 
  •  disability, and
 
  •  financial hardship (with respect to contributions only, not income or earnings on these contributions).

If those amounts are not eligible for distribution, the defaulted loan balance plus accrued interest and any withdrawal charge will be considered a Deemed Distribution and will be withdrawn when such Contract Values become eligible. In either case, the Distribution or the Deemed Distribution will be considered a currently taxable event, and may be subject to federal tax withholding, the withdrawal charge and the federal early withdrawal penalty tax.

If there is a Deemed Distribution under your Contract and to the extent allowed by law, any future withdrawals will first be applied as repayment of the defaulted Contract Debt, including accrued interest and charges for applicable taxes. Any amounts withdrawn and applied as repayment of Contract Debt will first be withdrawn from your Loan Account, and then from your Investment Options on a proportionate basis relative to the Account Value in each Investment Option. If you have an outstanding loan that is in default, the defaulted Contract Debt will be considered a withdrawal for the purpose of calculating any Death Benefit Amount and/or Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit.

The terms of any such loan are intended to qualify for the exception in Code Section 72(p)(2) so that the distribution of the loan proceeds will not constitute a distribution that is taxable to you. To that end, these loan provisions will be interpreted to ensure and maintain such tax qualification, despite any other provisions to the contrary. Subject to any regulatory approval, we reserve the right to amend your Contract to reflect any clarifications that may be needed or are appropriate to maintain such tax qualification or to conform any terms of our loan arrangement with you to any applicable changes in the tax qualification requirements. We will send you a copy of any such amendment. If you refuse such an amendment, it may result in adverse tax consequences to you.

Special rules may be available for victims of Hurricanes Katrina, Rita or Wilma. See the APPENDIX F: KETRA Provisions section in this Prospectus.

Withholding

Unless you elect to the contrary, any amounts you receive under your Contract that are attributable to investment income will be subject to withholding to meet federal and state income tax obligations. The rate of withholding on annuity payments made to you will be determined on the basis of the withholding information you provide to us with your application. If you do not provide us with required withholding information, we will withhold, from every withdrawal from your Contract and from every annuity payment to you, the appropriate percentage of the taxable amount of the payment. Please call us at 1-800-722-2333 with any questions about the required withholding information. For purposes of determining your withholding rate on annuity payments, you will be treated as a married person with 3 exemptions. The rate of withholding on all other payments made to you under your Contract, such as amounts you receive upon withdrawals, will be 10%, unless otherwise specified by the Code. Generally, there will be no withholding for taxes until you actually receive payments under your Contract.

Distributions from a Contract under a Qualified Plan (not including an individual retirement annuity subject to Code Section 408 or Code Section 408A) to an employee, surviving spouse, or former spouse who is an alternate payee under a qualified domestic relations order, in the form of a lump sum settlement or periodic annuity

 
79


Table of Contents


payments for a fixed period of fewer than 10 years are subject to mandatory income tax withholding of 20% of the taxable amount of the distribution, unless:

  •  the distributee directs the transfer of such amounts in cash to another Qualified Plan or a traditional IRA, or
 
  •  the payment is a minimum distribution required under the Code.

The taxable amount is the amount of the distribution less the amount allocable to after-tax contributions. All other types of taxable distributions are subject to withholding unless the distributee elects not to have withholding apply.

Certain states have indicated that pension and annuity withholding will apply to payments made to residents. Generally, an election out of federal withholding will also be considered an election out of state withholding.

Taxable distributions to Contract Owners who are non-resident aliens or other non U.S. persons are generally subject to U.S. federal income tax withholding at a 30% rate, unless a lower treaty rate applies. Prospective foreign owners are advised to consult with a tax advisor regarding the U.S., state and foreign tax treatment of a Contract.

Impact of Federal Income Taxes

In general, in the case of Non-Qualified Contracts, if you are an individual and expect to accumulate your Contract Value over a relatively long period of time without making significant withdrawals, there may be federal income tax advantages in purchasing such a Contract. This is because any increase in Contract Value is not subject to current taxation. Income taxes are deferred until the money is withdrawn, at which point taxation occurs only on the gain from the investment in the Contract. With income taxes deferred, you may accumulate more money over the long term through a variable annuity than you may through non-tax-deferred investments. The advantage may be greater if you decide to liquidate your Contract Value in the form of monthly annuity payments after your retirement, or if your tax rate is lower at that time than during the period that you held the Contract, or both.

When withdrawals or distributions are taken from the variable annuity, the gain is taxed as ordinary income. This may be a potential disadvantage because money that had been invested in other types of assets may qualify for a more favorable federal tax rate. For example, the tax rate applicable both to the sale of capital gain assets held more than 1 year and to the receipt of qualifying dividends by individuals is generally 15% (5% for lower-income individuals). In contrast, an ordinary income tax rate of up to 35% applies to taxable withdrawals on distributions from a variable annuity. Also, withdrawals or distributions taken from a variable annuity may be subject to a penalty tax equal to 10% of the taxable portion, although exceptions to the penalty tax may apply (see the WITHDRAWALS—Tax Consequences of Withdrawals section in this Prospectus).

An owner of a variable annuity cannot deduct or offset losses on transfers to or from Subaccounts, or at the time of any partial withdrawals. If you surrender your Contract and your Net Contract Value is less than the aggregate of your Investments in the Contract (reduced by any previous non-taxable distributions), there may be a deductible ordinary income loss, although the deduction may be limited. Consult with your tax adviser regarding the impact of federal income taxes on your specific situation.

Taxes on Pacific Life

Although the Separate Account is registered as an investment company, it is not a separate taxpayer for purposes of the Code. The earnings of the Separate Account are taxed as part of our operations. No charge is made against the Separate Account for our federal income taxes (excluding the charge for premium taxes), but we will review, periodically, the question of charges to the Separate Account or your Contract for such taxes. Such a charge may be made in future years for any federal income taxes that would be attributable to the Separate Account or to our operations with respect to your Contract, or attributable, directly or indirectly, to Investments on your Contract.

Under current law, we may incur state and local taxes (in addition to premium taxes) in several states. At present, these taxes are not significant and they are not charged against the Contract or the Separate Account. If there is a material change in applicable state or local tax laws, the imposition of any such taxes upon us that are attributable to the Separate Account or to our operations with respect to your Contract may result in a corresponding charge against the Separate Account or your Contract.

 
80


Table of Contents


ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Voting Rights

We are the legal owner of the shares of the Portfolios held by the Subaccounts. We may vote on any matter voted on at Fund shareholders’ meetings. However, our current interpretation of applicable law requires us to vote the number of shares attributable to your Variable Account Value (your “voting interest”) in accordance with your directions.

We will pass proxy materials on to you so that you have an opportunity to give us voting instructions for your voting interest. You may provide your instructions by proxy or in person at the shareholders’ meeting. If there are shares of a Portfolio held by a Subaccount for which we do not receive timely voting instructions, we will vote those shares in the same proportion as all other shares of that Portfolio held by that Subaccount for which we have received timely voting instructions. If we do not receive any voting instructions for the shares in a Separate Account, we will vote the shares in that Separate Account in the same proportion as the total votes for all of our separate accounts for which we’ve received timely instructions. If we hold shares of a Portfolio in our General Account, we will vote such shares in the same proportion as the total votes cast for all of our separate accounts, including Separate Account A. We will vote shares of any Portfolio held by our non-insurance affiliates in the same proportion as the total votes for all separate accounts of ours and our insurance affiliates.

We may elect, in the future, to vote shares of the Portfolios held in Separate Account A in our own right if we are permitted to do so through a change in applicable federal securities laws or regulations, or in their interpretation.

The number of Portfolio shares that form the basis for your voting interest is determined as of the record date set by the Board of Trustees of the Fund. It is equal to:

  •  your Contract Value allocated to the Subaccount corresponding to that Portfolio, divided by
 
  •  the net asset value per share of that Portfolio.

Fractional votes will be counted. We reserve the right, if required or permitted by a change in federal regulations or their interpretation, to amend how we calculate your voting interest.

After your Annuity Date, if you have selected a variable annuity, the voting rights under your Contract will continue during the payout period of your annuity, but the number of shares that form the basis for your voting interest, as described above, will decrease throughout the payout period.

Changes to Your Contract

Contract Owner(s) and Contingent Owner

Transfer of Contract ownership may involve federal income tax and/or gift tax consequences; you should consult a qualified tax adviser before effecting such a transfer. A change to or from joint Contract ownership is considered a transfer of ownership. If your Contract is Non-Qualified, you may change Contract ownership at any time while the Annuitant is living and prior to your Annuity Date. You may name a different Owner or add or remove a Joint Owner or Contingent Owner. A Contract cannot name more than two Contract Owners (either as Joint or Contingent Owners) at any time. Any newly-named Contract Owners, including Joint and/or Contingent Owners, must be under the age of 81 at the time of change or addition. If there are Joint Owners, the Contract will be owned as Joint Tenants With Right of Survivorship and not as Tenants in Common. The Contract Owner(s) may make all decisions regarding the Contract, including making allocation decisions and exercising voting rights. Transactions under a Contract with Joint Owners require approval from both Owners.

If your Contract is Qualified under Internal Revenue Code Sections 401(a) or 457, the Qualified Plan must be the sole Owner of the Contract and the ownership cannot be changed unless and until a triggering event has been met under the terms of the Qualified Plan. Upon such event, the ownership can only be changed to the Annuitant. If your Contract is Qualified under Internal Revenue Code Sections 408 and 403(b), you must be the sole Owner of the Contract and no changes can be made.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

 
81


Table of Contents


Annuitant and Contingent or Joint Annuitant

Your sole Annuitant cannot be changed, and Joint Annuitants cannot be added or changed, once your Contract is issued. Certain changes may be permitted in connection with Contingent Annuitants. See the ANNUITIZATION, DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS— Selecting Your Annuitant section in this Prospectus. There may be limited exceptions for certain Qualified Contracts.

Beneficiaries

Your Beneficiary is the person(s) who may receive death benefit proceeds under your Contract or any remaining annuity payments after the Annuity Date if the Annuitant or Owner dies. You may change or remove your Beneficiary or add Beneficiaries at any time prior to the death of the Annuitant or Owner, as applicable. Any change or addition will generally take effect only when we receive all necessary documents, in proper form, at our Service Center and we record the change or addition. Any change or addition will not affect any payment made or any other action taken by us before the change or addition was received and recorded.

Spousal consent may be required to change the Beneficiary of an IRA. If you have named your Beneficiary irrevocably, you will need to obtain that Beneficiary’s consent before making any changes. Qualified Contracts may have additional restrictions on naming and changing Beneficiaries. If your Contract was issued in connection with a Qualified Plan subject to Title I of ERISA, contact your Plan Administrator for details. We require that Contracts issued under Code Sections 401 and 457(b) name the Plan as Beneficiary. If you leave no surviving Beneficiary or Contingent Beneficiary, your estate will receive any death benefit proceeds under your Contract.

Changes to All Contracts

If, in the judgment of our management, continued investment by Separate Account A in one or more of the Portfolios becomes unsuitable or unavailable, we may seek to alter the Variable Investment Options available under the Contracts. We do not expect that a Portfolio will become unsuitable, but unsuitability issues could arise due to changes in investment policies, market conditions, tax laws, or due to marketing or other reasons.

Alterations of Variable Investment Options may take differing forms. We reserve the right to substitute shares of any Portfolio that were already purchased under any Contract (or shares that were to be purchased in the future under a Contract) with shares of another Portfolio, shares of another investment company or series of another investment company, or another investment vehicle. We may also purchase, through a Subaccount, other securities for other series or other classes of contracts, and may permit conversions or exchanges between series or classes of contracts on the basis of Contract Owner requests. Required approvals of the SEC and state insurance regulators will be obtained before any such substitutions are effected, and you will be notified of any planned substitution.

We may add new Subaccounts to Separate Account A, and any new Subaccounts may invest in Portfolios of the Fund or in other investment vehicles. Availability of any new Subaccounts to existing Contract Owners will be determined at our discretion. We will notify you, and will comply with the filing or other procedures established by applicable state insurance regulators, to the extent required by applicable law. We also reserve the right, after receiving any required regulatory approvals, to do any of the following:

 

  •  cease offering any Subaccount;
 
  •  add or change designated investment companies or their portfolios, or other investment vehicles;
 
  •  add, delete or make substitutions for the securities and other assets that are held or purchased by the Separate Account or any Variable Account;
 
  •  permit conversion or exchanges between portfolios and/or classes of contracts on the basis of Owners’ requests;
 
  •  add, remove or combine Variable Accounts;
 
  •  combine the assets of any Variable Account with any other of our separate accounts or of any of our affiliates;
 
  •  register or deregister Separate Account A or any Variable Account under the 1940 Act;
 
82


Table of Contents


  •  operate any Variable Account as a managed investment company under the 1940 Act, or any other form permitted by law;
 
  •  run any Variable Account under the direction of a committee, board, or other group;
 
  •  restrict or eliminate any voting rights of Owners with respect to any Variable Account or other persons who have voting rights as to any Variable Account;
 
  •  make any changes required by the 1940 Act or other federal securities laws;
 
  •  make any changes necessary to maintain the status of the Contracts as annuities under the Code;
 
  •  make other changes required under federal or state law relating to annuities;
 
  •  suspend or discontinue sale of the Contracts; and
 
  •  comply with applicable law.

Inquiries and Submitting Forms and Requests

You may reach our service representatives at 1-800-722-2333 between the hours of 6:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m., Pacific time.

Please send your forms and written requests or questions to:

  Pacific Life Insurance Company
P.O. Box 7187
Pasadena, California 91109-7187

If you are submitting an Investment or other payment by mail, please send it, along with your application if you are submitting one, to the following address or to the address indicated on your Contract specification pages, if different:

  Pacific Life Insurance Company
P.O. Box 100060
Pasadena, California 91189-0060

If you are using an overnight delivery service to send payments, please send them to the following address or to the address indicated on your Contract specification pages, if different:

  Pacific Life Insurance Company
1111 South Arroyo Parkway, Suite 205
Pasadena, California 91105

The effective date of certain notices or of instructions is determined by the date and time on which we “receive” the notice or instructions. We “receive” this information only when it arrives, in proper form, at the correct mailing address set out above. In those instances when we receive electronic transmission of the information on the application from your representative’s broker-dealer firm and our administrative procedures with your broker-dealer so provide, we consider the application to be received on the Business Day we receive the transmission. If the address on your Contract specification pages is different and our administrative procedures with your broker-dealer so provide, in those instances when information regarding your Investment is electronically transmitted to us by the broker-dealer, we will consider the Investment to be received by us on the Business Day we receive the transmission of the information. Please call us at 1-800-722-2333 if you have any questions regarding which address you should use.

We reserve the right to process any Investment received at an incorrect address when it is received at either the address indicated in your Contract specification pages or the appropriate address indicated in the Prospectus.

Investments after your initial Investment, loan requests, transfer requests, loan repayments and withdrawal requests we receive before the close of the New York Stock Exchange, which usually closes at 4:00 p.m. Eastern time, will normally be effective at the end of the same Business Day that we receive them in “proper form,” unless the transaction or event is scheduled to occur on another day. Generally, whenever you submit any other form, notice or request, your instructions will be effective on the next Business Day after we receive them in “proper form” unless the transaction or event is scheduled to occur on another day. “Proper form” means in a form satisfactory

 
83


Table of Contents


to us and may require, among other things, a signature guarantee or other verification of authenticity. We do not generally require a signature guarantee unless it appears that your signature may have changed over time or the signature does not appear to be yours; an executed application or confirmation of application, as applicable, in proper form is not received by us; or, to protect you or us. Requests regarding death benefit proceeds must be accompanied by both proof of death and instructions regarding payment satisfactory to us. You should call your registered representative or us if you have questions regarding the required form of a request.

Telephone and Electronic Transactions

You are automatically entitled to make certain transactions by telephone or, to the extent available, electronically. You may also authorize other people to make certain transaction requests by telephone or, to the extent available, electronically by so indicating on the application or by sending us instructions in writing in a form acceptable to us. We cannot guarantee that you or any other person you authorize will always be able to reach us to complete a telephone or electronic transaction; for example, all telephone lines may be busy or access to our website may be unavailable during certain periods, such as periods of substantial market fluctuations or other drastic economic or market change, or telephones or the Internet may be out of service or unavailable during severe weather conditions or other emergencies. Under these circumstances, you should submit your request in writing (or other form acceptable to us). Transaction instructions we receive by telephone or electronically before the close of the New York Stock Exchange, which usually closes at 4:00 p.m. Eastern time, on any Business Day will usually be effective at the end of that day, and we will provide you confirmation of each telephone or electronic transaction.

We have established procedures reasonably designed to confirm that instructions communicated by telephone or electronically are genuine. These procedures may require any person requesting a telephone or electronic transaction to provide certain personal identification upon our request. We may also record all or part of any telephone conversation with respect to transaction instructions. We reserve the right to deny any transaction request made by telephone or electronically. You are authorizing us to accept and to act upon instructions received by telephone or electronically with respect to your Contract, and you agree that, so long as we comply with our procedures, neither we, any of our affiliates, nor any Fund, or any of their directors, trustees, officers, employees or agents will be liable for any loss, liability, cost or expense (including attorneys’ fees) in connection with requests that we believe to be genuine. This policy means that so long as we comply with our procedures, you will bear the risk of loss arising out of the telephone or electronic transaction privileges of your Contract. If a Contract has Joint Owners, each Owner may individually make telephone and/or electronic transaction requests.

Electronic Delivery Authorization

Subject to availability, you may authorize us to provide Prospectuses, statements, and other information (“documents”) electronically by so indicating on the application, via telephone, or by sending us instructions in writing in a form acceptable to us to receive such documents electronically. You must provide us with a current and active e-mail address and have Internet access to use this service. While we impose no additional charge for this service, there may be potential costs associated with electronic delivery, such as on-line charges. Documents will be available on our Internet website. You may access and print all documents provided through this service. As documents become available, we will notify you of this by sending you an e-mail message that will include instructions on how to retrieve the document. You are responsible for any e-mail filters that may prevent you from receiving e-mail notifications and for notifying us promptly in the event that your e-mail address changes. You may revoke your consent for electronic delivery at any time, provided that we are properly notified, and we will then start providing you with a paper copy of all required documents. We will provide you with paper copies at any time upon request. Such a request will not constitute revocation of your consent to receive required documents electronically.

Timing of Payments and Transactions

For withdrawals, including exchanges under Code Section 1035 and other Qualified transfers, from the Variable Investment Options or for death benefit payments attributable to your Variable Account Value, we will normally send the proceeds within 7 calendar days after your request is effective or after the Notice Date, as the case may be. We will normally effect periodic annuity payments on the day that corresponds to the Annuity Date and will make payment on the following day. Payments or transfers may be suspended for a longer period under certain extraordinary circumstances. These include: a closing of the New York Stock Exchange other than on a regular

 
84


Table of Contents


holiday or weekend; a trading restriction imposed by the SEC; or an emergency declared by the SEC. Amounts withdrawn or transferred from any fixed-rate General Account Investment Option may be delayed for up to six months after the request is effective. See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT and the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS sections in this Prospectus for more details.

Confirmations, Statements and Other Reports to Contract Owners

Confirmations will be sent out for unscheduled Investments and transfers, loans, loan repayments, unscheduled partial withdrawals, a full withdrawal, and on payment of any death benefit proceeds. Periodically, we will send you a statement that provides certain information pertinent to your Contract. These statements disclose Contract Value, Subaccount values, any fixed option values, fees and charges applied to your Contract Value, transactions made and specific Contract data that apply to your Contract. Confirmations of your transactions under the pre-authorized checking plan, dollar cost averaging, earnings sweep, portfolio rebalancing, and pre-authorized withdrawal options will appear on your quarterly account statements. Your fourth-quarter statement will contain annual information about your Contract Value and transactions. You may also access these statements online.

If you suspect an error on a confirmation or quarterly statement, you must notify us in writing as soon as possible to ensure proper accounting to your Contract. We assume transactions are accurate unless you notify us otherwise within 30 days of receiving the transaction confirmation or, if the transaction is first confirmed on the quarterly statement, within 30 days of receiving the quarterly statement. All transactions are deemed final and may not be changed after the applicable 30 day period.

When you write, tell us your name, contract number and a description of the suspected error. You will also be sent an annual report for the Separate Account and the Fund and a list of the securities held in each Portfolio of the Fund, as required by the 1940 Act; or more frequently if required by law.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Distribution Arrangements

PSD, a broker-dealer and our subsidiary, pays various forms of sales compensation to broker-dealers (including other Pacific Life affiliates) that solicit applications for the Contracts. PSD also may reimburse other expenses associated with the promotion and solicitation of applications for the Contracts. Broker-dealers may receive aggregate commissions of up to 4.75% of your aggregate Purchase Payments. Under certain circumstances where PSD pays lower initial commissions, certain broker-dealers that solicit applications for Contracts may be paid an ongoing persistency trail commission (sometimes called a residual) which will take into account, among other things, the Account Value and the length of time Purchase Payments have been held under a Contract. A trail commission is not anticipated to exceed 1.50%, on an annual basis, of the Account Value considered in connection with the trail commission. Certain broker-dealers may also be paid a persistency bonus which will be based on assets under management and duration of contracts. The persistency bonus for a registered representative is not expected to exceed .25% of their total assets under management.

In addition, PSD or an affiliate may pay from their own resources additional significant cash compensation, sometimes called “revenue sharing”, and provide other incentives in connection with the promotion and solicitation of applications for the Contracts by some, but not all, broker-dealers. Such additional compensation may give us greater access to registered representatives of the broker-dealers that receive such compensation or may otherwise influence the way that a broker-dealer and registered representative market the Contracts.

The compensation described in this section and in the SAI, and other compensation or benefits provided by PSD or its affiliates, may be more or less than the overall compensation on similar or other products. This may influence your registered representative or broker-dealer to present this Contract over other investment options available in the marketplace. You may ask your registered representative about these conflicts of interest, how he/she is personally compensated and how his/her broker-dealer is compensated for soliciting applications for the Contract.

Portfolio Managers of the underlying Portfolios available under this Contract may help pay for conferences or meetings sponsored by us or PSD relating to management of the Portfolios and our variable annuity products.

Please refer to the SAI for additional details on Distribution Arrangements and the conflicts of interest that they may present.

 
85


Table of Contents


Service Arrangements

American Funds Insurance Series® pays Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (“PSD”) at an annual rate of 0.25% of the average daily net assets of Class 2 shares of the Growth-Income and Growth Master Funds (“Master Funds”) attributable to variable life insurance and variable annuity contracts issued by us and our affiliate for certain distribution-related services to the Funds. PSD shall pay American Funds Distributors, Inc. at a rate of 0.16% of Purchase Payments attributable to the Master Funds for certain marketing assistance.

Replacement of Life Insurance or Annuities

The term “replacement” has a special meaning in the life insurance industry and is described more fully below. Before you make your purchase decision, we want you to understand how a replacement may impact your existing plan of insurance.

A policy “replacement” occurs when a new policy or contract is purchased and, in connection with the sale, an existing policy or contract is surrendered, lapsed, forfeited, assigned to the replacing insurer, otherwise terminated, or used in a financed purchase. A “financed purchase” occurs when the purchase of a new life insurance policy or annuity contract involves the use of funds obtained from the values of an existing life insurance policy or annuity contract through withdrawal, surrender or loan.

There are circumstances in which replacing your existing life insurance policy or annuity contract can benefit you. As a general rule, however, replacement is not in your best interest. Accordingly, you should make a careful comparison of the costs and benefits of your existing policy or contract and the proposed policy or contract to determine whether replacement is in your best interest.

Financial Statements

The statements of assets and liabilities of Separate Account A as of December 31, 2005, the related statements of operations for the year then ended, the statements of changes in net assets for each of the two years in the period then ended, and the financial highlights for each of the five years in the period then ended are incorporated by reference in the Statement of Additional Information from the Annual Report of Separate Account A dated December 31, 2005. Pacific Life’s consolidated financial statements as of December 31, 2005 and 2004 and for each of the three years in the period then ended December 31, 2005 are contained in the Statement of Additional Information.

THE GENERAL ACCOUNT

General Information

All amounts allocated to the Fixed Option become part of our General Account. Subject to applicable law, we exercise sole discretion over the investment of General Account assets, and bear the associated investment risk; you will not share in the investment experience of General Account assets.

Because of exemptive and exclusionary provisions, interests in the General Account under the Contract are not registered under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and the General Account has not been registered as an investment company under the 1940 Act. Any interest you have in the Fixed Option is not subject to these Acts, and we have been advised that the SEC staff has not reviewed disclosure in this Prospectus relating to the Fixed Option. This disclosure may, however, be subject to certain provisions of federal securities laws relating to the accuracy and completeness of statements made in prospectuses.

Fixed Option

Guarantee Terms

When you allocate any portion of your Investments or Contract Value to the Fixed Option, we guarantee you an interest rate (a “Guaranteed Interest Rate”) for a specified period of time (a “Guarantee Term”) of up to one year. Guaranteed terms will be offered at our discretion.

Guaranteed Interest Rates for the Fixed Option may be changed periodically for new allocations. Your allocation will receive the Guaranteed Interest Rate in effect for the Fixed Option on the effective date of your allocation. All

 
86


Table of Contents


Guaranteed Interest Rates will be expressed as annual effective rates; however, interest will accrue daily. The Guaranteed Interest Rate on your Fixed Option will remain in effect for the Guarantee Term and will never be less than an annual rate of 3%.

Each allocation (or rollover) you make to the Fixed Option receives a Guarantee Term that begins on the day that allocation or rollover is effective and ends at the end of that Contract Year or, if earlier, on your Annuity Date. At the end of that Contract Year, we will roll over your Fixed Option Value on that day into a new Guarantee Term of one year (or, if shorter, the time remaining until your Annuity Date) at the then current Guaranteed Interest Rate, unless you instruct us otherwise.

  Example: Your Contract Anniversary is February 1. On February 1 of year 1, you allocate $1,000 to the Fixed Option and receive a Guarantee Term of one year and a Guaranteed Interest Rate of 5%. On August 1, you allocate another $500 to the Fixed Option and receive a Guaranteed Interest Rate of 6%. Through January 31, year 1, your first allocation of $1,000 earns 5% interest and your second allocation of $500 earns 6% interest. On February 1, year 2, a new interest rate may go into effect for your entire Fixed Option Value.

Withdrawals and Transfers

Prior to the Annuity Date, you may withdraw or transfer amounts from your Fixed Option to one or more of the other Variable Investment Options. In addition, no partial withdrawal or transfer may be made from your Fixed Option within 30 days of the Contract Date. Currently, we are not requiring the 30-day waiting period on partial withdrawals and transfers, but we reserve the right to require the 30-day waiting period on partial withdrawals and transfers in the future. If your withdrawal leaves you with a Net Contract Value of less than $1,000, we have the right, at our option, to terminate your Contract and send you the withdrawal proceeds. See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Amounts transferred or withdrawn from any fixed-rate General Account Investment Option may be delayed, as described under the ADDITIONAL INFORMATION—Timing of Payments and Transactions section in this Prospectus; any amount delayed, so long as it is held under any fixed option, will continue to earn interest at the Guaranteed Interest Rate then in effect until that Guarantee Term has ended, and the minimum guaranteed interest rate of 3% thereafter, unless state law requires a greater rate be paid.

After the first Contract Anniversary, you may make one transfer or partial withdrawal from your Fixed Option during any Contract Year, except as provided under the dollar cost averaging, earnings sweep and pre-authorized withdrawal programs. You may make one transfer or one partial withdrawal within the 30 days after the end of each Contract Anniversary. Normally, you may transfer or withdraw up to one-third (33 1/3%) of your Fixed Option Value in any given Contract Year. However, in consecutive Contract Years you may transfer or withdraw up to one-third (33 1/3%) of your Fixed Option Value in one year; you may transfer or withdraw up to one-half (50%) of your remaining Fixed Option Value in the next year; and you may transfer or withdraw up to the entire amount (100%) of any remaining Fixed Option Value in the third year. In addition, if, as a result of a partial withdrawal or transfer, the Fixed Option Value is less than $500, we have the right, at our option, to transfer the entire remaining amount to your other Investment Options on a proportionate basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions.

We reserve the right to waive the restrictions that limit transfers from the Fixed Option to one transfer within the 30 days after the end of each Contract Anniversary. We also reserve the right to waive the limitations on the maximum amount you may transfer from the Fixed Option in any given Contract year. We may process requests for transfers from the Fixed Option that are within the maximum number of allowable transfers among the Investment Options each calendar year; i.e. transfers are limited to 25 for each calendar year.

 
87


Table of Contents


TERMS USED IN THIS PROSPECTUS

Some of the terms we’ve used in this Prospectus may be new to you. We’ve identified them in the Prospectus by capitalizing the first letter of each word. You’ll find an explanation of what they mean below.

If you have any questions, please ask your registered representative or call us at 1-800-722-2333.

Account Value – The amount of your Contract Value allocated to a specified Variable Investment Option or the Fixed Option.

Annuitant – A person on whose life annuity payments may be determined. An Annuitant’s life may also be used to determine certain increases in death benefits, and to determine the Annuity Date. A Contract may name a single (“sole”) Annuitant or two (“Joint”) Annuitants, and may also name a “Contingent” Annuitant. If you name Joint Annuitants or a Contingent Annuitant, “the Annuitant” means the sole surviving Annuitant, unless otherwise stated.

Annuity Date – The date specified in your Contract, or the date you later elect, if any, for the start of annuity payments if the Annuitant (or Joint Annuitants) is (or are) still living and your Contract is in force; or if earlier, the date that annuity payments actually begin.

Annuity Option – Any one of the income options available for a series of payments after your Annuity Date.

Beneficiary – A person who may have a right to receive the death benefit payable upon the death of the Annuitant or a Contract Owner prior to the Annuity Date, or may have a right to receive remaining guaranteed annuity payments, if any, if the Annuitant dies after the Annuity Date.

Business Day – Any day on which the value of an amount invested in a Variable Investment Option is required to be determined, which currently includes each day that the New York Stock Exchange is open for trading and our administrative offices are open. The New York Stock Exchange and our administrative offices are closed on weekends and on the following holidays: New Year’s Day, Martin Luther King, Jr. Day, President’s Day, Good Friday, Memorial Day, July Fourth, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day, and the Friday before July Fourth or Christmas Day if that holiday falls on a Saturday, the Monday following New Year’s Day, July Fourth or Christmas Day if that holiday falls on a Sunday, unless unusual business conditions exist, such as the ending of a monthly or yearly accounting period. In this Prospectus, “day” or “date” means Business Day unless otherwise specified. If any transaction or event called for under a Contract is scheduled to occur on a day that is not a Business Day, such transaction or event will be deemed to occur on the next following Business Day unless otherwise specified. Any systematic pre-authorized transaction scheduled to occur on December 30 or December 31 where that day is not a Business Day will be deemed an order for the last Business Day of the calendar year and will be calculated using the applicable Subaccount Unit Value at the close of that Business Day. Special circumstances such as leap years and months with fewer than 31 days are discussed in the SAI.

Code – The Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

Contingent Annuitant – A person, if named in your Contract, who will become your sole surviving Annuitant if your existing sole Annuitant (or both Joint Annuitants) should die before your Annuity Date.

Contingent Owner – A person, if named in your Contract, who will succeed to the rights as a Contract Owner of your Contract if all named Contract Owners die before your Annuity Date.

Contract Anniversary – The same date, in each subsequent year, as your Contract Date.

Contract Date – The date we issue your Contract. Contract Years, Contract Semi-Annual Periods, Contract Quarters and Contract Months are measured from this date.

Contract Debt – As of the end of any given Business Day, the principal amount you have outstanding on any loan under your Contract, plus any accrued and unpaid interest. Loans are only available on certain Qualified Contracts.

Contract Owner, Owner, Policyholder, you, or your – Generally, a person who purchases a Contract and makes the Investments. A Contract Owner has all rights in the Contract, including the right to make withdrawals, designate and change beneficiaries, transfer amounts among Investment Options, and designate an Annuity Option. If your Contract names Joint Owners, both Joint Owners are Contract Owners and share all such rights. If there are Joint Owners, the Contract will be owned as Joint Tenants With Right of Survivorship and not as Tenants in Common.

Contract Value – As of the end of any Business Day, the sum of your Variable Account Value, Fixed Option Value, the value of any other Investment Option added to the Contract by Rider or Endorsement, and any Loan Account Value.

Contract Year – A year that starts on the Contract Date or on a Contract Anniversary.

Earnings – As of the end of any Business Day, your Earnings equal your Contract Value less your aggregate Investments, which are reduced by withdrawals of prior Investments.

Fixed Option – If you allocate all or part of your Investments or Contract Value to the Fixed Option, such amounts are held in our General Account and receive the Guaranteed Interest Rates declared periodically, but not less than an annual rate of 3%.

Fixed Option Value – The aggregate amount of your Contract Value allocated to the Fixed Option.

Fund – Pacific Select Fund.

General Account – Our General Account consists of all of our assets other than those assets allocated to Separate Account A or to any of our other separate accounts.

Guaranteed Interest Rate – The interest rate guaranteed at the time of allocation (or rollover) for the Guarantee Term on amounts allocated to the Fixed Option. Each Guaranteed Interest Rate is expressed as an annual rate and interest is accrued daily. Each rate will not be less than an annual rate of 3%.

Guarantee Term – The period during which an amount you allocate to the Fixed Option earns a Guaranteed Interest Rate. This term is up to one-year for the Fixed Option.

Investment (“Premium Payment”) (“Purchase Payment”) – An amount paid to us by or on behalf of a Contract Owner as consideration for the benefits provided under the Contract.

Investment Option – A Subaccount, any other Investment Option added to the Contract by Rider or Endorsement, or the Fixed Option offered under the Contract.

Joint Annuitant – If your Contract is a Non-Qualified Contract, you may name two Annuitants, called “Joint Annuitants,” in your application for your Contract. Special restrictions apply for Qualified Contracts.

Loan Account – The Account in which the amount equal to the principal amount of a loan and any interest accrued is held to secure any Contract Debt.

 
88


Table of Contents


Loan Account Value – The amount, including any interest accrued, held in the Loan Account to secure any Contract Debt.

Net Contract Value – Your Contract Value less Contract Debt.

Non-Qualified Contract – A Contract other than a Qualified Contract.

Policyholder – The Contract Owner.

Portfolio – A separate portfolio of the Fund in which a Subaccount invests its assets.

Primary Annuitant – The individual that is named in your Contract, the events in the life of whom are of primary importance in affecting the timing or amount of the payout under the Contract.

Purchase Payment (“Premium Payment”) (“Investment”) – An amount paid to us by or on behalf of a Contract Owner as consideration for the benefits provided under the Contract.

Qualified Contract – A Contract that qualifies under the Code as an individual retirement annuity or account (“IRA”), or form thereof, or a Contract purchased by a Qualified Plan, qualifying for special tax treatment under the Code.

Qualified Plan – A retirement plan that receives favorable tax treatment under Section 401, 403, or 457 of the Code.

SEC – Securities and Exchange Commission.

Separate Account A (the “Separate Account”) – A separate account of ours registered as a unit investment trust under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended (the “1940 Act”).

Subaccount – An investment division of the Separate Account. Each Subaccount invests its assets in shares of a corresponding Portfolio.

Subaccount Annuity Unit – Subaccount Annuity Units (or “Annuity Units”) are used to measure variation in variable annuity payments. To the extent you elect to convert all or some of your Contract Value into variable annuity payments, the amount of each annuity payment (after the first payment) will vary with the value and number of Annuity Units in each Subaccount attributed to any variable annuity payments. At annuitization (after any applicable premium taxes and/or other taxes are paid), the amount annuitized to a variable annuity determines the amount of your first variable annuity payment and the number of Annuity Units credited to your annuity in each Subaccount. The value of Subaccount Annuity Units, like the value of Subaccount Units, is expected to fluctuate daily, as described in the definition of Unit Value.

Subaccount Unit – Before your Annuity Date, each time you allocate an amount to a Subaccount, your Contract is credited with a number of Subaccount Units in that Subaccount. These Units are used for accounting purposes to measure your Account Value in that Subaccount. The value of Subaccount Units is expected to fluctuate daily, as described in the definition of Unit Value.

Unit Value – The value of a Subaccount Unit (“Subaccount Unit Value”) or Subaccount Annuity Unit (“Subaccount Annuity Unit Value”). Unit Value of any Subaccount is subject to change on any Business Day in much the same way that the value of a mutual fund share changes each day. The fluctuations in value reflect the investment results, expenses of and charges against the Portfolio in which the Subaccount invests its assets. Fluctuations also reflect charges against the Separate Account. Changes in Subaccount Annuity Unit Values also reflect an additional factor that adjusts Subaccount Annuity Unit Values to offset our Annuity Option Table’s implicit assumption of an annual investment return of 5%. The effect of this assumed investment return is explained in detail in the SAI. Unit Value of a Subaccount Unit or Subaccount Annuity Unit on any Business Day is measured as of the time of the close of the New York Stock Exchange on that Business Day, which is usually 4:00 p.m., Eastern time, although it occasionally closes earlier.

Variable Account Value – The aggregate amount of your Contract Value allocated to all Subaccounts.

Variable Investment Option – A Subaccount (also called a Variable Account).

 
89


Table of Contents


CONTENTS OF THE STATEMENT OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

           
Page

PERFORMANCE
    1  
 
Total Returns
    1  
 
Yields
    2  
 
Performance Comparisons and Benchmarks
    3  
 
Power of Tax Deferral
    4  
 
DISTRIBUTION OF THE CONTRACTS
    5  
 
Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. 
    5  
 
THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT
    6  
 
Calculating Subaccount Unit Values
    6  
 
Variable Annuity Payment Amounts
    7  
 
Redemptions of Remaining Guaranteed Variable Payments Under Options 2 and 4
    9  
 
Corresponding Dates
    9  
 
Age and Sex of Annuitant
    10  
 
Systematic Transfer Programs
    10  
 
Pre-Authorized Withdrawals
    12  
 
Death Benefit
    13  
 
Joint Annuitants on Qualified Contracts
    13  
 
1035 Exchanges
    13  
 
Safekeeping of Assets
    13  
 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
    13  
 
INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
    14  
 
90


Table of Contents


APPENDIX A:

STATE LAW VARIATIONS

PURCHASING YOUR CONTRACT

How to Apply for Your Contract

The Contract is not available in the states of New Jersey, Oregon and Washington.

Making Your Investments (“Purchase Payments”)—Making Additional Investments

For Contracts issued in the state of Massachusetts, you may make additional Investments after your initial Investment only during the first Contract Year.

HOW YOUR INVESTMENTS ARE ALLOCATED

Transfers and Market–timing Restrictions—Transfers

For Contracts issued in the state of Florida, we may reject any transfer request. We also reserve the right to limit the size of transfers to $500, limit the number to no more than 15 per year, restrict transfers and to suspend the right to transfer.

CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS

Withdrawal Charge

For Contracts issued in the states of Massachusetts and Texas, we cannot waive any withdrawal charge on full or partial withdrawals if the Owner or Annuitant has been diagnosed with a medically determinable condition that results in a life expectancy of twelve (12) months or less and/or has been confined to an accredited nursing home.

For Contracts issued in the state of Pennsylvania, the waiver of withdrawal charges does not apply with respect to the terminal condition benefit until after the first Contract Anniversary for the Owner or the Annuitant. The waiver of withdrawal charges with respect to the nursing home benefit does not apply if the Owner or Annuitant is confined on the Contract Date nor until 90 days after the Contract Date. Separate periods of confinement occurring within six (6) months of a previous confinement for the same or related condition is considered the same confinement for purposes of determining the satisfaction of the elimination period. A new elimination period will only begin more than six (6) months from the most recent confinement for the same or related condition.

Withdrawal Charge—Withdrawal Enhancements

For Contracts issued in the states of Connecticut and Texas, we cannot calculate the withdrawal charge on more favorable terms than as otherwise described under the provisions of the Contract.

Annual Fee

For Contracts issued in the state of South Carolina, any portion of the Annual Fee we deduct from any fixed-rate General Account Investment Option will not be greater that the annual interest credited to such Investment Option in excess of 3%.

ANNUITIZATION, DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS

Annuitization

For Contracts issued in the state of Texas, the Conversion Amount must be at least $2,000. Any portion of the Net Contract Value not converted to provide annuity payments on the Annuity Date, may not be used to continue the Contract.

 
91


Table of Contents


Default Annuity Date and Options

For Contracts issued in the state of Texas, the net amount applied to provide annuity payments must be at least $2,000.

Your Annuity Payments—Frequency of Payments

For Contracts issued in the state of Texas, your initial annuity payment must be at least $20.

Your Annuity Payments—Amount of First Payment

For Contracts issued in the state of Montana, the basis of computations used in determining the annuity rates contained in the Contract are based on the age of the payee, without regard to gender.

Death Benefits—Death Benefit Proceeds

For Contracts issued in the states of Connecticut and North Dakota, interest (at an effective annual rate of 3%) is paid on the death benefit proceeds from the date of death until such proceeds are paid or applied under an Annuity Option.

For Contracts issued in the state of North Dakota, death benefit proceeds must be paid not later than two (2) months after our receipt of due proof of death.

For Contracts issued in the state of Montana, if payment of the death benefit proceeds is not made within thirty (30) days after our receipt of proof of death, interest shall be paid on the death benefit proceeds from the 30th day until the date the proceeds are paid or applied under an Annuity Option. The interest rate is the discount rate on 90-day commercial paper in effect at the federal reserve bank in the ninth (9th) federal reserve district at the time of proof of death.

Death Benefits—Optional Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider (SDBR)

The SDBR is not available for purchase in the states of New Jersey, Oregon and Washington.

Death Benefits—Optional Premier Death Benefit Rider (PDBR)

The PDBR is not available for purchase in the states of New Jersey, Oregon and Washington.

If your Contract was issued in the state of Texas and you purchased the PDBR, the effective annual rate of interest used in determining the Death Benefit Amount under the PDBR is 5%, which is equivalent to a daily factor of 1.00013368.

Death Benefits—Optional Earnings Enhancement Guarantee (EEG) Rider

The EEG Rider is not available for purchase in the states of Minnesota, New Jersey, Oregon and Washington.

WITHDRAWALS

Optional Withdrawals

For Contracts issued in the state of Maryland, if your partial withdrawal leaves you with a Net Contract Value of less than $1,000, we have the right, at our option, to refuse to make the withdrawal.

For Contracts issued in the state of Texas, if your partial withdrawal leaves you with a Net Contract Value of less than $500, we have the right, at our option to terminate your Contract and send you the withdrawal proceeds.

Right to Cancel (“Free Look”)

There may be extended Free Look periods in some states for replacement business. Please consult with your registered representative if you have any questions regarding your state’s Free Look period.

For residents of the state of Arizona sixty-five (65) years of age or older, the Free Look period is a 30-day period beginning on the day you receive your Contract.

 
92


Table of Contents


For residents of the state of California sixty (60) years of age or older, the Free Look period is a 30-day period beginning on the day you receive your Contract.

For Contracts issued in the state of Connecticut, cancellation of the Contract prior to delivery will result in the Contract being void from the beginning and the return of all Purchase Payments received.

For Contracts issued in the states of Idaho and North Dakota, the Free Look period is a 20-day period beginning on the day you receive your Contract.

For Contracts issued in the states of Idaho, Massachusetts, Nebraska, Oklahoma, South Carolina and West Virginia, if the Contract is cancelled within the Free Look period, we are required to return all Purchase Payments received.

For Contracts issued in the state of Minnesota, if the Contract is cancelled within the Free Look period, the Contract Value will be refunded within ten (10) days of our receipt of the notice of cancellation and the returned Contract.

For Contracts issued in the state of Oklahoma, if the Contract is cancelled within the Free Look period and we do not return all Purchase Payments received within thirty (30) days from the date of cancellation, we will pay interest on such Purchase Payments as required by Oklahoma law.

OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS

Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider—Purchasing the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider

For Lifetime Income Access Plus Riders issued in the state of Pennsylvania, if you purchase the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider after your Contract is issued, you may cancel the rider within 10-days beginning on the day you receive the rider by returning the rider to us at our Service Center. Upon our receipt of the returned rider, we will deem the rider void from the beginning and no Lifetime Income Access Plus Annual Charge will be deducted.

The Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider is not available for purchase in the states of New Jersey, Oregon and Washington.

Income Access Plus Rider—Purchasing the Income Access Plus Rider

For Income Access Plus Riders issued in the state of Pennsylvania, if the Income Access Plus Rider was purchased after your Contract was issued, you may cancel the rider within 10-days beginning on the day you receive the rider by returning the rider to us at our Service Center. Upon our receipt of the returned rider, we will deem the rider void from the beginning and no Income Access Plus Annual Charge will be deducted.

Income Access Rider—Purchasing the Income Access Rider

The Income Access Rider is not available for purchase in the states of New Jersey, Oregon and Washington.

Income Access Rider—Subsequent Purchase Payments

For Income Access Riders issued in the states of Connecticut and Texas, we cannot restrict additional Purchase Payments.

Guaranteed Protection Advantage 5 (GPA 5) Rider—Purchasing the GPA 5 Rider

The GPA 5 Rider is not available for purchase in the states of New Jersey, Oregon and Washington.

Guaranteed Protection Advantage (GPA) Rider—Purchasing the GPA Rider

The GPA Rider is not available for purchase in the states of New Jersey, Oregon and Washington.

Guaranteed Income Advantage Plus (GIA Plus) Rider—Purchasing the GIA Plus Rider

The GIA Plus Rider is not available for purchase in the states of New Jersey, Oregon and Washington.

 
93


Table of Contents


Guaranteed Income Advantage Plus (GIA Plus) Rider—How the GIA Plus Rider Works

For GIA Plus Riders issued in the state of Montana, the basis of computations used in determining the annuity rates contained in the rider are based on the age of the payee, without regard to gender.

Guaranteed Income Advantage Plus (GIA Plus) Rider—Limitation on Subsequent Purchase Payments

For GIA Plus Riders issued in the state of Florida, we will not accept any Purchase Payment on and after the first (1st) Contract Anniversary, measured from the Rider Effective Date, that results in the total of all Purchase Payments received after that Contract Anniversary to exceed $100,000.

Guaranteed Income Advantage 5 (GIA 5) Rider—Purchasing the GIA 5 Rider

For GIA 5 Riders issued in the state of Georgia, the rider is referred to as the “Guaranteed Income Rider” in the Contract’s rider.

The GIA 5 Rider is not available for purchase in the states of Minnesota, New Jersey, Oregon and Washington.

Guaranteed Income Advantage 5 (GIA 5) Rider—How the GIA 5 Rider Works

For GIA 5 Riders issued in the state of Montana, the basis of computations used in determining the annuity rates contained in the rider are based on the age of the payee, without regard to gender.

Guaranteed Income Advantage II (GIA II) Rider

For GIA II Riders issued in the state of Georgia, the rider is referred to as the “Guaranteed Income Rider” in the Contract’s rider.

The GIA II Rider is not available for purchase in the states of Minnesota, New Jersey, Oregon and Washington.

Guaranteed Income Advantage II (GIA II) Rider—How the GIA II Rider Works

For GIA II Riders issued in the state of Montana, the basis of computations used in determining the annuity rates contained in the rider are based on the age of the payee, without regard to gender.

FEDERAL TAX STATUS

Qualified Contract—Loans

For Contracts issued in the states of Connecticut and Wisconsin, the loan interest rate for Contracts issued under a Qualified Plan subject to the requirements of Title 1 of ERISA, will be an annual rate, set at the time the loan is made, equal to the higher of 4% or the Moody’s Corporate Bond Yield Average-Monthly Average Corporates, as published by Moody’s Investors Service, Inc., or its successor.

For Contracts issued in the state of Wisconsin, the interest rate we charge may be increased if the loan interest rate increases by 1/2% or more from that charged in the preceding Contract Year. The interest rate we charge will be decreased if the loan interest rate decreases by 1/2% or more from that charged in the preceding Contract Year.

Qualified Contracts—Loan Terms

For Contracts issued in the state of Vermont, if the amount of the loan taken exceeds 50% of the Contract Value; or $50,000 less the highest outstanding Contract Debt during the 12-month period immediately preceding the effective date of the loan, you may be subject to a tax penalty or other adverse tax consequences.

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Changes to Your Contract—Contract Owner(s) and Contingent Owner

For Contracts issued in the states of Michigan, Pennsylvania and South Carolina, your consent is required for any changes to the Contract, including changes to maintain the Contract’s qualified status.

 
94


Table of Contents


Timing of Payments and Transactions

For Contracts issued in the state of West Virginia, amounts withdrawn from any fixed-rate General Account Investment Option may be delayed for up to thirty days after the request is effective.

Confirmations, Statements and Other Reports to Contract Owners

For Contracts issued in the state of Maryland, information shown on the reports to Contract Owners must be for a period ending not more than two (2) months prior to the date of mailing.

THE GENERAL ACCOUNT

Fixed Option—Withdrawals and Transfers

For Contracts issued in the state of Florida, we may reject any transfer request. We also reserve the right to limit the size of transfers to $500, limit the number to no more than 15 per year, restrict transfers and to suspend the right to transfer.

For Contracts issued in the state of Maryland, if your partial withdrawal leaves you with a Net Contract Value of less than $1,000, we have the right, at our option, to refuse to make the withdrawal.

For Contracts issued in the state of Texas, if your partial withdrawal leaves you with a Net Contract Value of less than $500, we have the right, at our option to terminate your Contract and send you the withdrawal proceeds.

 
95


Table of Contents


APPENDIX B:

LIFETIME INCOME ACCESS PLUS RIDER & INCOME ACCESS PLUS RIDER

SAMPLE CALCULATIONS

The numeric examples shown in this section are based on certain assumptions. They have been provided to assist in understanding the benefits provided by this Rider and to demonstrate how Purchase Payments received and withdrawals made from the Contract prior to the Annuity Date affect the values and benefits under this Rider over an extended period of time. These examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.

Examples 1 through 5 apply to the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider and the Income Access Plus Rider.

Example #1—Income Access Credit; No Subsequent Purchase Payments; No Withdrawals; No Reset in Remaining Protected Balance.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

  •  Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
 
  •  No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
 
  •  No withdrawals taken.
 
  •  No reset of the Remaining Protected Balance
                                         

Beginning Income Protected Protected Remaining
of Contract Purchase Contract Value Access Payment Payment Protected
Year Payment Withdrawal after Activity Credit Base Amount Balance

    1   $100,000       $100,000           $100,000   $5,000   $100,000    
    2           $103,000     $6,000     $106,000   $5,300   $106,000    
    3           $106,090     $6,000     $112,000   $5,600   $112,000    
    4           $109,273     $6,000     $118,000   $5,900   $118,000    
    5           $112,551     $6,000     $124,000   $6,200   $124,000    
    6           $115,927     $6,000     $130,000   $6,500   $130,000    
    7           $119,405     $0     $130,000   $6,500   $130,000    
    8           $122,987     $0     $130,000   $6,500   $130,000    
    9           $126,677     $0     $130,000   $6,500   $130,000    
    10           $130,477     $0     $130,000   $6,500   $130,000    
    11           $134,392     $0     $130,000   $6,500   $130,000    

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:

  •  Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Remaining Protected Balance = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000

Since no withdrawal occurred prior to the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 6, an Income Access Credit of $6,000 (6% of initial Remaining Protected Balance) is added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on each Contract Anniversary up to the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 6. As a result, on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 6, the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance are equal to $130,000 and the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $6,500 (5% of $130,000).

No Income Access Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary after the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 6, as no reset in the Remaining Protected Balance was assumed.

In addition to the Initial Purchase Payment, the Contract Value is further subject to increases and/or decreases during each Contract Year as a result of additional amounts credited, charges, fees and other deductions, and increases and/or decreases in the investment performance of the Variable Account.

 
96


Table of Contents


Example #2—Subsequent Purchase Payment.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

  •  Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
 
  •  A subsequent Purchase Payment of $50,000 is received during Contract Year 2.
 
  •  No withdrawals taken.
                                         

Beginning Income Protected Protected Remaining
of Contract Purchase Contract Value Access Payment Payment Protected
Year Payment Withdrawal after Activity Credit Base Amount Balance

    1     $100,000         $100,000       $100,000   $5,000   $100,000    
    2               $103,000   $6,000   $106,000   $5,300   $106,000    
    Activity     $50,000         $154,534       $156,000   $7,800   $156,000    
    3               $156,834   $9,000   $165,000   $8,250   $165,000    

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:

  •  Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Remaining Protected Balance = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000

Since no withdrawal occurred prior to the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 2, an Income Access Credit of $6,000 (6% of Initial Remaining Protected Balance) is added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on that Contract Anniversary, increasing both to $106,000. As a result, the Protected Payment Amount on that Contract Anniversary is equal to $5,300 (5% of the Protected Payment Base on that Contract Anniversary).

Immediately after the $50,000 subsequent Purchase Payment during Contract Year 2, the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance are increased by the Purchase Payment amount to $156,000 ($106,000 + $50,000). The Protected Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment is equal to $7,800 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the Purchase Payment since there are no withdrawals during that Contract Year).

Since no withdrawal occurred prior to the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 3, an Income Access Credit of $9,000 (6% of Initial Remaining Protected Balance plus 6% of the $50,000 subsequent Purchase Payment) is added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on that Contract Anniversary, increasing both to $165,000. As a result, the Protected Payment Amount on that Contract Anniversary is equal to $8,250 (5% of the Protected Payment Base on that Contract Anniversary).

 
97


Table of Contents


Example #3—Withdrawal Not Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

  •  Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
 
  •  No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
 
  •  A withdrawal of $5,000 is taken during Contract Year 2.
                                                 

Beginning Income Protected Protected Remaining
of Contract Purchase Contract Value Access Payment Payment Protected
Year Payment Withdrawal after Activity Credit Base Amount Balance

    1   $100,000         $100,000             $100,000     $5,000     $100,000    
    2             $103,000       $6,000     $106,000     $5,300     $106,000    
    Activity       $5,000     $99,534             $106,000     $300     $101,000    
    3             $101,016       $0     $106,000     $5,300     $101,000    
    4             $104,046       $0     $106,000     $5,300     $101,000    

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:

  •  Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Remaining Protected Balance = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000

Since no withdrawal occurred prior to the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 2, an Income Access Credit of $6,000 (6% of Initial Remaining Protected Balance) is added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on that Contract Anniversary, increasing both to $106,000. As a result, the Protected Payment Amount on that Contract Anniversary is equal to $5,300 (5% of the Protected Payment Base on that Contract Anniversary).

Because the $5,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount ($5,300):

  (a)  the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged;
 
  (b)  the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of the withdrawal to $101,000 ($106,000 - $5,000); and

  (c)  the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $300 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the withdrawal (5% of $106,000 = $5,300), less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year ($5,000)).

Since a withdrawal occurred during Contract Year 2, no Income Access Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary following the withdrawal.

 
98


Table of Contents


Example #4—Withdrawals Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

  •  Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
 
  •  No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
 
  •  Two separate withdrawals of $5,000 and $3,000 are taken during Contract Year 2.
                                                         

Beginning Income Protected Protected Remaining
of Contract Purchase Contract Value Access Payment Payment Protected
Year Payment Withdrawal after Activity Credit Base Amount Balance

    1   $100,000         $100,000               $100,000       $5,000       $100,000      
    2             $103,000       $6,000       $106,000       $5,300       $106,000      
    Activity       $5,000     $99,534               $106,000       $300       $101,000      
    Activity       $3,000     $97,272               $97,272       $0       $97,272      
    3             $97,993       $0       $97,272       $4,864       $97,272      
    4             $100,933       $0       $97,272       $4,864       $97,272      

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:

  •  Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Remaining Protected Balance = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000

Since no withdrawal occurred prior to the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 2, an Income Access Credit of $6,000 (6% of Initial Remaining Protected Balance) is added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on that Contract Anniversary, increasing both to $106,000. As a result, the Protected Payment Amount on that Contract Anniversary is equal to $5,300 (5% of the Protected Payment Base on that Contract Anniversary).

Because the $5,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount ($5,300):

  (a)  the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged;
 
  (b)  the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of the withdrawal to $101,000 ($106,000 - $5,000); and

  (c)  the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $300 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the withdrawal (5% of $106,000 = $5,300), less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year ($5,000)).

Because the $3,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($3,000 > $300), the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance immediately after the withdrawal are adjusted to the lesser of:

  (a)  the Contract Value immediately after the withdrawal ($97,272); or
 
  (b)  the Remaining Protected Balance immediately prior to the withdrawal, less the withdrawal amount ($101,000 - $3,000 = $98,000).

The Protected Payment Amount immediately after the withdrawal is equal to $0 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the withdrawal (5% of $97,272 = $4,864), less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year ($8,000), but not less than zero).

Since a withdrawal occurred during Contract Year 2, no Income Access Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary following the withdrawal.

 
99


Table of Contents


Example #5—Reset in Remaining Protected Balance.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

  •  Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
 
  •  No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
 
  •  No withdrawals taken.
 
  •  Reset in the Remaining Protected Balance at the Beginning of Contract Year 4.
                                     

Beginning Income Protected Protected Remaining
of Contract Purchase Contract Value Access Payment Payment Protected
Year Payment Withdrawal after Activity Credit Base Amount Balance

    1   $100,000       $100,000       $100,000   $5,000   $100,000    
    2           $110,000   $6,000   $106,000   $5,300   $106,000    
    3           $121,000   $6,000   $112,000   $5,600   $112,000    
    4           $133,100   $6,000   $118,000   $5,900   $118,000    
    (Prior to Reset)                                
    4           $133,100       $133,100   $6,655   $133,100    
    (After Reset)                                
    5           $146,410   $7,986   $141,086   $7,054   $141,086    

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:

  •  Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Remaining Protected Balance = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000

On the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 4, the Contract Value ($133,100) is greater than the Remaining Protected Balance ($118,000). With the reset in Remaining Protected Balance, the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance are set equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. As a result, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $6,655 after the reset.

After the reset in Remaining Protected Balance, eligibility for any Income Access Credit will be based on the most recent Reset Date. That is, an Income Access Credit may be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on up to five additional Contract Anniversaries if certain conditions are met.

The reset in Remaining Protected Balance may result in an increase in the annual Income Access Charge percentage.

The reset in Remaining Protected Balance may also result in a lower Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance, Protected Payment Amount and Income Access Credit.

Example 6 applies to the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider only.

Example #6—Lifetime Income

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

  •  Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
 
  •  No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
 
  •  Owner is age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was taken
 
  •  Withdrawals, each equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base are taken each Contract Year.
 
  •  No reset in the Remaining Protected Balance is assumed during the life of the Rider.
 
100


Table of Contents


                                                         

Contract End of Year Annual Protected Protected Remaining
Year Withdrawal Contract Value Credit Payment Base Payment Amount Protected Balance

    1   $ 5,000       $96,489     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $95,000      
    2   $ 5,000       $94,384     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $90,000      
    3   $ 5,000       $92,215     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $85,000      
    4   $ 5,000       $89,982     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $80,000      
    5   $ 5,000       $87,681     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $75,000      
    6   $ 5,000       $85,311     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $70,000      
    7   $ 5,000       $82,871     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $65,000      
    8   $ 5,000       $80,357     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $60,000      
    9   $ 5,000       $77,768     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $55,000      
    10   $ 5,000       $75,101     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $50,000      
    11   $ 5,000       $72,354     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $45,000      
    12   $ 5,000       $69,524     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $40,000      
    13   $ 5,000       $66,610     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $35,000      
    14   $ 5,000       $63,608     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $30,000      
    15   $ 5,000       $60,517     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $25,000      
    16   $ 5,000       $57,332     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $20,000      
    17   $ 5,000       $54,052     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $15,000      
    18   $ 5,000       $50,674     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $10,000      
    19   $ 5,000       $47,194     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $5,000      
    20   $ 5,000       $43,610     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      
    21   $ 5,000       $39,918     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      
    22   $ 5,000       $36,115     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      
    23   $ 5,000       $32,199     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      
    24   $ 5,000       $28,165     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      
    25   $ 5,000       $24,010     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      
    26   $ 5,000       $19,730     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      
    27   $ 5,000       $15,322     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      
    28   $ 5,000       $10,782     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      
    29   $ 5,000       $6,105     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      
    30   $ 5,000       $1,288     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      
    31   $ 5,000       $0     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      
    32   $ 5,000       $0     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      
    33   $ 5,000       $0     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      
    34   $ 5,000       $0     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:

  •  Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Remaining Protected Balance = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000

Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($5,000): (a) the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged; and (b) the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of each withdrawal.

Since a withdrawal occurred during Contract Year 1, no annual credit will be applied to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary following the withdrawal.

Since it was assumed that the Owner was age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was taken, withdrawals of 5% of the Protected Payment Base will continue to be paid each year (even after the Contract Value and Remaining Protected Balance have been reduced to zero) until the day of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant, whichever occurs first.

 
101


Table of Contents


APPENDIX C:

INCOME ACCESS RIDER

SAMPLE CALCULATIONS

The numeric examples shown in this section are based on certain assumptions. They have been provided to assist in understanding the benefits provided by this Rider and to demonstrate how Purchase Payments received and withdrawals made from the Contract prior to the Annuity Date affect the values and benefits under this Rider over an extended period of time. These examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.

Example #1

Initial Values on the Effective Date based on an initial Purchase Payment of $100,000

                                 

Protected
Purchase Contract Protected Payment Remaining
Payments Withdrawal Value After Payment Amount Protected
Contract Years Received Amount Activity Base (PPB) (7% of PPB) Balance

    Beginning of Year 1   $100,000           $100,000   $7,000   $100,000    

Example #2

Additional Purchase Payment received after the Effective Date of the Rider but within the same Contract Year and its effect on the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance.

                                 

Protected
Purchase Contract Protected Payment Remaining
Payments Withdrawal Value After Payment Amount Protected
Contract Years Received Amount Activity Base (PPB) (7% of PPB) Balance

    Beginning of Year 1   $100,000           $100,000   $7,000   $100,000    
    Activity   $20,000       $122,000   $120,000       $120,000    
    Beginning of Year 2               $120,000   $8,400   $120,000    

In addition to Purchase Payments, the Contract Value is further subject to increases and/or decreases during a Contract Year as a result of additional amounts credited, charges, fees and other deductions and increases and/or decreases in the investment performance of the Variable Account.

Example #3

Cumulative withdrawals during the second Contract Year not exceeding the Protected Payment Amount established for that Contract Year.

                                 

Protected
Purchase Contract Protected Payment Remaining
Payments Withdrawal Value After Payment Amount Protected
Contract Years Received Amount Activity Base (PPB) (7% of PPB) Balance

    Beginning of Year 1   $100,000           $100,000   $7,000   $100,000    
    Activity   $20,000       $122,000   $120,000       $120,000    
    Beginning of Year 2               $120,000   $8,400   $120,000    
    Activity       $8,400   $110,600           $111,600    
    Beginning of Year 3               $120,000   $8,400   $111,600    

 
102


Table of Contents


Example #4

Cumulative withdrawals during the third Contract Year exceeding the Protected Payment Amount established for that Contract Year and its effect on the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance.

                                 

Protected
Purchase Contract Protected Payment Remaining
Payments Withdrawal Value After Payment Amount Protected
Contract Years Received Amount Activity Base (PPB) (7% of PPB) Balance

    Beginning of Year 1   $100,000           $100,000   $7,000   $100,000    
    Activity   $20,000       $122,000   $120,000       $120,000    
    Beginning of Year 2               $120,000   $8,400   $120,000    
    Activity       $8,400   $110,600           $111,600    
    Beginning of Year 3               $120,000   $8,400   $111,600    
    Activity
(Withdrawal)
      $8,400   $103,600           $103,200    
    Activity
(Withdrawal)
      $5,000   $94,000   $94,000       $94,000    
    Beginning of Year 4               $94,000   $6,580   $94,000    

Because the $5,000 withdrawal causes the cumulative withdrawals to exceed the Protected Payment Amount, the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance immediately after the withdrawal are reset to the lesser of (a) the Contract Value immediately after the withdrawal ($94,000); or, (b) the Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal, less the withdrawal amount ($103,200 - $5,000 = $98,200).

Example #5

A Step-Up in the Remaining Protected Balance at the Beginning of Contract Year 7 (Step-Up Date). This example further assumes that cumulative withdrawals for Contract Years 4, 5 and 6 do not exceed the Protected Payment Amount and no additional Purchase Payments are made during these Contract Years.

                                 

Protected
Purchase Contract Protected Payment Remaining
Payments Withdrawal Value After Payment Amount Protected
Contract Years Received Amount Activity Base (PPB) (7% of PPB) Balance

    Beginning of Year 4               $94,000   $6,580   $94,000    
    Activity
(Withdrawal)
      $6,580               $87,420    
    Beginning of Year 5               $94,000   $6,580   $87,420    
    Activity
(Withdrawal)
      $6,580               $80,840    
    Beginning of Year 6               $94,000   $6,580   $80,840    
    Activity
(Withdrawal)
      $6,580               $74,260    
    Beginning of Year 7                            
    (Balances immediately before
the Step-Up)
          $85,000   $94,000   $6,580   $74,260    
    Activity
(Step-Up effected)
                           
    Beginning of Year 7                            
    (Balances immediately after
the Step-Up)
          $85,000   $85,000   $5,950   $85,000    

Because the Contract Value ($85,000) on the Step-Up Date is greater than the Remaining Protected Balance ($74,260) (see balances immediately before the Step-Up), the Step-Up election: (a) resets the Remaining Protected Balance to equal the Contract Value; (b) resets the Protected Payment Base to equal the reset Remaining Protected Balance, resulting in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base; and (c) resets the Protected Payment Amount to equal 7% of the reset Protected Payment Base ($85,000 × 7% = $5,950), resulting in a reduction in the Protected Payment Amount (see balances immediately after the Step-Up).

 
103


Table of Contents


APPENDIX D:

GUARANTEED INCOME ADVANTAGE PLUS RIDER

SAMPLE CALCULATIONS

The numeric examples shown in this section are based on certain assumptions. They have been provided to assist in understanding the benefits provided by the Guaranteed Income Advantage Plus (“GIA Plus”) Rider, and to demonstrate how Purchase Payments received and withdrawals made from the Contract prior to the Annuity Date affect the values and benefits under this Rider over an extended period of time. These examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.

Example #1—The initial values on the Rider Effective Date based on an Initial Purchase Payment of $100,000. The Initial Purchase Payment is assumed to be the Contract Value if the Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.

                                 

Remaining
Contract GIA Plus Dollar
Purchase Value Guaranteed GIA Plus GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount of
Contract Payments Withdrawal after Income Step-Up Withdrawal Amt. (GWA) Prior Year’s
Years Received Amount Activity Base (GIB) Value Base (GWB) (5% of GWB) GWA

Beginning
of Year 1
  $100,000       $100,000   $100,000   $100,000   $100,000   $5,000   N/A

Example #2—Subsequent Purchase Payment received during the first Contract Year and its effect on the values and balances under this Rider. This example assumes that no withdrawals have been made.

(EXAMPLE 2 GRAPHIC)

In addition to Purchase Payments, the Contract Value is further subject to increases and/or decreases during a Contract Year as a result of additional amounts credited, charges, fees and other deductions, and increases and/or decreases in the investment performance of the Variable Account.

The Guaranteed Income Base prior to receipt of the Purchase Payment is assumed to have accumulated to $101,237. This amount is derived by multiplying each day’s Guaranteed Income Base by the daily factor of 1.000133680. As a result of the subsequent Purchase Payment, the Guaranteed Income Base is increased to $201,237 ($101,237 + $100,000). The Guaranteed Income Base will assume to accumulate to $208,717 at the next Contract Anniversary, by multiplying each day’s Guaranteed Income Base immediately after receipt of the subsequent Purchase Payment by the daily factor of 1.000133680.

The GIA Plus Step-Up Value prior to receipt of the Purchase Payment is $100,000. As a result of the subsequent Purchase Payment, the GIA Plus Step-Up Value is increased to $200,000 ($100,000 + $100,000). On the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 2, the Contract Value ($205,242) is greater than the GIA Plus Step-Up Value immediately prior to that Contract Anniversary ($200,000). As a result, the GIA Plus Step-Up Value as of that Contract Anniversary is equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary ($205,242).

The GIA Plus Withdrawal Base on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 2 is equal to the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base on the Rider Effective Date ($100,000) plus cumulative Purchase Payments received after the Rider Effective Date ($100,000). As a result of the subsequent Purchase Payment, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 2 is equal to $200,000 ($100,000 + $100,000).

 
104


Table of Contents


The GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 2 is determined on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 2, and is equal to 5% of the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base on that Contract Anniversary (5% of $200,000). As a result of the subsequent Purchase Payment, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 2 is equal to $10,000.

Since no withdrawals were made during Contract Year 1, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 1 ($5,000) becomes the remaining dollar amount of the prior Contract Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 2.

Example #3—Cumulative withdrawals during Contract Year 2 exceeding the sum of: (a) the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 2; and (b) the remaining dollar amount of the prior Contract Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 2. The withdrawal is assumed to result in a 10% reduction in the Contract Value.

(EXAMPLE 3 GRAPHIC)

Since the $20,830 withdrawal exceeded the sum of: (a) the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 2; and (b) the remaining dollar amount of the prior Contract’s Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 2, the remaining dollar amount of the prior Contract Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3 is zero. Withdrawals are first applied to the remaining dollar amount of the prior Contract Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount, if any, until exhausted, then to the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for the current Contract Year, until exhausted.

The GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3 is determined on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 3, and is equal to 5% of the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base on that Contract Anniversary (5% of $200,000). As a result, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3 is equal to $10,000. The GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for any Contract Year will not be less than zero.

Immediately after the withdrawal, the Guaranteed Income Base and the GIA Plus Step-Up Value are reduced by the percentage decrease (10%) in Contract Value as a result of the withdrawal.

Since no subsequent Purchase Payments were received during Contract Year 2, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base at the beginning of Contract Year 3 remains unchanged.

 
105


Table of Contents


Example #4—Cumulative withdrawals during Contract Year 3 not exceeding the sum of: (a) the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3; and (b) the remaining dollar value of the prior Contract Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3.

(EXAMPLE 4 GRAPHIC)

Because cumulative withdrawals for Contract Year 3 did not exceed the sum of: (a) the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3; and (b) the remaining dollar amount of the prior Contract Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3, the Guaranteed Income Base on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 4 is calculated as follows:

  Guaranteed Income Base on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 3:
$197,237
 
  Increased at an annual rate of 5% to the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 4:
+ $9,862
 
  Reduced by the amount equal to the amount withdrawn in Contract Year 3:
- $8,000
 
  Guaranteed Income Base on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 4:
$199,099

Since no subsequent Purchase Payments were received during Contract Year 3, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base at the beginning of Contract Year 4 remains unchanged.

The GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 4 is determined on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 4, and is equal to 5% of the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base on that Contract Anniversary (5% of $200,000). As a result, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 4 is equal to $10,000.

Because cumulative withdrawals for Contract Year 3 did not exceed the sum of: (a) the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3; and (b) the remaining dollar value of the prior Contract Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3; the dollar amount of the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contact Year 3 remaining ($2,000) becomes the remaining dollar amount of the prior Contract Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 4.

 
106


Table of Contents


Example #5—Rider values on each Contract Anniversary based on an Initial Purchase Payment of $100,000 paid on the Contract Date. The values further assume that no subsequent Purchase Payments are received and no withdrawals are taken during the first ten (10) Contract Years after the Rider Effective Date. The Initial Purchase Payment is assumed to be the Contract Value if the Rider is effective on a Contract Anniversary.

                                     

GIA Plus
Beginning GIA Plus GIA Plus Withdrawal Remaining Dollar
of Contract Contract Value Guaranteed Step-Up Withdrawal Amt. (GWA) Amount of Prior
Year after Activity Income Base (GIB) Value Base (GWB) (5% of GWB) Year’s GWA

    1     $100,000     $100,000   $100,000   $100,000   $5,000   N/A    
    2     $103,000     $105,000   $103,000   $100,000   $5,000   $5,000    
    3     $106,090     $110,250   $106,090   $100,000   $5,000   $5,000    
    4     $109,273     $115,763   $109,273   $100,000   $5,000   $5,000    
    5     $112,551     $121,551   $112,551   $100,000   $5,000   $5,000    
    6     $115,927     $127,628   $115,927   $100,000   $5,000   $5,000    
    7     $112,450     $134,010   $115,927   $100,000   $5,000   $5,000    
    8     $109,076     $140,710   $115,927   $100,000   $5,000   $5,000    
    9     $105,804     $147,746   $115,927   $100,000   $5,000   $5,000    
    10     $102,630     $155,133   $115,927   $100,000   $5,000   $5,000    
    11     $99,551     $162,889   $115,927   $100,000   $5,000   $5,000    

Example #6—Rider values on each Contract Anniversary based on an Initial Purchase Payment of $100,000 paid on the Contract Date. The values further assume that no subsequent Purchase Payments are received and withdrawals of $5,000 are taken each Contract Year for the first ten (10) Contract Years after the Rider Effective Date. The Initial Purchase Payment is assumed to be the Contract Value if the Rider is effective on a Contract Anniversary.

                                         

GIA Plus
Beginning GIA Plus GIA Plus Withdrawal Remaining Dollar
of Contract Contract Value Guaranteed Step-Up Withdrawal Amt. (GWA) Amount of Prior
Year after Activity Income Base (GIB) Value Base (GWB) (5% of GWB) Year’s GWA

    1     $100,000     $100,000     $100,000     $100,000   $5,000   N/A    
    2     $97,926     $100,000     $97,926     $100,000   $5,000   $0    
    3     $95,789     $100,000     $95,789     $100,000   $5,000   $0    
    4     $93,588     $100,000     $93,588     $100,000   $5,000   $0    
    5     $91,321     $100,000     $91,321     $100,000   $5,000   $0    
    6     $88,986     $100,000     $88,986     $100,000   $5,000   $0    
    7     $81,392     $100,000     $83,910     $100,000   $5,000   $0    
    8     $74,026     $100,000     $78,676     $100,000   $5,000   $0    
    9     $66,881     $100,000     $73,280     $100,000   $5,000   $0    
    10     $59,950     $100,000     $67,718     $100,000   $5,000   $0    
    11     $53,227     $100,000     $61,983     $100,000   $5,000   $0    

Should the Contract annuitize immediately after the Rider has been in effect for at least ten (10) years and the GIA Plus Annuity Option has been elected to provide such payments, the net amount applied on the Annuity Date as a single premium to provide the payments is equal to the greater of:

  (a) the Guaranteed Income Base; or
 
  (b) the GIA Plus Step-Up Value; less any:
 
  (c) applicable withdrawal charges resulting from the conversion to the GIA Plus Annuity Option;
 
  (d) applicable annual charges for expenses related to other optional benefit riders attached to the Contract that are in effect as of the Annuity Date; and
 
  (e) charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes.

Under Example #5, the net amount applied on the Annuity Date (the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 11) is equal to the Guaranteed Income Base ($162,889), as it is greater than the GIA Plus Step-Up Value ($115,927) as of the Annuity Date, less the amounts in (c), (d) and (e) above, if any.

 
107


Table of Contents


Under Example #6, the net amount applied on the Annuity Date (the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 11) is equal to the Guaranteed Income Base ($100,000), as it is greater than the GIA Plus Step-Up Value ($61,983) as of the Annuity Date, less the amounts in (c), (d) and (e) above, if any.

 
108


Table of Contents


APPENDIX E:

PORTFOLIO OPTIMIZATION MODELS UNTIL MAY 5, 2006

For Contracts in a Portfolio Optimization Model during the period May 1, 2006 to May 5, 2006

If you select a Portfolio Optimization model, until May 5, 2006 your Purchase Payments or Contract Value, as applicable, will be allocated to the Investment Options according to the model you select as indicated in the chart below. On May 5, 2006, we will automatically update your model to the Portfolio Optimization model allocations shown under the HOW YOUR INVESTMENTS ARE ALLOCATED— Portfolio Optimization section in this Prospectus.

                                         

    Model A
Conservative
      Model B
Moderate-Conservative
  Model C
Moderate
  Model D
Moderate-Aggressive
  Model E
Aggressive


Investor Profile

You are looking for a relatively stable investment and require investments that generate some level of income.   Your focus is on keeping pace with inflation. Income generating investment and capital appreciation are desired.   You want the opportunity for long-term moderate growth.   You want an investment that is geared for growth and are willing to accept above average risk.   You are an aggressive investor and can tolerate short-term market swings.

 Shorter Investment Horizon < --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- > Longer Investment Horizon


Investor Objective

Primarily preservation of capital   Moderate growth   Steady growth in asset values   Moderately high growth in asset values   High growth in asset values


Risk Characteristics

There may be some losses in the values of the investment as asset values fluctuate.   There may be some losses in the values of the investment from year to year.   There will probably be some losses in the values of the underlying investments from year to year.
       
                Fluctuations in value should be less than those of the overall stock markets.   Some of these might be large, but the overall fluctuations in asset values should be less than those of the U.S. stock market.

 Lower Risk < ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- > Higher Risk


Asset Class Exposure

                                                                 
Model A Model B Model C Model D Model E

Cash         13 %         6 %         3 %         3 %         2 %    

Bonds         62           49           37           20           5      

Domestic Stocks         20           34           44           59           70      

International Stocks         5           11           16           18           23      
                                                                   

Portfolio Optimization Model Allocations as of May 6, 2005

Model A Model B Model C Model D Model E

  Large-Cap Growth                   6 %         4 %         4 %         4 %    

  American Funds Growth-Income                             3           4           8      

  American Funds Growth                             3           6           10      

  Diversified Research         3 %         4           4           3           3      

  Short Duration Bond         24           16           7           4                

  Growth LT                             2           2           5      

  Mid-Cap Value         4           7           8           12           7      

  International Value         3           5           5           5           9      

  International Large-Cap         3           8           10           13           15      

  Equity Index                             2           6           7      

  Small-Cap Index                             3           3           2      

  Fasciano Small Equity                                       4           5      

  Small-Cap Value                   3           2                          

  Main Street Core         7           7           7           6           4      

  Emerging Markets                             4           4           4      

  Managed Bond         19           16           14           6                

  Inflation Managed         14           13           11           6                

  Money Market         10           3                                    

  High Yield Bond         6           4           3                          

  Large-Cap Value         4           5           5           6           7      

  Comstock         3           3           3           3           3      

  Real Estate                                       3           5      

  VN Small-Cap Value                                                 2      
 

 
   Less Volatile < ---------------------------------------------------------------- > More Volatile

 
109


Table of Contents


APPENDIX F:

KETRA Provisions

The Katrina Emergency Tax Relief Act of 2005 (KETRA) contains provisions designed to provide relief to individuals and businesses affected by Hurricanes Katrina, Rita and Wilma. The provisions may apply to distributions from Qualified Plans and IRAs, as well as loans from Qualified Plans, and are effective retroactively to September 23, 2005.

In determining whether the KETRA provisions pertaining to distributions are available to you, you must determine if 1) you are a “Qualified Individual”, and 2) the distribution is a “Qualified Hurricane distribution”. In determining whether the KETRA provisions pertaining to loans are available to you, you must determine if 1) you are a “Qualified Individual”, 2) the loan was taken from an eligible “Qualified Plan”, and 3) the loan is or was taken during the timeframe specified by KETRA. Please consult your tax or legal advisor to determine if the KETRA provisions may be applicable to you.

Special Restrictions under Qualified Plans


KETRA exempts up to $100,000 of “Qualified Hurricane Distributions” taken by “Qualified Individuals” who are under the age of 59 1/2 from the 10% IRS early withdrawal penalty. The distributions are included in income, however, they can be included ratably over a three-year period. In addition, in most cases, the distribution may be recontributed into an eligible retirement plan within three years, thus avoiding the tax altogether. The recontribution will be treated as a rollover. Special rules apply regarding repayment of distributions that were made for the purchase or construction of a main home, and no repayment is allowed for some distributions, such as Required Minimum Distributions.

Traditional IRAs


KETRA exempts up to $100,000 of “Qualified Hurricane Distributions” taken by “Qualified Individuals” who are under the age of 59 1/2 from the 10% IRS early withdrawal penalty. The distributions are included in income, however, they can be included ratably over a three-year period. In addition, in most cases, the distribution may be recontributed into an eligible retirement plan within three yeas, thus avoiding the tax altogether. The recontribution will be treated as a rollover. Special rules apply regarding repayment of distributions that were made for the purchase or construction of a main home, and no repayment is allowed for some distributions, such as Required Minimum Distributions.

Loans


KETRA increases the amount that can be withdrawn by a “Qualified Individual” as a loan from an eligible “Qualified Plan” from $50,000 or 50% of the employee’s account value, whichever is less, to $100,000 or the employee’s account value, whichever is less.

Repayment Terms


KETRA provides for a one-year suspension of loan repayments on loans taken by “Qualified Individuals” from eligible “Qualified Plans”. This delayed repayment relief applies to loans with loan repayment due dates beginning on or after dates specified in KETRA.

 
110


Table of Contents


                     
To receive a current copy of the Pacific Innovations SAI without charge, call
(800) 722-2333 or complete the following and send it to:
 
Pacific Life Insurance Company
Post Office Box 7187
Pasadena, CA 91109-7187
 
Name
 
               
 
Address
 
               
 
City
 
  State  
  Zip  
 


Table of Contents



PACIFIC INNOVATIONS      
WHERE TO GO FOR MORE INFORMATION


The Pacific Innovations variable annuity Contract is offered by Pacific Life Insurance Company, 700 Newport Center Drive. P.O. Box 9000, Newport Beach, California 92660.

If you have any questions about the Contract, please ask your registered representative or contact us.


You’ll find more information about the Pacific Innovations variable annuity contract and Separate Account A in the Statement of Additional Information (SAI) dated May 1, 2006.

The SAI has been filed with the SEC and is considered to be part of this Prospectus because it’s incorporated by reference. You’ll find the table of contents for the SAI on page 90 of this Prospectus.

You can get a copy of the SAI at no charge by calling or writing to us, or by contacting the SEC. The SEC may charge you a fee for this information.


How to contact us

Call or write to us at:
Pacific Life Insurance Company
P.O. Box 7187
Pasadena, California 91109-7187

1-800-722-2333

6 a.m. through 5 p.m. Pacific time

Send Investments, other payments and application forms to the following address:

By mail

Pacific Life Insurance Company
P.O. Box 100060
Pasadena, California 91189-0060

By overnight delivery service

Pacific Life Insurance Company
1111 South Arroyo Parkway, Suite 205
Pasadena, California 91105


How to contact the SEC

Public Reference Section of the SEC
Washington, D.C. 20549-6009
1-800-SEC-0330
Internet: www.sec.gov


NASD Public Disclosure program

The NASD provides investor protection education through its website and printed materials. The NASD regulation website address is www.nasdr.com. An investor brochure that includes information describing the Public Disclosure program may be obtained from the NASD. The NASD Public Disclosure hotline number is (800) 289-9999. The NASD does not charge a fee for the Public Disclosure program services.


Table of Contents

Pacific Life Insurance Company

700 Newport Center Drive
Newport Beach, CA 92660
(800) 722-2333

Mailing address:

P.O. Box 7187
Pasadena, CA 91109-7187

Visit us at our website: www.PacificLife.com

(IMSA LOGO)  
 
* Membership promotes ethical market conduct  
for individual life insurance and annuities  
 
1617-6A  
 
Pacific Life Insurance Company
Mailing address:
P.O. Box 7187
Pasadena, California 91109-7187

ADDRESS SERVICE REQUESTED

Prsrt Std
U.S. Postage
Paid
Santa Ana CA
Permit #61


Table of Contents


PACIFIC INNOVATIONS
SELECT      PROSPECTUS MAY 1, 2006

Pacific Innovations Select is an individual flexible premium deferred variable annuity contract issued by Pacific Life Insurance Company (Pacific Life).


This Contract is not available in all states. This Prospectus is not an offer in any state or jurisdiction where we’re not legally permitted to offer the Contract.

The Contract is described in detail in this Prospectus and its Statement of Additional Information (SAI). The Pacific Select Fund is described in its Prospectus and its SAI. No one has the right to describe the Contract or the Pacific Select Fund any differently than they have been described in these documents.

You should be aware that the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) has not reviewed the Contract and does not guarantee that the information in this Prospectus is accurate or complete. It’s a criminal offense to say otherwise.

Pacific Life does not provide legal or tax advice. Any statement contained in this communication is not intended or written to be legal or tax advice, nor may it be used for the purpose of avoiding any tax penalties that may be imposed on the taxpayer. Any taxpayer should seek advice based on the taxpayer’s particular circumstances from an independent tax advisor.

This Contract is not a deposit or obligation of, or guaranteed or endorsed by, any bank. It’s not federally insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, the Federal Reserve Board, or any other government agency. Investment in a Contract involves risk, including possible loss of principal.


This Prospectus provides information you should know before buying a Contract. It’s accompanied by a current Prospectus for the Pacific Select Fund, the Fund that provides the underlying Portfolios for the Variable Investment Options offered under the Contract. The Variable Investment Options are funded by Separate Account A of Pacific Life. Please read both Prospectuses carefully, and keep them for future reference.

Here’s a list of all the Investment Options currently available under your Contract:

VARIABLE INVESTMENT OPTIONS

     
International Value
International Small-Cap
Diversified Research
Equity
American Funds® Growth-Income
American Funds® Growth
Technology
Short Duration Bond
Concentrated Growth
Diversified Bond
Growth LT
Focused 30
Health Sciences
Mid-Cap Value
Large-Cap Growth
 (formerly called Blue Chip)
Capital Opportunities
  International Large-Cap
Equity Index
Small-Cap Index
Fasciano Small Equity
Small-Cap Value
Multi-Strategy
Main Street® Core
Emerging Markets
Managed Bond
Inflation Managed
Money Market
High Yield Bond
Large-Cap Value
Comstock
Mid-Cap Growth
Real Estate
VN Small-Cap Value
FIXED OPTIONS
Fixed Option
DCA Plus Fixed Option
   

The Fixed Option is only available on Contracts issued before November 1, 2002.

You’ll find more information about the Contract and Separate Account A in the SAI dated May 1, 2006. The SAI has been filed with the SEC and is considered to be part of this Prospectus because it’s incorporated by reference. You’ll find a table of contents for the SAI on page 95 of this Prospectus. You can get a copy of the SAI without charge by calling or writing to Pacific Life. You can also visit the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov, which contains the SAI, material incorporated into this Prospectus by reference, and other information about registrants that file electronically with the SEC.



 


YOUR GUIDE TO THIS PROSPECTUS
       
 An Overview of Pacific Innovations Select   3

  12
  12
  14

  14
  14
  14

  15
  15
  16
  20
  21
  21
  22

  23
  23
  25
  25
  26
  26
  27
  27
  28

  28
  28
  28
  29
  29
  30
  32
  32
    36
    37
    38

  39
  39
  41
  42

  42
Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider
  42
  47
  51
  55
  56
  58
  61
  63
  65

  67
  67
  67
  69

  73
  74
  76
    76
    79
    80
  82
  83
  83

  84
  84
  84
  85
  86
  87
  87
  87
  88
  88
  89
  89
  89

  89
  89
  90
  91

  93

  95

  96

  104

  110

  112

  117

Appendix F: KETRA Provisions
  118

  Back Cover
 
2


Table of Contents

AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC INNOVATIONS SELECT

This overview tells you some key things you should know about your Contract. It’s designed as a summary only – please read this Prospectus, your Contract and the Statement of Additional Information for more detailed information.

Some states have different rules about how annuity contracts are described or administered. These rules are reflected in your Contract, or in endorsements or supplements to your Contract. The terms of your Contract, or of any Rider, Endorsement or Supplement, prevail over what’s in this Prospectus.

In this Prospectus, you and your mean the Contract Owner or Policyholder. Pacific Life, we, us and our refer to Pacific Life Insurance Company. Contract means a Pacific Innovations Select variable annuity contract, unless we state otherwise.

Pacific Innovations Select Basics

An annuity contract may be appropriate if you’re looking for retirement income or you want to meet other long-term financial objectives. Discuss with your qualified investment professional whether a variable annuity, optional benefits and underlying Investment Options are appropriate for you taking into consideration your age, income, net worth, tax status, insurance needs, financial objectives, investment goals, liquidity needs, time horizon, risk tolerance and other relevant information. Together you can decide if a variable annuity is right for you.

This Contract may not be the right one for you if you need to withdraw money for short-term needs, because withdrawal charges and tax penalties for early withdrawal may apply.

You should consider the Contract’s investment and income benefits, as well as its costs.

Pacific Innovations Select is an annuity contract between you and Pacific Life Insurance Company. Annuity contracts have two phases, the accumulation phase and the annuitization (income) phase. The two phases are discussed below.

This Contract is designed for long-term financial planning. It allows you to invest money on a tax-deferred basis for retirement or other goals, and to receive income in a variety of ways, including a series of income payments for life or for a specified period of years.

Non-Qualified and Qualified Contracts are available. You buy a Non-Qualified Contract with “after-tax” dollars. You buy a Qualified Contract under a qualified retirement or pension plan, or an individual retirement annuity or account (IRA), or form thereof. It’s important to know that IRAs and qualified plans are already tax-deferred. Therefore, an annuity contract should be used to fund an IRA or qualified plan to benefit from the annuity’s features other than tax deferral.

Pacific Innovations Select is a variable annuity, which means that the value of your Contract fluctuates depending on the performance of the Investment Options you choose. The Contract allows you to choose how often you make Investments (“Purchase Payments”) and how much you add each time.

Your Right to Cancel (“Free Look”)

During the Free Look period, you have the right to cancel your Contract and return it with instructions to us or to your registered representative for a refund. The amount refunded may be more or less than the Investments you’ve made, depending on the state where you signed your application and the kind of Contract you buy.

The Accumulation Phase

The Investment Options you choose and how they perform will affect the value of your Contract during the accumulation phase, as well as the amount of your annuity payments during the income phase if you choose a variable annuitization payout.

 
3


Table of Contents

AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC INNOVATIONS SELECT

The accumulation phase begins on your Contract Date and continues until your Annuity Date. During the accumulation phase, you can put money in your Contract by making Investments, and choose Investment Options in which to allocate them. You can also take money out of your Contract by making a withdrawal.

Investments (“Purchase Payments”)

Your initial Investment must be at least $10,000 for a Non-Qualified Contract and at least $2,000 for a Qualified Contract. Additional Investments must be at least $250 for a Non-Qualified Contract and $50 for a Qualified Contract. We also call your Investments “Purchase Payments”.

Investment Options

You can ask your registered representative to help you choose the right Investment Options for your goals and risk tolerance.

You can choose from a variety of Variable Investment Options (also called Subaccounts), each of which invests in a corresponding Portfolio of the Pacific Select Fund. We’re the investment adviser for the Pacific Select Fund. We oversee the management of all the Fund’s Portfolios and manage two of the Portfolios directly. We’ve retained other portfolio managers to manage the other Portfolios. The value of each Portfolio will fluctuate with the value of the investments it holds, and returns are not guaranteed.

You can also choose any available fixed option that earns a guaranteed rate of interest of at least 3% annually.

We allocate your Investments to the Investment Options you choose. The value of your Contract will fluctuate during the accumulation phase depending on the Investment Options you’ve chosen. You bear the investment risk of any Variable Investment Options you choose.

You’ll find more about the Investment Options starting on page 12.

Transferring among Investment Options

You can transfer among Investment Options any time, subject to certain limitations until your Annuity Date without paying any current income tax. Transfers are limited to 25 for each calendar year. Only two transfers per month may involve the International Value, International Small-Cap, International Large-Cap or Emerging Markets Investment Options. If you have used all 25 transfers in a calendar year, you may make one additional transfer of all or a portion of your Variable Account Value to the Money Market Investment Option before the start of the next calendar year. You can also make systematic transfers by enrolling in our dollar cost averaging, portfolio rebalancing or earnings sweep programs. Transfers made under these systematic transfer programs or under an asset allocation program established and maintained by us are excluded from the limitation. Some restrictions may apply to transfers to or from any fixed option.

You’ll find more about transfers and transfer limitations starting on page 21.

Withdrawals

You can make full and partial withdrawals to supplement your income or for other purposes. You can withdraw a certain amount each year without paying a withdrawal charge, but any amount withdrawn in excess of this amount may incur a withdrawal charge on Investments that are less than four years old. Some restrictions apply to making partial withdrawals from any fixed option.

In general, you may have to pay income taxes on withdrawals or other distributions from your Contract. If you’re under age 59 1/2, a 10% federal penalty tax may also apply to taxable withdrawals.

You’ll find more about withdrawals starting on page 39.

The Income Phase

The income phase of your Contract begins on your Annuity Date. Generally, you can choose to surrender your Contract and receive a single payment or you can annuitize your Contract and receive a series of income payments.

 
4


Table of Contents

You can choose fixed or variable annuity payments, or a combination of both. Variable annuity payments may not be available in all states. You can choose monthly, quarterly, semiannual or annual payments. We’ll make the income payments to your designated payee. Income distributions are always taxed to the Owner.

If you choose variable annuity payments, the amount of the payments will fluctuate depending on the performance of the Variable Investment Options you choose. After your Annuity Date, if you choose variable annuity payments, you can exchange your Subaccount Annuity Units among the Variable Investment Options up to four times in any 12-month period.

You’ll find more about annuitization starting on page 28 and annuity options available under the Contract starting on page 30.

The Death Benefit

The Contract provides a death benefit upon the first death of an Owner or the death of the sole surviving Annuitant, whichever occurs first, during the accumulation phase. Death benefit proceeds are payable when we receive proof of death and payment instructions in proper form. To whom we pay a death benefit, and how we calculate the amount of the death benefit depends on who dies first and the type of Contract you own.

You’ll find more about the death benefit starting on page 32.

Optional Riders

Optional riders are subject to availability. Before purchasing any optional benefit, you should consult with a qualified investment professional for advice on whether an optional benefit is appropriate for you.

Stepped-Up Death Benefit (SDBR) and Premier Death Benefit (PDBR) Riders

The SDBR offers you the ability to lock in market gains for your beneficiaries with a stepped-up death benefit, which is the highest Contract Value on any previous Contract Anniversary (prior to the Annuitant’s 81st birthday) adjusted for additional Purchase Payments and withdrawals. You can only buy the SDBR when you buy your Contract. The PDBR is only available on Contracts issued before May 1, 2003.

You’ll find more about the SDBR on page 36 and the PDBR on page 37.

Earnings Enhancement Guarantee (EEG) Rider

The optional EEG Rider provides for an additional amount (EEG Amount) to be included in the death benefit proceeds when such proceeds become payable as a result of the sole surviving Annuitant’s death or first death of an Owner who is also an Annuitant. You may buy the EEG Rider on the Contract Date or on the first Contract Anniversary.

If you buy the EEG Rider within 60 days after the Contract Date or within 30 days after the first Contract Anniversary, we will make the effective date of the EEG Rider coincide with that Contract Date or Contract Anniversary.

The Earnings Enhancement Guarantee (EEG) Rider, EEG Amount and EEG Charge are called the Guaranteed Earnings Enhancement (GEE) Rider, GEE Amount, and GEE Charge, respectively, in the Contract’s Rider.

You’ll find more about the EEG Rider on page 38.

Optional Living Benefit Riders

You may purchase any optional Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary. In addition, if you purchase a Rider within 60 days after the Contract Date or within 30 days after any Contract Anniversary, the Rider Effective Date will be that Contract Date or Contract Anniversary.

Some optional Riders require that your entire Contract Value be invested in an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for the Rider to remain in effect. If you use our DCA Plus program in conjunction with such an asset allocation program, you will also be considered to have met this requirement. (See the HOW YOUR INVESTMENTS ARE ALLOCATED— Portfolio Optimization section in this Prospectus.)

 
5


Table of Contents

AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC INNOVATIONS SELECT

There may be adverse consequences to taking a loan while an optional Rider is in effect. If you have an existing loan on your Contract, you should carefully consider whether an optional Rider is appropriate for you.

Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider

The optional Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider lets you withdraw up to 5% of your investments per year, lock in market gains, and may provide a credit which increases your protected amount. Subject to state availability, the optional Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider offers you, during the accumulation period, the ability to withdraw up to 5% of a Protected Payment Base (usually Purchase Payments), the potential to receive 5% of the Protected Payment Base for life, even if the Contract Value or Remaining Protected Balance is zero, and provides an Income Access Credit of 6% to your Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance for up to a five year period (provided you do not take any withdrawals during this period), when used with an asset allocation program established and maintained by us.

The Rider also provides for an additional option (the “Reset”) on any Contract Anniversary beginning with the first (1st) anniversary of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and may include an increase in the charges (up to a maximum of 1.20%) associated with the Rider. (Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance, Protected Payment Amount, Income Access Credit, Reset, and Reset Date are described in the OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS—Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider section in this Prospectus.)

The Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider is called the Enhanced Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit Rider in the Contract’s Rider.

You’ll find more about the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider on page 42.

Income Access Plus Rider

The optional Income Access Plus Rider lets you withdraw up to 5% of your investments per year, lock in market gains, and may provide a credit which increases your protected amount. Subject to state availability, the Rider offers you, during the accumulation period, the ability to withdraw up to 5% of a Protected Payment Base (usually Purchase Payments) and provides an Income Access Credit of 6% to your Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance for up to a five year period (provided you do not take any withdrawals during this period), when used with an asset allocation program established and maintained by us.

The Rider also provides for an additional option (the “Reset”) on any Contract Anniversary beginning with the first (1st) anniversary of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and may include an increase in the charges (up to a maximum of 1.20%) associated with the Rider. (Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance, Income Access Credit, Reset, and Reset Date are described in the OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS—Income Access Plus Rider section in this Prospectus.)

The Income Access Plus Rider is called the Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit Rider in the Contract’s Rider.

You’ll find more about the Income Access Plus Rider on page 47.

Income Access Rider

The optional Income Access Rider lets you withdraw up to 7% of your investments per year and lock in market gains. The optional Income Access Rider offers you, during the accumulation period, the ability to withdraw up to 7% of a Protected Payment Base (usually Purchase Payments) when used with an asset allocation program established and maintained by us.

The Rider also provides for an additional option (the “Step-Up”) on any Contract Anniversary beginning with the first (1st) anniversary of the Effective Date of the Rider or most recent Step-Up Date, whichever is later, and may include an increase in the charge (up to a maximum of 0.75%) associated with the Rider.

You’ll find more about the Income Access Rider on page 51.

 
6


Table of Contents

Guaranteed Protection Advantage 5 (GPA 5) Rider

The optional GPA 5 Rider allows for an additional amount that may be added to your Contract Value when an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for this Rider is used for a 10-year period (the “Term”).

The Rider also provides for an additional option (the “Step-Up”) on any Contract Anniversary beginning with the 5th anniversary of the Effective Date of the Rider and before the Annuity Date. If the Step-Up is elected, your 10-year Term would begin again as of the effective date of the Step-Up election, and may include an increase in the charges (up to a maximum of 0.75%) associated with the Rider.

You’ll find more about the GPA 5 Rider on page 55.

Guaranteed Protection Advantage (GPA) Rider

The GPA Rider is only available if the original Effective Date of the Rider is before April 1, 2003. The optional GPA Rider provides for an additional amount that may be added to your Contract Value when an asset allocation program, established and maintained by us for this Rider, is used for a 10-year period (the “Term”). The Term begins on the Effective Date of the Rider.

You’ll find more about the GPA Rider on page 56.

Guaranteed Income Advantage Plus (GIA Plus) Rider

The optional GIA Plus Rider offers a minimum fixed income payout, plus the ability to lock in market gains and withdraw money each year. The optional GIA Plus Rider offers a guaranteed income annuity option when an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for the GIA Plus Rider is used.

The GIA Plus Rider is called the Guaranteed Income Annuity (GIA) Rider in the Contract’s Rider.

You’ll find more about the GIA Plus Rider on page 58.

Guaranteed Income Advantage 5 (GIA 5) Rider

The optional GIA 5 Rider is no longer available for purchase. The optional GIA 5 Rider offered a guaranteed income advantage annuity option when an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for this Rider is used.

The Rider provides for an additional option (the “Step-Up”) on any Contract Anniversary beginning on the 5th anniversary of the Effective Date of the Rider and before the Annuity Date and may include an increase in the charges (up to a maximum of 0.75%) associated with the Rider.

You’ll find more about the GIA 5 Rider on page 61.

Guaranteed Income Advantage II (GIA II) Rider

The optional GIA II Rider is no longer available for purchase. The optional GIA II Rider offered a guaranteed income advantage annuity option.

The Rider provides for an additional option (the “Step-Up”) on any Contract Anniversary beginning on the 5th anniversary of the Effective Date of the Rider and before the Annuity Date and may include an increase in the charges (up to a maximum of 1.00%) associated with the Rider.

You’ll find more about the GIA II Rider on page 63.

Guaranteed Income Advantage (GIA) Rider

The GIA Rider is no longer available for purchase. It offered a guaranteed income advantage annuity option.

You’ll find more about the GIA Rider on page 65.

 
7


Table of Contents

AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC INNOVATIONS SELECT

Fees and Expenses

This section of the overview explains the fees and expenses associated with your Pacific Innovations Select Contract.

Contract Transaction Expenses

The following describes the transaction fees and expenses that you will pay when owning your Contract. Expenses are fixed under the terms of your Contract. Premium taxes and/or other taxes, may also apply to your Contract. We generally charge premium taxes and/or other taxes when you annuitize your Contract, but there are other times when we charge them to your Contract instead. Please see your Contract for details.

         
• Maximum Withdrawal Charge (as a percentage of Purchase Payments)
    7.00% 1

Periodic Expenses

The following describes the fees and expenses that you will pay periodically during the time you own your Contract not including Portfolio fees and expenses.

  Separate Account A Annual Expenses (as a percentage of the average daily Account Value) (See TERMS USED IN THIS PROSPECTUS on page 93):
                         
• Annual Fee2
                    $30.00  
                         
Without With Stepped-Up With Premier
Rider Death Benefit Rider Death Benefit Rider

• Mortality and Expense Risk Charge3
    1.40%       1.40%       1.40%  
• Administrative Fee3
    0.25%       0.25%       0.25%  
• Death Benefit Rider Charge 3,4
    none       0.20%       0.35%  
     
     
     
 
• Total Separate Account A Annual Expenses
    1.65%       1.85%       2.00%  
     
     
     
 
Loan Expenses (interest on Contract Debt) (See LOANS on page 80):
• Loan Interest Rate5
                    2.00%  

  Optional Rider Annual Expenses (calculated as a percentage of Contract Value except for GIA Plus) (See TERMS USED IN THIS PROSPECTUS on page 93):
                 
Current Charge Maximum Charge
Percentage Percentage

• Earnings Enhancement Guarantee (EEG) Rider Charge6
    0.25 %     0.25 %
• Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider Charge7
    0.60 %     1.20 %
• Income Access Plus Rider Charge7
    0.40 %     1.20 %
• Income Access Rider Charge8
    0.40 %     0.75 %
• Guaranteed Protection Advantage 5 (GPA 5) Rider Charge9
    0.25 %     0.75 %
• Guaranteed Protection Advantage (GPA) Rider Charge10
    0.10 %     0.10 %
• Guaranteed Income Advantage Plus (GIA Plus) Rider Charge11
    0.50 %     0.50 %
• Guaranteed Income Advantage 5 (GIA 5) Rider Charge12
    0.40 %     0.75 %
• Guaranteed Income Advantage II (GIA II) Rider Charge12
    0.70 %     1.00 %
• Guaranteed Income Advantage (GIA) Rider Charge13
    0.30 %     0.30 %
 
1
The withdrawal charge may or may not apply or may be reduced under certain circumstances. See CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS and WITHDRAWALS.
 
2
We deduct an Annual Fee on each Contract Anniversary up to your Annuity Date and when you make a full withdrawal if the Contract Value on these days is less than $50,000 after deducting any outstanding loan and interest (your Net Contract Value). See CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS.
 
3
This is an annual rate and assessed on a daily basis. The daily rate is calculated by dividing the annual rate by 365.
 
4
If you buy an Optional Death Benefit Rider, we will add this charge to the Mortality and Expense Risk Charge until your Annuity Date. The Premier Death Benefit Rider is only available on Contracts issued before May 1, 2003. See CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS.
 
8


Table of Contents

 
5
If you request a loan on your Contract, we will charge you a gross interest rate of 5.00% on your outstanding principal amount. We will credit you the amount of 3.00% on any Contract Value attributed to your Loan Account. The net amount of interest you will pay on your loan will be 2.00%. See LOANS.
 
6
If you buy the EEG Rider (subject to availability), we deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment Options on each Contract Anniversary following the date you purchase the Rider, and when you make a full withdrawal, if the EEG Rider is in effect on that date. See CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS.
 
7
If you buy the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider or the Income Access Plus Rider (subject to state availability), we deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment Options on each contract Anniversary following the Effective Date of the Rider during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect, or if the Rider is terminated. If the Rider is terminated for reasons other than death or annuitization, this charge will be deducted on the effective date of termination. Under the terms and conditions of the Rider, the annual Charge will remain the same while the Rider is in effect, unless you elect the optional Reset provision provided under the Rider. The Charge if you purchase the Rider will also be shown on the Rider in your Contract. We will waive the annual Charge if the Rider terminates as a result of death of an Owner or sole surviving Annuitant or upon full annuitization of your Contract. If the Effective Date of the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider is before July 1, 2006, the current charge percentage is equal to 0.40%. Currently, the charge percentage will remain at 0.40% even if you elect to reset the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider. However, for any future elections to reset, we reserve the right to increase the charge percentage to an amount that will not exceed the charge percentage in effect for new issues of this Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider. The optional Income Access Plus Rider is only available until the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider is available in your state.
 
8
If you buy the Income Access Rider (subject to state availability), we deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment Options on each Contract Anniversary following the Effective Date of the Rider during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect, or if the Rider is terminated. If the Rider is terminated for reasons other than death or annuitization, this charge will be deducted on the effective date of termination. Under the terms and conditions of the Rider the charge will remain the same while the Rider is in effect, unless you elect the Step-Up provisions provided under the Rider. The charge if you purchase a Rider will also be shown on the Rider in your Contract. If the Effective Date of the Rider is before March 1, 2004, the Income Access Rider Annual Charge is equal to 0.30%.
 
9
If you buy the GPA 5 Rider (subject to state availability), we deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment Options on each Contract Anniversary following the Effective Date of the Rider during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect, or if you terminate the Rider. If the Rider is terminated for reasons other than death or annuitization, this charge will be deducted on the effective date of termination. Under the terms and conditions of the Rider the charge will remain the same while the Rider is in effect, unless you elect the Step-Up provision under Rider. The charge if you purchase a Rider will also be shown on the Rider in your Contract. If the Effective Date of the GPA 5 Rider is before March 1, 2004 the Guaranteed Protection Charge is equal to 0.10%.
 
10
If you purchased the GPA Rider (subject to availability), we deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment Options on each Contract Anniversary following the Effective Date of the Rider during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect. If the Rider is terminated for reasons other than death or annuitization, this charge will be deducted on the effective date of termination. The GPA Rider is only available if the original Effective Date of the Rider is before April 1, 2003.
 
11
If you buy the GIA Plus Rider (subject to state availability), we charge the fee based on the greater of the Contract Value or the Guaranteed Income Base. We deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment Options on each Contract Anniversary and when you make a full withdrawal if the Rider is in effect on that date, or if the Rider is terminated. We will waive the annual charge if the Rider terminates as a result of death of an Owner or sole surviving Annuitant or upon full annuitization of your Contract.
 
12
If you purchased the GIA 5 or GIA II Rider, (subject to state availability) we deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment Options on each Contract Anniversary, the Annuity Date, and when you make a full withdrawal, if the Rider is in effect on that date, or when you terminate your Rider. If the Rider is terminated for reasons other than death or annuitization, this charge will be deducted on the effective date of termination. The charge if you purchase the Rider will also be shown on the Rider in your Contract. Under the terms and conditions of the Rider the charge will remain the same while the Rider is in effect, unless you elect the Step-Up provision provided under each Rider. The GIA 5 or GIA II Riders are only available if the original Effective Date of the Rider is before February 1, 2005.
 
13
If you purchased the GIA Rider (subject to state availability), we deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment Options on each Contract Anniversary, Annuity Date, and when you make a full withdrawal, if the Rider is in effect on that date, or when you terminate your Rider. If the Rider is terminated for reasons other than death or annuitization, this charge will be deducted on the effective date of termination. The charge if you purchase the Rider will also be shown on the Rider in your Contract. The optional GIA Rider is only available until the GIA Plus Rider is available in your state.
 
9


Table of Contents

AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC INNOVATIONS SELECT

 

Total Annual Fund Operating Expenses

You will find more about the underlying Funds starting on page 12, and in the Funds’ Prospectus which accompanies this Prospectus.

This table shows the range (minimum and maximum) of fees and expenses charged by any of the Portfolios, expressed as a percentage of average daily net assets, for the year ended December 31, 2005, adjusted to reflect fees and expenses of new Portfolios.

Each Variable Account of the Separate Account purchases shares of the corresponding Funds’ Portfolio at net asset value. The net asset value reflects the investment advisory fees and other expenses that are deducted from the assets of the Portfolio. The advisory fees and other expenses are not fixed or specified under the terms of the Contract, and they may vary from year to year. These fees and expenses are described in the Funds’ Prospectus.

                 
Total Annual Portfolio Operating Expenses1 Minimum Maximum

Expenses that are deducted from the Funds’ assets, including advisory fees, 12b-1 distribution expenses and other expenses.     0.29 %     1.57 %
 
1 To help limit Pacific Select Fund expenses, Pacific Life, advisor to the Fund, has contractually agreed to reduce its investment advisory fees or otherwise reimburse each Portfolio of Pacific Select Fund, except the American Funds® Growth-Income Portfolio, for its operating expenses (including organizational expenses, but not including advisory fees, additional costs associated with foreign investing (including foreign taxes on dividends, interest, or gains), interest (including commitment fees), taxes, brokerage commissions and other transactional expenses, extraordinary expenses such as litigation expense, and other expenses not incurred in the ordinary course of each Portfolio’s business, and expenses of any counsel or other persons or services retained by the Fund’s independent trustees) that exceed an annual rate of 0.10% of a Portfolio’s average daily net assets. Such reduction or reimbursement is subject to repayment to Pacific Life, for a period of time as permitted under regulatory and/or accounting standards (currently 3 years from the end of the fiscal year in which the reimbursement took place), to the extent such expenses fall below the 0.10% expense cap in future years. Any amounts repaid to Pacific Life will have the effect of increasing such expenses of the Portfolio, but not above the 0.10% expense cap. There is no guarantee that Pacific Life will continue to cap expenses after April 30, 2007. Until May 1, 2007, or if earlier, such time as the American Funds® Growth- Income and American Funds® Growth Portfolios no longer invest substantially all of their assets in a master fund, Pacific Life will limit its total investment advisory fee to 0.36% for each Portfolio. Also, in the case of the American Funds® Growth-Income Portfolio, Pacific Life has contractually agreed to waive all or part of its investment advisory fees or otherwise reimburse the Portfolio for its ordinary operating expenses, including advisory fees, and the proportionate share of the net fees and expenses of the master fund that exceed the annual rate of 1.01% of its average daily net assets until April 28, 2008.
 
In 2005, Pacific Life was not required to make any reimbursements to any portfolios under the expense limitation agreements. All reductions or reimbursements in prior years have been fully recouped or expired as of December 31, 2005.
 
Effective May 1, 2005, Pacific Select Fund entered into an Advisory Fee Reduction Program (“Program”), which may lower the advisory fee paid to Pacific Life under the investment advisory agreement. Pursuant to this Program, Pacific Life has agreed to waive 0.00125% of its advisory fee for the period from May 1, 2005 through April 30, 2007. This reduction is reflected in the chart above. See the Pacific Select Fund Prospectus for details on fees and expenses of the Fund and on the Program.
 
10


Table of Contents

Examples

The following examples are intended to help you compare the cost of investing in your Contract with the cost of investing in other variable annuity contracts. These costs include Contract transaction expenses, the maximum periodic Contract expenses (including the combination of optional Riders whose cumulative expenses totaled more than any other combination of optional riders), Separate Account annual expenses, and Portfolio fees and expenses for the year ended December 31, 2005. Premium taxes and/or other taxes may also be applicable.

The examples assume that you invest $10,000 in the Contract for the time periods indicated. They also assume that your Investment has a 5% return each year and assumes the maximum and minimum fees and expenses of all of the Investment Options available. Although your actual costs may be higher or lower, based on these assumptions, your maximum and minimum costs would be:

•  If you surrendered your Contract:
                 
1 Year 3 Years 5 Years 10 Years
Maximum*   $1,316   $2,380   $3,306   $6,317
Minimum*   $831   $982   $1,068   $2,302

•  If you annuitized your Contract:
                 
1 Year 3 Years 5 Years 10 Years
Maximum*   $1,316   $2,020   $3,306   $6,317
Minimum*   $831   $622   $1,068   $2,302

•  If you did not surrender or annuitize, but left the money in your Contract:
                 
1 Year 3 Years 5 Years 10 Years
Maximum*   $686   $2,020   $3,306   $6,317
Minimum*   $201   $622   $1,068   $2,302
 
* In calculating the examples above, we used the maximum and minimum total operating expenses of all the Portfolios as shown in the Fees And Expenses section of the Fund’s Prospectus. For more information on fees and expenses, see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS in this Prospectus, and see the Fund’s Prospectus. See the FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS section in the Prospectus for condensed financial information about the Subaccounts.
 
11


Table of Contents


YOUR INVESTMENT OPTIONS

You may choose among the different Variable Investment Options, the DCA Plus Fixed Option, and, for Contracts issued before November 1, 2002, the Fixed Option.

Your Variable Investment Options

Each Variable Investment Option invests in a separate Portfolio of the Fund. For your convenience, the following chart summarizes some basic data about each Portfolio. This chart is only a summary. For more complete information on each Portfolio, including a discussion of the Portfolio’s investment techniques and the risks associated with its investments, see the accompanying Fund Prospectus. No assurance can be given that a Portfolio will achieve its investment objective. YOU SHOULD READ THE FUND PROSPECTUS CAREFULLY BEFORE INVESTING.

             
PORTFOLIO   INVESTMENT GOAL   THE PORTFOLIO’S
MAIN INVESTMENTS
  PORTFOLIO
MANAGER
International Value
  Long-term capital appreciation primarily through investment in equity securities of corporations domiciled in countries with developed economies and markets other than the U.S.   Equity securities of relatively large non-U.S. equity companies believed to be undervalued.   AllianceBernstein L.P.
International Small-Cap
  Long-term growth of capital.   Equity securities of non- U.S. companies with small market capitalizations.   Batterymarch Financial Management, Inc.
Diversified Research
  Long-term growth of capital.   Equity securities of U.S. companies and foreign companies with significant markets in the U.S.   Capital Guardian Trust Company
Equity
  Capital appreciation (current income is of secondary importance).   Equity securities of U.S. growth- oriented companies located in the U.S., or whose principal markets are in the U.S.   Capital Guardian Trust Company
American Funds®
Growth-Income
  Long-term growth of capital and income.   A master fund that invests in equity securities of both U.S. and non-U.S. companies of any size and other securities which demonstrate the potential for appreciation and/or dividends.   Capital Research and Management Company
  (adviser to the Master Growth-Income Fund)
American Funds®
Growth
  Long-term growth of capital.   A master fund that invests in equity securities of both U.S. and non-U.S. companies of any size that appear to offer superior opportunities for growth of capital.   Capital Research and Management Company
  (adviser to the Master Growth Fund)
Technology
  Long-term growth of capital.   Equity securities in the technology sector that the manager believes have or will develop products, processes or services that will provide significant technological improvements, advances or developments, as well as those expected to benefit from their extensive reliance on technology in connection with their operations and services.   Columbia Management Advisors, LLC
Short Duration Bond
  Current income (capital appreciation is of secondary importance).   High quality fixed income securities with an average portfolio duration not likely to exceed 3 years.   Goldman Sachs Asset Management, L.P.
Concentrated Growth
  Long-term growth of capital.   Equity securities selected for their growth potential.   Goldman Sachs Asset Management, L.P.
Diversified Bond
  Maximize total return consistent with prudent investment management.   Fixed income securities of varying qualities and terms to maturity of both U.S. and non-U.S. companies and derivatives relating to such securities or related indices.   J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc.
Growth LT
  Long-term growth of capital.   Equity securities of companies of any size.   Janus Capital Management LLC
Focused 30
  Long-term growth of capital.   U.S. and foreign equity securities selected for their growth potential.   Janus Capital Management LLC
Health Sciences
  Long-term growth of capital.   Equity securities of companies in the health sciences sector. Such companies include, but are not limited to, those involved with medical equipment or supplies, pharmaceuticals, biotechnology, and health care providers and service companies.   Jennison Associates LLC
Mid-Cap Value
  Capital appreciation.   Equity securities of medium-sized U.S. companies believed to be undervalued.   Lazard Asset Management LLC
Large-Cap Growth
(formerly called Blue Chip)
  Long-term growth of capital (current income is of secondary importance).   Equity securities of large companies with the potential for long-term growth of capital.   Loomis, Sayles & Company, L.P.
Capital Opportunities
  Long-term growth of capital.   Equity securities with the potential for long-term growth of capital.   MFS Investment Management
 
12


Table of Contents


             
PORTFOLIO   INVESTMENT GOAL   THE PORTFOLIO’S
MAIN INVESTMENTS
  PORTFOLIO
MANAGER
International Large-Cap
  Long-term growth of capital.   Equity securities of companies with large market capitalizations located outside the U.S.   MFS Investment Management
Equity Index
  Investment results that correspond to the total return of common stocks publicly traded in the U.S.   Equity securities of companies that are included in or representative of the S&P 500 Index® (including derivatives).   Mercury Advisors
Small-Cap Index
  Investment results that correspond to the total return of an index of small capitalization companies.   Equity securities of small companies that are included in or representative of the Russell 2000 Index (including derivatives).   Mercury Advisors
Fasciano Small Equity
  Capital appreciation.   Equity securities of small companies believed to have sustainable earnings growth.   Neuberger Berman Management Inc.
Small-Cap Value
  Long-term growth of capital.   Equity securities of small companies believed to be undervalued.   NFJ Investment Group L.P.
Multi-Strategy
  High total return.   A mix of equity and fixed income securities.   OppenheimerFunds, Inc.
Main Street® Core
  Long-term growth of capital and income.   Equity securities of large U.S. companies.   OppenheimerFunds, Inc.
Emerging Markets
  Long-term growth of capital.   Equity securities of companies that are located in countries generally regarded as “emerging market” countries.   OppenheimerFunds, Inc.
Managed Bond
  Maximize total return consistent with prudent investment management.   Medium and high-quality fixed income securities with varying terms to maturity, and derivatives relating to such securities or related indices.   Pacific Investment Management Company LLC
Inflation Managed
  Maximize total return consistent with prudent investment management.   Fixed income securities of varying maturities with a focus on inflation- indexed bonds, and forward contracts and derivatives relating to such securities.   Pacific Investment Management Company LLC
Money Market
  Current income consistent with preservation of capital.   Highest quality money market instruments believed to have limited credit risk.   Pacific Life
High Yield Bond
  High level of current income.   Fixed income securities with lower and medium-quality credit ratings and intermediate to long terms to maturity.   Pacific Life
Large-Cap Value
  Long-term growth of capital (current income is of secondary importance).   Equity securities of large U.S. companies.   Salomon Brothers Asset Management Inc
Comstock
  Long-term growth of capital.   Equity securities with the potential for long-term growth of capital and income.   Van Kampen
Mid-Cap Growth
  Long-term growth of capital.   Equity securities of medium-sized companies believed to have above- average growth potential.   Van Kampen
Real Estate
  Current income and long-term capital appreciation.   Equity securities of companies principally engaged in the U.S. real estate industry, including real estate investment trusts (REITs) and real estate operating companies (REOCs).   Van Kampen
VN Small-Cap Value
  Long-term growth of capital.   Equity securities of small companies believed to be undervalued.   Vaughan Nelson Investment Management, L.P.
 
13


Table of Contents

The Investment Adviser

We are the investment adviser for the Fund.

Your Fixed Options

The fixed options offer you a guaranteed minimum interest rate on amounts that you allocate to these options. Amounts you allocate to these options, and your earnings credited are held in our General Account. For more detailed information about these options, see THE GENERAL ACCOUNT and the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS sections in this Prospectus.

PURCHASING YOUR CONTRACT

How to Apply for Your Contract

To purchase a Contract, fill out an application and submit it along with your initial Investment to Pacific Life Insurance Company at P.O. Box 100060, Pasadena, California 91189-0060 or the address indicated in your Contract specification pages if different. In those instances when we receive electronic transmission of the information on the application from your representative’s broker-dealer firm and our administrative procedures with your broker-dealer so provide, we consider the application to be received on the Business Day we receive the transmission. If the address on your Contract specification pages is different and our administrative procedures with your broker-dealer so provide, in those instances when information regarding your Investment is electronically transmitted to us by the broker-dealer, we will consider the Investment to be received by us on the Business Day we receive the transmission of the information. If your application and Investment are complete when received, or once they have become complete, we will issue your Contract within 2 Business Days. If some information is missing from your application, we may delay issuing your Contract while we obtain the missing information. However, we will not hold your initial Investment for more than 5 Business Days without your permission. In any case, we will not hold your initial Investment after 20 Business Days.

You may also purchase a Contract by exchanging your existing contract. You must submit all contracts to be exchanged when you submit your application. Call your registered representative, or call us at 1-800-722-2333, if you are interested in this option.

We reserve the right to reject any application or Investment for any reason, subject to any applicable nondiscrimination laws and to our own standards and guidelines. On your application, you must provide us with a valid U.S. tax identification number for federal and state tax reporting purposes.

The maximum age of a Contract Owner, including Joint and Contingent Owners, for which a Contract will be issued is 85. The Contract Owner’s age is calculated as of his or her last birthday. If any Contract Owner or any sole Annuitant named in the application for a Contract dies before we issue a Contract, then the application for the Contract and/or any Contract issued shall be deemed null and void. A refund will be returned to the applicant/ Owner or the applicant/ Owner’s estate. Depending on the state where your application was signed, the amount of the refund may be more or less that the initial Investment received, or any other Investment we receive in connection with an exchange or transfer. In most states, the refund will be the Contract Value based upon the next determined Accumulated Unit Value (AUV) after we receive proof of death, in proper form, of the Contract Owner or Annuitant, plus a refund of any amount used to pay premium taxes and/or any other taxes, and minus the Contract Value attributable to any additional amount as described in the CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS— Waivers and Reduced Charges section in this Prospectus.

Making Your Investments (“Purchase Payments”)

Making Your Initial Investment

Your initial Investment must be at least $10,000 if you are buying a Non-Qualified Contract, and at least $2,000 if you are buying a Qualified Contract. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum initial Investment on Qualified Contracts but reserve the right to enforce the minimum initial Investment on Qualified Contracts in the future. For Non-Qualified Contracts, if the entire minimum initial Investment is not included when you submit your application, you must submit a portion of the required Contract minimum and establish a pre-authorized checking plan (PAC). A PAC allows you to pay the remainder of the required initial Investment in equal installments over

 
14


Table of Contents


the first year. Further requirements for PAC are discussed in the PAC form. We also call each Investment you make Purchase Payments.

You must obtain our consent before making an initial or additional Investment that will bring your aggregate Investments over $1,000,000. As of July 23, 2004, if you allocate all or part of an additional Purchase Payment to the Fixed Option, the maximum aggregate Investment you may have in the Fixed Option is currently $250,000. This limitation is subject to change at any time. Ask your registered representative about current limitations.

Making Additional Investments

If your Contract is Non-Qualified, you may choose to invest additional amounts in your Contract at any time. If your Contract is Qualified, the method of contribution and contribution limits may be restricted by the Qualified Plan. Each additional Investment must be at least $250 for Non-Qualified Contracts and $50 for Qualified Contracts. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum additional Investment amounts but we reserve the right to enforce the minimum additional Investment amounts in the future. In certain states additional Investments are limited.

Forms of Investment

Your initial and additional Investments may be sent by personal or bank check or by wire transfer. Investments must be made in a form acceptable to us before we can process it. Acceptable forms of Investments are:

  •  personal checks or cashier’s checks drawn on a U.S. bank,
 
  •  money orders and traveler’s checks in single denominations of more than $10,000 if they originate in a U.S. bank,
 
  •  third party checks when there is a clear connection of the third party to the underlying transaction, and
 
  •  wire transfers that originate in U.S. banks.

We will not accept Investments in the following forms:

  •  cash,
 
  •  credit cards or checks drawn against a credit card account,
 
  •  money orders or traveler’s checks in single denominations of $10,000 or less,
 
  •  starter checks,
 
  •  cashier’s checks, money orders, traveler’s checks or personal checks drawn on non-U.S. banks, even if the payment may be effected through a U.S. bank,
 
  •  third party checks if there is not a clear connection of the third party to the underlying transaction, and
 
  •  wire transfers that originate from foreign bank accounts.

All unacceptable forms of Investments will be returned to the payor along with a letter of explanation. We reserve the right to reject or accept any form of payment. If you make Investments by check other than a cashier’s check, your payment of any withdrawal proceeds and any refund during the “Right to Cancel” period may be delayed until we receive confirmation in our Annuities administrative office that your check has cleared.

HOW YOUR INVESTMENTS ARE ALLOCATED

Choosing Your Investment Options

You may allocate your Investments among any of the Subaccounts and any available fixed option. Allocations of your initial Investment to the Investment Options you selected will be effective on your Contract Date. Each additional Investment will be allocated to the Investment Options according to your allocation instructions in your application, or most recent instructions, if any, subject to the terms described in the WITHDRAWALS— Right to Cancel (“Free Look”) section in this Prospectus. We reserve the right to require that your allocation to any particular Investment Option must be at least $500. We also reserve the right to transfer any remaining Account

 
15


Table of Contents


Value that is not at least $500 to your other Investment Options on a pro rata basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions.

If your Contract is issued in exchange for another annuity contract or a life insurance policy, our administrative procedures may vary depending on the state in which your Contract is delivered.

Portfolio Optimization

The Service. Portfolio Optimization is an asset allocation service that we offer at no additional charge for use within this variable annuity. Asset allocation refers to the manner that investments are distributed among asset classes to help attain an investment goal. For your variable annuity, Portfolio Optimization can help with decisions about how you should allocate your Contract Value among available Investment Options. The theory behind Portfolio Optimization is that diversification among asset classes can help reduce volatility over the long term.

As part of our Portfolio Optimization service, we have developed several asset allocation models (“Portfolio Optimization Models” or “Models”), each based on different profiles of an investor’s willingness to accept investment risk. If you decide to subscribe to the Portfolio Optimization service and select one of the Portfolio Optimization Models, your initial Purchase Payment (in the case of a new application) or Contract Value, as applicable, will be allocated to the Investment Options according to the Model you select. Subsequent Purchase Payments, if allowed under your Contract, will also be allocated accordingly, unless you instruct us otherwise. If you choose, you can rebalance your Contract Value quarterly, semi-annually, or annually, to maintain the current allocations of your Portfolio Optimization Model, since changes in the net asset values of the underlying Portfolios within each Model will alter your asset allocation over time. If you also allocate part of your Purchase Payment or Contract Value that is not currently included in your Model and you elect periodic rebalancing, such amounts will not be considered when rebalancing. If you subscribe to Portfolio Optimization and elect periodic rebalancing, only the Investment Options within your Model will be rebalanced.

If you subscribe to Portfolio Optimization, we will serve as your investment adviser for the service solely for purposes of development of the Portfolio Optimization Models and periodic updates of the Models.

On a periodic basis (typically annually) or when Pacific Life believes appropriate, the Portfolio Optimization Models are evaluated and the Models are updated, as discussed below. If you subscribe to Portfolio Optimization, we will automatically reallocate your Contract Value or subsequent Purchase Payments, as applicable, in accordance with the Model you select as it is updated from time to time based on discretionary authority that you grant to us, unless you instruct us otherwise. For more information on our role as investment adviser for the Portfolio Optimization service, please see our brochure from our Form ADV, the SEC investment adviser registration form, which will be delivered to Contract Owners at the time they apply for a Contract. Please contact us if you would like to receive a copy of this brochure. In developing and periodically updating the Portfolio Optimization Models, we currently rely on the recommendations of an independent third-party analytical firm. We may change the firm that we use from time to time, or, to the extent permissible under applicable law, use no independent firm at all.

The Portfolio Optimization Models. We offer five asset allocation models, each comprised of a carefully selected combination of Investment Options (reflecting the underlying Portfolios of Pacific Select Fund). Development of the Portfolio Optimization models is a two-step process. First, an optimization analysis is performed to determine the breakdown of asset classes. Optimization analysis requires forecasting returns, standard deviations and correlation coefficients of asset classes over the desired investing horizon and an analysis using a state-of-the art program and a statistical analytical technique known as “mean-variance optimization.” Next, after the asset class exposures are known, a determination is made of how available Investment Options (underlying Portfolios) can be used to implement the asset class level allocations. The Investment Options are selected by evaluating the asset classes represented by the underlying Portfolios and combining Investment Options to arrive at the desired asset class exposures. The Portfolio-specific analysis uses historical returns-based style analysis and asset performance and regression and attribution analyses. It may also include portfolio manager interviews. Based on this analysis, Investment Options are selected in a way intended to optimize potential returns for each Model, given a particular level of risk tolerance. This process could, in some cases, result in the inclusion of an Investment Option in a Model based on its specific asset class exposure or other specific optimization factors, even where another Investment Option may have better historical performance.

Periodic Updates of the Portfolio Optimization Model and Notices of Updates. Each of the Portfolio Optimization Models are evaluated periodically (generally, annually) to assess whether the combination of Investment Options

 
16


Table of Contents


within each Model should be changed to better seek to optimize the potential return for the level of risk tolerance intended for the Model. As a result of the periodic analysis, each Model may change and Investment Options may be added to a Model (including Investment Options not currently available), or Investment Options may be deleted from a Model.

When your Portfolio Optimization Model is updated, we will automatically reallocate your Contract Value (and Subsequent Purchase Payments, if applicable) in accordance with any changes to the Model you have selected. This means the allocation of your Contract Value, and potentially the Investment Options in which you are invested, will automatically change and your Contract Value (and Subsequent Purchase Payments, if applicable) will be automatically reallocated among the Investment Options in your updated Model (independently of any automatic rebalancing you may have selected). We require that you grant us discretionary investment authority to periodically reallocate your Contract Value (and Subsequent Purchase Payments, if applicable) in accordance with the updated version of the Portfolio Optimization Model you have selected, if you wish to participate in Portfolio Optimization.

When we update the Portfolio Optimizations Models, we will send you written notice of the updated Models at least 30 days in advance of the date we intend the updated version of the Model to be effective. You should carefully review these notices. If you wish to accept the changes in your selected Model, you will not need to take any action, as your Contract Value (or Subsequent Purchase Payments, if applicable) will be reallocated in accordance with the updated Model automatically. If you do not wish to accept the changes to your selected Model, you can change to a different Model or withdraw from the Portfolio Optimization service. Some of the riders available under the Contract require you to participate in an asset allocation service. If you purchased any of these riders, such riders will terminate if you withdraw from Portfolio Optimization or allocate any portion of your subsequent Purchase Payments or Contract Value to an Investment Option that is not currently included in your Model (as more fully described in each rider).

Selecting a Portfolio Optimization Model. If you choose to subscribe to the Portfolio Optimization service, you need to determine which Portfolio Optimization Model is best for you. Pacific Life will not make this decision. You should consult with your registered representative on this decision. Your registered representative can help you determine which Model is best suited to your financial needs, investment time horizon, and willingness to accept investment risk. You should periodically review these factors with your registered representative to determine if you should change Models to keep up with changes in your personal circumstances. Your registered representative can assist you in completing the proper forms to subscribe to the Portfolio Optimization service or to change to a different Model. You may, in consultation with your registered representative, utilize analytical tools made available by Pacific Life, including an investor profile questionnaire, which asks questions intended to help you or your registered representative assess your financial needs, investment time horizon, and willingness to accept investment risk. Your responses can be analyzed using the service available on the Pacific Life website. While the information from the Pacific Life website may assist you, it is your decision, in consultation with your registered representative, to select a Model or to change to a different Model, and Pacific Life bears no responsibility for this decision. You may change to a different Model at any time with a proper written request or by telephone or electronic instructions provided a valid telephone/ electronic authorization is on file with us.

Periodic Reports. Participants in the Portfolio Optimization service will periodically be sent performance information regarding the Investment Options within a selected Model. This information may also be accessed online. Information concerning the current Models is described below.

Risks. Although the Models are designed to optimize returns given the various levels of risk, there is no assurance that a Model portfolio will not lose money or that investment results will not experience volatility. Investment performance of your Contract Value could be better or worse by participating in a Portfolio Optimization Model than if you had not participated. A Model may perform better or worse than any single Investment Option or asset class or other combinations of Investment Options or asset classes. Model performance is dependent upon the performance of the component Investment Options (and their underlying Portfolios). The timing of your investment and the frequency of automatic rebalancing may affect performance. Your Contract Value will fluctuate, and when redeemed, may be worth more or less than the original cost.

A Portfolio Optimization Model may not perform as intended. Although the Models are intended to optimize returns given various levels of risk tolerance, portfolio, market and asset class performance may differ in the future from the historical performance and assumptions upon which the Models are based, which could cause the Models to be ineffective or less effective in reducing volatility.

 
17


Table of Contents


Periodic updating of the Portfolio Optimization Models can cause the underlying Portfolios to incur transactional expenses to raise cash for money flowing out of the Portfolios or to buy securities with money flowing into the Portfolios. These expenses can adversely affect performance of the pertinent Portfolios and the Models.

Pacific Life may be subject to competing interests that have the potential to influence its decision making with regard to Portfolio Optimization. For example, one Portfolio may provide a higher advisory fee to Pacific Life than another Portfolio, and provide Pacific Life with incentive to use the Portfolio with the higher fee as part of a Portfolio Optimization Model. In addition, Pacific Life may believe that certain Portfolios may benefit from additional assets or could be harmed by redemptions. As adviser to Pacific Select Fund, we monitor performance of the Portfolios, and may, from time to time, recommend to the Fund’s Board of Trustees a change in portfolio management firm or strategy or the closure or merger of a Portfolio, all of which could impact a Model. All Fund Portfolios are analyzed by the independent third party analytical firm. We do not dictate to the third party analytical firm the number of Portfolios in a Model, the percent that any Portfolio represents in a Model, or which Portfolios may be selected (other than to require exclusion of any Portfolio that is expected to be liquidated, merged into another Portfolio, or otherwise closed). We believe our reliance on the recommendations of an independent third-party analytical firm to develop and update the Models (as described above) reduces or eliminates the potential for us to be influenced by these competing interests, but there can be no assurance of this.

Pacific Life is under no contractual obligation to continue this service and has the right to terminate or change the Portfolio Optimization service at any time.

 
18


Table of Contents


The Models. Information concerning the Portfolio Optimization Models is described below. These Models are available effective May 5, 2006. For information regarding the Portfolio Optimization Models available until May 5, 2006, see APPENDIX E in this Prospectus. You should review this information carefully before selecting or changing a Model.

                                         

    Model A
Conservative
      Model B
Moderate-Conservative
  Model C
Moderate
  Model D
Moderate-Aggressive
  Model E
Aggressive


Investor Profile

You are looking for a relatively stable investment and do not tolerate short- term market swings.   Your focus is on keeping pace with inflation and you can tolerate a moderate level of risk.   You want the opportunity for long-term moderate growth.   You want an investment that is geared for growth and are willing to accept above average risk.   You are an aggressive investor and can tolerate short-term market swings.

 Shorter Investment Time Horizon  < --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- > Longer Investment Time Horizon


Investor Objective

Primarily preservation of capital   Moderate growth   Steady growth in asset values   Moderately high growth in asset values   High growth in asset values


Risk Characteristics

There may be some losses in the values of the investment as asset values fluctuate.   There may be some losses in the values of the investment from year to year.   There will probably be some losses in the values of the underlying investments from year to year.
       
                Fluctuations in value should be less than those of the overall stock markets.   Some of these might be large, but the overall fluctuations in asset values should be less than those of the U.S. stock market.

 Lower Risk  < ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- > Higher Risk


Asset Class Target Exposure

                                                                 
Model A Model B Model C Model D Model E

Cash         10 %         6 %         1 %         2 %         2 %    

Bonds         67           50           39           18           6      

Domestic Stocks         17           32           42           56           61      

International Stocks         6           12           18           24           31      
                                                                   

Portfolio Optimization Model Target Allocations as of May 5, 2006

Model A Model B Model C Model D Model E

  International Value         3 %         5 %         5 %         5 %         12 %    

  International Small-Cap                             2           3           3      

  Diversified Research         2           4           4           4           4      

  American Funds® Growth-Income                             3           5           8      

  American Funds® Growth                   2           3           6           8      

  Short Duration Bond         23           12           8           2                

  Diversified Bond         6           5           3           2                

  Growth LT                             3           3           3      

  Mid-Cap Value         4           6           8           12           10      

  Large-Cap Growth                   5           5           4           4      

  International Large-Cap         2           6           8           13           13      

  Equity Index                             2           4           4      

  Small-Cap Index                                       2           2      

  Fasciano Small Equity                                       2           3      

  Small-Cap Value                   2           2                          

  Main Street® Core         8           7           6           4           2      

  Emerging Markets                             3           4           4      

  Managed Bond         17           14           11           3                

  Inflation Managed         16           13           11           6                

  Money Market         8           4                                    

  High Yield Bond         5           4           2                          

  Large-Cap Value         4           5           5           6           6      

  Comstock         2           4           4           4           4      

  Mid-Cap Growth                   2           2           3           3      

  Real Estate                                       3           5      

  VN Small-Cap Value                                                 2      
 

 
   Less Volatile  < ---------------------------------------------------------------- > More Volatile

 
19


Table of Contents


Investing in Variable Investment Options

Each time you allocate your Investment to a Variable Investment Option, your Contract is credited with a number of “Subaccount Units” in that Subaccount. The number of Subaccount Units credited is equal to the amount you have allocated to that Subaccount, divided by the “Unit Value” of one Unit of that Subaccount.

  Example: You allocate $600 to the Inflation Managed Subaccount. At the end of the Business Day on which your allocation is effective, the value of one Unit in the Inflation Managed Subaccount is $15. As a result, 40 Subaccount Units are credited to your Contract for your $600.

Your Variable Account Value Will Change

After we credit your Contract with Subaccount Units, the value of those Units will usually fluctuate. This means that, from time to time, your Investment allocated to the Variable Investment Options may be worth more or less than the original Investments to which those amounts can be attributed. Fluctuations in Subaccount Unit Value will not change the number of Units credited to your Contract.

Subaccount Unit Values will vary in accordance with the investment performance of the corresponding Portfolio. For example, the value of Units in the Managed Bond Subaccount will change to reflect the performance of the Managed Bond Portfolio (including that Portfolio’s investment income, its capital gains and losses, and its expenses). Subaccount Unit Values are also adjusted to reflect the Administrative Fee and applicable Risk Charge imposed on the Separate Account.

We calculate the value of all Subaccount Units on each Business Day.

Calculating Subaccount Unit Values

We calculate the Unit Value of the Subaccount Units in each Variable Investment Option at the close of the New York Stock Exchange which usually closes at 4:00 p.m. Eastern Time on each Business Day. At the end of each Business Day, the Unit Value for a Subaccount is equal to:

Y × Z

             
where
  (Y)   =   the Unit Value for that Subaccount as of the end of the preceding Business Day; and
    (Z)   =   the Net Investment Factor for that Subaccount for the period (a “valuation period”) between that Business Day and the immediately preceding Business Day.

The “Net Investment Factor” for a Subaccount for any valuation period is equal to:

(A ÷ B) - C

             
where
  (A)   =   the “per share value of the assets” of that Subaccount as of the end of that valuation period, which is equal to: a+b+c
             
where
  (a)   =   the net asset value per share of the corresponding Portfolio shares held by that Subaccount as of the end of that valuation period;
    (b)   =   the per share amount of any dividend or capital gain distributions made by each Fund for that Portfolio during that valuation period; and
    (c)   =   any per share charge (a negative number) or credit (a positive number) for any income taxes and/or any other taxes or other amounts set aside during that valuation period as a reserve for any income and/or any other taxes which we determine to have resulted from the operations of the Subaccount or Contract, and/or any taxes attributable, directly or indirectly, to Investments; (see the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus)
             
    (B)   =   the net asset value per share of the corresponding Portfolio shares held by the Subaccount as of the end of the preceding valuation period; and
    (C)   =   a factor that assesses against the Subaccount net assets for each calendar day in the valuation period the basic Risk Charge plus any applicable increase in the Risk Charge and the Administrative Fee (see the CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS section in this Prospectus).
 
20


Table of Contents


When Your Investment is Effective

Your initial Investment is effective on the day we issue your Contract. Any additional Investment is effective on the day we receive it in proper form. See the ADDITIONAL INFORMATION— Inquiries and Submitting Forms and Requests section in this Prospectus.

The day your Investment is effective determines the Unit Value at which Subaccount Units are attributed to your Contract. In the case of transfers or withdrawals, the effective day determines the Unit Value at which affected Subaccount Units are debited and/or credited under your Contract. That Unit Value is the value of the Subaccount Units next calculated after your transaction is effective. Your Variable Account Value begins to reflect the investment performance results of your new allocations on the day after your transaction is effective.

Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions

Transfers

Once your Investments are allocated to the Investment Options you selected, you may transfer your Account Value less Loan Account Value from any Investment Option to any other Investment Option, except the DCA Plus Fixed Option. Transfers are limited to twenty-five (25) for each calendar year. Additionally, only two (2) transfers in any calendar month may involve any of the following Investment Options: International Value, International Small-Cap, International Large-Cap, or Emerging Markets.

Transfers to or from a Variable Investment Option cannot be made before the seventh calendar day following the last transfer to or from the same Variable Investment Option. If the seventh calendar day is not a Business Day, then a transfer may not occur until the next Business Day. The day of the last transfer is not considered a calendar day for purposes of meeting this requirement. For example, if you make a transfer into the Diversified Research Variable Investment Option on Monday, you may not make any transfers to or from that Variable Investment Option before the following Monday. Transfers to or from the Money Market Variable Investment Option are excluded from this limitation.

For the purpose of applying the limitations, multiple transfers that occur on the same day are considered one (1) transfer. A transfer of Account Value from the Loan Account back into your Investment Options following a loan repayment is not considered a transfer under these limitations. Transfers that occur as a result of the DCA Plus program, the dollar cost averaging program, the portfolio rebalancing program, the earnings sweep program or an approved asset allocation service are excluded from these limitations. Also, allocations of Purchase Payments are not subject to these limitations.

If you have used all twenty-five (25) transfers available to you in a calendar year, you may no longer make transfers between the Investment Options until the start of the next calendar year. However, you may make one (1) transfer of all or a portion of the Account Value remaining in the Variable Investment Options into the Money Market Investment Option prior to the start of the next calendar year.

There are no exceptions to the above transfer limitations in the absence of an error by us, a substitution of Investment Options, or reorganization of underlying Portfolios, or other extraordinary circumstances.

If we deny a transfer request, we will notify your registered representative via telephone. If you (or your registered representative) request a transfer via telephone that exceeds the above limitations, we will notify you (or your registered representative) immediately.

Certain restrictions apply to any available fixed option. See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT section in this Prospectus. Transfer requests are generally effective on the Business Day we receive them in proper form, unless you request a date in the future or a systematic transfer program.

We have the right, at our option (unless otherwise required by law), to require certain minimums in the future in connection with transfers. These may include a minimum transfer amount and a minimum Account Value, if any, for the Investment Option from which the transfer is made or to which the transfer is made. If your transfer request results in your having a remaining Account Value in an Investment Option that is less than $500 immediately after such transfer, we may transfer that Account Value to your other Investment Options on a pro rata basis, relative to your most recent allocation instructions.

We reserve the right (unless otherwise required by law) to limit the size of transfers, to restrict transfers, to require that you submit any transfer requests in writing, to suspend transfers, and to impose further limits on the number

 
21


Table of Contents


and frequency of transfers you can make. We also reserve the right to reject any transfer request. Any policy we may establish with regard to the exercise of any of these rights will be applied uniformly to all Contract Owners.

Market-timing Restrictions

The Contract is not designed to serve as a vehicle for frequent trading in response to short-term fluctuations in the market. Accordingly, organizations or individuals that use market-timing investment strategies and make frequent transfers should not purchase the Contract. Such frequent trading can disrupt management of the underlying Portfolios and raise expenses. The transfer limitations set forth above are intended to reduce frequent trading. In addition, we monitor certain large transaction activity in an attempt to detect trading that may be disruptive to the Portfolios. In the event transfer activity is found to be disruptive, certain future transactions by such Contract Owners, or by a registered representative or other party acting on behalf of one or more Contract Owners, will require preclearance. Frequent trading and large transactions that are disruptive to portfolio management can have an adverse effect on Portfolio performance and therefore your Contract’s performance. Such trading may also cause dilution in the value of the Investment Options held by long-term Contract Owners. While these issues can occur in connection with any of the underlying Portfolios, Portfolios holding securities that are subject to market pricing inefficiencies are more susceptible to abuse. For example, Portfolios holding international securities may be more susceptible to time-zone arbitrage which seeks to take advantage of pricing discrepancies occurring between the time of the closing of the market on which the security is traded and the time of pricing of the Portfolios.

Our policies and procedures which limit the number and frequency of transfers and which may impose preclearance requirements on certain large transactions are applied uniformly to all Contract Owners. However, there is a risk that these policies and procedures will not detect all potentially disruptive activity or will otherwise prove ineffective in whole or in part. Further, we and our affiliates make available to our variable annuity and variable life insurance Contract Owners underlying funds not affiliated with us. We are unable to monitor or restrict the trading activity with respect to shares of such funds not sold in connection with our Contracts. In the event the Board of Trustees/Directors of any underlying fund imposes a redemption fee or trading (transfer) limitations, we will pass them on to you.

We reserve the right to restrict, in our sole discretion and without prior notice, transfers initiated by a market timing organization or individual or other party authorized to give transfer instructions on behalf of multiple Contract Owners. Such restrictions could include:

  •  not accepting transfer instructions from a registered representative acting on behalf of more than one Contract Owner, and
 
  •  not accepting preauthorized transfer forms from market timers or other entities acting on behalf of more than one Contract Owner at a time.

We further reserve the right to impose, without prior notice, restrictions on transfers that we determine, in our sole discretion, will disadvantage or potentially hurt the rights or interests of other Contract Owners; or to comply with any applicable federal and state laws, rules and regulations.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Exchanges of Annuity Units

Exchanges of Annuity Units in any Subaccount(s) to any other Subaccount(s) after the Annuity Date are limited to four in any twelve month period. See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT section in the Prospectus and THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT section in the SAI.

Systematic Transfer Options

We offer four systematic transfer options: dollar cost averaging, DCA Plus, portfolio rebalancing, and earnings sweep. There is no charge for these options, and transfers under these options are not counted towards your total transfers in a Calendar Year however they are subject to the same requirements and restrictions as non-systematic transfers. You can have only one DCA Plus, dollar cost averaging, or earnings sweep program in effect at one time. The systematic transfer options are not available after you annuitize.

 
22


Table of Contents


Dollar Cost Averaging

Dollar cost averaging is a method in which you buy securities in a series of regular purchases instead of in a single purchase. This allows you to average the securities’ prices over time, and may permit a “smoothing” of abrupt peaks and drops in price. Prior to your Annuity Date, you may use dollar cost averaging to transfer amounts, over time, from any Investment Option with an Account Value of at least $5,000 to one or more Variable Investment Options. Each transfer must be for at least $250. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum Account Value and/or transfer amounts but we reserve the right to enforce such minimum amounts in the future. For Contracts issued before November 1, 2002, transfers from the Fixed Option under the dollar cost averaging program are subject to a minimum duration of 12 months. Detailed information appears in the SAI.

DCA Plus

DCA Plus provides a way to transfer amounts monthly from the DCA Plus Fixed Option to one or more Variable Investment Option(s) over a period of up to one year. The initial minimum amount that you may allocate to the DCA Plus Fixed Option is $5,000. The minimum amount for the monthly transfer is $250. Currently, we are not enforcing the initial minimum amount and/or the minimum transfer amount but we reserve the right to enforce such minimum amounts in the future. Amounts allocated to the DCA Plus Fixed Option are held in our General Account and receive interest at rates declared periodically by us, but not less than an annual rate of 3% (the “Guaranteed Interest Rate”). The DCA Plus program can also be used with an asset allocation program established and maintained by us to qualify for certain optional benefit riders offered under your Contract. See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT section in this Prospectus.

Portfolio Rebalancing

You may instruct us to maintain a specific balance of Variable Investment Options under your Contract (e.g., 30% in the Equity Index Subaccount, 40% in the Managed Bond Subaccount, and 30% in the Growth LT Subaccount) prior to your Annuity Date. Periodically, we will “rebalance” your values in the elected Subaccounts to the percentages you have specified. Rebalancing may result in transferring amounts from a Subaccount earning a relatively higher return to one earning a relatively lower return. You may choose to have rebalances made quarterly, semiannually or annually until your Annuity Date. Portfolio rebalancing is not available after you annuitize. No fixed option is available for rebalancing. Detailed information appears in the SAI.

Earnings Sweep

You may instruct us to make automatic periodic transfers of your earnings from the Money Market Subaccount or, for Contracts issued before November 1, 2002, from the Fixed Option to one or more Variable Investment Options (other than the Money Market Subaccount). Detailed information appears in the SAI.

CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS

Withdrawal Charge

No sales charge is imposed on any Purchase Payment. Your Purchase Payments may, however, be subject to a withdrawal charge. This charge may apply to amounts you withdraw under your Contract prior to the Annuity Date, depending on the length of time each Purchase Payment has been invested and on the amount you withdraw. This amount is deducted proportionately among all Investment Options from which the withdrawal occurs. No withdrawal charge is imposed on:

  •  the free withdrawal amount (see WITHDRAWALS—Free Withdrawals),
 
  •  death benefit proceeds, except as provided under the Amount of the Death Benefit: Death of a Contract Owner section for certain non-natural owners,
 
  •  amounts converted after the first Contract Anniversary to a life contingent Annuity Option or an Annuity Option with a period certain of at least five years that is offered under the Contract, unless guaranteed variable annuity payments under Annuity Option 2 or 4 are subsequently redeemed (See the ANNUITIZATION, DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS— Choosing Your Annuity Option section in this Prospectus),
 
23


Table of Contents


  •  withdrawals by Owners to meet the minimum distribution rules for Qualified Contracts as they apply to amounts held under the Contract,
 
  •  withdrawals after the first Contract Anniversary, if the Owner or Annuitant has been diagnosed with a medically determinable condition that results in a life expectancy of twelve (12) months or less and we are provided with medical evidence satisfactory to us, or
 
  •  subject to medical evidence satisfactory to us, after 90 days from the Contract Date, full or partial withdrawals while the Owner or Annuitant has been confined to an accredited nursing home for 60 days or longer.

  The waiver of withdrawal charges applies only to withdrawals made while the Owner or Annuitant is in a nursing home or within 90 days after the Owner or Annuitant leaves the nursing home. In addition, the nursing home confinement period for which you seek the waiver must begin after the Contract Date. In order to use this waiver, you must submit with your withdrawal request the following documents:

  •  a physician’s note recommending the Owner or Annuitant’s admittance to a nursing home,
 
  •  an admittance form which shows the type of facility the Owner or Annuitant entered, and
 
  •  a bill from the nursing home which shows that the Owner or Annuitant met the 60 day nursing home confinement requirement.

  An accredited nursing home is defined as a home or facility that:

  •  is operating in accordance with the law of jurisdiction in which it is located,
 
  •  is primarily engaged in providing, in addition to room and board, skilled nursing care under the supervision of a duly licensed physician, and
 
  •  provides continuous 24 hour a day nursing service by or under the supervision of a registered nurse, and maintains a daily record of the patient.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Transfers of all or part of your Account Value from one Investment Option to another are not considered a withdrawal of an amount from your Contract, so no withdrawal charge is imposed at the time of transfer. See the HOW YOUR INVESTMENTS ARE ALLOCATED— Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions and THE GENERAL ACCOUNT sections in this Prospectus.

How the Charge is Determined

The amount of the charge depends on how long each Purchase Payment was held under your Contract. Each Purchase Payment you make is considered to have a certain “age,” depending on the length of time since that Purchase Payment was effective. A Purchase Payment is “one year old” or has an “age of one” from the day it is effective until the beginning of the day preceding your next Contract Anniversary. Beginning on the day preceding that Contract Anniversary, your Purchase Payment will have an “age of two” and increases in age on the day preceding each Contract Anniversary. When you withdraw an amount subject to the withdrawal charge, the “age” of the Purchase Payment you withdraw determines the level of withdrawal charge as follows:

         
Withdrawal
Charge as a
percentage
of the
“Age” of Payment Purchase Payment
in Years withdrawn


1
    7 %
2
    6 %
3
    4 %
4 or more
    0 %

We calculate your withdrawal charge by assuming that your Earnings are withdrawn first, followed by amounts attributed to Purchase Payments with the “oldest” Purchases Payment withdrawn first and before any deductions for other charges due or taxes are made. The withdrawal charge will be deducted proportionately among all investment Options from which the withdrawal occurs. Unless you specify otherwise a partial withdrawal amount

 
24


Table of Contents


requested will be processed as a “gross” amount, which means that applicable charges and taxes will be deducted from the requested amount. If a partial withdrawal amount is requested to be a “net” amount, applicable charges and taxes will be added to the requested amount and the withdrawal charges and taxes will be calculated on the grossed up amount. See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT section in this Prospectus.

The withdrawal charge is designed to reimburse us for sales commissions and other expenses associated with the promotion and solicitation of offers for the Contracts, although our actual expenses may be greater than the amount of the withdrawal charge. See the ADDITIONAL INFORMATION— Distribution Arrangements section in this Prospectus for information regarding commissions and other amounts paid to broker-dealers in connection with distribution of the Contracts.

Withdrawal Enhancements

We reserve the right, in our sole discretion, to calculate your withdrawal charge on more favorable terms to you than as otherwise described in the preceding paragraphs. These withdrawal enhancements may include an acceleration of the day on which the “age” of any Purchase Payments is considered to occur or a waiver of some or all of the withdrawal charge in the event the Guaranteed Interest Rate is less than a specified rate. Although we retain the discretion to add a withdrawal enhancement, once it is added, it is binding on us and effective for any specified period we have designated. In the event of any withdrawal enhancement, we will notify the Owner within thirty (30) days of the effective date of the withdrawal enhancement. See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Mortality and Expense Risk Charge

We assess a charge against the assets of each Subaccount to compensate for certain mortality and expense risks that we assume under the Contracts (the “Risk Charge”). The risk that an Annuitant will live longer (and therefore receive more annuity payments) than we predict through our actuarial calculations at the time the Contract is issued is “mortality risk.” We also bear mortality risk in connection with death benefits payable under the Contracts. The risk that the expense charges and fees under the Contracts and Separate Account are less than our actual administrative and operating expenses is called “expense risk.”

This Risk Charge is assessed daily at an annual rate equal to 1.40% of each Subaccount’s assets. This charge may not be increased for the duration of your Contract.

The Risk Charge will stop at the Annuity Date if you select a fixed annuity. The base Risk Charge will continue after the Annuity Date if you choose any variable annuity, even though we do not bear mortality risk if your Annuity Option is Period Certain Only.

We will realize a gain if the Risk Charge exceeds our actual cost of expenses and benefits, and will suffer a loss if such actual costs exceed the Risk Charge. Any gain will become part of our General Account. We may use it for any reason, including covering sales expenses on the Contracts.

Increase in Risk Charge if an Optional Death Benefit Rider is Purchased

We increase your Risk Charge by an annual rate equal to 0.20% of each Subaccount’s assets if you purchase the Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider (SDBR) or 0.35% if your Contract was issued before May 1, 2003 and you purchased the Premier Death Benefit Rider (PDBR). The total Risk Charge annual rate will be 1.60% if the SDBR is purchased or 1.75% if the PDBR was purchased. Any increase in your Risk Charge will not continue after the Annuity Date. See the ANNUITIZATION, DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS— Death Benefits section in this Prospectus.

Administrative Fee

We charge an Administrative Fee as compensation for costs we incur in operating the Separate Account, issuing and administering the Contracts, including processing applications and payments, and issuing reports to you and to regulatory authorities.

The Administrative Fee is assessed daily at an annual rate equal to 0.25% of the assets of each Subaccount. This rate is guaranteed not to increase for the life of your Contract. A relationship will not necessarily exist between the actual administrative expenses attributable to a particular Contract and the Administrative Fee paid in respect of

 
25


Table of Contents


that particular Contract. The Administrative Fee will continue after the Annuity Date if you choose any variable annuity.

Annual Fee

We will charge you an Annual Fee of $30 on each Contract Anniversary prior to the Annuity Date, and at the time you withdraw your entire Net Contract Value (on a pro rated basis for that Contract Year) if your Net Contract Value is less than $50,000 on that date. The fee is not imposed on amounts you annuitize or on payment of death benefit proceeds. The fee reimburses certain of our costs in administering the Contracts and the Separate Account. We do not intend to realize a profit from this fee or the Administrative Fee. This fee is guaranteed not to increase for the life of your Contract.

Your Annual Fee will be charged proportionately against your Investment Options. Assessments against your Variable Investment Options are made by debiting some of the Subaccount Units previously credited to your Contract. That is, assessment of the Annual Fee does not change the Unit Value for those Subaccounts. Any portion of the Annual Fee we deduct from any of our fixed options (if available under the contract) will not be greater than the annual interest credited in excess of the option’s minimum guaranteed interest rate.

Optional Rider Charges

If you purchase an optional Rider, we will deduct the annual charge for the Rider from your Investment Options on a proportionate basis on each Contract Anniversary that the Rider remains in effect following the Effective Date of the Rider, if the Rider is terminated, and for some Riders on the Annuity Date. The annual charge for the GIA 5, GIA II and GIA Riders will be charged on the Annuity Date if the Rider is still in effect.

The Rider charge for a Contract Year will be deducted on the Contract Anniversary following that Contract Year. The charge is the annual charge percentage, indicated in the table below, multiplied by the Contract Value, except for the GIA Plus Rider which is the annual charge percentage multiplied by the greater of the Guaranteed Income Base or the Contract Value.

If you terminate a Rider on a Contract Anniversary, the full charge will be deducted from the Contract Value. If the Rider terminates on a day other than a Contract Anniversary, a prorated charge will be based on the Contract Value, except for the GIA Plus Rider as noted above, on the day the Rider terminates. The charge will be deducted on the earlier of the day your Contract terminates or the Contract Anniversary following the day the Rider terminates.

Any portion of the Rider’s charge we deduct from any fixed option will not be greater than the annual interest credited in excess of 3%. If you make a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal during a Contract Year, we will deduct the charge from the final payment made to you.

An optional Rider charge may change if you elect a Step-Up/ Reset under the provisions of a Rider, but will never be more than the charge being charged under the then current terms and conditions of the Rider and will not be more than the maximum charge percentage, indicated in the table below, for the applicable Rider. If you do not elect an optional Step-Up/ Reset, your annual charge percentage will remain the same as it was on the Effective Date of the Rider.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

 
26


Table of Contents


Annual Charge Percentage Table

                 
Maximum Charge
Percentage if
Current Charge Step-Up/Reset
Optional Rider Percentage is elected



Earnings Enhancement Guarantee (EEG)
    0.25 %     N/A  
Lifetime Income Access Plus1
    0.40 %     1.20 %
Income Access Plus
    0.40 %     1.20 %
Income Access2
    0.40 %     0.75 %
Guaranteed Protection Advantage 5 (GPA 5)3
    0.25 %     0.75 %
Guaranteed Protection Advantage (GPA)
    0.10 %     N/A  
Guaranteed Income Advantage Plus (GIA Plus)
    0.50 %     N/A  
Guaranteed Income Advantage 5 (GIA 5)
    0.40 %     0.75 %
Guaranteed Income Advantage II (GIA II)
    0.70 %     1.00 %
Guaranteed Income Advantage (GIA)
    0.30 %     N/A  
 
1 If you purchased the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider and the Effective Date of the Rider is before July 1, 2006, the current charge percentage is equal to 0.40%. Currently, the charge percentage will remain at 0.40% even if you elect to reset the Rider. However, for any future elections to reset, we reserve the right to increase the charge percentage to an amount that will not exceed the charge percentage in effect for new issues of this Rider.
 
2 If you purchased the Income Access Rider and the Effective Date of the Rider is before March 1, 2004, the current charge percentage is equal to 0.30%.
 
3 If you purchased the GPA 5 Rider and the Effective Date of the GPA 5 Rider is before March 1, 2004, the current charge percentage is equal to 0.10%.

Premium Taxes

Depending on your state of residence (among other factors), a tax may be imposed on your Investments at the time your Investment is made, at the time of a partial or full withdrawal, at the time any death benefit proceeds are paid, at annuitization or at such other time as taxes may be imposed. Tax rates ranging from 0% to 3.5% are currently in effect, but may change in the future. Some local jurisdictions also impose a tax.

If we pay any taxes attributable to Investments (“premium taxes”), we will impose a similar charge against your Contract Value. Premium tax is subject to state requirements. We normally will charge you when you annuitize some or all of your Contract Value. We reserve the right to impose this charge for applicable premium taxes and/or other taxes when you make a full or partial withdrawal, at the time any death benefit proceeds are paid, or when those taxes are incurred. For these purposes, “premium taxes” include any state or local premium or retaliatory taxes and, where approval has been obtained, federal premium taxes and any federal, state or local income, excise, business or any other type of tax (or component thereof) measured by or based upon, directly or indirectly, the amount of Investments we have received. We will base this charge on the Contract Value, the amount of the transaction, the aggregate amount of Investments we receive under your Contract, or any other amount, that in our sole discretion we deem appropriate.

We may also charge the Separate Account or your Contract Value for taxes attributable to the Separate Account or the Contract, including income taxes attributable to the Separate Account or to our operations with respect to the Contract, or taxes attributable, directly or indirectly, to Investments. Currently, we do not impose any such charges.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Waivers and Reduced Charges

We may agree to waive or reduce charges or credit additional amounts under our Contracts, in situations where selling and/or maintenance costs associated with the Contracts are reduced, such as the sale of several Contracts to the same Contract Owner(s), sales of large Contracts, sales of Contracts in connection with a group or sponsored arrangement or mass transactions over multiple Contracts.

In addition, we may agree to waive or reduce some or all of such charges and/or credit additional amounts under our Contracts, for those Contracts sold to persons who meet criteria established by us, who may include current and retired officers, directors and employees of us and our affiliates, trustees of the Pacific Select Fund, registered representatives and employees of broker/dealers with a current selling agreement with us and their affiliates,

 
27


Table of Contents


employees of affiliated asset management firms and certain other service providers, and immediate family members of such persons (“Eligible Persons”). We will credit additional amounts to Contracts owned by Eligible Persons if such Contracts are purchased directly through Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. Under such circumstances, Eligible Persons will not be afforded the benefit of services of any other broker/dealer nor will commissions be payable to any broker/dealer in connection with such purchases. Eligible Persons must contact us directly with servicing questions, Contract changes and other matters relating to their Contracts. The amount credited to Contracts owned by Eligible Persons will equal the reduction in expenses we enjoy by not incurring brokerage commissions in selling such Contracts, with the determination of the expense reduction and of such crediting being made in accordance with our administrative procedures. These credits will be added to an Eligible Person’s Contract when we apply the Investments. We may also agree to waive minimum Investment requirements for Eligible Persons.

We will only waive or reduce such charges or credit additional amounts on any Contract where expenses associated with the sale or distribution of the Contract and/or costs associated with administering and maintaining the Contract are reduced. Any additional amounts will be added to the Contract when we apply Investments. We reserve the right to terminate waiver, reduced charge and crediting programs at any time, including for issued Contracts.

With respect to additional amounts as described above, you will not keep any amounts credited if you return your Contract during the Free Look period as described under the WITHDRAWALS—Right to Cancel (“Free Look”) section in this Prospectus.

Expenses of the Fund

Your Variable Account Value reflects advisory fees and other expenses incurred by the various Portfolios of the Fund, net of any applicable reductions and/or reimbursements. These fees and expenses may vary. The Fund is governed by its own Board of Trustees, and your Contract does not fix or specify the level of expenses of any Portfolio. The Fund’s fees and expenses are described in detail in the Fund’s Prospectus and in its SAI.

The SEC approved a rule change which will require the Boards of Trustees/ Directors of mutual funds to determine whether a redemption fee (not to exceed 2%) or other trading (transfer) restrictions should be imposed. A redemption fee is a fee that would be charged by and paid to the Fund (not to Pacific Life). In the event the Board of Trustees/ Directors of any underlying funds imposes such fees or limitations, we will pass them on to you.

ANNUITIZATION, DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS

Selecting Your Annuitant

When you submit the application for your Contract, you must choose a sole Annuitant or Joint Annuitants. If you are buying a Qualified Contract, you must be the sole Annuitant. If you are buying a Non-Qualified Contract you may choose yourself and/or another person as Annuitant. Whether you have a sole or Joint Annuitants, you may choose a Contingent Annuitant. The Contingent Annuitant will not have any Contract benefits, including death benefit proceeds, until becoming the sole surviving Annuitant. You will not be able to add or change a sole or Joint Annuitant after your Contract is issued. However, if you are buying a Qualified Contract, you may add a Joint Annuitant on the Annuity Date. You will be able to add or change a Contingent Annuitant until your Annuity Date or the death of your sole Annuitant or both Joint Annuitants, whichever occurs first. However, once your Contingent Annuitant has become the Annuitant under your Contract, no additional Contingent Annuitant may be named. No Annuitant (Primary, Joint or Contingent) may be named upon or after reaching his or her 86th birthday. We reserve the right to require proof of age or survival of the Annuitant(s).

Annuitization

You may choose both your Annuity Date and your Annuity Option. At the Annuity Date, you may elect to annuitize some or all of your Net Contract Value, less any applicable charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes (the “Conversion Amount”), as long as such Conversion Amount annuitized is at least $10,000, subject to any state exceptions. Currently, we are not enforcing this minimum but we reserve the right to enforce it in the future. We will send the annuity payments to the payee that you designate.

If you annuitize only a portion of this available Contract Value, you may have the remainder distributed, less any applicable charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes, any optional Rider Charges, and any applicable withdrawal

 
28


Table of Contents


charge. This option of distribution may or may not be available, or may be available for only certain types of Contracts. Any such distribution will be made to you in a single sum if the remaining Conversion Amount is less than $10,000 on your Annuity Date. Currently, we are not enforcing this minimum but we reserve the right to enforce it in the future. Distributions under your Contract may have tax consequences. You should consult a qualified tax adviser for information on annuitization.

If you annuitize only a portion of your Net Contract Value on your Annuity Date, you may, at that time, have the option to elect not to have the remainder of your Contract Value distributed, but instead to continue your Contract with that remaining Contract Value (a “continuing Contract”). If this option is available, you would then choose a second Annuity Date for your continuing Contract, and all references in this Prospectus to your “Annuity Date” would, in connection with your continuing Contract, be deemed to refer to that second Annuity Date. This option may not be available, or may be available only for certain types of Contracts. You should be aware that some or all of the payments received before the second Annuity Date may be fully taxable. We recommend that you contact a qualified tax adviser for more information if you are interested in this option.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Choosing Your Annuity Date

You should choose your Annuity Date when you submit your application or we will apply a default Annuity Date to your Contract. You may change your Annuity Date by notifying us, in proper form, at least ten Business Days prior to the earlier of your current Annuity Date or your new Annuity Date. Your Annuity Date cannot be earlier than your first Contract Anniversary and must occur on or before a certain date. Adverse federal tax consequences may result if you choose an Annuity Date that is prior to an Annuitant’s attained age 59 1/2. See the FEDERAL TAX STATUS section in this Prospectus.

If you have a sole Annuitant, your Annuity Date cannot be later than his or her 95th birthday. If you have Joint Annuitants, your Annuity Date cannot be later than your younger Joint Annuitant’s 95th birthday. Different requirements may apply in some states.

If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, you may also be subject to additional restrictions. In order to meet Internal Revenue Service (IRS) minimum distribution rules, your Required Minimum Distributions (RMDs) may begin earlier than your Annuity Date. For instance, under Section 401 of the Code (for Qualified Plans) and Section 408 of the Code (for IRAs), the entire interest under the Contract must be distributed to the Owner/ Annuitant not later than the Owner/ Annuitant’s Required Beginning Date (“RBD”), or distributions over the life of the Owner/ Annuitant (or the Owner/ Annuitant and his Beneficiary) must begin no later than the RBD. For more information see the FEDERAL TAX STATUS — Required Minimum Distributions section in this Prospectus.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Default Annuity Date and Options

If you have a Non-Qualified Contract and you do not choose an Annuity Date when you submit your application, your Annuity Date will be your Annuitant’s 95th birthday or your younger Joint Annuitant’s 95th birthday, whichever applies. However some states’ laws may require a different Annuity Date. Certain Qualified Plans may require distribution to occur at an earlier age.

If you have not specified an Annuity Option or do not instruct us otherwise, at your Annuity Date your Net Contract Value, less any charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes, will be annuitized (if this net amount is at least $10,000) as follows:

  •  the net amount from any fixed option, will be converted into a fixed-dollar annuity, and
 
  •  the net amount from your Variable Account Value will be converted into a variable-dollar annuity directed to the Subaccounts proportionate to your Account Value in each.

If the net amount is less than $10,000, the entire amount will be distributed. If you have a Non-Qualified Contract, or if you have a Qualified Contract and are not married, your default Annuity Option will be Life with a ten year Period Certain. If you have a Qualified Contract and you are married, your default Annuity Option will

 
29


Table of Contents


be Joint and Survivor Life with survivor payments of 50%; your spouse will automatically be named your Joint Annuitant.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Choosing Your Annuity Option

You should carefully review the Annuity Options with a qualified tax adviser, and, for Qualified Contracts, reference should be made to the terms of the particular plan and the requirements of the Code for pertinent limitations regarding annuity payments, Required Minimum Distributions (“RMDs”), and other matters.

You may make three basic decisions about your annuity payments. First, you may choose whether you want those payments to be a fixed-dollar amount and/or a variable-dollar amount, subject to state availability. Second, you may choose the form of annuity payments (see Annuity Options below). Third, you may decide how often you want annuity payments to be made (the “frequency” of the payments). You may not change these selections after the Annuity Date.

Fixed and Variable Annuities

You may choose a fixed annuity with fixed-dollar amounts based on a fixed rate and the 1983a Annuity Mortality Table with the ages set back ten (10) years, a variable annuity with variable-dollar payments that vary with the Investment results of the Subaccounts you select, or you may choose both, converting one portion of the net amount you annuitize into a fixed annuity and another portion into a variable annuity.

If you select a fixed annuity, each periodic annuity payment received will be equal to the initial annuity payment, unless you select a joint and survivor life annuity with reduced survivor payments and the Primary Annuitant dies. Any net amount you convert to a fixed annuity will be held in our General Account (but not under any fixed option).

If you select a variable annuity, you may choose as many Variable Investment Options as you wish. The amount of the periodic annuity payments will vary with the investment results of the Variable Investment Options selected. After the Annuity Date, Annuity Units may be exchanged among available Variable Investment Options up to four times in any twelve-month period. How your Contract converts into a variable annuity is explained in more detail in THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT section in the SAI.

Annuity Options

Four Annuity Options are currently available under the Contract, although additional options may become available in the future. For other Annuity Options see the OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS section in this Prospectus.

  1.  Life Only. Periodic payments are made to the designated payee during the Annuitant’s lifetime. Payments stop when the Annuitant dies.
 
  2.  Life with Period Certain. Periodic payments are made to the designated payee during the Annuitant’s lifetime, with payments guaranteed for a specified period. You may choose to have payments guaranteed for anywhere from 5 through 30 years (in full years only).
 
  3.  Joint and Survivor Life. Periodic payments are made to the designated payee during the lifetime of the Primary Annuitant. After the death of the Primary Annuitant, periodic payments will continue to be made during the lifetime of the secondary Annuitant named in the election. You may choose to have the payments to the surviving secondary Annuitant equal 50%, 66 2/3% or 100% of the original amount payable made during the lifetime of the Primary Annuitant (you must make this election when you choose your Annuity Option). If you elect a reduced payment based on the life of the secondary Annuitant, fixed annuity payments will be equal to 50% or 66 2/3% of the original fixed payment payable during the lifetime of the Primary Annuitant; variable annuity payments will be determined using 50% or 66 2/3%, as applicable, of the number of Annuity Units for each Subaccount credited to the Contract as of the date of death of the Primary Annuitant. Payments stop when both Annuitants have died.
 
  4.  Period Certain Only. Periodic payments are made to the designated payee over a specified period. You may choose to have payments continue for anywhere from 5 through 30 years (in full years only).
 
30


Table of Contents


See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Additionally, if variable payments are elected under Annuity Options 2 and 4, you may redeem all remaining guaranteed variable payments after the Annuity Date. Also, under Option 4, partial redemptions of remaining guaranteed variable payments after the Annuity Date are available. The amount available upon full redemption would be the present value of any remaining guaranteed variable payments at the assumed investment return, any applicable withdrawal charge will be deducted from the present value as if you made a full withdrawal, or if applicable, a partial withdrawal. For purposes of calculating the withdrawal charge and Free Withdrawal amount, it will be assumed that the Contract was never converted to provide annuity payments and any prior variable annuity payments in that Contract Year will be treated as if they were partial withdrawals from the Contract (see the CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS—Withdrawal Charge section in this Prospectus). For example, assume that a Contract was issued with a single investment of $10,000 and in Contract Year 2 the Owner elects to receive variable annuity payments under Annuity Option 4. In Contract Year 3, the Owner elects to make a partial redemption of $5,000. The withdrawal charge as a percentage of the Purchase Payments with an age of 3 years is 4%. Assuming the Free Withdrawal amount immediately prior to the partial redemption is $200, the withdrawal charge for the partial redemption will be $192 (($5,000 - $200) × 4%). No withdrawal charge will be imposed on a redemption if:

  •  the Annuity Option is elected as the form of payments of death benefit proceeds, or
 
  •  the Annuitant dies before the period certain has ended and the Beneficiary requests a redemption of the variable annuity payments.

Full or partial redemptions of remaining guaranteed variable payments are explained in more detail in the SAI under THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT.

If the Annuitant dies before the guaranteed payments under Annuity Options 2 and 4 are completed, we will pay the remainder of the guaranteed payments to the first among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to receive the remainder of the guaranteed payments:

  •  the Owner,
 
  •  the Joint Owner,
 
  •  the Contingent Owner,
 
  •  the Beneficiary, or
 
  •  the Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to receive the remainder of the guaranteed payments), we will pay the remainder of the guaranteed payments to the Owner’s estate.

If the Owner dies on or after the Annuity Date, but payments have not yet been completed, then distributions of the remaining amounts payable under the Contract must be made at least as rapidly as the method of distribution that was being used at the date of the Owner’s death. All of the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract will be assumed by the first among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to assume the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract:

  •  the Joint Owner,
 
  •  the Contingent Owner,
 
  •  the Beneficiary, or
 
  •  the Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to assume the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract), all of the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract will be assumed by the Owner’s estate.

For Qualified Contracts, please refer to the Choosing Your Annuity Date section in this Prospectus. If your Contract was issued in connection with a Qualified Plan subject to Title I of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (“ERISA”), your spouse’s consent may be required when you seek any distribution under your

 
31


Table of Contents


Contract, unless your Annuity Option is Joint and Survivor Life with survivor payments of at least 50%, and your spouse is your Joint Annuitant.

Your Annuity Payments

Frequency of Payments

You may choose to have annuity payments made monthly, quarterly, semiannually, or annually. The amount of a variable payment will be determined in each period on the date corresponding to your Annuity Date, and payment will be made on the next succeeding day.

Your initial annuity payment must be at least $250. See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus. Depending on the net amount you annuitize, this requirement may limit your options regarding the period and/or frequency of annuity payments.

Amount of the First Payment

Your Contract contains tables that we use to determine the amount of the first annuity payment under your Contract, taking into consideration the annuitized portion of your Net Contract Value at the Annuity Date. This amount will vary, depending on the annuity period and payment frequency you select. This amount will be larger in the case of shorter Period Certain annuities and smaller for longer Period Certain annuities. Similarly, this amount will be greater for a Life Only annuity than for a Joint and Survivor Life annuity, because we will expect to make payments for a shorter period of time on a Life Only annuity. If you do not choose the Period Certain Only annuity, this amount will also vary depending on the age of the Annuitant(s) on the Annuity Date and, for some Contracts in some states, the sex of the Annuitant(s).

For fixed annuity payments, the guaranteed income factors in our tables are based on an annual interest rate of 3% and the 1983a Annuity Mortality Table with the ages set back 10 years. If you elect a fixed annuity, fixed annuity payments will be based on the periodic income factors in effect for your Contract on the Annuity Date which are at least the guaranteed income factors under the Contract.

For variable annuity payments, the tables are based on an assumed annual investment return of 5% and the 1983a Annuity Mortality Table with the ages set back 10 years. If you elect a variable annuity, your initial variable annuity payment will be based on the applicable variable annuity income factors in effect for your Contract on the Annuity Date which are at least the variable annuity income factors under the Contract. You may choose any other annuity option we may offer on the option’s effective date. A higher assumed investment return would mean a larger first variable annuity payment, but subsequent payments would increase only when actual net investment performance exceeds the higher assumed rate and would fall when actual net investment performance is less than the higher assumed rate. A lower assumed rate would mean a smaller first payment and a more favorable threshold for increases and decreases. If the actual net investment performance is a constant 5% annually, annuity payments will be level. The assumed investment return is explained in more detail in the SAI under THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Death Benefits

Death benefit proceeds may be payable before the Annuity Date on proof of death of the sole surviving Annuitant or of any Contract Owner while the Contract is in force. If there are Joint Owners, the Contract will be owned as Joint Tenants with Right of Survivorship and not as Tenants in Common. The amount of the death benefit proceeds will be paid according to the Death Benefit Proceeds section below.

The “Notice Date” is the day on which we receive, in proper form, proof of death and instructions regarding payment of death benefit proceeds. If a Contract has multiple recipients, death benefit proceeds will be calculated when we first receive proof of death and instructions, in proper form, from any recipient. The death benefit proceeds still remaining to be paid to other recipients will fluctuate with the performance of the underlying Investment Options.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

 
32


Table of Contents


Death Benefit Proceeds

Death benefit proceeds will be payable upon receipt, in proper form, of proof of death and instructions regarding payment of death benefit proceeds. Such proceeds will equal the Death Benefit Amount reduced by any charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes and any Contract Debt. The death benefit proceeds may be payable in a single sum, as an Annuity Option available under the Contract, towards the purchase of any other Annuity Option we then offer, or in any other manner permitted by the IRS and approved by us. In addition, there may be legal requirements that limit the recipient’s Annuity Options and the timing of any payments. A recipient should consult a qualified tax adviser before making a death benefit election.

Additional provisions apply if your Contract names a Joint or Contingent Owner or Annuitant, or if the Beneficiary, Joint Owner, or Contingent Owner is your spouse. Further information about these provisions is contained in the SAI.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Nonqualified Death of Owner Distribution Rules

The Contract is intended to comply with all applicable provisions of Code Section 72(s) and any successor provision, as deemed necessary by us to qualify the Contract as an annuity contract for federal income tax purposes. If an Owner of a Non-Qualified Contract dies before the Annuity Date, distribution of the death benefit proceeds must begin within 1 year after the Owner’s death or complete distribution within 5 years after the Owner’s death. In order to satisfy this requirement, the designated recipient must receive a final lump sum payment by the fifth anniversary of the death of the Contract Owner, or elect to receive an annuity for life or over a period that does not exceed the life expectancy of the designated recipient with annuity payments that start within 1 year after the Owner’s death or, if permitted by the IRS, elect to receive a systematic distribution over a period not exceeding the beneficiary’s life expectancy using a method that would be acceptable for purposes of calculating the minimum distribution required under section 401(a)(9) of the Code. If an election to receive an annuity is not made within 60 days of our receipt of proof, in proper form, of the Owner’s death or, if earlier, 60 days (or shorter period as we permit) prior to the first anniversary of the Owner’s death, the lump sum option will be deemed elected, unless otherwise required by law. If the lump sum option is deemed elected, we will consider that deemed election as receipt of instructions regarding payment of the death benefit proceeds. If a Non-Qualified Contract has Joint Owners, this requirement applies to the first Contract Owner to die.

The Owner may designate that the Beneficiary will receive death benefit proceeds through annuity payments for life or life with Period Certain. The Owner must designate the payment method in writing in a form acceptable to us. The Owner may revoke the designation only in writing and only in a form acceptable to us. Once the Owner dies, the Beneficiary cannot revoke or modify the Owner’s designation.

If the Owner dies, regardless if they were also the Annuitant or not, the designated recipient will be the first among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds, in the following order:

  •  Joint Owner,
 
  •  Contingent Owner,
 
  •  Beneficiary, or
 
  •  Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds), the designated recipient will be the Owner’s Estate.

If the Owner is a Non-Natural Owner, the rules set forth in these Nonqualified Death of Owner Distribution Rules apply in the event of the death or change of the Primary Annuitant.

Qualified Contract Death of Annuitant Distribution Rules

Under Internal Revenue Service regulations and our administrative procedures, if the Contract is owned under a Qualified Plan as defined in Sections 401, 403, 457(b) or Sections 408, or 408A of the Code and the Annuitant dies before the Required Beginning Date, the payment of any death benefit proceeds must be made to the designated

 
33


Table of Contents


recipient in accordance with one of two rules. One rule generally requires the death benefit proceeds to commence distribution by December 31 of the calendar year following the calendar year of the Annuitant’s death and continue over the life of his or her Beneficiary (the “life expectancy method”). The second rule requires distribution of the entire death benefit proceeds no later than December 31 of the calendar year in which the fifth anniversary of the Annuitant’s death falls (the “five-year rule”).

However, the life expectancy method and the five-year rule are modified if the Beneficiary is a surviving spouse. If the surviving spouse elects to continue the Contract and not do an eligible rollover to an IRA or another existing eligible plan in his or her name, then he or she will be subject to the five-year rule. However, the surviving spouse may waive the five-year requirement and elect to take distributions over his or her life expectancy, and if the surviving spouse elects to defer the commencement of required distributions beyond the first anniversary of the Annuitant’s death, the surviving spouse will be deemed to continue the Contract. In this instance, the surviving spouse may defer required distributions until the later of:

  •  December 31 of the year following the year the Annuitant died, or
 
  •  December 31 of the year in which the deceased Annuitant would have turned 70 1/2.

Further, under our administrative procedures, if the required distributions election is not received by us in good order by December 31 of the year following the Annuitant’s death or by the December of the year in which the Annuitant would have attained age 70 1/2, the lump sum option will be deemed by us to have been elected, unless otherwise required by law. If the lump sum option is deemed elected, we will treat that deemed election as receipt of instructions regarding payment of death benefit proceeds.

If the Annuitant dies after the commencement of RMDs (except in the case of a Roth IRA when RMDs do not apply) but before the Annuitant’s entire interest in the Contract (other than a Roth IRA) has been distributed, the remaining interest in the Contract must be distributed to the designated recipient at least as rapidly as under the distribution method in effect at the time of the Annuitant’s death.

The Amount of the Death Benefit: Death of Annuitant

If the sole surviving Annuitant, or the first Owner who is also an Annuitant dies prior to the Annuity Date, the death benefit proceeds will be the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date, as described in the Death Benefit Amount subsection below.

If the Annuitant who is not an Owner dies, the designated sole Annuitant will then be the first living person in the following order and no death benefit proceeds will be payable:

  •  a surviving Joint Annuitant, or
 
  •  a surviving Contingent Annuitant.

If there is no surviving Joint or Contingent Annuitant, the death benefit proceeds will be payable to the first among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds, in the following order:

  •  Owner,
 
  •  Joint Owner,
 
  •  Contingent Owner,
 
  •  Beneficiary, or
 
  •  Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds), the proceeds will be payable to the Owners Estate.

If the Owner is not an Annuitant and the Owner and Annuitant die simultaneously, the death benefit proceeds will be calculated under the Death of Annuitant provisions and proceeds will be paid to the first among the following

 
34


Table of Contents


who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds, in the following order:

  •  Joint Owner,
 
  •  Contingent Owner,
 
  •  Beneficiary, or
 
  •  Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds), the proceeds will be payable to the Owner’s Estate.

The Amount of the Death Benefit: Death of a Contract Owner

If a Contract Owner who is not an Annuitant dies before the Annuity Date, the death benefit proceeds will be equal to your Contract Value as of the Notice Date and will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds section. The death benefit proceeds will be paid to the first among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds, in the following order:

  •  Joint Owner,
 
  •  Contingent Owner,
 
  •  Beneficiary, or
 
  •  Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds), the proceeds will be paid to the Owner’s Estate.

If a Contract Owner who is an Annuitant dies before the Annuity Date, the amount of the death benefit will be determined in accordance with the Death Benefit Amount subsection below, and will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds section. The death benefit proceeds will be paid to the first among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds, in the following order:

  •  Joint Owner,
 
  •  Contingent Owner,
 
  •  Beneficiary, or
 
  •  Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds), the proceeds will be paid to the Owner’s Estate.

If you are a Non-Natural Owner of a Contract other than a Contract issued under a Qualified Plan as defined in Section 401 or 403 of the Code, the Primary Annuitant will be treated as the Owner of the Contract for purposes of the Nonqualified Death of Owner Distribution Rules. If there is a change in the Primary Annuitant prior to the Annuity Date, such change will be treated as the death of the Owner. The Death Benefit Amount will be: (a) the Contract Value, if the Non-Natural Owner elects to maintain the Contract and reinvest the Contract Value into the contract in the same amount as immediately prior to the distribution; or (b) the Contract Value, less any annual fee, withdrawal charge and charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes, if the Non-Natural Owner elects a cash distribution.

Death Benefit Amount

The Death Benefit Amount as of any Business Day before the Annuity Date is equal to the greater of:

  •  your Contract Value as of that day, or
 
  •  your aggregate Purchase Payments reduced by an amount for each withdrawal, which is calculated by multiplying the aggregate Purchase Payments received before each withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of
 
35


Table of Contents


  the withdrawal, including any withdrawal charge, to the Contract Value immediately prior to each withdrawal.

Optional Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider (SDBR)

Purchasing the SDBR

You may purchase the SDBR at the time your application is completed. You may not purchase the SDBR after the Contract Date. The SDBR may only be purchased if the age of each Annuitant is 75 or younger on the Contract Date.

How the SDBR Works

If you purchase the SDBR at the time your application is completed, upon the death of the sole surviving Annuitant or the first Owner who is also an Annuitant, prior to the Annuity Date, the death benefit proceeds will be equal to the greater of (a) or (b) below:

  (a)  the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date.

  The Death Benefit Amount as of any day before the Annuity Date is equal to the greater of:

  •  your Contract Value as of that day, or
 
  •  your aggregate Purchase Payments reduced by an amount for each withdrawal, which is calculated by multiplying the aggregate Purchase Payments received before each withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal, including any withdrawal charge, to the Contract Value immediately prior to each withdrawal.

  (b)  the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date.

  The actual Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount is calculated only when death benefit proceeds become payable as a result of the death of the sole surviving Annuitant, or the first death of an Owner who is also an Annuitant, prior to the Annuity Date and is determined as follows:
 
  First we calculate what the Death Benefit Amount would have been as of your first Contract Anniversary and each subsequent Contract Anniversary that occurs while the Annuitant is living and before the Annuitant reaches his or her 81st birthday (each of these Contract Anniversaries is a “Milestone Date”).
 
  We then adjust the Death Benefit Amount for each Milestone Date by:

  •  adding the aggregate amount of any Purchase Payments received by us since the Milestone Date, and
 
  •  subtracting an amount for each withdrawal that has occurred since that Milestone Date, which is calculated by multiplying the Death Benefit Amount before the withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of each withdrawal that has occurred since that Milestone Date including any withdrawal charge, to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal.

The highest of these adjusted Death Benefit Amounts for each Milestone Date, as of the Notice Date, is your Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount if you purchase the SDBR. Calculation of the actual Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount is only made once death benefit proceeds become payable under your Contract.

Termination

The SDBR will remain in effect until the earlier of:

  •  the date a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal is made under the Contract,
 
  •  the date death benefit proceeds become payable under the Contract,
 
  •  the date the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract, or
 
  •  the Annuity Date.

The SDBR may not otherwise be cancelled.

 
36


Table of Contents


Optional Premier Death Benefit Rider (PDBR)

The PDBR is not available for Contracts issued on or after May 1, 2003. All references to the PDBR in this section, the Prospectus, and the Statement of Additional Information do not apply to such Contracts.

If you purchased the PDBR at the time your application was completed, upon the death of the sole surviving Annuitant or the first Owner who is also an Annuitant, prior to the Annuity Date, the death benefit proceeds will be equal to the greater of (a) or (b) below:

  (a)  the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date.

  The Death Benefit Amount as of any day (prior to the Annuity Date) is equal to the greater of:

  •  your Contract Value as of that day, or
 
  •  your aggregate Purchase Payments less an adjusted amount for each withdrawal increased at an effective annual rate of 6% to that day, subject to a maximum of two times the difference between the aggregate Purchase Payments and withdrawals, including any withdrawal charge.

  The 6% annual rate of growth will take into account the timing of when each Purchase Payment and withdrawal occurred by applying a daily factor of 1.00015965 to each day’s balance. See APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS. The 6% effective annual rate of growth will stop accruing as of the earlier of:

  •  the Contract anniversary following the date the Annuitant reaches his or her 80th birthday, or
 
  •  the date of death of the sole Annuitant, or
 
  •  the Annuity Date.

  To determine the adjusted amount for each withdrawal we:

  •  divide the amount of each withdrawal, including withdrawal charges, if any, by your Contract Value immediately before that withdrawal; and
 
  •  then multiply the result by your Death Benefit Amount, immediately before that withdrawal.

  For Contracts issued on or after February 2, 2003 and before May 1, 2003, the effective annual rate of growth is 5% and a daily factor of 1.00013368 will apply.

  (b)  the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date.

  The actual Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount is calculated only when death benefit proceeds become payable as a result of the death of the sole Annuitant or the first death of an Owner who is also an Annuitant, prior to the Annuity Date, and is determined as follows:
 
  First, we calculate what the Death Benefit Amount would have been as of the quarterly anniversary following the Contract Date and as of each subsequent quarterly anniversary that occurs while the Annuitant is living and up to and including the Contract Anniversary following the Annuitant’s 65th birthday. Quarterly anniversaries are measured from the Contract Date. After the Contract Anniversary following the Annuitant’s 65th birthday, we calculate what the Death Benefit Amount would have been as of each Contract Anniversary that occurs while the Annuitant is living and before the Annuitant reaches his or her 81st birthday. Each quarterly anniversary and each Contract Anniversary in which a Death Benefit Amount is calculated is referred to as a “Milestone Date”.
 
  We then adjust the Death Benefit Amount for each Milestone Date by:

  •  adding the aggregate amount of any Purchase Payments received by us since that Milestone Date; and
 
  •  subtracting an amount for each withdrawal that has occurred since that Milestone Date, which is calculated by multiplying the Death Benefit Amount before the withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of each withdrawal that has occurred since that Milestone Date, including any withdrawal charge, to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal.

The highest of these adjusted Death Benefit Amounts as of the Notice Date is your Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit if the PDBR is purchased. Calculation of the actual Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit is only made once death benefit proceeds become payable under your Contract.

 
37


Table of Contents


Termination

The PDBR will remain in effect until the earlier of:

  •  the date a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal is made under the Contract,
 
  •  the date death benefit proceeds become payable under the Contract,
 
  •  the date the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract, or
 
  •  the Annuity Date.

The PDBR may not otherwise be cancelled.

Optional Earnings Enhancement Guarantee (EEG) Rider

Purchasing the EEG Rider

You may purchase the EEG Rider (subject to availability) on the Contract Date or on the first Contract Anniversary. If you buy the EEG Rider within 60 days after the Contract Date or within 30 days after the first Contract Anniversary, we will make the Effective Date of the EEG Rider coincide with that Contract Date or Contract Anniversary. The EEG Rider is also called the Guaranteed Earnings Enhancement (GEE) Rider and the EEG Amount is called the GEE Amount.

You may purchase the EEG Rider only if the age of each Annuitant is 75 years or younger on the date of purchase. The date of purchase is the Effective Date of the Rider as shown in your Contract.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

How the EEG Rider Works

If you purchase the EEG Rider, (subject to state availability), an Earnings Enhancement Guarantee amount (EEG Amount) is added to the death benefit proceeds when such proceeds become payable as a result of the sole surviving Annuitant’s death or the first death of an Owner who is also an Annuitant.

The EEG amount is calculated as follows:

If the age of the oldest Annuitant was age 69 or younger on the Effective Date of the Rider, the EEG amount is equal to the lesser of:

  •  40% of Earnings, or
 
  •  40% of Remaining Purchase Payments, excluding any Purchase Payments made in the 12 months prior to the date of death, adjusted for withdrawals.

If the age of the oldest Annuitant was age 70 to 75 on the Effective Date of the Rider, the EEG Amount is equal to the lesser of:

  •  25% of Earnings, or
 
  •  25% of Remaining Purchase Payments, excluding any Purchase Payments made in the 12 months prior to the date of death, adjusted for withdrawals.

For purposes of calculating the EEG Amount, Earnings are equal to the Contract Value as of the date of death minus Remaining Purchase Payments. Remaining Purchase Payments is defined as (a) or (b) below:

  (a)  If the Rider is effective on the Contract Date, Remaining Purchase Payments are equal to:

  •  the Initial Purchase Payment, plus
 
  •  any additional Purchase Payments added, minus
 
  •  the amount that each withdrawal exceeds the amount of Earnings in the Contract immediately prior to such withdrawal. Withdrawals are assumed to be taken from Earnings first, then from Purchase Payments in the order they were received.
 
38


Table of Contents


  (b)  If the Rider is effective after the Contract Date, Remaining Purchase Payments are equal to:

  •  the Contract Value on the Effective Date, plus
 
  •  any additional Purchase Payments added since the Effective Date of the Rider, minus
 
  •  the amount that each withdrawal taken after the Effective Date of the Rider exceeds the amount of Earnings in the Contract accumulated since that date. Withdrawals are assumed to be taken first from Earnings accumulated since the Effective Date of the Rider, then from Purchase Payments in the order that they were received.

If the Surviving Spouse of the deceased Owner continues the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions, then all provisions of the Rider for the Surviving Spouse will be based on the age of the Surviving Spouse on the date of death of the deceased Owner. If the Surviving Spouse is over age 75 on the date of death, the Rider will not be continued for such Surviving Spouse and the benefits and charges provided by the Rider will no longer be applied.

Termination

Once purchased, the Rider will remain in effect until the earlier of:

  •  the date a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal is made under the Contract,
 
  •  the date death benefit proceeds become payable under the Contract,
 
  •  the date the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract, or
 
  •  the Annuity Date.

The EEG Rider may not otherwise be cancelled.

Spousal Continuation

Generally, a sole designated recipient who is the Owner’s spouse may elect to become the Owner (and sole Annuitant if the deceased Owner had been the Annuitant) and continue the Contract until the earliest of the spouse’s death, the death of the Annuitant, or the Annuity Date, except in the case of a Qualified Contract which is qualified pursuant to section 403 of the Code. On the Notice Date, if the surviving spouse is deemed to have continued the Contract, we will set the Contract Value equal to the death benefit proceeds that would have been payable to the spouse as the deemed Beneficiary/ designated recipient of the death benefit proceeds (“Add-In Amount”). The Add-In Amount will be added to the Contract Value on the Notice Date. There will not be an adjustment to the Contract Value if the Contract Value is equal to or greater than the death benefit proceeds as of the Notice Date. The Add-In Amount will be allocated among Investment Options in accordance with the current allocation instructions for the Contract and may be, under certain circumstances, considered earnings. A Joint or Contingent Owner who is the designated recipient, but not the Owner’s spouse, may not continue the Contract.

WITHDRAWALS

Optional Withdrawals

You may, on or prior to your Annuity Date, withdraw all or a portion of the amount available under your Contract while the Annuitants are living and your Contract is in force. You may surrender your Contract and make a full withdrawal at any time. If you surrender your Contract it will be terminated as of the Effective Date of the withdrawal. Beginning 30 days after your Contract Date, you also may make partial withdrawals from your Investment Options at any time. Currently, we are not requiring the 30-day waiting period on partial withdrawals, but we reserve the right to require the 30-day waiting period on partial withdrawals in the future. You may request to withdraw a specific dollar amount or a specific percentage of an Account Value or your Net Contract Value. You may choose to make your withdrawal from specified Investment Options. If you do not specify Investment Options, your withdrawal will be made from all of your Investment Options proportionately. Each partial withdrawal must be for $500 or more. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum partial withdrawal amount on Qualified Contracts but we reserve the right to enforce the minimum amount on Qualified Contracts in the future. Pre-authorized partial withdrawals must be at least $250, except for pre-authorized withdrawals distributed

 
39


Table of Contents


by Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT), which must be at least $100. If your partial withdrawal from an Investment Option would leave a remaining Account Value in that Investment Option of less than $500, we also reserve the right, at our option, to transfer that remaining amount to your other Investment Options on a proportionate basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions. If your partial withdrawal leaves you with a Net Contract Value of less than $1,000, we have the right, at our option, to terminate your Contract and send you the withdrawal proceeds described in the next section below. If your partial withdrawal request is for an amount exceeding the amount available for withdrawal, as described in the Amount Available for Withdrawal section, we have the right, at our option to terminate your Contract and send you the amount available for withdrawal. Partial withdrawals from any fixed option in any Contract Year are subject to restrictions. See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT and the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS sections in this Prospectus.

Amount Available for Withdrawal

The amount available for withdrawal is your Net Contract Value (Contract Value less Contract Debt) at the end of the Business Day on which your withdrawal request is effective, less any applicable Annual Fee, optional Rider Charges, withdrawal charge, and any charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes. The amount we send to you (your “withdrawal proceeds”) will also reflect any required or requested federal and state income tax withholding. See the FEDERAL TAX STATUS and THE GENERAL ACCOUNT sections in this Prospectus.

You assume investment risk on Purchase Payments in the Subaccounts. As a result, the amount available to you for withdrawal from any Subaccount may be more or less than the total Purchase Payments you have allocated to that Subaccount.

Free Withdrawals

Subject to the amount available for withdrawal provisions as described in the withdrawal section, we will not impose a withdrawal charge on withdrawals of your Earnings, or on withdrawals of Purchase Payments held under your Contract for at least three Contract Years. In addition, during each Contract Year we will not impose a withdrawal charge on your withdrawal of up to 10% of your remaining Purchase Payments at the beginning of the Contract Year that would otherwise be subject to the withdrawal charge plus up to 10% of any additional Purchase Payments received during the Contract Year. Our calculations of the withdrawal charge deduct this “free 10%” from your “oldest” Purchase Payment that is still otherwise subject to the charge. For purposes of determining the free withdrawal amounts, withdrawal of mandatory required minimums from certain Qualified Plans are included within the calculations.

  Example: You make an initial Purchase Payment of $10,000 in Contract Year 1, and additional Purchase Payments of $1,000 and $6,000 in Contract Year 2. Your Contract Value in Contract Year 3 is $19,000 which includes $2,000 in Earnings. In Contract Year 3, you may withdraw $3,700 free of the withdrawal charges (your total Purchase Payments were $17,000, so 10% of that total equals $1,700, plus you had $2,000 of Earnings). After your withdrawal, your Contract Value is $15,300 (all attributable to your prior Purchase Payments). If, in Contract Year 4, your Contract Value equals $12,500; you may withdraw $9,000 [$8,300 (remaining amount of your initial $10,000 Purchase Payment that in Contract Year 4 is free of withdrawal charges) plus $700 (10% of $7,000 additional Purchase Payments)].

Qualified plans have special restrictions on withdrawals. See Special Restrictions Under Qualified Plans below. For purposes of determining the free withdrawal amounts, withdrawal of mandatory required minimums from certain Qualified Plans are included within the calculations. For those Contracts issued to a Charitable Remainder Trust (CRT), the amount available for withdrawal free of withdrawal charges during a Contract Year includes all eligible Purchase Payments plus all earnings even if all Purchase Payments have not been deemed withdrawn.

Pre-Authorized Withdrawals

If your Contract Value is at least $5,000, you may select the pre-authorized withdrawal option, and you may choose monthly, quarterly, semiannual or annual withdrawals. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum Contract Value amount but we reserve the right to enforce the minimum amount in the future. Each withdrawal must be for at least $250, except for withdrawals distributed by Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT), which must be at least $100. Each pre-authorized withdrawal is subject to federal income tax on its taxable portion and may be subject to a penalty tax of 10% or more if you have not reached age 59 1/2. See the FEDERAL TAX STATUS and

 
40


Table of Contents


THE GENERAL ACCOUNT sections in this Prospectus. Additional information and options are set forth in the SAI.

Special Requirements for Full Withdrawals

If you wish to withdraw the entire amount available under your Contract, you must either return your Contract to us or sign and submit a Withdrawal Request form or a Lost Contract Affidavit if no Withdrawal Request form is completed.

Special Restrictions Under Qualified Plans

Individual Qualified Plans may have additional rules regarding withdrawals from a Contract purchased under such a Plan. In general, if your Contract was issued under certain Qualified Plans, you may not withdraw amounts attributable to contributions made pursuant to a salary reduction agreement (as defined in Section 402(g)(3)(A) of the Code) or to transfers from a custodial account (as defined in Section 403(b)(7) of the Code) except in cases of your:

  •  severance from employment,
 
  •  death,
 
  •  disability as defined in Section 72(m)(7) of the Code,
 
  •  reaching age 59 1/2, or
 
  •  hardship as defined for purposes of Section 401 of the Code.

These limitations do not affect certain rollovers or exchanges between Qualified Plans, and do not apply to rollovers from these Qualified Plans to an individual retirement account or individual retirement annuity. In the case of tax sheltered annuities, these limitations do not apply to certain salary reduction contributions made, and investment results earned, prior to dates specified in the Code.

Hardship withdrawals under the exception provided above are restricted to amounts attributable to salary reduction contributions, and do not include investment results. This additional restriction does not apply to salary reduction contributions made, and investment results earned, prior to dates specified in the Code.

Certain distributions, including rollovers, may be subject to mandatory withholding of 20% for federal income tax and to a penalty tax of 10% or more if the distribution is not transferred directly to the trustee of another Qualified Plan, or to the custodian of an individual retirement account or issuer of an individual retirement annuity. See the FEDERAL TAX STATUS section in this Prospectus. Distributions may also trigger withholding for state income taxes. The tax and ERISA rules relating to Contract withdrawals are complex. We are not the administrator of any Qualified Plan. You should consult your qualified tax adviser and/or your Plan Administrator before you withdraw any portion of your Contract Value.

Special rules may be available for victims of Hurricanes Katrina, Rita or Wilma. See the APPENDIX F: KETRA Provisions section in this Prospectus.

Effective Date of Withdrawal Requests

Withdrawal requests are normally effective on the Business Day we receive them in proper form. If you make Purchase Payments by check and submit a withdrawal request immediately afterwards, payment of your withdrawal proceeds may be delayed until we receive confirmation in our Annuities administrative office that your check has cleared.

Tax Consequences of Withdrawals

Withdrawals, including pre-authorized withdrawals, will generally have federal income tax consequences, which could include tax penalties. You should consult with a qualified tax adviser before making any withdrawal or selecting the pre-authorized withdrawal option. See the FEDERAL TAX STATUS section in this Prospectus.

 
41


Table of Contents


Right to Cancel (“Free Look”)

You may return your Contract for cancellation and a refund during your Free Look period. Your Free Look period is usually the 10-day period beginning on the day you receive your Contract, but may vary if required by state law. The amount of your refund may be more or less than the Purchase Payments you’ve made. If you return your Contract, it will be cancelled and treated as void from your Contract Date. In most states, you will then receive a refund of your Contract Value, based upon the next determined Accumulated Unit Value (AUV) after we receive your Contract for cancellation, plus a refund of any amounts that may have been deducted as Contract fees and charges, and any additional amount credited as described in the CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS—Waivers and Reduced Charges section in this Prospectus. You would keep the gains or losses on the credited amounts. Thus, an Owner who returns a Contract within the Free Look period also bears the investment risk on any additional amounts credited to the Contract. In some states we are required to refund your Purchase Payments.

For any Contract issued as an IRA returned within 7 days after you receive it, we are required to return all Purchase Payments (less any withdrawals made).

You’ll find a complete description of the Free Look period and amount to be refunded that applies to your Contract on the Contract’s cover page, or on a notice that accompanies your Contract.

If your Contract is issued in exchange for another annuity contract or a life insurance policy, our administrative procedures may vary, depending on the state in which your Contract is delivered. See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS

Some optional Riders require that your entire Contract Value be invested in an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for the Rider to remain in effect. If you use our DCA Plus program in conjunction with such an asset allocation program, you will also be considered to have met this requirement. (See the HOW YOUR INVESTMENTS ARE ALLOCATED— Portfolio Optimization section in this Prospectus.)

You may purchase any optional Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary. In addition, if you purchase a Rider within 60 days after the Contract Date or within 30 days after any Contract Anniversary, the Rider Effective Date will be that Contract Date or Contract Anniversary.

Some broker/dealers may limit their clients from purchasing some optional benefits based upon the client’s age or other factors. You should work with your investment professional to decide whether an optional benefit is appropriate for you.

There may be adverse consequences to taking a loan while an optional Rider is in effect. If you have an existing loan on your Contract, you should carefully consider whether an optional Rider is appropriate for you.

Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider

Purchasing the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider

Subject to state availability, you may purchase the optional Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary if:

  •  the age of each Annuitant is eighty five (85) years or younger on the date of purchase, and
 
  •  your entire Contract Value is invested in an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for this Rider during the entire period that the Rider is in effect.

On and after October 1, 2005, subject to state availability of the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider, you may elect to exchange the Income Access Plus Rider or the Income Access Rider for the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider on any Contract Anniversary. The initial Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance under the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider will be equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. If you elect an exchange, you will be subject to the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider charge in effect at the time of the exchange. You should consult a qualified adviser for complete information and advice before making an exchange.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

 
42


Table of Contents


Lifetime Income Access Plus Terms

  Annual RMD Amount—The amount required to be distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Internal Revenue Code Section 401(a)(9) (“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.
 
  Protected Payment Amount—The maximum amount that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing the Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Amount on any day after the Rider Effective Date is equal to the lesser of:

  •  5% of the Protected Payment Base as of that day, less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year, or
 
  •  the Remaining Protected Balance as of that day.

  Protected Payment Base—An amount used to determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged except as otherwise described under the provisions of this Rider.
 
  Remaining Protected Balance—The amount available for future withdrawals made under this Rider.
 
  Income Access Credit—An amount added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance. The Income Access Credit is referred to as Annual Credit in the Contract’s Rider.
 
  Reset Date—Any Contract Anniversary beginning with the first (1st) Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, on which you elect to Reset the remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value, determined as of that Contract Anniversary.
 
  Initial Values—The initial Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance amounts are equal to:

  •  Initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract Date, or
 
  •  Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.

  The initial Protected Payment Amount on the Rider Effective Date is equal to 5% of the initial Protected Payment Base.

How the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider Works

On any day, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance, until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0). This Rider also provides for an amount (an “Income Access Credit”) to be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance.

In addition, on any Contract Anniversary beginning with the first (1st) Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, you may elect to reset the Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary.

For purposes of this Rider, the term “withdrawal” includes any applicable withdrawal charges and charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes, if applicable. Amounts withdrawn under this Rider will reduce the Contract Value by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees, charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise made under the provisions of the Contract.

If your Contract is a Qualified Contract or a TSA/403(b) Contract, you are subject to restrictions on withdrawals you may take prior to a triggering event and you should consult your tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing an optional guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals and triggering events, see the FEDERAL TAX STATUS— Qualified Contracts section in the Prospectus.

Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount

While this Rider is in effect, you may withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount without reducing the Protected Payment Base, regardless of market performance, until the Remaining Protected Balance equals zero. Any portion of the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year.

 
43


Table of Contents


If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged. The Remaining Protected Balance will decrease by the withdrawal amount immediately following the withdrawal.

If a withdrawal exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, we will adjust the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance immediately following the withdrawal, to the lesser of:

  •  the Contract Value immediately after the withdrawal, or
 
  •  the Remaining Protected Balance immediately prior to the withdrawal, less the withdrawal amount.

The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed the Protected Payment Amount.

Required Minimum Distributions

No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a result of a withdrawal, if a withdrawal made under the Rider exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:

  •  such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at that time,
 
  •  you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,
 
  •  the Annual RMD Amount is based on the previous year-end Contract Value of this Contract only, and
 
  •  no withdrawals (other than RMD withdrawals) are made from the Contract during the Contract Year.

The Remaining Protected Balance will decrease by the amount of each RMD withdrawal immediately following the RMD withdrawal.

Depletion of Contract Value

If a withdrawal (including an RMD withdrawal) does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount and reduces the Contract Value to zero, the following will apply:

  •  if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of an Owner who is a Non-Natural Owner):

      •  was age 64 or younger when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider, after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, 5% of the Protected Payment Base will be paid each year until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero, or
 
      •  was age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, 5% of the Protected Payment Base will be paid each year until the day of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant.

  •  the payments of 5% of the Protected Payment Base will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,
 
  •  no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the Contract,
 
  •  any Remaining Protected Balance will not be available for payment in a lump sum and may not be applied to provide payments under an Annuity Option,
 
  •  the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit, and
 
  •  any payments made to you of the Remaining Protected Balance may be taxable to you as ordinary income, and if you are under the age of 59 1/2, may be subject to an additional 10% early withdrawal penalty tax.

If the Owner or sole surviving Annuitant dies and the Contract Value is zero as of the date of death, any Remaining Protected Balance will be paid to the Beneficiary under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals and payment frequency (at least annually) then in effect at the time of the Owner’s or sole surviving Annuitant’s death. If, however, the Remaining Protected Balance would be paid over a period that exceeds the life expectancy of the

 
44


Table of Contents


Beneficiary, the pre-authorized withdrawal amount will be adjusted so that the withdrawal payments will be paid over a period that does not exceed the Beneficiary’s life expectancy.

Depletion of Remaining Protected Balance

If a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) reduced the Remaining Protected Balance to zero and Contract Value remains, the following will apply:

  If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of an Owner who is a Non-Natural Owner):

  •  was age 64 or younger when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, this Rider will terminate, or
 
  •  was age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, you may elect to withdraw up to 5% of the Protected Payment Base each year until the day of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant.

If a withdrawal (except an RMD withdrawal) made from the Contract exceeds 5% of the Protected Payment Base, this Rider will terminate.

Any death benefit proceeds to be paid to the Beneficiary from remaining Contract Value will be paid according to the Death Benefit provisions of the Contract.

Income Access Credit

On each Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date, an Income Access Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance, as of that Contract Anniversary, if:

  •  no withdrawals have occurred after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and
 
  •  that Contract Anniversary is within the first five (5) Contract Anniversaries, measured from the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later.

The Income Access Credit is equal to 6% of the total of:

  •  the Remaining Protected Balance on the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and
 
  •  the cumulative Purchase Payments received after the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later,

as of the Contract Anniversary on which the Income Access Credit is added.

Once a withdrawal has occurred, no Income Access Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary following the withdrawal, unless you elect to reset the Remaining Protected Balance.

Income Access Credits will not increase your cost basis and when distributed, may be recognizable as taxable ordinary income.

Election to Reset Remaining Protected Balance

You may, on any Contract Anniversary beginning with the first (1st) Contract Anniversary, measured from the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, elect to reset the Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary.

The annual Charge percentage may change if you elect to reset the Remaining Protected Balance. However, the annual Charge percentage will never exceed the annual Charge percentage then in effect for new issues of this same Rider. If we are no longer issuing this Rider, any change in the annual Charge percentage will not result in an annual Charge percentage that exceeds the maximum annual Charge percentage. (See the CHARGES, FEES and DEDUCTIONS—Optional Rider Charges section in this Prospectus).

 
45


Table of Contents


On each Reset Date and after any Income Access Credit is applied, we will set the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value as of the Reset Date.

The election to reset the Remaining Protected Balance must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within thirty (30) days after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset is effective. Your election to reset the Remaining Protected Balance may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance, Protected Payment Amount and Income Access Credit. We will provide you with written confirmation of your election.

On and after each Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall apply in the same manner as they applied when the Rider was originally issued. Eligibility for any Income Access Credits, the limitations and restrictions on Purchase Payments and withdrawals, the deduction of annual Charges and any future reset options available on and after the Reset Date, will again apply and will be measured from that Reset Date.

Subsequent Purchase Payments

If we receive additional Purchase Payments after the Rider Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the Purchase Payments. However, for purposes of this Rider, we reserve the right to restrict additional Purchase Payments that result in a total of all Purchase Payments received on or after the later of the first (1st) Contract Anniversary or most recent Reset Date to exceed $100,000 without our prior approval. This provision only applies if the Contract to which this Rider is attached, permits Purchase Payments after the first (1st) Contract Anniversary, measured from the Contract Date.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

If the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect and if the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, the surviving spouse may continue to take withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount under this Rider, until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero.

Termination

You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate on the earliest of:

  •  the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer invested according to an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for this Rider,
 
  •  the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of an Owner who is a Non-Natural Owner), was age 64 or younger when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later,
 
  •  the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant,
 
  •  the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract,
 
  •  the day we are notified of a change in ownership of the Contract if the Contract is Non-Qualified, or
 
  •  the Annuity Date.

The Rider will not terminate the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of an Owner who is a Non-Natural Owner) was age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later. In this case, the Rider will terminate the day of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant.

The Rider and the Contract will not terminate the day the Contract Value is zero and you begin taking pre-authorized withdrawals of 5% of the Protected Payment Base. In this case, the Rider and the Contract will terminate:

  •  the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of an Owner who is a Non-Natural Owner) was age 65 or older
 
46


Table of Contents


  when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, or
 
  •  the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of an Owner who is Non-Natural Owner), was age 64 or younger when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later.

If this Rider is terminated as a result of having any portion of the Contract Value no longer invested according to an asset allocation program established and maintained by us, you must wait until a Contract Anniversary that is at least one (1) year from the Effective Date of termination before this Rider may be purchased again (if available).

Sample Calculations

Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached APPENDIX B: LIFETIME INCOME ACCESS PLUS RIDER & INCOME ACCESS PLUS RIDER SAMPLE CALCULATIONS to this Prospectus. The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. The examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.

Income Access Plus Rider

Purchasing the Income Access Plus Rider

Subject to state availability, you may purchase the optional Income Access Plus Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary if:

  •  the age of each Annuitant is eighty five (85) years or younger on the date of purchase, and
 
  •  your entire Contract Value is invested in an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for this Rider during the entire period that the Rider is in effect.

On and after October 1, 2005, you may elect to exchange the Income Access Plus Rider for the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider (subject to state availability) on any Contract Anniversary. The initial Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance under the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider will be equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. If you elect an exchange, you will be subject to the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider charge in effect at the time of the exchange. You should consult with a qualified adviser for complete information and advice before making an exchange.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Income Access Plus Terms

  Annual RMD Amount – The amount required to be distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Internal Revenue Code Section 401(a)(9) (“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.
 
  Protected Payment Amount – The maximum amount that can be withdrawn each Contract Year under this Rider without reducing the Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Amount on any day after the Rider Effective Date is equal to the lesser of:

  •  5% of the Protected Payment Base as of that day, less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year, or
 
  •  the Remaining Protected Balance as of that day.

  Protected Payment Base – An amount used to determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged except as otherwise described under the provisions of this Rider.
 
  Remaining Protected Balance – The amount available for future withdrawals made under this Rider.
 
  Income Access Credit – An amount added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance. The Income Access Credit is referred to as Annual Credit in the Contract’s Rider.
 
  Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary beginning with the first (1st) Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, on which you elect to Reset the Remaining
 
47


Table of Contents


  Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value, determined as of that Contract Anniversary.
 
  Initial Values – The initial Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance amounts are equal to:

  •  Initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract Date, or
 
  •  Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.

  The initial Protected Payment Amount on the Rider Effective Date is equal to 5% of the initial Protected Payment Base.

How the Income Access Plus Rider Works

On any day, this Rider allows for withdrawals up to the Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance, until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0). This Rider also provides for an amount (an “Income Access Credit”) to be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance.

In addition, on any Contract Anniversary beginning with the first (1st) Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, you may elect to reset the Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary.

For purposes of this Rider, the term “withdrawal” includes any applicable withdrawal charges and charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes, if applicable. Amounts withdrawn under this Rider will reduce the Contract Value by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees, charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise made under the provisions of the Contract.

If your Contract is a Qualified Contract or a TSA/403(b) Contract, you are subject to restrictions on withdrawals you may take prior to a triggering event and you should consult your tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing an optional guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals and triggering events, see the FEDERAL TAX STATUS— Qualified Contracts section in the Prospectus.

Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount

While this Rider is in effect, you may withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount without reducing the Protected Payment Base, regardless of market performance, until the Remaining Protected Balance equals zero. Any portion of the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year.

If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged. The Remaining Protected Balance will decrease by the withdrawal amount immediately following the withdrawal.

If a withdrawal exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, we will adjust the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance immediately following the withdrawal, to the lesser of:

  •  the Contract Value immediately after the withdrawal, or
 
  •  the Remaining Protected Balance immediately prior to the withdrawal, less the withdrawal amount.

A withdrawal may not exceed the amount available for withdrawal under the Contract if such withdrawal would exceed the Protected Payment Amount.

If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount and reduces the Contract Value to zero, the following will apply:

  •  5% of the Protected Payment Base will be paid each year until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero. The payments will be made under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency, as elected by you, but no less frequently than annually,
 
  •  no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the Contract,
 
48


Table of Contents


  •  any Remaining Protected Balance will not be available for payment in a lump sum and may not be applied to provide payments under an Annuity Option, and
 
  •  the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.

If the Owner or sole surviving Annuitant dies and the Contract Value is zero as of the date of death, any Remaining Protected Balance will be paid to the Beneficiary under the series of pre-authorized withdrawals and payment frequency then in effect at the time of the Owner’s or sole surviving Annuitant’s death. If, however, the Remaining Protected Balance would be paid over a period that exceeds the life expectancy of the Beneficiary, the pre-authorized withdrawal amount will be adjusted so that the withdrawal payments will be paid over a period that does not exceed the Beneficiary’s life expectancy.

Required Minimum Distributions

On and after August 1, 2005, no adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a result of a withdrawal, if a withdrawal made under the Rider exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:

  •  such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at that time,
 
  •  you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,
 
  •  the Annual RMD Amount is based on the previous year-end Contract Value of this Contract only, and
 
  •  no withdrawals (other than RMD withdrawals) are made from the Contract during the Contract Year.

If the Contract Value is reduced to zero, RMD withdrawals will cease and any Remaining Protected Balance will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals in accordance with the terms of the Rider.

The Remaining Protected Balance will decrease by the amount of each RMD withdrawal immediately following the RMD withdrawal.

Income Access Credit

On each Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, an Income Access Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance, as of that Contract Anniversary, if:

  •  no withdrawals have occurred after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and
 
  •  that Contract Anniversary is prior to the sixth (6th) Contract Anniversary, measured from the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later.

The Income Access Credit is equal to 6% of the total of:

  •  the Remaining Protected Balance on the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, and
 
  •  the cumulative Purchase Payments received after the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later,

as of the Contract Anniversary on which the Income Access Credit is added.

Once a withdrawal has occurred, no Income Access Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary following the withdrawal, unless you elect to reset the Remaining Protected Balance.

Income Access Credits will not increase your cost basis and when distributed, may be recognizable as taxable ordinary income.

 
49


Table of Contents


Election to Reset Remaining Protected Balance

You may, on any Contract Anniversary beginning with the first (1st) Contract Anniversary, measured from the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, elect to reset the Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary.

The annual Charge percentage may change if you elect to reset the Remaining Protected Balance. However, the annual Charge percentage will never exceed the annual Charge percentage then in effect for new issues of this same Rider. If we are no longer issuing this Rider, any change in the annual Charge percentage will not result in an annual Charge percentage that exceeds the maximum annual Charge percentage (see CHARGES, FEES and DEDUCTIONS—Optional Rider Charges).

On each Reset Date and after any Income Access Credit is applied, we will set the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value as of the Reset Date.

The election to reset the Remaining Protected Balance must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within thirty (30) days after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset is effective. Your election to reset the Remaining Protected Balance may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance, Protected Payment Amount and Income Access Credit. We will provide you with written confirmation of your election.

On and after each Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall apply in the same manner as they applied when the Rider was originally issued. Eligibility for any Income Access Credits, the limitations and restrictions on Purchase Payments and withdrawals, the deduction of annual Charges and any future reset options available on and after the Reset Date, will again apply and will be measured from that Reset Date.

Subsequent Purchase Payments

If we receive additional Purchase Payments after the Rider Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the Purchase Payments. However, for purposes of this Rider, we reserve the right to restrict additional Purchase Payments that result in a total of all Purchase Payments received on or after the later of the first (1st) Contract Anniversary or most recent Reset Date to exceed $100,000 without our prior approval. This provision only applies if the Contract to which this Rider is attached, permits Purchase Payments after the first (1st) Contract Anniversary, measured from the Contract Date.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

If the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect and if the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, then the provisions of this Rider will continue, unless otherwise terminated.

Termination

You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate on the earliest of:

  •  the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer invested according to an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for this Rider,
 
  •  the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero,
 
  •  the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant, except as otherwise provided in the paragraph below,
 
  •  the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract, except as otherwise provided in the paragraph below, or
 
  •  the Annuity Date.

The Rider and the Contract will not terminate on the first death of an Owner or death of the sole surviving Annuitant, or the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract if, at the time of those events, the Contract Value is zero and we are making pre-authorized withdrawals of the Remaining

 
50


Table of Contents


Protected Balance under the provisions of the Rider. If we are making pre-authorized withdrawals, the Contract and the Rider will terminate on the Contract Anniversary immediately following the day the Remaining Protected Balance is zero.

If this Rider is terminated as a result of having any portion of the Contract Value no longer invested according to an asset allocation program established and maintained by us, you must wait until a Contract Anniversary that is at least one (1) year from the Effective Date of termination before this Rider may be purchased again (if available). In addition, you cannot switch from the Income Access Rider to the Income Access Plus Rider on the same Contract Anniversary. You must wait until a Contract Anniversary that is at least one (1) year from the Effective Date of termination of the Income Access Rider before the Income Access Plus Rider may be purchased.

Sample Calculations

Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached APPENDIX B: LIFETIME INCOME ACCESS PLUS RIDER & INCOME ACCESS PLUS RIDER SAMPLE CALCULATIONS to this Prospectus. The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. The examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.

Income Access Rider

Purchasing the Income Access Rider

Subject to state availability, you may purchase the optional Income Access Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary if:

  •  the age of each Annuitant is 85 years or younger on the date of purchase, and
 
  •  your entire Contract Value is invested in an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for this Rider during the entire period that the Rider is in effect.

On and after October 1, 2005, you may elect to exchange the Income Access Rider for the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider (subject to state availability) on any Contract Anniversary. The initial Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance under the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider will be equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. If you elect an exchange, you will be subject to the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider charge in effect at the time of the exchange. You should consult with a qualified adviser for complete information and advice before making an exchange.

Income Access Terms

  Annual RMD Amount – The amount required to be distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Internal Revenue Code Section 401(a)(9) (“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.
 
  Protected Payment Amount – The maximum amount that can be withdrawn each Contract Year under this Rider without reducing the Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Amount on any day after the Rider Effective Date is equal to the lesser of:

  •  7% of the Protected Payment Base as of that day, or
 
  •  the Remaining Protected Balance as of that day.

  Protected Payment Base – An amount used to determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged except as otherwise described under the provisions of this Rider.
 
  Remaining Protected Balance – The amount available for future withdrawals made under this Rider.
 
  Step-Up Date – Any Contract Anniversary beginning with the first (1st) Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, on which you elect to Reset the Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value, determined as of that Contract Anniversary.
 
51


Table of Contents


  Initial Values – The initial Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance amounts are equal to:

  •  Initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract Date, or
 
  •  Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.

  The initial Protected Payment Amount on the Rider Effective Date is equal to 7% of the initial Protected Payment Base.

Once these initial amounts are established, the Protected Payment Base and Protected Payment Amount will remain unchanged, provided no additional Purchase Payments are received after the Effective Date of the Rider, the total amount withdrawn each Contract Year does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount and the Remaining Protected Balance is greater than 7% of the Protected Payment Base at each Contract Anniversary.

How the Income Access Rider Works

This Rider allows for withdrawals up to the Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year, regardless of market performance, until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0).

The Income Access Rider also provides that if, on any Contract Anniversary beginning with the first (1st) anniversary of the Effective Date of the Income Access Rider, the Contract Value is greater than the Remaining Protected Balance, you may elect to Step-Up (increase) the Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value.

For purposes of this Rider, the term “withdrawal” includes any applicable withdrawal charges and charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes, if applicable. Amounts withdrawn under the Income Access Rider will reduce the Contract Value by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees, charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise made under the provisions of the Contract.

If your Contract is a Qualified Contract or a TSA/403(b) Contract, you are subject to restrictions on withdrawals you may take prior to a triggering event and you should consult your tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing an optional guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals and triggering events, see the FEDERAL TAX STATUS— Qualified Contracts section in the Prospectus.

Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount

While the Rider is in effect, you may make cumulative withdrawals up to the Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year without reducing the Protected Payment Base, regardless of market performance, until the Remaining Protected Balance equals zero. Any portion of the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year.

Under your Contract, you may withdraw more than the Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year. However, withdrawals of more than the Protected Payment Amount in a Contract Year will cause an immediate adjustment to the Remaining Protected Balance, the Protected Payment Base, and, at the next Contract Anniversary, the Protected Payment Amount.

If a withdrawal does not cause the total amount withdrawn during the Contract Year to exceed the Protected Payment Amount, the Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged. The Remaining Protected Balance will decrease by the withdrawal amount immediately following the withdrawal.

If a withdrawal causes the total amount withdrawn during the Contract Year to exceed the Protected Payment Amount, we will adjust the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance immediately following the withdrawal to the lesser of:

  •  the Contract Value immediately after the withdrawal, or
 
  •  the Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal, less the withdrawal amount.

The Protected Payment Amount will remain unchanged until the next Contract Anniversary, when the Protected Payment Amount for the new Contract Year is determined.

 
52


Table of Contents


A withdrawal may not exceed the amount available for withdrawal under the Contract, if such withdrawal would cause the cumulative withdrawals for that Contract Year to exceed the Protected Payment Amount and reduce the Contract Value to zero.

If, immediately after a withdrawal, the cumulative withdrawals for that Contract Year do not exceed the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value is reduced to zero, the following will apply:

  •  the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency, as elected by you, but no less frequently than annually, until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero,
 
  •  no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the Contract,
 
  •  any Remaining Protected Balance will not be available for payment in a lump sum or may not be applied to provide payments under an Annuity Option, and
 
  •  the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.

If the Owner or sole surviving Annuitant dies and the Contract Value is zero as of the date of death, any Remaining Protected Balance will be paid to the designated Beneficiary under the series of pre-authorized withdrawals and payment frequency then in effect at the time of the Owner’s or sole surviving Annuitant’s death. If, however, the Remaining Protected Balance would be paid over a period that exceeds the life expectancy of the Beneficiary, the pre-authorized withdrawal amount will be adjusted so that the withdrawal payments will be paid over a period that does not exceed the Beneficiary’s life expectancy.

Required Minimum Distributions

On and after August 1, 2005, no adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a result of a withdrawal, if a withdrawal made under the Rider exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:

  •  such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at that time,
 
  •  you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,
 
  •  the Annual RMD Amount is based on the previous year-end Contract Value of this Contract only, and
 
  •  no withdrawals (other than RMD withdrawals) are made from the Contract during the Contract Year.

If the Contract Value is reduced to zero, RMD withdrawals will cease and any Remaining Protected Balance will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals in accordance with the terms of the Rider.

The Remaining Protected Balance will decrease by the amount of each RMD withdrawal immediately following the RMD withdrawal.

Optional Step-Up in the Remaining Protected Balance

On any Contract Anniversary on and after August 1, 2005, you may elect to Step-Up the Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary.

The Income Access Charge may change if you elect a Step-Up, but will never exceed the Income Access Charge then being charged for this same benefit under newly issued riders. If you do not elect the optional Step-Up, the Income Access Charge on the Effective Date of the Rider will remain unchanged.

Your request for a Step-Up must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within thirty (30) days after the Contract Anniversary on which the Step-Up is effective.

On each Contract Anniversary that the Step-Up is elected, we will:

  (a)  reset the Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary,
 
  (b)  reset the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to the reset Remaining Protected Balance, and
 
53


Table of Contents


  (c)  reset the Protected Payment Amount to equal 7% of the reset Protected Payment Base.

Once a Step-Up has been elected and is in effect, another Step-Up may not be elected until the next Contract Anniversary. We will provide you with written confirmation of your Step-Up election.

Your election to Step-Up the Remaining Protected Balance may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base and Protected Payment Amount.

On and after each Step-Up, the provisions of this Rider shall apply in the same manner as they applied when the Rider was originally issued. The limitations and restrictions on Purchase Payments and withdrawals, the deduction of annual charges and any future Step-Up options available on and after the Step-Up Date, will again apply and will be measured from that Step-Up Date.

Subsequent Purchase Payments

If we receive any additional Purchase Payments to the Contract, we will immediately increase the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the Purchase Payment. However, the Protected Payment Amount will remain unchanged until the next Contract Anniversary, when the Protected Payment Amount for the new Contract Year is determined.

For purposes of the Income Access Rider, we reserve the right to restrict additional Purchase Payments. See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

If the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect and if the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, then the provisions of this Rider will continue, unless otherwise terminated.

Termination

You cannot request a termination of the Rider, but the Rider will automatically end on the earliest of:

  •  the Contract Anniversary immediately following the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer invested according to an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for this Rider,
 
  •  the Contract Anniversary immediately following the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero,
 
  •  the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant, except as otherwise provided in the paragraph below,
 
  •  the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract, except as otherwise provided in the paragraph below, or
 
  •  the Annuity Date.

The Rider will automatically end on the date of a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal is made under the Contract.

The Rider and the Contract will not terminate on the first death of an Owner or death of the sole surviving Annuitant, or the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract if, at the time of those events, the Contract Value is zero and we are making pre-authorized withdrawals of the Remaining Protected Balance under the provisions of the Rider. If we are making pre-authorized withdrawals, the Contract will terminate on the Contract Anniversary immediately following the day the Remaining Protected Balance is zero.

If this Rider is terminated as a result of having any portion of the Contract Value no longer invested according to an asset allocation program established and maintained by us, you must wait until a Contract Anniversary that is at least one (1) year from the Effective Date of termination before this Rider may be purchased again (if available). In addition, you cannot switch from the Income Access Plus Rider to the Income Access Rider on the same Contract Anniversary. You must wait until a Contract Anniversary that is at least one (1) year from the Effective Date of termination of the Income Access Plus Rider before the Income Access Rider may be purchased.

 
54


Table of Contents


Sample Calculations

Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached APPENDIX C: INCOME ACCESS RIDER SAMPLE CALCULATIONS to this Prospectus. The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. The examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.

Guaranteed Protection Advantage 5 (GPA 5) Rider

Purchasing the GPA 5 Rider

Subject to availability, you may purchase the optional GPA 5 Rider on the Contract Date or on any subsequent Contract Anniversary if:

  •  the age of each Annuitant is 85 years or younger on the date of purchase,
 
  •  the date of the purchase is at least 10 years before your selected Annuity Date, and
 
  •  you use an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for this Rider during the entire period that the Rider is in effect.

How the GPA 5 Rider Works

If you purchase the GPA 5 Rider within 60 days after the Contract Date or within 30 days after a Contract Anniversary, the Effective Date of the Rider will be that Contract Date or Anniversary. The Rider will remain in effect, unless otherwise terminated, for a 10-year period (the “Term”) beginning on the Effective Date of the Rider.

On the last day of the Term, we will add an additional amount to your Contract Value if, on that day, the Contract Value is less than a specified amount (the “Guaranteed Protection Amount”). The additional amount will be equal to the difference between the Contract Value on the last day of the Term and the Guaranteed Protection Amount. The additional amount added to the Contract Value will be considered earnings and allocated to your Investment Options according to the allocations used in your most recent asset allocation program.

The Guaranteed Protection Amount is equal to (a) plus (b) minus (c) as indicated below:

  (a)  is the Contract Value at the start of the Term,
 
  (b)  is the amount of each subsequent Purchase Payment received during the first year of the Term, and

  (c)  is a pro rata adjustment for withdrawals made from the Contract during the Term. The adjustment for each withdrawal is calculated by multiplying the Guaranteed Protection Amount prior to the withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal, including any applicable withdrawal charges, premium taxes, and/or other taxes, to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal.

For purposes of determining the Contract Value at the start of the Term, if the Effective Date of the Rider is the Contract Date, the Contract Value is equal to the initial Purchase Payment. If the Effective Date of the Rider is a Contract Anniversary, the Contract Value is equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. Any subsequent Purchase Payments received after the first year of the Term are not included in the Guaranteed Protection Amount. However, the Rider charge will be based on the Contract Value which may include any subsequent Purchase Payments that are not included in the Guaranteed Protection Amount.

If, on the last day of the Term, the Contract is annuitized, the first death of an Owner or the death of the last surviving Annuitant occurs, or a full withdrawal is made, the Contract Value will reflect any additional amount owed under the GPA 5 Rider before the payment of any annuity or death benefits, or full withdrawal. No additional amount will be made if the Contract Value on the last day of the Term is greater than or equal to the Guaranteed Protection Amount.

Optional Step-Up in the Guaranteed Protection Amount

On any Contract Anniversary beginning with the fifth (5th) anniversary of the Effective Date of this Rider and before the Annuity Date, you may elect to increase (“Step-Up”) your Guaranteed Protection Amount.

 
55


Table of Contents


If you elect the optional Step-Up, the following conditions will apply:

  •  your election of a Step-Up must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within 30 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the Step-Up is effective,
 
  •  the Guaranteed Protection Amount will be equal to your Contract Value as of the Effective Date of the Step-Up (“Step-Up Date”),
 
  •  a new 10-year Term will begin as of the Step-Up Date, and
 
  •  you may not elect another Step-Up until on or after the 5th anniversary of the latest Step-Up Date.

The Guaranteed Protection Charge (“GPA 5 Charge”) may change if you elect a Step-Up, but it will never be more than the GPA 5 Charge being charged under the then current terms and conditions of the Rider. If you do not elect any Step-Up of the Guaranteed Protection Amount during the lifetime of the Rider, your GPA 5 Charge will remain the same as it was on the Effective Date of the Rider.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

If the Owner dies during the Term and the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, then the provisions of the Rider will continue until the end of the Term.

Termination

The Rider will automatically terminate at the end of the Term, or, if earlier on:

  •  the Contract Anniversary immediately following the date any portion of the Contract Value is no longer invested in an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for the Rider,
 
  •  the Contract Anniversary immediately following the date we receive notification from the Owner to terminate the Rider,
 
  •  the date a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal is made under the Contract,
 
  •  the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the last surviving Annuitant,
 
  •  the date the Contract is terminated according to the provisions of the Contract, or
 
  •  the Annuity Date.

If your request to terminate the Rider is received at our Service Center within thirty (30) days after a Contract Anniversary, the Rider will terminate on that Contract Anniversary.

If the GPA 5 Rider is terminated, you must wait until a Contract Anniversary that is at least one (1) year from the Effective Date of the termination before the GPA 5 Rider may be purchased again (if available).

Guaranteed Protection Advantage (GPA) Rider

Purchasing the GPA Rider

The GPA Rider is only available if the original Effective Date of the Rider is before April 1, 2003.

Subject to availability, you may purchase the optional GPA Rider on the Contract Date or on any subsequent Contract Anniversary if:

  •  the age of each Annuitant is 80 years or younger on the date of purchase,
 
  •  the date of the purchase is at least 10 years before your selected Annuity Date, and
 
  •  you use an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for this Rider during the entire period that the Rider is in effect.
 
56


Table of Contents


How the GPA Rider Works

If you purchase the GPA Rider within 60 days after the Contract Date or within 30 days after a Contract Anniversary, the Effective Date of the Rider will be that Contract Date or Anniversary. The Rider will remain in effect, unless otherwise terminated, for a 10-year period (the “Term”) beginning on the Effective Date of the Rider.

On the last day of the Term, we will add an additional amount to your Contract Value if, on that day, the Contract Value is less than a specified amount (the “Guaranteed Protection Amount”). The additional amount will be equal to the difference between the Contract Value on the last day of the Term and the Guaranteed Protection Amount. The additional amount added to the Contract Value will be considered earnings and allocated to your Investment Options according to the allocations used in your most recent asset allocation program.

The Guaranteed Protection Amount is equal to (a) plus (b) minus (c) as indicated below:

  (a)  is the Contract Value at the start of the Term,
 
  (b)  is a percentage of each additional Purchase Payment, as determined from the table below, paid to the Contract during the Term,
         

 Number of Years Since Percentage of Purchase Payment
 Beginning of Term Added to Guaranteed Protection Amount

1 through 4
    100 %
5
    90 %
6
    85 %
7
    80 %
8 through 10
    75 %

  (c)  is a pro rata adjustment for withdrawals made from the Contract during the Term. The adjustment for each withdrawal is calculated by multiplying the Guaranteed Protection Amount prior to the withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal, including any applicable withdrawal charges, to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal.

For purposes of determining the Contract Value at the start of the Term, if the Effective Date of the Rider is the Contract Date, the Contract Value is equal to the initial Purchase Payment. If the Effective Date of the Rider is a Contract Anniversary, the Contract Value is equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary.

If, on the last day of the Term, the Contract is annuitized, the first death of an Owner or the death of the last surviving Annuitant occurs, or a full withdrawal is made, the Contract Value will reflect any additional amount owed under the GPA Rider before the payment of any annuity or death benefits, or full withdrawal.

No additional amount will be made if the Contract Value on the last day of the Term is greater than or equal to the Guaranteed Protection Amount.

On or before the end of the Term, you can elect to repurchase the Rider subject to its availability and the then current terms and conditions of the Rider provided:

  •  all Annuitant(s) are 80 years or younger at the start of the new Term, and
 
  •  the new Term does not extend beyond your selected Annuity Date.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

If the Owner dies during the Term and the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, then the provisions of this Rider will continue until the end of the Term. Subject to the terms of the Rider, the surviving spouse may repurchase the Rider for another Term at the then current terms and conditions of the Rider, provided the surviving spouse is age 80 or younger at the start of the new Term and the new Term does not extend beyond the selected Annuity Date. If the surviving spouse elects to not repurchase the Rider, it will automatically terminate the day immediately following the end of the Term.

 
57


Table of Contents


Termination

The GPA Rider will remain in effect until the earlier of:

  •  the end of a Term,
 
  •  the Contract Anniversary immediately following the date any portion of the Contract Value is no longer invested in an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for this Rider,
 
  •  the Contract Anniversary immediately following the date we receive notification from the Owner to terminate this Rider,
 
  •  the date a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal is made under the Contract,
 
  •  the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the last surviving Annuitant,
 
  •  the date the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract, or
 
  •  the Annuity Date.

Guaranteed Income Advantage Plus (GIA Plus) Rider

Purchasing the GIA Plus Rider

Subject to state availability, you may purchase the GIA Plus Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary.

You may purchase the GIA Plus Rider only if:

  •  the age of each Annuitant is eighty (80) years or younger on the date the Rider is purchased, and
 
  •  the entire Contract Value is invested according to an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for this Rider.

How the GIA Plus Rider Works

If you purchase the optional GIA Plus Rider, you may, prior to the Annuity Date, choose any of the Annuity Options described in your Contract, or you may choose the GIA Plus Annuity Option provided this Rider has been in effect for at least ten (10) years from its Effective Date. If you choose the GIA Plus Annuity Option, you must choose fixed annuity payments and the entire amount available for annuitization at the time you convert to the GIA Plus Annuity Option must be annuitized. The guaranteed income purchased per $1,000 of the net amount applied to the annuity payments will be based on an effective annual interest rate of 2.0% and the 1996 US Annuity 2000 Mortality Table with the age set back eight (8) years.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Annuity Payments – The annuity payments that may be elected under the GIA Plus Annuity Option are:

  •  Life Only,
 
  •  Life with 10 years or more Period Certain,
 
  •  Joint and Survivor Life, or
 
  •  20 years or more Period Certain.

The Rider contains annuity tables for each GIA Plus Annuity Option available.

On the Annuity Date, the Net Amount applied to the annuity payments under the GIA Plus Annuity Option will be equal to the greater of the Guaranteed Income Base on that day or the GIA Plus Step-Up Value on that day, less the following:

  •  applicable withdrawal charges resulting from the conversion to the GIA Plus Annuity Option,
 
  •  applicable annual charges for expenses related to other optional benefit riders attached to the Contract that are in effect as of the Annuity Date, and
 
  •  charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes.
 
58


Table of Contents


If you elect the GIA Plus Annuity Option, the waiver of withdrawal charges as described in the Contract will not apply. (See the CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS—Withdrawal Charge section in this Prospectus)

Initial Values – The Guaranteed Income Base, GIA Plus Withdrawal Base, GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount and GIA Plus Step-Up Value are values used in determining the Net Amount applied on the Annuity Date to provide payments under the GIA Plus Annuity Option.

The initial values are determined on the Rider Effective Date as follows:

  •  if this Rider is effective on the Contract Date, the Guaranteed Income Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment.
 
  •  if this Rider is effective on a Contract Anniversary, the Guaranteed Income Base is equal to the Contract Value on that day.
 
  •  if this Rider is effective on the Contract Date, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base is equal to the total Purchase Payments received in the first 60 days since the Rider Effective Date.
 
  •  if this Rider is effective on a Contract Anniversary, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base is equal to the Contract Value on that day plus any Purchase Payments received in the first 60 days since the Rider Effective Date.
 
  •  the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for the Contract Year beginning on the Rider Effective Date is equal to 5% of the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base.
 
  •  the GIA Plus Step-Up Value is equal to the Contract Value on the Rider Effective Date.

The GIA Plus Withdrawal Base and GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount after the Rider Effective Date are recalculated only on each subsequent Contract Anniversary.

Subsequent Values – The Guaranteed Income Base, GIA Plus Withdrawal Base, GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount and GIA Plus Step-Up Value after the Rider Effective Date are determined as follows:

Limitation on Subsequent Purchase Payments – For purposes of this Rider, we reserve the right to restrict additional Purchase Payments that result in a total of all Purchase Payments received on or after the first (1st) Contract Anniversary from the Effective Date of the Rider to exceed $100,000 without our prior approval. This provision only applies if the Contract to which this Rider is attached, permits Purchase Payments after the first (1st) Contract Anniversary, measured from the Contract Date.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Guaranteed Income Base – On any day after the Rider Effective Date, the Guaranteed Income Base is equal to:

  •  the Guaranteed Income Base on the prior day, multiplied by a daily factor of 1.000133680 which is equivalent to increasing the Guaranteed Income Base at an annual growth rate of 5%, plus
 
  •  Purchase Payments received by us on that day, less
 
  •  adjustments for withdrawals made on that day.

The adjustment for each withdrawal is calculated by multiplying the Guaranteed Income Base immediately prior to the withdrawal by the percentage decrease in Contract Value as a result of the withdrawal.

However, on each Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date, if there is at least one withdrawal during the prior Contract Year and the cumulative withdrawals for that Contract Year do not exceed the sum of:

  •  the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for that Contract Year, and
 
  •  any remaining dollar amount of the prior Contract Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount,

the Guaranteed Income Base as of that Contract Anniversary will be reset to equal:

  •  the Guaranteed Income Base on the Rider Effective Date or prior Contract Anniversary, whichever is later, increased at an annual growth rate of 5%, plus
 
  •  the amount of any subsequent Purchase Payments received by us during the prior Contract Year, each increased at an annual growth rate of 5% from the effective date of that Purchase Payment, less
 
59


Table of Contents


  •  the amount of cumulative withdrawals during the prior Contract Year.

The 5% annual growth rate will stop accruing as of the earlier of:

  •  the Contract Anniversary prior to the youngest Annuitant’s 81st birthday, or
 
  •  the day this Rider terminates.

GIA Plus Withdrawal Base – On each Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base is equal to:

  •  the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base determined on the Rider Effective Date, plus
 
  •  the amount of any subsequent Purchase Payments received by us after the Rider Effective Date, up through the day immediately prior to that Contract Anniversary.

GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount – On each Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for the Contract Year beginning on that Contract Anniversary is equal to 5% of the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base as of that Contract Anniversary.

GIA Plus Step-Up Value – On any day after the Rider Effective Date, the GIA Plus Step-Up Value is equal to:

  •  the GIA Plus Step-Up Value as of the prior day, plus
 
  •  Purchase Payments received by us on that day, less
 
  •  adjustment for withdrawals made on that day.

The adjustment for each withdrawal is calculated by multiplying the GIA Plus Step-Up Value immediately prior to the withdrawal by the percentage decrease in Contract Value as a result of that withdrawal.

On any Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date and prior to the youngest Annuitant’s 81st birthday, the GIA Plus Step-Up Value is set equal to the greater of:

  •  the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary, or
 
  •  the GIA Plus Step-Up Value immediately prior to that Contract Anniversary.

The GIA Plus Step-Up Value will then be adjusted for any Purchase Payments or withdrawals on that Contract Anniversary in accordance with the first paragraph of this subsection.

The GIA Plus Step-Up Value on each Contract Anniversary on and after the youngest Annuitant’s 81st birthday is equal to the GIA Plus Step-Up Value immediately prior to the Contract Anniversary preceding that 81st birthday, adjusted for any Purchase Payments and withdrawals since that anniversary.

Partial Conversion of Net Contract Value for Annuity Payments – If a portion of the Net Contract Value (Contract Value less Contract Debt) is converted to provide payments under an Annuity Option described in the Contract at any time before you annuitize under the GIA Plus Annuity Option, the amount converted will be considered a “withdrawal” for purposes of determining withdrawal adjustments to the Guaranteed Income Base and GIA Plus Step-Up Value. A withdrawal charge may also apply.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

If the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect and if the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, then the provisions of this Rider will continue, unless otherwise terminated.

Termination

Except as otherwise provided below, the GIA Plus Rider will remain in effect until the earlier of:

  •  the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer invested according to an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for the Rider,
 
  •  the day we receive notification from you to terminate the Rider,
 
  •  the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant,
 
60


Table of Contents


  •  the date the Contract is terminated in accordance with the terms of the Contract, or
 
  •  the Annuity Date.

Upon your request, the GIA Plus Rider may be terminated at any time. If your request to terminate the GIA Plus Rider is received at our Service Center within thirty (30) days after a Contract Anniversary, the GIA Plus Rider will terminate on that Contract Anniversary. If your request to terminate the GIA Plus Rider is received at our Service Center more than thirty (30) days after a Contract Anniversary, the GIA Plus Rider will terminate the day we receive the request.

If the GIA Plus Rider is terminated, you must wait until a Contract Anniversary that is at least one (1) year from the Effective Date of the termination before the GIA Plus Rider may be purchased again (if available). In addition, you cannot switch from the GIA, GIA 5 or GIA II Riders to the GIA Plus Rider on the same Contract Anniversary. You must wait one (1) year from the Effective Date of termination of the GIA, GIA 5 or GIA II Riders before the GIA Plus Rider may be purchased.

Sample Calculations

Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached APPENDIX D: GUARANTEED INCOME ADVANTAGE PLUS RIDER SAMPLE CALCULATIONS to this Prospectus. The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. They are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.

Guaranteed Income Advantage 5 (GIA 5) Rider

Purchasing the GIA 5 Rider

The GIA 5 Rider is only available for purchase until the GIA Plus Rider is available in your state.

Subject to availability, you may purchase the GIA 5 Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary. You may purchase the GIA 5 Rider only if:

  •  the age of each Annuitant is 80 years or younger on the date the Rider is purchased,
 
  •  the date of purchase is at least 10 years before your selected Annuity Date, and
 
  •  the entire Contract Value is invested according to an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for this Rider.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

How the GIA 5 Rider Works

If you purchase the optional GIA 5 Rider (subject to state availability), you may choose any of the Annuity Options described in your Contract, or you may choose the GIA 5 Annuity Option provided this Rider has been in effect for at least 10 years from the later of its Effective Date or the most recent Step-Up Date. You must choose fixed annuity payments under this GIA 5 Annuity Option. The guaranteed income purchased per $1,000 of the net amount applied to the annuity payments will be based on an annual interest rate of 2.5% and the 1983a Annuity Mortality Table with the age set back 10 years. The net amount applied to the annuity payments under the GIA 5 Annuity Option will be based on the Net Guaranteed Income Base, which is described below.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Net Guaranteed Income Base – The amount applied on the Annuity Date as a single premium to provide annuity payments under the GIA 5 Annuity Option. The Net Guaranteed Income Base is equal to:

  •  the Guaranteed Income Base as of the Annuity Date, less
 
  •  any applicable withdrawal charge resulting from the conversion to the GIA 5 Annuity Option, less
 
  •  any Contract Debt, and less
 
  •  any charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes.
 
61


Table of Contents


Guaranteed Income Base – If you purchase the GIA 5 Rider on the Contract Date, the Guaranteed Income Base is initially set on the Effective Date of the Rider. If the Rider is effective on the Contract Date, the Guaranteed Income Base is equal to the Initial Purchase Payment. If the Rider is effective on a Contract Anniversary, the Guaranteed Income Base is equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. The Guaranteed Income Base on any Business Day after the Effective Date is the Guaranteed Income Base on the prior Business Day, increased by any additions on that day as a result of any:

  •  Purchase Payments received by us, plus
 
  •  increases at an annual growth rate of 5%, plus
 
  •  additional amounts as a result of a Step-Up in the Guaranteed Income Base

and decreased by any deductions on that day as a result of any:

  •  adjustments for withdrawals.

The adjustment for each withdrawal is calculated by multiplying the Guaranteed Income Base prior to the withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal, including any applicable withdrawal charge, to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal.

Any portion of the Net Contract Value converted to provide payments under an Annuity Option, as described in the Contract, will be considered a “withdrawal” for purposes of determining any adjustment to the Guaranteed Income Base.

The 5% annual growth rate will take into account the timing of when each Purchase Payment and withdrawal occurred. This is accomplished by applying a daily factor of 1.000133681 to each day’s Guaranteed Income Base balance. The 5% annual growth rate will stop accruing as of the earlier of:

  •  the Contract Anniversary following the day the youngest Annuitant reaches his or her 80th birthday, or
 
  •  the day the GIA 5 Rider terminates.

Election of Step-Up – On any Contract Anniversary beginning with the fifth (5th) anniversary of the Effective Date of this Rider and before the Annuity Date, you may elect to increase the Guaranteed Income Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value as of the Step-Up Date.

The Guaranteed Income Advantage Charge (“GIA 5 Charge”) may change if you elect a Step-Up in the Guaranteed Income Base. However, the GIA 5 Charge will never exceed the GIA 5 Charge then being offered for this same benefit under newly issued riders and will not be more than a maximum charge of 0.75%. If the Guaranteed Income Base is never stepped-up, the GIA 5 Charge established on the Effective Date of this Rider is guaranteed not to change.

Your Step-Up election must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within thirty (30) days after the Contract Anniversary on which the Step-Up is effective.

Once a Step-Up has been elected and is in effect, another Step-Up may not be elected until on or after the fifth (5th) anniversary of the latest Step-Up Date. We will provide you with written confirmation of your Step-Up election.

Guaranteed Income Advantage 5 (GIA 5) Annuity Option

The annuity payments that may be elected under the GIA 5 Annuity Option are:

  •  Life Only,
 
  •  Life with 10 years or more Period Certain,
 
  •  Joint and Survivor Life, or
 
  •  15 years or more Period Certain.

If you elect the GIA 5 Annuity Option, the waiver of withdrawal charges as described in the Contract will not apply. We will reduce the net amount applied to the annuity payments under the GIA 5 Annuity Option by any remaining withdrawal charges. The Rider contains annuity tables for each GIA 5 Annuity Option available.

 
62


Table of Contents


Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

If the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect and if the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, then the provisions of this Rider will continue, unless otherwise terminated.

Termination

The GIA 5 Rider will remain in effect until the earlier of:

  •  the Contract Anniversary immediately following the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer invested according to an asset allocation program established and maintained by us for the GIA 5 Rider,
 
  •  the Contract Anniversary immediately following the day we receive notification from you to terminate the GIA 5 Rider,
 
  •  the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant,
 
  •  the date the Contract is terminated in accordance with the terms of the Contract, or
 
  •  the Annuity Date.

If your request to terminate the Rider is received at our Service Center within thirty (30) days after a Contract Anniversary, the Rider will terminate on that Contract Anniversary.

Guaranteed Income Advantage II (GIA II) Rider

Purchasing the GIA II Rider

The GIA II Rider is only available for purchase until the GIA Plus Rider is available in your state.

Subject to availability, you may purchase the GIA II Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary. You may purchase the GIA II Rider only if:

  •  the age of each Annuitant is 80 years or younger on the date the Rider is purchased, and
 
  •  the date of purchase is at least 10 years before your selected Annuity Date.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

How the GIA II Rider Works

If you purchase the optional GIA II Rider (subject to state availability), you may choose any of the Annuity Options described in your Contract, or you may choose the GIA II Annuity Option provided this Rider has been in effect for at least ten (10) years from the later of its Effective Date or the most recent Step-Up Date. You must choose fixed annuity payments under this GIA II Annuity Option. The guaranteed income purchased per $1,000 of the net amount applied to the annuity payments will be based on an annual interest rate of 2.5% and the 1983a Annuity Mortality Table with the age set back 10 years. The net amount applied to the annuity payments under the GIA II Annuity Option will be based on the Net Guaranteed Income Base, which is described below. The Rider contains annuity tables for each GIA II Annuity Option available.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Net Guaranteed Income Base – The amount applied on the Annuity Date as a single premium to provide annuity payments under the GIA II Annuity Option. The Net Guaranteed Income Base is equal to:

  •  the Guaranteed Income Base as of the Annuity Date, less
 
  •  any applicable withdrawal charge resulting from the conversion to the GIA II Annuity Option, less
 
  •  any Contract Debt, and less
 
  •  any charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes.

Guaranteed Income Base – If you purchase the GIA II Rider, the Guaranteed Income Base is initially set on the Effective Date of the Rider. If the Rider is effective on the Contract Date, the Guaranteed Income Base is equal to

 
63


Table of Contents


the initial Purchase Payment. If the Rider is effective on a Contract Anniversary, the Guaranteed Income Base is equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. The Guaranteed Income Base on any Business Day after the Effective Date is the Guaranteed Income Base on the prior Business Day, increased by any additions on that day as a result of any:

  •  Purchase Payments received by us, plus
 
  •  increases at an annual growth rate of 5%, plus
 
  •  additional amounts as a result of a Step-Up in the Guaranteed Income Base

and decreased by any deductions on that day as a result of any:

  •  adjustments for withdrawals.

The adjustment for each withdrawal is calculated by multiplying the Guaranteed Income Base prior to the withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal, including any applicable withdrawal charge, to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal.

Any portion of the Net Contract Value converted to provide payments under an Annuity Option, as described in the Contract, will be considered a “withdrawal” for purposes of determining any adjustment to the Guaranteed Income Base.

The 5% annual growth rate will take into account the timing of when each Purchase Payment and withdrawal occurred. This is accomplished by applying a daily factor of 1.000133681 to each day’s Guaranteed Income Base balance.

The 5% annual growth rate will stop accruing as of the earlier of:

  •  the Contract Anniversary following the day the youngest Annuitant reaches his or her 80th birthday, or
 
  •  the day the GIA II Rider terminates.

Election of Step-Up – On any Contract Anniversary beginning with the fifth (5th) anniversary of the Effective Date of this Rider and before the Annuity Date, you may elect to increase the Guaranteed Income Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value as of the Step-Up Date.

The Guaranteed Income Advantage Charge (“GIA II Charge”) may change if you elect a Step-Up in the Guaranteed Income Base. However, the GIA II Charge will never exceed the GIA II Charge then being offered for this same benefit under newly issued riders and will not be more than a maximum charge of 1.00%. If the Guaranteed Income Base is never stepped-up, the GIA II Charge established on the Effective Date of this Rider is guaranteed not to change.

Your Step-Up election must be received, in a form satisfactory to us, at our Service Center within thirty (30) days after the Contract Anniversary on which the Step-Up is effective.

Once a Step-Up has been elected and is in effect, another Step-Up may not be elected until on or after the fifth (5th) anniversary of the latest Step-Up Date. We will provide you with written confirmation of your Step-Up election.

Guaranteed Income Advantage II (GIA II) Annuity Option

The annuity payments that may be elected under the GIA II Annuity Option are:

  •  Life Only,
 
  •  Life with 10 years or more Period Certain,
 
  •  Joint and Survivor Life, or
 
  •  15 years or more Period Certain.

If you elect the GIA II Annuity Option, the waiver of withdrawal charges as described in the Contract will not apply. We will reduce the net amount applied to the annuity payments under the GIA II Annuity Option by any remaining withdrawal charges. The Rider contains annuity tables for each GIA II Annuity Option available.

 
64


Table of Contents


Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

If the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect and if the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, then the provisions of this Rider will continue, unless otherwise terminated.

Termination

The GIA II Rider will remain in effect until the earlier of:

  •  the Contract Anniversary immediately following the day we receive notification from you to terminate the Rider,
 
  •  the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant,
 
  •  the date the Contract is terminated in accordance with the terms of the Contract, or
 
  •  the Annuity Date.

If your request to terminate the Rider is received at our Service Center within thirty (30) days after a Contract Anniversary, the Rider will terminate on that Contract Anniversary.

Guaranteed Income Advantage (GIA) Rider

Purchasing the GIA Rider

The GIA Rider is only available for purchase until the date the GIA Plus Rider is available in your state. Subject to availability, you may purchase the GIA Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary. You may purchase the GIA Rider only if:

  •  the age of each Annuitant is 80 years or younger on the date the Rider is purchased, and
 
  •  the date of purchase is at least 10 years before your selected Annuity Date.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

How the GIA Rider Works

If you purchase the GIA Rider (subject to state availability), you may choose any of the Annuity Options described in your Contract, or you may choose the GIA Annuity Option if 10 years have passed since the GIA Rider was purchased and the GIA Rider is still in effect. You must choose fixed annuity payments under this GIA Annuity Option. The GIA Rider is only available for purchase until the date the GIA Plus Rider becomes available in your state.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

The guaranteed income purchased per $1,000 of the net amount applied to the annuity payments will be based on an annual interest rate of 2.5% and the 1983a Annuity Mortality Table with the age set back 10 years. The net amount applied to the annuity payments under the GIA Annuity Option will be based on the higher of the Guaranteed Income Base or the Enhanced Income Base, which are described below.

  1.  Guaranteed Income Base – If you purchase the GIA Rider on the Contract Date, the Guaranteed Income Base is equal to the Purchase Payments less an adjustment for each withdrawal, increased at a 5% effective annual rate of interest. We calculate the adjustment for each withdrawal by multiplying the Guaranteed Income Base prior to a withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal, including applicable withdrawal charges, to the Contract Value immediately prior to withdrawal.

  If you purchase the GIA Rider on a Contract Anniversary after the Contract Date, the Guaranteed Income Base is equal to the Contract Value on the date the GIA Rider is purchased, plus all Purchase Payments made after the GIA Rider is purchased, less an adjustment for each withdrawal occurring after the GIA was purchased, increased at a 5% effective annual rate of interest. We calculate the adjustment for each withdrawal by multiplying the Guaranteed Income Base prior to the withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal, including applicable withdrawal charges, to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal.
 
65


Table of Contents


  The effective annual rate of interest will take into account the timing of when each Purchase Payment and withdrawal occurred. We accomplish this by applying a daily factor of 1.000133681 to each day’s Guaranteed Income Base balance. The 5% effective annual rate of interest will stop accruing as of the earlier of:

  •  the Contract Anniversary following the date the youngest Annuitant reaches his or her 80th birthday,
 
  •  a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal under the Contract,
 
  •  the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant,
 
  •  any termination of the Contract in accordance with the provisions of the Contract,
 
  •  the Annuity Date, or
 
  •  termination of the GIA Rider.

  On the Annuity Date and if the GIA Rider has not terminated, the net amount we apply to the annuity payments will be the Guaranteed Income Base reduced by any remaining withdrawal charges associated with additional Purchase Payments added to the Contract, any applicable state premium tax, and any outstanding Contract Debt.

  2.  Enhanced Income Base – The Enhanced Income Base is equal to your Net Contract Value on the Annuity Date plus an additional 15% of the amount equal to:

  •  the Net Contract Value on the Annuity Date, less
 
  •  the sum of all Purchase Payments applied to the Contract in the 12 months prior to the Annuity Date.

  On the Annuity Date, the net amount we apply to the annuity payments will be the Enhanced Income Base reduced by any withdrawal charges associated with additional Purchase Payments added to the Contract and any applicable state premium tax.

Guaranteed Income Advantage (GIA) Annuity Option

The annuity payments that may be elected under the GIA Annuity Option are:

  •  Life Only,
 
  •  Life with 10 years or more Period Certain,
 
  •  Joint and Survivor Life, or
 
  •  15 years or more Period Certain.

If you elect the GIA Annuity Option, the waiver of withdrawal charges as described in the Contract will not apply. We will reduce the net amount applied to the annuity payments under the GIA Annuity Option by any remaining withdrawal charges. The Rider contains annuity tables for each GIA Annuity Option available.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

If the Owner dies while the Rider is in effect and if the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, then the provisions of this Rider will continue, unless otherwise terminated.

Termination

The GIA Rider will remain in effect until the earlier of:

  •  the date a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal under the Contract,
 
  •  the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant,
 
  •  the date the Contract is terminated in accordance with the terms of the Contract,
 
66


Table of Contents


  •  the Annuity Date, or
 
  •  termination of the GIA Rider.

You may terminate the GIA Rider on the fifth Contract Anniversary or on any later Contract Anniversary.

If your request to terminate the Rider is received at our Service Center within 30 days after a Contract Anniversary, the Rider will terminate on that Contract Anniversary.

PACIFIC LIFE AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT

Pacific Life

Pacific Life Insurance Company is a life insurance company based in California. Along with our subsidiaries and affiliates, our operations include life insurance, annuity, pension and institutional products, mutual funds, broker-dealer operations, and investment advisory services. At the end of 2005, we had $183.5 billion of individual life insurance in force and total admitted assets of approximately $74.9 billion.

We are authorized to conduct our life insurance and annuity business in the District of Columbia and in all states except New York. Our executive office is located at 700 Newport Center Drive, Newport Beach, California 92660.

We were originally organized on January 2, 1868, under the name “Pacific Mutual Life Insurance Company of California” and reincorporated as “Pacific Mutual Life Insurance Company” on July 22, 1936. On September 1, 1997, we converted from a mutual life insurance company to a stock life insurance company ultimately controlled by a mutual holding company and were authorized by California regulatory authorities to change our name to Pacific Life Insurance Company. On September 1, 2005, Pacific Life changed from a California corporation to a Nebraska corporation. Pacific Life is a subsidiary of Pacific LifeCorp, a holding company, which, in turn, is a subsidiary of Pacific Mutual Holding Company, a mutual holding company. Under their respective charters, Pacific Mutual Holding Company must always hold at least 51% of the outstanding voting stock of Pacific LifeCorp, and Pacific LifeCorp must always own 100% of the voting stock of Pacific Life. Owners of Pacific Life’s annuity contracts and life insurance policies have certain membership interests in Pacific Mutual Holding Company, consisting principally of the right to vote on the election of the Board of Directors of the mutual holding company and on other matters, and certain rights upon liquidation or dissolutions of the mutual holding company.

Our subsidiary, Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (PSD) serves as the principal underwriter (distributor) for the Contracts. PSD is located at 700 Newport Center Drive, Newport Beach, California 92660. We and PSD enter into selling agreements with broker-dealers, whose registered representatives are authorized by state insurance departments to sell the Contracts.

We may provide you with reports of our ratings both as an insurance company and as to our claims-paying ability with respect to our General Account assets.

Separate Account A

Separate Account A was established on September 7, 1994 as a separate account of ours, and is registered with the SEC under the Investment Company Act of 1940 (the “1940 Act”), as a type of investment company called a “unit investment trust.” We established the separate account under the laws of the state of California. The separate account is maintained under the laws of the state of Nebraska.

Obligations arising under your Contract are our general corporate obligations. We are also the legal owner of the assets in the Separate Account. Assets of the Separate Account attributed to the reserves and other liabilities under the Contract and other contracts issued by us that are supported by the Separate Account may not be charged with liabilities arising from any of our other business; any income, gain or loss (whether or not realized) from the assets of the Separate Account are credited to or charged against the Separate Account without regard to our other income, gain or loss.

We may invest money in the Separate Account in order to commence its operations and for other purposes, but not to support contracts other than variable annuity contracts. A portion of the Separate Account’s assets may include accumulations of charges we make against the Separate Account and investment results of assets so accumulated. These additional assets are ours and we may transfer them to our General Account at any time; however, before making any such transfer, we will consider any possible adverse impact the transfer might have on

 
67


Table of Contents


the Separate Account. Subject to applicable law, we reserve the right to transfer our assets in the Separate Account to our General Account.

The Separate Account is not the sole investor in the Fund. Investment in the Fund by other separate accounts in connection with variable annuity and variable life insurance contracts may create conflicts. See the accompanying Prospectus and the SAI for the Fund for more information.

 
68


Table of Contents


FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS

The table below is designed to help you understand how the Variable Investment Options have performed. It shows the value of a Subaccount Unit at the beginning and end of each period, as well as the number of Subaccount Units at the end of each period. A Subaccount Unit is also called an Accumulation Unit.

The information in the table for each of the five years in the period ended December 31, 2005 has been audited by Deloitte & Touche LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm. You should read the table in conjunction with the financial statements for Separate Account A, which are included in its annual report dated as of December 31, 2005.

                                                                         
With Stepped-Up
With Standard Death Benefit Death Benefit Rider With Premier Death Benefit Rider



Number of Number of Number of
Subaccount Subaccount Subaccount
AUV at AUV Units AUV at AUV Units AUV at AUV Units
Beginning at End Outstanding Beginning at End Outstanding Beginning at End Outstanding
of Year of Year at End of Year of Year of Year at End of Year of Year of Year at End of Year

International Value1
                                                                       
2005
    $11.01       $11.86       23,225,074       $10.93       $11.74       9,293,731       $10.87       $11.66       2,134,923  
2004
    $9.62       $11.01       24,459,524       $9.56       $10.93       9,374,678       $9.53       $10.87       3,291,061  
2003
    $7.66       $9.62       16,233,519       $7.63       $9.56       6,370,903       $7.61       $9.53       3,655,738  
2002
    $9.04       $7.66       7,111,510       $9.03       $7.63       2,574,027       $9.02       $7.61       2,461,826  
2001
    $10.00       $9.04       2,504,993       $10.00       $9.03       834,945       $10.00       $9.02       851,203  

Diversified Research2
                                                                       
2005
    $11.24       $11.64       15,960,429       $11.16       $11.53       6,701,215       $11.09       $11.44       2,053,247  
2004
    $10.28       $11.24       6,015,531       $10.22       $11.16       2,814,536       $10.18       $11.09       1,595,171  
2003
    $7.88       $10.28       3,829,014       $7.85       $10.22       1,945,268       $7.83       $10.18       1,511,183  
2002
    $10.56       $7.88       2,648,078       $10.55       $7.85       1,400,498       $10.54       $7.83       1,389,542  
2001
    $10.00       $10.56       1,497,959       $10.00       $10.55       689,111       $10.00       $10.54       496,758  

Equity3
                                                                       
2005
    $9.31       $9.75       667,892       $9.24       $9.66       478,846       $9.19       $9.59       374,564  
2004
    $9.00       $9.31       797,084       $8.95       $9.24       408,775       $8.91       $9.19       455,566  
2003
    $7.36       $9.00       965,248       $7.33       $8.95       455,200       $7.31       $8.91       642,882  
2002
    $10.18       $7.36       1,105,041       $10.16       $7.33       470,399       $10.15       $7.31       529,832  
2001
    $10.00       $10.18       954,219       $10.00       $10.16       442,282       $10.00       $10.15       388,844  

American Funds® Growth-Income4                                                                
05/2005 – 12/2005
    $10.00       $10.87       14,198,100       $10.12       $10.85       5,521,729       $10.09       $10.84       912,742  

American Funds® Growth 4
                                                                       
05/2005 – 12/2005
    $10.00       $11.84       18,531,682       $10.12       $11.82       6,983,924       $10.15       $11.81       1,075,239  

Technology2
                                                                       
2005
    $7.38       $8.84       2,462,891       $7.33       $8.76       1,309,540       $7.29       $8.70       524,103  
2004
    $7.24       $7.38       2,297,364       $7.20       $7.33       1,155,537       $7.17       $7.29       621,340  
2003
    $5.16       $7.24       3,014,428       $5.15       $7.20       1,073,167       $5.13       $7.17       818,208  
2002
    $9.78       $5.16       1,487,105       $9.77       $5.15       604,395       $9.76       $5.13       515,237  
2001
    $10.00       $9.78       625,538       $10.00       $9.77       374,247       $10.00       $9.76       345,460  

Short Duration Bond5
                                                                       
2005
    $9.94       $9.93       29,394,674       $9.91       $9.88       10,768,218       $9.88       $9.84       2,244,758  
2004
    $9.99       $9.94       24,698,124       $9.97       $9.91       8,977,631       $9.96       $9.88       2,971,880  
2003
    $10.00       $9.99       14,384,887       $10.00       $9.97       5,126,474       $10.00       $9.96       2,854,347  

Concentrated Growth6
                                                                       
2005
    $8.72       $8.78       475,183       $8.65       $8.69       98,251       $8.60       $8.63       99,827  
2004
    $7.87       $8.72       634,175       $7.82       $8.65       183,373       $7.79       $8.60       128,119  
2003
    $5.58       $7.87       817,235       $5.57       $7.82       204,142       $5.55       $7.79       202,435  
2002
    $9.25       $5.58       430,240       $9.24       $5.57       86,367       $9.23       $5.55       133,469  
2001
    $10.00       $9.25       177,211       $10.00       $9.24       59,175       $10.00       $9.23       61,145  

Growth LT1
                                                                       
2005
    $9.44       $10.00       12,786,820       $9.37       $9.91       5,421,771       $9.32       $9.84       1,673,304  
2004
    $8.70       $9.44       15,342,087       $8.65       $9.37       5,738,539       $8.61       $9.32       2,603,422  
2003
    $6.60       $8.70       11,422,554       $6.58       $8.65       4,362,063       $6.56       $8.61       2,811,147  
2002
    $9.44       $6.60       8,308,946       $9.43       $6.58       3,060,290       $9.42       $6.56       2,887,113  
2001
    $10.00       $9.44       3,483,870       $10.00       $9.43       1,294,812       $10.00       $9.42       1,275,421  

Focused 301
                                                                       
2005
    $12.23       $14.68       1,426,661       $12.13       $14.54       591,502       $12.07       $14.44       186,618  
2004
    $10.82       $12.23       1,112,729       $10.76       $12.13       295,421       $10.72       $12.07       218,935  
2003
    $7.73       $10.82       820,810       $7.71       $10.76       285,259       $7.69       $10.72       260,196  
2002
    $11.14       $7.73       559,816       $11.12       $7.71       220,187       $11.11       $7.69       211,042  
2001
    $10.00       $11.14       384,534       $10.00       $11.12       133,218       $10.00       $11.11       151,411  

 
69


Table of Contents


                                                                         
With Stepped-Up
With Standard Death Benefit Death Benefit Rider With Premier Death Benefit Rider



Number of Number of Number of
Subaccount Subaccount Subaccount
AUV at AUV Units AUV at AUV Units AUV at AUV Units
Beginning at End Outstanding Beginning at End Outstanding Beginning at End Outstanding
of Year of Year at End of Year of Year of Year at End of Year of Year of Year at End of Year

Health Sciences 6
                                                                       
2005
    $11.45       $12.99       1,613,960       $11.37       $12.87       1,009,200       $11.30       $12.77       429,951  
2004
    $10.83       $11.45       1,828,388       $10.77       $11.37       791,475       $10.72       $11.30       508,555  
2003
    $8.61       $10.83       1,742,267       $8.58       $10.77       828,543       $8.56       $10.72       705,383  
2002
    $11.42       $8.61       1,403,390       $11.40       $8.58       608,030       $11.39       $8.56       713,719  
2001
    $10.00       $11.42       928,216       $10.00       $11.40       384,333       $10.00       $11.39       566,124  

Mid-Cap Value6
                                                                       
2005
    $15.18       $16.25       29,032,393       $15.07       $16.10       11,739,864       $14.98       $15.99       2.932,182  
2004
    $12.34       $15.18       14,663,864       $12.27       $15.07       5,918,325       $12.22       $14.98       2,623,177  
2003
    $9.71       $12.34       10,139,353       $9.68       $12.27       4,442,833       $9.66       $12.22       2,890,203  
2002
    $11.55       $9.71       6,005,013       $11.53       $9.68       2,748,866       $11.52       $9.66       2,389,821  
2001
    $10.00       $11.55       3,095,066       $10.00       $11.53       1,301,503       $10.00       $11.52       1,186,018  

Large-Cap Growth2,7
                                                                       
2005
    $8.91       $9.02       24,198,667       $8.84       $8.94       9,991,185       $8.79       $8.87       2,516,298  
2004
    $8.66       $8.91       38,027,600       $8.61       $8.84       15,055,552       $8.57       $8.79       5,058,308  
2003
    $7.02       $8.66       19,708,773       $7.00       $8.61       8,321,304       $6.98       $8.57       4,492,838  
2002
    $9.64       $7.02       10,249,236       $9.62       $7.00       4,341,489       $9.61       $6.98       3,460,103  
2001
    $10.00       $9.64       3,907,567       $10.00       $9.62       1,638,628       $10.00       $9.61       1,290,854  

Capital Opportunities2
                                                                       
2005
    $9.35       $9.36       1,318,964       $9.28       $9.27       828,783       $9.23       $9.21       450,055  
2004
    $8.43       $9.35       6,838,770       $8.39       $9.28       2,917,923       $8.35       $9.23       1,042,960  
2003
    $6.74       $8.43       4,428,423       $6.72       $8.39       2,126,973       $6.70       $8.35       1,141,590  
2002
    $9.36       $6.74       2,551,387       $9.35       $6.72       1,267,335       $9.34       $6.70       958,306  
2001
    $10.00       $9.36       1,163,015       $10.00       $9.35       561,878       $10.00       $9.34       448,482  

International Large-Cap1
                                                                       
2005
    $11.21       $12.42       44,183,055       $11.12       $12.31       17,689,591       $11.06       $12.22       3,571,044  
2004
    $9.61       $11.21       25,556,009       $9.55       $11.12       10,215,565       $9.51       $11.06       3,508,209  
2003
    $7.48       $9.61       15,132,339       $7.46       $9.55       6,493,298       $7.44       $9.51       3,578,216  
2002
    $9.23       $7.48       6,181,781       $9.22       $7.46       2,556,131       $9.21       $7.44       2,293,198  
2001
    $10.00       $9.23       2,663,769       $10.00       $9.22       989,214       $10.00       $9.21       886,013  

Equity Index1
                                                                       
2005
    $10.46       $10.77       18,904,245       $10.38       $10.67       7,102,093       $10.32       $10.59       1,735,029  
2004
    $9.61       $10.46       7,448,400       $9.56       $10.38       2,344,348       $9.52       $10.32       1,267,489  
2003
    $7.62       $9.61       6,772,396       $7.59       $9.56       2,421,254       $7.57       $9.52       1,680,027  
2002
    $9.97       $7.62       7,481,319       $9.96       $7.59       2,544,186       $9.95       $7.57       2,382,816  
2001
    $10.00       $9.97       3,326,399       $10.00       $9.96       1,114,646       $10.00       $9.95       1,209,353  

Small-Cap Index 8
                                                                       
2005
    $14.32       $14.71       10,397,751       $14.22       $14.57       4,561,777       $14.14       $14.46       1,421,905  
2004
    $12.37       $14.32       9,634,851       $12.30       $14.22       3,962,745       $12.25       $14.14       1,748,128  
2003
    $8.58       $12.37       5,654,000       $8.55       $12.30       2,074,241       $8.53       $12.25       1,400,194  
2002
    $11.07       $8.58       2,655,068       $11.05       $8.55       1,065,894       $11.04       $8.53       971,831  
2001
    $10.00       $11.07       603,720       $10.00       $11.05       204,137       $10.00       $11.04       186,900  

Fasciano Small Equity1
                                                                       
2005
    $12.44       $12.56       7,013,489       $12.34       $12.44       2,785,226       $12.27       $12.35       454,932  
2004
    $10.63       $12.44       1,411,025       $10.57       $12.34       523,346       $10.53       $12.27       237,265  
2003
    $8.12       $10.63       1,724,803       $8.09       $10.57       666,157       $8.07       $10.53       402,565  
2002
    $11.01       $8.12       1,014,789       $11.00       $8.09       423,805       $10.99       $8.07       369,398  
2001
    $10.00       $11.01       293,748       $10.00       $11.00       137,859       $10.00       $10.99       113,526  

Small-Cap Value 5
                                                                       
2005
    $15.36       $17.17       4,801,477       $15.31       $17.08       1,691,934       $15.27       $17.02       433,838  
2004
    $12.55       $15.36       6,404,610       $12.54       $15.31       2,555,569       $12.52       $15.27       765,219  
2003
    $10.00       $12.55       3,535,410       $10.00       $12.54       1,517,298       $10.00       $12.52       745,713  

Multi-Strategy 9
                                                                       
2005
    $11.56       $11.80       2,821,148       $11.47       $11.69       1,031,078       $11.41       $11.61       535,215  
2004
    $10.70       $11.56       3,180,223       $10.64       $11.47       1,172,919       $10.60       $11.41       679,007  
2003
    $8.83       $10.70       3,035,317       $8.80       $10.64       1,152,985       $8.77       $10.60       752,111  
2002
    $10.32       $8.83       2,402,344       $10.31       $8.80       998,418       $10.29       $8.77       641,237  
2001
    $10.00       $10.32       1,473,184       $10.00       $10.31       519,267       $10.00       $10.29       380,828  

Main Street® Core1
                                                                       
2005
    $9.62       $10.03       29,179,580       $9.55       $9.94       11,671,842       $9.50       $9.87       2,638,771  
2004
    $8.93       $9.62       14,223,814       $8.88       $9.55       5,897,453       $8.85       $9.50       2,399,097  
2003
    $7.15       $8.93       8,604,484       $7.13       $8.88       3,670,780       $7.11       $8.85       2,356,022  
2002
    $10.16       $7.15       2,578,296       $10.14       $7.13       1,211,446       $10.13       $7.11       1,015,515  
2001
    $10.00       $10.16       1,984,450       $10.00       $10.14       840,251       $10.00       $10.13       697,289  

 
70


Table of Contents


                                                                         
With Stepped-Up
With Standard Death Benefit Death Benefit Rider With Premier Death Benefit Rider



Number of Number of Number of
Subaccount Subaccount Subaccount
AUV at AUV Units AUV at AUV Units AUV at AUV Units
Beginning at End Outstanding Beginning at End Outstanding Beginning at End Outstanding
of Year of Year at End of Year of Year of Year at End of Year of Year of Year at End of Year

Emerging Markets6
                                                                       
2005
    $21.39       $29.77       6,980,143       $21.23       $29.49       2,882,406       $21.11       $29.28       535,529  
2004
    $16.16       $21.39       4,137,609       $16.07       $21.23       1,670,937       $16.00       $21.11       523,622  
2003
    $9.75       $16.16       1,610,401       $9.71       $16.07       685,510       $9.69       $16.00       336,278  
2002
    $10.22       $9.75       668,754       $10.21       $9.71       243,783       $10.20       $9.69       225,126  
2001
    $10.00       $10.22       211,483       $10.00       $10.21       78,029       $10.00       $10.20       90,230  

Managed Bond1
                                                                       
2005
    $12.17       $12.29       42,829,952       $12.08       $12.17       15,953,373       $12.01       $12.09       4,699,841  
2004
    $11.74       $12.17       32,119,285       $11.68       $12.08       11,903,817       $11.63       $12.01       5,322,509  
2003
    $11.24       $11.74       23,854,309       $11.20       $11.68       8,974,943       $11.17       $11.63       6,038,644  
2002
    $10.30       $11.24       18,674,851       $10.28       $11.20       6,522,651       $10.27       $11.17       5,940,033  
2001
    $10.00       $10.30       9,330,375       $10.00       $10.28       3,094,696       $10.00       $10.27       2,643,122  

Inflation Managed1
                                                                       
2005
    $13.03       $13.14       36,854,951       $12.93       $13.02       12,726,350       $12.86       $12.93       3,252,755  
2004
    $12.16       $13.03       28,904,226       $12.10       $12.93       10,020,214       $12.05       $12.86       3,738,839  
2003
    $11.42       $12.16       19,037,992       $11.38       $12.10       5,855,231       $11.35       $12.05       3,707,537  
2002
    $10.06       $11.42       10,913,817       $10.04       $11.38       3,212,778       $10.03       $11.35       2,692,681  
2001
    $10.00       $10.06       3,532,994       $10.00       $10.04       1,016,780       $10.00       $10.03       772,661  

Money Market1
                                                                       
2005
    $9.94       $10.06       7,520,132       $9.87       $9.96       2,986,076       $9.81       $9.89       1,027,221  
2004
    $10.01       $9.94       7,613,780       $9.95       $9.87       2,225,698       $9.91       $9.81       1,402,841  
2003
    $10.09       $10.01       8,772,801       $10.06       $9.95       2,436,151       $10.03       $9.91       1,588,852  
2002
    $10.12       $10.09       11,419,100       $10.10       $10.06       3,600,821       $10.09       $10.03       3,129,500  
2001
    $10.00       $10.12       8,675,282       $10.00       $10.10       3,485,768       $10.00       $10.09       2,157,872  

High Yield Bond 1
                                                                       
2005
    $11.65       $11.73       10,206,012       $11.56       $11.62       3,516,722       $11.50       $11.54       1,083,587  
2004
    $10.82       $11.65       9,619,489       $10.77       $11.56       3,670,580       $10.72       $11.50       1,389,214  
2003
    $9.15       $10.82       10,001,359       $9.12       $10.77       3,793,983       $9.09       $10.72       1,727,493  
2002
    $9.59       $9.15       4,408,755       $9.57       $9.12       1,784,489       $9.56       $9.09       1,241,320  
2001
    $10.00       $9.59       1,862,023       $10.00       $9.57       482,390       $10.00       $9.56       406,825  

Large-Cap Value 3
                                                                       
2005
    $10.52       $10.98       27,320,961       $10.44       $10.88       11,317,968       $10.38       $10.80       3,218,656  
2004
    $9.73       $10.52       41,222,265       $9.67       $10.44       16,123,858       $9.63       $10.38       6,016,668  
2003
    $7.53       $9.73       24,755,093       $7.51       $9.67       10,422,829       $7.49       $9.63       6,090,920  
2002
    $9.94       $7.53       12,859,786       $9.93       $7.51       5,254,064       $9.92       $7.49       4,854,748  
2001
    $10.00       $9.94       5,006,090       $10.00       $9.93       2,023,116       $10.00       $9.92       1,787,341  

Comstock1
                                                                       
2005
    $10.76       $11.04       15,446,011       $10.68       $10.94       5,743,813       $10.62       $10.86       1,239,565  
2004
    $9.33       $10.76       11,934,458       $9.28       $10.68       4,562,154       $9.25       $10.62       1,507,530  
2003
    $7.22       $9.33       6,604,550       $7.20       $9.28       2,821,909       $7.18       $9.25       1,465,531  
2002
    $9.43       $7.22       1,198,731       $9.42       $7.20       653,082       $9.41       $7.18       459,562  
2001
    $10.00       $9.43       703,659       $10.00       $9.42       414,009       $10.00       $9.41       341,710  

Mid-Cap Growth 1
                                                                       
2005
    $8.49       $9.85       4,227,825       $8.43       $9.75       1,874,372       $8.38       $9.68       902,141  
2004
    $7.10       $8.49       3,922,200       $7.06       $8.43       2,216,459       $7.03       $8.38       1,060,288  
2003
    $5.53       $7.10       3,450,185       $5.52       $7.06       2,025,364       $5.50       $7.03       1,182,007  
2002
    $10.62       $5.53       2,396,177       $10.61       $5.52       1,574,297       $10.60       $5.50       1,093,405  
2001
    $10.00       $10.62       1,200,646       $10.00       $10.61       756,565       $10.00       $10.60       537,801  

Real Estate3
                                                                       
2005
    $19.64       $22.56       5,405,509       $19.49       $22.35       2,041,650       $19.38       $22.19       627,708  
2004
    $14.51       $19.64       4,845,399       $14.43       $19.49       1,905,654       $14.37       $19.38       783,966  
2003
    $10.72       $14.51       3,694,864       $10.69       $14.43       1,394,468       $10.66       $14.37       906,395  
2002
    $10.94       $10.72       2,355,294       $10.92       $10.69       869,518       $10.91       $10.66       742,357  
2001
    $10.00       $10.94       1,127,914       $10.00       $10.92       415,872       $10.00       $10.91       323,797  

 
71


Table of Contents


                                                                         
With Stepped-Up
With Standard Death Benefit Death Benefit Rider With Premier Death Benefit Rider



Number of Number of Number of
Subaccount Subaccount Subaccount
AUV at AUV Units AUV at AUV Units AUV at AUV Units
Beginning at End Outstanding Beginning at End Outstanding Beginning at End Outstanding
of Year of Year at End of Year of Year of Year at End of Year of Year of Year at End of Year

VN Small-Cap Value10
                                                                       
05/2005 – 12/2005
    $10.11       $11.41       1,064,974       $10.15       $11.39       497,625       $10.15       $11.38       80,972  

 1  This Subaccount began operations on April 02, 2001.
 2  This Subaccount began operations on April 05, 2001.
 3 This Subaccount began operations on April 04, 2001.
 4  This Subaccount began operations on May 02, 2005.
 5  This Subaccount began operations on May 01, 2003.
 6  This Subaccount began operations on April 03, 2001.
 7  Formerly called Blue Chip.
 8  This Subaccount began operations on April 09, 2001.
 9  This Subaccount began operations on April 06, 2001.
10  This Subaccount began operations on May 05, 2005.
 
72


Table of Contents


FEDERAL TAX STATUS

The following summary of federal income tax consequences is based on our understanding of current tax laws and regulations, which may be changed by legislative, judicial or administrative action. The summary is general in nature and is not intended as tax advice. Moreover, it does not consider any applicable foreign, state or local tax laws. We do not make any guarantee regarding the tax status, federal, foreign, state or local, of any Contract or any transaction involving the Contracts. Accordingly, you should consult a qualified tax adviser for complete information and advice before purchasing a Contract.

The following rules generally do not apply to variable annuity contracts held by or for non-natural persons (e.g., corporations) unless such an entity holds the contract as agent for a natural person. If a contract is not owned or held by a natural person or as agent for a natural person, the contract generally will not be treated as an “annuity” for tax purposes, meaning that the contract owner will be taxed currently on annual increases in Contract Value at ordinary income rates unless some other exception applies.

Section 72 of the Code governs the taxation of annuities in general, and we designed the Contracts to meet the requirements of Section 72 of the Code. We believe that, under current law, the Contract will be treated as an annuity for federal income tax purposes if the Contract Owner is a natural person or an agent for a natural person, and that we (as the issuing insurance company), and not the Contract Owner(s), will be treated as the owner of the investments underlying the Contract. Accordingly, no tax should be payable by you as a Contract Owner as a result of any increase in Contract Value until you receive money under your Contract. You should, however, consider how amounts will be taxed when you do receive them. The following discussion assumes that your Contract will be treated as an annuity for federal income tax purposes.

Section 817(h) of the Code provides that the investments underlying a variable annuity must satisfy certain diversification requirements. Details on these diversification requirements appear in the Fund’s SAI. We believe the underlying Variable Investment Options for the Contract meet these requirements. In connection with the issuance of temporary regulations relating to diversification requirements under Section 817(h), the Treasury Department announced that such regulations do not provide guidance concerning the extent to which you may direct your investments to particular divisions of a separate account. Such guidance may be included in regulations or revenue rulings under Section 817(d) relating to the definition of a variable contract. We reserve the right to make such changes as we deem necessary or appropriate to ensure that your Contract continues to qualify as an annuity for tax purposes. Any such changes will apply uniformly to affected Contract Owners and will be made with such notice to affected Contract Owners as is feasible under the circumstances.

For a variable life insurance contract or a variable annuity contract to qualify for tax deferral, assets in the separate accounts supporting the contract must be considered to be owned by the insurance company and not by the contract owner. Under current U.S. tax law, if a contract owner has excessive control over the investments made by a separate account, or the underlying fund, the contract owner will be taxed currently on income and gains from the account or fund. In other words, in such a case of “investor control” the contract owner would not derive the tax benefits normally associated with variable life insurance or variable annuities.

Generally, according to the IRS, there are two ways that impermissible investor control may exist. The first relates to the design of the contract or the relationship between the contract and a separate account or underlying fund. For example, at various times, the IRS has focused on, among other factors, the number and type of investment choices available pursuant to a given variable contract, whether the contract offers access to funds that are available to the general public, the number of transfers that a contract owner may make from one investment option to another, and the degree to which a contract owner may select or control particular investments.

With respect to this first aspect of investor control, we believe that the design of our contracts and the relationship between our contracts and the Portfolios satisfy the current view of the IRS on this subject, such that the investor control doctrine should not apply. However, because of some uncertainty with respect to this subject and because the IRS may issue further guidance on this subject, we reserve the right to make such changes as we deem necessary or appropriate to reduce the risk that your contract might not qualify as a life insurance contract or as an annuity for tax purposes.

The second way that impermissible investor control might exist concerns your actions. Under the IRS pronouncements, you may not select or control particular investments, other than choosing among broad investment choices such as selecting a particular Portfolio. You may not select or direct the purchase or sale of a

 
73


Table of Contents


particular investment of a Portfolio. All investment decisions concerning the Portfolios must be made by the portfolio manager for such Portfolio in his or her sole and absolute discretion, and not by the contract owner. Furthermore, under the IRS pronouncements, you may not communicate directly or indirectly with such a portfolio manager or any related investment officers concerning the selection, quality, or rate of return of any specific investment or group of investments held by a Portfolio.

Finally, the IRS may issue additional guidance on the investor control doctrine, which might further restrict your actions or features of the variable contract. Such guidance could be applied retroactively. If any of the rules outlined above are not complied with, the IRS may seek to tax you currently on income and gains from a Portfolio such that you would not derive the tax benefits normally associated with variable life insurance or variable annuities. Although highly unlikely, such an event may have an adverse impact on the fund and other variable contracts. We urge you to consult your own tax adviser with respect to the application of the investor control doctrine.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Taxes Payable by Contract Owners: General Rules

These general rules apply to Non-Qualified Contracts. As discussed below, however, tax rules may differ for Qualified Contracts and you should consult a qualified tax adviser if you are purchasing a Qualified Contract.

Distributions of net investment income or capital gains that each Subaccount receives from its corresponding Portfolio are automatically reinvested in such Portfolio unless we, on behalf of the Separate Account, elect otherwise. As noted above, you will be subject to federal income taxes on the investment income from your Contract only when it is distributed to you.

Multiple Contracts

All Non-Qualified Contracts that are issued by us, or our affiliates, to the same Owner during any calendar year are treated as one Contract for purposes of determining the amount includible in gross income under Code Section 72(e). Further, the Treasury Department has specific authority to issue regulations that prevent the avoidance of Section 72(e) through the serial purchase of Contracts or otherwise.

Taxes Payable on Withdrawals

Amounts you withdraw before annuitization, including amounts withdrawn from your Contract Value in connection with partial withdrawals for payment of any charges and fees, will be treated first as taxable income to the extent that your Contract Value exceeds the aggregate of your Investments (reduced by non-taxable amounts previously received), and then as non-taxable recovery of your Investments.

The assignment or pledge of (or agreement to assign or pledge) the value of the Contract for a loan will be treated as a withdrawal subject to these rules. Moreover, all annuity contracts issued to you in any given calendar year by us and any of our affiliates are treated as a single annuity contract for purposes of determining whether an amount is subject to tax under these rules. The Code further provides that the taxable portion of a withdrawal or other distribution may be subject to a penalty tax equal to 10% of that taxable portion unless the withdrawal is:

  •  made on or after the date you reach age 59 1/2,
 
  •  made by a Beneficiary after your death,
 
  •  attributable to your becoming disabled,
 
  •  in the form of level annuity payments under a lifetime annuity, or
 
  •  any distributions that are a part of a series of substantially equal periodic payments made (at least annually) over your life (or life expectancy) or the joint lives (or life expectancies) of you and your designated beneficiary.

Additional exceptions may apply to certain Qualified Contracts (see the Taxes Payable on Annuity Payments section).

 
74


Table of Contents


Taxes Payable on Optional Riders

It is our understanding that the charges relating to any optional death benefit rider are not subject to current taxation and we will not report them as such. However, the IRS may determine that these charges should be treated as partial withdrawals subject to current taxation to the extent of any gain and, if applicable, the 10% tax penalty. We reserve the right to report any optional death benefit rider charges as partial withdrawals if we believe that we would be expected to report them in accordance with IRS regulations.

The Contract offers an optional death benefit rider that, when combined with the Contract, may exceed the death benefit allowable under IRS Regulations. Although we believe that these regulations do not prohibit an optional death benefit rider from being added to your Contract if it is issued as a Traditional IRA, Roth IRA, or SIMPLE IRA, the law is unclear. It is possible that the IRS may disqualify the Contract if it is issued with an optional death benefit rider, which may result in certain deemed distributions, increases in taxes, or, possibly, tax penalties. You should consult with a qualified tax adviser before deciding to purchase any optional death benefit rider in connection with any IRA Contract.

Taxes Payable on Annuity Payments

A portion of each annuity payment you receive under a Contract generally will be treated as a partial recovery of Investments (as used here, “Investments” means the aggregate Investments less any amounts that were previously received under the Contract but not included in income) and will not be taxable. (In certain circumstances, subsequent modifications to an initially-established payment pattern may result in the imposition of a penalty tax.) The remainder of each annuity payment will be taxed as ordinary income. However, after the full amount of aggregate Investments has been recovered, the full amount of each annuity payment will be taxed as ordinary income. Exactly how an annuity payment is divided into taxable and non-taxable portions depends on the period over which annuity payments are expected to be received, which in turn is governed by the form of annuity selected and, where a lifetime annuity is chosen, by the life expectancy of the Annuitant(s) or payee(s). Such a payment may also be subject to a penalty tax.

Should the death of a Contract Owner cause annuity payments to cease before Investments have been fully recovered, an Annuitant (or in certain cases the Beneficiary) is allowed a deduction on the final tax return for the unrecovered Investments; however, if any remaining annuity payments are made to a Beneficiary, the Beneficiary will recover the balance of the Investments as payments are made. A lump sum payment taken in lieu of remaining monthly annuity payments is not considered an annuity payment for tax purposes. The portion of any lump sum payment to a Beneficiary in excess of aggregate unrecovered Investments would be subject to income tax.

If a Contract Owner dies before annuity payments begin, certain minimum distribution requirements apply. If a Contract Owner dies after the Annuity Date, the remaining interest in the Contract must be distributed at least as rapidly as under the method of distribution in effect on the date of death.

Generally, the same tax rules apply to amounts received by the Beneficiary as those set forth above, except that the early withdrawal penalty tax does not apply. Thus, any annuity payments or lump sum withdrawal will be divided into taxable and non-taxable portions. If the Contract Owner or Annuitant dies and within sixty days after the date on which a lump sum death benefit first becomes payable the designated recipient elects to receive annuity payments in lieu of the lump sum death benefit, then the designated recipient will not be treated for tax purposes as having received the lump sum death benefit in the tax year it first becomes payable. Rather, in that case, the designated recipient will be taxed on the annuity payments as they are received.

Any amount payable upon the Contract Owner’s death, whether before or after the Annuity Date, will be included in the estate of the Contract Owner for federal estate tax purposes. In addition, designation of a non-spouse Beneficiary who either is 37 1/2 or more years younger than a Contract Owner or is a grandchild of a Contract Owner may have Generation Skipping Transfer Tax consequences under section 2601 of the Code.

Generally, gifts of Non-Qualified Contracts prior to the annuity start date will trigger tax on the gain on the Contract, with the donee getting a stepped-up basis for the amount included in the donor’s income. The 10% penalty tax and gift tax also may be applicable. This provision does not apply to transfers between spouses or incident to a divorce, or transfers to and from a trust acting as agent for the Owner or the Owner’s spouse.

 
75


Table of Contents


Qualified Contracts

The Contracts are available to a variety of Qualified Plans. Tax restrictions and consequences for Contracts under each type of Qualified Plan differ from each other and from those for Non-Qualified Contracts. In addition, individual Qualified Plans may have terms and conditions that impose additional rules. Therefore, no attempt is made herein to provide more than general information about the use of the Contract with the various types of Qualified Plans. Participants under such Qualified Plans, as well as Contract Owners, Annuitants and Beneficiaries, are cautioned that the rights of any person to any benefits under such Qualified Plans may be subject to the terms and conditions of the Plans themselves or limited by applicable law, regardless of the terms and conditions of the Contract issued in connection therewith. Qualified Plans generally provide for the tax deferral of income regardless of whether the Qualified Plan invests in an annuity or other investment. It’s important to know that Qualified Plans such as 401(k)s, as well as IRAs, are already tax-deferred. Therefore, an annuity contract should be used to fund an IRA or Qualified Plan to benefit from the annuity’s features other than tax deferral. The other benefits of using a variable annuity to fund a Qualified Plan or an IRA include the lifetime income options, guaranteed death benefit options and the ability to transfer among investment options without sales or withdrawal charges. You should consider if the Contract is a suitable investment if you are investing through a Qualified Plan.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

The following is only a general discussion about types of Qualified Plans for which the Contracts are available. We are not the administrator of any Qualified Plan. The plan administrator and/or custodian, whichever is applicable, (but not us) is responsible for all Plan administrative duties including, but not limited to, notification of distribution options, disbursement of Plan benefits, handling any processing and administration of Qualified Plan loans, compliance regulatory requirements and federal and state tax reporting of income/ distributions from the Plan to Plan participants and, if applicable, Beneficiaries of Plan participants and IRA contributions from Plan participants. Our administrative duties are limited to administration of the Contract and any disbursements of any Contract benefits to the Owner, Annuitant, or Beneficiary of the Contract, as applicable. Our tax reporting responsibility is limited to federal and state tax reporting of income/ distributions to the applicable payee and IRA contributions from the Owner of a Contract, as recorded on our books and records. The Qualified Plan (the plan administrator or the custodian) is required to provide us with information regarding individuals with signatory authority on the Contract(s) owned. If you are purchasing a Qualified Contract, you should consult with your plan administrator and/or a qualified tax adviser. You should also consult with a qualified tax adviser and/or plan administrator before you withdraw any portion of your Contract Value.

IRAs and Other Qualified Contracts with Optional Benefit Riders

As of the date of this Prospectus, there are special considerations for purchases of any optional living or death benefit riders. IRS regulations state that Individual Retirement Accounts (IRAs) may generally not invest in life insurance contracts. We believe that these regulations do not prohibit the optional living or death benefit riders from being added to your Contract if it is issued as a Traditional IRA, Roth IRA, or SIMPLE IRA. However, the law is unclear and it is possible that a Contract that has optional living or death benefit riders and is issued as a Traditional IRA, Roth IRA, or SIMPLE IRA could be disqualified and may result in increased taxes to the Owner.

Similarly, section 401 plans, section 403(b), 457(b) annuities and IRAs (but not Roth IRAs) can only offer incidental death benefits. The Internal Revenue Service (IRS) could take the position that the enhanced death benefits provided by optional benefit riders are not incidental.

In addition, to the extent that the optional benefit riders alter the timing or the amount of the payment of distributions under a Qualified Contract, the riders cannot be paid out in violation of the minimum distribution rules of the Code.

It is our understanding that the charges relating to the optional benefit riders are not subject to current taxation and we will not report them as such. However, the IRS may determine that these charges should be treated as partial withdrawals subject to current income taxation to the extent of any gain and, if applicable, the 10% tax penalty. We reserve the right to report the rider charges as partial withdrawals if we believe that we would be expected to report them in accordance with IRS regulations.

 
76


Table of Contents


Individual Retirement Annuities (“IRAs”)

In addition to “traditional” IRAs established under Code 408, there are Roth IRAs governed by Code Section 408A and SIMPLE IRAs established under Code Section 408(p). Also, Qualified Plans under Section 401, 403(b), or 457(b) of the Code that include after-tax employee contributions may be treated as deemed IRAs subject to the same rules and limitations as traditional IRAs. Contributions to each of these types of IRAs are subject to differing limitations. The following is a very general description of each type of IRA and other Qualified Plans:

Traditional IRAs

Traditional IRAs are subject to limitations on the amount that may be contributed each year (these contribution limits are scheduled to increase over the next several years), the persons who may be eligible, and on the time when distributions must commence. Depending upon the circumstances of the individual, contributions to a traditional IRA may be made on a deductible or non-deductible basis. Failure to make mandatory distributions may result in imposition of a 50% penalty tax on any difference between the required distribution amount and the amount actually distributed. A 10% penalty tax is imposed on the amount includable in gross income from distributions that occur before you attain age 59 1/2 and that are not made on account of death or disability, with certain exceptions. These exceptions include:

  •  distributions that are part of a series of substantially equal periodic payments made (at least annually) over your life (or life expectancy) or the joint lives (or joint life expectancies) of you and your designated beneficiary,
 
  •  certain higher education expenses,
 
  •  used to pay for certain health insurance premiums or medical expenses, and
 
  •  costs related to the purchase of your first home.

Distributions of minimum amounts specified by the Code must commence by April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which you attain age 70 1/2. Additional distribution rules apply after your death.

You (or your surviving spouse if you die) may rollover funds from certain existing Qualified Plans (such as proceeds from existing insurance policies, annuity contracts or securities) into your traditional IRA if those funds are in cash. This will require you to liquidate any value accumulated under the existing Qualified Plan. Mandatory withholding of 20% may apply to any rollover distribution from your existing Qualified Plan if the distribution is not transferred directly to your traditional IRA. To avoid this withholding you should have cash transferred directly from the insurance company or plan trustee to your traditional IRA. Similar limitations and tax penalties apply to tax sheltered annuities, government plans under section 457(b), 401(k) plans, and pension and profit-sharing plans.

Special rules may be available for victims of Hurricanes Katrina, Rita or Wilma. See the APPENDIX F: KETRA Provisions section in this Prospectus.

SIMPLE IRAs

The Savings Incentive Match Plan for Employees of Small Employers (“SIMPLE Plans”) is a type of Qualified Plan. Depending upon the SIMPLE Plan, employers may make plan contributions into a SIMPLE IRA established by each eligible participant. Like other Qualified Plans, a 10% penalty tax is imposed on certain distributions that occur before you attain age 59 1/2. In addition, the penalty tax is increased to 25% for amounts received or rolled to another Qualified Plan during the 2-year period beginning on the date you first participated in a qualified salary reduction arrangement pursuant to a SIMPLE Plan maintained by the individual’s employer under Code Section 408(p)(2). Contributions to a SIMPLE IRA will include salary deferral contributions and employer contributions. Distributions from a SIMPLE IRA may be transferred over to another SIMPLE IRA tax free or may be eligible for tax free rollover to a traditional IRA, 403(b) annuity contract, contracts pursuant to section 457(b) of the Code, or other Qualified Plan after a required 2-year waiting period.

Roth IRAs

Section 408A of the Code permits eligible individuals to establish a Roth IRA. Contributions to a Roth IRA are not deductible, but withdrawals of amounts contributed and the earnings thereon that meet certain requirements are not subject to federal income tax. In general, Roth IRAs are subject to limitations on the amount that may be

 
77


Table of Contents


contributed and the persons who may be eligible to contribute and are subject to certain required distribution rules on the death of the Contract Owner. Unlike a traditional IRA, Roth IRAs are not subject to minimum required distribution rules during the Contract Owner’s lifetime. Generally, however, the amount remaining in a Roth IRA must be distributed by the end of the fifth year after the death of the Contract Owner/ Annuitant or distributed over the life expectancy of the Designated Beneficiary. The owner of a traditional IRA may convert a traditional IRA into a Roth IRA under certain circumstances. The conversion of a traditional IRA to a Roth IRA will subject the amount of the converted traditional IRA to federal income tax. Anyone considering the purchase of a Qualified Contract as a Roth IRA or a “conversion” Roth IRA should consult with a qualified tax adviser.

In accordance with recent changes in laws and regulations, at the time of either a full or partial conversion from a Traditional IRA annuity to a Roth IRA annuity, the determination of the amount to be reported as income will be based on the annuity contract’s “fair market value”, which will include all front-end loads and other non-recurring charges assessed in the 12 months immediately preceding the conversion, and the actuarial present value of any additional contract benefits.

Tax Sheltered Annuities (“TSAs”)

Section 403(b) of the Code permits public school systems and certain tax-exempt organizations to adopt annuity plans for their employees. Investments made on Contracts purchased for these employees are excludable from the employees’ gross income (subject to maximum contribution limits). Distributions under these Contracts must comply with certain limitations as to timing, or result in tax penalties. Distributions from amounts contributed to a TSA pursuant to a salary reduction arrangement, may be made from a TSA only upon attaining age 59 1/2, severance from employment, death, disability, or financial hardship. Section 403(b) annuity distributions can be rolled over to other Qualified Plans in a manner similar to those permitted by Qualified Plans that are maintained pursuant to Section 401 of the Code.

Section 457(b) Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation Plans

Government Entity

Employees of a governmental entity may defer compensation through an eligible plan under Code section 457(b). Contributions to a Contract of an eligible plan are subject to limitations. Subject to a qualifying triggering event, section 457(b) governmental plans may be transferred or rolled into another Qualified Plan. The Qualified Plan must allow the transfer or rollover. If a rollover to an IRA is completed, the assets become subject to the 10% penalty in distributions prior to age 59 1/2. Assets from other plans may be rolled into a governmental 457(b) plan if the plan allows and the investment provider is able to segregate the assets for tax reporting purposes. Consult both the distributing plan and the receiving plan prior to making this election.

Not-For-Profit

Employees of a not-for-profit entity may defer compensation through an eligible plan under Code section 457(b). Contributions to a Qualified Contract maintained under section 457(b) of the Code by an employee of a not-for-profit entity are subject to limitations, and may not be rolled over to another Qualified Plan at any time.

401(k) Plans; Pension and Profit-Sharing Plans

Qualified Plans may be established by an employer for certain eligible employees under Section 401 of the Code. These plans may be 401(k) plans, profit-sharing plans, or other pension or retirement plans. Contributions to these plans are subject to limitations. Rollover to other eligible plans may be available. Please consult your Qualified Plans Summary Plan description for more information.

Catch-Up Provision

Generally, Qualified Plan and IRA Participants over the age of 50 may contribute additional amounts as catch-up contributions if the terms of the Plan so permit.

 
78


Table of Contents


Required Minimum Distributions

The IRC and regulations provide that you cannot keep assets in qualified plans or IRAs indefinitely. Eventually they are required to be distributed; at that time (the Required Beginning Date (RBD)), Required Minimum Distributions (RMDs) are the amount that must be distributed each year.

Under Section 401 of the Code (for Qualified Plans) and Section 408 of the Code (for IRAs), the entire interest under the Contract must be distributed to the Owner/ Annuitant no later than the Owner/ Annuitant’s RBD, or distributions over the life of the Owner/ Annuitant (or the Owner/ Annuitant and his beneficiary) must begin no later than the RBD.

The RBD for distributions from a Qualified Contract maintained for an IRA under Section 408 of the Code is generally April 1 of the calendar year following the year in which the Owner/ Annuitant reaches age 70 1/2. The RBD for a Qualified Contract maintained for a qualified retirement or pension plan under Section 401 of the Code or a Section 403(b) annuity is April 1 of the calendar year following the later of the year in which the Owner/ Annuitant reached 70 1/2, or, if the plan so provides, the year in which the Owner/ Annuitant retires. There is no RBD for a Roth IRA maintained pursuant to Section 408A of the Code.

The IRS issued Final and Temporary Regulations on April 17, 2002. Effective January 1, 2003, the IRS requires that all IRA holders and Qualified Plan Participants (with one exception discussed below) use the Uniform Lifetime Table to calculate their RMDs.

The Uniform Lifetime Table is based on a joint life expectancy and uses the IRA owner’s actual age and assumes that the beneficiary is 10 years younger than the IRA owner. Note that under these final regulations, the IRA owner does not need to actually have a named beneficiary when they turn 70 1/2.

The exception noted above is for an IRA owner who has a spouse, who is more than 10 years younger, as the sole beneficiary on the IRA. In that situation, the spouse’s actual age (and life expectancy) will be used in the joint life calculation.

Under the Final Regulations, for retirement plans that qualify under Section 401 or 408 of the Code, the period elected for receipt of RMDs or annuity payments under Annuity Options 2 and 4 generally may be:

  •  no longer than the joint life expectancy of the Annuitant and Beneficiary in the year that the Annuitant reaches age 70 1/2, and
 
  •  must be shorter than such joint life expectancy if the Beneficiary is not the Annuitant’s spouse and is more than 10 years younger than the Annuitant.

Under Option 3, if the Beneficiary is not the Annuitant’s spouse and is more than 10 years younger than the Annuitant, the 66 2/3% and 100% elections specified below may not be available. The restrictions on options for retirement plans that qualify under Sections 401 and 408 also apply to a retirement plan that qualifies under Section 403(b) with respect to amounts that accrued after December 31, 1986.

If the Owner/ Annuitant dies prior to (i) his RBD, or (ii) complete distribution from the Qualified Contract, the remainder shall be distributed as provided in the “Qualified Plan Death of Annuitant Distribution Rules”. Life expectancy is initially computed by use of the Single Life Table of the Final and Temporary Regulations, issued April 17, 2002 (Regulation Section 1.401(a)(9)-9). Congress recently required the IRS to update these tables to reflect increased life expectancies. Subsequent life expectancy shall be calculated by reducing the life expectancy of the Beneficiary (or Owner/ Annuitant) by one in each following calendar year.

For calendar year 2003 and thereafter, taxpayers (and the underlying Qualified Plan) must rely on the Final and Temporary Regulations (discussed above) for determining RMDs. If any future guidance from the IRS is more restrictive than the guidance in these Final and Temporary Regulations, the future guidance will be issued without retroactive effect.

The method of distribution selected must comply with the minimum distribution rules of Code Section 401(a)(9), and the applicable proposed Regulations thereunder.

 
79


Table of Contents


Actuarial Value

In accordance with recent changes in laws and regulations, RMDs may be calculated based on the sum of the contract value and the actuarial value of any additional death benefits and benefits from optional riders that you have purchased under the Contract. As a result, RMDs may be larger than if the calculation were based on the contract value only, which may in turn result in an earlier (but not before the required beginning date) distribution under the Contract and an increased amount of taxable income distributed to the contract owner, and a reduction of death benefits and the benefits of any optional riders.

Loans

Certain Owners of Qualified Contracts may borrow against their Contracts. Otherwise loans from us are not permitted. You may request a loan from us, using your Contract Value as your only security if yours is a Qualified Contract that is:

  •  not subject to Title 1 of ERISA,
 
  •  issued under Section 403(b) of the Code, and
 
  •  permits loans under its terms (a “Loan Eligible Plan”).

You will be charged interest on your Contract Debt at a fixed annual rate equal to 5%. The amount held in the Loan Account to secure your loan will earn a return equal to an annual rate of 3%. This loan rate may vary by state.

Interest charges accrue on your Contract Debt daily, beginning on the effective date of your loan. Interest earned on the Loan Account Value accrue daily beginning on the day following the effective date of the loan, and those earnings will be transferred once a year to your Investment Options in accordance with your most recent allocation instructions.

We may change these loan provisions to reflect changes in the Code or interpretations thereof.

Special rules may be available for victims of Hurricanes Katrina, Rita or Wilma. See the APPENDIX F: KETRA Provisions section in this Prospectus.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Tax and Legal Matters

The tax and ERISA rules relating to Contract loans are complex and in many cases unclear. For these reasons, and because the rules vary depending on the individual circumstances, these loans are processed by your Plan Administrator. We urge you to consult with a qualified tax adviser prior to effecting any loan transaction under your Contract.

Generally, interest paid on your loan under a 403(b) tax-sheltered annuity will be considered non-deductible “personal interest” under Section 163(h) of the Code, to the extent the loan comes from and is secured by your pre-tax contributions, even if the proceeds of your loan are used to acquire your principal residence.

Loan Procedures

Your loan request must be submitted on our Non-ERISA TSA Application and Loan Agreement Form. You may submit a loan request 30 days after your Contract Date and before your Annuity Date. However, before requesting a new loan, you must wait thirty days after the last payment of a previous loan. If approved, your loan will usually be effective as of the end of the Business Day on which we receive all necessary documentation in proper form. We will normally forward proceeds of your loan to you within 7 calendar days after the effective date of your loan.

In order to secure your loan, on the effective date of your loan, we will transfer an amount equal to the principal amount of your loan into an account called the “Loan Account.” The Loan Account is held under the General Account. To make this transfer, we will transfer amounts proportionately from your Investment Options based, on your Account Value in each Investment Option.

 
80


Table of Contents


As your loan is repaid, a portion, corresponding to the amount of the repayment of any amount then held as security for your loan, will be transferred from the Loan Account back into your Investment Options relative to your most recent allocation instructions.

A transfer from the Loan Account back into your Investment Options following a loan repayment is not considered a transfer under the transfer limitations as stated in the HOW YOUR INVESTMENTS ARE ALLOCATED— Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions section in this Prospectus.

Loan Terms

You may have only one loan outstanding at any time. The minimum loan amount is $1,000, subject to certain state limitations. Your Contract Debt at the effective date of your loan may not exceed the lesser of:

  •  50% of your Contract Value, or
 
  •  $50,000 less your highest outstanding Contract Debt during the 12-month period immediately preceding the effective date of your loan.

You should refer to the terms of your particular Loan Eligible Plan for any additional loan restrictions. If you have other loans outstanding pursuant to other Loan Eligible Plans, the amount you may borrow may be further restricted. We are not responsible for making any determinations (including loan amounts permitted) or any interpretations with respect to your Loan Eligible Plan.

If you purchase the GPA 5, GPA, GIA Plus, GIA 5, Lifetime Income Access Plus, Income Access Plus, or the Income Access Riders, there may be adverse consequences to taking a loan while these Riders are in effect. If you have an existing loan on your Contract, you should carefully consider whether these Riders are appropriate for you.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Repayment Terms

Your loan, including principal and accrued interest, generally must be repaid in quarterly installments. An installment will be due in each quarter on the date corresponding to the effective date of your loan, beginning with the first such date following the effective date of your loan.

 

  Example: On May 1, we receive your loan request, and your loan is effective. Your first quarterly payment will be due on August 1.

Adverse tax consequences may result if you fail to meet the repayment requirements for your loan. You must repay principal and interest of any loan in substantially equal payments over the term of the loan. Generally, the term of the loan will be 5 years from the effective date of the loan. However, if you have certified to us that your loan proceeds are to be used to acquire a principal residence for yourself, you may request a loan term of 30 years. In either case, however, you must repay your loan prior to your Annuity Date. If you elect to annuitize (or withdraw) your Net Contract Value while you have an outstanding loan, we will deduct any Contract Debt from your Contract Value at the time of the annuitization (or withdrawal) to repay the Contract Debt.

You may prepay your entire loan at any time. If you do so, we will bill you for any unpaid interest that has accrued through the date of payoff. Your loan will be considered repaid only when the interest due has been paid. Subject to any necessary approval of state insurance authorities, while you have Contract Debt outstanding, we will treat all payments you send us as Investments unless you specifically indicate that your payment is a loan repayment or include your loan payment notice with your payment. To the extent allowed by law, any loan repayments in excess of the amount then due will be applied to the principal balance of your loan. Such repayments will not change the due dates or the periodic repayment amount due for future periods. If a loan repayment is in excess of the principal balance of your loan, any excess repayment will be refunded to you. Repayments we receive that are less than the amount then due will be returned to you, unless otherwise required by law.

If we have not received your full payment by its due date, we will declare the entire remaining loan balance in default. At that time, we will send written notification of the amount needed to bring the loan back to a current

 
81


Table of Contents


status. You will have sixty (60) days from the date on which the loan was declared in default (the “grace period”) to make the required payment.

If the required payment is not received by the end of the grace period, the defaulted loan balance plus accrued interest and any withdrawal charge will be withdrawn from your Contract Value, if amounts under your Contract are eligible for distribution. In order for an amount to be eligible for distribution from a TSA funded by salary reductions you must meet one of five triggering events. The triggering events are:

  •  attainment of age 59 1/2,
 
  •  severance from employment,
 
  •  death,
 
  •  disability, and
 
  •  financial hardship (with respect to contributions only, not income or earnings on these contributions).

If those amounts are not eligible for distribution, the defaulted loan balance plus accrued interest and any withdrawal charge will be considered a Deemed Distribution and will be withdrawn when such Contract Values become eligible. In either case, the Distribution or the Deemed Distribution will be considered a currently taxable event, and may be subject to federal tax withholding, the withdrawal charge and the federal early withdrawal penalty tax.

If there is a Deemed Distribution under your Contract and to the extent allowed by law, any future withdrawals will first be applied as repayment of the defaulted Contract Debt, including accrued interest and charges for applicable taxes. Any amounts withdrawn and applied as repayment of Contract Debt will first be withdrawn from your Loan Account, and then from your Investment Options on a proportionate basis relative to the Account Value in each Investment Option. If you have an outstanding loan that is in default, the defaulted Contract Debt will be considered a withdrawal for the purpose of calculating any Death Benefit Amount and/or Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit.

The terms of any such loan are intended to qualify for the exception in Code Section 72(p)(2) so that the distribution of the loan proceeds will not constitute a distribution that is taxable to you. To that end, these loan provisions will be interpreted to ensure and maintain such tax qualification, despite any other provisions to the contrary. Subject to any regulatory approval, we reserve the right to amend your Contract to reflect any clarifications that may be needed or are appropriate to maintain such tax qualification or to conform any terms of our loan arrangement with you to any applicable changes in the tax qualification requirements. We will send you a copy of any such amendment. If you refuse such an amendment, it may result in adverse tax consequences to you.

Special rules may be available for victims of Hurricanes Katrina, Rita or Wilma. See the APPENDIX F: KETRA Provisions section in this Prospectus.

Withholding

Unless you elect to the contrary, any amounts you receive under your Contract that are attributable to investment income will be subject to withholding to meet federal and state income tax obligations. The rate of withholding on annuity payments made to you will be determined on the basis of the withholding information you provide to us with your application. If you do not provide us with required withholding information, we will withhold, from every withdrawal from your Contract and from every annuity payment to you, the appropriate percentage of the taxable amount of the payment. Please call us at 1-800-722-2333 with any questions about the required withholding information. For purposes of determining your withholding rate on annuity payments, you will be treated as a married person with 3 exemptions. The rate of withholding on all other payments made to you under your Contract, such as amounts you receive upon withdrawals, will be 10%, unless otherwise specified by the Code. Generally, there will be no withholding for taxes until you actually receive payments under your Contract.

Distributions from a Contract under a Qualified Plan (not including an individual retirement annuity subject to Code Section 408 or Code Section 408A) to an employee, surviving spouse, or former spouse who is an alternate payee under a qualified domestic relations order, in the form of a lump sum settlement or periodic annuity

 
82


Table of Contents


payments for a fixed period of fewer than 10 years are subject to mandatory income tax withholding of 20% of the taxable amount of the distribution, unless:

  •  the distributee directs the transfer of such amounts in cash to another Qualified Plan or a traditional IRA, or
 
  •  the payment is a minimum distribution required under the Code.

The taxable amount is the amount of the distribution less the amount allocable to after-tax contributions. All other types of taxable distributions are subject to withholding unless the distributee elects not to have withholding apply.

Certain states have indicated that pension and annuity withholding will apply to payments made to residents. Generally, an election out of federal withholding will also be considered an election out of state withholding.

Taxable distributions to Contract Owners who are non-resident aliens or other non U.S. persons are generally subject to U.S. federal income tax withholding at a 30% rate, unless a lower treaty rate applies. Prospective foreign owners are advised to consult with a tax advisor regarding the U.S., state and foreign tax treatment of a Contract.

Impact of Federal Income Taxes

Taxable distributions to Contract Owners who are non-resident aliens or other non U.S. persons are generally subject to U.S. federal income tax withholding at a 30% rate, unless a lower treaty rate applies. Prospective foreign owners are advised to consult with a tax advisor regarding the U.S., state and foreign tax treatment of a Contract.

Taxes on Pacific Life

Although the Separate Account is registered as an investment company, it is not a separate taxpayer for purposes of the Code. The earnings of the Separate Account are taxed as part of our operations. No charge is made against the Separate Account for our federal income taxes (excluding the charge for premium taxes), but we will review, periodically, the question of charges to the Separate Account or your Contract for such taxes. Such a charge may be made in future years for any federal income taxes that would be attributable to the Separate Account or to our operations with respect to your Contract, or attributable, directly or indirectly, to Investments on your Contract.

Under current law, we may incur state and local taxes (in addition to premium taxes) in several states. At present, these taxes are not significant and they are not charged against the Contract or the Separate Account. If there is a material change in applicable state or local tax laws, the imposition of any such taxes upon us that are attributable to the Separate Account or to our operations with respect to your Contract may result in a corresponding charge against the Separate Account or your Contract.

 
83


Table of Contents


ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Voting Rights

We are the legal owner of the shares of the Portfolios held by the Subaccounts. We may vote on any matter voted on at Fund shareholders’ meetings. However, our current interpretation of applicable law requires us to vote the number of shares attributable to your Variable Account Value (your “voting interest”) in accordance with your directions.

We will pass proxy materials on to you so that you have an opportunity to give us voting instructions for your voting interest. You may provide your instructions by proxy or in person at the shareholders’ meeting. If there are shares of a Portfolio held by a Subaccount for which we do not receive timely voting instructions, we will vote those shares in the same proportion as all other shares of that Portfolio held by that Subaccount for which we have received timely voting instructions. If we do not receive any voting instructions for the shares in a Separate Account, we will vote the shares in that Separate Account in the same proportion as the total votes for all of our separate accounts for which we’ve received timely instructions. If we hold shares of a Portfolio in our General Account, we will vote such shares in the same proportion as the total votes cast for all of our separate accounts, including Separate Account A. We will vote shares of any Portfolio held by our non-insurance affiliates in the same proportion as the total votes for all separate accounts of ours and our insurance affiliates.

We may elect, in the future, to vote shares of the Portfolios held in Separate Account A in our own right if we are permitted to do so through a change in applicable federal securities laws or regulations, or in their interpretation.

The number of Portfolio shares that form the basis for your voting interest is determined as of the record date set by the Board of Trustees of the Fund. It is equal to:

  •  your Contract Value allocated to the Subaccount corresponding to that Portfolio, divided by
 
  •  the net asset value per share of that Portfolio.

Fractional votes will be counted. We reserve the right, if required or permitted by a change in federal regulations or their interpretation, to amend how we calculate your voting interest.

After your Annuity Date, if you have selected a variable annuity, the voting rights under your Contract will continue during the payout period of your annuity, but the number of shares that form the basis for your voting interest, as described above, will decrease throughout the payout period.

Changes to Your Contract

Contract Owner(s) and Contingent Owner

Transfer of Contract ownership may involve federal income tax and/or gift tax consequences; you should consult a qualified tax adviser before effecting such a transfer. A change to or from joint Contract ownership is considered a transfer of ownership. If your Contract is Non-Qualified, you may change Contract ownership at any time while the Annuitant is living and prior to your Annuity Date. You may name a different Owner or add or remove a Joint Owner or Contingent Owner. A Contract cannot name more than two Contract Owners (either as Joint or Contingent Owners) at any time. Any newly-named Contract Owners, including Joint and/or Contingent Owners, must be under the age of 86 at the time of change or addition. If there are Joint Owners, the Contract will be owned as Joint Tenants With Right of Survivorship and not as Tenants in Common. The Contract Owner(s) may make all decisions regarding the Contract, including making allocation decisions and exercising voting rights. Transactions under a Contract with Joint Owners require approval from both Owners.

If your Contract is Qualified under Internal Revenue Code Sections 401(a) or 457, the Qualified Plan must be the sole Owner of the Contract and the ownership cannot be changed unless and until a triggering event has been met under the terms of the Qualified Plan. Upon such event, the ownership can only be changed to the Annuitant. If your Contract is Qualified under Internal Revenue Code Sections 408 and 403(b), you must be the sole Owner of the Contract and no changes can be made.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

 
84


Table of Contents


Annuitant and Contingent or Joint Annuitant

Your sole Annuitant cannot be changed, and Joint Annuitants cannot be added or changed, once your Contract is issued. Certain changes may be permitted in connection with Contingent Annuitants. See the ANNUITIZATION, DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS— Selecting Your Annuitant section in this Prospectus. There may be limited exceptions for certain Qualified Contracts.

Beneficiaries

Your Beneficiary is the person(s) who may receive death benefit proceeds under your Contract or any remaining annuity payments after the Annuity Date if the Annuitant or Owner dies. You may change or remove your Beneficiary or add Beneficiaries at any time prior to the death of the Annuitant or Owner, as applicable. Any change or addition will generally take effect only when we receive all necessary documents, in proper form, at our Service Center and we record the change or addition. Any change or addition will not affect any payment made or any other action taken by us before the change or addition was received and recorded.

Spousal consent may be required to change the Beneficiary of an IRA. If you have named your Beneficiary irrevocably, you will need to obtain that Beneficiary’s consent before making any changes. Qualified Contracts may have additional restrictions on naming and changing Beneficiaries. If your Contract was issued in connection with a Qualified Plan subject to Title I of ERISA, contact your Plan Administrator for details. We require that Contracts issued under Code Sections 401 and 457(b) name the Plan as Beneficiary. If you leave no surviving Beneficiary or Contingent Beneficiary, your estate will receive any death benefit proceeds under your Contract.

Changes to All Contracts

If, in the judgment of our management, continued investment by Separate Account A in one or more of the Portfolios becomes unsuitable or unavailable, we may seek to alter the Variable Investment Options available under the Contracts. We do not expect that a Portfolio will become unsuitable, but unsuitability issues could arise due to changes in investment policies, market conditions, tax laws, or due to marketing or other reasons.

Alterations of Variable Investment Options may take differing forms. We reserve the right to substitute shares of any Portfolio that were already purchased under any Contract (or shares that were to be purchased in the future under a Contract) with shares of another Portfolio, shares of another investment company or series of another investment company, or another investment vehicle. We may also purchase, through a Subaccount, other securities for other series or other classes of contracts, and may permit conversions or exchanges between series or classes of contracts on the basis of Contract Owner requests. Required approvals of the SEC and state insurance regulators will be obtained before any such substitutions are effected, and you will be notified of any planned substitution.

We may add new Subaccounts to Separate Account A, and any new Subaccounts may invest in Portfolios of the Fund or in other investment vehicles. Availability of any new Subaccounts to existing Contract Owners will be determined at our discretion. We will notify you, and will comply with the filing or other procedures established by applicable state insurance regulators, to the extent required by applicable law. We also reserve the right, after receiving any required regulatory approvals, to do any of the following:

  •  cease offering any Subaccount;
 
  •  add or change designated investment companies or their portfolios, or other investment vehicles;
 
  •  add, delete or make substitutions for the securities and other assets that are held or purchased by the Separate Account or any Variable Account;
 
  •  permit conversion or exchanges between portfolios and/or classes of contracts on the basis of Owners’ requests;
 
  •  add, remove or combine Variable Accounts;
 
  •  combine the assets of any Variable Account with any other of our separate accounts or of any of our affiliates;
 
  •  register or deregister Separate Account A or any Variable Account under the 1940 Act;
 
85


Table of Contents


  •  operate any Variable Account as a managed investment company under the 1940 Act, or any other form permitted by law;
 
  •  run any Variable Account under the direction of a committee, board, or other group;
 
  •  restrict or eliminate any voting rights of Owners with respect to any Variable Account or other persons who have voting rights as to any Variable Account;
 
  •  make any changes required by the 1940 Act or other federal securities laws;
 
  •  make any changes necessary to maintain the status of the Contracts as annuities under the Code;
 
  •  make other changes required under federal or state law relating to annuities;
 
  •  suspend or discontinue sale of the Contracts; and
 
  •  comply with applicable law.

Inquiries and Submitting Forms and Requests

You may reach our service representatives at 1-800-722-2333 between the hours of 6:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m., Pacific time.

Please send your forms and written requests or questions to:

  Pacific Life Insurance Company
P.O. Box 7187
Pasadena, California 91109-7187

If you are submitting an Investment or other payment by mail, please send it, along with your application if you are submitting one, to the following address or to the address indicated on your Contract specification pages, if different:

  Pacific Life Insurance Company
P.O. Box 100060
Pasadena, California 91189-0060

If you are using an overnight delivery service to send payments, please send them to the following address or to the address indicated on your Contract specification pages, if different:

  Pacific Life Insurance Company
1111 South Arroyo Parkway, Suite 205
Pasadena, California 91105

The effective date of certain notices or of instructions is determined by the date and time on which we “receive” the notice or instructions. We “receive” this information only when it arrives, in proper form, at the correct mailing address set out above. In those instances when we receive electronic transmission of the information on the application from your representative’s broker-dealer firm and our administrative procedures with your broker-dealer so provide, we consider the application to be received on the Business Day we receive the transmission. If the address on your Contract specification pages is different and our administrative procedures with your broker-dealer so provide, in those instances when information regarding your Investment is electronically transmitted to us by the broker-dealer, we will consider the Investment to be received by us on the Business Day we receive the transmission of the information. Please call us at 1-800-722-2333 if you have any questions regarding which address you should use.

We reserve the right to process any Investment received at an incorrect address when it is received at either the address indicated in your Contract specification pages or the appropriate address indicated in the Prospectus.

Investments after your initial Investment, loan requests, transfer requests, loan repayments and withdrawal requests we receive before the close of the New York Stock Exchange, which usually closes at 4:00 p.m. Eastern time, will normally be effective at the end of the same Business Day that we receive them in “proper form,” unless the transaction or event is scheduled to occur on another day. Generally, whenever you submit any other form, notice or request, your instructions will be effective on the next Business Day after we receive them in “proper form” unless the transaction or event is scheduled to occur on another day. “Proper form” means in a form satisfactory

 
86


Table of Contents


to us and may require, among other things, a signature guarantee or other verification of authenticity. We do not generally require a signature guarantee unless it appears that your signature may have changed over time or the signature does not appear to be yours; an executed application or confirmation of application, as applicable, in proper form is not received by us; or, to protect you or us. Requests regarding death benefit proceeds must be accompanied by both proof of death and instructions regarding payment satisfactory to us. You should call your registered representative or us if you have questions regarding the required form of a request.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Telephone and Electronic Transactions

You are automatically entitled to make certain transactions by telephone or, to the extent available, electronically. You may also authorize other people to make certain transaction requests by telephone or, to the extent available, electronically by so indicating on the application or by sending us instructions in writing in a form acceptable to us. We cannot guarantee that you or any other person you authorize will always be able to reach us to complete a telephone or electronic transaction; for example, all telephone lines may be busy or access to our website may be unavailable during certain periods, such as periods of substantial market fluctuations or other drastic economic or market change, or telephones or the Internet may be out of service or unavailable during severe weather conditions or other emergencies. Under these circumstances, you should submit your request in writing (or other form acceptable to us). Transaction instructions we receive by telephone or electronically before the close of the New York Stock Exchange, which usually closes at 4:00 p.m. Eastern time, on any Business Day will usually be effective at the end of that day, and we will provide you confirmation of each telephone or electronic transaction.

We have established procedures reasonably designed to confirm that instructions communicated by telephone or electronically are genuine. These procedures may require any person requesting a telephone or electronic transaction to provide certain personal identification upon our request. We may also record all or part of any telephone conversation with respect to transaction instructions. We reserve the right to deny any transaction request made by telephone or electronically. You are authorizing us to accept and to act upon instructions received by telephone or electronically with respect to your Contract, and you agree that, so long as we comply with our procedures, neither we, any of our affiliates, nor any Fund, or any of their directors, trustees, officers, employees or agents will be liable for any loss, liability, cost or expense (including attorneys’ fees) in connection with requests that we believe to be genuine. This policy means that so long as we comply with our procedures, you will bear the risk of loss arising out of the telephone or electronic transaction privileges of your Contract. If a Contract has Joint Owners, each Owner may individually make telephone and/or electronic transaction requests.

Electronic Delivery Authorization

Subject to availability, you may authorize us to provide Prospectuses, statements, and other information (“documents”) electronically by so indicating on the application, via telephone, or by sending us instructions in writing in a form acceptable to us to receive such documents electronically. You must provide us with a current and active e-mail address and have Internet access to use this service. While we impose no additional charge for this service, there may be potential costs associated with electronic delivery, such as on-line charges. Documents will be available on our Internet website. You may access and print all documents provided through this service. As documents become available, we will notify you of this by sending you an e-mail message that will include instructions on how to retrieve the document. You are responsible for any e-mail filters that may prevent you from receiving e-mail notifications and for notifying us promptly in the event that your e-mail address changes. You may revoke your consent for electronic delivery at any time, provided that we are properly notified, and we will then start providing you with a paper copy of all required documents. We will provide you with paper copies at any time upon request. Such a request will not constitute revocation of your consent to receive required documents electronically.

Timing of Payments and Transactions

For withdrawals, including exchanges under Code Section 1035 and other Qualified transfers, from the Variable Investment Options or for death benefit payments attributable to your Variable Account Value, we will normally send the proceeds within 7 calendar days after your request is effective or after the Notice Date, as the case may be. We will normally effect periodic annuity payments on the day that corresponds to the Annuity Date and will make payment on the following day. Payments or transfers may be suspended for a longer period under certain

 
87


Table of Contents


extraordinary circumstances. These include: a closing of the New York Stock Exchange other than on a regular holiday or weekend; a trading restriction imposed by the SEC; or an emergency declared by the SEC. Amounts withdrawn or transferred from any fixed-rate General Account Investment Option may be delayed for up to six months after the request is effective. See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT and the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS sections in this Prospectus for more details.

Confirmations, Statements and Other Reports to Contract Owners

Confirmations will be sent out for unscheduled Investments and transfers, loans, loan repayments, unscheduled partial withdrawals, a full withdrawal, and on payment of any death benefit proceeds. Periodically, we will send you a statement that provides certain information pertinent to your Contract. These statements disclose Contract Value, Subaccount values, any fixed option values, and, for Contracts issued before November 1, 2002, the Fixed Option, fees and charges applied to your Contract Value, transactions made and specific Contract data that apply to your Contract. Confirmations of your transactions under the pre-authorized checking plan, dollar cost averaging, earnings sweep, portfolio rebalancing, and pre-authorized withdrawal options will appear on your quarterly account statements. Your fourth-quarter statement will contain annual information about your Contract Value and transactions. You may also access these statements online.

If you suspect an error on a confirmation or quarterly statement, you must notify us in writing as soon as possible to ensure proper accounting to your Contract. We assume transactions are accurate unless you notify us otherwise within 30 days of receiving the transaction confirmation or, if the transaction is first confirmed on the quarterly statement, within 30 days of receiving the quarterly statement. All transactions are deemed final and may not be changed after the applicable 30 day period.

When you write, tell us your name, contract number and a description of the suspected error. You will also be sent an annual report for the Separate Account and the Fund and a list of the securities held in each Portfolio of the Fund, as required by the 1940 Act; or more frequently if required by law.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Distribution Arrangements

PSD, a broker-dealer and our subsidiary, pays various forms of sales compensation to broker-dealers (including other Pacific Life affiliates) that solicit applications for the Contracts. PSD also may reimburse other expenses associated with the promotion and solicitation of applications for the Contracts. Broker-dealers may receive aggregate commissions of up to 7.00% of your aggregate Purchase Payments. Under certain circumstances where PSD pays lower initial commissions, certain broker-dealers that solicit applications for Contracts may be paid an ongoing persistency trail commission (sometimes called a residual) which will take into account, among other things, the Account Value and the length of time Purchase Payments have been held under a Contract. A trail commission is not anticipated to exceed 1.50%, on an annual basis, of the Account Value considered in connection with the trail commission. Certain broker-dealers may also be paid a persistency bonus which will be based on assets under management and duration of contracts. The persistency bonus for a registered representative is not expected to exceed .25% of their total assets under management.

In addition, PSD or an affiliate may pay from their own resources additional significant cash compensation, sometimes called “revenue sharing”, and provide other incentives in connection with the promotion and solicitation of applications for the Contracts by some, but not all, broker-dealers. Such additional compensation may give us greater access to registered representatives of the broker-dealers that receive such compensation or may otherwise influence the way that a broker-dealer and registered representative market the Contracts.

The compensation described in this section and in the SAI, and other compensation or benefits provided by PSD or its affiliates, may be more or less than the overall compensation on similar or other products. This may influence your registered representative or broker-dealer to present this Contract over other investment options available in the marketplace. You may ask your registered representative about these conflicts of interest, how he/she is personally compensated and how his/her broker-dealer is compensated for soliciting applications for the Contract.

Portfolio Managers of the underlying Portfolios available under this Contract may help pay for conferences or meetings sponsored by us or PSD relating to management of the Portfolios and our variable annuity products.

 
88


Table of Contents


Please refer to the SAI for additional details on Distribution Arrangements and the conflicts of interest that they may present.

Service Arrangements

American Funds Insurance Series® pays Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (“PSD”) at an annual rate of 0.25% of the average daily net assets of Class 2 shares of the Growth-Income and Growth Master Funds (“Master Funds”) attributable to variable life insurance and variable annuity contracts issued by us and our affiliate for certain distribution-related services to the Funds. PSD shall pay American Funds Distributors, Inc. at a rate of 0.16% of Purchase Payments attributable to the Master Funds for certain marketing assistance.

Replacement of Life Insurance or Annuities

The term “replacement” has a special meaning in the life insurance industry and is described more fully below. Before you make your purchase decision, we want you to understand how a replacement may impact your existing plan of insurance.

A policy “replacement” occurs when a new policy or contract is purchased and, in connection with the sale, an existing policy or contract is surrendered, lapsed, forfeited, assigned to the replacing insurer, otherwise terminated, or used in a financed purchase. A “financed purchase” occurs when the purchase of a new life insurance policy or annuity contract involves the use of funds obtained from the values of an existing life insurance policy or annuity contract through withdrawal, surrender or loan.

There are circumstances in which replacing your existing life insurance policy or annuity contract can benefit you. As a general rule, however, replacement is not in your best interest. Accordingly, you should make a careful comparison of the costs and benefits of your existing policy or contract and the proposed policy or contract to determine whether replacement is in your best interest.

Financial Statements

The statements of assets and liabilities of Separate Account A as of December 31, 2005, the related statements of operations for the year then ended, the statements of changes in net assets for each of the two years in the period then ended, and the financial highlights for each of the five years in the period then ended are incorporated by reference in the Statement of Additional Information from the Annual Report of Separate Account A dated December 31, 2005. Pacific Life’s consolidated financial statements as of December 31, 2005 and 2004 and for each of the three years in the period then ended December 31, 2005 are contained in the Statement of Additional Information.

THE GENERAL ACCOUNT

General Information

All amounts allocated to a fixed option become part of our General Account. Subject to applicable law, we exercise sole discretion over the investment of General Account assets, and bear the associated investment risk; you will not share in the investment experience of General Account assets.

Because of exemptive and exclusionary provisions, interests in the General Account under the Contract are not registered under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and the General Account has not been registered as an investment company under the 1940 Act. Any interest you have in a fixed option is not subject to these Acts, and we have been advised that the SEC staff has not reviewed disclosure in this Prospectus relating to any fixed option. This disclosure may, however, be subject to certain provisions of federal securities laws relating to the accuracy and completeness of statements made in prospectuses.

Guarantee Terms

When you allocate any portion of your Investments or Contract Value to a fixed option, we guarantee you an interest rate (a “Guaranteed Interest Rate”) for a specified period of time (a “Guarantee Term”) of up to one year. Each fixed option offers a separate Guaranteed Interest Rate and Guarantee Term. Guarantee Terms will be offered

 
89


Table of Contents


at our discretion. Presently, we offer Guarantee Terms of up to one year for any fixed option. You should specify into which fixed option, you want us to allocate your Purchase Payments, if any.

Guaranteed Interest Rates for a fixed option may be changed periodically for new allocations. Your allocation will receive the Guaranteed Interest Rate in effect for a fixed option on the effective date of your allocation. All Guaranteed Interest Rates will be expressed as annual effective rates; however, interest will accrue daily. The Guaranteed Interest Rate on a fixed option will remain in effect for the Guarantee Term and will never be less than an annual rate of 3%.

Withdrawals and Transfers

Prior to the Annuity Date, you may withdraw or transfer amounts from any fixed option to one or more of the other Variable Investment Options. In addition, no partial withdrawal or transfer (other than a monthly transfer under DCA Plus) may be made from a fixed option or within 30 days of the Contract Date. Currently, we are not requiring the 30-day waiting period on partial withdrawals and transfers, but we reserve the right to require the 30-day waiting period on partial withdrawals and transfers in the future. If your withdrawal leaves you with a Net Contract Value of less than $1,000, we have the right, at our option, to terminate your Contract and send you the withdrawal proceeds.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Amounts transferred or withdrawn from any fixed-rate General Account Investment Option may be delayed, as described under the ADDITIONAL INFORMATION— Timing of Payments and Transactions section of the Prospectus. Any amount delayed, so long as it is held under a fixed option, will continue to earn interest at the Guaranteed Interest Rate then in effect until that Guarantee Term has ended, and the minimum guaranteed interest rate of 3% thereafter, unless state law requires a greater rate be paid.

DCA Plus Fixed Option

Before your Annuity Date, you can allocate all or some of your investment(s) to the DCA Plus Fixed Option. The initial minimum amount that you may allocate to the DCA Plus Fixed Option is $5,000. You may not transfer any amount to the DCA Plus Fixed Option from any other Investment Option. All Investments allocated to the DCA Plus Fixed Option will earn interest at the then current Guaranteed Interest Rate declared by us.

The DCA Plus Fixed Option Value on any Business Day is the DCA Plus Fixed Option Value on the prior Business Day, increased by any additions to the DCA Plus Fixed Option on that day as a result of any:

  •  interest, plus
 
  •  Purchase Payments received by us then allocated to the DCA Plus Fixed Option, plus
 
  •  any additional amounts allocated to the DCA Plus Fixed Option,

and decreased by any deductions from the DCA Plus Fixed Option on that day as a result of any;

  •  transfers, including transfers to the Loan Account,
 
  •  withdrawals, including any applicable withdrawal charges,
 
  •  amounts applied to provide an annuity,
 
  •  annual fees,
 
  •  charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes, and
 
  •  proportionate reductions for annual charges for expenses relating to optional benefit riders attached to the Contract.

The DCA Plus program will automatically terminate at the end of your DCA Plus Guarantee Term, or upon the earliest of:

  •  the date death benefit proceeds become payable under the Contract,
 
  •  the date the Contract is terminated, or
 
90


Table of Contents


  •  the Annuity Date.

At the end of the DCA Plus program, upon receipt of an additional Purchase Payment that satisfies our minimum allocation requirements, you may request, in a form satisfactory to us, a new DCA Plus program.

We reserve the right to change the terms and conditions of the DCA Plus program, but not a DCA Plus program you already have in effect.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Guarantee Terms

The day that the first Investment allocation is made to the DCA Plus Fixed Option will begin the Guarantee Term. You can choose a Guarantee Term of up to one year. Currently, we offer Guarantee Terms of 6 or 12 months with monthly transfers on the same day of each month thereafter to the Variable Investment Options that you selected. The amount transferred each month is equal to your DCA Plus Fixed Option Value on that day divided by the remaining number of monthly transfers in the Guarantee Term.

  Example: On May 1, you submit a $10,000 Investment entirely to the DCA Plus Fixed Option at a then current Guaranteed Interest Rate of 5.00% with a Guarantee Term of 6 months. On June 1, the value of the DCA Plus Fixed Option is $10,041.52. On June 1, a transfer equal to $1,673.59 (10,041.52/6) will be made according to your DCA Plus transfer instructions. Your remaining DCA Plus Fixed Option Value after the transfer is $8,367.93. On July 1, your DCA Plus Fixed Option has now increased to $8,401.56. We will transfer $1,680.31 ($8,401.56/5) to the Variable Investment Options, leaving a remaining value of $6,721.25 in the DCA Plus Fixed Option.

During the Guarantee Term, you can allocate all or a part of any additional Investments to the DCA Plus Fixed Option. Additional allocations must be at least $250. Each additional allocation will be transferred to the Variable Investment Options you select over the remaining Guarantee Term. Transfers will be made from the DCA Plus Fixed Option Value attributed to the oldest Investment allocation and each subsequent investment in the order receive.

  Example: (using the previous example): On July 15, you allocate an additional $5,000 to the DCA Plus Option at a Guaranteed Interest Rate of 4.00%. On August 1, your DCA Plus Fixed Option Value has increased to $11,758.30. An amount equal to $2,939.58 ($11,758.30/4) is transferred from the DCA Plus Fixed Option to the Variable Investment Options. The remaining DCA Plus Fixed Option Value is $8,818.73.

Transfers

The minimum amount for the DCA Plus monthly transfer is $250. If a monthly DCA Plus transfer amount is less than $250, we may transfer your entire DCA Plus Fixed Option Value to the Variable Investment Options according to your most recent DCA Plus transfer instructions and automatically terminate your DCA Plus.

DCA Plus transfers must be made on a monthly basis to the Variable Investment Options. You cannot choose to transfer other than monthly. Unless otherwise instructed, any additional Investment we receive during a Guarantee Term will be allocated to the Investment Options, including the DCA Plus Fixed Option if so indicated, according to your most recent allocation instructions.

If the Owner dies while transfers are being made from the DCA Plus Fixed Option and the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, transfers will continue to be made from the DCA Plus Fixed Option to the selected Variable Investment Options, until the Guarantee Term ends.

Fixed Option

Subject to state approval, the Fixed Option is no longer available for new Contracts issued on or after November 1, 2002. All references to the Fixed Option in this Prospectus and in the Statement of Additional Information do not apply to such Contracts.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

Each allocation (or rollover) you make to the Fixed Option receives a Guarantee Term that begins on the day that allocation or rollover is effective and ends at the end of that Contract Year or, if earlier, on your Annuity Date. At

 
91


Table of Contents


the end of that Contract Year, we will roll over your Fixed Option Value on that day into a new Guarantee Term of one year (or, if shorter, the time remaining until your Annuity Date) at the then current Guaranteed Interest Rate, unless you instruct us otherwise.

  Example: Your Contract Anniversary is February 1. On February 1 of year 1, you allocate $1,000 to the Fixed Option and receive a Guarantee Term of one year and a Guaranteed Interest Rate of 5%. On August 1, you allocate another $500 to the Fixed Option and receive a Guaranteed Interest Rate of 6%. Through January 31, year 1, your first allocation of $1,000 earns 5% interest and your second allocation of $500 earns 6% interest. On February 1, year 2, a new interest rate may go into effect for your entire Fixed Option Value.

Withdrawals and Transfers

After the first Contract Anniversary, you may make one transfer or partial withdrawal from your Fixed Option during any Contract Year, except as provided under the dollar cost averaging, earnings sweep and pre-authorized withdrawal programs. You may make one transfer or one partial withdrawal within the 30 days after the end of each Contract Anniversary. Normally, you may transfer or withdraw up to one-third (33 1/3%) of your Fixed Option Value in any given Contract Year. However, in consecutive Contract Years you may transfer or withdraw up to one-third (33 1/3%) of your Fixed Option Value in one year; you may transfer or withdraw up to one-half (50%) of your remaining Fixed Option Value in the next year; and you may transfer or withdraw up to the entire amount (100%) of any remaining Fixed Option Value in the third year. In addition, if, as a result of a partial withdrawal or transfer, the Fixed Option Value is less than $500, we have the right, at our option, to transfer the entire remaining amount to your other Investment Options on a proportionate basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions.

We reserve the right to waive the restrictions that limit transfers from the Fixed Option to one transfer within the 30 days after the end of each Contract Anniversary. We also reserve the right to waive the limitations on the maximum amount you may transfer from the Fixed Option in any given Contract year. We may process requests for transfers from the Fixed Option that are within the maximum number of allowable transfers among the Investment Options each calendar year; i.e. transfers are limited to 25 for each calendar year.

See the APPENDIX A: STATE LAW VARIATIONS section in this Prospectus.

 
92


Table of Contents


TERMS USED IN THIS PROSPECTUS

Some of the terms we’ve used in this Prospectus may be new to you. We’ve identified them in the Prospectus by capitalizing the first letter of each word. You’ll find an explanation of what they mean below.

If you have any questions, please ask your registered representative or call us at 1-800-722-2333.

Account Value – The amount of your Contract Value allocated to a specified Variable Investment Option or, for Contracts Issued before November 1, 2002, the Fixed Option.

Annuitant – A person on whose life annuity payments may be determined. An Annuitant’s life may also be used to determine certain increases in death benefits, and to determine the Annuity Date. A Contract may name a single (“sole”) Annuitant or two (“Joint”) Annuitants, and may also name a “Contingent” Annuitant. If you name Joint Annuitants or a Contingent Annuitant, “the Annuitant” means the sole surviving Annuitant, unless otherwise stated.

Annuity Date – The date specified in your Contract, or the date you later elect, if any, for the start of annuity payments if the Annuitant (or Joint Annuitants) is (or are) still living and your Contract is in force; or if earlier, the date that annuity payments actually begin.

Annuity Option – Any one of the income options available for a series of payments after your Annuity Date.

Beneficiary – A person who may have a right to receive the death benefit payable upon the death of the Annuitant or a Contract Owner prior to the Annuity Date, or may have a right to receive remaining guaranteed annuity payments, if any, if the Annuitant dies after the Annuity Date.

Business Day – Any day on which the value of an amount invested in a Variable Investment Option is required to be determined, which currently includes each day that the New York Stock Exchange is open for trading and our administrative offices are open. The New York Stock Exchange and our administrative offices are closed on weekends and on the following holidays: New Year’s Day, Martin Luther King, Jr. Day, President’s Day, Good Friday, Memorial Day, July Fourth, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day, and the Friday before July Fourth or Christmas Day if that holiday falls on a Saturday, the Monday following New Year’s Day, July Fourth or Christmas Day if that holiday falls on a Sunday, unless unusual business conditions exist, such as the ending of a monthly or yearly accounting period. In this Prospectus, “day” or “date” means Business Day unless otherwise specified. If any transaction or event called for under a Contract is scheduled to occur on a day that is not a Business Day, such transaction or event will be deemed to occur on the next following Business Day unless otherwise specified. Any systematic pre-authorized transaction scheduled to occur on December 30 or December 31 where that day is not a Business Day will be deemed an order for the last Business Day of the calendar year and will be calculated using the applicable Subaccount Unit Value at the close of that Business Day. Special circumstances such as leap years and months with fewer than 31 days are discussed in the SAI.

Code – The Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

Contingent Annuitant – A person, if named in your Contract, who will become your sole surviving Annuitant if your existing sole Annuitant (or both Joint Annuitants) should die before your Annuity Date.

Contingent Owner – A person, if named in your Contract, who will succeed to the rights as a Contract Owner of your Contract if all named Contract Owners die before your Annuity Date.

Contract Anniversary – The same date, in each subsequent year, as your Contract Date.

Contract Date – The date we issue your Contract. Contract Years, Contract Semi-Annual Periods, Contract Quarters and Contract Months are measured from this date.

Contract Debt – As of the end of any given Business Day, the principal amount you have outstanding on any loan under your Contract, plus any accrued and unpaid interest. Loans are only available on certain Qualified Contracts.

Contract Owner, Owner, Policyholder, you, or your – Generally, a person who purchases a Contract and makes the Investments. A Contract Owner has all rights in the Contract, including the right to make withdrawals, designate and change beneficiaries, transfer amounts among Investment Options, and designate an Annuity Option. If your Contract names Joint Owners, both Joint Owners are Contract Owners and share all such rights. If there are Joint Owners, the Contract will be owned as Joint Tenants With Right of Survivorship and not as Tenants in Common.

Contract Value – As of the end of any Business Day, the sum of your Variable Account Value, the value of any other Investment Option added to the Contract by Rider or Endorsement, any fixed option value, and the Loan Account Value.

Contract Year – A year that starts on the Contract Date or on a Contract Anniversary.

DCA Plus Fixed Option – If you allocate all or part of your investments to the DCA Plus Fixed Option, such amounts are held in our General Account and receive interest at rates declared periodically (the “Guaranteed Interest Rate”), but not less than an annual rate of 3%.

DCA Plus Fixed Option Value – The aggregate of your Contract Value allocated to the DCA Plus Fixed Option.

Earnings – As of the end of any Business Day, your Earnings equal your Contract Value less your aggregate Investments, which are reduced by withdrawals of prior Investments.

Fixed Option – For Contracts issued before November 1, 2002, if you allocate all or part of your Investments or Contract Value to the Fixed Option, such amounts are held in our General Account and receive the Guaranteed Interest Rates declared periodically, but not less than an annual rate of 3%.

Fixed Option Value – For Contracts issued before November 1, 2002, the aggregate amount of your Contract Value allocated to the Fixed Option.

Fund – Pacific Select Fund.

General Account – Our General Account consists of all of our assets other than those assets allocated to Separate Account A or to any of our other separate accounts.

Guaranteed Interest Rate – The interest rate guaranteed at the time of allocation (or rollover) for the Guarantee Term on amounts allocated to the DCA Plus Fixed Option and, for Contracts issued before November 1, 2002, the Fixed Option. Each Guaranteed Interest Rate is expressed as an annual rate and interest is accrued daily. Each rate will not be less than an annual rate of 3%.

Guarantee Term – The period during which an amount you allocate to any available fixed option, earns a Guaranteed Interest Rate. This term is up to one-year for any fixed option.

Investment (“Premium Payment”) (“Purchase Payment”) – An amount paid to us by or on behalf of a Contract Owner as consideration for the benefits provided under the Contract.

 
93


Table of Contents


Investment Option – A Subaccount, any fixed option or any other Investment Option added to the Contract by Rider or Endorsement.

Joint Annuitant – If your Contract is a Non-Qualified Contract, you may name two Annuitants, called “Joint Annuitants,” in your application for your Contract. Special restrictions apply for Qualified Contracts.

Loan Account – The Account in which the amount equal to the principal amount of a loan and any interest accrued is held to secure any Contract Debt.

Loan Account Value – The amount, including any interest accrued, held in the Loan Account to secure any Contract Debt.

Net Contract Value – Your Contract Value less Contract Debt.

Non-Qualified Contract – A Contract other than a Qualified Contract.

Policyholder – The Contract Owner.

Portfolio – A separate portfolio of the Fund in which a Subaccount invests its assets.

Primary Annuitant – The individual that is named in your Contract, the events in the life of whom are of primary importance in affecting the timing or amount of the payout under the Contract.

Purchase Payment (“Premium Payment”) (“Investment”) – An amount paid to us by or on behalf of a Contract Owner as consideration for the benefits provided under the Contract.

Qualified Contract – A Contract that qualifies under the Code as an individual retirement annuity or account (“IRA”), or form thereof, or a Contract purchased by a Qualified Plan, qualifying for special tax treatment under the Code.

Qualified Plan – A retirement plan that receives favorable tax treatment under Section 401, 403, or 457 of the Code.

SEC – Securities and Exchange Commission.

Separate Account A (the “Separate Account”) – A separate account of ours registered as a unit investment trust under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended (the “1940 Act”).

Subaccount – An investment division of the Separate Account. Each Subaccount invests its assets in shares of a corresponding Portfolio.

Subaccount Annuity Unit – Subaccount Annuity Units (or “Annuity Units”) are used to measure variation in variable annuity payments. To the extent you elect to convert all or some of your Contract Value into variable annuity payments, the amount of each annuity payment (after the first payment) will vary with the value and number of Annuity Units in each Subaccount attributed to any variable annuity payments. At annuitization (after any applicable premium taxes and/or other taxes are paid), the amount annuitized to a variable annuity determines the amount of your first variable annuity payment and the number of Annuity Units credited to your annuity in each Subaccount. The value of Subaccount Annuity Units, like the value of Subaccount Units, is expected to fluctuate daily, as described in the definition of Unit Value.

Subaccount Unit – Before your Annuity Date, each time you allocate an amount to a Subaccount, your Contract is credited with a number of Subaccount Units in that Subaccount. These Units are used for accounting purposes to measure your Account Value in that Subaccount. The value of Subaccount Units is expected to fluctuate daily, as described in the definition of Unit Value.

Unit Value – The value of a Subaccount Unit (“Subaccount Unit Value”) or Subaccount Annuity Unit (“Subaccount Annuity Unit Value”). Unit Value of any Subaccount is subject to change on any Business Day in much the same way that the value of a mutual fund share changes each day. The fluctuations in value reflect the investment results, expenses of and charges against the Portfolio in which the Subaccount invests its assets. Fluctuations also reflect charges against the Separate Account. Changes in Subaccount Annuity Unit Values also reflect an additional factor that adjusts Subaccount Annuity Unit Values to offset our Annuity Option Table’s implicit assumption of an annual investment return of 5%. The effect of this assumed investment return is explained in detail in the SAI. Unit Value of a Subaccount Unit or Subaccount Annuity Unit on any Business Day is measured as of the time of the close of the New York Stock Exchange on that Business Day, which usually closes at 4:00 p.m., Eastern time, although it occasionally closes earlier.

Variable Account Value – The aggregate amount of your Contract Value allocated to all Subaccounts.

Variable Investment Option – A Subaccount (also called a Variable Account).

 
94


Table of Contents


CONTENTS OF THE STATEMENT OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

           
Page

PERFORMANCE
    1  
 
Total Returns
    1  
 
Yields
    2  
 
Performance Comparisons and Benchmarks
    3  
 
Power of Tax Deferral
    4  
 
DISTRIBUTION OF THE CONTRACTS
    5  
 
Pacific Select Distributors, Inc.
    5  
 
THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT
    6  
 
Calculating Subaccount Unit Values
    6  
 
Variable Annuity Payment Amounts
    7  
 
Redemptions of Remaining Guaranteed Variable Payments Under Options 2 and 4
    9  
 
Corresponding Dates
    9  
 
Age and Sex of Annuitant
    10  
 
Systematic Transfer Programs
    10  
 
Pre-Authorized Withdrawals
    12  
 
Death Benefit
    13  
 
Joint Annuitants on Qualified Contracts
    13  
 
1035 Exchanges
    13  
 
Safekeeping of Assets
    13  
 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
    13  
 
INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
    14  
 
95


Table of Contents


APPENDIX A:

STATE LAW VARIATIONS

YOUR INVESTMENT OPTIONS

Your Fixed Options

For Contracts issued before November 1, 2002, the Fixed Option is not available in Alabama, Massachusetts and Oregon. If you use the DCA Plus and terminate the program, any remaining balance in the DCA Plus Fixed Option will be transferred to the Money Market Investment Option, unless you provide us with other transfer instructions.

HOW YOUR INVESTMENTS ARE ALLOCATED

Investing in Variable Investment Options— Calculating Subaccount Unit Values

For Contracts issued in the states of Oregon and Washington, the Net Investment Factor is determined without regard to any per share charge or credit for any income taxes, other taxes, or amounts set aside during that valuation period as a reserve for any income and/or any other taxes for which we determine to have resulted from the operations of the Subaccount or contract, and/or any taxes attributable, directly or indirectly, to Purchase Payments.

Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions— Market-timing Restrictions

For Contracts issued in the states of Connecticut, Oregon and Utah, we may refuse or limit transfers if it is instructed by the underlying fund managers that frequent or programmed transfers initiated by market timers would be disruptive to the fund and not be in the best interest of all Contract Owners.

CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS

Withdrawal Charge

For Contracts issued in the state of New Jersey, we cannot waive any withdrawal charge on withdrawals to meet required minimum distributions for Qualified Contracts as they apply to amounts held under the Contract.

For Contracts issued in the states of Massachusetts, New Jersey and Texas, we cannot waive any withdrawal charge on full or partial withdrawals if the Owner or Annuitant has been diagnosed with a medically determinable condition that results in a life expectancy of twelve (12) months or less and/or has been confined to an accredited nursing home.

If your Contract was issued in the state of Pennsylvania, we cannot waive any withdrawal charge on a full or partial withdrawal, if the Annuitant or Owner is first diagnosed with a medically determined condition that results in a life expectancy of twelve months or less, before the first Contract Anniversary.

Withdrawal Charge— Withdrawal Enhancements

For Contracts issued in the states of Connecticut, New Jersey, Oregon and Texas, we cannot calculate the withdrawal charge on more favorable terms than as otherwise described under the provisions of the Contract.

Optional Rider Charges

Lifetime Income Access Plus

For Lifetime Income Access Plus Riders issued in the state of New Jersey, in the event the portion of the Lifetime Income Access Plus Annual Charge we deduct from any of our fixed-rate General Account Investment Options is higher than the annual interest credited in excess of that option’s minimum guaranteed interest rate, the portion of the Lifetime Income Access Plus Annual Charge that exceeds the excess interest amount will be waived.

 
96


Table of Contents


For Lifetime Income Access Plus Riders issued in the state of Washington, the Lifetime Income Access Plus Annual Charge is deducted from your Variable Investment Options on a proportionate basis and is equal to 0.40% multiplied by your Variable Account Value on the day the charge is deducted. No portion of the Lifetime Income Access Plus Annual Charge will be deducted from any fixed-rate General Account Investment Option.

Income Access Plus

For Income Access Plus Riders issued in the state of New Jersey, in the event the portion of the Income Access Plus Annual Charge we deduct from any of our fixed-rate General Account Investment Options is higher than the annual interest credited in excess of that option’s minimum guaranteed interest rate, the portion of the Income Access Plus Annual Charge that exceeds the excess interest amount will be waived.

For Income Access Plus Riders issued in the state of Washington, the Income Access Plus Annual Charge is deducted from your Variable Investment Options on a proportionate basis and is equal to 0.40% multiplied by your Variable Account Value on the day the charge is deducted. No portion of the Income Access Plus Annual Charge will be deducted from any fixed-rate General Account Investment Option.

Income Access

For Income Access Riders issued in the state of New Jersey, in the event the portion of the Income Access Annual Charge we deduct from any of our fixed-rate General Account Investment Options is higher than the annual interest credited in excess of that option’s minimum guaranteed interest rate, the portion of the Income Access Annual Charge that exceeds the excess interest amount will be waived.

For Income Access Riders issued in the state of Washington, the Income Access Annual Charge is deducted from your Variable Investment Options on a proportionate basis and is equal to 0.40% (0.30% if the Effective Date of the Rider is before March 1, 2004) multiplied by your Variable Account Value on the day the charge is deducted. No portion of the GIA Annual Charge will be deducted from any fixed-rate General Account Investment Option.

Guaranteed Protection Advantage 5 (GPA 5)

For GPA 5 Riders issued in the state of New Jersey, in the event the portion of the Guaranteed Protection Charge we deduct from any of our fixed-rate General Account Investment Options is higher than the annual interest credited in excess of that option’s minimum guaranteed interest rate, the portion of the Guaranteed Protection Charge that exceeds the excess interest amount will be waived.

For GPA 5 Riders issued in the state of Washington, the Guaranteed Protection Charge is deducted from your Variable Investment Options on a proportionate basis and is equal to 0.25% of your Variable Account Value on the day the charge is deducted. No portion of the Guaranteed Protection Charge will be deducted from any fixed-rate General Account Investment Option.

Guaranteed Protection Advantage (GPA)

For GPA Riders issued in the state of New Jersey, in the event the portion of the Guaranteed Protection Charge we deduct from any of our fixed-rate General Account Investment Options is higher than the annual interest credited in excess of that option’s minimum guaranteed interest rate, the portion of the Guaranteed Protection Charge that exceeds the excess interest amount will be waived.

Guaranteed Income Advantage Plus (GIA Plus)

For GIA Plus Riders issued in the state of New Jersey, in the event the portion of the GIA Annual Charge we deduct from any of our fixed-rate General Account Investment Options is higher than the annual interest credited in excess of that option’s minimum guaranteed interest rate, the portion of the GIA Annual Charge that exceeds the excess interest amount will be waived.

For GIA Plus Riders issued in the state of Washington, the GIA Annual Charge is deducted from your Variable Investment Options on a proportionate basis and is equal to 0.50% multiplied by the greater of the Guaranteed Income Base or the Variable Account Value on the day the charge is deducted. No portion of the GIA Annual Charge will be deducted from any fixed-rate General Account Investment Option.

 
97


Table of Contents


Guaranteed Income Advantage 5 (GIA 5)

For GIA 5 Riders issued in the state of New Jersey, in the event the portion of the GIA 5 Charge we deduct from any of our fixed-rate General Account Investment Options is higher than the annual interest credited in excess of that option’s minimum guaranteed interest rate, the portion of the GIA 5 Charge that exceeds the excess interest amount will be waived.

For GIA 5 Riders issued in the state of Washington, the GIA 5 Charge is deducted from your Variable Investment Options on a proportionate basis and is equal to 0.40% multiplied by your Variable Account Value on the day the charge is deducted. No portion of the GIA 5 Charge will be deducted from any fixed-rate General Account Investment Option.

Guaranteed Income Advantage II (GIA II)

For GIA II Riders issued in the state of New Jersey, in the event the portion of the GIA II Charge we deduct from any of our fixed-rate General Account Investment Options is higher than the annual interest credited in excess of that option’s minimum guaranteed interest rate, the portion of the GIA II Charge that exceeds the excess interest amount will be waived.

For GIA II Riders issued in the state of Washington, the GIA II Charge is deducted from your Variable Investment Options on a proportionate basis and is equal to 0.70% multiplied by your Variable Account Value on the day the charge is deducted. No portion of the GIA II Charge will be deducted from any fixed-rate General Account Investment Option.

Premium Taxes

“Premium taxes” do not apply to Contracts issued in the states of New Mexico, Oregon, Pennsylvania and Washington.

For Contracts issued in the state of Pennsylvania, should premium taxes become payable we will notify you of the amount of such tax and the effect on any payment.

ANNUITIZATION, DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS

Annuitization

For Contracts issued in the state of New Jersey, there is no minimum Conversion Amount.

For Contracts issued in the state of Texas, the Conversion Amount must be at least $2,000.

For Contracts issued in the states of Oregon and Texas, any portion of the Net Contract Value not converted to provide annuity payments on the Annuity Date, may not be used to continue the Contract.

Choosing Your Annuity Date

For Contracts issued in the states of Oregon and Texas, any portion of the Net Contract Value not converted to provide annuity payments on the Annuity Date, may not be used to continue the Contract.

Default Annuity Date and Options

For Contracts issued in the state of New Jersey, the net amount applied to provide annuity payments is not subject to any minimum amount.

For Contracts issued in the state of Texas, the net amount applied to provide annuity payments must be at least $2,000.

Choosing Your Annuity Option— Annuity Options

For Contracts issued in the state of Oregon, variable annuity payments, in whole or in part, are not available under the Life with Period Certain and the Period Certain Only Annuity Options.

 
98


Table of Contents


Your Annuity Payments— Frequency of Payments

For Contracts issued in the state of Texas, your initial annuity payment must be at least $20.

Your Annuity Payments— Amount of the First Payment

For Contracts issued in the state of Montana, the basis of computations used in determining the annuity rates contained in the Contract are based on the age of the payee, without regard to gender.

Death Benefits

For Contracts issued in the states of Minnesota and Oregon, proof of death is defined to mean: (a) a copy of a certified death certificate; (b) a copy of a certified decree of a court of competent jurisdiction as to a finding of death; (c) a written statement by a medical doctor who attended the deceased; or (d) any other proof satisfactory to us.

Death Benefits— Death Benefit Proceeds

For Contracts issued in the states of Connecticut, North Dakota and West Virginia, interest (at an effective annual rate of 3%) is paid on the death benefit proceeds from the date of death until such proceeds are paid or applied under an Annuity Option.

For Contracts issued in the states of Illinois and North Dakota, death benefit proceeds must be paid not later than two (2) months after our receipt of due proof of death.

For Contracts issued in the state of Montana, if payment of the death benefit proceeds is not made within thirty (30) days after our receipt of proof of death, interest shall be paid on the death benefit proceeds from the 30th day until the date the proceeds are paid or applied under an Annuity Option. The interest rate is the discount rate on 90-day commercial paper in effect at the federal reserve bank in the ninth (9th) federal reserve district at the time of proof of death.

Death Benefits— Optional Premier Death Benefit Rider (PDBR)

If your Contract was issued in the state of Texas or Washington before February 2, 2003, and you purchased the optional Premier Death Benefit Rider (“PDBR”), the effective annual rate of interest used in determining the Death Benefit Amount under the optional Premier Death Benefit Rider is 5%, which is equivalent to a daily factor of 1.00013368.

Death Benefits— Optional Earnings Enhancement Guarantee (EEG) Rider— Purchasing the EEG Rider

The optional EEG Rider is not available for purchase in the states of Minnesota and Washington.

WITHDRAWALS

Optional Withdrawals

For Contracts issued in the state of Maryland, if your partial withdrawal leaves you with a Net Contract Value of less than $1,000, we have the right, at our option, to refuse to make the withdrawal.

For Contracts issued in the state of Texas, if your partial withdrawal leaves you with a Net Contract Value of less than $500, we have the right, at our option to terminate your Contract and send you the withdrawal proceeds.

Right to Cancel (“Free Look”)

There may be extended Free Look periods in some states for replacement business. Please consult with your registered representative if you have any questions regarding your state’s Free Look period.

For residents of the state of Arizona sixty-five (65) years of age or older, the Free Look period is a 30-day period beginning on the day you receive your Contract.

For residents of the state of California sixty (60) years of age or older, the Free Look period is a 30-day period beginning on the day you receive your Contract.

 
99


Table of Contents


If you are a California applicant age 60 or older and your Contract is delivered or issued for delivery on or after July 1, 2004, you must elect, at the time you apply for your Contract, to receive a return of either your Purchase Payments or your Contract Value proceeds if you exercise your Right to Cancel and return your Contract to us.

If you elect to receive the return of Purchase Payments option, the following will apply:

  •  We will allocate all or any portion of any Purchase Payment we receive to any available fixed option if you instruct us to do so. We will allocate all or any portion of any Purchase Payment designated for any Variable Investment Option to the Money Market Subaccount until the Free Look Transfer Date. The Free Look Transfer Date is 30 days from the Contract Date. On the Free Look Transfer Date, we will automatically transfer your Money Market Subaccount Value according to the instructions on your application, or your most recent instruction, if any. This automatic transfer to the Variable Investment Options according to your initial allocation instruction is excluded from the Transfer limitations. See “HOW YOUR INVESTMENTS ARE ALLOCATED— Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions” section in the Prospectus.
 
  •  If you specifically instruct us to allocate all or any portion of any additional Purchase Payments we receive to any Variable Investment Option other than the Money Market Subaccount before the Free Look Transfer Date, you will automatically change your election to the return of your Contract Value proceeds option. This will automatically cancel your election of the “return of Purchase Payments” option for the entire Contract.
 
  •  If you request a transfer of all or any portion of your Contract Value from the Money Market Subaccount to any other Variable Investment Option before the Free Look Transfer Date, you will automatically change your election to the return of your Contract Value proceeds option. This will automatically cancel your election of the “return of Purchase Payments” option for the entire Contract.
 
  •  If you exercise your Right to Cancel, we will send you your Purchase Payments.

If you elect the return of Contract Value proceeds option, the following will apply:

  •  We will immediately allocate any Purchase Payments we receive to the Investment Options you select on your application or your most recent instructions, if any.
 
  •  If you exercise your Right to Cancel, we will send you your Contract Value proceeds described in the Right to Cancel (“Free Look”) section of this prospectus.
 
  •  Once you elect this option, it may not be changed.

For Contracts issued in the state of Connecticut, cancellation of the Contract prior to delivery will result in the Contract being void from the beginning and the return of all Purchase Payments received.

For Contracts issued in the states of Idaho and North Dakota, the Free Look period is a 20-day period beginning on the day you receive your Contract.

For Contracts issued in the state of New Mexico, the Free Look period is a 15-day period beginning on the day you receive your Contract.

For Contracts issued in the District of Columbia and in the states of Georgia, Hawaii, Idaho, Iowa, Louisiana, Massachusetts, Michigan, Missouri, Nebraska, North Carolina, Oklahoma, South Carolina, Utah, Virginia, Washington and West Virginia, if the Contract is cancelled within the Free Look period, we are required to return all Purchase Payments received.

For Contracts issued in the state of Minnesota, if the Contract is cancelled within the Free Look period, the Contract Value will be refunded within ten (10) days of our receipt of the notice of cancellation and the returned Contract.

For Contracts issued in the state of Oklahoma, if the Contract is cancelled within the Free Look period and we do not return all Purchase Payments received within thirty (30) days from the date of cancellation, we will pay interest on such Purchase Payments as required by Oklahoma law.

 
100


Table of Contents


OTHER OPTIONAL RIDERS

Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider— Purchasing the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider

For Lifetime Income Access Plus Riders issued in the state of Pennsylvania, if you purchase the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider after your Contract is issued, you may cancel the rider within 10-days beginning on the day you receive the rider by returning the rider to us at our Service Center. Upon our receipt of the returned rider, we will deem the rider void from the beginning and no Lifetime Income Access Plus Annual Charge will be deducted.

Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider— Subsequent Purchase Payments

For Lifetime Income Access Plus Riders issued in the state of New Jersey, we will not accept any Purchase Payment on and after the first (1st) Contract Anniversary, measured from the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, that results in the total of all Purchase Payments received since that Contract Anniversary to exceed $100,000.

Income Access Plus Rider— Purchasing the Income Access Plus Rider

For Income Access Plus Riders issued in the state of Pennsylvania, if the Income Access Plus Rider was purchased after your Contract was issued, you may cancel the rider within 10-days beginning on the day you receive the rider by returning the rider to us at our Service Center. Upon our receipt of the returned rider, we will deem the rider void from the beginning and no Income Access Plus Annual Charge will be deducted.

Income Access Rider— Subsequent Purchase Payments

For Income Access Riders issued in the states of Connecticut, New Jersey, Oregon and Texas, we cannot restrict additional Purchase Payments.

Guaranteed Income Advantage Plus (GIA Plus) Rider— How the GIA Plus Rider Works

For GIA Plus Riders issued in the state of Montana, the basis of computations used in determining the annuity rates contained in the rider are based on the age of the payee, without regard to gender.

Guaranteed Income Advantage Plus (GIA Plus) Rider— Limitation on Subsequent Purchase Payments

For GIA Plus Riders issued in the states of Florida and Oregon, we will not accept any Purchase Payment on and after the first (1st) Contract Anniversary, measured from the Rider Effective Date, that results in the total of all Purchase Payments received after that Contract Anniversary to exceed $100,000.

Guaranteed Income Advantage 5 (GIA 5) Rider— Purchasing the GIA 5 Rider

For GIA 5 Riders issued in the state of Georgia, the rider is referred to as the “Guaranteed Income Rider” in the Contract’s rider.

The GIA 5 Rider is not available for purchase in the state of Minnesota.

Guaranteed Income Advantage 5 (GIA 5) Rider— How the GIA 5 Rider Works

For GIA 5 Riders issued in the state of Montana, the basis of computations used in determining the annuity rates contained in the rider are based on the age of the payee, without regard to gender.

Guaranteed Income Advantage II (GIA II) Rider— Purchasing the GIA II Rider

For GIA II Riders issued in the state of Georgia, the rider is referred to as the “Guaranteed Income Rider” in the Contract’s rider.

The GIA II Rider is not available for purchase in the state of Minnesota.

Guaranteed Income Advantage II (GIA II) Rider— How the GIA II Rider Works

For GIA II Riders issued in the state of Montana, the basis of computations used in determining the annuity rates contained in the rider are based on the age of the payee, without regard to gender.

 
101


Table of Contents


Guaranteed Income Advantage (GIA) Rider— Purchasing the GIA Rider

The GIA Rider is not available for purchase in the state of Oregon.

For GIA Riders issued in the state of Pennsylvania, if the GIA Rider was purchased after your Contract was issued, you may cancel the rider within 10-days beginning on the day you receive the rider by returning the rider to us at our Service Center. Upon our receipt of the returned rider, we will deem the rider void from the beginning and no GIA Annual Charge will be deducted.

Guaranteed Income Advantage (GIA) Rider— How the GIA Rider Works

For GIA Riders issued in the state of Montana, the basis of computations used in determining the annuity rates contained in the rider are based on the age of the payee, without regard to gender.

FEDERAL TAX STATUS

For Contracts issued in the states of Michigan, Oregon, Pennsylvania, South Carolina and Washington, your consent is required for any changes to the Contract, including changes to maintain the Contract’s qualified status.

Qualified Contracts

If your Contract is issued in the state of Virginia and your Contract is a “Qualified Contract”, your plan is intended to qualify under the Internal Revenue Code for tax-favored status. Language contained in the Contract referring to federal tax statutes or rules is informational and instructional and such language is not subject to approval or disapproval by the insurance supervisory official of the state in which the Contract is issued for delivery. Your qualifying status rather than the insurance contract is the controlling factor as to whether your funds will receive tax favored treatment. Please ask your tax advisor if you have any questions as to whether or not you qualify.

Qualified Contracts— Loans

For Contracts issued in the states of Connecticut, Oregon and Wisconsin, the loan interest rate for Contracts issued under a Qualified Plan subject to the requirements of Title 1 of ERISA, will be an annual rate, set at the time the loan is made, equal to the higher of 4% or the Moody’s Corporate Bond Yield Average-Monthly Average Corporates, as published by Moody’s Investors Service, Inc., or its successor.

For Contracts issued in the state of Wisconsin, the interest rate we charge may be increased if the loan interest rate increases by 1/2% or more from that charged in the preceding Contract Year. The interest rate we charge will be decreased if the loan interest rate decreases by 1/2% or more from that charged in the preceding Contract Year.

Qualified Contracts— Loan Terms

For Contracts issued in the state of New Jersey, the minimum loan amount is $500.

For Contracts issued in the states of Pennsylvania and Vermont, there is no maximum loan amount. However, if the amount of the loan taken exceeds 50% of the Contract Value; or $50,000 less the highest outstanding Contract Debt during the 12-month period immediately preceding the effective date of the loan, you may be subject to a tax penalty or other adverse tax consequences.

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Changes to Your Contract— Contract Owner(s) and Contingent Owner

For Contracts issued in the states of Michigan, Oregon, Pennsylvania, South Carolina and Washington, your consent is required for any changes to the Contract, including changes to maintain the Contract’s qualified status.

Inquiries and Submitting Forms and Requests

For Contracts issued in the state of New Jersey, we cannot require that you provide us with signature guarantees for any instruction, request or other document you may send to our Service Center.

 
102


Table of Contents


Timing of Payments and Transactions

For Contracts issued in the state of Oregon, regulatory approval is required before amounts withdrawn from any fixed-rate General Account Investment Option are delayed. We may not delay payment of any loans if such loan payments are use to pay premiums to us.

For Contracts issued in the state of West Virginia, amounts withdrawn from any fixed-rate General Account Investment Option may be delayed for up to thirty days after the request is effective.

Confirmations, Statements and Other Reports to Contract Owners

For Contracts issued in the state of Maryland, information shown on the reports to Contract Owners must be for a period ending not more than two (2) months prior to the date of mailing.

For Contracts issued in the state of New Jersey, after the Annuity Date and if annuity payments are made on a variable basis, we will provide you with an annual report that provides a reconciliation of annuity payments, showing the annuity unit values listed by Subaccount.

For Contracts issued in the states of Oregon and Texas, information shown on the reports to Contract Owners must be for a period ending not more than four (4) months prior to the date of mailing.

THE GENERAL ACCOUNT

General Information— Withdrawals and Transfers

For Contracts issued in the state of Maryland, if your partial withdrawal leaves you with a Net Contract Value of less than $1,000, we have the right, at our option, to refuse to make the withdrawal.

For Contracts issued in the state of Texas, if your partial withdrawal leaves you with a Net Contract Value of less than $500, we have the right, at our option to terminate your Contract and send you the withdrawal proceeds.

DCA Plus Fixed Option

For Contracts issued in the state of Washington, the DCA Plus Fixed Option is referred to as the “DCA Plus Option” in the Contract’s rider.

Fixed Option

For Contracts issued before November 1, 2002, the Fixed Option is not available in Alabama, Massachusetts and Oregon.

Fixed Option— Withdrawals and Transfers

For Contracts issued in the state of Maryland, if your partial withdrawal leaves you with a Net Contract Value of less than $1,000, we have the right, at our option, to refuse to make the withdrawal.

For Contracts issued in the state of Texas, if your partial withdrawal leaves you with a Net Contract Value of less than $500, we have the right, at our option to terminate your Contract and send you the withdrawal proceeds.

 
103


Table of Contents


APPENDIX B:

LIFETIME INCOME ACCESS PLUS RIDER &

INCOME ACCESS PLUS RIDER
SAMPLE CALCULATIONS

The numeric examples shown in this section are based on certain assumptions. They have been provided to assist in understanding the benefits provided by this Rider and to demonstrate how Purchase Payments received and withdrawals made from the Contract prior to the Annuity Date affect the values and benefits under this Rider over an extended period of time. These examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.

Examples 1 through 5 apply to the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider and the Income Access Plus Rider.

Example #1—Income Access Credit; No Subsequent Purchase Payments; No Withdrawals; No Reset in Remaining Protected Balance.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

  •  Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
 
  •  No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
 
  •  No withdrawals taken.
 
  •  No reset of the Remaining Protected Balance
                                         

Beginning Income Protected Protected Remaining
of Contract Purchase Contract Value Access Payment Payment Protected
Year Payment Withdrawal after Activity Credit Base Amount Balance

    1   $100,000       $100,000           $100,000   $5,000   $100,000    
    2           $103,000     $6,000     $106,000   $5,300   $106,000    
    3           $106,090     $6,000     $112,000   $5,600   $112,000    
    4           $109,273     $6,000     $118,000   $5,900   $118,000    
    5           $112,551     $6,000     $124,000   $6,200   $124,000    
    6           $115,927     $6,000     $130,000   $6,500   $130,000    
    7           $119,405     $0     $130,000   $6,500   $130,000    
    8           $122,987     $0     $130,000   $6,500   $130,000    
    9           $126,677     $0     $130,000   $6,500   $130,000    
    10           $130,477     $0     $130,000   $6,500   $130,000    
    11           $134,392     $0     $130,000   $6,500   $130,000    

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:

  •  Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Remaining Protected Balance = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000

Since no withdrawal occurred prior to the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 6, an Income Access Credit of $6,000 (6% of initial Remaining Protected Balance) is added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on each Contract Anniversary up to the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 6. As a result, on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 6, the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance are equal to $130,000 and the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $6,500 (5% of $130,000).

No Income Access Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary after the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 6, as no reset in the Remaining Protected Balance was assumed.

In addition to the Initial Purchase Payment, the Contract Value is further subject to increases and/or decreases during each Contract Year as a result of additional amounts credited, charges, fees and other deductions, and increases and/or decreases in the investment performance of the Variable Account.

 
104


Table of Contents


Example #2—Subsequent Purchase Payment.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

  •  Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
 
  •  A subsequent Purchase Payment of $50,000 is received during Contract Year 2.
 
  •  No withdrawals taken.
                                         

Beginning Income Protected Protected Remaining
of Contract Purchase Contract Value Access Payment Payment Protected
Year Payment Withdrawal after Activity Credit Base Amount Balance

    1     $100,000         $100,000       $100,000   $5,000   $100,000    
    2               $103,000   $6,000   $106,000   $5,300   $106,000    
    Activity     $50,000         $154,534       $156,000   $7,800   $156,000    
    3               $156,834   $9,000   $165,000   $8,250   $165,000    

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:

  •  Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Remaining Protected Balance = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000

Since no withdrawal occurred prior to the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 2, an Income Access Credit of $6,000 (6% of Initial Remaining Protected Balance) is added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on that Contract Anniversary, increasing both to $106,000. As a result, the Protected Payment Amount on that Contract Anniversary is equal to $5,300 (5% of the Protected Payment Base on that Contract Anniversary).

Immediately after the $50,000 subsequent Purchase Payment during Contract Year 2, the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance are increased by the Purchase Payment amount to $156,000 ($106,000 + $50,000). The Protected Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment is equal to $7,800 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the Purchase Payment since there are no withdrawals during that Contract Year).

Since no withdrawal occurred prior to the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 3, an Income Access Credit of $9,000 (6% of Initial Remaining Protected Balance plus 6% of the $50,000 subsequent Purchase Payment) is added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on that Contract Anniversary, increasing both to $165,000. As a result, the Protected Payment Amount on that Contract Anniversary is equal to $8,250 (5% of the Protected Payment Base on that Contract Anniversary).

 
105


Table of Contents


Example #3—Withdrawal Not Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

  •  Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
 
  •  No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
 
  •  A withdrawal of $5,000 is taken during Contract Year 2.
                                                 

Beginning Income Protected Protected Remaining
of Contract Purchase Contract Value Access Payment Payment Protected
Year Payment Withdrawal after Activity Credit Base Amount Balance

    1   $100,000         $100,000             $100,000     $5,000     $100,000    
    2             $103,000       $6,000     $106,000     $5,300     $106,000    
    Activity       $5,000     $99,534             $106,000     $300     $101,000    
    3             $101,016       $0     $106,000     $5,300     $101,000    
    4             $104,046       $0     $106,000     $5,300     $101,000    

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:

  •  Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Remaining Protected Balance = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000

Since no withdrawal occurred prior to the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 2, an Income Access Credit of $6,000 (6% of Initial Remaining Protected Balance) is added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on that Contract Anniversary, increasing both to $106,000. As a result, the Protected Payment Amount on that Contract Anniversary is equal to $5,300 (5% of the Protected Payment Base on that Contract Anniversary).

Because the $5,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount ($5,300):

  (a)  the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged;
 
  (b)  the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of the withdrawal to $101,000 ($106,000 – $5,000); and

  (c)  the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $300 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the withdrawal (5% of $106,000 = $5,300), less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year ($5,000)).

Since a withdrawal occurred during Contract Year 2, no Income Access Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary following the withdrawal.

 
106


Table of Contents


Example #4—Withdrawals Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

  •  Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
 
  •  No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
 
  •  Two separate withdrawals of $5,000 and $3,000 are taken during Contract Year 2.
                                                         

Beginning Income Protected Protected Remaining
of Contract Purchase Contract Value Access Payment Payment Protected
Year Payment Withdrawal after Activity Credit Base Amount Balance

    1   $100,000         $100,000               $100,000       $5,000       $100,000      
    2             $103,000       $6,000       $106,000       $5,300       $106,000      
    Activity       $5,000     $99,534               $106,000       $300       $101,000      
    Activity       $3,000     $97,272               $97,272       $0       $97,272      
    3             $97,993       $0       $97,272       $4,864       $97,272      
    4             $100,933       $0       $97,272       $4,864       $97,272      

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:

  •  Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Remaining Protected Balance = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000

Since no withdrawal occurred prior to the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 2, an Income Access Credit of $6,000 (6% of Initial Remaining Protected Balance) is added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on that Contract Anniversary, increasing both to $106,000. As a result, the Protected Payment Amount on that Contract Anniversary is equal to $5,300 (5% of the Protected Payment Base on that Contract Anniversary).

Because the $5,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount ($5,300):

  (a)  the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged;
 
  (b)  the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of the withdrawal to $101,000 ($106,000 - $5,000); and

  (c)  the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $300 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the withdrawal (5% of $106,000 = $5,300), less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year ($5,000)).

Because the $3,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($3,000 > $300), the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance immediately after the withdrawal are adjusted to the lesser of:

  (a)  the Contract Value immediately after the withdrawal ($97,272); or
 
  (b)  the Remaining Protected Balance immediately prior to the withdrawal, less the withdrawal amount ($101,000 - $3,000 = $98,000).

The Protected Payment Amount immediately after the withdrawal is equal to $0 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the withdrawal (5% of $97,272 = $4,864), less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year ($8,000), but not less than zero).

Since a withdrawal occurred during Contract Year 2, no Income Access Credit will be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary following the withdrawal.

 
107


Table of Contents


Example #5—Reset in Remaining Protected Balance.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

  •  Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
 
  •  No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
 
  •  No withdrawals taken.
 
  •  Reset in the Remaining Protected Balance at the Beginning of Contract Year 4.
                                     

Beginning Income Protected Protected Remaining
of Contract Purchase Contract Value Access Payment Payment Protected
Year Payment Withdrawal after Activity Credit Base Amount Balance

    1   $100,000       $100,000       $100,000   $5,000   $100,000    
    2           $110,000   $6,000   $106,000   $5,300   $106,000    
    3           $121,000   $6,000   $112,000   $5,600   $112,000    
    4           $133,100   $6,000   $118,000   $5,900   $118,000    
    (Prior to Reset)                                
    4           $133,100       $133,100   $6,655   $133,100    
    (After Reset)                                
    5           $146,410   $7,986   $141,086   $7,054   $141,086    

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:

  •  Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Remaining Protected Balance = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000

On the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 4, the Contract Value ($133,100) is greater than the Remaining Protected Balance ($118,000). With the reset in Remaining Protected Balance, the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance are set equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. As a result, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $6,655 after the reset.

After the reset in Remaining Protected Balance, eligibility for any Income Access Credit will be based on the most recent Reset Date. That is, an Income Access Credit may be added to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on up to five additional Contract Anniversaries if certain conditions are met.

The reset in Remaining Protected Balance may result in an increase in the annual Income Access Charge percentage.

The reset in Remaining Protected Balance may also result in a lower Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance, Protected Payment Amount and Income Access Credit.

Example 6 applies to the Lifetime Income Access Plus Rider only.

Example #6—Lifetime Income

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

  •  Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
 
  •  No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
 
  •  Owner is age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was taken
 
  •  Withdrawals, each equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base are taken each Contract Year.
 
  •  No reset in the Remaining Protected Balance is assumed during the life of the Rider.
 
108


Table of Contents


                                                         

Contract End of Year Annual Protected Protected Remaining
Year Withdrawal Contract Value Credit Payment Base Payment Amount Protected Balance

    1   $ 5,000       $96,489     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $95,000      
    2   $ 5,000       $94,384     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $90,000      
    3   $ 5,000       $92,215     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $85,000      
    4   $ 5,000       $89,982     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $80,000      
    5   $ 5,000       $87,681     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $75,000      
    6   $ 5,000       $85,311     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $70,000      
    7   $ 5,000       $82,871     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $65,000      
    8   $ 5,000       $80,357     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $60,000      
    9   $ 5,000       $77,768     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $55,000      
    10   $ 5,000       $75,101     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $50,000      
    11   $ 5,000       $72,354     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $45,000      
    12   $ 5,000       $69,524     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $40,000      
    13   $ 5,000       $66,610     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $35,000      
    14   $ 5,000       $63,608     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $30,000      
    15   $ 5,000       $60,517     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $25,000      
    16   $ 5,000       $57,332     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $20,000      
    17   $ 5,000       $54,052     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $15,000      
    18   $ 5,000       $50,674     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $10,000      
    19   $ 5,000       $47,194     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $5,000      
    20   $ 5,000       $43,610     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      
    21   $ 5,000       $39,918     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      
    22   $ 5,000       $36,115     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      
    23   $ 5,000       $32,199     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      
    24   $ 5,000       $28,165     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      
    25   $ 5,000       $24,010     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      
    26   $ 5,000       $19,730     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      
    27   $ 5,000       $15,322     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      
    28   $ 5,000       $10,782     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      
    29   $ 5,000       $6,105     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      
    30   $ 5,000       $1,288     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      
    31   $ 5,000       $0     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      
    32   $ 5,000       $0     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      
    33   $ 5,000       $0     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      
    34   $ 5,000       $0     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 5,000       $0      

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:

  •  Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Remaining Protected Balance = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
 
  •  Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000

Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($5,000): (a) the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged; and (b) the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of each withdrawal.

Since a withdrawal occurred during Contract Year 1, no annual credit will be applied to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance on any Contract Anniversary following the withdrawal.

Since it was assumed that the Owner was age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was taken, withdrawals of 5% of the Protected Payment Base will continue to be paid each year (even after the Contract Value and Remaining Protected Balance have been reduced to zero) until the day of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant, whichever occurs first.

 
109


Table of Contents


APPENDIX C:

INCOME ACCESS RIDER

SAMPLE CALCULATIONS

The numeric examples shown in this section are based on certain assumptions. They have been provided to assist in understanding the benefits provided by this Rider and to demonstrate how Purchase Payments received and withdrawals made from the Contract prior to the Annuity Date affect the values and benefits under this Rider over an extended period of time. These examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.

Example #1

Initial Values on the Effective Date based on an initial Purchase Payment of $100,000

                                 

Protected
Purchase Contract Protected Payment Remaining
Payments Withdrawal Value After Payment Amount Protected
Contract Years Received Amount Activity Base (PPB) (7% of PPB) Balance

    Beginning of Year 1   $100,000           $100,000   $7,000   $100,000    

Example #2

Additional Purchase Payment received after the Effective Date of the Rider but within the same Contract Year and its effect on the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance.

                                 

Protected
Purchase Contract Protected Payment Remaining
Payments Withdrawal Value After Payment Amount Protected
Contract Years Received Amount Activity Base (PPB) (7% of PPB) Balance

    Beginning of Year 1   $100,000           $100,000   $7,000   $100,000    
    Activity   $20,000       $122,000   $120,000       $120,000    
    Beginning of Year 2               $120,000   $8,400   $120,000    

In addition to Purchase Payments, the Contract Value is further subject to increases and/or decreases during a Contract Year as a result of additional amounts credited, charges, fees and other deductions and increases and/or decreases in the investment performance of the Variable Account.

Example #3

Cumulative withdrawals during the second Contract Year not exceeding the Protected Payment Amount established for that Contract Year.

                                 

Protected
Purchase Contract Protected Payment Remaining
Payments Withdrawal Value After Payment Amount Protected
Contract Years Received Amount Activity Base (PPB) (7% of PPB) Balance

    Beginning of Year 1   $100,000           $100,000   $7,000   $100,000    
    Activity   $20,000       $122,000   $120,000       $120,000    
    Beginning of Year 2               $120,000   $8,400   $120,000    
    Activity       $8,400   $110,600           $111,600    
    Beginning of Year 3               $120,000   $8,400   $111,600    

 
110


Table of Contents


Example #4

Cumulative withdrawals during the third Contract Year exceeding the Protected Payment Amount established for that Contract Year and its effect on the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance.

                                 

Protected
Purchase Contract Protected Payment Remaining
Payments Withdrawal Value After Payment Amount Protected
Contract Years Received Amount Activity Base (PPB) (7% of PPB) Balance

    Beginning of Year 1   $100,000           $100,000   $7,000   $100,000    
    Activity   $20,000       $122,000   $120,000       $120,000    
    Beginning of Year 2               $120,000   $8,400   $120,000    
    Activity       $8,400   $110,600           $111,600    
    Beginning of Year 3               $120,000   $8,400   $111,600    
    Activity
(Withdrawal)
      $8,400   $103,600           $103,200    
    Activity
(Withdrawal)
      $5,000   $94,000   $94,000       $94,000    
    Beginning of Year 4               $94,000   $6,580   $94,000    

Because the $5,000 withdrawal causes the cumulative withdrawals to exceed the Protected Payment Amount, the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance immediately after the withdrawal are reset to the lesser of (a) the Contract Value immediately after the withdrawal ($94,000); or, (b) the Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal, less the withdrawal amount ($103,200 - $5,000 = $98,200).

Example #5

A Step-Up in the Remaining Protected Balance at the Beginning of Contract Year 7 (Step-Up Date). This example further assumes that cumulative withdrawals for Contract Years 4, 5 and 6 do not exceed the Protected Payment Amount and no additional Purchase Payments are made during these Contract Years.

                                 

Protected
Purchase Contract Protected Payment Remaining
Payments Withdrawal Value After Payment Amount Protected
Contract Years Received Amount Activity Base (PPB) (7% of PPB) Balance

    Beginning of Year 4               $94,000   $6,580   $94,000    
    Activity
(Withdrawal)
      $6,580               $87,420    
    Beginning of Year 5               $94,000   $6,580   $87,420    
    Activity
(Withdrawal)
      $6,580               $80,840    
    Beginning of Year 6               $94,000   $6,580   $80,840    
    Activity
(Withdrawal)
      $6,580               $74,260    
    Beginning of Year 7                            
    (Balances immediately before
the Step-Up)
          $85,000   $94,000   $6,580   $74,260    
    Activity
(Step-Up effected)
                           
    Beginning of Year 7                            
    (Balances immediately after
the Step-Up)
          $85,000   $85,000   $5,950   $85,000    

Because the Contract Value ($85,000) on the Step-Up Date is greater than the Remaining Protected Balance ($74,260) (see balances immediately before the Step-Up), the Step-Up election: (a) resets the Remaining Protected Balance to equal the Contract Value; (b) resets the Protected Payment Base to equal the reset Remaining Protected Balance, resulting in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base; and (c) resets the Protected Payment Amount to equal 7% of the reset Protected Payment Base ($85,000 × 7% = $5,950), resulting in a reduction in the Protected Payment Amount (see balances immediately after the Step-Up).

 
111


Table of Contents


APPENDIX D:

GUARANTEED INCOME ADVANTAGE PLUS RIDER

SAMPLE CALCULATIONS

The numeric examples shown in this section are based on certain assumptions. They have been provided to assist in understanding the benefits provided by the Guaranteed Income Advantage Plus (“GIA Plus”) Rider, and to demonstrate how Purchase Payments received and withdrawals made from the Contract prior to the Annuity Date affect the values and benefits under this Rider over an extended period of time. These examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.

Example #1—The initial values on the Rider Effective Date based on an Initial Purchase Payment of $100,000. The Initial Purchase Payment is assumed to be the Contract Value if the Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.

                                 

Remaining
Contract GIA Plus Dollar
Purchase Value Guaranteed GIA Plus GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount of
Contract Payments Withdrawal after Income Step-Up Withdrawal Amt. (GWA) Prior Year’s
Years Received Amount Activity Base (GIB) Value Base (GWB) (5% of GWB) GWA

Beginning of Year 1   $100,000       $100,000   $100,000   $100,000   $100,000   $5,000   N/A

Example #2—Subsequent Purchase Payment received during the first Contract Year and its effect on the values and balances under this Rider. This example assumes that no withdrawals have been made.

(EXAMPLE 2 GRAPHIC)

In addition to Purchase Payments, the Contract Value is further subject to increases and/or decreases during a Contract Year as a result of additional amounts credited, charges, fees and other deductions, and increases and/or decreases in the investment performance of the Variable Account.

The Guaranteed Income Base prior to receipt of the Purchase Payment is assumed to have accumulated to $101,237. This amount is derived by multiplying each day’s Guaranteed Income Base by the daily factor of 1.000133680. As a result of the subsequent Purchase Payment, the Guaranteed Income Base is increased to $201,237 ($101,237 + $100,000). The Guaranteed Income Base will assume to accumulate to $208,717 at the next Contract Anniversary, by multiplying each day’s Guaranteed Income Base immediately after receipt of the subsequent Purchase Payment by the daily factor of 1.000133680.

The GIA Plus Step-Up Value prior to receipt of the Purchase Payment is $100,000. As a result of the subsequent Purchase Payment, the GIA Plus Step-Up Value is increased to $200,000 ($100,000 + $100,000). On the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 2, the Contract Value ($205,242) is greater than the GIA Plus Step-Up Value immediately prior to that Contract Anniversary ($200,000). As a result, the GIA Plus Step-Up Value as of that Contract Anniversary is equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary ($205,242).

The GIA Plus Withdrawal Base on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 2 is equal to the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base on the Rider Effective Date ($100,000) plus cumulative Purchase Payments received after the Rider Effective Date ($100,000). As a result of the subsequent Purchase Payment, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 2 is equal to $200,000 ($100,000 + $100,000).

The GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 2 is determined on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 2, and is equal to 5% of the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base on that Contract Anniversary

 
112


Table of Contents


(5% of $200,000). As a result of the subsequent Purchase Payment, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 2 is equal to $10,000.

Since no withdrawals were made during Contract Year 1, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 1 ($5,000) becomes the remaining dollar amount of the prior Contract Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 2.

Example #3—Cumulative withdrawals during Contract Year 2 exceeding the sum of: (a) the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 2; and (b) the remaining dollar amount of the prior Contract Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 2. The withdrawal is assumed to result in a 10% reduction in the Contract Value.

(EXAMPLE 3 GRAPHIC)

Since the $20,830 withdrawal exceeded the sum of: (a) the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 2; and (b) the remaining dollar amount of the prior Contract’s Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 2, the remaining dollar amount of the prior Contract Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3 is zero. Withdrawals are first applied to the remaining dollar amount of the prior Contract Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount, if any, until exhausted, then to the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for the current Contract Year, until exhausted.

The GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3 is determined on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 3, and is equal to 5% of the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base on that Contract Anniversary (5% of $200,000). As a result, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3 is equal to $10,000. The GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for any Contract Year will not be less than zero.

Immediately after the withdrawal, the Guaranteed Income Base and the GIA Plus Step-Up Value are reduced by the percentage decrease (10%) in Contract Value as a result of the withdrawal.

Since no subsequent Purchase Payments were received during Contract Year 2, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base at the beginning of Contract Year 3 remains unchanged.

 
113


Table of Contents


Example #4—Cumulative withdrawals during Contract Year 3 not exceeding the sum of: (a) the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3; and (b) the remaining dollar value of the prior Contract Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3.

(EXAMPLE 4 GRAPHIC)

Because cumulative withdrawals for Contract Year 3 did not exceed the sum of: (a) the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3; and (b) the remaining dollar amount of the prior Contract Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3, the Guaranteed Income Base on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 4 is calculated as follows:

  Guaranteed Income Base on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 3:
$197,237
 
  Increased at an annual rate of 5% to the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 4:
+ $9,862
  Reduced by the amount equal to the amount withdrawn in Contract Year 3:
- $8,000
  Guaranteed Income Base on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 4:
$199,099

Since no subsequent Purchase Payments were received during Contract Year 3, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base at the beginning of Contract Year 4 remains unchanged.

The GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 4 is determined on the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 4, and is equal to 5% of the GIA Plus Withdrawal Base on that Contract Anniversary (5% of $200,000). As a result, the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 4 is equal to $10,000.

Because cumulative withdrawals for Contract Year 3 did not exceed the sum of: (a) the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3; and (b) the remaining dollar value of the prior Contract Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 3; the dollar amount of the GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contact Year 3 remaining ($2,000) becomes the remaining dollar amount of the prior Contract Year’s GIA Plus Withdrawal Amount for Contract Year 4.

 
114


Table of Contents


Example #5—Rider values on each Contract Anniversary based on an Initial Purchase Payment of $100,000 paid on the Contract Date. The values further assume that no subsequent Purchase Payments are received and no withdrawals are taken during the first ten (10) Contract Years after the Rider Effective Date. The Initial Purchase Payment is assumed to be the Contract Value if the Rider is effective on a Contract Anniversary.

                                     

GIA Plus
Beginning GIA Plus GIA Plus Withdrawal Remaining Dollar
of Contract Contract Value Guaranteed Step-Up Withdrawal Amt. (GWA) Amount of
Year after Activity Income Base (GIB) Value Base (GWB) (5% of GWB) Prior Year’s GWA

    1     $100,000     $100,000   $100,000   $100,000   $5,000   N/A    
    2     $103,000     $105,000   $103,000   $100,000   $5,000   $5,000    
    3     $106,090     $110,250   $106,090   $100,000   $5,000   $5,000    
    4     $109,273     $115,763   $109,273   $100,000   $5,000   $5,000    
    5     $112,551     $121,551   $112,551   $100,000   $5,000   $5,000    
    6     $115,927     $127,628   $115,927   $100,000   $5,000   $5,000    
    7     $112,450     $134,010   $115,927   $100,000   $5,000   $5,000    
    8     $109,076     $140,710   $115,927   $100,000   $5,000   $5,000    
    9     $105,804     $147,746   $115,927   $100,000   $5,000   $5,000    
    10     $102,630     $155,133   $115,927   $100,000   $5,000   $5,000    
    11     $99,551     $162,889   $115,927   $100,000   $5,000   $5,000    

Example #6—Rider values on each Contract Anniversary based on an Initial Purchase Payment of $100,000 paid on the Contract Date. The values further assume that no subsequent Purchase Payments are received and withdrawals of $5,000 are taken each Contract Year for the first ten (10) Contract Years after the Rider Effective Date. The Initial Purchase Payment is assumed to be the Contract Value if the Rider is effective on a Contract Anniversary.

                                     

GIA Plus
Beginning GIA Plus GIA Plus Withdrawal Remaining Dollar
of Contract Contract Value Guaranteed Step-Up Withdrawal Amt. (GWA) Amount of Prior
Year after Activity Income Base (GIB) Value Base (GWB) (5% of GWB) Year’s GWA

    1   $100,000   $100,000     $100,000     $100,000   $5,000   N/A    
    2   $97,926   $100,000     $97,926     $100,000   $5,000   $0    
    3   $95,789   $100,000     $95,789     $100,000   $5,000   $0    
    4   $93,588   $100,000     $93,588     $100,000   $5,000   $0    
    5   $91,321   $100,000     $91,321     $100,000   $5,000   $0    
    6   $88,986   $100,000     $88,986     $100,000   $5,000   $0    
    7   $81,392   $100,000     $83,910     $100,000   $5,000   $0    
    8   $74,026   $100,000     $78,676     $100,000   $5,000   $0    
    9   $66,881   $100,000     $73,280     $100,000   $5,000   $0    
    10   $59,950   $100,000     $67,718     $100,000   $5,000   $0    
    11   $53,227   $100,000     $61,983     $100,000   $5,000   $0    

Should the Contract annuitize immediately after the Rider has been in effect for at least ten (10) years and the GIA Plus Annuity Option has been elected to provide such payments, the net amount applied on the Annuity Date as a single premium to provide the payments is equal to the greater of:

  (a)  the Guaranteed Income Base; or
 
  (b)  the GIA Plus Step-Up Value; less any:

  (c)  applicable withdrawal charges resulting from the conversion to the GIA Plus Annuity Option;

  (d)  applicable annual charges for expenses related to other optional benefit riders attached to the Contract that are in effect as of the Annuity Date; and

  (e) charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes.

Under Example #5, the net amount applied on the Annuity Date (the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 11) is equal to the Guaranteed Income Base ($162,889), as it is greater than the GIA Plus Step-Up Value ($115,927) as of the Annuity Date, less the amounts in (c), (d) and (e) above, if any.

 
115


Table of Contents


Under Example #6, the net amount applied on the Annuity Date (the Contract Anniversary at the beginning of Contract Year 11) is equal to the Guaranteed Income Base ($100,000), as it is greater than the GIA Plus Step-Up Value ($61,983) as of the Annuity Date, less the amounts in (c), (d) and (e) above, if any.

 
116


Table of Contents


APPENDIX E:

PORTFOLIO OPTIMIZATION MODELS UNTIL MAY 5, 2006

For Contracts in a Portfolio Optimization Model during the period May 1, 2006 to May 5, 2006

If you select a Portfolio Optimization model, until May 5, 2006 your Purchase Payments or Contract Value, as applicable, will be allocated to the Investment Options according to the model you select as indicated in the chart below. On May 5, 2006, we will automatically update your model to the Portfolio Optimization model allocations shown under the HOW YOUR INVESTMENTS ARE ALLOCATED— Portfolio Optimization section in this Prospectus.

                                         

    Model A
Conservative
      Model B
Moderate-Conservative
  Model C
Moderate
  Model D
Moderate-Aggressive
  Model E
Aggressive


Investor Profile

You are looking for a relatively stable investment and require investments that generate some level of income.   Your focus is on keeping pace with inflation. Income generating investment and capital appreciation are desired.   You want the opportunity for long-term moderate growth.   You want an investment that is geared for growth and are willing to accept above average risk.   You are an aggressive investor and can tolerate short-term market swings.

 Shorter Investment Horizon < --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- > Longer Investment Horizon


Investor Objective

Primarily preservation of capital   Moderate growth   Steady growth in asset values   Moderately high growth in asset values   High growth in asset values


Risk Characteristics

There may be some losses in the values of the investment as asset values fluctuate.   There may be some losses in the values of the investment from year to year.   There will probably be some losses in the values of the underlying investments from year to year.
       
                Fluctuations in value should be less than those of the overall stock markets.   Some of these might be large, but the overall fluctuations in asset values should be less than those of the U.S. stock market.

 Lower Risk < ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- > Higher Risk


Asset Class Exposure

                                                                 
Model A Model B Model C Model D Model E

Cash         13 %         6 %         3 %         3 %         2 %    

Bonds         62           49           37           20           5      

Domestic Stocks         20           34           44           59           70      

International Stocks         5           11           16           18           23      
                                                                   

Portfolio Optimization Model Allocations as of May 6, 2005

Model A Model B Model C Model D Model E

  Large-Cap Growth                   6 %         4 %         4 %         4 %    

  American Funds Growth-Income                             3           4           8      

  American Funds Growth                             3           6           10      

  Diversified Research         3 %         4           4           3           3      

  Short Duration Bond         24           16           7           4                

  Growth LT                             2           2           5      

  Mid-Cap Value         4           7           8           12           7      

  International Value         3           5           5           5           9      

  International Large-Cap         3           8           10           13           15      

  Equity Index                             2           6           7      

  Small-Cap Index                             3           3           2      

  Fasciano Small Equity                                       4           5      

  Small-Cap Value                   3           2                          

  Main Street Core         7           7           7           6           4      

  Emerging Markets                             4           4           4      

  Managed Bond         19           16           14           6                

  Inflation Managed         14           13           11           6                

  Money Market         10           3                                    

  High Yield Bond         6           4           3                          

  Large-Cap Value         4           5           5           6           7      

  Comstock         3           3           3           3           3      

  Real Estate                                       3           5      

  VN Small-Cap Value                                                 2      
 

 
   Less Volatile < ---------------------------------------------------------------- > More Volatile

 
117


Table of Contents


APPENDIX F:

KETRA Provisions

The Katrina Emergency Tax Relief Act of 2005 (KETRA) contains provisions designed to provide relief to individuals and businesses affected by Hurricanes Katrina, Rita and Wilma. The provisions may apply to distributions from Qualified Plans and IRAs, as well as loans from Qualified Plans, and are effective retroactively to September 23, 2005.

In determining whether the KETRA provisions pertaining to distributions are available to you, you must determine if 1) you are a “Qualified Individual”, and 2) the distribution is a “Qualified Hurricane distribution”. In determining whether the KETRA provisions pertaining to loans are available to you, you must determine if 1) you are a “Qualified Individual”, 2) the loan was taken from an eligible “Qualified Plan”, and 3) the loan is or was taken during the timeframe specified by KETRA. Please consult your tax or legal advisor to determine if the KETRA provisions may be applicable to you.

Special Restrictions under Qualified Plans


KETRA exempts up to $100,000 of “Qualified Hurricane Distributions” taken by “Qualified Individuals” who are under the age of 59 1/2 from the 10% IRS early withdrawal penalty. The distributions are included in income, however, they can be included ratably over a three-year period. In addition, in most cases, the distribution may be recontributed into an eligible retirement plan within three years, thus avoiding the tax altogether. The recontribution will be treated as a rollover. Special rules apply regarding repayment of distributions that were made for the purchase or construction of a main home, and no repayment is allowed for some distributions, such as Required Minimum Distributions.

Traditional IRAs


KETRA exempts up to $100,000 of “Qualified Hurricane Distributions” taken by “Qualified Individuals” who are under the age of 59 1/2 from the 10% IRS early withdrawal penalty. The distributions are included in income, however, they can be included ratably over a three-year period. In addition, in most cases, the distribution may be recontributed into an eligible retirement plan within three yeas, thus avoiding the tax altogether. The recontribution will be treated as a rollover. Special rules apply regarding repayment of distributions that were made for the purchase or construction of a main home, and no repayment is allowed for some distributions, such as Required Minimum Distributions.

Loans


KETRA increases the amount that can be withdrawn by a “Qualified Individual” as a loan from an eligible “Qualified Plan” from $50,000 or 50% of the employee’s account value, whichever is less, to $100,000 or the employee’s account value, whichever is less.

Repayment Terms


KETRA provides for a one-year suspension of loan repayments on loans taken by “Qualified Individuals” from eligible “Qualified Plans”. This delayed repayment relief applies to loans with loan repayment due dates beginning on or after dates specified in KETRA.

 
118


Table of Contents


                     
To receive a current copy of the Pacific Innovations Select SAI without charge, call
(800) 722-2333 or complete the following and send it to:
 
Pacific Life Insurance Company
Post Office Box 7187
Pasadena, CA 91109-7187
 
Name
 
               
 
Address
 
               
 
City
 
  State  
  Zip  


Table of Contents


PACIFIC INNOVATIONS
SELECT
     
WHERE TO GO FOR MORE INFORMATION


The Pacific Innovations Select variable annuity Contract is offered by Pacific Life Insurance Company, 700 Newport Center Drive. P.O. Box 9000, Newport Beach, California 92660.

If you have any questions about the Contract, please ask your registered representative or contact us.


You’ll find more information about the Pacific Innovations Select variable annuity contract and Separate Account A in the Statement of Additional Information (SAI) dated May 1, 2006.

The SAI has been filed with the SEC and is considered to be part of this Prospectus because it’s incorporated by reference. You’ll find the table of contents for the SAI on page 95 of this Prospectus.

You can get a copy of the SAI at no charge by calling or writing to us, or by contacting the SEC. The SEC may charge you a fee for this information.


How to contact us

Call or write to us at:
Pacific Life Insurance Company
P.O. Box 7187
Pasadena, California 91109-7187

1-800-722-2333

6 a.m. through 5 p.m. Pacific time

Send Investments, other payments and application forms to the following address:

By mail

Pacific Life Insurance Company
P.O. Box 100060
Pasadena, California 91189-0060

By overnight delivery service

Pacific Life Insurance Company
1111 South Arroyo Parkway, Suite 205
Pasadena, California 91105


How to contact the SEC

Public Reference Section of the SEC
Washington, D.C. 20549-6009
1-800-SEC-0330
Internet: www.sec.gov


NASD Public Disclosure program

The NASD provides investor protection education through its website and printed materials. The NASD regulation website address is www.nasdr.com. An investor brochure that includes information describing the Public Disclosure program may be obtained from the NASD. The NASD Public Disclosure hotline number is (800) 289-9999. The NASD does not charge a fee for the Public Disclosure program services.


Table of Contents

Pacific Life Insurance Company

700 Newport Center Drive
Newport Beach, CA 92660
(800) 722-2333

Mailing address:

P.O. Box 7187
Pasadena, CA 91109-7187

Visit us at our website: www.PacificLife.com

(IMSA LOGO)  
 
* Membership promotes ethical market conduct  
for individual life insurance and annuities  
 
1800-6A  
 
Prsrt Std
U.S. Postage
Paid
Santa Ana CA
Permit #61
Pacific Life Insurance Company
Mailing address:
P.O. Box 7187
Pasadena, California 91109-7187

ADDRESS SERVICE REQUESTED



Table of Contents

STATEMENT OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

May 1, 2006

PACIFIC INNOVATIONS

SEPARATE ACCOUNT A


Pacific Innovations (the “Contract”) is a variable annuity contract underwritten by Pacific Life Insurance Company (“Pacific Life”).

This Statement of Additional Information (SAI) is not a Prospectus and should be read in conjunction with the Contract’s Prospectus, dated May 1, 2006, and any supplement thereto, which is available without charge upon written or telephone request to Pacific Life. Terms used in this SAI have the same meanings as in the Prospectus, and some additional terms are defined particularly for this SAI. This SAI is incorporated by reference into the Contract’s Prospectus.


Pacific Life Insurance Company

Mailing address: P.O. Box 7187
Pasadena, CA 91109-7187

(800) 722-2333



 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

           
Page No.

    1  
      1  
 
 Yields
    2  
      3  
      4  
 
    5  
      5  
 
    6  
      6  
      7  
      9  
      9  
      10  
      10  
      12  
      13  
      13  
      13  
      13  
 
    13  
 
    14  

i



Table of Contents

PERFORMANCE

From time to time, our reports or other communications to current or prospective Contract Owners or our advertising or other promotional material may quote the performance (yield and total return) of a Subaccount. Quoted results are based on past performance and reflect the performance of all assets held in that Subaccount for the stated time period. Quoted results are neither an estimate nor a guarantee of future investment performance, and do not represent the actual experience of amounts invested by any particular Contract Owner.

Total Returns

A Subaccount may advertise its “average annual total return” over various periods of time. “Total return” represents the average percentage change in value of an investment in the Subaccount from the beginning of a measuring period to the end of that measuring period. “Annualized” total return assumes that the total return achieved for the measuring period is achieved for each such period for a full year. “Average annual” total return is computed in accordance with a standard method prescribed by the SEC.

Average Annual Total Return

To calculate a Subaccount’s average annual total return for a specific measuring period, we first take a hypothetical $1,000 investment in that Subaccount, at its then-applicable Subaccount Unit Value (the “initial payment”) and we compute the ending redeemable value of that initial payment at the end of the measuring period based on the investment experience of that Subaccount (“full withdrawal value”). The full withdrawal value reflects the effect of all recurring fees and charges applicable to a Contract Owner under the Contract, including the Risk Charge, and the Administrative Fee and the deduction of the applicable withdrawal charge, but does not reflect any charges for applicable premium taxes and/or any other taxes, any non-recurring fees or charges or any increase in the Risk Charge for an optional Death Benefit Rider, or any charge for an optional Rider. The Annual Fee is also taken into account, assuming an average Contract Value of $65,000. The redeemable value is then divided by the initial payment and this quotient is raised to the 365/N power (N represents the number of days in the measuring period), and 1 is subtracted from this result. Average annual total return is expressed as a percentage.

T = (ERV/P)(365/N) - 1

             
where
  T   =   average annual total return
    ERV   =   ending redeemable value
    P   =   hypothetical initial payment of $1,000
    N   =   number of days

Average annual total return figures will be given for recent one-, three-, five- and ten-year periods (if applicable), and may be given for other periods as well (such as from commencement of the Subaccount’s operations, or on a year-by-year basis).

When considering “average” total return figures for periods longer than one year, it is important to note that the relevant Subaccount’s annual total return for any one year in the period might have been greater or less than the average for the entire period.

Aggregate Total Return

A Subaccount may use “aggregate” total return figures along with its “average annual” total return figures for various periods; these figures represent the cumulative change in value of an investment in the Subaccount for a specific period. Aggregate total returns may be shown by means of schedules, charts or graphs and may indicate subtotals of the various components of total return. The SEC has not prescribed standard formulas for calculating aggregate total return.

Total returns may also be shown for the same periods that do not take into account the withdrawal charge or the Annual Fee.

1



Table of Contents

Non-Standardized Total Returns

We may also calculate non-standardized total returns which may or may not reflect any Annual Fee, withdrawal charges, increases in Risk Charges, any charge for an optional Rider, premium taxes and/or any other taxes, and any non-recurring fees or charges.

Standardized return figures will always accompany any non-standardized returns shown.

Yields

Money Market Subaccount

The “yield” (also called “current yield”) of the Money Market Subaccount is computed in accordance with a standard method prescribed by the SEC. The net change in the Subaccount’s Unit Value during a seven-day period is divided by the Unit Value at the beginning of the period to obtain a base rate of return. The current yield is generated when the base rate is “annualized” by multiplying it by the fraction 365/7; that is, the base rate of return is assumed to be generated each week over a 365-day period and is shown as a percentage of the investment. The “effective yield” of the Money Market Subaccount is calculated similarly but, when annualized, the base rate of return is assumed to be reinvested. The effective yield will be slightly higher than the current yield because of the compounding effect of this assumed reinvestment.

The formula for effective yield is: [(Base Period Return +1)(To the power of 365/7] - 1.

Realized capital gains or losses and unrealized appreciation or depreciation of the assets of the underlying Money Market Portfolio are not included in the yield calculation. Current yield and effective yield do not reflect any deduction of charges for any applicable premium taxes and/or any other taxes, or any increase in the Risk Charge for an optional Death Benefit Rider, or any charge for an optional Rider, but do reflect a deduction for the Annual Fee, the Risk Charge and the Administrative Fee and assumes an average Contract Value of $65,000.

Other Subaccounts

“Yield” of the other Subaccounts is computed in accordance with a different standard method prescribed by the SEC. The net investment income (investment income less expenses) per Subaccount Unit earned during a specified one-month or 30-day period is divided by the Subaccount Unit Value on the last day of the specified period. This result is then annualized (that is, the yield is assumed to be generated each month or each 30-day period for a year), according to the following formula, which assumes semiannual compounding:

         
YIELD = 2[(
  a - b

cd
  + 1)6 - 1]
             
where:
  a   =   net investment income earned during the period by the Portfolio attributable to the Subaccount.
    b   =   expenses accrued for the period (net of reimbursements).
    c   =   the average daily number of Subaccount Units outstanding during the period that were entitled to receive dividends.
    d   =   the Unit Value of the Subaccount Units on the last day of the period.

The yield of each Subaccount reflects the deduction of all recurring fees and charges applicable to the Subaccount, such as the Risk Charge, and Administrative Fee, the Annual Fee (assuming an average Contract Value of $65,000), but does not reflect any withdrawal charge, any charge for applicable premium taxes and/or any other taxes, any increase in the Risk Charge for an optional Death Benefit Rider, any charge for an optional Rider, or any non-recurring fees or charges.

The Subaccounts’ yields will vary from time to time depending upon market conditions, the composition of each Portfolio and operating expenses of the Fund allocated to each Portfolio. Consequently, any given performance quotation should not be considered representative of the Subaccount’s performance in the future.

2



Table of Contents

Yield should also be considered relative to changes in Subaccount Unit Values and to the relative risks associated with the investment policies and objectives of the various Portfolios. In addition, because performance will fluctuate, it may not provide a basis for comparing the yield of a Subaccount with certain bank deposits or other investments that pay a fixed yield or return for a stated period of time.

Performance Comparisons and Benchmarks

In advertisements and sales literature, we may compare the performance of some or all of the Subaccounts to the performance of other variable annuity issuers in general and to the performance of particular types of variable annuities investing in mutual funds, or series of mutual funds, with investment objectives similar to each of the Subaccounts. This performance may be presented as averages or rankings compiled by Lipper Analytical Services, Inc. (“Lipper”), the Variable Annuity Research and Data Service (“VARDS®”) or Morningstar, Inc. (“Morningstar”), which are independent services that monitor and rank the performance of variable annuity issuers and mutual funds in each of the major categories of investment objectives on an industry-wide basis. Lipper’s rankings include variable life issuers as well as variable annuity issuers. VARDS® rankings compare only variable annuity issuers. The performance analyses prepared by Lipper and VARDS® rank such issuers on the basis of total return, assuming reinvestment of dividends and distributions, but do not take sales charges, redemption fees or certain expense deductions at the separate account level into consideration. In addition, VARDS® prepares risk adjusted rankings, which consider the effects of market risk on total return performance. We may also compare the performance of the Subaccounts with performance information included in other publications and services that monitor the performance of insurance company separate accounts or other investment vehicles. These other services or publications may be general interest business publications such as The Wall Street Journal, Barron’s, Business Week, Forbes, Fortune, and Money.

In addition, our reports and communications to Contract Owners, advertisements, or sales literature may compare a Subaccount’s performance to various benchmarks that measure the performance of a pertinent group of securities widely regarded by investors as being representative of the securities markets in general or as being representative of a particular type of security. We may also compare the performance of the Subaccounts with that of other appropriate indices of investment securities and averages for peer universes of funds or data developed by us derived from such indices or averages. Unmanaged indices generally assume the reinvestment of dividends or interest but do not generally reflect deductions for investment management or administrative costs and expenses.

 
Tax Deferred Accumulation

In reports or other communications to you or in advertising or sales materials, we may also describe the effects of tax-deferred compounding on the Separate Account’s investment returns or upon returns in general. These effects may be illustrated in charts or graphs and may include comparisons at various points in time of returns under the Contract or in general on a tax-deferred basis with the returns on a taxable basis. Different tax rates may be assumed.

In general, individuals who own annuity contracts are not taxed on increases in the value under the annuity contract until some form of distribution is made from the contract. Thus, the annuity contract will benefit from tax deferral during the accumulation period, which generally will have the effect of permitting an investment in an annuity contract to grow more rapidly than a comparable investment under which increases in value are taxed on a current basis. The following chart illustrates this benefit by comparing accumulation under a variable annuity contract with accumulations from an investment on which gains are taxed on a current ordinary income basis. The chart shows accumulations on a single Purchase Payment of $10,000, assuming hypothetical annual returns of 0%, 4% and 8%, compounded annually, and a tax rate of 33%. The values shown for the taxable investment do not include any deduction for management fees or other expenses but assume that taxes are deducted annually from investment returns. The values shown for the variable annuity do not reflect the deduction of contractual expenses such as the Risk Charge (equal to an annual rate of 1.25% of average daily Account Value), the Administrative Fee (equal to an annual rate of 0.15% of average daily Account Value), the Annual Fee (equal to $30 per year if your Net Contract Value is less than $50,000), any increase in the Risk Charge for an optional Death Benefit Rider (equal to a maximum annual rate of 0.35% of average daily Account Value) or for other optional Riders (equal to a maximum annual rate ranging from 0.10% to 1.20% of average daily Account Value), any charge for premium

3



Table of Contents

taxes and/or any other taxes, or the expenses of an underlying investment vehicle, such as the Fund. The values shown also do not reflect the withdrawal charge.

Generally, the withdrawal charge is equal to 9% of the amount withdrawn attributable to Purchase Payments that are less than one year old, 8% of the amount withdrawn attributable to Purchase Payments that are two years old, and 8% of the amount withdrawn attributable to Purchase Payments that are three years old. The age of the Purchase Payments is considered 1 year old in the Contract Year we receive it and increases by one year beginning on the day preceding each Contract Anniversary. During a Contract Year, you may withdraw free of withdrawal charge amounts up to your “Eligible Purchase Payments”. Eligible Purchase Payments include 10% annually of total Purchase Payments that have an “age” of less than four years, plus any remaining portion not withdrawn from the previous Contract Year’s Eligible Purchase Payments that are derived from Purchase Payments which have an “age” of less than four years, plus 100% of all Purchase Payments that have an “age” of four years or more. Once all Purchase Payments have been deemed withdrawn, any withdrawal will be deemed a withdrawal of your Earnings and will be free of the withdrawal charge. If these expenses and fees were taken into account, they would reduce the investment return shown for both the taxable investment and the hypothetical variable annuity contract. In addition, these values assume that you do not surrender the Contract or make any withdrawals until the end of the period shown. The chart assumes a full withdrawal, at the end of the period shown, of all Contract Value and the payment of taxes at the 33% rate on the amount in excess of the Purchase Payments.

The rates of return illustrated are hypothetical and are not an estimate or guarantee of performance. Actual tax rates may vary for different assets (e.g. capital gains and qualifying dividend income) and taxpayers from that illustrated and withdrawals by and distributions to Contract Owners who have not reached age 59 1/2 may be subject to a tax penalty of 10%.

Power of Tax Deferral

$10,000 investment at annual rates of 0%, 4% and 8%, taxed @ 33%

(Power of Tax Deferral)

4



Table of Contents

DISTRIBUTION OF THE CONTRACTS

Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (PSD)

Pacific Select Distributors, Inc., our subsidiary, acts as the distributor of the Contracts and offers the Contracts on a continuous basis. PSD is located at 700 Newport Center Drive, Newport Beach, California 92660. PSD is registered as a broker-dealer with the SEC and is a member of NASD. We pay PSD for acting as distributor under a Distribution Agreement. We and PSD enter into selling agreements with broker-dealers whose registered representatives are authorized by state insurance departments to solicit applications for the Contracts. The aggregate amount of underwriting commissions paid to PSD for 2005, 2004, and 2003 with regard to this Contract was $2,522,110, $2,646,740 and $1,429,804 respectively, of which $0 was retained.

PSD or an affiliate pays various sales compensation to broker-dealers that solicit applications for the Contracts. PSD or an affiliate also may provide reimbursement for other expenses associated with the promotion and solicitation of applications for the Contracts. Your registered representative typically receives a portion of the compensation that is payable to his or her broker-dealer in connection with the Contract, depending on the agreement between your registered representative and his or her firm. Pacific Life is not involved in determining that compensation arrangement, which may present its own incentives or conflicts. You may ask your registered representative how he/she will personally be compensated for the transaction.

Under certain circumstances where PSD pays lower initial commissions, certain broker-dealers that solicit applications for Contracts may be paid an ongoing persistency trail commission (sometimes called a residual). The mix of Purchase Payment-based versus trail commissions varies depending upon our agreement with the selling broker-dealer and the commission option selected by your registered representative or broker-dealer. Certain broker-dealers may also be paid a persistency bonus which will be based on assets under management and duration of contracts. The persistency bonus for a registered representative is not expected to exceed .25% of their total assets under management.

In addition to the Purchase Payment-based, trail commissions and persistency bonus described above, we and/or an affiliate may pay additional cash compensation from their own resources in connection with the promotion and solicitation of applications for the Contracts by some, but not all, broker-dealers. The range of additional cash compensation based on Purchase Payments generally does not exceed 0.40% and trailing compensation based on Account Value generally does not exceed 0.10% on an annual basis. Such additional compensation may give Pacific Life greater access to registered representatives of the broker-dealers that receive such compensation. While this greater access provides the opportunity for training and other educational programs so that your registered representative may serve you better, this additional compensation also may afford Pacific Life a “preferred” status at the recipient broker-dealer and provide some other marketing benefit such as website placement, access to registered representative lists, extra marketing assistance or other heightened visibility and access to the broker-dealer’s sales force that otherwise influences the way that the broker-dealer and the registered representative market the Contracts.

We or our affiliates may also pay override payments, expense allowances and reimbursements, bonuses, wholesaler fees, and training and marketing allowances. Such payments may offset the broker-dealer’s expenses in connection with activities that it is required to perform, such as educating personnel and maintaining records. Registered representatives may also receive non-cash compensation such as expense-paid educational or training seminars involving travel within and outside the U.S. or promotional merchandise.

All of the compensation described in this section, and other compensation or benefits provided by us or our affiliates, may be more or less than the overall compensation on similar or other products and may influence your registered representative or broker-dealer to present this Contract over other investment options. You may ask your registered representative about these conflicts of interests and how he/she and his/her broker-dealer are compensated for selling the Contract.

We directly or indirectly own interests in a number of broker-dealers that offer this Contract among others. Such affiliated broker dealers include Associated Securities Corp., Mutual Service Corporation, United Planners’ Financial Services of America, M.L. Stern & Co., LLC and Waterstone Financial Group. These affiliated broker-dealers and their registered representatives are compensated as described above with

5



Table of Contents

Purchase Payment-based and trailing commissions. The affiliated broker-dealers also receive additional cash compensation of 0.10% based on Purchase Payments and 0.05% trailing compensation based on Account Value as described above. We receive “preferred” status at the affiliated broker-dealers along with other product vendors that provide similar support. PSD or its affiliates may also pay other amounts as described above to the affiliated broker-dealers or persons associated with the affiliated broker-dealers. Finally, within certain limits imposed by the NASD, registered representatives who are associated with broker/ dealer firms affiliated with us may qualify for sales incentive programs sponsored by us.

Portfolio Managers of the underlying Portfolios available under this Contract may from time to time bear all or a portion of the expenses of conferences or meetings sponsored by Pacific Life or PSD that are attended by, among others, registered representatives of PSD, who would receive information and/or training regarding the Fund’s Portfolios and their management by the Portfolio Managers in addition to information respecting the variable annuity and/or life insurance products issued by Pacific Life and its affiliates. Other persons may also attend all or a portion of any such conferences or meetings, including directors, officers and employees of Pacific Life, officers and trustees of Pacific Select Fund (“the Fund”), and spouses/guests of the foregoing. The Fund’s Board of Trustees may hold meetings concurrently with such a conference or meeting. The Fund pays for the expenses of the meetings of its Board of Trustees, including the pro rata share of expenses for attendance by the Trustees at the concurrent conferences or meetings sponsored by Pacific Life or PSD. Additional expenses and promotional items may be paid for by Pacific Life and/or Portfolio Managers. PSD serves as the Fund’s Distributor.

THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT

Calculating Subaccount Unit Values

The Unit Value of the Subaccount Units in each Variable Investment Option is computed at the close of the New York Stock Exchange, which is usually 4:00 p.m. Eastern time on each Business Day. The initial Unit Value of each Subaccount was $10 on the Business Day the Subaccount began operations. At the end of each Business Day, the Unit Value for a Subaccount is equal to:

Y × Z

             
where
  (Y)   =   the Unit Value for that Subaccount as of the end of the preceding Business Day; and
    (Z)   =   the Net Investment Factor for that Subaccount for the period (a “valuation period”) between that Business Day and the immediately preceding Business Day.

The “Net Investment Factor” for a Subaccount for any valuation period is equal to:

(A ÷ B) - C

             
where
  (A)   =   the “per share value of the assets” of that Subaccount as of the end of that valuation period, which is equal to: a+b+c
             
where
  (a)   =   the net asset value per share of the corresponding Portfolio shares held by that Subaccount as of the end of that valuation period;
    (b)   =   the per share amount of any dividend or capital gain distributions made by the Fund for that Portfolio during that valuation period; and
    (c)   =   any per share charge (a negative number) or credit (a positive number) for any income taxes and/or any other taxes or other amounts set aside during that valuation period as a reserve for any income and/or any other taxes which we determine to have resulted from the operations of the Subaccount or Contract, and/or any taxes attributable, directly or indirectly, to Investments;

6



Table of Contents

             
    (B)   =   the net asset value per share of the corresponding Portfolio shares held by the Subaccount as of the end of the preceding valuation period; and
    (C)   =   a factor that assesses against the Subaccount net assets for each calendar day in the valuation period, the basic Risk Charge plus any applicable increase in the Risk Charge and the Administrative Fee (see the CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS section in the Prospectus).

As explained in the Prospectus, the Annual Fee, if applicable, will be charged proportionately against your Investment Options. Assessments against your Variable Investment Options are assessed against your Variable Account Value through the automatic debit of Subaccount Units; the Annual Fee decreases the number of Subaccount Units attributed to your Contract but does not alter the Unit Value for any Subaccount.

Variable Annuity Payment Amounts

The following steps show how we determine the amount of each variable annuity payment under your Contract.

First: Pay Applicable Premium Taxes

When you convert your Net Contract Value into annuity payments, you must pay any applicable charge for premium taxes on your Contract Value (unless applicable law requires those taxes to be paid at a later time). We assess this charge by reducing each Account Value proportionately, relative to your Account Value in each Subaccount and in a fixed option, in an amount equal to the aggregate amount of the charges. The remaining amount of your available Net Contract Value may be used to provide variable annuity payments. Alternatively, your remaining available Net Contract Value may be used to provide fixed annuity payments, or it may be divided to provide both fixed and variable annuity payments. You may also choose to withdraw some or all of your remaining Net Contract Value, less any applicable optional Rider charge, Annual Fee, withdrawal charge, and any charges for premium taxes without converting this amount into annuity payments.

Second: The First Variable Payment

We begin by referring to your Contract’s Option Table for your Annuity Option (the “Annuity Option Table”). The Annuity Option Table allows us to calculate the dollar amount of the first variable annuity payment under your Contract, based on the amount applied toward the variable annuity. The number that the Annuity Option Table yields will be based on the Annuitant’s age (and, in certain cases, sex) and assumes a 5% rate of return, as described in more detail below.

  Example: Assume a man is 65 years of age at his Annuity Date and has selected a lifetime annuity with monthly payments guaranteed for 10 years. According to the Annuity Option Table, this man should receive an initial monthly payment of $5.79 for every $1,000 of his Contract Value (reduced by applicable charges) that he will be using to provide variable payments. Therefore, if his Contract Value after deducting applicable fees and charges is $100,000 on his Annuity Date and he applies this entire amount toward his variable annuity, his first monthly payment will be $579.00.

You may choose any other Annuity Option Table that assumes a different rate of return which we offer at the time your Annuity Option is effective.

Third: Subaccount Annuity Units

For each Subaccount, we use the amount of the first variable annuity payment under your Contract attributable to each Subaccount to determine the number of Subaccount Annuity Units that will form the basis of subsequent payment amounts. First, we use the Annuity Option Table to determine the amount of that first variable payment for each Subaccount. Then, for each Subaccount, we divide that amount of the first variable annuity payment by the value of one Subaccount Annuity Unit (the “Subaccount Annuity Unit Value”) as of the end of the Annuity Date to obtain the number of Subaccount Annuity Units for that particular Subaccount. The number of Subaccount Annuity Units used to calculate subsequent payments

7



Table of Contents

under your Contract will not change unless exchanges of Annuity Units are made (or if the Joint and Survivor Annuity Option is elected and the Primary Annuitant dies first), but the value of those Annuity Units will change daily, as described below.

Fourth: The Subsequent Variable Payments

The amount of each subsequent variable annuity payment will be the sum of the amounts payable based on each Subaccount. The amount payable based on each Subaccount is equal to the number of Subaccount Annuity Units for that Subaccount multiplied by their Subaccount Annuity Unit Value at the end of the Business Day in each payment period you elected that corresponds to the Annuity Date.

Each Subaccount’s Subaccount Annuity Unit Value, like its Subaccount Unit Value, changes each day to reflect the net investment results of the underlying investment vehicle, as well as the assessment of the Risk Charge at an annual rate of 1.25% and the Administrative Fee at an annual rate of 0.15%. In addition, the calculation of Subaccount Annuity Unit Value incorporates an additional factor; as discussed in more detail below, this additional factor adjusts Subaccount Annuity Values to correct for the Option Table’s implicit assumed annual investment return on amounts applied but not yet used to furnish annuity benefits. Any increase in your Risk Charge for an Optional Death Benefit Rider is not charged on and after the Annuity Date.

Different Subaccounts may be selected for your Contract before and after your Annuity Date, subject to any restrictions we may establish. Currently, you may exchange Subaccount Annuity Units in any Subaccount for Subaccount Annuity Units in any other Subaccount(s) up to four times in any twelve month period after your Annuity Date. The number of Subaccount Annuity Units in any Subaccount may change due to such exchanges. Exchanges following your Annuity Date will be made by exchanging Subaccount Annuity Units of equivalent aggregate value, based on their relative Subaccount Annuity Unit Values.

Understanding the “Assumed Investment Return” Factor

The Annuity Option Table incorporates a number of implicit assumptions in determining the amount of your first variable annuity payment. As noted above, the numbers in the Annuity Option Table reflect certain actuarial assumptions based on the Annuitant’s age, and, in some cases, the Annuitant’s sex. In addition, these numbers assume that the amount of your Contract Value that you convert to a variable annuity will have a positive net investment return of 5% (or such other rate of return you may elect) each year during the payout of your annuity; thus 5% is referred to as an “assumed investment return.”

The Subaccount Annuity Unit Value for a Subaccount will increase only to the extent that the investment performance of that Subaccount exceeds the Risk Charge, the Administrative Fee, and the assumed investment return. The Subaccount Annuity Unit Value for any Subaccount will generally be less than the Subaccount Unit Value for that same Subaccount, and the difference will be the amount of the assumed investment return factor.

  Example: Assume the net investment performance of a Subaccount is at a rate of 5.00% per year (after deduction of the 1.25% Risk Charge and the 0.15% Administrative Fee). The Subaccount Unit Value for that Subaccount would increase at a rate of 5.00% per year, but the Subaccount Annuity Unit Value would not increase (or decrease) at all. The net investment factor for that 5% return [1.05] is then divided by the factor for the 5% assumed investment return [1.05] and 1 is subtracted from the result to determine the adjusted rate of change in Subaccount Annuity Unit Value:
     
1.05

1.05
  = 1; 1 - 1 = 0; 0 × 100% = 0%.

If the net investment performance of a Subaccount’s assets is at a rate less than 5.00% per year, the Subaccount Annuity Unit Value will decrease, even if the Subaccount Unit Value is increasing.

  Example: Assume the net investment performance of a Subaccount is at a rate of 2.60% per year (after deduction of the 1.25% Risk Charge and the 0.15% Administrative Fee). The Subaccount Unit Value for

8



Table of Contents

  that Subaccount would increase at a rate of 2.60% per year, but the Subaccount Annuity Unit Value would decrease at a rate of 2.29% per year. The net investment factor for that 2.6% return [1.026] is then divided by the factor for the 5% assumed investment return [1.05] and 1 is subtracted from the result to determine the adjusted rate of change in Subaccount Annuity Unit Value:
     
1.026

1.05
  = 0.9771; 0.9771 - 1 = - 0.0229; - 0.0229 × 100% = - 2.29%.

The assumed investment return will always cause increases in Subaccount Annuity Unit Values to be somewhat less than if the assumption had not been made, will cause decreases in Subaccount Annuity Unit Values to be somewhat greater than if the assumption had not been made, and will (as shown in the example above) sometimes cause a decrease in Subaccount Annuity Unit Values to take place when an increase would have occurred if the assumption had not been made. If we had assumed a higher investment return in our Annuity Option tables, it would produce annuities with larger first payments, but the increases in subaccount annuity payments would be smaller and the decreases in subsequent annuity payments would be greater; a lower assumed investment return would produce annuities with smaller first payments, and the increases in subsequent annuity payments would be greater and the decreases in subsequent annuity payments would be smaller.

Redemptions of Remaining Guaranteed Variable Payments Under Option 2

If variable payments are elected under Annuity Option 2, you may redeem all remaining guaranteed variable payments after the Annuity Date. The amount available upon full redemption would be the present value of any remaining guaranteed variable payments at the assumed investment return, any applicable withdrawal charge will be deducted from the present value as if you made a full withdrawal, or if applicable, a partial withdrawal. For purposes of calculating the withdrawal charge and Free Withdrawal amount, it will be assumed that the Contract was never converted to provide annuity payments and any prior variable annuity payments in that Contract Year will be treated as if they were partial withdrawals from the Contract (see the CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS — Withdrawal Charge section in the Prospectus). For example, assume that a Contract was issued with a single investment of $10,000 and in Contract Year 2 the Owner elects to receive variable annuity payments under Annuity Option 2. In Contract Year 3, the Owner elects to make a full redemption of remaining guaranteed variable payments. The withdrawal charge as a percentage of the Purchase Payments with an age of 3 years is 8%. Assuming the present value of remaining guaranteed variable payments is $5,000, and the Free Withdrawal amount immediately prior to the redemption is $200, the withdrawal charge for the redemption will be $384 (($5,000 - $200) * 8%). No withdrawal charge will be imposed on a redemption if:

  •  the Annuity Option is elected as the form of payments of death benefit proceeds, or
 
  •  the Annuitant dies before the period certain has ended and the Beneficiary requests a redemption of the variable annuity payments.

The variable payment amount we use in calculating the present value is determined by summing an amount for each Subaccount, which we calculate by multiplying your Subaccount Annuity Units by the Annuity Unit Value next computed after we receive your redemption request. This variable payment amount is then discounted at the assumed investment return from each future Annuity Payment date that falls within the payment guaranteed period. The sum of these discounted remaining variable payment amounts is the present value of remaining guaranteed variable payments.

If you elect to redeem all remaining guaranteed variable payments in a single sum, we will not make any additional variable annuity payments during the remaining guaranteed period after the redemption. Any annuity payments that are to be made after the payment guaranteed period will not change.

If you elect to redeem a portion of the remaining guaranteed variable payments in a single sum, we will reduce the number of Annuity Units for each Subaccount by the same percentage as the partial redemption value bears to the amount available upon a full redemption.

9



Table of Contents

Redemption of remaining guaranteed variable payments will not affect the amount of any fixed annuity payments.

Corresponding Dates

If any transaction or event under your Contract is scheduled to occur on a “corresponding date” that does not exist in a given calendar period, the transaction or event will be deemed to occur on the following Business Day. In addition, as stated in the Prospectus, any event scheduled to occur on a day that is not a Business Day will occur on the next succeeding Business Day.

  Example: If your Contract is issued on February 29 in year 1 (a leap year), your Contract Anniversary in years 2, 3 and 4 will be on March 1.
 
  Example: If your Annuity Date is July 31 and you select monthly annuity payments, the payments received will be based on valuations made on July 31, August 31, October 1 (for September), October 31, December 1 (for November), December 31, January 31, March 1 (for February), March 31, May 1 (for April), May 31 and July 1 (for June).

Age and Sex of Annuitant

As mentioned in the Prospectus, the Contracts generally provide for sex-distinct annuity income factors in the case of life annuities. Statistically, females tend to have longer life expectancies than males; consequently, if the amount of annuity payments is based on life expectancy, they will ordinarily be higher if an annuitant is male than if an annuitant is female. Certain states’ regulations prohibit sex-distinct annuity income factors, and Contracts issued in those states will use unisex factors. In addition, Contracts issued in connection with Qualified Plans are required to use unisex factors.

We may require proof of your Annuitant’s age and sex before or after starting annuity payments. If the age or sex (or both) of your Annuitant are incorrectly stated in your Contract, we will correct the amount payable based on your Annuitant’s correct age or sex, if applicable. If we make the correction after annuity payments have started, and we have made overpayments, we will deduct the amount of the overpayment, with interest at 3% a year, from any payments due then or later; if we have made underpayments, we will add the amount, with interest at 3% a year, of the underpayments to the next payment we make after we receive proof of the correct age and/or sex.

Additionally, we may require proof of the Annuitant’s or Owner’s age before any payments associated with the Death Benefit provisions of your Contract are made. If the age or sex of the Annuitant is incorrectly stated in your Contract, we will base any payment associated with the Death Benefit provisions on your Contract on the Annuitant’s or Owner’s correct age or sex.

Systematic Transfer Programs

The fixed option(s) are not available in connection with portfolio rebalancing. If you are using the earnings sweep, you may also use portfolio rebalancing only if you selected the Money Market Subaccount, or, the Fixed Option as your sweep option. You may not use dollar cost averaging and the earnings sweep at the same time. The systematic transfer options are not available after you annuitize and are subject to the same requirements and restrictions as non-systematic transfers. In addition, no fixed option(s) may be used as the target Investment Option under any systematic transfer program.

Dollar Cost Averaging

When you request dollar cost averaging, you are authorizing us to make periodic reallocations of your Contract Value without waiting for any further instruction from you. You may request to begin or stop dollar cost averaging at any time prior to your Annuity Date; the effective date of your request will be the day we receive notice from you in proper form. Your request may specify the date on which you want your first transfer to be made. Your first transfer may not be made until 30 days after your Contract Date, and if you specify an earlier date, your first transfer will be delayed until one calendar month after the date you specify. If you request

10



Table of Contents

dollar cost averaging on your application for your Contract and you fail to specify a date for your first transfer, your first transfer will be made one period after your Contract Date (that is, if you specify monthly transfers, the first transfer will occur 30 days after your Contract Date; quarterly transfers, 90 days after your Contract Date; semiannual transfers, 180 days after your Contract Date; and if you specify annual transfers, the first transfer will occur on your Contract Anniversary). If you stop dollar cost averaging, you must wait 30 days before you may begin this option again. Currently, we are not enforcing the 30 day waiting period but we reserve the right to enforce such waiting period in the future.

Your request to begin dollar cost averaging must specify the Investment Option you wish to transfer money from (your “source account”). You may choose any one Investment Option as your source account. The Account Value of your source account must be at least $5,000 for you to begin dollar cost averaging. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum Account Value but we reserve the right to enforce such minimum amounts in the future.

Your request to begin dollar cost averaging must also specify the amount and frequency of your transfers. You may choose monthly, quarterly, semiannual or annual transfers. The amount of your transfers may be specified as a dollar amount or a percentage of your source Account Value; however, each transfer must be at least $250. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum transfer amount but we reserve the right to enforce such minimum amounts in the future. Dollar cost averaging transfers are not subject to the same requirements and limitations as other transfers.

Finally, your request must specify the Variable Investment Option(s) you wish to transfer amounts to (your “target account(s)”). If you select more than one target account, your dollar cost averaging request must specify how transferred amounts should be allocated among the target accounts. Your source account may not also be a target account.

Your dollar cost averaging transfers will continue until the earlier of:

  •  your request to stop dollar cost averaging is effective,
 
  •  your source Account Value is zero, or
 
  •  your Annuity Date.

If, as a result of a dollar cost averaging transfer, your source Account Value falls below any minimum Account Value we may establish, we have the right, at our option, to transfer that remaining Account Value to your target account(s) on a proportionate basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions. We may change, terminate or suspend the dollar cost averaging option at any time.

Portfolio Rebalancing

Portfolio rebalancing allows you to maintain the percentage of your Contract Value allocated to each Variable Investment Option at a pre-set level prior to annuitization.

For example, you could specify that 30% of your Contract Value should be in the Equity Index Subaccount, 40% in the Managed Bond Subaccount, and 30% in the Growth LT Subaccount.

Over time, the variations in each Subaccount’s investment results will shift this balance of these Subaccount Value allocations. If you elect the portfolio rebalancing feature, we will automatically transfer your Subaccount Value back to the percentages you specify.

You may choose to have rebalances made quarterly, semiannually or annually until your Annuity Date; portfolio rebalancing is not available after you annuitize.

Procedures for selecting portfolio rebalancing are generally the same as those discussed in detail above for selecting dollar cost averaging: You may make your request at any time prior to your Annuity Date and it will be effective when we receive it in proper form. If you stop portfolio rebalancing, you must wait 30 days to begin again. Currently, we are not enforcing the 30-day waiting period but we reserve the right to enforce such waiting period in the future. If you specify a date fewer than 30 days after your Contract Date, your first rebalance will be delayed one month, and if you request rebalancing on your application but do not specify a

11



Table of Contents

date for the first rebalance, it will occur one period after your Contract Date, as described above under Dollar Cost Averaging. We may change, terminate or suspend the portfolio rebalancing feature at any time.

Earnings Sweep

An earnings sweep automatically transfers the earnings attributable to a specified Investment Option (the “sweep option”) to one or more other Investment Options (your “target option(s)”). If you elect to use the earnings sweep, you may select either the Fixed Option or the Money Market Subaccount as your sweep option. The Account Value of your sweep option will be required to be at least $5,000 when you elect the earnings sweep. You may select one or more Variable Investment Options (but not the Money Market Subaccount) as your target option(s).

You may choose to have earnings sweeps occur monthly, quarterly, semiannually or annually until you annuitize. At each earnings sweep, we will automatically transfer your accumulated earnings attributable to your sweep option for the previous period proportionately to your target option(s). That is, if you select a monthly earnings sweep, we will transfer the sweep option earnings from the preceding month; if you select a semiannual earnings sweep, we will transfer the sweep option earnings accumulated over the preceding six months. Earnings sweep transfers are not subject to the same requirements and limitations as other transfers.

To determine the earnings, we take the change in the sweep option’s Account Value during the sweep period, add any withdrawals or transfers out of the sweep option Account that occurred during the sweep period, and subtract any allocations to the sweep option Account during the sweep period. The result of this calculation represents the “total earnings” for the sweep period.

If, during the sweep period, you withdraw or transfer amounts from the sweep option Account, we assume that earnings are withdrawn or transferred before any other Account Value. Therefore, your “total earnings” for the sweep period will be reduced by any amounts withdrawn or transferred during the sweep option period. The remaining earnings are eligible for the sweep transfer.

Procedures for selecting the earnings sweep are generally the same as those discussed in detail above for selecting dollar cost averaging and portfolio rebalancing: You may make your request at any time and it will be effective when we receive it in a form satisfactory to us. If you stop the earnings sweep, you must wait 30 days to begin again. Currently, we are not enforcing the 30-day waiting period but we reserve the right to enforce such waiting period in the future. If you specify a date fewer than 30 days after your Contract Date, your first earnings sweep will be delayed one month, and if you request the earnings sweep on your application but do not specify a date for the first sweep, it will occur one period after your Contract Date, as described above under Dollar Cost Averaging.

If, as a result of an earnings sweep transfer, your source Account Value falls below $500, we have the right, at our option, to transfer that remaining Account Value to your target account(s) on a proportionate basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions. We may change, terminate or suspend the earnings sweep option at any time.

Pre-Authorized Withdrawals

You may specify a dollar amount for your pre-authorized withdrawals, or you may specify a percentage of your Contract Value or an Account Value. You may direct us to make your pre-authorized withdrawals from one or more specific Investment Options; if you do not give us these specific instructions, amounts will be deducted proportionately from your Account Value in each Investment Option.

Procedures for selecting pre-authorized withdrawals are generally the same as those discussed in detail above for selecting dollar cost averaging, portfolio rebalancing, and earnings sweeps: You may make your request at any time and it will be effective when we receive it in proper form. If you stop the pre-authorized withdrawals, you must wait 30 days to begin again. Currently, we are not enforcing the 30-day waiting period but we reserve the right to enforce such waiting period in the future.

If your pre-authorized withdrawals cause your Account Value in any Investment Option to fall below $500, we have the right, at our option, to transfer that remaining Account Value to your other Investment Options on a

12



Table of Contents

proportionate basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions. If your pre-authorized withdrawals cause your Contract Value to fall below $1,000, we may, at our option, terminate your Contract and send you the remaining withdrawal proceeds.

Pre-authorized withdrawals are subject to the same withdrawal charges as are other withdrawals, and each withdrawal is subject to any applicable charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes, to federal income tax on its taxable portion, and, if you have not reached age 59 1/2, a federal tax penalty of at least 10%.

Death Benefit

Any death benefit payable will be calculated as of the date we receive proof (in proper form) of the Annuitant’s death (or, if applicable, the Contract Owner’s death) and instructions regarding payment. Any claim of a death benefit must be made in proper form. A recipient of death benefit proceeds may elect to have this benefit paid in one lump sum, in periodic payments, in the form of a lifetime annuity or in some combination of these. Annuity payments will begin within 30 days once we receive all information necessary to process the claim.

If your Contract names Joint or Contingent Annuitants, no death benefit proceeds will be payable unless and until the last Annuitant dies prior to the Annuity Date or a Contract Owner dies prior to the Annuity Date.

Joint Annuitants on Qualified Contracts

On your Annuity Date, if your Contract was issued in connection with a Qualified Plan subject to Title I of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (“ERISA”), and you change your marital status after your Contract Date, you may be permitted to add a Joint Annuitant and to change your Joint Annuitant. Generally speaking, you may be permitted to add a new spouse as a Joint Annuitant, and you may be permitted to remove a Joint Annuitant who is no longer your spouse.

1035 Exchanges

You may make your initial or an additional Investment through an exchange of an existing annuity contract (a 1035 exchange). The exchange can be effected by completing the Transfer/ Exchange form, indicating in the appropriate section that you are making a 1035 exchange. The form is available by calling your representative or by calling us at 1-800-722-2333. Once completed, the form should be mailed to us, along with the annuity contract you are exchanging. If you are making an initial Investment, a completed contract application should also be attached.

In general terms, Section 1035 of the Code provides that no gain or loss is recognized when you exchange one annuity contract for another annuity contract. Under Revenue Ruling 2002-75, a 1035 exchange is now valid whether the exchange is made into a new or pre-existing annuity contract. Transactions under Section 1035, however, may be subject to special rules and may require special procedures and record keeping, particularly if the exchanged annuity contract was issued prior to August 14, 1982. You should consult your tax adviser prior to effecting a 1035 exchange.

Safekeeping of Assets

We are responsible for the safekeeping of the assets of the Separate Account. These assets are held separate and apart from the assets of our General Account and our other separate accounts.

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The statements of assets and liabilities of Separate Account A as of December 31, 2005, the related statements of operations for the year then ended, the statements of changes in net assets for each of the two years in the period then ended, and the financial highlights for each of the periods presented are incorporated by reference in this Statement of Additional Information from the Annual Report of Separate Account A dated December 31, 2005. Pacific Life’s consolidated financial statements as of December 31, 2005 and 2004

13



Table of Contents

and for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2005 are set forth beginning on the next page. These financial statements should be considered only as bearing on the ability of Pacific Life to meet its obligations under the Contracts and not as bearing on the investment performance of the assets held in the Separate Account.

INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

The consolidated financial statements of Pacific Life as of December 31, 2005 and 2004 and for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2005 have been audited by Deloitte & Touche LLP, 695 Town Center Drive, Costa Mesa, CA 92626, independent registered public accounting firm, as stated in their report appearing herein.

14



Table of Contents

INDEPENDENT AUDITORS’ REPORT
Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries:
We have audited the accompanying consolidated statements of financial condition of Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries (the Company) as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, and the related consolidated statements of operations, stockholder’s equity and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2005. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.
We conducted our audits in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in the United States of America. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes consideration of internal control over financial reporting as a basis for designing audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting. Accordingly, we express no such opinion. An audit also includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.
In our opinion, such consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2005 in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.
As discussed in Note 1 to the consolidated financial statements, the Company changed its method of accounting for variable interest entities in 2005 and for certain non-traditional long-duration contracts in 2004.
/s/DELOITTE & TOUCHE LLP
Costa Mesa, Ca
February 24, 2006

PL-1



Table of Contents

Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION
                 
    December 31,  
    2005     2004  
 
    (In Millions)
ASSETS
               
Investments:
               
Fixed maturity securities available for sale, at estimated fair value
  $ 25,685     $ 25,849  
Equity securities available for sale, at estimated fair value
    417       384  
Trading securities, at estimated fair value
    72       226  
Mortgage loans
    3,925       3,286  
Real estate
    129       134  
Policy loans
    5,904       5,629  
Interest in PIMCO
    368       606  
Other investments
    993       1,175  
 
TOTAL INVESTMENTS
    37,493       37,289  
Cash and cash equivalents
    672       836  
Deferred policy acquisition costs
    3,787       3,278  
Accrued investment income
    409       411  
Other assets
    869       779  
Separate account assets
    37,940       32,032  
 
TOTAL ASSETS
  $ 81,170     $ 74,625  
 

LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDER’S EQUITY

               
Liabilities:
               
Policyholder account balances
  $ 30,143     $ 29,652  
Future policy benefits
    5,098       4,910  
Short-term and long-term debt
    177       176  
Group insurance segment liabilities
    57       181  
Other liabilities
    1,593       1,834  
Variable interest entity debt
    39          
Separate account liabilities
    37,940       32,032  
 
TOTAL LIABILITIES
    75,047       68,785  
 

Commitments and contingencies (Note 20)

               

Stockholder’s Equity:

               
Common stock — $50 par value; 600,000 shares authorized, issued and outstanding
    30       30  
Paid-in capital
    502       497  
Unearned ESOP shares
    (8 )     (17 )
Retained earnings
    4,839       4,297  
Accumulated other comprehensive income
    760       1,033  
 
TOTAL STOCKHOLDER’S EQUITY
    6,123       5,840  
 
TOTAL LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDER’S EQUITY
  $ 81,170     $ 74,625  
 
See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

PL-2



Table of Contents

Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
 
    (In Millions)
REVENUES
                       
Policy fees and insurance premiums
  $ 1,361     $ 1,367     $ 1,109  
Net investment income
    1,921       1,838       1,770  
Net realized investment gain (loss)
    23       2       (79 )
Realized investment gain on interest in PIMCO
    104       169       327  
Commission revenue
    274       270       220  
Investment advisory fees
    317       248       174  
Other income
    38       26       33  
 
TOTAL REVENUES
    4,038       3,920       3,554  
 
 
                       
BENEFITS AND EXPENSES
                       
Interest credited to policyholder account balances
    1,198       1,125       1,153  
Policy benefits paid or provided
    706       715       770  
Commission expenses
    732       721       492  
Operating expenses
    798       670       582  
 
TOTAL BENEFITS AND EXPENSES
    3,434       3,231       2,997  
 
 
                       
INCOME FROM CONTINUING OPERATIONS BEFORE
                       
PROVISION FOR INCOME TAXES
    604       689       557  
Provision for income taxes
    101       142       149  
 
 
                       
INCOME FROM CONTINUING OPERATIONS
    503       547       408  
Discontinued operations, net of taxes
    41       33       28  
Cumulative adjustments due to changes in accounting principles
    (2 )     (19 )        
 
 
                       
NET INCOME
  $ 542     $ 561     $ 436  
 
See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

PL-3



Table of Contents

Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF STOCKHOLDER’S EQUITY
                                                                 
                                    Accumulated Other        
                                    Comprehensive Income (Loss)        
                                    Unrealized                    
                                    Gain (Loss) on     Minimum              
                                    Derivatives     Pension     Unrealized        
                    Unearned             and Securities     Liability     Gain on        
    Common     Paid-in     ESOP     Retained     Available for     Adjustment     Interest in        
    Stock     Capital     Shares     Earnings     Sale, Net     and Other, Net     PIMCO, Net     Total  
 
    (In Millions)
BALANCES, JANUARY 1, 2003
  $ 30     $ 153       ($42 )   $ 3,300     $ 407       ($44 )   $ 413     $ 4,217  
Comprehensive income:
                                                               
Net income
                            436                               436  
Other comprehensive income (loss)
                                    428       41       (180 )     289  
 
                                                             
Total comprehensive income
                                                            725  
Capital contribution
            350                                               350  
Allocation of unearned ESOP shares
            (2 )     13                                       11  
Other equity adjustments
            (1 )                                             (1 )
 
    30       500       (29 )     3,736       835       (3 )     233       5,302  
Comprehensive income:
                                                               
Net income
                            561                               561  
Other comprehensive income (loss)
                                    74       (5 )     (101 )     (32 )
 
                                                             
Total comprehensive income
                                                            529  
Allocation of unearned ESOP shares
            (1 )     12                                       11  
Other equity adjustments
            (2 )                                             (2 )
 
    30       497       (17 )     4,297       909       (8 )     132       5,840  
Comprehensive income:
                                                               
Net income
                            542                               542  
Other comprehensive income (loss)
                                    (227 )     3       (49 )     (273 )
 
                                                             
Total comprehensive income
                                                            269  
Allocation of unearned ESOP shares
            1       9                                       10  
Other equity adjustments
            4                                               4  
 
  $ 30     $ 502       ($8 )   $ 4,839     $ 682       ($5 )   $ 83     $ 6,123  
 
See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

PL-4



Table of Contents

Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
 
    (In Millions)
CASH FLOWS FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES
                       
Net income excluding discontinued operations
  $ 501     $ 528     $ 408  
Adjustments to reconcile net income excluding discontinued operations
   to net cash provided by operating activities:
                       
Net accretion on fixed maturity securities
    (96 )     (75 )     (60 )
Depreciation and other amortization
    36       37       43  
Deferred income taxes
    63       (54 )     (23 )
Net realized investment (gain) loss
    (23 )     (2 )     79  
Realized investment gain on interest in PIMCO
    (104 )     (169 )     (327 )
Net change in deferred policy acquisition costs
    (452 )     (376 )     (558 )
Interest credited to policyholder account balances
    1,198       1,125       1,153  
Change in trading securities
    154       80       266  
Change in accrued investment income
    2               20  
Change in future policy benefits
    172       76       283  
Change in other assets and liabilities
    133       408       196  
 
NET CASH PROVIDED BY OPERATING ACTIVITIES BEFORE DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS
    1,584       1,578       1,480  
Net cash used in operating activities of discontinued operations
    (79 )     (28 )     (1 )
 
NET CASH PROVIDED BY OPERATING ACTIVITIES
    1,505       1,550       1,479  
 
CASH FLOWS FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES
                       
Fixed maturity and equity securities available for sale:
                       
Purchases
  (4,061 )     (6,020 )     (7,309 )
Sales
    1,509       1,133       2,143  
Maturities and repayments
    2,381       2,223       2,881  
Repayments of mortgage loans
    423       1,833       584  
Proceeds from sales of real estate
    19       41       5  
Purchases of mortgage loans and real estate
    (1,153 )     (1,299 )     (1,175 )
Change in policy loans
    (275 )     (222 )     (292 )
Interest in PIMCO
    266       500       999  
Change in cash due to consolidation of variable interest entities
    14       30          
Decrease in cash due to deconsolidation of variable interest entity
    (72 )                
Other investing activity, net
    (594 )     611       201  
 
NET CASH USED IN INVESTING ACTIVITIES
    (1,543 )     (1,170 )     (1,963 )
 
(Continued)
See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

PL-5



Table of Contents

Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
(Continued)   2005     2004     2003  
 
    (In Millions)
CASH FLOWS FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES
                       
Policyholder account balances:
                       
Deposits
  $ 5,275     $ 5,633     $ 5,842  
Withdrawals
    (5,389 )     (5,575 )     (5,604 )
Net change in short-term and long-term debt
    1       (109 )     (200 )
Payments of variable interest entity debt
    (23 )                
Capital contribution
                    350  
Allocation of unearned ESOP shares
    10       11       11  
 
NET CASH PROVIDED BY (USED IN) FINANCING ACTIVITIES
    (126 )     (40 )     399  
 
 
                       
Net change in cash and cash equivalents
    (164 )     340       (85 )
Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of year
    836       496       581  
 
 
                       
CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS, END OF YEAR
  $ 672     $ 836     $ 496  
 
 
                       
NON-CASH INVESTING AND FINANCING ACTIVITIES
                       
Increases due to accounting for variable interest entities:
                       
Fixed maturity securities available for sale
  $ 48                  
Other investments
  $ 25                  
Variable interest entity debt
  $ 62                  
 
 
                       
SUPPLEMENTAL DISCLOSURE OF CASH FLOW INFORMATION
                       
Income taxes paid
  $ 237     $ 129     $ 102  
Interest paid
  $ 16     $ 13     $ 29  
 
See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

PL-6



Table of Contents

Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
1.   ORGANIZATION AND SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES
 
    ORGANIZATION AND DESCRIPTION OF BUSINESS
 
 
    Pacific Life Insurance Company (Pacific Life) was established in 1868 and is domiciled in the State of Nebraska as a stock life insurance company. Pacific Life is an indirect subsidiary of Pacific Mutual Holding Company (PMHC), a California mutual holding company, and a wholly owned subsidiary of Pacific LifeCorp, an intermediate Delaware stock holding company. PMHC and Pacific LifeCorp were organized pursuant to consent received from the California Department of Insurance (CA DOI) and the implementation of a plan of conversion to form a mutual holding company structure in 1997 (the Conversion).
 
    From time to time, insurance companies review their states of legal domicile. Many factors are involved in this review including a state’s premium tax rate. Because state imposed premium taxes are generally based on the higher of the domiciliary state’s premium tax rate or the local state rate, insurers domiciled in high tax rate states pay a retaliatory tax to states where the business is originated. After consideration of this and other factors, Pacific Life transferred its legal domicile from the State of California to the State of Nebraska effective September 1, 2005 (the Redomestication).
 
    Pacific Life and its subsidiaries and affiliates have primary business operations consisting of life insurance, individual annuities, pension and institutional products, and broker-dealer operations. Pacific Life’s primary business operations provide life insurance products, individual annuities and mutual funds, and offer to individuals, businesses, and pension plans a variety of investment products and services.
 
    BASIS OF PRESENTATION AND PRINCIPLES OF CONSOLIDATION
 
 
    The accompanying consolidated financial statements of Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries (the Company) have been prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America (U.S. GAAP) and include the accounts of Pacific Life and its majority owned and controlled subsidiaries and variable interest entities (VIEs) in which the Company was determined to be the primary beneficiary. All significant intercompany transactions and balances have been eliminated. Included in other liabilities is minority interest of $30 million and $34 million as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively. Included in operating expenses is the minority interest share of net income of $2 million, insignificant income and $1 million for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively.
 
    Pacific Life prepared its regulatory financial statements based on accounting practices prescribed or permitted by the CA DOI prior to the Redomestication and on accounting practices prescribed or permitted by the Nebraska Department of Insurance (NE DOI) subsequent to the Redomestication. These consolidated financial statements materially differ from those filed with regulatory authorities (Note 2).
 
    The preparation of financial statements in conformity with U.S. GAAP requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities as of the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates.
 
    In developing these estimates, management makes subjective and complex judgments that are inherently uncertain and subject to material change as facts and circumstances develop. Management has identified the following estimates as significant, as they involve a higher degree of judgment and are subject to a significant degree of variability: deferred policy acquisition costs (DAC), investment valuation, including other than temporary impairments, derivative valuation, liabilities for future policy benefits, provision for income taxes, and accounting for employee benefit plans.
 
    Certain prior year amounts have been reclassified to conform to the 2005 financial statement presentation.

PL-7



Table of Contents

    RECENTLY ADOPTED ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS
 
 
    In June 2005, the Emerging Issues Task Force (EITF) reached a consensus on EITF Issue No. 04-5, Determining Whether a General Partner, or the General Partners as a Group, Controls a Limited Partnership or Similar Entity When the Limited Partners Have Certain Rights. This EITF addresses whether a partnership should be consolidated by one of its partners and evaluates what considerations are relevant in determining whether a general partner should consolidate a limited partnership. EITF Issue No. 04-5 is effective immediately for new agreements subsequent to July 1, 2005 and in the first quarter of 2006 for existing agreements prior to July 1, 2005 as a cumulative effect through retained earnings or as a retroactive restatement. The adoption of EITF Issue No. 04-5 did not have a significant impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements for agreements subsequent to July 1, 2005 and is not expected to have a significant impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements for agreements entered into prior to July 1, 2005.
 
    In March 2005, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) issued FASB Staff Position (FSP) FASB Interpretation No. (FIN) 46 (R) -5, Implicit Variable Interests Under FASB Interpretation No. 46(R), Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities. This FSP addresses whether a reporting entity has an implicit variable interest in a VIE that commonly arises in leasing arrangements among related parties, as well as other types of arrangements involving both related and unrelated parties. This FSP was effective in the second quarter of 2005 and had no impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.
 
    In March 2005, the FASB issued FIN 47, Accounting for Conditional Asset Retirement Obligations. FIN 47 clarifies that the term “conditional asset retirement obligation” as used in Statement of Financial Accounting Standard (SFAS) No. 143, Accounting for Asset Retirement Obligations, refers to a legal obligation to perform an asset retirement activity in which the timing and (or) method of settlement are conditional on a future event that may or may not be within the control of the entity. The obligation to perform the asset retirement activity is unconditional even though uncertainty exists about the timing and (or) method of settlement. Uncertainty about the timing and (or) method of settlement of a conditional asset retirement obligation should be factored into the measurement of the liability when sufficient information exists to make a reasonable estimate of the fair value of the obligation. FIN 47 was adopted in the fourth quarter of 2005 and did not have a significant impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.
 
    In December 2004, the FASB issued SFAS No. 153, Exchanges of Nonmonetary Assets, an amendment of Accounting Principles Board (APB) No. 29, Accounting for Nonmonetary Transactions. This statement eliminates the exception from fair value measurement for nonmonetary exchanges of similar productive assets and replaces it with an exception for exchanges that do not have commercial substance. This statement specifies that a nonmonetary exchange has commercial substance if the future cash flows of the entity are expected to change significantly as a result of the exchange. SFAS No. 153 was effective for nonmonetary asset exchanges occurring beginning in the third quarter of 2005 and did not have a significant impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.
 
    Effective January 1, 2004, the Company adopted Accounting Standards Executive Committee of the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants (AICPA) Statement of Position (SOP) 03-1, Accounting and Reporting by Insurance Enterprises for Certain Non Traditional Long-Duration Contracts and for Separate Accounts. SOP 03-1 addresses: 1) separate account presentation; 2) accounting for an insurance company’s proportionate interest in separate accounts; 3) transfers of assets from the general account to a separate account; 4) valuation of certain insurance liabilities and policy features such as guaranteed minimum death benefits (GMDB) and annuitization benefits; and 5) accounting for sales inducements. In September 2004, the AICPA subsequently issued a Technical Practice Aid (TPA), which contains interpretive guidance on applying certain provisions of SOP 03-1. The interpretive guidance has been incorporated into the adoption of SOP 03-1.
 
    Separate account assets and liabilities represent funds segregated for the benefit of certain contract holders who bear the investment risk. The Company’s accounting is consistent with the provisions of SOP 03-1 relating to separate account reporting. For example, separate account assets and liabilities are equal and reported at fair value, and the Company does not have any investments in separate accounts. Also, policyholder deposits and withdrawals, investment income, and related realized investment gains and losses are excluded from the amounts reported in the consolidated statements of operations, and fees charged on contract holder deposits and balances are included in revenues as policy fees and investment advisory fees. The adoption of these provisions of SOP 03-1 did not impact the Company’s consolidated financial statements.

PL-8



Table of Contents

    Certain variable annuity (VA) contracts classified as insurance contracts have amounts charged against contract holders for an insurance benefit feature assessed in a manner that is expected to result in profits in earlier years and subsequent losses from that insurance benefit, including GMDB and guaranteed living income benefits (GLIB). A liability is required to be established in addition to the account balance to recognize the portion of such assessments that compensate the insurance enterprise for benefits to be provided in future periods. The Company had historically established GMDB reserves and recorded a liability of $32 million as of December 31, 2003. There were no GLIB reserves established as of December 31, 2003. Upon the adoption of SOP 03-1, these reserves were increased by $24 million, with the GMDB reserve increased by $17 million to $49 million and the GLIB reserve was established at $7 million. Additionally, the present value of estimated gross profits underlying the VA DAC calculation was revised for the requirements of SOP 03-1, resulting in a $10 million reduction of the VA DAC asset.
 
    Certain universal life (UL) and variable universal life (VUL) contracts classified as insurance contracts have amounts charged against contract holders for an insurance benefit feature assessed in a manner that is expected to result in profits in earlier years and subsequent losses from the insurance benefit, including policy death benefits, no lapse guarantee riders (NLGR) and related reinsurance ceded coverages. A liability, net of reinsurance ceded, is required in addition to the account balance to recognize the portion of such assessments that compensates the insurance enterprise for benefits to be provided in future periods. The Company had historically established a reserve for reinsurance cost on one life reinsurance agreement and recorded a liability of $37 million as of December 31, 2003. Upon the adoption in 2004 of SOP 03-1, the reserve was decreased by $4 million. There were no NLGR or annuitization reserves established as of December 31, 2003. Upon adoption of SOP 03-1, reserves totaling $0.2 million for the NLGR insurance benefits and $0.1 million for annuitization were established. Additionally, the present value of estimated gross profits underlying the Company’s UL and VUL DAC calculation was not impacted and there was no resulting DAC impact.
 
    Certain in force UL contracts have bonus interest features. None of these contract bonus interest features met the specific sales inducement criteria established in SOP 03-1. Therefore, the Company’s existing practice of accruing a bonus interest liability ratably over the period during which the bonus is earned up to the time it is credited to the contract holder account balance has been continued without modification.
 
    As a result of the adoption of SOP 03-1, the Company recorded a decrease in net income of $19 million, net of tax, as a cumulative adjustment due to a change in accounting principle for the year ended December 31, 2004.
 
    In January 2003, the FASB issued FIN 46, Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities, an Interpretation of ARB No. 51 (FIN 46). FIN 46 addresses whether certain types of entities, referred to as VIEs, should be consolidated in the Company’s consolidated financial statements. A VIE is an entity in which the equity investors lack certain essential characteristics of a controlling financial interest or that lacks sufficient equity to finance its own activities without financial support provided by other entities. A company is considered the primary beneficiary and must consolidate a VIE if it has a variable interest that will absorb a majority of the expected losses if they occur, receive a majority of the entity’s expected returns, or both. In December 2003, the FASB issued FIN 46 (revised December 2003), Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities, an Interpretation of ARB No. 51 (FIN 46R). FIN 46R replaced FIN 46 to clarify and revise a number of key elements of FIN 46, including the definition of VIE and the treatment of fees paid to decision makers. Upon adoption of FIN 46R on January 1, 2005, the provisions of FIN 46R were applied to VIEs created after December 31, 2003.
 
    The consolidation requirements for the Company’s VIEs, created prior to December 31, 2003, were applied effective January 1, 2005. The Company has determined that it is the primary beneficiary of a Collateralized Debt Obligation (CDO) VIE of high-yield debt securities that it sponsored in 1998 (Note 4). In accordance with the transition provisions of FIN 46R, the Company increased assets $67 million, liabilities $65 million, including non-recourse debt of $62 million, accumulated other comprehensive income $4 million and decreased net income by $2 million as a cumulative adjustment due to a change in accounting principle upon the adoption of FIN 46R. This decrease in net income is a non-economic loss that is anticipated to reverse into income at the termination of the VIE.

PL-9



Table of Contents

    FUTURE ADOPTION OF NEW ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS
 
 
    In September 2005, the AICPA issued SOP 05-1, Accounting by Insurance Enterprises for Deferred Acquisition Costs in Connection With Modifications or Exchanges of Insurance Contracts. This SOP provides guidance on accounting for DAC on internal replacements or insurance and investment contracts other than those described in SFAS No. 97, Accounting and Reporting by Insurance Enterprises for Certain Long-Duration Contracts and for Realized Gains and Losses from the Sale of Investments. This SOP is effective for internal replacements occurring in fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2006 and adoption is not expected to have a significant impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.
 
    In May 2005, the FASB issued SFAS No. 154, Accounting Changes and Error Corrections. This statement changes the requirements for the accounting for and reporting of a change in accounting principle and applies to all voluntary changes in accounting principle as well as changes required by a new accounting pronouncement. SFAS No. 154 eliminates the requirement in APB No. 20, Accounting Changes, to include the cumulative effect of changes in accounting principle in the statement of operations in the period of change. Instead, this statement requires retrospective application of changes in accounting principle to prior periods’ financial statements. This statement is effective for accounting changes and corrections of errors in the first quarter of 2006.
 
    In November 2003, the FASB Task Force reached a partial consensus under EITF Issue No. 03-1, The Meaning of Other-Than-Temporary Impairment and Its Application to Certain Investments. This EITF required certain quantitative and qualitative disclosures for securities accounted for under SFAS No. 115, Accounting for Certain Investments in Debt and Equity Securities, which are impaired at the statement of financial condition date but for which an other than temporary impairment has not been recognized. The portions of this EITF on which consensus was reached were effective for financial statements for fiscal years ending after December 15, 2003. Effective December 31, 2003, the required disclosures were included in the notes to consolidated financial statements. In November 2005, the FASB issued FSP FAS No. 115-1 and FAS No. 124-1, The Meaning of Other-Than-Temporary Impairment and Its Application to Certain Investments. The guidance within the FSP is applicable to debt and equity securities that are within the scope of SFAS No. 115. The FSP nullifies certain requirements of EITF Issue No. 03-1 regarding the recognition of other than temporary impairments and restores the guidance for determination of other than temporary impairment to SFAS No. 115, EITF Issue No. 99-20, Recognition of Interest Income and Impairment on Purchased and Retained Beneficial Interests in Securitized Financial Assets, and APB Opinion No. 18, The Equity Method of Accounting for Investments in Common Stock. The FSP adopts the disclosure requirements of EITF Issue No. 03-1. For other than temporarily impaired debt securities, the investor will account for the debt security as if the debt security was purchased on the measurement date of the other than temporary impairment. The discount or reduced premium recorded for the debt security would be amortized over the remaining life of the debt security as a yield adjustment. The FSP is effective for fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2005 and adoption is not expected to have a significant impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.
 
    INVESTMENTS
 
 
    Fixed maturity and equity securities available for sale are reported at estimated fair value, with unrealized gains and losses, net of deferred income taxes and adjustments related to DAC, recorded as a component of other comprehensive income (OCI). For mortgage-backed securities and asset-backed securities included in fixed maturity securities available for sale, the Company recognizes income using a constant effective yield based on anticipated prepayments and the estimated economic life of the securities. When estimates of prepayments change, the effective yield is recalculated to reflect actual payments to date and anticipated future payments. For fixed rate securities, the net investment in the securities is adjusted to the amount that would have existed had the new effective yield been applied since the acquisition of the securities. These adjustments are reflected in net investment income. Trading securities are reported at estimated fair value with changes in estimated fair value included in net realized investment gain (loss).
 
    Investment income consists primarily of interest and dividends, net investment income from partnership interests, prepayment fees on fixed maturity securities and mortgage loans, and income from certain derivatives. Interest is recognized on an accrual basis and dividends are recorded on the ex-dividend date. Amortization of premium and accretion of discount on fixed maturity securities is recorded using the effective interest method.
 
    The estimated fair value of fixed maturity and equity securities is generally obtained from independent pricing services. For fixed maturity securities not able to be priced by independent services (generally private placement and

PL-10



Table of Contents

    low volume traded securities), an internally developed matrix is used. The matrix utilizes the fair market yield curves, provided by a major independent data service, which determines the discount yield based upon the security’s weighted-average life, rating, and liquidity spread. The estimated fair value of the security is calculated as the present value of the estimated cash flows discounted at the yield determined above. For those securities not priced externally or by the matrix, the estimated fair value is internally determined, utilizing various techniques in valuing complex investments with variable cash flows.
 
    The following table identifies the estimated fair value of fixed maturity securities by pricing sources.
                                 
    December 31, 2005     December 31, 2004  
    Fixed Maturities     % of Total     Fixed Maturities     % of Total  
    at Estimated     Estimated     at Estimated     Estimated  
    Fair Value     Fair Value     Fair Value     Fair Value  
         
    (In Millions)
Independent market quotations
  $ 19,383       75.5 %   $ 19,712       76.2 %
Matrix-priced
    5,474       21.3 %     5,523       21.4 %
Other methods
    828       3.2 %     614       2.4 %
 
                       
 
  $ 25,685       100.0 %   $ 25,849       100.0 %
 
                       
    The matrix-priced securities primarily consist of private placements and have an average duration of five years as of December 31, 2005 and 2004.
 
    The Company assesses whether other than temporary impairments have occurred based upon the Company’s case-by-case evaluation of the underlying reasons for the decline in estimated fair value. All securities with a gross unrealized loss at the consolidated statement of financial condition date are subjected to the Company’s process for identifying other than temporary impairments with additional focus on securities with unrealized losses greater than 20% of net carrying amount. The Company considers a wide range of factors, as described below, about the security issuer and uses its best judgment in evaluating the cause of the decline in the estimated fair value of the security and in assessing the prospects for near-term recovery. Inherent in the Company’s evaluation of each security are assumptions and estimates about the operations of the issuer and its future earnings potential.
 
    Considerations used by the Company in the impairment evaluation process include, but are not limited to, the following:
    The duration and extent that the estimated fair value has been below net carrying amount
 
    Industry factors or conditions related to a geographic area that are negatively affecting the security
 
    Underlying valuation of assets specifically pledged to support the credit
 
    Past due interest or principal payments or other violation of covenants
 
    Deterioration of the overall financial condition of the specific issuer
 
    Downgrades by a rating agency
 
    Ability and intent to hold the investment for a period of time to allow for a recovery of value
 
    Fundamental analysis of the liquidity and financial condition of the specific issuer
    Also, the Company estimates the cash flows over the life of certain purchased beneficial interests in securitized financial assets. Based upon current information and events, if the estimated fair value of its beneficial interests is less than or equal to its net carrying amount and if there has been an adverse change in the estimated cash flows since the last revised estimate, considering both timing and amount, then an other than temporary impairment is recognized.
 
    Securities and purchased beneficial interests that are deemed to be other than temporarily impaired are written down to estimated fair value in the period the securities or purchased beneficial interest are deemed to be impaired.

PL-11



Table of Contents

    Realized gains and losses on investment transactions are determined on a specific identification basis and are included in net realized investment gain (loss). The Company includes other than temporary impairment write-downs in net realized investment gain (loss).
 
    Mortgage loans, net of valuation allowances and write-downs, and policy loans are stated at unpaid principal balances.
 
    Real estate is carried at depreciated cost, net of write-downs, or, for real estate acquired in satisfaction of debt, estimated fair value less estimated selling costs at the date of acquisition, if lower than the related unpaid balance.
 
    Other investments primarily consist of partnership and joint ventures, derivative instruments, and low income housing related investments qualifying for tax credits (LIHTC). Partnership and joint venture interests where the Company does not have a controlling interest or majority ownership are recorded under the cost or equity method of accounting depending on the equity ownership position.
 
    Investments in LIHTC are recorded under either the effective interest method, if they meet certain requirements, including a projected positive yield based solely on guaranteed credits, or are recorded under the equity method if these certain requirements are not met. For investments in LIHTC recorded under the effective interest method, the amortization of the original investment and the tax credits are recorded in the provision for income taxes. For investments in LIHTC recorded under the equity method, the amortization of the initial investment is included in net investment income, and the related tax credits are recorded in the provision for income taxes. The amortization recorded in net investment income was $23 million, $24 million and $25 million for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively.
 
    The Company may loan securities in connection with its securities lending program administered by an authorized financial institution. The Company receives collateral in an amount equal to 102% of the estimated fair value of the loaned securities. The collateral pledged is restricted and not available for general use.
 
    All derivatives, whether designated in hedging relationships or not, are required to be recorded at estimated fair value. If the derivative is designated as a cash flow hedge, the effective portion of changes in the estimated fair value of the derivative is recorded in OCI and recognized in earnings when the hedged item affects earnings. If the derivative is designated as a fair value hedge, the changes in the estimated fair value of the derivative and the hedged item are recognized in net realized investment gain (loss). The change in value of the hedged item associated with the risk being hedged is reflected as an adjustment to the carrying amount of the hedged item. For derivative instruments not designated as hedges, the change in estimated fair value of the derivative is recorded in net realized investment gain (loss). Estimated fair value exposure is calculated based on the aggregate estimated fair value of all derivative instruments with each counterparty, net of collateral received, in accordance with legally enforceable counterparty master netting agreements. If the estimated fair value exposure to the counterparty is positive, the amount is reflected in other assets whereas, if the estimated fair value exposure to the counterparty is negative, the estimated fair value is included in other liabilities.
 
    The periodic cash flows for all hedging derivatives are recorded consistent with the hedged item on an accrual basis. For derivatives that are hedging securities, these amounts are included in net investment income. For derivatives that are hedging liabilities, these amounts are included in interest credited to policyholder account balances. For derivatives not designated as hedging instruments, the periodic cash flows are reflected in net realized investment gain (loss) on an accrual basis. Upon termination of a cash flow hedging relationship, the accumulated amount in OCI is amortized into net investment income or interest credited to policyholder account balances over the remaining life of the hedged item. Upon termination of a fair value hedging relationship, the accumulated cost basis adjustment to the hedged item is amortized into net investment income or interest credited to policyholder account balances over its remaining life.
 
    CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS
 
 
    Cash and cash equivalents include all investments with an original maturity of three months or less.

PL-12



Table of Contents

    DEFERRED POLICY ACQUISITION COSTS
 
 
    The costs of acquiring new insurance business, principally commissions, medical examinations, underwriting, policy issue and other expenses, all of which vary with and are primarily associated with the production of new business, are deferred and recorded as an asset commonly referred to as DAC. As of December 31, 2005 and 2004, the carrying value of DAC was $3.8 billion and $3.3 billion, respectively (Note 8).
 
    For universal life, variable annuities and other investment-type contracts, acquisition costs are amortized through earnings in proportion to the present value of estimated gross profits (EGPs) from projected investment, mortality and expense margins and surrender charges over the estimated lives of the contracts. DAC related to traditional policies is amortized through earnings over the premium-paying period of the related policies in proportion to premium revenues recognized, using assumptions and estimates consistent with those used in computing policy reserves. DAC related to certain unrealized components in OCI, primarily unrealized gains and losses on securities available for sale, is recorded directly to equity through OCI.
 
    Significant assumptions in the development of EGPs include investment returns, surrender and lapse rates, rider utilization, interest spreads, and mortality margins. The Company’s long-term assumption for the underlying separate account investment return ranges up to 8.0%.
 
    A change in the assumptions utilized to develop EGPs, commonly referred to as unlocking, results in a change to amounts expensed in the reporting period in which the change was made by adjusting the DAC balance to the level DAC would have been had the EGPs been calculated using the new assumptions over the entire amortization period. In general, favorable experience variances result in increased expected future profitability and may lower the rate of DAC amortization, whereas unfavorable experience variances result in decreased expected future profitability and may increase the rate of DAC amortization. All critical assumptions utilized to develop EGPs are evaluated at least annually and necessary revisions are made to future EGPs to the extent that actual or anticipated experience indicates such a prospective change.
 
    The Company defers sales inducements and amortizes them over the life of the policy using the same methodology and assumptions used to amortize DAC. The Company offers a sales inducement to the policyholder where the policyholder receives a bonus credit, typically ranging from 4.0% to 5.0% of each deposit. Capitalized sales inducements were $472 million and $419 million as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively.
 
    Value of business acquired (VOBA), included as part of DAC, represents the capitalized value relating to insurance contracts in force at the date of acquisition. Amortization of the VOBA on a block of single premium immediate and deferred annuities is calculated in proportion to the run-off in contract benefit reserves over the life of the contracts. Amortization of the VOBA on a block of universal life contracts is calculated over the expected life of the policies in proportion to the present value of EGPs from such policies. The VOBA balance was $84 million and $86 million as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively.
 
    POLICYHOLDER ACCOUNT BALANCES
 
 
    Policyholder account balances on universal life and investment-type contracts, such as funding agreements, fixed account liabilities and guaranteed interest contracts (GICs), are valued using the retrospective deposit method and are equal to accumulated account values, which consist of deposits received, plus interest credited, less withdrawals and assessments. Interest credited to these contracts primarily ranged from 3.0% to 8.0%.
 
    FUTURE POLICY BENEFITS
 
 
    Annuity reserves, which primarily consist of group retirement and structured settlement annuities, are equal to the present value of expected future payments using pricing assumptions, as applicable, for interest rates, mortality, morbidity, retirement age and expenses. Interest rates used in establishing such liabilities ranged from 1.5% to 11.0%.
 
    Policy charges assessed against policyholders that represent compensation to the Company for services to be provided in future periods are recorded as unearned revenue reserves. The unearned revenue is recognized in income over the expected life of the contract using the same methods and assumptions used to amortize DAC. Unearned revenue

PL-13



Table of Contents

    related to certain unrealized components in OCI, primarily unrealized gains and losses on securities available for sale, is recorded directly to equity through OCI.
 
    Life insurance reserves are valued using the net level premium method on the basis of actuarial assumptions appropriate at policy issue. Mortality and persistency assumptions are generally based on the Company’s experience, which, together with interest and expense assumptions, include a margin for possible unfavorable deviations. Interest rate assumptions ranged from 4.5% to 9.3%. Future dividends for participating business are provided for in the liability for future policy benefits.
 
    Dividends to policyholders are accrued based on dividend formulas approved by the Pacific Life Board of Directors and reviewed for reasonableness and equitable treatment of policyholders by an independent consulting actuary. As of December 31, 2005 and 2004, participating experience rated policies paying dividends represent less than 1% of direct life insurance in force.
 
    Estimates of future policy benefit reserves and liabilities are continually reviewed and, as experience develops, are adjusted as necessary. Such changes in estimates are included in earnings for the period in which such changes occur.
 
    REVENUES, BENEFITS AND EXPENSES
 
 
    Insurance premiums, annuity contracts with life contingencies and traditional life and term insurance contracts, are recognized as revenue when due. Benefits and expenses are matched against such revenues to recognize profits over the lives of the contracts. This matching is accomplished by providing for liabilities for future policy benefits, expenses of contract administration and the amortization of DAC.
 
    Receipts for universal life and investment-type contracts are reported as deposits to either policyholder account balances or separate account liabilities, and are not included in revenue. Policy fees consist of mortality charges, surrender charges and expense charges that have been earned and assessed against related account values during the period. The timing of policy fee revenue recognition is determined based on the nature of the fees. Certain amounts assessed that represent compensation for services to be provided in future periods are reported as unearned revenue and recognized in revenue over the periods benefited. Benefits and expenses include policy benefits and claims incurred in the period that are in excess of related policyholder account balances, interest credited to policyholder account balances, expenses of contract administration and the amortization of DAC.
 
    Reinsurance premiums ceded and reinsurance recoveries on benefits and claims incurred are deducted from their respective revenue and benefit and expense accounts.
 
    Commission revenue from the Company’s broker-dealer subsidiaries is generally recorded on the trade date. Related commission expense is recorded when incurred.
 
    Investment advisory fees are primarily fees earned from the Pacific Select Fund, the investment vehicle provided to the Company’s variable universal life and variable annuity contract holders. These fees are based upon the net asset value of the underlying portfolios, and are recorded as earned. Related subadvisory expense is included in operating expenses and is recorded when incurred.
 
    DEPRECIATION AND AMORTIZATION
 
 
    Depreciation of investment real estate is computed on the straight-line method over estimated useful lives, which range from 5 to 30 years. Depreciation of investment real estate is included in net investment income. Certain other assets are depreciated or amortized on the straight-line method over estimated useful lives, which range from 3 to 40 years. Depreciation and amortization of certain other assets are included in operating expenses.

PL-14



Table of Contents

    INCOME TAXES
 
 
    Pacific Life and its includable subsidiaries are included in the consolidated Federal income tax return of PMHC. Pacific Life and its wholly owned, Arizona domiciled life insurance subsidiary, Pacific Life & Annuity Company (PL&A), are taxed as life insurance companies for Federal income tax purposes. Pacific Life’s non-insurance subsidiaries are either included in PMHC’s combined California franchise tax return or, if necessary, file separate state tax returns. Companies included in the consolidated Federal income tax return of PMHC and/or the combined California franchise tax return of PMHC are allocated tax expense or benefit based principally on the effect of including their operations in PMHC’s returns. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognized for the future tax consequences attributable to differences between the financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax bases. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured using enacted tax rates expected to apply to taxable income in the years the differences are expected to be recovered or settled.
 
    SEPARATE ACCOUNTS
 
 
    Separate accounts primarily include variable annuity and life contracts, as well as other guaranteed and non-guaranteed accounts. Separate account assets and liabilities are recorded at estimated fair value and represent legally segregated contract holder funds. Deposits to separate accounts, investment income and realized and unrealized gains and losses on the separate account assets accrue directly to contract holders and, accordingly, are not reflected in the consolidated statements of operations or cash flows. However, on certain separate account products, the Company does contractually guarantee either a minimum return or account value, for which liabilities have been recorded in future policy benefits. Amounts charged to the separate account for mortality, surrender and expense charges are included in revenues as policy fees.
 
    FAIR VALUE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
 
 
    The estimated fair value of financial instruments, disclosed in Notes 9, 10 and 13, has been determined using available market information and appropriate valuation methodologies. However, considerable judgment is often required to interpret market data to develop the estimates of fair value. Accordingly, the estimates presented may not be indicative of the amounts the Company could realize in a current market exchange. The use of different market assumptions and/or estimation methodologies could have a significant effect on the estimated fair value amounts.

PL-15



Table of Contents

2.   STATUTORY RESULTS
 
    Pacific Life prepared its statutory financial statements in conformity with accounting practices prescribed or permitted by the CA DOI prior to the Redomestication, and accounting practices prescribed or permitted by the NE DOI subsequent to the Redomestication, both of which are a comprehensive basis of accounting other than U.S. GAAP. The following are reconciliations of statutory capital and surplus, and statutory net income for Pacific Life, as compared to the amounts reported as stockholder’s equity and net income from these consolidated financial statements prepared in accordance with U.S. GAAP:
                 
    December 31,  
    2005     2004  
     
    (In Millions)
Statutory capital and surplus
  $ 3,009     $ 2,814  
DAC
    3,741       3,273  
Accumulated other comprehensive income
    764       1,026  
Non-admitted assets
    505       399  
Asset valuation reserve
    374       311  
Insurance and annuity reserves
    (25 )     (164 )
Surplus notes
    (150 )     (150 )
Unearned revenue reserve
    (487 )     (399 )
Deferred income taxes
    (628 )     (438 )
CRVM and CARVM(1)
    (874 )     (792 )
Other
    (106 )     (40 )
     
Stockholder’s equity as reported herein
  $ 6,123     $ 5,840  
     
(1) The Commissioners’ Reserve Valuation Method (CRVM) and the Commissioners’ Annuity Reserve Valuation Method (CARVM) adjustments represent the reserve expense allowance on variable UL and VA contracts, which are allowed under statutory accounting principles, but not U.S. GAAP.
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
     
    (In Millions)
Statutory net income
  $ 234     $ 508     $ 277  
DAC
    454       385       551  
Derivatives
    23       1       16  
Partnerships and joint ventures
    9       62       (13 )
Earnings of subsidiaries
    (3 )     (364 )     125  
Asset-backed securities valuation differences
    (4 )     32       (23 )
Net realized gain (loss) on trading securities
    (14 )     (2 )     34  
Interest maintenance reserve
    (31 )     (20 )     (8 )
Insurance and annuity reserves
    (47 )     (204 )     (469 )
Deferred income taxes
    (61 )     75       (121 )
Other
    (18 )     88       67  
     
Net income as reported herein
  $ 542     $ 561       436  
     
    RISK-BASED CAPITAL
 
    Risk-based capital is a method developed by the National Association of Insurance Commissioners to measure the minimum amount of capital appropriate for an insurance company to support its overall business operations in

PL-16



Table of Contents

    consideration of its size and risk profile. The formulas for determining the amount of risk-based capital specify various weighting factors that are applied to financial balances or various levels of activity based on the perceived degree of risk. The adequacy of a company’s actual capital is measured by the risk-based capital results, as determined by the formulas. Companies below minimum risk-based capital requirements are classified within certain levels, each of which requires specified corrective action. As of December 31, 2005 and 2004, Pacific Life and PL&A exceeded the minimum risk-based capital requirements.
 
    DIVIDEND RESTRICTIONS
 
    As a result of the Redomestication, dividend payments by Pacific Life to Pacific LifeCorp are no longer restricted by the California Insurance Code, but are instead subject to similar restrictions set forth in Nebraska law. Under the Nebraska Insurance Code, ordinary dividends in any 12-month period cannot exceed the greater of 10% of unassigned surplus as of the preceding year end or the statutory net gain from operations for the previous calendar year, without prior approval from the NE DOI. Based on this limitation and 2005 statutory results, Pacific Life could pay $243 million in ordinary dividends to Pacific LifeCorp in 2006 without prior regulatory approval from the Director of Insurance of the State of Nebraska. No dividends were paid during 2005, 2004 and 2003.
 
    The maximum amount of ordinary dividends that can be paid by PL&A to Pacific Life without restriction cannot exceed the lesser of 10% of statutory surplus as regards to policyholders, or the statutory net gain from operations. Based on this limitation and 2005 statutory results, PL&A could pay $35 million in dividends to Pacific Life in 2006 without prior regulatory approval. No dividends were paid during 2005, 2004 and 2003.
3.   CLOSED BLOCK
 
    In connection with the Conversion, an arrangement known as a closed block (the Closed Block) was established, for dividend purposes only, for the exclusive benefit of certain individual life insurance policies that had an experience based dividend scale for 1997. The Closed Block was designed to give reasonable assurance to holders of the Closed Block policies that policy dividends will not change solely as a result of the Conversion.
 
    Assets that support the Closed Block, which are primarily included in fixed maturity securities, policy loans and accrued investment income, amounted to $285 million and $290 million as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively. Liabilities allocated to the Closed Block, which are primarily included in future policy benefits, amounted to $311 million and $314 million as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively. The contribution to income from the Closed Block amounted to $1 million, $2 million and $2 million and is primarily included in policy fees and insurance premiums, net investment income and policy benefits paid or provided for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively.

PL-17



Table of Contents

4.   VARIABLE INTEREST ENTITIES
 
    As discussed in Note 1, the Company has adopted the provisions of FIN 46R, which requires the Company to consolidate certain VIEs for which it is the primary beneficiary. The following table presents, as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, the total assets of and maximum exposure to loss relating to VIEs, which the Company (i) has consolidated because it is the primary beneficiary, and (ii) holds a significant variable interest, but has not consolidated because it is not the primary beneficiary:
                                 
    December 31, 2005  
    Primary Beneficiary     Not Primary Beneficiary  
            Maximum             Maximum  
    Total     Exposure to     Total     Exposure to  
    Assets     Loss     Assets     Loss  
         
    (In Millions)
Asset-backed securities
                  $ 1,067     $ 231  
Collateralized bond obligations
  $ 42     $ 5       94       4  
Asset Management Finance Corp.
                    88       37  
Private equity fund
    46       4                  
 
                   
 
  $ 88     $ 9     $ 1,249     $ 272  
 
                   
                                 
    December 31, 2004  
    Primary Beneficiary     Not Primary Beneficiary  
            Maximum             Maximum  
    Total     Exposure to     Total     Exposure to  
    Assets     Loss     Assets     Loss  
         
    (In Millions)
Asset-backed securities
                  $ 661     $ 169  
Collateralized bond obligations
                    252       14  
Asset Management Finance Corp.
  $ 67     $ 65                  
 
                   
 
  $ 67     $ 65     $ 913     $ 183  
 
                   
    ASSET-BACKED SECURITIES
 
    As part of the Company’s investment strategy, the Company purchases primarily investment grade beneficial interests in asset-backed securities (ABS). These beneficial interests are issued from bankruptcy-remote special purpose entities (SPE), which are collateralized by financial assets including corporate debt. The Company has not guaranteed the performance, liquidity or obligations of the SPEs, and the Company’s maximum exposure to loss is limited to its carrying value of the beneficial interests in the SPEs. The ABS are not consolidated by the Company as the Company has determined that it is not the primary beneficiary of these entities based on the framework provided in FIN 46R.
 
    COLLATERALIZED BOND OBLIGATIONS
 
    The Company is the collateral manager and beneficial interest holder of three CDOs of high yield debt securities. As the collateral manager, the Company earns management fees on the outstanding asset balance, which are recorded in net investment income as earned. The collateral management fees were insignificant for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003. The Company has not guaranteed the performance, liquidity or obligations of the CDOs. The maximum exposure to loss is limited to the carrying amounts of retained interests. Upon adoption of FIN 46R on January 1, 2005 for VIEs created prior to December 31, 2003 (Note 1), the Company determined that it is the primary beneficiary of one CDO that it sponsored in 1998 and it was consolidated into the consolidated financial statements of the Company. Non-recourse debt consolidated from the CDO was $39 million as of December 31, 2005. The

PL-18



Table of Contents

remaining CDOs are not consolidated by the Company as the Company has determined that it is not the primary beneficiary of these entities based on the framework provided in FIN 46R.
ASSET MANAGEMENT FINANCE CORP.
In September 2004, Pacific Life acquired a 49.7% common stock ownership in Asset Management Finance Corporation (AMFC), a financial advisor for investment management firms, for $40 million. In connection with this transaction, Pacific Life has a commitment to fund an additional $20 million in subordinated debt through December 31, 2006. Pacific Life was determined to be the primary beneficiary of this VIE, and AMFC was included in the consolidated financial statements of the Company effective September 2004. In December 2005, a reconsideration event occurred when AMFC issued additional common stock to an outside investor. Pacific Life was no longer considered the primary beneficiary and AMFC was deconsolidated from the Company’s consolidated financial statements effective December 31, 2005. Pacific Life’s common stock ownership was reduced to 43% as of December 31, 2005 and is accounted for under the equity method.
PRIVATE EQUITY FUND
Private equity fund is a limited partnership that was established in July 2005 that is the general partner of two funds that invest in private equity funds for outside investors. The Company provides investment management services to the fund for a fee and receives carried interest based upon the performance of the fund. The Company has not guaranteed the performance, liquidity or obligations of the fund, and the Company’s maximum exposure to loss is equal to the carrying amounts. The Company was determined to be the primary beneficiary of this VIE and it was consolidated into the consolidated financial statements of the Company.
5.   INTEREST IN PIMCO
 
    The Company owns a beneficial economic interest in Pacific Investment Management Company LLC (PIMCO) through Allianz Global Investors of America L.P. (interest in PIMCO). PIMCO offers investment products through managed accounts and institutional, retail and offshore mutual funds. The interest in PIMCO is reported at estimated fair value, as determined by the put and call option price described below, with changes in estimated fair value reported as a component of OCI, net of taxes. As of December 31, 2005, the interest in PIMCO had an estimated fair value of $368 million.
 
    In May 2000, Allianz of America, Inc. (Allianz), a subsidiary of Allianz AG, acquired substantially all interests in PIMCO, other than those beneficially owned by the Company. In connection with this transaction, the interest in PIMCO is subject to a Continuing Investment Agreement (Agreement) with Allianz that provides for put options held by the Company, and call options held by Allianz, respectively. The per unit option amount, as determined by a formula in the Agreement, is subject to a cap and a floor of $600,000 and $500,000 per unit, respectively. The per unit value as of December 31, 2005 and 2004 was $585,044 and $574,004, respectively. The Agreement also limits the increase or decrease in the value of the put and call options to a maximum of 2% per year of the per unit amount, as defined in the Agreement, as of December 31, of the preceding calendar year. In January 2005, the Company and Allianz reached an agreement whereby Allianz agreed to pay an additional $5,373 per unit for all of the Company’s interest in PIMCO. The higher unit price was applied retroactively to all units previously sold and will be applied prospectively to the sale of all remaining units. During the year ended December 31, 2005, the Company recognized a pre-tax gain of $17 million related to this agreement.
 
    During the year ended December 31, 2005, Allianz exercised a call option and bought approximately $250 million of the Company’s interest in PIMCO. The pre-tax investment gain recognized for the year ended December 31, 2005 was $87 million.
 
    During the year ended December 31, 2004, Allianz exercised two call options and bought approximately $500 million of the Company’s interest in PIMCO. The pre-tax investment gain recognized for the year ended December 31, 2004 was $169 million.

PL-19



Table of Contents

    During the year ended December 31, 2003, the Company elected to exercise four put options and sold approximately $1 billion of its interest in PIMCO to Allianz. The pre-tax investment gain recognized for the year ended December 31, 2003 was $327 million.
 
    Distributions are dependent on the performance of PIMCO, and will be subject to certain limitations as defined in the contractual agreements. Distributions, which are included in net investment income, totaled $20 million, $40 million and $89 million for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively.
6.   ACQUISITIONS
 
    The Company’s acquisitions are accounted for under the purchase method of accounting.
 
    In July 2005, a transaction was closed whereby Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (PSD), a wholly owned subsidiary of Pacific Life, increased its common stock ownership in Waterstone Financial Group, Inc., a broker-dealer, from 62% to 100% for a purchase price of $7 million.
 
    In September 2004, a transaction was closed whereby Pacific Life acquired a 49.7% common stock ownership in AMFC. As of December 31, 2005, Pacific Life has a 43% ownership interest and accounts for this investment on the equity method of accounting (Note 4).
 
    Effective April 1, 2004, PSD purchased from Pacific LifeCorp, its wholly owned broker-dealer subsidiary, M.L. Stern & Co., LLC (MLS). As of the transaction date, MLS’s assets and liabilities of $37 million and $25 million, respectively, were included in the consolidated financial statements of the Company. The purchase price of $12 million was based on MLS’s after tax book value. In accordance with SFAS No. 141, Business Combinations, since this transaction is between entities under common control, as the receiving entity, Pacific Life is required to report the consolidated results of operations of MLS as though the transfer of net assets had occurred at the beginning of the period. Accordingly, MLS’s consolidated statement of operations is included in the Company’s consolidated statement of operations for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively, after elimination of intercompany transactions.
 
    Goodwill from acquisitions totaled $51 million and $46 million as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively. There were no goodwill impairment write-downs during the years ended December 31, 2005 and 2004. Goodwill related to the acquisition of a real estate property, acquired through a limited liability company, was considered impaired due to the negative impact of the economy on property performance and written down $5 million during the year ended December 31, 2003.
7.   DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS
 
    On April 27, 2005 (Closing Date), a transaction was closed whereby the Company sold its group insurance segment business to PacifiCare Health Systems, Inc. (PacifiCare). The transaction is structured as a coinsurance arrangement whereby the Company will cede to PacifiCare future premiums received for its existing group insurance segment business and PacifiCare will assume future claim liabilities following the Closing Date. Group insurance segment liabilities arising prior to the Closing Date will not be reinsured. PacifiCare also obtained renewal rights for the existing business as of the Closing Date.

PL-20



Table of Contents

Operating results of discontinued operations, relating to the group insurance segment, were as follows:
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
     
    (In Millions)
Revenues
  $ 221     $ 814     $ 990  
Benefits and expenses
    185       763       948  
 
             
Income from discontinued operations
    36       51       42  
Provision for income taxes
    13       18       14  
 
             
Income from discontinued operations, net of tax
    23       33       28  
 
             
 
                       
Net gain on sale of discontinued operations
    28                  
Provision for income taxes
    10                  
 
             
Net gain on sale of discontinued operations, net of taxes
    18              
 
             
Discontinued operations, net of taxes
  $ 41     $ 33     $ 28  
 
             
Group insurance segment liabilities consist of future policy benefits, such as reserves for group health and group life, of $45 million and $139 million, and other liabilities of $12 million and $42 million as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively. Reserves for group health contracts are based on actual experience and morbidity assumptions. Liabilities for unpaid claims and claim expenses for group health contracts include estimates of claims that have been reported but not settled and estimates of claims incurred but not reported, based on the Company’s historical claims development patterns and other actuarial assumptions. Group life insurance reserves, including premium waivers, are based on various tabular methods and actual loss experience. Disabled life reserves are determined using various tabular reserve methods.
Fixed assets related to discontinued operations of $4 million and $5 million as of the Closing Date and December 31, 2004, respectively, were transferred to PacifiCare and disposed of in connection with the sale.

PL-21



Table of Contents

8.   DEFERRED POLICY ACQUISITION COSTS
 
    Components of DAC are as follows:
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
     
    (In Millions)
Balance, January 1
  $ 3,278     $ 2,817     $ 2,261  
 
             
Additions:
                       
Capitalized during the year
    906       868       821  
 
             
Amortization:
                       
Allocated to commission expenses
    (355 )     (373 )     (210 )
Allocated to operating expenses
    (99 )     (119 )     (53 )
 
             
Total amortization
    (454 )     (492 )     (263 )
 
             
 
                       
Allocated to OCI net unrealized (gains) losses
    57       85       (2 )
 
             
Balance, December 31
  $ 3,787     $ 3,278     $ 2,817  
 
             
    During the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, the Company revised certain assumptions to develop EGPs for its variable annuity and life insurance products subject to DAC amortization. This resulted in increases in DAC amortization expense of $29 million, $25 million and $8 million for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively. The revised EGPs also resulted in increased amortization of unearned revenue (Note 1) of $5 million, $40 million and $6 million for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively.

PL-22



Table of Contents

9.   INVESTMENTS
 
    The net carrying amount, gross unrealized gains and losses, and estimated fair value of fixed maturity and equity securities available for sale are shown below. The net carrying amount represents amortized cost adjusted for other than temporary declines in value and changes in the estimated fair value of fixed maturity securities attributable to the risk designated in a fair value hedge. The estimated fair value of publicly traded securities is based on quoted market prices. For securities not actively traded, fair values were estimated based on amounts provided by independent pricing services specializing in matrix pricing and modeling techniques. The Company also estimates certain fair values based on interest rates, credit quality and average maturity utilizing matrix pricing and other modeling techniques.
                                 
    Net              
    Carrying     Gross Unrealized     Estimated  
    Amount     Gains     Losses     Fair Value  
     
    (In Millions)
                               
U.S. Treasury securities and obligations of U.S. government authorities and agencies
  $ 184     $ 14             $ 198  
Obligations of states and political subdivisions
    1,194       261     $ 4       1,451  
Foreign governments
    407       44       5       446  
Corporate securities
    15,214       729       117       15,826  
Mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities
    7,676       195       111       7,760  
Redeemable preferred stock
    4                       4  
     
Total fixed maturity securities
  $ 24,679     $ 1,243     $ 237     $ 25,685  
     
 
                               
Total equity securities
  $ 386     $ 33     $ 2     $ 417  
     
 
                               
                               
U.S. Treasury securities and obligations of U.S. government authorities and agencies
  $ 255     $ 6     $ 6     $ 255  
Obligations of states and political subdivisions
    1,148       223       6       1,365  
Foreign governments
    445       51       15       481  
Corporate securities
    14,904       1,044       51       15,897  
Mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities
    7,597       279       49       7,827  
Redeemable preferred stock
    21       3               24  
     
Total fixed maturity securities
  $ 24,370     $ 1,606     $ 127     $ 25,849  
     
 
                               
Total equity securities
  $ 321     $ 63             $ 384  
     

PL-23



Table of Contents

    The net carrying amount and estimated fair value of fixed maturity securities available for sale as of December 31, 2005, by contractual repayment date of principal, are shown below. Expected maturities may differ from contractual maturities because borrowers may have the right to call or prepay obligations with or without call or prepayment penalties.
                                 
    Net              
    Carrying     Gross Unrealized     Estimated  
    Amount     Gains     Losses     Fair Value  
     
    (In Millions)
Due in one year or less
  $ 1,573     $ 29     $ 3     $ 1,599  
Due after one year through five years
    6,196       193       56       6,333  
Due after five years through ten years
    4,852       239       42       5,049  
Due after ten years
    4,382       587       25       4,944  
     
 
    17,003       1,048       126       17,925  
 
                               
Mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities
    7,676       195       111       7,760  
     
Total
  $ 24,679     $ 1,243     $ 237     $ 25,685  
     

PL-24



Table of Contents

    The following tables present the number of investments, and the estimated fair value and gross unrealized losses for fixed maturity and other securities, which include equity securities available for sale and other cost method investments, where the estimated fair value has declined and remained below the net carrying amount.
                         
    Total  
                    Gross  
            Estimated     Unrealized  
    Number     Fair Value     Losses  
         
            (In Millions)
                       
Obligations of states and political subdivisions
    20     $ 109       ($4 )
Foreign governments
    1       30       (5 )
Corporate securities
    493       5,201       (117 )
Federal agency mortgage-backed securities
    435       4,384       (111 )
         
Total fixed maturity securities
    949       9,724       (237 )
Total equity securities
    42       141       (13 )
         
Total
    991     $ 9,865       ($250 )
         
                                                 
    Less than 12 Months     12 Months or Greater  
                    Gross                     Gross  
            Estimated     Unrealized             Estimated     Unrealized  
    Number     Fair Value     Losses     Number     Fair Value     Losses  
                 
            (In Millions)
          (In Millions)
                                               
Obligations of states and political subdivisions
    10     $ 41       ($1 )     10     $ 68       ($3 )
Foreign governments
                            1       30       (5 )
Corporate securities
    328       3,788       (66 )     165       1,413       (51 )
Federal agency mortgage-backed securities
    244       2,670       (48 )     191       1,714       (63 )
                 
Total fixed maturity securities
    582       6,499       (115 )     367       3,225       (122 )
Total equity securities
    17       101       (3 )     25       40       (10 )
                 
Total
    599     $ 6,600       ($118 )     392     $ 3,265       ($132 )
                 

PL-25



Table of Contents

                         
    Total  
                    Gross  
            Estimated     Unrealized  
    Number     Fair Value     Losses  
         
            (In Millions)
                       
U.S. Treasury securities and obligations of U.S. government authorities and agencies
    5     $ 144       ($6 )
Obligations of states and political subdivisions
    20       116       (6 )
Foreign governments
    6       44       (15 )
Corporate securities
    251       2,487       (51 )
Federal agency mortgage-backed securities
    260       2,948       (49 )
         
Total fixed maturity securities
    542       5,739       (127 )
Total equity securities
    26       62       (15 )
         
Total
    568     $ 5,801       ($142 )
         
                                                 
    Less than 12 Months     12 Months or Greater  
                    Gross                     Gross  
            Estimated     Unrealized             Estimated     Unrealized  
    Number     Fair Value     Losses     Number     Fair Value     Losses  
                 
            (In Millions)
          (In Millions)
                                               
U.S. Treasury securities and obligations of U.S. government authorities and agencies
                            5     $ 144       ($6 )
Obligations of states and political subdivisions
    9     $ 20       ($1 )     11       96       (5 )
Foreign governments
    4       18       (1 )     2       26       (14 )
Corporate securities
    210       2,095       (30 )     41       392       (21 )
Federal agency mortgage-backed securities
    203       2,692       (28 )     57       256       (21 )
                 
Total fixed maturity securities
    426       4,825       (60 )     116       914       (67 )
Total equity securities
                            26       62       (15 )
                 
Total
    426     $ 4,825       ($60 )     142     $ 976       ($82 )
                 
    As of December 31, 2005, the Company holds no fixed maturity securities with an unrealized loss greater than 20% of their net carrying amount. As of December 31, 2005, the Company held no equity securities with a material unrealized loss.

PL-26



Table of Contents

    Major categories of investment income and related investment expense are summarized as follows:
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
     
    (In Millions)
Fixed maturity securities
  $ 1,396     $ 1,327     $ 1,289  
Equity securities
    20       10       6  
Mortgage loans
    219       233       197  
Real estate
    34       35       29  
Policy loans
    197       187       200  
Other
    157       142       154  
     
Gross investment income
    2,023       1,934       1,875  
Investment expense
    102       96       105  
     
Net investment income
  $ 1,921     $ 1,838     $ 1,770  
     
    Net investment income includes prepayment fees on fixed maturity securities and mortgage loans of $21 million, $62 million and $55 million for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively.
 
    The components of net realized investment gain (loss) are as follows:
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
     
    (In Millions)
Fixed maturity securities:
                       
Gross gains on sales
  $ 43     $ 49     $ 40  
Gross losses on sales
    (64 )     (24 )     (57 )
Other than temporary impairments
    (32 )     (86 )     (135 )
Other
    4       13       2  
     
Total fixed maturity securities
    (49 )     (48 )     (150 )
     
 
                       
Equity securities:
                       
Gross gains on sales
    20       6       7  
Gross losses on sales
            (1 )        
Other than temporary impairments
            (1 )     (4 )
Other
    1       1       1  
     
Total equity securities
    21       5       4  
     
 
                       
Trading securities
    (8 )     8       34  
Real estate
    8       5       (3 )
Mortgage loans
    (2 )     (5 )     (3 )
Derivatives
    63       46       8  
Other investments
    (10 )     (9 )     31  
     
Total
  $ 23     $ 2       ($79 )
     

PL-27



Table of Contents

    The change in unrealized gain (loss) on investments in available for sale and trading securities is as follows:
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
     
    (In Millions)
Available for sale securities:
                       
Fixed maturity
    ($473 )     ($43 )   $ 551  
Equity
    (32 )     38       15  
     
Total
    ($505 )     ($5 )   $ 566  
     

Trading securities

    ($14 )     ($3 )   $ 53  
     
    The cumulative unrealized gain on trading securities held as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, was $4 million and $18 million, respectively.
 
    Fixed maturity securities, which have been non-income producing for the 12 months preceding December 31, 2005 and 2004, totaled $13 million and $17 million, respectively.
 
    As of December 31, 2005 and 2004, fixed maturity securities of $19 million and $14 million, respectively, were on deposit with state insurance departments to satisfy regulatory requirements. The Company had no investments that exceeded 10% of total stockholder’s equity as of December 31, 2005.
 
    Mortgage loans on real estate are collateralized by properties primarily located throughout the U.S. As of December 31, 2005, $890 million, $401 million, $390 million, $236 million and $217 million were located in California, District of Columbia, Texas, Michigan and North Carolina, respectively. As of December 31, 2005, $162 million was located in Canada.
 
    The Company had a mortgage loan general valuation allowance of $26 million as of December 31, 2005 and 2004. During the year ended December 31, 2005, one mortgage loan with a balance of $4 million was foreclosed and transferred to real estate at a value of $2 million. During the year ended December 31, 2004, the Company received a discounted loan payoff that resulted in a direct write-down of $5 million. Additionally during 2004, one mortgage loan with a balance of $6 million was foreclosed and transferred to real estate. This real estate investment was subsequently sold in 2004, resulting in a $1 million gain. During the year ended December 31, 2003, the Company recorded a specific valuation allowance of $3 million on two mortgage loans. This was in addition to a specific valuation allowance of $4 million that had been established on one of the mortgage loans during the year ended December 31, 2002. During 2003, these mortgage loans were foreclosed and transferred to real estate at a value of $28 million.
 
    The Company did not have mortgage loans with accrued interest more than 180 days past due as of December 31, 2005 or 2004.
 
    There were no real estate write-downs during the years ended December 31, 2005 and 2004. During the year ended December 31, 2003, one real estate investment, with a balance of $27 million, was considered impaired and written down by $4 million.
 
10.   DERIVATIVES AND HEDGING ACTIVITIES
 
    The Company primarily utilizes derivative instruments to manage its exposure to interest rate risk, foreign currency risk, credit risk, and equity risk. Derivative instruments are also used to manage the duration mismatch of assets and liabilities. The Company utilizes a variety of derivative instruments, including swaps, foreign exchange forward contracts, caps, floors, options, and exchange traded futures contracts.

PL-28



Table of Contents

    The Company applies hedge accounting by designating derivative instruments as either fair value or cash flow hedges on the date the Company enters into a derivative contract. The Company formally documents all relationships between hedging instruments and hedged items, as well as its risk management objectives and strategy for undertaking various hedge transactions. In this documentation, the Company specifically identifies the asset, liability, firm commitment, or forecasted transaction that has been designated as a hedged item and states how the hedging instrument is expected to hedge the risks related to the hedged item. The Company formally measures effectiveness of its hedging relationships both at the hedge inception and on an ongoing basis in accordance with its risk management policy. Hedge effectiveness is assessed quarterly by a variety of techniques, including Value-at-Risk and regression analysis. In certain circumstances, hedge effectiveness has been established because the derivative instrument was constructed such that all critical terms of the derivative exactly match the hedged risk in the hedged item.
 
    The following table is a reconciliation of the notional amount by derivative type and hedging strategy:
                                 
    December 31,                   December 31,
    2004   Additions   Terminations   2005
     
    (In Millions)
Cash flow hedges:
                               
Foreign currency interest rate swaps
  $ 9,956     $ 2,246     $ 2,165     $ 10,037  
Interest rate swaps
    666       147       218       595  
Forward starting interest rate swap agreements
    825               50       775  
Other
    46               46        
     
 
    11,493       2,393       2,479       11,407  
     
 
                               
Fair value hedges:
                               
Interest rate swaps
    950       224       140       1,034  
Foreign currency interest rate swaps
            96               96  
Credit default swaps
    150       50       200        
Other
    43                       43  
     
 
    1,143       370       340       1,173  
     
 
                               
Derivatives not designated as hedging instruments:
                               
Variable annuity riders
    6,602       5,401       535       11,468  
Synthetic GICs
    5,315       3,170       433       8,052  
Total return swaps
    546       1,321       342       1,525  
Credit default swaps
    225       76       166       135  
Floors and options
    20       375               395  
Other
    268       197       166       299  
     
 
    12,976       10,540       1,642       21,874  
     
Total
  $ 25,612     $ 13,303     $ 4,461     $ 34,454  
     

PL-29



Table of Contents

    The following table is a summary of estimated fair value by derivative type and hedging strategy:
                 
    December 31,  
    2005     2004  
     
    (In Millions)
Cash flow hedges:
               
Foreign currency interest rate swaps
    ($20 )   $ 684  
Interest rate swaps
    (3 )     (6 )
Forward starting interest rate swap agreements
    (20 )     (20 )
     
Total
    ($43 )   $ 658  
     
 
               
Fair value hedges:
               
Interest rate swaps
  $ 13       ($6 )
Foreign currency interest rate swaps
    (7 )        
Credit default swaps
            5  
Other
            1  
     
Total
  $ 6     $ 0  
     
 
               
Derivatives not designated as hedging instruments:
               
Variable annuity riders
  $ 43     $ 42  
Total return swaps
    3       (16 )
Other
    (9 )     (5 )
     
Total
  $ 37     $ 21  
     
    Although the notional amounts of derivatives do not represent amounts that must be paid or received in the future (or in the case of currency swaps represent an obligation to pay one currency and receive another), such amounts do provide an indication of their potential sensitivity to interest rates or currencies, as applicable. The market sensitivity of a derivative would approach that of a cash instrument having a face amount equal to the derivative’s notional amount.
 
    For the derivatives held as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, the majority met the short-cut or critical terms method of assuming no ineffectiveness in the hedging relationship as specified in SFAS No. 133, Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities.
 
    CASH FLOW HEDGES
 
    The Company primarily uses foreign currency interest rate swaps, forward starting interest rate swaps and interest rate swaps to manage its exposure to variability in cash flows due to changes in foreign currencies and the benchmark interest rate. These cash flows include those associated with existing assets and liabilities, as well as the forecasted interest cash flows related to anticipated investment purchases and liability issuances. Such anticipated investment purchases and liability issuances are considered probable to occur and are generally completed within 10 years of the inception of the hedge.
 
    Foreign currency interest rate swap agreements are used to convert a fixed or floating rate, foreign-denominated asset or liability to a U.S. dollar fixed rate asset or liability. The foreign currency interest rate swaps involve the exchange of an initial principal amount in two currencies, and the agreement to re-exchange the currencies at a future date, at an agreed exchange rate. There is also periodic exchange of interest payments in the two currencies at specified intervals, calculated using agreed upon rates and the exchanged principal amounts. The main currencies that the Company hedges are the Euro, British Pound, Swiss Franc, and Canadian Dollar.
 
    Forward starting interest rate swaps and financial futures contracts are used to hedge the variability in the future interest receipts or payments stemming from the anticipated purchase of fixed rate securities or issuance of fixed rate

PL-30



Table of Contents

    liabilities due to changes in benchmark interest rates. These derivatives are predominately used to lock in interest rate levels to match future cash flow characteristics of assets and liabilities. Forward starting interest rate swaps involve the exchange, at specified intervals, of interest payments resulting from the difference between fixed and floating rate interest amounts calculated by reference to an underlying notional amount to begin at a specified date in the future for a specified period of time. Generally, no cash is exchanged at the outset of the contract and no principal payments are made by either party. Financial futures contracts obligate the holder to buy or sell the underlying financial instrument at a specified future date for a set price and may be settled in cash or by delivery of the financial instrument. Price changes on futures are settled daily through the required margin cash flows. The notional amounts of the contracts do not represent future cash requirements, as the Company intends to close out open positions prior to expiration.
    Interest rate swap agreements are used to convert a floating rate asset or liability to a fixed rate to hedge the variability of cash flows of the hedged asset or liability due to changes in benchmark interest rates. These derivatives are predominately used to better match the cash flow characteristics between assets and liabilities. These agreements involve the exchange, at specified intervals, of interest payments resulting from the difference between fixed rate and floating rate interest amounts calculated by reference to an underlying notional amount. Generally, no cash is exchanged at the outset of the contract and no principal payments are made by either party.
 
    The Company has not discontinued any cash flow hedges of anticipated transactions. The Company did not record any ineffectiveness for cash flow hedges during the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003. Over the next 12 months, the Company anticipates that $15 million of deferred gains on derivative instruments in accumulated OCI will be reclassified to earnings. For the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, all of the Company’s hedged forecasted transactions were determined to be probable of occurring. No component of the hedging instrument’s fair value is excluded from the determination of effectiveness.
 
    FAIR VALUE HEDGES
 
    The Company primarily uses interest rate swaps and credit default swaps to manage its exposure to changes in the fair values of its assets and liabilities due to fluctuations in the benchmark interest rate and credit risk.
 
    Interest rate swap agreements are used to convert a fixed rate asset or liability to a floating rate to hedge the changes in fair value of the hedged asset or liability due to changes in benchmark interest rates. These derivatives are used primarily to closely match the duration of the assets supporting specific liabilities.
 
    Credit default swap agreements (buy protection) are used to reduce the exposure to credit risk in underlying securities for changes in the underlying security’s fair value attributable to changes in the obligor’s creditworthiness or changes in the credit sector spread over the benchmark interest rate. These agreements involve the payment of fixed amounts at specific intervals in exchange for the protection from potential credit events associated with the underlying security.
 
    For the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004, and 2003, the ineffectiveness related to fair value hedges was immaterial and was recorded in net realized investment gain (loss). No component of the hedging instrument’s fair value is excluded from the determination of effectiveness.
 
    DERIVATIVES NOT DESIGNATED AS HEDGING INSTRUMENTS
 
    The Company issues certain insurance and reinsurance contracts that are considered to have embedded derivatives. When it is determined that the embedded derivative possesses economic and risk characteristics that are not clearly and closely related to those of the host contract and that a separate instrument with the same terms would qualify as a derivative instrument, it is separated from the host contract and accounted for as a stand-alone derivative.
 
    The Company offers a rider on certain variable annuity contracts that guarantees net principal over a ten year holding period, as well as riders on certain variable annuity contracts that guarantee a minimum withdrawal benefit over a 14-year, 20-year, or lifetime period, subject to certain restrictions. In addition, the Company offers an equity indexed universal life product. These embedded derivatives are recorded on the consolidated statements of financial condition in future policy benefits at estimated fair value, with changes in their estimated fair value recorded in net realized investment gain (loss).

PL-31



Table of Contents

    The Company issues synthetic GICs to Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (ERISA) qualified defined contribution employee benefit plans (ERISA Plan). The ERISA Plan uses the contracts in its stable value or guaranteed fixed income option. The Company does not manage the assets underlying synthetic GICs and is not subject to the investment risk. The Company receives a fee for providing liquidity to the benefit plan sponsor in the event that qualified plan benefit requests exceed plan cash flows. To mitigate this off balance sheet risk, the Company pre-approves all investment guidelines. The Company had outstanding commitments to maintain liquidity for benefit payments on notional amounts of $8.1 billion and $5.3 billion as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively.
 
    The Company also enters into total return swaps, credit default swaps and interest rate swaps without designating the derivatives as hedging instruments. Derivatives that are not designated as hedging instruments are entered into primarily to manage the Company’s equity risk, interest rate risk, credit risk, and for yield enhancement.
 
    Put options/total return swaps are primarily used to economically hedge the changes in fair value due to equity risk associated with the variable annuity riders. These agreements generally involve the exchange of a fixed rate payment for the return of a specified index below a strike price. Generally, no cash is exchanged at the outset of the contract and neither party makes principal payments.
 
    Credit default swaps (sell protection), in combination with fixed maturity securities, are used to replicate the investment characteristics of another investment or instrument that may operate as a substitute for a cash market investment and increase the exposure to credit risk in underlying securities. The Company also enters into credit default swaps (buy protection) to economically reduce the exposure to credit risk in underlying securities for changes in the underlying security’s fair value attributable to changes in the obligor’s creditworthiness without applying hedge accounting. These agreements involve the payment of fixed amounts at specific intervals in exchange for the protection from potential credit events associated with the underlying security.
 
    Net realized investment gains (losses) for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003 include $10 million, ($17) million and $24 million, respectively, related to realized gains and losses, changes in estimated fair value, and periodic net settlements of derivative instruments not designated as hedges.
 
    CREDIT EXPOSURE
 
    In accordance with legally enforceable counterparty master agreements, credit exposure is measured on a counterparty basis as the net positive aggregate estimated fair value net of any collateral received. The Company attempts to limit its credit exposure by dealing with creditworthy counterparties, establishing risk control limits, executing legally enforceable master netting agreements, and obtaining collateral where appropriate. As of December 31, 2005, the Company received collateral of $130 million and pledged collateral of $19 million to other counterparties. In addition, each counterparty is extensively reviewed to evaluate its financial stability before entering into each agreement and throughout the period that the financial instrument is owned. All of the credit exposure for the Company from derivative contracts is with investment grade counterparties. The Company has not incurred any losses on derivative financial instruments due to counterparty nonperformance.
 
    Because exchange traded futures and options are transacted through a regulated exchange, and positions are marked to market and settled on a daily basis, the Company has little exposure to credit related losses in the event of nonperformance by counterparties to such financial instruments. The Company is required to pledge collateral for any futures contracts that are entered into. The amount of collateral that is required is determined by the exchange on which it is traded. The Company currently pledges cash and U.S. Treasury Bills to satisfy this collateral requirement.

PL-32



Table of Contents

    The following table summarizes the notional and credit exposure for all derivatives for which the Company has credit exposure to a counterparty:
                 
    December 31, 2005  
    Notional     Credit  
    Amount     Exposure  
     
    (In Millions)
AA
  $ 2,621     $ 48  
A
    891       1  
     
Total
  $ 3,512     $ 49  
     
11.   POLICYHOLDER LIABILITIES
    POLICYHOLDER ACCOUNT BALANCES
    The detail of the liability for policyholder account balances is as follows:
                 
    December 31,  
    2005     2004  
     
    (In Millions)
Universal life
  $ 16,376     $ 15,415  
Funding agreements
    7,276       7,722  
Fixed account liabilities
    4,927       5,110  
GICs
    1,564       1,405  
     
Total
  $ 30,143     $ 29,652  
     
    FUTURE POLICY BENEFITS
    The detail of the liability for future policy benefits is as follows:
                 
    December 31,  
    2005     2004  
     
    (In Millions)
Annuity reserves
  $ 3,881     $ 3,814  
Unearned revenue reserve
    594       502  
Closed block liabilities
    311       312  
Policy benefits payable
    161       165  
Life insurance
    134       100  
Other
    17       17  
     
Total
  $ 5,098     $ 4,910  
     

PL-33



Table of Contents

12.   DEBT
 
    SHORT-TERM DEBT
 
    Pacific Life maintains a $700 million commercial paper program. There was no commercial paper debt outstanding as of December 31, 2005 and 2004. In addition, Pacific Life has a bank revolving credit facility of $400 million, for which there was no debt outstanding as of December 31, 2005 and 2004. The credit facility matures in 2012. As of December 31, 2005, as well as during the year, Pacific Life was in compliance with the debt covenants related to this facility.
 
    Pacific Life is a member of the Federal Home Loan Bank of San Francisco (FHLB), which enables Pacific Life to borrow from the FHLB amounts that are based on a percentage of statutory capital and surplus. During 2005, Pacific Life could have borrowed amounts up to $788 million. Of this amount, half, or $394 million, could have been borrowed for terms other than overnight, out to a maximum term of nine months. These borrowings are at variable rates of interest, collateralized by certain mortgage loan and government securities. There were no borrowings outstanding with the FHLB as of December 31, 2005 and 2004.
 
    MLS has a broker lending agreement with a bank for a $25 million line of credit, of which $15 million and $16 million were outstanding for the years ended December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively. The loan bears interest at the Federal funds rate plus a spread; such rates reset daily and were 5.1% and 3.2% as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively. The lending agreement has no specified maturity.
 
    Included in short-term debt is $2 million of VIE debt (Note 4).
 
    LONG-TERM DEBT
 
    Pacific Life has $150 million of surplus notes outstanding at an interest rate of 7.9% maturing on December 30, 2023. Interest is payable semiannually on June 30 and December 30. The surplus notes may not be redeemed at the option of Pacific Life or any holder of the surplus notes. The surplus notes are unsecured and subordinated to all present and future senior indebtedness and policy claims of Pacific Life. Prior to the Redomestication, each payment of interest and principal on the surplus notes could be made only with the prior approval of the Insurance Commissioner of the State of California. As a result of the Redomestication, the December 30, 2005 payment and all future payments of interest and principal on the surplus notes can be made only with the prior approval of the Director of Insurance of the State of Nebraska. Interest expense amounted to $8 million and $9 million for the years ended December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively.
 
    Pacific Life entered into interest rate swaps converting the fixed interest rate surplus notes to variable rate notes based upon the London Interbank Offered Rate. As a result, interest expense on the surplus notes was reduced by earnings from the interest rate swaps of $4 million and $3 million, for the years ended December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively. In accordance with SFAS No. 133, the interest rate swaps were designated as fair value hedges of the surplus notes, and hedge effectiveness has been established because the interest rate swaps were constructed such that all critical terms of the interest rate swaps exactly match the surplus notes. The SFAS No. 133 fair value adjustment, which increased long-term debt by $10 million as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, represents the cumulative change in the estimated fair value of the interest rate swaps. An offsetting fair value adjustment has also been recorded for the interest rate swap derivative instruments.

PL-34



Table of Contents

13.   FAIR VALUE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
 
    The carrying amount and estimated fair value of the Company’s financial instruments are as follows:
                                 
    December 31, 2005     December 31, 2004  
    Carrying     Estimated     Carrying     Estimated  
    Amount     Fair Value     Amount     Fair Value  
     
    (In Millions)
Assets:
                               
Fixed maturity and equity securities (Note 9)
  $ 26,102     $ 26,102     $ 26,233     $ 26,233  
Trading securities
    72       72       226       226  
Mortgage loans
    3,925       4,109       3,286       3,483  
Policy loans
    5,904       5,904       5,629       5,629  
Interest in PIMCO (Note 5)
    368       368       606       606  
Other invested assets
    101       115       114       114  
Derivative instruments
    160       160       758       758  
Cash and cash equivalents
    672       672       836       836  
Liabilities:
                               
Funding agreements and GICs
    8,840       8,913       9,127       9,156  
Fixed account liabilities
    4,927       4,927       5,110       5,108  
Short-term debt
    17       17       16       16  
Long-term debt
    160       193       160       183  
VIE debt
    39       39                  
Derivative instruments
    160       160       79       79  
    The following methods and assumptions were used to estimate the fair value of these financial instruments as of December 31, 2005 and 2004:
 
    TRADING SECURITIES
 
    The estimated fair value of trading securities is based on quoted market prices.
 
    MORTGAGE LOANS
 
    The estimated fair value of the mortgage loan portfolio is determined by discounting the estimated future cash flows, using a market rate that is applicable to the yield, credit quality and average maturity of the composite portfolio.
 
    POLICY LOANS
 
    The carrying amounts of policy loans are a reasonable estimate of their fair values because interest rates are generally variable and based on current market rates.
 
    OTHER INVESTED ASSETS
 
    The estimated fair value of the other invested assets is based on the ownership percentage of the underlying equity of the private equity investment.

PL-35



Table of Contents

    DERIVATIVE INSTRUMENTS
 
    Derivative instruments are reported at estimated fair value based on market quotations or internally established valuations consistent with external valuation models.
 
    CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS
 
    The carrying values approximate fair values due to the short-term maturities of these instruments.
 
    FUNDING AGREEMENTS AND GICs
 
    The fair value of funding agreements and GICs is estimated using the rates currently offered for deposits of similar remaining maturities.
 
    FIXED ACCOUNT LIABILITIES
 
    Fixed account liabilities include annuity and deposit liabilities. The estimated fair value of annuity liabilities approximates carrying value and primarily includes policyholder deposits and accumulated credited interest. The estimated fair value of deposit liabilities with no defined maturities is the amount payable on demand.
 
    SHORT-TERM DEBT
 
    The carrying amount of short-term debt is a reasonable estimate of its fair value because the interest rates are variable and based on current market rates.
 
    LONG-TERM DEBT
 
    The estimated fair value of long-term debt is based on market quotes.
 
    VARIABLE INTEREST ENTITY DEBT
 
    The carrying amount of the VIE debt is a reasonable estimate of its fair value because the interest rate approximates current market rates.

PL-36



Table of Contents

14.   COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
 
    The Company displays comprehensive income and its components on the accompanying consolidated statements of stockholder’s equity. OCI is shown net of reclassification adjustments and net of deferred income taxes. The disclosure of the gross components of OCI and related taxes is as follows:
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
     
    (In Millions)
Gross holding gain (loss):
                       
Holding gain (loss) on securities available for sale
    ($529 )     ($46 )   $ 417  
Holding gain on derivatives
    125       68       56  
Income tax (expense) benefit
    140       (8 )     (167 )
Reclassification adjustment:
                       
Realized loss on sale of securities available for sale
    28       43       159  
Realized (gain) loss on derivatives
    (10 )     (8 )     8  
Income tax benefit
    (5 )     (12 )     (59 )
Net unrealized gain (loss) on discontinued operations, net of tax
    (2 )     (3 )     2  
Allocation of holding (gain) loss to DAC
    56       85       (2 )
Allocation of holding (gain) loss to future policy benefits
    (16 )     (24 )     21  
Income tax expense
    (14 )     (21 )     (7 )
     
Net unrealized gain (loss) on securities available for sale
    (227 )     74       428  
     
 
                       
Holding gain on interest in PIMCO
    28       16       33  
Income tax on holding gain
    (10 )     (7 )     (9 )
Reclassification of realized gain on sale of interest in PIMCO
    (103 )     (169 )     (327 )
Income tax on realized gain
    36       59       123  
     
Net unrealized loss on interest in PIMCO
    (49 )     (101 )     (180 )
Minimum pension liability and other adjustments
    3       (5 )     41  
     
Total
    ($273 )     ($32 )   $ 289  
     

PL-37



Table of Contents

15.   REINSURANCE
 
    The Company has reinsurance agreements with other insurance companies for the purpose of diversifying risk and limiting exposure on larger mortality risks or, in the case of a producer-owned reinsurance company, to diversify risk and retain top producing agents. Amounts receivable from reinsurers for reinsurance of future policy benefits, universal life deposits, and unpaid losses are included in other assets. All assets associated with business reinsured on a yearly renewable term and modified coinsurance basis remain with, and under the control of, the Company.
 
    Certain no lapse guarantee rider benefits of Pacific Life’s UL insurance products are subject to Actuarial Guideline 38 (AG 38) statutory reserving requirements. U.S. GAAP benefit reserves for such riders are based on SOP 03-1 and are not subject to AG 38. In October 2005, the NAIC adopted revisions to AG 38 resulting in additional statutory reserves on UL products with no lapse guarantee riders issued after June 30, 2005. The additional statutory reserves totaled $20 million as of December 31, 2005. Corresponding U.S. GAAP benefit reserves were $1 million as of December 31, 2005.
 
    Both the AG 38 and U.S. GAAP no lapse guarantee rider benefit reserves were coinsured with Pacific Alliance Reinsurance Ltd. (PAR), a Bermuda-based life reinsurance company 100% owned by Pacific LifeCorp, with reserve credits taken by Pacific Life. PAR is licensed as a long-term reinsurer in accordance with Bermuda insurance laws and regulations and was formed in 2005 to provide reinsurance exclusively to Pacific Life for no lapse guarantee benefits where no coverage was available in the commercial reinsurance market. Deposits to a trust account with Pacific Life as beneficiary and an irrevocable letter of credit of $30 million from a commercial bank, in which Pacific LifeCorp is the co-applicant with PAR, provided security for statutory reserve credits taken by Pacific Life. The reinsurance contract meets the requirements of risk transfer indicated in SFAS No. 113, Accounting and Reporting for Reinsurance of Short-Duration and Long-Duration Contracts, and qualifies for reinsurance accounting.
 
    Amounts recoverable (payable) from (to) reinsurers include the following amounts:
                 
    December 31,  
    2005     2004  
     
    (In Millions)
Universal life deposits
    ($100 )     ($106 )
Future policy benefits
    164       166  
Premiums due
    (57 )     (54 )
Paid claims
    38       45  
Unpaid claims
    10       16  
Other
    25       13  
    As of December 31, 2005, 76% of the reinsurance recoverables were from two reinsurers, of which 100% is secured by payables to the reinsurers. To the extent that the assuming companies become unable to meet their obligations under these agreements, the Company remains contingently liable. The Company does not anticipate nonperformance by the assuming companies. The components of insurance premiums are as follows:
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
     
    (In Millions)
Direct premiums
  $ 210     $ 239     $ 298  
Ceded reinsurance
    (206 )     (178 )     (155 )
Assumed reinsurance
    51       43       34  
     
Insurance premiums
  $ 55     $ 104     $ 177  
     

PL-38



Table of Contents

    Revenues and benefits are shown net of the following reinsurance transactions:
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
     
    (In Millions)
Ceded reinsurance netted against policy fees
  $ 101     $ 108     $ 103  
Ceded reinsurance netted against net investment income
    272       270       283  
Ceded reinsurance netted against interest credited
    211       200       217  
Ceded reinsurance netted against policy benefits
    173       145       139  
Assumed reinsurance included in policy benefits
    16       10       15  
16.   EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLANS
 
    PENSION PLANS
 
    Pacific Life provides a defined benefit pension plan covering all eligible employees of the Company. Certain subsidiaries do not participate in this plan. On July 1, 2000, Pacific Life converted this final average pay formula defined benefit plan to a cash balance approach. Active employees’ existing benefits in this plan were converted to opening balances and will increase over time from credits, based on years of service and compensation levels, and quarterly interest accruals. The full-benefit vesting period for all participants is five years. Pacific Life’s funding policy is to contribute amounts to the plan sufficient to meet the minimum funding requirements set forth in ERISA, plus such additional amounts as may be determined appropriate. Contributions are intended to provide not only for benefits attributed to employment to date but also for those expected to be earned in the future. All such contributions are made to a tax-exempt trust. Plan assets consist primarily of group annuity contracts issued by Pacific Life, as well as mutual funds managed by PIMCO.
 
    In addition, Pacific Life maintains supplemental employee retirement plans (SERPs) for certain eligible employees. As of December 31, 2005 and 2004, the projected benefit obligation was $35 million and $94 million, respectively. The fair value of plan assets as of December 31, 2005 and 2004 was zero. The net periodic benefit cost of the SERPs was $26 million, $9 million and $8 million for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively. New provisions of the Internal Revenue Code allowed vested participants of certain non-qualified plans to terminate participation in 2005. Accordingly, $77 million was distributed to participants electing to terminate their participation in the SERP, which resulted in a settlement expense of $16 million for the year ended December 31, 2005.
 
    In connection with the sale of the group insurance segment business to PacifiCare (Note 7), and the resulting termination of a large group of the Company’s employees, the Company incurred $8 million in curtailment, settlement and special termination costs for the year ended December 31, 2005, which are included in discontinued operations.
 
    Components of the net periodic pension expense are as follows:
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
     
    (In Millions)
Service cost — benefits earned during the year
  $ 8     $ 18     $ 16  
Interest cost on projected benefit obligation
    18       18       18  
Expected return on plan assets
    (18 )     (18 )     (13 )
Curtailment, settlement and special termination costs
    24                  
Amortization of net obligations and prior service cost
    6       4       4  
     
Net periodic pension expense
  $ 38     $ 22     $ 25  
     

PL-39



Table of Contents

    The following tables set forth the changes in benefit obligation, plan assets and funded status reconciliation:
                 
    December 31,  
    2005     2004  
     
    (In Millions)
Change in benefit obligation:
               
Benefit obligation, beginning of year
  $ 345     $ 315  
Service cost
    8       18  
Interest cost
    18       18  
Transfer of liabilities and plan amendments
            (1 )
Actuarial loss
    21       15  
Curtailment and settlement losses
    9          
Benefits paid
    (111 )     (20 )
     
Benefit obligation, end of year
  $ 290     $ 345  
     
 
               
Change in plan assets:
               
Fair value of plan assets, beginning of year
  $ 267     $ 242  
Actual return on plan assets
    14       26  
Employer contributions
    90       19  
Benefits paid
    (111 )     (20 )
     
Fair value of plan assets, end of year
  $ 260     $ 267  
     

Funded status reconciliation:

               
Funded status
    ($30 )     ($78 )
Unrecognized transition obligation
    3       3  
Unrecognized prior service cost
    2       3  
Unrecognized actuarial loss
    63       60  
     
Net amount recognized
  $ 38       ($12 )
     

PL-40



Table of Contents

                 
    December 31,  
    2005     2004  
     
    (In Millions)
Amounts recognized in the consolidated statement of financial condition consist of:
               
Prepaid benefit cost
  $ 63     $ 65  
Accrued benefit liability
    (37 )     (95 )
Intangible asset
    5       6  
Accumulated other comprehensive income
    7       12  
     
Net amount recognized
  $ 38       ($12 )
     
Other comprehensive (income) loss attributable to change in additional minimum pension liability
    ($5 )   $ 3  
     
                 
    December 31,  
    2005     2004  
     
Weighted-average assumptions used to determine benefit obligations:
               
Discount rate
    5.50 %     5.75 %
Rate of compensation increase
    4.50 %     4.00 %
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003
     
Weighted-average assumptions used to determine net periodic benefit costs:
                       
Discount Rate
    5.75 %     6.00 %     6.75 %  
Expected long-term return on plan assets
    8.00 %     8.00 %     8.00 %  
Rate of compensation increase
    4.00 %     4.00 %     4.00 %  
    In developing the expected long-term rate of return on plan assets, the Company considers many factors. These factors consist of a review of historical returns and the future expectations for returns for each asset class, as well as the target asset allocation of the plan’s portfolio. The Company also considers current market conditions, as well as the views of financial advisers and economists.
 
    Benefit payments for the year ended December 31, 2005 amounted to $111 million. Pacific Life expects to contribute $8 million to the plans in 2006. The expected benefit payments are as follows (In Millions):
         
Years Ending December 31:          
2006
  $ 21  
2007
    21  
2008
    21  
2009
    22  
2010
    22  
2011-2015
    102  

PL-41



Table of Contents

    The Company’s pension plan’s weighted-average asset allocations by asset category are as follows:
                 
    December 31,  
    2005     2004  
     
Asset category:
               
Equity-type investments
    63 %     63 %
Fixed income investments
    33 %     32 %
Other
    4 %     5 %
     
Total
    100 %     100 %
     
    It is intended that the defined benefit pension plan assets be invested in equity-type and fixed income investments, as long as the investments are consistent with the assumption that more than average risk and appropriate overall diversification is maintained and liquidity is sufficient to meet cash flow requirements. The targeted portfolio allocation is 70-80% equity-type and 20-30% fixed income investments. The defined benefit pension plan establishes and maintains a fundamental and long-term orientation in the determination of asset mix and selection of investment funds. This tolerance for more than average risk and long-term orientation provides the basis for a larger allocation to equities with some additional bias to higher risk investments for higher return.
 
    POSTRETIREMENT BENEFITS
 
    Pacific Life provides a defined benefit health care plan and a defined benefit life insurance plan (the Plans) that provide postretirement benefits for all eligible retirees and their dependents. Generally, qualified employees may become eligible for these benefits if they reach normal retirement age, have been covered under Pacific Life’s policy as an active employee for a minimum continuous period prior to the date retired, and have an employment date before January 1, 1990. The Plans contain cost-sharing features such as deductibles and coinsurance, and require retirees to make contributions, which can be adjusted annually. Pacific Life’s commitment to qualified employees who retire after April 1, 1994 is limited to specific dollar amounts. Pacific Life reserves the right to modify or terminate the Plans at any time. As in the past, the general policy is to fund these benefits on a pay-as-you-go basis.
 
    The net periodic postretirement benefit cost for each of the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003 was $1 million. As of December 31, 2005 and 2004, the accumulated benefit obligation was $22 million and $21 million, respectively. The actuarial gain due to the Medicare subsidy was $2 million as of December 31, 2005 and 2004. The fair value of the plan assets as of December 31, 2005 and 2004 was zero. The amount of accrued benefit cost included in other liabilities was $21 million and $22 million as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively.
 
    The discount rate used in determining the accumulated postretirement benefit obligation was 5.50% and 5.75% for 2005 and 2004, respectively.
 
    Benefit payments for the year ended December 31, 2005 amounted to $3 million, which included $1 million of participant contributions. The expected benefit payments are as follows (In Millions):
         
Years Ending December 31:          
2006
  $ 3  
2007
    3  
2008
    3  
2009
    3  
2010
    3  
2011-2015
    11  

PL-42



Table of Contents

    OTHER PLANS
 
    Pacific Life provides a voluntary Retirement Incentive Savings Plan (RISP) pursuant to Section 401(k) of the Internal Revenue Code covering all eligible employees of Pacific LifeCorp and certain of its subsidiaries. Pacific Life’s RISP matches 75% of each employee’s contributions, up to a maximum of 6% of eligible employee compensation, to an Employee Stock Ownership Plan (ESOP). ESOP contributions made by the Company amounted to $10 million, $11 million and $11 million for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively, and are included in operating expenses.
 
    Effective January 1, 2005, certain employees began receiving employer cash contributions into a new RISP account in lieu of future contribution credits into their defined benefit pension plan, which resulted in a contribution expense of $9 million for the year ended December 31, 2005.
 
    The ESOP was formed at the time of the Conversion and is only available to the participants of the RISP in the form of matching contributions. On January 9, 2002, Pacific Life loaned cash of $46 million to the ESOP in exchange for a 5.5% promissory note due January 9, 2017. The ESOP then purchased 2 million shares of newly issued common stock of Pacific LifeCorp at a price of $23.00 per share in exchange for cash. These newly issued shares were purchased in order for the ESOP to maintain its matching contributions to participants in the plan. Interest and principal payments made by the ESOP to Pacific Life are funded by contributions from Pacific Life.
 
    Amounts loaned to the ESOP by Pacific Life are included in unearned ESOP shares. The unearned ESOP shares account is reduced as ESOP shares are released for allocation to participants through ESOP contributions by Pacific Life. In addition, when the fair value of ESOP shares being released for allocation to participants is different from the original issue price of those shares, the difference is recorded in paid-in capital.
 
    The Company has deferred compensation plans that permit eligible employees to defer portions of their compensation and earn interest on the deferred amounts. The interest rate is determined annually. The compensation that has been deferred has been accrued and the primary expense related to this plan, other than compensation, is interest on the deferred amounts. The Company also has performance-based incentive compensation plans for its employees.
 
17.   INCOME TAXES
 
    The provision for income taxes (benefit) is as follows:
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
     
    (In Millions)
Current
  $ 38     $ 185     $ 172  
Deferred
    63       (43 )     (23 )
     
Provision for income taxes from continuing operations
    101       142       149  
Provision for income taxes on discontinued operations
    23       18       14  
Deferred income tax provision on cumulative adjustment due to change in accounting principle
            (11 )        
     
Total
  $ 124     $ 149     $ 163  
     

PL-43



Table of Contents

     The sources of the Company’s provision for deferred taxes are as follows:
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
     
    (In Millions)
DAC
  $ 97     $ 78     $ 125  
Hedging
    19       40       (13 )
Investment valuation
    16       48       42  
Partnership income
    2       34       19  
Low income housing tax credit carryover
                    74  
Policyholder reserves
    (21 )     (61 )     (113 )
Interest in PIMCO
    (57 )     (203 )     (147 )
Other
    11       15       (13 )
     
Provision for deferred taxes
    67       (49 )     (26 )
Deferred taxes from discontinued operations
    (4 )     (5 )     3  
Deferred taxes on cumulative adjustment due to change in accounting principle
            11          
     
Provision for deferred taxes from continuing operations
  $ 63       ($43 )     ($23 )
     
    A reconciliation of the provision for income taxes from continuing operations based on the prevailing corporate statutory tax rate to the provision reflected in the consolidated financial statements is as follows:
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
     
    (In Millions)
Provision for income taxes at the statutory rate
  $ 211     $ 241     $ 195  
Nontaxable investment income
    (27 )     (25 )     (16 )
Low income housing and foreign tax credits
    (33 )     (32 )     (30 )
Amounts related to prior periods
    (51 )     (42 )     (10 )
Other
    1               10  
     
Provision for income taxes from continuing operations
  $ 101     $ 142     $ 149  
     
    The Company is under continuous audit by the Internal Revenue Service (IRS). The IRS has audited the Company’s consolidated federal income tax returns through the tax year ended December 31, 2001 and is currently auditing tax years ended December 31, 2002 and 2003. The Company is pursuing administrative appeals of many of the adjustments proposed by the IRS auditors and does not expect the results of the IRS audit activity to have a material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated financial position or results of operations. Included in amounts related to prior years in the reconciliation of the provision for income taxes from continuing operations for the year ended December 31, 2005, is $36 million of tax benefits related to settlements with the IRS for various years prior to 2005. The benefits relate primarily to the separate account dividends received deduction and related interest.

PL-44



Table of Contents

    The net deferred tax liability, included in other liabilities as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, is comprised of the following tax effected temporary differences:
                 
    December 31,  
    2005     2004  
     
    (In Millions)
Deferred tax assets:
               
Policyholder reserves
  $ 401     $ 380  
Investment valuation
    62       78  
Deferred compensation
    45       36  
Interest in PIMCO
    20       (37 )
Dividends to policyholders
    7       5  
Other
    9       4  
     
Total deferred tax assets
    544       466  
     

               
Deferred tax liabilities:
               
DAC
    (619 )     (522 )
Hedging
    (62 )     (43 )
Partnership income
    (59 )     (57 )
Depreciation
    (15 )     (18 )
Retirement benefits
    (11 )     19  
     
Total deferred tax liabilities
    (766 )     (621 )
     

               
Net deferred tax liability from operations
    (222 )     (155 )
Unrealized gain on derivatives and securities available for sale
    (368 )     (489 )
Unrealized gain on interest in PIMCO
    (51 )     (77 )
Minimum pension liability and other adjustments
    3       4  
     
Net deferred tax liability
    ($638 )     ($717 )
     

PL-45



Table of Contents

18.   SEGMENT INFORMATION
 
    The Company has four operating segments: Life Insurance, Investment Management, Annuities & Mutual Funds, and Broker-Dealers. These segments are managed separately and have been identified based on differences in products and services offered. All other activity is included in Corporate and Other.
 
    The Life Insurance segment offers universal life, variable universal life and other life insurance products to individuals, small businesses and corporations through a network of distribution channels that include regional life offices, sales centers, marketing organizations, wirehouse broker-dealer firms and a national producer group that has produced over 10% of the segment’s in force business.
 
    The Investment Management segment offers investment and annuity products to pension fund sponsors and other institutional investors primarily through its home office marketing team and other intermediaries. This segment’s name was changed from Institutional Products during the year ended December 31, 2005.
 
    The Annuities & Mutual Funds segment offers variable annuities, fixed annuities and mutual funds to individuals and small businesses through National Association of Securities Dealers (NASD) firms, regional and national wirehouses, and financial institutions.
 
    The Broker-Dealers segment includes NASD registered firms that provide securities and insurance brokerage services and investment advisory services. PSD primarily serves as the underwriter/distributor of registered investment-related products and services, principally variable life and variable annuity contracts issued by the Company.
 
    Corporate and Other primarily includes investment income, expenses and assets not attributable to the operating segments, and the operations of certain subsidiaries that do not qualify as operating segments. Corporate and Other also includes the interest in PIMCO and the elimination of intersegment revenues, expenses and assets, including commission revenue and expense from the sale of the Company’s variable life and annuity products. The group insurance segment is included in Corporate and Other as discontinued operations (Note 7).
 
    The Company uses the same accounting policies and procedures to measure segment net income and assets as it uses to measure its consolidated net income and assets. Net investment income and net realized investment gain (loss) are allocated based on invested assets purchased and held as is required for transacting the business of that segment. Overhead expenses are allocated based on services provided. Interest expense is allocated based on the short-term borrowing needs of the segment and is included in net investment income. The provision for income taxes is allocated based on each segment’s actual tax provision.
 
    The operating segments are allocated equity based on formulas determined by management and receive a fixed interest rate return on interdivision debentures supporting the allocated equity. The debenture amount is reflected as investment expense in net investment income in the Corporate and Other segment and as investment income in the operating segments.
 
    The Company derives substantially all of its revenues and net income from customers located in the U.S. As of December 31, 2005 and 2004, the Company had foreign investments of $6.1 billion and $5.9 billion, respectively.

PL-46



Table of Contents

    The following is segment information as of and for the year ended December 31, 2005:
                                                 
                    Annuities                    
    Life     Investment     & Mutual     Broker-     Corporate        
    Insurance     Management     Funds     Dealers     and Other     Total  
 
REVENUES   (In Millions)
Policy fees and insurance premiums
  $ 708     $ 168     $ 485                     $ 1,361  
Net investment income
    752       828       225     $ 4     $ 112       1,921  
Net realized investment gain (loss)
    (14 )     7       26               4       23  
Realized investment gain on interest in PIMCO
                                    104       104  
Commission revenue
                    5       858       (589 )     274  
Investment advisory fees
    28               220       68       1       317  
Other income
    1       10       3       23       1       38  
     
Total revenues
    1,475       1,013       964       953       (367 )     4,038  
     
 
                                               
BENEFITS AND EXPENSES
                                               
Interest credited
    577       455       166                       1,198  
Policy benefits
    275       415       16                       706  
Commission expenses
    181       7       342       791       (589 )     732  
Operating expenses
    236       26       247       162       127       798  
     
Total benefits and expenses
    1,269       903       771       953       (462 )     3,434  
     
 
                                               
Income from continuing operations before provision for income taxes
    206       110       193             95       604  
Provision for income taxes
    44       25       13               19       101  
     
 
                                               
Income from continuing operations
    162       85       180             76       503  
Discontinued operations, net of taxes
                                    41       41  
Cumulative adjustment due to change in accounting principle
                                    (2 )     (2 )
     
Net income
  $ 162     $ 85     $ 180     $ 0     $ 115     $ 542  
     
 
                                               
Total assets
  $ 24,673     $ 14,938     $ 39,550     $ 195     $ 1,814     $ 81,170  
DAC
    1,524       75       2,188                       3,787  
Separate account assets
    5,028       151       32,761                       37,940  
Policyholder and contract liabilities
    17,760       12,836       4,645                       35,241  
Separate account liabilities
    5,028       151       32,761                       37,940  

PL-47



Table of Contents

     The following is segment information as of and for the year ended December 31, 2004:
                                                 
                    Annuities                    
    Life     Investment     & Mutual     Broker-     Corporate        
    Insurance     Management     Funds     Dealers     and Other     Total  
 
REVENUES   (In Millions)
Policy fees and insurance premiums
  $ 776     $ 198     $ 393                     $ 1,367  
Net investment income
    730       821       224     $ 2     $ 61       1,838  
Net realized investment gain (loss)
    (11 )     (25 )     51               (13 )     2  
Realized investment gain on interest in PIMCO
                                    169       169  
Commission revenue
                    4       806       (540 )     270  
Investment advisory fees
    25               177       46               248  
Other income
            4       1       20       1       26  
     
Total revenues
    1,520       998       850       874       (322 )     3,920  
     
 
                                               
BENEFITS AND EXPENSES
                                               
Interest credited
    539       425       161                       1,125  
Policy benefits
    256       438       21                       715  
Commission expenses
    253       4       262       742       (540 )     721  
Operating expenses
    250       28       190       130       72       670  
     
Total benefits and expenses
    1,298       895       634       872       (468 )     3,231  
     
 
                                               
Income from continuing operations before provision for income taxes
    222       103       216       2       146       689  
Provision for income taxes
    54       17       27       1       43       142  
     
Income from continuing operations
    168       86       189       1       103       547  
Discontinued operations, net of taxes
                                    33       33  
Cumulative adjustment due to change in accounting principle
    2               (21 )                     (19 )
     
Net income
  $ 170     $ 86     $ 168     $ 1     $ 136     $ 561  
     
 
                                               
Total assets
  $ 23,561     $ 15,665     $ 33,616     $ 176     $ 1,607     $ 74,625  
DAC
    1,322       76       1,880                       3,278  
Separate account assets
    4,730       199       27,103                       32,032  
Policyholder and contract liabilities
    16,647       13,339       4,576                       34,562  
Separate account liabilities
    4,730       199       27,103                       32,032  

PL-48



Table of Contents

     The following is segment information for the year ended December 31, 2003:
                                                 
                    Annuities                    
    Life     Investment     & Mutual     Broker-     Corporate        
    Insurance     Management     Funds     Dealers     and Other     Total  
 
REVENUES   (In Millions)
Policy fees and insurance premiums
  $ 568     $ 256     $ 285                     $ 1,109  
Net investment income
    685       876       197     $ 1     $ 11       1,770  
Net realized investment gain (loss)
    (64 )     (67 )     (7 )             59       (79 )
Realized investment gain on interest in PIMCO
                                    327       327  
Commission revenue
                    1       715       (496 )     220  
Investment advisory fees
    21               117       36               174  
Other income
            4               24       5       33  
     
Total revenues
    1,210       1,069       593       776       (94 )     3,554  
     
 
                                               
BENEFITS AND EXPENSES
                                               
Interest credited
    544       455       154                       1,153  
Policy benefits
    253       499       18                       770  
Commission expenses
    115       4       213       656       (496 )     492  
Operating expenses
    187       20       160       120       95       582  
     
Total benefits and expenses
    1,099       978       545       776       (401 )     2,997  
     
 
                                               
Income from continuing operations before provision for income taxes
    111       91       48             307       557  
Provision for income taxes
    9       11       1               128       149  
     
Income from continuing operations
    102       80       47             179       408  
Discontinued operations, net of taxes
                                    28       28  
     
Net income
  $ 102     $ 80     $ 47     $ 0     $ 207     $ 436  
     

PL-49



Table of Contents

19. TRANSACTIONS WITH AFFILIATES
Pacific Life serves as the investment adviser for the Pacific Select Fund, the investment vehicle provided to the Company’s variable life and variable annuity contract holders, and the Pacific Funds, the investment vehicle for the Company’s mutual fund product. Pacific Life charges advisory and other fees based primarily upon the net asset value of the underlying portfolios. These charges amounted to $252 million, $206 million and $141 million for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively. In addition, Pacific Life provides certain support services to the Pacific Select Fund, the Pacific Funds and other affiliates based on an allocation of actual costs. These fees amounted to $5 million, $3 million and $4 million for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively.
Included in insurance premiums are amounts ceded to a previously affiliated company of $5 million and $16 million for the quarter ended March 31, 2004 and the year ended December 31, 2003, respectively.
As discussed in Note 15, no lapse guarantee benefit riders are coinsured with PAR, an affiliated Bermuda-based reinsurer formed in 2005. U.S. GAAP reserve credits are $1 million in 2005 and premiums ceded are $2 million.
20. COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES
The Company has outstanding commitments to make investments, primarily in fixed maturity securities, mortgage loans, limited partnerships and other investments, as follows:
                 
Years Ending December 31 (In Millions) :                
2006
          $ 694  
2007 through 2010
            422  
2011 and thereafter
            8  
 
             
Total
          $ 1,124  
 
             
The Company leases office facilities under various noncancelable operating leases. Rent expense, which is included in operating expenses, in connection with these leases was $15 million, $14 million and $13 million for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively. In connection with the group insurance segment transaction (Note 7), PL&A is contingently liable for certain future rent and expense obligations, not to exceed $16 million, related to an office lease that has been assigned to PacifiCare. Aggregate minimum future commitments are as follows:
                 
Years Ending December 31 (In Millions) :                
2006
          $ 14  
2007 through 2010
            25  
2011 and thereafter
            8  
 
             
Total
          $ 47  
 
             
The Company is a respondent in a number of legal proceedings, some of which involve allegations for extra-contractual damages.
Pacific Life is a defendant in a national class action lawsuit, Cooper v. Pacific Life, pending in the United States District Court in the Southern District of Georgia. The plaintiffs in this case claim that Pacific Life failed to disclose that the tax deferral feature of a variable annuity offers no additional benefit when it is used to fund a qualified plan, and also claim that Pacific Life has a separate obligation — in addition to the obligation of broker dealers and registered representatives — to assure that each purchase of an annuity is suitable for that customer. Pacific Life disputes these claims. In May 2005, the court certified a class of nearly 120,000 members. After conducting further discovery, Pacific Life will contest the class certification. In the event that the class is de-certified, the claims of the

PL-50



Table of Contents

four original plaintiffs would be adjudicated in a single proceeding and other potential plaintiffs could be required to bring lawsuits on their own behalf. The merits of this case have not yet been adjudicated.
Although the Company is confident of its position in these matters, success is not a certainty and it is possible that in any case a judge or jury could rule against the Company. In the opinion of management, the outcome of such proceedings is not likely to have a material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated financial position or results of operations.
The Company has from time to time divested certain of its businesses. In connection with such divestitures, there may be lawsuits, claims and proceedings instituted or asserted against the Company related to the period that the businesses were owned by the Company or pursuant to indemnifications provided by the Company in connection with the respective transactions, with terms that range in duration and often are not explicitly defined. Because the amounts of these types of indemnifications often are not explicitly stated, the overall maximum amount of the obligation under such indemnifications cannot be reasonably estimated. The Company has not historically made significant payments for these indemnifications. The estimated maximum potential amount of future payments under these obligations is not determinable due to the lack of a stated maximum liability for certain matters, and therefore, no related liability has been recorded. Management believes that judgments, if any, against the Company related to such matters are not likely to have a material adverse effect on the consolidated financial position or results of operations of the Company.
The Company provides routine indemnifications relating to lease agreements. Currently, the Company has several such agreements in place with various expiration dates. Based on historical experience and evaluation of the specific indemnities, management believes that judgments, if any, against the Company related to such matters are not likely to have a material adverse effect on the consolidated financial position or results of operations of the Company.
For all derivative contracts with a counterparty, the Company enters into master agreements that may include a termination event clause associated with the Company’s credit rating. If the Company’s insurer financial strength rating falls below a specified level assigned by certain rating agencies or, in most cases, if one of the rating agencies ceases to provide an insurer financial strength rating, the counterparty can terminate the master agreement with payment due based on the estimated fair value of the underlying derivatives. As of December 31, 2005, the Company did not approach the specified level.
In relation to an asset securitization sponsored by Aviation Capital Group Holding Corp., a wholly owned subsidiary of Pacific LifeCorp, Pacific Life is obligated to purchase certain notes from the asset securitization trust to cover shortfalls in amounts due to the holders of the notes, up to certain levels as specified under the related agreements. As of December 31, 2005, the maximum potential amount of this future investment commitment was $50 million.
See Note 10 for discussion of liquidity commitments related to synthetic GICs.
In connection with the operations of certain of the Company’s broker-dealer subsidiaries, Pacific Life has made commitments to provide for additional capital funding as may be required.
The Company operates in a business environment that is subject to various risks and uncertainties. Such risks and uncertainties include, but are not limited to, interest rate risk, investment market risk, credit risk and legal and regulatory changes.
Interest rate risk is the potential for interest rates to change, which can cause fluctuations in the value of investments, the liabilities for future policy benefits and the carrying amount of DAC. To the extent that fluctuations in interest rates cause the duration of assets and liabilities to differ, the Company may have to sell assets prior to their maturity and realize losses. The Company controls its exposure to this risk by utilizing, among other things, asset/liability matching techniques that attempt to match the duration of assets and liabilities and utilization of derivative instruments. Additionally, the Company includes contractual provisions limiting withdrawal rights for certain of its products. A substantial portion of the Company’s liabilities is not subject to surrender or can be surrendered only after deduction of a surrender charge or a market value adjustment.
The Company’s investments in equity related securities and results from its variable products, including the carrying amount of DAC, are subject to changes in equity prices and the capital markets.

PL-51



Table of Contents

Credit risk is the risk that issuers of investments owned by the Company may default or that other parties may not be able to pay amounts due to the Company. The Company manages its investments to limit credit risk by diversifying its portfolio among various security types and industry sectors. The credit risk of financial instruments is controlled through credit approval procedures, limits and ongoing monitoring. Real estate and mortgage loan investment risks are limited by diversification of geographic location and property type. Management does not believe that significant concentrations of credit risk exist.
The Company is also exposed to credit loss in the event of nonperformance by the counterparties to interest rate swap contracts and other derivative securities. The Company manages this risk through credit approvals and limits on exposure to any specific counterparty and obtaining collateral. However, the Company does not anticipate nonperformance by the counterparties. The Company determines counterparty credit quality by reference to ratings from independent rating agencies or, where such ratings are not available, by internal analysis.
The Company is subject to various state and Federal regulatory authorities. The potential exists for changes in regulatory initiatives, which can result in additional, unanticipated expense to the Company. Existing Federal laws and regulations affect the taxation of life insurance or annuity products and insurance companies. There can be no assurance as to what, if any, cases might be decided or future legislation might be enacted, or if decided or enacted, whether such cases or legislation would contain provisions with possible negative effects on the Company’s life insurance or annuity products.

PL-52



Table of Contents

STATEMENT OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

May 1, 2006

PACIFIC INNOVATIONS SELECT

SEPARATE ACCOUNT A


Pacific Innovations Select (the “Contract”) is a variable annuity contract underwritten by Pacific Life Insurance Company (“Pacific Life”).

This Statement of Additional Information (SAI) is not a Prospectus and should be read in conjunction with the Contract’s Prospectus, dated May 1, 2006, and any supplement thereto, which is available without charge upon written or telephone request to Pacific Life. Terms used in this SAI have the same meanings as in the Prospectus, and some additional terms are defined particularly for this SAI. This SAI is incorporated by reference into the Contract’s Prospectus.

The Fixed Option is only available on Contracts issued before November 1, 2002. Accordingly, all references to the Fixed Option throughout this SAI are subject to this disclosure.


Pacific Life Insurance Company

Mailing address: P.O. Box 7187
Pasadena, CA 91109-7187

(800) 722-2333



 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

           
Page No.

    1  
      1  
 
 Yields
    2  
      3  
      4  
 
    5  
      5  
 
    6  
      6  
      7  
      9  
      10  
      10  
      10  
      12  
      13  
      13  
      13  
      13  
 
    13  
 
    14  

i



Table of Contents

PERFORMANCE

From time to time, our reports or other communications to current or prospective Contract Owners or our advertising or other promotional material may quote the performance (yield and total return) of a Subaccount. Quoted results are based on past performance and reflect the performance of all assets held in that Subaccount for the stated time period. Quoted results are neither an estimate nor a guarantee of future investment performance, and do not represent the actual experience of amounts invested by any particular Contract Owner.

Total Returns

A Subaccount may advertise its “average annual total return” over various periods of time. “Total return” represents the average percentage change in value of an investment in the Subaccount from the beginning of a measuring period to the end of that measuring period. “Annualized” total return assumes that the total return achieved for the measuring period is achieved for each such period for a full year. “Average annual” total return is computed in accordance with a standard method prescribed by the SEC.

Average Annual Total Return

To calculate a Subaccount’s average annual total return for a specific measuring period, we first take a hypothetical $1,000 investment in that Subaccount, at its then-applicable Subaccount Unit Value (the “initial payment”) and we compute the ending redeemable value of that initial payment at the end of the measuring period based on the investment experience of that Subaccount (“full withdrawal value”). The full withdrawal value reflects the effect of all recurring fees and charges applicable to a Contract Owner under the Contract, including the Risk Charge, the Administrative Fee and the deduction of the applicable withdrawal charge, but does not reflect any charges for applicable premium taxes and/or any other taxes, any non-recurring fees or charges or any increase in the Risk Charge for an optional Death Benefit Rider, or any charge for an optional Rider. The Annual Fee is also taken into account, assuming an average Contract Value of $65,000. The redeemable value is then divided by the initial payment and this quotient is raised to the 365/N power (N represents the number of days in the measuring period), and 1 is subtracted from this result. Average annual total return is expressed as a percentage.

T = (ERV/P)(365/N) - 1

             
where
  T   =   average annual total return
    ERV   =   ending redeemable value
    P   =   hypothetical initial payment of $1,000
    N   =   number of days

Average annual total return figures will be given for recent one-, three-, five- and ten-year periods (if applicable), and may be given for other periods as well (such as from commencement of the Subaccount’s operations, or on a year-by-year basis).

When considering “average” total return figures for periods longer than one year, it is important to note that the relevant Subaccount’s annual total return for any one year in the period might have been greater or less than the average for the entire period.

Aggregate Total Return

A Subaccount may use “aggregate” total return figures along with its “average annual” total return figures for various periods; these figures represent the cumulative change in value of an investment in the Subaccount for a specific period. Aggregate total returns may be shown by means of schedules, charts or graphs and may indicate subtotals of the various components of total return. The SEC has not prescribed standard formulas for calculating aggregate total return.

Total returns may also be shown for the same periods that do not take into account the withdrawal charge or the Annual Fee.

1



Table of Contents

Non-Standardized Total Returns

We may also calculate non-standardized total returns which may or may not reflect any Annual Fee, and/or withdrawal charges, increases in Risk Charges, charges for premium taxes and/or any other taxes, or any charge for an optional Rider, and any non-recurring fees or charges.

Standardized return figures will always accompany any non-standardized returns shown.

Yields

Money Market Subaccount

The “yield” (also called “current yield”) of the Money Market Subaccount is computed in accordance with a standard method prescribed by the SEC. The net change in the Subaccount’s Unit Value during a seven-day period is divided by the Unit Value at the beginning of the period to obtain a base rate of return. The current yield is generated when the base rate is “annualized” by multiplying it by the fraction 365/7; that is, the base rate of return is assumed to be generated each week over a 365-day period and is shown as a percentage of the investment. The “effective yield” of the Money Market Subaccount is calculated similarly but, when annualized, the base rate of return is assumed to be reinvested. The effective yield will be slightly higher than the current yield because of the compounding effect of this assumed reinvestment.

The formula for effective yield is: [(Base Period Return + 1) (To the power of 365/7)] - 1.

Realized capital gains or losses and unrealized appreciation or depreciation of the assets of the underlying Money Market Portfolio are not included in the yield calculation. Current yield and effective yield do not reflect any deduction of charges for any applicable premium taxes and/or any other taxes, or any increase in the Risk Charge for an optional Death Benefit Rider, or any charge for an optional Rider, but do reflect a deduction for the Annual Fee, the Risk Charge and the Administrative Fee and assumes an average Contract Value of $65,000.

Other Subaccounts

“Yield” of the other Subaccounts is computed in accordance with a different standard method prescribed by the SEC. The net investment income (investment income less expenses) per Subaccount Unit earned during a specified one-month or 30-day period is divided by the Subaccount Unit Value on the last day of the specified period. This result is then annualized (that is, the yield is assumed to be generated each month or each 30-day period for a year), according to the following formula, which assumes semiannual compounding:

         
YIELD = 2[(
  a - b

cd
  + 1)6 - 1]
             
where:
  a   =   net investment income earned during the period by the Portfolio attributable to the Subaccount.
    b   =   expenses accrued for the period (net of reimbursements).
    c   =   the average daily number of Subaccount Units outstanding during the period that were entitled to receive dividends.
    d   =   the Unit Value of the Subaccount Units on the last day of the period.

The yield of each Subaccount reflects the deduction of all recurring fees and charges applicable to the Subaccount, such as the Risk Charge, the Administrative Fee, the Annual Fee (assuming an average Contract Value of $65,000), but does not reflect any withdrawal charge, any charge for applicable premium taxes and/or any other taxes, any increase in the Risk Charge for an optional Death Benefit Rider, any charge for an optional Rider, or any non-recurring fees or charges.

The Subaccounts’ yields will vary from time to time depending upon market conditions, the composition of each Portfolio and operating expenses of the Fund allocated to each Portfolio. Consequently, any given performance quotation should not be considered representative of the Subaccount’s performance in the future. Yield should also be considered relative to changes in Subaccount Unit Values and to the relative risks associated with the investment policies and objectives of the various Portfolios. In addition, because performance will fluctuate, it may not provide a basis for comparing the yield of a Subaccount with certain bank deposits or other investments that pay a fixed yield or return for a stated period of time.

2



Table of Contents

Performance Comparisons and Benchmarks

In advertisements and sales literature, we may compare the performance of some or all of the Subaccounts to the performance of other variable annuity issuers in general and to the performance of particular types of variable annuities investing in mutual funds, or series of mutual funds, with investment objectives similar to each of the Subaccounts. This performance may be presented as averages or rankings compiled by Lipper Analytical Services, Inc. (“Lipper”), the Variable Annuity Research and Data Service (“VARDS®”) or Morningstar, Inc. (“Morningstar”), which are independent services that monitor and rank the performance of variable annuity issuers and mutual funds in each of the major categories of investment objectives on an industry-wide basis. Lipper’s rankings include variable life issuers as well as variable annuity issuers. VARDS® rankings compare only variable annuity issuers. The performance analyses prepared by Lipper and VARDS® rank such issuers on the basis of total return, assuming reinvestment of dividends and distributions, but do not take sales charges, redemption fees or certain expense deductions at the separate account level into consideration. In addition, VARDS® prepares risk adjusted rankings, which consider the effects of market risk on total return performance. We may also compare the performance of the Subaccounts with performance information included in other publications and services that monitor the performance of insurance company separate accounts or other investment vehicles. These other services or publications may be general interest business publications such as The Wall Street Journal, Barron’s, Business Week, Forbes, Fortune, and Money.

In addition, our reports and communications to Contract Owners, advertisements, or sales literature may compare a Subaccount’s performance to various benchmarks that measure the performance of a pertinent group of securities widely regarded by investors as being representative of the securities markets in general or as being representative of a particular type of security. We may also compare the performance of the Subaccounts with that of other appropriate indices of investment securities and averages for peer universes of funds or data developed by us derived from such indices or averages. Unmanaged indices generally assume the reinvestment of dividends or interest but do not generally reflect deductions for investment management or administrative costs and expenses.

Tax Deferred Accumulation

In reports or other communications to you or in advertising or sales materials, we may also describe the effects of tax-deferred compounding on the Separate Account’s investment returns or upon returns in general. These effects may be illustrated in charts or graphs and may include comparisons at various points in time of returns under the Contract or in general on a tax-deferred basis with the returns on a taxable basis. Different tax rates may be assumed.

In general, individuals who own annuity contracts are not taxed on increases in the value under the annuity contract until some form of distribution is made from the contract. Thus, the annuity contract will benefit from tax deferral during the accumulation period, which generally will have the effect of permitting an investment in an annuity contract to grow more rapidly than a comparable investment under which increases in value are taxed on a current basis. The following chart illustrates this benefit by comparing accumulation under a variable annuity contract with accumulations from an investment on which gains are taxed on a current ordinary income basis. The chart shows accumulations on a single Purchase Payment of $10,000, assuming hypothetical annual returns of 0%, 4% and 8%, compounded annually, and a tax rate of 33%. The values shown for the taxable investment do not include any deduction for management fees or other expenses but assume that taxes are deducted annually from investment returns. The values shown for the variable annuity do not reflect the deduction of contractual expenses such as the Risk Charge (equal to an annual rate of 1.40% of average daily account value), the Administrative Fee (equal to an annual rate of 0.25% of average daily account value), the Annual Fee (equal to $30 per year if your Net Contract Value is less than $50,000), any increase in the Risk Charge for an optional Death Benefit Rider (equal to a maximum annual rate of 0.35% of average daily account value) or for other optional Riders (equal to a maximum annual rate ranging from 0.10% to 1.20% of average daily account value), any charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes, or the expenses of an underlying investment vehicle, such as the Fund. The values shown also do not reflect the withdrawal charge.

3



Table of Contents

Generally, the withdrawal charge is equal to 7% of the amount withdrawn attributable to Purchase Payments that are less than one year old, 6% of the amount withdrawn attributable to Purchase Payments that are two years old, and 4% of the amount withdrawn attributable to Purchase Payments that are three years old. The age of a Purchase Payment is considered 1 year old in the Contract Year we receive it and increases by one year beginning on the day preceding each Contract Anniversary. There is no withdrawal charge on withdrawals of your Earnings, on amounts attributed to Purchase Payments at least four years old, or to the extent that total withdrawals that are free of charge during the Contract Year do not exceed 10% of the sum of your remaining Purchase Payments at the beginning of the Contract Year that have been held under your Contract for less than four years plus additional Purchase Payments applied to your Contract during that Contract Year. If these expenses and fees were taken into account, they would reduce the investment return shown for both the taxable investment and the hypothetical variable annuity contract. In addition, these values assume that you do not surrender the Contract or make any withdrawals until the end of the period shown. The chart assumes a full withdrawal, at the end of the period shown, of all Contract Value and the payment of taxes at the 33% rate on the amount in excess of the Purchase Payments.

The rates of return illustrated are hypothetical and are not an estimate or guarantee of performance. Actual tax rates may vary for different assets (e.g. capital gains and qualifying dividend income) and taxpayers from that illustrated and withdrawals by and distributions to Contract Owners who have not reached age 59 1/2 may be subject to a tax penalty of 10%.

Power of Tax Deferral

$10,000 investment at annual rates of return of 0%, 4% and 8%, taxed @ 33%

(Power of Tax Deferral)

4



Table of Contents

DISTRIBUTION OF THE CONTRACTS

Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (PSD)

Pacific Select Distributors, Inc., our subsidiary, acts as the distributor of the Contracts and offers the Contracts on a continuous basis. PSD is located at 700 Newport Center Drive, Newport Beach, California 92660. PSD is registered as a broker-dealer with the SEC and is a member of NASD. We pay PSD for acting as distributor under a Distribution Agreement. We and PSD enter into selling agreements with broker-dealers whose registered representatives are authorized by state insurance departments to solicit applications for the Contracts. The aggregate amount of underwriting commissions paid to PSD for 2005, 2004, and 2003 with regard to this Contract was $151,926,119, $103,709,460 and $94,253,272 respectively, of which $0 was retained.

PSD or an affiliate pays various sales compensation to broker-dealers that solicit applications for the Contracts. PSD or an affiliate also may provide reimbursement for other expenses associated with the promotion and solicitation of applications for the Contracts. Your registered representative typically receives a portion of the compensation that is payable to his or her broker-dealer in connection with the Contract, depending on the agreement between your registered representative and his or her firm. Pacific Life is not involved in determining that compensation arrangement, which may present its own incentives or conflicts. You may ask your registered representative how he/she will personally be compensated for the transaction.

Under certain circumstances where PSD pays lower initial commissions, certain broker-dealers that solicit applications for Contracts may be paid an ongoing persistency trail commission (sometimes called a residual). The mix of Purchase Payment-based versus trail commissions varies depending upon our agreement with the selling broker-dealer and the commission option selected by your registered representative or broker-dealer. Certain broker-dealers may also be paid a persistency bonus which will be based on assets under management and duration of contracts. The persistency bonus for a registered representative is not expected to exceed .25% of their total assets under management.

In addition to the Purchase Payment-based, trail commissions and persistency bonus described above, we and/or an affiliate may pay additional cash compensation from their own resources in connection with the promotion and solicitation of applications for the Contracts by some, but not all, broker-dealers. The range of additional cash compensation based on Purchase Payments generally does not exceed 0.40% and trailing compensation based on Account Value generally does not exceed 0.10% on an annual basis. Such additional compensation may give Pacific Life greater access to registered representatives of the broker-dealers that receive such compensation. While this greater access provides the opportunity for training and other educational programs so that your registered representative may serve you better, this additional compensation also may afford Pacific Life a “preferred” status at the recipient broker-dealer and provide some other marketing benefit such as website placement, access to registered representative lists, extra marketing assistance or other heightened visibility and access to the broker-dealer’s sales force that otherwise influences the way that the broker-dealer and the registered representative market the Contracts.

We or our affiliates may also pay override payments, expense allowances and reimbursements, bonuses, wholesaler fees, and training and marketing allowances. Such payments may offset the broker-dealer’s expenses in connection with activities that it is required to perform, such as educating personnel and maintaining records. Registered representatives may also receive non-cash compensation such as expense-paid educational or training seminars involving travel within and outside the U.S. or promotional merchandise.

All of the compensation described in this section, and other compensation or benefits provided by us or our affiliates, may be more or less than the overall compensation on similar or other products and may influence your registered representative or broker-dealer to present this Contract over other investment options. You may ask your registered representative about these conflicts of interests and how he/she and his/her broker-dealer are compensated for selling the Contract.

We directly or indirectly own interests in a number of broker-dealers that offer this Contract among others. Such affiliated broker dealers include Associated Securities Corp., Mutual Service Corporation, United Planners’ Financial Services of America, M.L. Stern & Co., LLC and Waterstone Financial Group. These

5



Table of Contents

affiliated broker-dealers and their registered representatives are compensated as described above with Purchase Payment-based and trailing commissions. The affiliated broker-dealers also receive additional cash compensation of 0.10% based on Purchase Payments and 0.05% trailing compensation based on Account Value as described above. We receive “preferred” status at the affiliated broker-dealers along with other product vendors that provide similar support. PSD or its affiliates may also pay other amounts as described above to the affiliated broker-dealers or persons associated with the affiliated broker-dealers. Finally, within certain limits imposed by the NASD, registered representatives who are associated with broker/ dealer firms affiliated with us may qualify for sales incentive programs sponsored by us.

Portfolio Managers of the underlying Portfolios available under this Contract may from time to time bear all or a portion of the expenses of conferences or meetings sponsored by Pacific Life or PSD that are attended by, among others, registered representatives of PSD, who would receive information and/or training regarding the Fund’s Portfolios and their management by the Portfolio Managers in addition to information respecting the variable annuity and/or life insurance products issued by Pacific Life and its affiliates. Other persons may also attend all or a portion of any such conferences or meetings, including directors, officers and employees of Pacific Life, officers and trustees of Pacific Select Fund (“the Fund”), and spouses/guests of the foregoing. The Fund’s Board of Trustees may hold meetings concurrently with such a conference or meeting. The Fund pays for the expenses of the meetings of its Board of Trustees, including the pro-rata share of expenses for attendance by the Trustees at the concurrent conferences or meetings sponsored by Pacific Life or PSD. Additional expenses and promotional items may be paid for by Pacific Life and/or Portfolio Managers. PSD serves as the Fund’s Distributor.

THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT

Calculating Subaccount Unit Values

The Unit Value of the Subaccount Units in each Variable Investment Option is computed at the close of the New York Stock Exchange, which is usually 4:00 p.m. Eastern time on each Business Day. The initial Unit Value of each Subaccount was $10 on the Business Day the Subaccount began operations. At the end of each Business Day, the Unit Value for a Subaccount is equal to:

Y × Z

             
where
  (Y)   =   the Unit Value for that Subaccount as of the end of the preceding Business Day; and
    (Z)   =   the Net Investment Factor for that Subaccount for the period (a “valuation period”) between that Business Day and the immediately preceding Business Day.

The “Net Investment Factor” for a Subaccount for any valuation period is equal to:

(A ÷ B) - C

             
where
  (A)   =   the “per share value of the assets” of that Subaccount as of the end of that valuation period, which is equal to: a+b+c
             
where
  (a)   =   the net asset value per share of the corresponding Portfolio shares held by that Subaccount as of the end of that valuation period;
    (b)   =   the per share amount of any dividend or capital gain distributions made by the Fund for that Portfolio during that valuation period; and
    (c)   =   any per share charge (a negative number) or credit (a positive number) for any income taxes and/or any other taxes or other amounts set aside during that valuation period as a reserve for any income and/or any other taxes which we determine to have resulted from the operations of the Subaccount or Contract, and/or any taxes attributable, directly or indirectly, to Investments;

6



Table of Contents

             
    (B)   =   the net asset value per share of the corresponding Portfolio shares held by the Subaccount as of the end of the preceding valuation period; and
    (C)   =   a factor that assesses against the Subaccount net assets for each calendar day in the valuation period the basic Risk Charge plus any applicable increase in the Risk Charge and the Administrative Fee (see the CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS section in the Prospectus).

As explained in the Prospectus, the Annual Fee, if applicable, will be charged proportionately against your Investment Options. Assessments against your Variable Investment Options are assessed against your Variable Account Value through the automatic debit of Subaccount Units; the Annual Fee decreases the number of Subaccount Units attributed to your Contract but does not alter the Unit Value for any Subaccount.

Variable Annuity Payment Amounts

The following steps show how we determine the amount of each variable annuity payment under your Contract.

First: Pay Applicable Premium Taxes

When you convert your Net Contract Value into annuity payments, you must pay any applicable charge for premium taxes on your Contract Value (unless applicable law requires those taxes to be paid at a later time). We assess this charge by reducing each Account Value proportionately, relative to your Account Value in each Subaccount and in any fixed option, in an amount equal to the aggregate amount of the charges. The remaining amount of your available Net Contract Value may be used to provide variable annuity payments. Alternatively, your remaining available Net Contract Value may be used to provide fixed annuity payments, or it may be divided to provide both fixed and variable annuity payments. You may also choose to withdraw some or all of your remaining Net Contract Value, less any applicable Annual Fee, any charge for an optional Rider, withdrawal charge, and less any charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes without converting this amount into annuity payments.

Second: The First Variable Payment

We begin by referring to your Contract’s Option Table for your Annuity Option (the “Annuity Option Table”). The Annuity Option Table allows us to calculate the dollar amount of the first variable annuity payment under your Contract, based on the amount applied toward the variable annuity. The number that the Annuity Option Table yields will be based on the Annuitant’s age (and, in certain cases, sex) and assumes a 5% rate of return, as described in more detail below.

  Example: Assume a man is 65 years of age at his Annuity Date and has selected a lifetime annuity with monthly payments guaranteed for 10 years. According to the Annuity Option Table, this man should receive an initial monthly payment of $5.79 for every $1,000 of his Contract Value (reduced by applicable charges) that he will be using to provide variable payments. Therefore, if his Contract Value after deducting applicable fees and charges is $100,000 on his Annuity Date and he applies this entire amount toward his variable annuity, his first monthly payment will be $579.00.

You may choose any other Annuity Option Table that assumes a different rate of return which we offer at the time your Annuity Option is effective.

Third: Subaccount Annuity Units

For each Subaccount, we use the amount of the first variable annuity payment under your Contract attributable to each Subaccount to determine the number of Subaccount Annuity Units that will form the basis of subsequent payment amounts. First, we use the Annuity Option Table to determine the amount of that first variable payment for each Subaccount. Then, for each Subaccount, we divide that amount of the first variable annuity payment by the value of one Subaccount Annuity Unit (the “Subaccount Annuity Unit Value”) as of the end of the Annuity Date to obtain the number of Subaccount Annuity Units for that particular Subaccount. The number of Subaccount Annuity Units used to calculate subsequent payments

7



Table of Contents

under your Contract will not change unless exchanges of Annuity Units are made (or if the Joint and Survivor Annuity Option is elected and the Primary Annuitant dies first), but the value of those Annuity Units will change daily, as described below.

Fourth: The Subsequent Variable Payments

The amount of each subsequent variable annuity payment will be the sum of the amounts payable based on each Subaccount. The amount payable based on each Subaccount is equal to the number of Subaccount Annuity Units for that Subaccount multiplied by their Subaccount Annuity Unit Value at the end of the Business Day in each payment period you elected that corresponds to the Annuity Date.

Each Subaccount’s Subaccount Annuity Unit Value, like its Subaccount Unit Value, changes each day to reflect the net investment results of the underlying investment vehicle, as well as the assessment of the Risk Charge at an annual rate of 1.40% and the Administrative Fee at an annual rate of 0.25%. In addition, the calculation of Subaccount Annuity Unit Value incorporates an additional factor; as discussed in more detail below, this additional factor adjusts Subaccount Annuity Values to correct for the Option Table’s implicit assumed annual investment return on amounts applied but not yet used to furnish annuity benefits. Any increase in your Risk Charge for an Optional Death Benefit Rider is not charged on and after the Annuity Date.

Different Subaccounts may be selected for your Contract before and after your Annuity Date, subject to any restrictions we may establish. Currently, you may exchange Subaccount Annuity Units in any Subaccount for Subaccount Annuity Units in any other Subaccount(s) up to four times in any twelve month period after your Annuity Date. The number of Subaccount Annuity Units in any Subaccount may change due to such exchanges. Exchanges following your Annuity Date will be made by exchanging Subaccount Annuity Units of equivalent aggregate value, based on their relative Subaccount Annuity Unit Values.

Understanding the “Assumed Investment Return” Factor

The Annuity Option Table incorporates a number of implicit assumptions in determining the amount of your first variable annuity payment. As noted above, the numbers in the Annuity Option Table reflect certain actuarial assumptions based on the Annuitant’s age, and, in some cases, the Annuitant’s sex. In addition, these numbers assume that the amount of your Contract Value that you convert to a variable annuity will have a positive net investment return of 5% (or such other rate of return you may elect) each year during the payout of your annuity; thus 5% is referred to as an “assumed investment return.”

The Subaccount Annuity Unit Value for a Subaccount will increase only to the extent that the investment performance of that Subaccount exceeds the Risk Charge, the Administrative Fee, and the assumed investment return. The Subaccount Annuity Unit Value for any Subaccount will generally be less than the Subaccount Unit Value for that same Subaccount, and the difference will be the amount of the assumed investment return factor.

  Example: Assume the net investment performance of a Subaccount is at a rate of 5.00% per year (after deduction of the 1.40% Risk Charge and the 0.25% Administrative Fee). The Subaccount Unit Value for that Subaccount would increase at a rate of 5.00% per year, but the Subaccount Annuity Unit Value would not increase (or decrease) at all. The net investment factor for that 5% return [1.05] is then divided by the factor for the 5% assumed investment return [1.05] and 1 is subtracted from the result to determine the adjusted rate of change in Subaccount Annuity Unit Value:
     
1.05

1.05
  = 1; 1 - 1 = 0; 0 × 100% = 0%.

If the net investment performance of a Subaccount’s assets is at a rate less than 5.00% per year, the Subaccount Annuity Unit Value will decrease, even if the Subaccount Unit Value is increasing.

  Example: Assume the net investment performance of a Subaccount is at a rate of 2.60% per year (after deduction of the 1.40% Risk Charge and the 0.25% Administrative Fee). The Subaccount Unit Value for that Subaccount would increase at a rate of 2.60% per year, but the Subaccount Annuity Unit Value would decrease at a rate of 2.29% per year. The net investment factor for that 2.6% return [1.026] is then

8



Table of Contents

  divided by the factor for the 5% assumed investment return [1.05] and 1 is subtracted from the result to determine the adjusted rate of change in Subaccount Annuity Unit Value:
     
1.026

1.05
  = 0.9771; 0.9771 - 1 = - 0.0229; - 0.0229 × 100% = - 2.29%.

The assumed investment return will always cause increases in Subaccount Annuity Unit Values to be somewhat less than if the assumption had not been made, will cause decreases in Subaccount Annuity Unit Values to be somewhat greater than if the assumption had not been made, and will (as shown in the example above) sometimes cause a decrease in Subaccount Annuity Unit Values to take place when an increase would have occurred if the assumption had not been made. If we had assumed a higher investment return in our Annuity Option tables, it would produce annuities with larger first payments, but the increases in subaccount annuity payments would be smaller and the decreases in subsequent annuity payments would be greater; a lower assumed investment return would produce annuities with smaller first payments, and the increases in subsequent annuity payments would be greater and the decreases in subsequent annuity payments would be smaller.

Redemptions of Remaining Guaranteed Variable Payments Under Options 2 and 4

If variable payments are elected under Annuity Options 2 and 4, you may redeem all remaining guaranteed variable payments after the Annuity Date. Also, under Option 4, partial redemptions of remaining guaranteed variable payments after the Annuity Date are available. The amount available upon full redemption would be the present value of any remaining guaranteed variable payments at the assumed investment return, any applicable withdrawal charge will be deducted from the present value as if you made a full withdrawal, or if applicable, a partial withdrawal. For purposes of calculating the withdrawal charge and Free Withdrawal amount, it will be assumed that the Contract was never converted to provide annuity payments and any prior variable annuity payments in that Contract Year will be treated as if they were partial withdrawals from the Contract (see the CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS — Withdrawal Charge section in the Prospectus). For example, assume that a Contract was issued with a single investment of $10,000 and in Contract Year 2 the Owner elects to receive variable annuity payments under Annuity Option 4. In Contract Year 3, the Owner elects to make a partial redemption of $5,000. The withdrawal charge as a percentage of the Purchase Payments with an age of 3 years is 4%. Assuming the Free Withdrawal amount immediately prior to the partial redemption is $200, the withdrawal charge for the partial redemption will be $192 (($5,000 - $200) * 4%). No withdrawal charge will be imposed on a redemption if:

  •  the Annuity Option is elected as the form of payments of death benefit proceeds, or
 
  •  the Annuitant dies before the period certain has ended and the Beneficiary requests a redemption of the variable annuity payments.

The variable payment amount we use in calculating the present value is determined by summing an amount for each Subaccount, which we calculate by multiplying your Subaccount Annuity Units by the Annuity Unit Value next computed after we receive your redemption request. This variable payment amount is then discounted at the assumed investment return from each future Annuity Payment date that falls within the payment guaranteed period. The sum of these discounted remaining variable payment amounts is the present value of remaining guaranteed variable payments.

If you elect to redeem all remaining guaranteed variable payments in a single sum, we will not make any additional variable annuity payments during the remaining guaranteed period after the redemption. Any annuity payments that are to be made after the payment guaranteed period will not change.

If you elect to redeem a portion of the remaining guaranteed variable payments in a single sum, we will reduce the number of Annuity Units for each Subaccount by the same percentage as the partial redemption value bears to the amount available upon a full redemption.

Redemption of remaining guaranteed variable payments will not affect the amount of any fixed annuity payments.

9



Table of Contents

Corresponding Dates

If any transaction or event under your Contract is scheduled to occur on a “corresponding date” that does not exist in a given calendar period, the transaction or event will be deemed to occur on the following Business Day. In addition, as stated in the Prospectus, any event scheduled to occur on a day that is not a Business Day will occur on the next succeeding Business Day.

  Example: If your Contract is issued on February 29 in year 1 (a leap year), your Contract Anniversary in years 2, 3 and 4 will be on March 1.
 
  Example: If your Annuity Date is July 31 and you select monthly annuity payments, the payments received will be based on valuations made on July 31, August 31, October 1 (for September), October 31, December 1 (for November), December 31, January 31, March 1 (for February), March 31, May 1 (for April), May 31 and July 1 (for June).

Age and Sex of Annuitant

As mentioned in the Prospectus, the Contracts generally provide for sex-distinct annuity income factors in the case of life annuities. Statistically, females tend to have longer life expectancies than males; consequently, if the amount of annuity payments is based on life expectancy, they will ordinarily be higher if an annuitant is male than if an annuitant is female. Certain states’ regulations prohibit sex-distinct annuity income factors, and Contracts issued in those states will use unisex factors. In addition, Contracts issued in connection with Qualified Plans are required to use unisex factors.

We may require proof of your Annuitant’s age and sex before or after starting annuity payments. If the age or sex (or both) of your Annuitant are incorrectly stated in your Contract, we will correct the amount payable based on your Annuitant’s correct age or sex, if applicable. If we make the correction after annuity payments have started, and we have made overpayments, we will deduct the amount of the overpayment, with interest at 3% a year, from any payments due then or later; if we have made underpayments, we will add the amount, with interest at 3% a year, of the underpayments to the next payment we make after we receive proof of the correct age and/or sex.

Additionally, we may require proof of the Annuitant’s or Owner’s age before any payments associated with the Death Benefit provisions of your Contract are made. If the age or sex of the Annuitant is incorrectly stated in your Contract, we will base any payment associated with the Death Benefit provisions on your Contract on the Annuitant’s or Owner’s correct age or sex.

Systematic Transfer Programs

The fixed option(s) are not available in connection with portfolio rebalancing. If you are using the earnings sweep, you may also use portfolio rebalancing only if you selected the Money Market Subaccount, or, for Contracts issued before November 1, 2002, the Fixed Option as your sweep option. You may not use dollar cost averaging, DCA Plus, and the earnings sweep at the same time. The systematic transfer options are not available after you annuitize and are subject to the same requirements and restrictions as non-systematic transfers. In addition, no fixed option(s) may be used as the target Investment Option under any systematic transfer program.

Dollar Cost Averaging

When you request dollar cost averaging, you are authorizing us to make periodic reallocations of your Contract Value without waiting for any further instruction from you. You may request to begin or stop dollar cost averaging at any time prior to your Annuity Date; the effective date of your request will be the day we receive notice from you in proper form. Your request may specify the date on which you want your first transfer to be made. Your first transfer may not be made until 30 days after your Contract Date, and if you specify an earlier date, your first transfer will be delayed until one calendar month after the date you specify. If you request dollar cost averaging on your application for your Contract and you fail to specify a date for your first transfer, your first transfer will be made one period after your Contract Date (that is, if you specify monthly transfers,

10



Table of Contents

the first transfer will occur 30 days after your Contract Date; quarterly transfers, 90 days after your Contract Date; semiannual transfers, 180 days after your Contract Date; and if you specify annual transfers, the first transfer will occur on your Contract Anniversary). If you stop dollar cost averaging, you must wait 30 days before you may begin this option again. Currently, we are not enforcing the 30 day waiting period but we reserve the right to enforce such waiting period in the future.

Your request to begin dollar cost averaging must specify the Investment Option you wish to transfer money from (your “source account”). You may choose any one Investment Option as your source account. The Account Value of your source account must be at least $5,000 for you to begin dollar cost averaging. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum Account Value but we reserve the right to enforce such minimum amounts in the future.

Your request to begin dollar cost averaging must also specify the amount and frequency of your transfers. You may choose monthly, quarterly, semiannual or annual transfers. The amount of your transfers may be specified as a dollar amount or a percentage of your source Account Value; however, each transfer must be at least $250. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum transfer amount but we reserve the right to enforce such minimum amounts in the future. Dollar cost averaging transfers are not subject to the same requirements and limitations as other transfers.

Finally, your request must specify the Variable Investment Option(s) you wish to transfer amounts to (your “target account(s)”). If you select more than one target account, your dollar cost averaging request must specify how transferred amounts should be allocated among the target accounts. Your source account may not also be a target account.

Your dollar cost averaging transfers will continue until the earlier of

  •  your request to stop dollar cost averaging is effective,
 
  •  your source Account Value is zero, or
 
  •  your Annuity Date.

If, as a result of a dollar cost averaging transfer, your source Account Value falls below any minimum Account Value we may establish, we have the right, at our option, to transfer that remaining Account Value to your target account(s) on a proportionate basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions. We may change, terminate or suspend the dollar cost averaging option at any time.

Portfolio Rebalancing

Portfolio rebalancing allows you to maintain the percentage of your Contract Value allocated to each Variable Investment Option at a pre-set level prior to annuitization.

  For example, you could specify that 30% of your Contract Value should be in the Equity Index Subaccount, 40% in the Managed Bond Subaccount, and 30% in the Growth LT Subaccount.

Over time, the variations in each Subaccount’s investment results will shift this balance of these Subaccount Value allocations. If you elect the portfolio rebalancing feature, we will automatically transfer your Subaccount Value back to the percentages you specify.

You may choose to have rebalances made quarterly, semiannually or annually until your Annuity Date; portfolio rebalancing is not available after you annuitize.

Procedures for selecting portfolio rebalancing are generally the same as those discussed in detail above for selecting dollar cost averaging: You may make your request at any time prior to your Annuity Date and it will be effective when we receive it in proper form. If you stop portfolio rebalancing, you must wait 30 days to begin again. Currently, we are not enforcing the 30-day waiting period but we reserve the right to enforce such waiting period in the future. If you specify a date fewer than 30 days after your Contract Date, your first rebalance will be delayed one month, and if you request rebalancing on your application but do not specify a

11



Table of Contents

date for the first rebalance, it will occur one period after your Contract Date, as described above under Dollar Cost Averaging. We may change, terminate or suspend the portfolio rebalancing feature at any time.

Earnings Sweep

An earnings sweep automatically transfers the earnings attributable to a specified Investment Option (the “sweep option”) to one or more other Investment Options (your “target option(s)”). If your Contract was issued before November 1, 2002, and you elect to use the earnings sweep, you may select either the Fixed Option or the Money Market Subaccount as your sweep option. If your Contract was issued on or after November 1, 2002, you must select the Money Market Subaccount as your sweep options. The Account Value of your sweep option will be required to be at least $5,000 when you elect the earnings sweep. You may select one or more Variable Investment Options (but not the Money Market Subaccount) as your target option(s).

You may choose to have earnings sweeps occur monthly, quarterly, semiannually or annually until you annuitize. At each earnings sweep, we will automatically transfer your accumulated earnings attributable to your sweep option for the previous period proportionately to your target option(s). That is, if you select a monthly earnings sweep, we will transfer the sweep option earnings from the preceding month; if you select a semiannual earnings sweep, we will transfer the sweep option earnings accumulated over the preceding six months. Earnings sweep transfers are not subject to the same requirements and limitations as other transfers.

To determine the earnings, we take the change in the sweep option’s Account Value during the sweep period, add any withdrawals or transfers out of the sweep option Account that occurred during the sweep period, and subtract any allocations to the sweep option Account during the sweep period. The result of this calculation represents the “total earnings” for the sweep period.

If, during the sweep period, you withdraw or transfer amounts from the sweep option Account, we assume that earnings are withdrawn or transferred before any other Account Value. Therefore, your “total earnings” for the sweep period will be reduced by any amounts withdrawn or transferred during the sweep option period. The remaining earnings are eligible for the sweep transfer.

Procedures for selecting the earnings sweep are generally the same as those discussed in detail above for selecting dollar cost averaging and portfolio rebalancing: You may make your request at any time and it will be effective when we receive it in a form satisfactory to us. If you stop the earnings sweep, you must wait 30 days to begin again. Currently, we are not enforcing the 30-day waiting period but we reserve the right to enforce such waiting period in the future. If you specify a date fewer than 30 days after your Contract Date, your first earnings sweep will be delayed one month, and if you request the earnings sweep on your application but do not specify a date for the first sweep, it will occur one period after your Contract Date, as described above under Dollar Cost Averaging.

If, as a result of an earnings sweep transfer, your source Account Value falls below $500, we have the right, at our option, to transfer that remaining Account Value to your target account(s) on a proportionate basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions. We may change, terminate or suspend the earnings sweep option at any time.

Pre-Authorized Withdrawals

You may specify a dollar amount for your pre-authorized withdrawals, or you may specify a percentage of your Contract Value or an Account Value. You may direct us to make your pre-authorized withdrawals from one or more specific Investment Options; if you do not give us these specific instructions, amounts will be deducted proportionately from your Account Value in each Investment Option.

Procedures for selecting pre-authorized withdrawals are generally the same as those discussed in detail above for selecting dollar cost averaging, portfolio rebalancing, and earnings sweeps: You may make your request at any time and it will be effective when we receive it in proper form. If you stop the pre-authorized withdrawals, you must wait 30 days to begin again. Currently, we are not enforcing the 30-day waiting period but we reserve the right to enforce such waiting period in the future.

12



Table of Contents

If your pre-authorized withdrawals cause your Account Value in any Investment Option to fall below $500, we have the right, at our option, to transfer that remaining Account Value to your other Investment Options on a proportionate basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions. If your pre-authorized withdrawals cause your Contract Value to fall below $1,000, we may, at our option, terminate your Contract and send you the remaining withdrawal proceeds.

Pre-authorized withdrawals are subject to the same withdrawal charges as are other withdrawals, and each withdrawal is subject to any applicable charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes, to federal income tax on its taxable portion, and, if you have not reached age 59 1/2, a federal tax penalty of at least 10%.

Death Benefit

Any death benefit payable will be calculated as of the date we receive proof (in proper form) of the Annuitant’s death (or, if applicable, the Contract Owner’s death) and instructions regarding payment. Any claim of a death benefit must be made in proper form. A recipient of death benefit proceeds may elect to have this benefit paid in one lump sum, in periodic payments, in the form of a lifetime annuity or in some combination of these. Annuity payments will begin within 30 days once we receive all information necessary to process the claim.

If your Contract names Joint or Contingent Annuitants, no death benefit proceeds will be payable unless and until the last Annuitant dies prior to the Annuity Date or a Contract Owner dies prior to the Annuity Date.

Joint Annuitants on Qualified Contracts

On your Annuity Date, if your Contract was issued in connection with a Qualified Plan subject to Title I of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (“ERISA”), and you change your marital status after your Contract Date, you may be permitted to add a Joint Annuitant and to change your Joint Annuitant. Generally speaking, you may be permitted to add a new spouse as a Joint Annuitant, and you may be permitted to remove a Joint Annuitant who is no longer your spouse.

1035 Exchanges

You may make your initial or an additional Investment through an exchange of an existing annuity contract (a 1035 exchange). The exchange can be effected by completing the Transfer/ Exchange form, indicating in the appropriate section that you are making a 1035 exchange. The form is available by calling your representative or by calling us at 1-800-722-2333. Once completed, the form should be mailed to us, along with the annuity contract you are exchanging. If you are making an initial Investment, a completed contract application should also be attached.

In general terms, Section 1035 of the Code provides that no gain or loss is recognized when you exchange one annuity contract for another annuity contract. Under Revenue Ruling 2002-75, a 1035 exchange is now valid whether the exchange is made into a new or pre-existing annuity contract. Transactions under Section 1035, however, may be subject to special rules and may require special procedures and record keeping, particularly if the exchanged annuity contract was issued prior to August 14, 1982. You should consult your tax adviser prior to effecting a 1035 exchange.

Safekeeping of Assets

We are responsible for the safekeeping of the assets of the Separate Account. These assets are held separate and apart from the assets of our General Account and our other separate accounts.

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The statements of assets and liabilities of Separate Account A as of December 31, 2005, the related statements of operations for the year then ended, the statements of changes in net assets for each of the two years in the period then ended, and the financial highlights for each of the periods presented are incorporated

13



Table of Contents

by reference in this Statement of Additional Information from the Annual Report of Separate Account A dated December 31, 2005. Pacific Life’s consolidated financial statements as of December 31, 2005 and 2004 and for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2005 are set forth beginning on the next page. These financial statements should be considered only as bearing on the ability of Pacific Life to meet its obligations under the Contracts and not as bearing on the investment performance of the assets held in the Separate Account.

INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

The consolidated financial statements of Pacific Life as of December 31, 2005 and 2004 and for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2005 have been audited by Deloitte & Touche LLP, 695 Town Center Drive, Costa Mesa, CA 92626, independent registered public accounting firm, as stated in their report appearing herein.

14



Table of Contents

INDEPENDENT AUDITORS’ REPORT
Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries:
We have audited the accompanying consolidated statements of financial condition of Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries (the Company) as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, and the related consolidated statements of operations, stockholder’s equity and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2005. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.
We conducted our audits in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in the United States of America. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes consideration of internal control over financial reporting as a basis for designing audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting. Accordingly, we express no such opinion. An audit also includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.
In our opinion, such consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2005 in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.
As discussed in Note 1 to the consolidated financial statements, the Company changed its method of accounting for variable interest entities in 2005 and for certain non-traditional long-duration contracts in 2004.
/s/DELOITTE & TOUCHE LLP
Costa Mesa, Ca
February 24, 2006

PL-1



Table of Contents

Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION
                 
    December 31,  
    2005     2004  
 
    (In Millions)
ASSETS
               
Investments:
               
Fixed maturity securities available for sale, at estimated fair value
  $ 25,685     $ 25,849  
Equity securities available for sale, at estimated fair value
    417       384  
Trading securities, at estimated fair value
    72       226  
Mortgage loans
    3,925       3,286  
Real estate
    129       134  
Policy loans
    5,904       5,629  
Interest in PIMCO
    368       606  
Other investments
    993       1,175  
 
TOTAL INVESTMENTS
    37,493       37,289  
Cash and cash equivalents
    672       836  
Deferred policy acquisition costs
    3,787       3,278  
Accrued investment income
    409       411  
Other assets
    869       779  
Separate account assets
    37,940       32,032  
 
TOTAL ASSETS
  $ 81,170     $ 74,625  
 

LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDER’S EQUITY

               
Liabilities:
               
Policyholder account balances
  $ 30,143     $ 29,652  
Future policy benefits
    5,098       4,910  
Short-term and long-term debt
    177       176  
Group insurance segment liabilities
    57       181  
Other liabilities
    1,593       1,834  
Variable interest entity debt
    39          
Separate account liabilities
    37,940       32,032  
 
TOTAL LIABILITIES
    75,047       68,785  
 

Commitments and contingencies (Note 20)

               

Stockholder’s Equity:

               
Common stock — $50 par value; 600,000 shares authorized, issued and outstanding
    30       30  
Paid-in capital
    502       497  
Unearned ESOP shares
    (8 )     (17 )
Retained earnings
    4,839       4,297  
Accumulated other comprehensive income
    760       1,033  
 
TOTAL STOCKHOLDER’S EQUITY
    6,123       5,840  
 
TOTAL LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDER’S EQUITY
  $ 81,170     $ 74,625  
 
See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

PL-2



Table of Contents

Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
 
    (In Millions)
REVENUES
                       
Policy fees and insurance premiums
  $ 1,361     $ 1,367     $ 1,109  
Net investment income
    1,921       1,838       1,770  
Net realized investment gain (loss)
    23       2       (79 )
Realized investment gain on interest in PIMCO
    104       169       327  
Commission revenue
    274       270       220  
Investment advisory fees
    317       248       174  
Other income
    38       26       33  
 
TOTAL REVENUES
    4,038       3,920       3,554  
 
 
                       
BENEFITS AND EXPENSES
                       
Interest credited to policyholder account balances
    1,198       1,125       1,153  
Policy benefits paid or provided
    706       715       770  
Commission expenses
    732       721       492  
Operating expenses
    798       670       582  
 
TOTAL BENEFITS AND EXPENSES
    3,434       3,231       2,997  
 
 
                       
INCOME FROM CONTINUING OPERATIONS BEFORE
                       
PROVISION FOR INCOME TAXES
    604       689       557  
Provision for income taxes
    101       142       149  
 
 
                       
INCOME FROM CONTINUING OPERATIONS
    503       547       408  
Discontinued operations, net of taxes
    41       33       28  
Cumulative adjustments due to changes in accounting principles
    (2 )     (19 )        
 
 
                       
NET INCOME
  $ 542     $ 561     $ 436  
 
See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

PL-3



Table of Contents

Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF STOCKHOLDER’S EQUITY
                                                                 
                                    Accumulated Other        
                                    Comprehensive Income (Loss)        
                                    Unrealized                    
                                    Gain (Loss) on     Minimum              
                                    Derivatives     Pension     Unrealized        
                    Unearned             and Securities     Liability     Gain on        
    Common     Paid-in     ESOP     Retained     Available for     Adjustment     Interest in        
    Stock     Capital     Shares     Earnings     Sale, Net     and Other, Net     PIMCO, Net     Total  
 
    (In Millions)
BALANCES, JANUARY 1, 2003
  $ 30     $ 153       ($42 )   $ 3,300     $ 407       ($44 )   $ 413     $ 4,217  
Comprehensive income:
                                                               
Net income
                            436                               436  
Other comprehensive income (loss)
                                    428       41       (180 )     289  
 
                                                             
Total comprehensive income
                                                            725  
Capital contribution
            350                                               350  
Allocation of unearned ESOP shares
            (2 )     13                                       11  
Other equity adjustments
            (1 )                                             (1 )
 
    30       500       (29 )     3,736       835       (3 )     233       5,302  
Comprehensive income:
                                                               
Net income
                            561                               561  
Other comprehensive income (loss)
                                    74       (5 )     (101 )     (32 )
 
                                                             
Total comprehensive income
                                                            529  
Allocation of unearned ESOP shares
            (1 )     12                                       11  
Other equity adjustments
            (2 )                                             (2 )
 
    30       497       (17 )     4,297       909       (8 )     132       5,840  
Comprehensive income:
                                                               
Net income
                            542                               542  
Other comprehensive income (loss)
                                    (227 )     3       (49 )     (273 )
 
                                                             
Total comprehensive income
                                                            269  
Allocation of unearned ESOP shares
            1       9                                       10  
Other equity adjustments
            4                                               4  
 
  $ 30     $ 502       ($8 )   $ 4,839     $ 682       ($5 )   $ 83     $ 6,123  
 
See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

PL-4



Table of Contents

Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
 
    (In Millions)
CASH FLOWS FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES
                       
Net income excluding discontinued operations
  $ 501     $ 528     $ 408  
Adjustments to reconcile net income excluding discontinued operations
   to net cash provided by operating activities:
                       
Net accretion on fixed maturity securities
    (96 )     (75 )     (60 )
Depreciation and other amortization
    36       37       43  
Deferred income taxes
    63       (54 )     (23 )
Net realized investment (gain) loss
    (23 )     (2 )     79  
Realized investment gain on interest in PIMCO
    (104 )     (169 )     (327 )
Net change in deferred policy acquisition costs
    (452 )     (376 )     (558 )
Interest credited to policyholder account balances
    1,198       1,125       1,153  
Change in trading securities
    154       80       266  
Change in accrued investment income
    2               20  
Change in future policy benefits
    172       76       283  
Change in other assets and liabilities
    133       408       196  
 
NET CASH PROVIDED BY OPERATING ACTIVITIES BEFORE DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS
    1,584       1,578       1,480  
Net cash used in operating activities of discontinued operations
    (79 )     (28 )     (1 )
 
NET CASH PROVIDED BY OPERATING ACTIVITIES
    1,505       1,550       1,479  
 
CASH FLOWS FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES
                       
Fixed maturity and equity securities available for sale:
                       
Purchases
  (4,061 )     (6,020 )     (7,309 )
Sales
    1,509       1,133       2,143  
Maturities and repayments
    2,381       2,223       2,881  
Repayments of mortgage loans
    423       1,833       584  
Proceeds from sales of real estate
    19       41       5  
Purchases of mortgage loans and real estate
    (1,153 )     (1,299 )     (1,175 )
Change in policy loans
    (275 )     (222 )     (292 )
Interest in PIMCO
    266       500       999  
Change in cash due to consolidation of variable interest entities
    14       30          
Decrease in cash due to deconsolidation of variable interest entity
    (72 )                
Other investing activity, net
    (594 )     611       201  
 
NET CASH USED IN INVESTING ACTIVITIES
    (1,543 )     (1,170 )     (1,963 )
 
(Continued)
See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

PL-5



Table of Contents

Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
(Continued)   2005     2004     2003  
 
    (In Millions)
CASH FLOWS FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES
                       
Policyholder account balances:
                       
Deposits
  $ 5,275     $ 5,633     $ 5,842  
Withdrawals
    (5,389 )     (5,575 )     (5,604 )
Net change in short-term and long-term debt
    1       (109 )     (200 )
Payments of variable interest entity debt
    (23 )                
Capital contribution
                    350  
Allocation of unearned ESOP shares
    10       11       11  
 
NET CASH PROVIDED BY (USED IN) FINANCING ACTIVITIES
    (126 )     (40 )     399  
 
 
                       
Net change in cash and cash equivalents
    (164 )     340       (85 )
Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of year
    836       496       581  
 
 
                       
CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS, END OF YEAR
  $ 672     $ 836     $ 496  
 
 
                       
NON-CASH INVESTING AND FINANCING ACTIVITIES
                       
Increases due to accounting for variable interest entities:
                       
Fixed maturity securities available for sale
  $ 48                  
Other investments
  $ 25                  
Variable interest entity debt
  $ 62                  
 
 
                       
SUPPLEMENTAL DISCLOSURE OF CASH FLOW INFORMATION
                       
Income taxes paid
  $ 237     $ 129     $ 102  
Interest paid
  $ 16     $ 13     $ 29  
 
See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

PL-6



Table of Contents

Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
1.   ORGANIZATION AND SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES
 
    ORGANIZATION AND DESCRIPTION OF BUSINESS
 
 
    Pacific Life Insurance Company (Pacific Life) was established in 1868 and is domiciled in the State of Nebraska as a stock life insurance company. Pacific Life is an indirect subsidiary of Pacific Mutual Holding Company (PMHC), a California mutual holding company, and a wholly owned subsidiary of Pacific LifeCorp, an intermediate Delaware stock holding company. PMHC and Pacific LifeCorp were organized pursuant to consent received from the California Department of Insurance (CA DOI) and the implementation of a plan of conversion to form a mutual holding company structure in 1997 (the Conversion).
 
    From time to time, insurance companies review their states of legal domicile. Many factors are involved in this review including a state’s premium tax rate. Because state imposed premium taxes are generally based on the higher of the domiciliary state’s premium tax rate or the local state rate, insurers domiciled in high tax rate states pay a retaliatory tax to states where the business is originated. After consideration of this and other factors, Pacific Life transferred its legal domicile from the State of California to the State of Nebraska effective September 1, 2005 (the Redomestication).
 
    Pacific Life and its subsidiaries and affiliates have primary business operations consisting of life insurance, individual annuities, pension and institutional products, and broker-dealer operations. Pacific Life’s primary business operations provide life insurance products, individual annuities and mutual funds, and offer to individuals, businesses, and pension plans a variety of investment products and services.
 
    BASIS OF PRESENTATION AND PRINCIPLES OF CONSOLIDATION
 
 
    The accompanying consolidated financial statements of Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries (the Company) have been prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America (U.S. GAAP) and include the accounts of Pacific Life and its majority owned and controlled subsidiaries and variable interest entities (VIEs) in which the Company was determined to be the primary beneficiary. All significant intercompany transactions and balances have been eliminated. Included in other liabilities is minority interest of $30 million and $34 million as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively. Included in operating expenses is the minority interest share of net income of $2 million, insignificant income and $1 million for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively.
 
    Pacific Life prepared its regulatory financial statements based on accounting practices prescribed or permitted by the CA DOI prior to the Redomestication and on accounting practices prescribed or permitted by the Nebraska Department of Insurance (NE DOI) subsequent to the Redomestication. These consolidated financial statements materially differ from those filed with regulatory authorities (Note 2).
 
    The preparation of financial statements in conformity with U.S. GAAP requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities as of the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates.
 
    In developing these estimates, management makes subjective and complex judgments that are inherently uncertain and subject to material change as facts and circumstances develop. Management has identified the following estimates as significant, as they involve a higher degree of judgment and are subject to a significant degree of variability: deferred policy acquisition costs (DAC), investment valuation, including other than temporary impairments, derivative valuation, liabilities for future policy benefits, provision for income taxes, and accounting for employee benefit plans.
 
    Certain prior year amounts have been reclassified to conform to the 2005 financial statement presentation.

PL-7



Table of Contents

    RECENTLY ADOPTED ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS
 
 
    In June 2005, the Emerging Issues Task Force (EITF) reached a consensus on EITF Issue No. 04-5, Determining Whether a General Partner, or the General Partners as a Group, Controls a Limited Partnership or Similar Entity When the Limited Partners Have Certain Rights. This EITF addresses whether a partnership should be consolidated by one of its partners and evaluates what considerations are relevant in determining whether a general partner should consolidate a limited partnership. EITF Issue No. 04-5 is effective immediately for new agreements subsequent to July 1, 2005 and in the first quarter of 2006 for existing agreements prior to July 1, 2005 as a cumulative effect through retained earnings or as a retroactive restatement. The adoption of EITF Issue No. 04-5 did not have a significant impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements for agreements subsequent to July 1, 2005 and is not expected to have a significant impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements for agreements entered into prior to July 1, 2005.
 
    In March 2005, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) issued FASB Staff Position (FSP) FASB Interpretation No. (FIN) 46 (R) -5, Implicit Variable Interests Under FASB Interpretation No. 46(R), Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities. This FSP addresses whether a reporting entity has an implicit variable interest in a VIE that commonly arises in leasing arrangements among related parties, as well as other types of arrangements involving both related and unrelated parties. This FSP was effective in the second quarter of 2005 and had no impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.
 
    In March 2005, the FASB issued FIN 47, Accounting for Conditional Asset Retirement Obligations. FIN 47 clarifies that the term “conditional asset retirement obligation” as used in Statement of Financial Accounting Standard (SFAS) No. 143, Accounting for Asset Retirement Obligations, refers to a legal obligation to perform an asset retirement activity in which the timing and (or) method of settlement are conditional on a future event that may or may not be within the control of the entity. The obligation to perform the asset retirement activity is unconditional even though uncertainty exists about the timing and (or) method of settlement. Uncertainty about the timing and (or) method of settlement of a conditional asset retirement obligation should be factored into the measurement of the liability when sufficient information exists to make a reasonable estimate of the fair value of the obligation. FIN 47 was adopted in the fourth quarter of 2005 and did not have a significant impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.
 
    In December 2004, the FASB issued SFAS No. 153, Exchanges of Nonmonetary Assets, an amendment of Accounting Principles Board (APB) No. 29, Accounting for Nonmonetary Transactions. This statement eliminates the exception from fair value measurement for nonmonetary exchanges of similar productive assets and replaces it with an exception for exchanges that do not have commercial substance. This statement specifies that a nonmonetary exchange has commercial substance if the future cash flows of the entity are expected to change significantly as a result of the exchange. SFAS No. 153 was effective for nonmonetary asset exchanges occurring beginning in the third quarter of 2005 and did not have a significant impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.
 
    Effective January 1, 2004, the Company adopted Accounting Standards Executive Committee of the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants (AICPA) Statement of Position (SOP) 03-1, Accounting and Reporting by Insurance Enterprises for Certain Non Traditional Long-Duration Contracts and for Separate Accounts. SOP 03-1 addresses: 1) separate account presentation; 2) accounting for an insurance company’s proportionate interest in separate accounts; 3) transfers of assets from the general account to a separate account; 4) valuation of certain insurance liabilities and policy features such as guaranteed minimum death benefits (GMDB) and annuitization benefits; and 5) accounting for sales inducements. In September 2004, the AICPA subsequently issued a Technical Practice Aid (TPA), which contains interpretive guidance on applying certain provisions of SOP 03-1. The interpretive guidance has been incorporated into the adoption of SOP 03-1.
 
    Separate account assets and liabilities represent funds segregated for the benefit of certain contract holders who bear the investment risk. The Company’s accounting is consistent with the provisions of SOP 03-1 relating to separate account reporting. For example, separate account assets and liabilities are equal and reported at fair value, and the Company does not have any investments in separate accounts. Also, policyholder deposits and withdrawals, investment income, and related realized investment gains and losses are excluded from the amounts reported in the consolidated statements of operations, and fees charged on contract holder deposits and balances are included in revenues as policy fees and investment advisory fees. The adoption of these provisions of SOP 03-1 did not impact the Company’s consolidated financial statements.

PL-8



Table of Contents

    Certain variable annuity (VA) contracts classified as insurance contracts have amounts charged against contract holders for an insurance benefit feature assessed in a manner that is expected to result in profits in earlier years and subsequent losses from that insurance benefit, including GMDB and guaranteed living income benefits (GLIB). A liability is required to be established in addition to the account balance to recognize the portion of such assessments that compensate the insurance enterprise for benefits to be provided in future periods. The Company had historically established GMDB reserves and recorded a liability of $32 million as of December 31, 2003. There were no GLIB reserves established as of December 31, 2003. Upon the adoption of SOP 03-1, these reserves were increased by $24 million, with the GMDB reserve increased by $17 million to $49 million and the GLIB reserve was established at $7 million. Additionally, the present value of estimated gross profits underlying the VA DAC calculation was revised for the requirements of SOP 03-1, resulting in a $10 million reduction of the VA DAC asset.
 
    Certain universal life (UL) and variable universal life (VUL) contracts classified as insurance contracts have amounts charged against contract holders for an insurance benefit feature assessed in a manner that is expected to result in profits in earlier years and subsequent losses from the insurance benefit, including policy death benefits, no lapse guarantee riders (NLGR) and related reinsurance ceded coverages. A liability, net of reinsurance ceded, is required in addition to the account balance to recognize the portion of such assessments that compensates the insurance enterprise for benefits to be provided in future periods. The Company had historically established a reserve for reinsurance cost on one life reinsurance agreement and recorded a liability of $37 million as of December 31, 2003. Upon the adoption in 2004 of SOP 03-1, the reserve was decreased by $4 million. There were no NLGR or annuitization reserves established as of December 31, 2003. Upon adoption of SOP 03-1, reserves totaling $0.2 million for the NLGR insurance benefits and $0.1 million for annuitization were established. Additionally, the present value of estimated gross profits underlying the Company’s UL and VUL DAC calculation was not impacted and there was no resulting DAC impact.
 
    Certain in force UL contracts have bonus interest features. None of these contract bonus interest features met the specific sales inducement criteria established in SOP 03-1. Therefore, the Company’s existing practice of accruing a bonus interest liability ratably over the period during which the bonus is earned up to the time it is credited to the contract holder account balance has been continued without modification.
 
    As a result of the adoption of SOP 03-1, the Company recorded a decrease in net income of $19 million, net of tax, as a cumulative adjustment due to a change in accounting principle for the year ended December 31, 2004.
 
    In January 2003, the FASB issued FIN 46, Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities, an Interpretation of ARB No. 51 (FIN 46). FIN 46 addresses whether certain types of entities, referred to as VIEs, should be consolidated in the Company’s consolidated financial statements. A VIE is an entity in which the equity investors lack certain essential characteristics of a controlling financial interest or that lacks sufficient equity to finance its own activities without financial support provided by other entities. A company is considered the primary beneficiary and must consolidate a VIE if it has a variable interest that will absorb a majority of the expected losses if they occur, receive a majority of the entity’s expected returns, or both. In December 2003, the FASB issued FIN 46 (revised December 2003), Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities, an Interpretation of ARB No. 51 (FIN 46R). FIN 46R replaced FIN 46 to clarify and revise a number of key elements of FIN 46, including the definition of VIE and the treatment of fees paid to decision makers. Upon adoption of FIN 46R on January 1, 2005, the provisions of FIN 46R were applied to VIEs created after December 31, 2003.
 
    The consolidation requirements for the Company’s VIEs, created prior to December 31, 2003, were applied effective January 1, 2005. The Company has determined that it is the primary beneficiary of a Collateralized Debt Obligation (CDO) VIE of high-yield debt securities that it sponsored in 1998 (Note 4). In accordance with the transition provisions of FIN 46R, the Company increased assets $67 million, liabilities $65 million, including non-recourse debt of $62 million, accumulated other comprehensive income $4 million and decreased net income by $2 million as a cumulative adjustment due to a change in accounting principle upon the adoption of FIN 46R. This decrease in net income is a non-economic loss that is anticipated to reverse into income at the termination of the VIE.

PL-9



Table of Contents

    FUTURE ADOPTION OF NEW ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS
 
 
    In September 2005, the AICPA issued SOP 05-1, Accounting by Insurance Enterprises for Deferred Acquisition Costs in Connection With Modifications or Exchanges of Insurance Contracts. This SOP provides guidance on accounting for DAC on internal replacements or insurance and investment contracts other than those described in SFAS No. 97, Accounting and Reporting by Insurance Enterprises for Certain Long-Duration Contracts and for Realized Gains and Losses from the Sale of Investments. This SOP is effective for internal replacements occurring in fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2006 and adoption is not expected to have a significant impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.
 
    In May 2005, the FASB issued SFAS No. 154, Accounting Changes and Error Corrections. This statement changes the requirements for the accounting for and reporting of a change in accounting principle and applies to all voluntary changes in accounting principle as well as changes required by a new accounting pronouncement. SFAS No. 154 eliminates the requirement in APB No. 20, Accounting Changes, to include the cumulative effect of changes in accounting principle in the statement of operations in the period of change. Instead, this statement requires retrospective application of changes in accounting principle to prior periods’ financial statements. This statement is effective for accounting changes and corrections of errors in the first quarter of 2006.
 
    In November 2003, the FASB Task Force reached a partial consensus under EITF Issue No. 03-1, The Meaning of Other-Than-Temporary Impairment and Its Application to Certain Investments. This EITF required certain quantitative and qualitative disclosures for securities accounted for under SFAS No. 115, Accounting for Certain Investments in Debt and Equity Securities, which are impaired at the statement of financial condition date but for which an other than temporary impairment has not been recognized. The portions of this EITF on which consensus was reached were effective for financial statements for fiscal years ending after December 15, 2003. Effective December 31, 2003, the required disclosures were included in the notes to consolidated financial statements. In November 2005, the FASB issued FSP FAS No. 115-1 and FAS No. 124-1, The Meaning of Other-Than-Temporary Impairment and Its Application to Certain Investments. The guidance within the FSP is applicable to debt and equity securities that are within the scope of SFAS No. 115. The FSP nullifies certain requirements of EITF Issue No. 03-1 regarding the recognition of other than temporary impairments and restores the guidance for determination of other than temporary impairment to SFAS No. 115, EITF Issue No. 99-20, Recognition of Interest Income and Impairment on Purchased and Retained Beneficial Interests in Securitized Financial Assets, and APB Opinion No. 18, The Equity Method of Accounting for Investments in Common Stock. The FSP adopts the disclosure requirements of EITF Issue No. 03-1. For other than temporarily impaired debt securities, the investor will account for the debt security as if the debt security was purchased on the measurement date of the other than temporary impairment. The discount or reduced premium recorded for the debt security would be amortized over the remaining life of the debt security as a yield adjustment. The FSP is effective for fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2005 and adoption is not expected to have a significant impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.
 
    INVESTMENTS
 
 
    Fixed maturity and equity securities available for sale are reported at estimated fair value, with unrealized gains and losses, net of deferred income taxes and adjustments related to DAC, recorded as a component of other comprehensive income (OCI). For mortgage-backed securities and asset-backed securities included in fixed maturity securities available for sale, the Company recognizes income using a constant effective yield based on anticipated prepayments and the estimated economic life of the securities. When estimates of prepayments change, the effective yield is recalculated to reflect actual payments to date and anticipated future payments. For fixed rate securities, the net investment in the securities is adjusted to the amount that would have existed had the new effective yield been applied since the acquisition of the securities. These adjustments are reflected in net investment income. Trading securities are reported at estimated fair value with changes in estimated fair value included in net realized investment gain (loss).
 
    Investment income consists primarily of interest and dividends, net investment income from partnership interests, prepayment fees on fixed maturity securities and mortgage loans, and income from certain derivatives. Interest is recognized on an accrual basis and dividends are recorded on the ex-dividend date. Amortization of premium and accretion of discount on fixed maturity securities is recorded using the effective interest method.
 
    The estimated fair value of fixed maturity and equity securities is generally obtained from independent pricing services. For fixed maturity securities not able to be priced by independent services (generally private placement and

PL-10



Table of Contents

    low volume traded securities), an internally developed matrix is used. The matrix utilizes the fair market yield curves, provided by a major independent data service, which determines the discount yield based upon the security’s weighted-average life, rating, and liquidity spread. The estimated fair value of the security is calculated as the present value of the estimated cash flows discounted at the yield determined above. For those securities not priced externally or by the matrix, the estimated fair value is internally determined, utilizing various techniques in valuing complex investments with variable cash flows.
 
    The following table identifies the estimated fair value of fixed maturity securities by pricing sources.
                                 
    December 31, 2005     December 31, 2004  
    Fixed Maturities     % of Total     Fixed Maturities     % of Total  
    at Estimated     Estimated     at Estimated     Estimated  
    Fair Value     Fair Value     Fair Value     Fair Value  
         
    (In Millions)
Independent market quotations
  $ 19,383       75.5 %   $ 19,712       76.2 %
Matrix-priced
    5,474       21.3 %     5,523       21.4 %
Other methods
    828       3.2 %     614       2.4 %
 
                       
 
  $ 25,685       100.0 %   $ 25,849       100.0 %
 
                       
    The matrix-priced securities primarily consist of private placements and have an average duration of five years as of December 31, 2005 and 2004.
 
    The Company assesses whether other than temporary impairments have occurred based upon the Company’s case-by-case evaluation of the underlying reasons for the decline in estimated fair value. All securities with a gross unrealized loss at the consolidated statement of financial condition date are subjected to the Company’s process for identifying other than temporary impairments with additional focus on securities with unrealized losses greater than 20% of net carrying amount. The Company considers a wide range of factors, as described below, about the security issuer and uses its best judgment in evaluating the cause of the decline in the estimated fair value of the security and in assessing the prospects for near-term recovery. Inherent in the Company’s evaluation of each security are assumptions and estimates about the operations of the issuer and its future earnings potential.
 
    Considerations used by the Company in the impairment evaluation process include, but are not limited to, the following:
    The duration and extent that the estimated fair value has been below net carrying amount
 
    Industry factors or conditions related to a geographic area that are negatively affecting the security
 
    Underlying valuation of assets specifically pledged to support the credit
 
    Past due interest or principal payments or other violation of covenants
 
    Deterioration of the overall financial condition of the specific issuer
 
    Downgrades by a rating agency
 
    Ability and intent to hold the investment for a period of time to allow for a recovery of value
 
    Fundamental analysis of the liquidity and financial condition of the specific issuer
    Also, the Company estimates the cash flows over the life of certain purchased beneficial interests in securitized financial assets. Based upon current information and events, if the estimated fair value of its beneficial interests is less than or equal to its net carrying amount and if there has been an adverse change in the estimated cash flows since the last revised estimate, considering both timing and amount, then an other than temporary impairment is recognized.
 
    Securities and purchased beneficial interests that are deemed to be other than temporarily impaired are written down to estimated fair value in the period the securities or purchased beneficial interest are deemed to be impaired.

PL-11



Table of Contents

    Realized gains and losses on investment transactions are determined on a specific identification basis and are included in net realized investment gain (loss). The Company includes other than temporary impairment write-downs in net realized investment gain (loss).
 
    Mortgage loans, net of valuation allowances and write-downs, and policy loans are stated at unpaid principal balances.
 
    Real estate is carried at depreciated cost, net of write-downs, or, for real estate acquired in satisfaction of debt, estimated fair value less estimated selling costs at the date of acquisition, if lower than the related unpaid balance.
 
    Other investments primarily consist of partnership and joint ventures, derivative instruments, and low income housing related investments qualifying for tax credits (LIHTC). Partnership and joint venture interests where the Company does not have a controlling interest or majority ownership are recorded under the cost or equity method of accounting depending on the equity ownership position.
 
    Investments in LIHTC are recorded under either the effective interest method, if they meet certain requirements, including a projected positive yield based solely on guaranteed credits, or are recorded under the equity method if these certain requirements are not met. For investments in LIHTC recorded under the effective interest method, the amortization of the original investment and the tax credits are recorded in the provision for income taxes. For investments in LIHTC recorded under the equity method, the amortization of the initial investment is included in net investment income, and the related tax credits are recorded in the provision for income taxes. The amortization recorded in net investment income was $23 million, $24 million and $25 million for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively.
 
    The Company may loan securities in connection with its securities lending program administered by an authorized financial institution. The Company receives collateral in an amount equal to 102% of the estimated fair value of the loaned securities. The collateral pledged is restricted and not available for general use.
 
    All derivatives, whether designated in hedging relationships or not, are required to be recorded at estimated fair value. If the derivative is designated as a cash flow hedge, the effective portion of changes in the estimated fair value of the derivative is recorded in OCI and recognized in earnings when the hedged item affects earnings. If the derivative is designated as a fair value hedge, the changes in the estimated fair value of the derivative and the hedged item are recognized in net realized investment gain (loss). The change in value of the hedged item associated with the risk being hedged is reflected as an adjustment to the carrying amount of the hedged item. For derivative instruments not designated as hedges, the change in estimated fair value of the derivative is recorded in net realized investment gain (loss). Estimated fair value exposure is calculated based on the aggregate estimated fair value of all derivative instruments with each counterparty, net of collateral received, in accordance with legally enforceable counterparty master netting agreements. If the estimated fair value exposure to the counterparty is positive, the amount is reflected in other assets whereas, if the estimated fair value exposure to the counterparty is negative, the estimated fair value is included in other liabilities.
 
    The periodic cash flows for all hedging derivatives are recorded consistent with the hedged item on an accrual basis. For derivatives that are hedging securities, these amounts are included in net investment income. For derivatives that are hedging liabilities, these amounts are included in interest credited to policyholder account balances. For derivatives not designated as hedging instruments, the periodic cash flows are reflected in net realized investment gain (loss) on an accrual basis. Upon termination of a cash flow hedging relationship, the accumulated amount in OCI is amortized into net investment income or interest credited to policyholder account balances over the remaining life of the hedged item. Upon termination of a fair value hedging relationship, the accumulated cost basis adjustment to the hedged item is amortized into net investment income or interest credited to policyholder account balances over its remaining life.
 
    CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS
 
 
    Cash and cash equivalents include all investments with an original maturity of three months or less.

PL-12



Table of Contents

    DEFERRED POLICY ACQUISITION COSTS
 
 
    The costs of acquiring new insurance business, principally commissions, medical examinations, underwriting, policy issue and other expenses, all of which vary with and are primarily associated with the production of new business, are deferred and recorded as an asset commonly referred to as DAC. As of December 31, 2005 and 2004, the carrying value of DAC was $3.8 billion and $3.3 billion, respectively (Note 8).
 
    For universal life, variable annuities and other investment-type contracts, acquisition costs are amortized through earnings in proportion to the present value of estimated gross profits (EGPs) from projected investment, mortality and expense margins and surrender charges over the estimated lives of the contracts. DAC related to traditional policies is amortized through earnings over the premium-paying period of the related policies in proportion to premium revenues recognized, using assumptions and estimates consistent with those used in computing policy reserves. DAC related to certain unrealized components in OCI, primarily unrealized gains and losses on securities available for sale, is recorded directly to equity through OCI.
 
    Significant assumptions in the development of EGPs include investment returns, surrender and lapse rates, rider utilization, interest spreads, and mortality margins. The Company’s long-term assumption for the underlying separate account investment return ranges up to 8.0%.
 
    A change in the assumptions utilized to develop EGPs, commonly referred to as unlocking, results in a change to amounts expensed in the reporting period in which the change was made by adjusting the DAC balance to the level DAC would have been had the EGPs been calculated using the new assumptions over the entire amortization period. In general, favorable experience variances result in increased expected future profitability and may lower the rate of DAC amortization, whereas unfavorable experience variances result in decreased expected future profitability and may increase the rate of DAC amortization. All critical assumptions utilized to develop EGPs are evaluated at least annually and necessary revisions are made to future EGPs to the extent that actual or anticipated experience indicates such a prospective change.
 
    The Company defers sales inducements and amortizes them over the life of the policy using the same methodology and assumptions used to amortize DAC. The Company offers a sales inducement to the policyholder where the policyholder receives a bonus credit, typically ranging from 4.0% to 5.0% of each deposit. Capitalized sales inducements were $472 million and $419 million as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively.
 
    Value of business acquired (VOBA), included as part of DAC, represents the capitalized value relating to insurance contracts in force at the date of acquisition. Amortization of the VOBA on a block of single premium immediate and deferred annuities is calculated in proportion to the run-off in contract benefit reserves over the life of the contracts. Amortization of the VOBA on a block of universal life contracts is calculated over the expected life of the policies in proportion to the present value of EGPs from such policies. The VOBA balance was $84 million and $86 million as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively.
 
    POLICYHOLDER ACCOUNT BALANCES
 
 
    Policyholder account balances on universal life and investment-type contracts, such as funding agreements, fixed account liabilities and guaranteed interest contracts (GICs), are valued using the retrospective deposit method and are equal to accumulated account values, which consist of deposits received, plus interest credited, less withdrawals and assessments. Interest credited to these contracts primarily ranged from 3.0% to 8.0%.
 
    FUTURE POLICY BENEFITS
 
 
    Annuity reserves, which primarily consist of group retirement and structured settlement annuities, are equal to the present value of expected future payments using pricing assumptions, as applicable, for interest rates, mortality, morbidity, retirement age and expenses. Interest rates used in establishing such liabilities ranged from 1.5% to 11.0%.
 
    Policy charges assessed against policyholders that represent compensation to the Company for services to be provided in future periods are recorded as unearned revenue reserves. The unearned revenue is recognized in income over the expected life of the contract using the same methods and assumptions used to amortize DAC. Unearned revenue

PL-13



Table of Contents

    related to certain unrealized components in OCI, primarily unrealized gains and losses on securities available for sale, is recorded directly to equity through OCI.
 
    Life insurance reserves are valued using the net level premium method on the basis of actuarial assumptions appropriate at policy issue. Mortality and persistency assumptions are generally based on the Company’s experience, which, together with interest and expense assumptions, include a margin for possible unfavorable deviations. Interest rate assumptions ranged from 4.5% to 9.3%. Future dividends for participating business are provided for in the liability for future policy benefits.
 
    Dividends to policyholders are accrued based on dividend formulas approved by the Pacific Life Board of Directors and reviewed for reasonableness and equitable treatment of policyholders by an independent consulting actuary. As of December 31, 2005 and 2004, participating experience rated policies paying dividends represent less than 1% of direct life insurance in force.
 
    Estimates of future policy benefit reserves and liabilities are continually reviewed and, as experience develops, are adjusted as necessary. Such changes in estimates are included in earnings for the period in which such changes occur.
 
    REVENUES, BENEFITS AND EXPENSES
 
 
    Insurance premiums, annuity contracts with life contingencies and traditional life and term insurance contracts, are recognized as revenue when due. Benefits and expenses are matched against such revenues to recognize profits over the lives of the contracts. This matching is accomplished by providing for liabilities for future policy benefits, expenses of contract administration and the amortization of DAC.
 
    Receipts for universal life and investment-type contracts are reported as deposits to either policyholder account balances or separate account liabilities, and are not included in revenue. Policy fees consist of mortality charges, surrender charges and expense charges that have been earned and assessed against related account values during the period. The timing of policy fee revenue recognition is determined based on the nature of the fees. Certain amounts assessed that represent compensation for services to be provided in future periods are reported as unearned revenue and recognized in revenue over the periods benefited. Benefits and expenses include policy benefits and claims incurred in the period that are in excess of related policyholder account balances, interest credited to policyholder account balances, expenses of contract administration and the amortization of DAC.
 
    Reinsurance premiums ceded and reinsurance recoveries on benefits and claims incurred are deducted from their respective revenue and benefit and expense accounts.
 
    Commission revenue from the Company’s broker-dealer subsidiaries is generally recorded on the trade date. Related commission expense is recorded when incurred.
 
    Investment advisory fees are primarily fees earned from the Pacific Select Fund, the investment vehicle provided to the Company’s variable universal life and variable annuity contract holders. These fees are based upon the net asset value of the underlying portfolios, and are recorded as earned. Related subadvisory expense is included in operating expenses and is recorded when incurred.
 
    DEPRECIATION AND AMORTIZATION
 
 
    Depreciation of investment real estate is computed on the straight-line method over estimated useful lives, which range from 5 to 30 years. Depreciation of investment real estate is included in net investment income. Certain other assets are depreciated or amortized on the straight-line method over estimated useful lives, which range from 3 to 40 years. Depreciation and amortization of certain other assets are included in operating expenses.

PL-14



Table of Contents

    INCOME TAXES
 
 
    Pacific Life and its includable subsidiaries are included in the consolidated Federal income tax return of PMHC. Pacific Life and its wholly owned, Arizona domiciled life insurance subsidiary, Pacific Life & Annuity Company (PL&A), are taxed as life insurance companies for Federal income tax purposes. Pacific Life’s non-insurance subsidiaries are either included in PMHC’s combined California franchise tax return or, if necessary, file separate state tax returns. Companies included in the consolidated Federal income tax return of PMHC and/or the combined California franchise tax return of PMHC are allocated tax expense or benefit based principally on the effect of including their operations in PMHC’s returns. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognized for the future tax consequences attributable to differences between the financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax bases. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured using enacted tax rates expected to apply to taxable income in the years the differences are expected to be recovered or settled.
 
    SEPARATE ACCOUNTS
 
 
    Separate accounts primarily include variable annuity and life contracts, as well as other guaranteed and non-guaranteed accounts. Separate account assets and liabilities are recorded at estimated fair value and represent legally segregated contract holder funds. Deposits to separate accounts, investment income and realized and unrealized gains and losses on the separate account assets accrue directly to contract holders and, accordingly, are not reflected in the consolidated statements of operations or cash flows. However, on certain separate account products, the Company does contractually guarantee either a minimum return or account value, for which liabilities have been recorded in future policy benefits. Amounts charged to the separate account for mortality, surrender and expense charges are included in revenues as policy fees.
 
    FAIR VALUE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
 
 
    The estimated fair value of financial instruments, disclosed in Notes 9, 10 and 13, has been determined using available market information and appropriate valuation methodologies. However, considerable judgment is often required to interpret market data to develop the estimates of fair value. Accordingly, the estimates presented may not be indicative of the amounts the Company could realize in a current market exchange. The use of different market assumptions and/or estimation methodologies could have a significant effect on the estimated fair value amounts.

PL-15



Table of Contents

2.   STATUTORY RESULTS
 
    Pacific Life prepared its statutory financial statements in conformity with accounting practices prescribed or permitted by the CA DOI prior to the Redomestication, and accounting practices prescribed or permitted by the NE DOI subsequent to the Redomestication, both of which are a comprehensive basis of accounting other than U.S. GAAP. The following are reconciliations of statutory capital and surplus, and statutory net income for Pacific Life, as compared to the amounts reported as stockholder’s equity and net income from these consolidated financial statements prepared in accordance with U.S. GAAP:
                 
    December 31,  
    2005     2004  
     
    (In Millions)
Statutory capital and surplus
  $ 3,009     $ 2,814  
DAC
    3,741       3,273  
Accumulated other comprehensive income
    764       1,026  
Non-admitted assets
    505       399  
Asset valuation reserve
    374       311  
Insurance and annuity reserves
    (25 )     (164 )
Surplus notes
    (150 )     (150 )
Unearned revenue reserve
    (487 )     (399 )
Deferred income taxes
    (628 )     (438 )
CRVM and CARVM(1)
    (874 )     (792 )
Other
    (106 )     (40 )
     
Stockholder’s equity as reported herein
  $ 6,123     $ 5,840  
     
(1) The Commissioners’ Reserve Valuation Method (CRVM) and the Commissioners’ Annuity Reserve Valuation Method (CARVM) adjustments represent the reserve expense allowance on variable UL and VA contracts, which are allowed under statutory accounting principles, but not U.S. GAAP.
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
     
    (In Millions)
Statutory net income
  $ 234     $ 508     $ 277  
DAC
    454       385       551  
Derivatives
    23       1       16  
Partnerships and joint ventures
    9       62       (13 )
Earnings of subsidiaries
    (3 )     (364 )     125  
Asset-backed securities valuation differences
    (4 )     32       (23 )
Net realized gain (loss) on trading securities
    (14 )     (2 )     34  
Interest maintenance reserve
    (31 )     (20 )     (8 )
Insurance and annuity reserves
    (47 )     (204 )     (469 )
Deferred income taxes
    (61 )     75       (121 )
Other
    (18 )     88       67  
     
Net income as reported herein
  $ 542     $ 561       436  
     
    RISK-BASED CAPITAL
 
    Risk-based capital is a method developed by the National Association of Insurance Commissioners to measure the minimum amount of capital appropriate for an insurance company to support its overall business operations in

PL-16



Table of Contents

    consideration of its size and risk profile. The formulas for determining the amount of risk-based capital specify various weighting factors that are applied to financial balances or various levels of activity based on the perceived degree of risk. The adequacy of a company’s actual capital is measured by the risk-based capital results, as determined by the formulas. Companies below minimum risk-based capital requirements are classified within certain levels, each of which requires specified corrective action. As of December 31, 2005 and 2004, Pacific Life and PL&A exceeded the minimum risk-based capital requirements.
 
    DIVIDEND RESTRICTIONS
 
    As a result of the Redomestication, dividend payments by Pacific Life to Pacific LifeCorp are no longer restricted by the California Insurance Code, but are instead subject to similar restrictions set forth in Nebraska law. Under the Nebraska Insurance Code, ordinary dividends in any 12-month period cannot exceed the greater of 10% of unassigned surplus as of the preceding year end or the statutory net gain from operations for the previous calendar year, without prior approval from the NE DOI. Based on this limitation and 2005 statutory results, Pacific Life could pay $243 million in ordinary dividends to Pacific LifeCorp in 2006 without prior regulatory approval from the Director of Insurance of the State of Nebraska. No dividends were paid during 2005, 2004 and 2003.
 
    The maximum amount of ordinary dividends that can be paid by PL&A to Pacific Life without restriction cannot exceed the lesser of 10% of statutory surplus as regards to policyholders, or the statutory net gain from operations. Based on this limitation and 2005 statutory results, PL&A could pay $35 million in dividends to Pacific Life in 2006 without prior regulatory approval. No dividends were paid during 2005, 2004 and 2003.
3.   CLOSED BLOCK
 
    In connection with the Conversion, an arrangement known as a closed block (the Closed Block) was established, for dividend purposes only, for the exclusive benefit of certain individual life insurance policies that had an experience based dividend scale for 1997. The Closed Block was designed to give reasonable assurance to holders of the Closed Block policies that policy dividends will not change solely as a result of the Conversion.
 
    Assets that support the Closed Block, which are primarily included in fixed maturity securities, policy loans and accrued investment income, amounted to $285 million and $290 million as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively. Liabilities allocated to the Closed Block, which are primarily included in future policy benefits, amounted to $311 million and $314 million as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively. The contribution to income from the Closed Block amounted to $1 million, $2 million and $2 million and is primarily included in policy fees and insurance premiums, net investment income and policy benefits paid or provided for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively.

PL-17



Table of Contents

4.   VARIABLE INTEREST ENTITIES
 
    As discussed in Note 1, the Company has adopted the provisions of FIN 46R, which requires the Company to consolidate certain VIEs for which it is the primary beneficiary. The following table presents, as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, the total assets of and maximum exposure to loss relating to VIEs, which the Company (i) has consolidated because it is the primary beneficiary, and (ii) holds a significant variable interest, but has not consolidated because it is not the primary beneficiary:
                                 
    December 31, 2005  
    Primary Beneficiary     Not Primary Beneficiary  
            Maximum             Maximum  
    Total     Exposure to     Total     Exposure to  
    Assets     Loss     Assets     Loss  
         
    (In Millions)
Asset-backed securities
                  $ 1,067     $ 231  
Collateralized bond obligations
  $ 42     $ 5       94       4  
Asset Management Finance Corp.
                    88       37  
Private equity fund
    46       4                  
 
                   
 
  $ 88     $ 9     $ 1,249     $ 272  
 
                   
                                 
    December 31, 2004  
    Primary Beneficiary     Not Primary Beneficiary  
            Maximum             Maximum  
    Total     Exposure to     Total     Exposure to  
    Assets     Loss     Assets     Loss  
         
    (In Millions)
Asset-backed securities
                  $ 661     $ 169  
Collateralized bond obligations
                    252       14  
Asset Management Finance Corp.
  $ 67     $ 65                  
 
                   
 
  $ 67     $ 65     $ 913     $ 183  
 
                   
    ASSET-BACKED SECURITIES
 
    As part of the Company’s investment strategy, the Company purchases primarily investment grade beneficial interests in asset-backed securities (ABS). These beneficial interests are issued from bankruptcy-remote special purpose entities (SPE), which are collateralized by financial assets including corporate debt. The Company has not guaranteed the performance, liquidity or obligations of the SPEs, and the Company’s maximum exposure to loss is limited to its carrying value of the beneficial interests in the SPEs. The ABS are not consolidated by the Company as the Company has determined that it is not the primary beneficiary of these entities based on the framework provided in FIN 46R.
 
    COLLATERALIZED BOND OBLIGATIONS
 
    The Company is the collateral manager and beneficial interest holder of three CDOs of high yield debt securities. As the collateral manager, the Company earns management fees on the outstanding asset balance, which are recorded in net investment income as earned. The collateral management fees were insignificant for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003. The Company has not guaranteed the performance, liquidity or obligations of the CDOs. The maximum exposure to loss is limited to the carrying amounts of retained interests. Upon adoption of FIN 46R on January 1, 2005 for VIEs created prior to December 31, 2003 (Note 1), the Company determined that it is the primary beneficiary of one CDO that it sponsored in 1998 and it was consolidated into the consolidated financial statements of the Company. Non-recourse debt consolidated from the CDO was $39 million as of December 31, 2005. The

PL-18



Table of Contents

remaining CDOs are not consolidated by the Company as the Company has determined that it is not the primary beneficiary of these entities based on the framework provided in FIN 46R.
ASSET MANAGEMENT FINANCE CORP.
In September 2004, Pacific Life acquired a 49.7% common stock ownership in Asset Management Finance Corporation (AMFC), a financial advisor for investment management firms, for $40 million. In connection with this transaction, Pacific Life has a commitment to fund an additional $20 million in subordinated debt through December 31, 2006. Pacific Life was determined to be the primary beneficiary of this VIE, and AMFC was included in the consolidated financial statements of the Company effective September 2004. In December 2005, a reconsideration event occurred when AMFC issued additional common stock to an outside investor. Pacific Life was no longer considered the primary beneficiary and AMFC was deconsolidated from the Company’s consolidated financial statements effective December 31, 2005. Pacific Life’s common stock ownership was reduced to 43% as of December 31, 2005 and is accounted for under the equity method.
PRIVATE EQUITY FUND
Private equity fund is a limited partnership that was established in July 2005 that is the general partner of two funds that invest in private equity funds for outside investors. The Company provides investment management services to the fund for a fee and receives carried interest based upon the performance of the fund. The Company has not guaranteed the performance, liquidity or obligations of the fund, and the Company’s maximum exposure to loss is equal to the carrying amounts. The Company was determined to be the primary beneficiary of this VIE and it was consolidated into the consolidated financial statements of the Company.
5.   INTEREST IN PIMCO
 
    The Company owns a beneficial economic interest in Pacific Investment Management Company LLC (PIMCO) through Allianz Global Investors of America L.P. (interest in PIMCO). PIMCO offers investment products through managed accounts and institutional, retail and offshore mutual funds. The interest in PIMCO is reported at estimated fair value, as determined by the put and call option price described below, with changes in estimated fair value reported as a component of OCI, net of taxes. As of December 31, 2005, the interest in PIMCO had an estimated fair value of $368 million.
 
    In May 2000, Allianz of America, Inc. (Allianz), a subsidiary of Allianz AG, acquired substantially all interests in PIMCO, other than those beneficially owned by the Company. In connection with this transaction, the interest in PIMCO is subject to a Continuing Investment Agreement (Agreement) with Allianz that provides for put options held by the Company, and call options held by Allianz, respectively. The per unit option amount, as determined by a formula in the Agreement, is subject to a cap and a floor of $600,000 and $500,000 per unit, respectively. The per unit value as of December 31, 2005 and 2004 was $585,044 and $574,004, respectively. The Agreement also limits the increase or decrease in the value of the put and call options to a maximum of 2% per year of the per unit amount, as defined in the Agreement, as of December 31, of the preceding calendar year. In January 2005, the Company and Allianz reached an agreement whereby Allianz agreed to pay an additional $5,373 per unit for all of the Company’s interest in PIMCO. The higher unit price was applied retroactively to all units previously sold and will be applied prospectively to the sale of all remaining units. During the year ended December 31, 2005, the Company recognized a pre-tax gain of $17 million related to this agreement.
 
    During the year ended December 31, 2005, Allianz exercised a call option and bought approximately $250 million of the Company’s interest in PIMCO. The pre-tax investment gain recognized for the year ended December 31, 2005 was $87 million.
 
    During the year ended December 31, 2004, Allianz exercised two call options and bought approximately $500 million of the Company’s interest in PIMCO. The pre-tax investment gain recognized for the year ended December 31, 2004 was $169 million.

PL-19



Table of Contents

    During the year ended December 31, 2003, the Company elected to exercise four put options and sold approximately $1 billion of its interest in PIMCO to Allianz. The pre-tax investment gain recognized for the year ended December 31, 2003 was $327 million.
 
    Distributions are dependent on the performance of PIMCO, and will be subject to certain limitations as defined in the contractual agreements. Distributions, which are included in net investment income, totaled $20 million, $40 million and $89 million for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively.
6.   ACQUISITIONS
 
    The Company’s acquisitions are accounted for under the purchase method of accounting.
 
    In July 2005, a transaction was closed whereby Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (PSD), a wholly owned subsidiary of Pacific Life, increased its common stock ownership in Waterstone Financial Group, Inc., a broker-dealer, from 62% to 100% for a purchase price of $7 million.
 
    In September 2004, a transaction was closed whereby Pacific Life acquired a 49.7% common stock ownership in AMFC. As of December 31, 2005, Pacific Life has a 43% ownership interest and accounts for this investment on the equity method of accounting (Note 4).
 
    Effective April 1, 2004, PSD purchased from Pacific LifeCorp, its wholly owned broker-dealer subsidiary, M.L. Stern & Co., LLC (MLS). As of the transaction date, MLS’s assets and liabilities of $37 million and $25 million, respectively, were included in the consolidated financial statements of the Company. The purchase price of $12 million was based on MLS’s after tax book value. In accordance with SFAS No. 141, Business Combinations, since this transaction is between entities under common control, as the receiving entity, Pacific Life is required to report the consolidated results of operations of MLS as though the transfer of net assets had occurred at the beginning of the period. Accordingly, MLS’s consolidated statement of operations is included in the Company’s consolidated statement of operations for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively, after elimination of intercompany transactions.
 
    Goodwill from acquisitions totaled $51 million and $46 million as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively. There were no goodwill impairment write-downs during the years ended December 31, 2005 and 2004. Goodwill related to the acquisition of a real estate property, acquired through a limited liability company, was considered impaired due to the negative impact of the economy on property performance and written down $5 million during the year ended December 31, 2003.
7.   DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS
 
    On April 27, 2005 (Closing Date), a transaction was closed whereby the Company sold its group insurance segment business to PacifiCare Health Systems, Inc. (PacifiCare). The transaction is structured as a coinsurance arrangement whereby the Company will cede to PacifiCare future premiums received for its existing group insurance segment business and PacifiCare will assume future claim liabilities following the Closing Date. Group insurance segment liabilities arising prior to the Closing Date will not be reinsured. PacifiCare also obtained renewal rights for the existing business as of the Closing Date.

PL-20



Table of Contents

Operating results of discontinued operations, relating to the group insurance segment, were as follows:
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
     
    (In Millions)
Revenues
  $ 221     $ 814     $ 990  
Benefits and expenses
    185       763       948  
 
             
Income from discontinued operations
    36       51       42  
Provision for income taxes
    13       18       14  
 
             
Income from discontinued operations, net of tax
    23       33       28  
 
             
 
                       
Net gain on sale of discontinued operations
    28                  
Provision for income taxes
    10                  
 
             
Net gain on sale of discontinued operations, net of taxes
    18              
 
             
Discontinued operations, net of taxes
  $ 41     $ 33     $ 28  
 
             
Group insurance segment liabilities consist of future policy benefits, such as reserves for group health and group life, of $45 million and $139 million, and other liabilities of $12 million and $42 million as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively. Reserves for group health contracts are based on actual experience and morbidity assumptions. Liabilities for unpaid claims and claim expenses for group health contracts include estimates of claims that have been reported but not settled and estimates of claims incurred but not reported, based on the Company’s historical claims development patterns and other actuarial assumptions. Group life insurance reserves, including premium waivers, are based on various tabular methods and actual loss experience. Disabled life reserves are determined using various tabular reserve methods.
Fixed assets related to discontinued operations of $4 million and $5 million as of the Closing Date and December 31, 2004, respectively, were transferred to PacifiCare and disposed of in connection with the sale.

PL-21



Table of Contents

8.   DEFERRED POLICY ACQUISITION COSTS
 
    Components of DAC are as follows:
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
     
    (In Millions)
Balance, January 1
  $ 3,278     $ 2,817     $ 2,261  
 
             
Additions:
                       
Capitalized during the year
    906       868       821  
 
             
Amortization:
                       
Allocated to commission expenses
    (355 )     (373 )     (210 )
Allocated to operating expenses
    (99 )     (119 )     (53 )
 
             
Total amortization
    (454 )     (492 )     (263 )
 
             
 
                       
Allocated to OCI net unrealized (gains) losses
    57       85       (2 )
 
             
Balance, December 31
  $ 3,787     $ 3,278     $ 2,817  
 
             
    During the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, the Company revised certain assumptions to develop EGPs for its variable annuity and life insurance products subject to DAC amortization. This resulted in increases in DAC amortization expense of $29 million, $25 million and $8 million for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively. The revised EGPs also resulted in increased amortization of unearned revenue (Note 1) of $5 million, $40 million and $6 million for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively.

PL-22



Table of Contents

9.   INVESTMENTS
 
    The net carrying amount, gross unrealized gains and losses, and estimated fair value of fixed maturity and equity securities available for sale are shown below. The net carrying amount represents amortized cost adjusted for other than temporary declines in value and changes in the estimated fair value of fixed maturity securities attributable to the risk designated in a fair value hedge. The estimated fair value of publicly traded securities is based on quoted market prices. For securities not actively traded, fair values were estimated based on amounts provided by independent pricing services specializing in matrix pricing and modeling techniques. The Company also estimates certain fair values based on interest rates, credit quality and average maturity utilizing matrix pricing and other modeling techniques.
                                 
    Net              
    Carrying     Gross Unrealized     Estimated  
    Amount     Gains     Losses     Fair Value  
     
    (In Millions)
                               
U.S. Treasury securities and obligations of U.S. government authorities and agencies
  $ 184     $ 14             $ 198  
Obligations of states and political subdivisions
    1,194       261     $ 4       1,451  
Foreign governments
    407       44       5       446  
Corporate securities
    15,214       729       117       15,826  
Mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities
    7,676       195       111       7,760  
Redeemable preferred stock
    4                       4  
     
Total fixed maturity securities
  $ 24,679     $ 1,243     $ 237     $ 25,685  
     
 
                               
Total equity securities
  $ 386     $ 33     $ 2     $ 417  
     
 
                               
                               
U.S. Treasury securities and obligations of U.S. government authorities and agencies
  $ 255     $ 6     $ 6     $ 255  
Obligations of states and political subdivisions
    1,148       223       6       1,365  
Foreign governments
    445       51       15       481  
Corporate securities
    14,904       1,044       51       15,897  
Mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities
    7,597       279       49       7,827  
Redeemable preferred stock
    21       3               24  
     
Total fixed maturity securities
  $ 24,370     $ 1,606     $ 127     $ 25,849  
     
 
                               
Total equity securities
  $ 321     $ 63             $ 384  
     

PL-23



Table of Contents

    The net carrying amount and estimated fair value of fixed maturity securities available for sale as of December 31, 2005, by contractual repayment date of principal, are shown below. Expected maturities may differ from contractual maturities because borrowers may have the right to call or prepay obligations with or without call or prepayment penalties.
                                 
    Net              
    Carrying     Gross Unrealized     Estimated  
    Amount     Gains     Losses     Fair Value  
     
    (In Millions)
Due in one year or less
  $ 1,573     $ 29     $ 3     $ 1,599  
Due after one year through five years
    6,196       193       56       6,333  
Due after five years through ten years
    4,852       239       42       5,049  
Due after ten years
    4,382       587       25       4,944  
     
 
    17,003       1,048       126       17,925  
 
                               
Mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities
    7,676       195       111       7,760  
     
Total
  $ 24,679     $ 1,243     $ 237     $ 25,685  
     

PL-24



Table of Contents

    The following tables present the number of investments, and the estimated fair value and gross unrealized losses for fixed maturity and other securities, which include equity securities available for sale and other cost method investments, where the estimated fair value has declined and remained below the net carrying amount.
                         
    Total  
                    Gross  
            Estimated     Unrealized  
    Number     Fair Value     Losses  
         
            (In Millions)
                       
Obligations of states and political subdivisions
    20     $ 109       ($4 )
Foreign governments
    1       30       (5 )
Corporate securities
    493       5,201       (117 )
Federal agency mortgage-backed securities
    435       4,384       (111 )
         
Total fixed maturity securities
    949       9,724       (237 )
Total equity securities
    42       141       (13 )
         
Total
    991     $ 9,865       ($250 )
         
                                                 
    Less than 12 Months     12 Months or Greater  
                    Gross                     Gross  
            Estimated     Unrealized             Estimated     Unrealized  
    Number     Fair Value     Losses     Number     Fair Value     Losses  
                 
            (In Millions)
          (In Millions)
                                               
Obligations of states and political subdivisions
    10     $ 41       ($1 )     10     $ 68       ($3 )
Foreign governments
                            1       30       (5 )
Corporate securities
    328       3,788       (66 )     165       1,413       (51 )
Federal agency mortgage-backed securities
    244       2,670       (48 )     191       1,714       (63 )
                 
Total fixed maturity securities
    582       6,499       (115 )     367       3,225       (122 )
Total equity securities
    17       101       (3 )     25       40       (10 )
                 
Total
    599     $ 6,600       ($118 )     392     $ 3,265       ($132 )
                 

PL-25



Table of Contents

                         
    Total  
                    Gross  
            Estimated     Unrealized  
    Number     Fair Value     Losses  
         
            (In Millions)
                       
U.S. Treasury securities and obligations of U.S. government authorities and agencies
    5     $ 144       ($6 )
Obligations of states and political subdivisions
    20       116       (6 )
Foreign governments
    6       44       (15 )
Corporate securities
    251       2,487       (51 )
Federal agency mortgage-backed securities
    260       2,948       (49 )
         
Total fixed maturity securities
    542       5,739       (127 )
Total equity securities
    26       62       (15 )
         
Total
    568     $ 5,801       ($142 )
         
                                                 
    Less than 12 Months     12 Months or Greater  
                    Gross                     Gross  
            Estimated     Unrealized             Estimated     Unrealized  
    Number     Fair Value     Losses     Number     Fair Value     Losses  
                 
            (In Millions)
          (In Millions)
                                               
U.S. Treasury securities and obligations of U.S. government authorities and agencies
                            5     $ 144       ($6 )
Obligations of states and political subdivisions
    9     $ 20       ($1 )     11       96       (5 )
Foreign governments
    4       18       (1 )     2       26       (14 )
Corporate securities
    210       2,095       (30 )     41       392       (21 )
Federal agency mortgage-backed securities
    203       2,692       (28 )     57       256       (21 )
                 
Total fixed maturity securities
    426       4,825       (60 )     116       914       (67 )
Total equity securities
                            26       62       (15 )
                 
Total
    426     $ 4,825       ($60 )     142     $ 976       ($82 )
                 
    As of December 31, 2005, the Company holds no fixed maturity securities with an unrealized loss greater than 20% of their net carrying amount. As of December 31, 2005, the Company held no equity securities with a material unrealized loss.

PL-26



Table of Contents

    Major categories of investment income and related investment expense are summarized as follows:
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
     
    (In Millions)
Fixed maturity securities
  $ 1,396     $ 1,327     $ 1,289  
Equity securities
    20       10       6  
Mortgage loans
    219       233       197  
Real estate
    34       35       29  
Policy loans
    197       187       200  
Other
    157       142       154  
     
Gross investment income
    2,023       1,934       1,875  
Investment expense
    102       96       105  
     
Net investment income
  $ 1,921     $ 1,838     $ 1,770  
     
    Net investment income includes prepayment fees on fixed maturity securities and mortgage loans of $21 million, $62 million and $55 million for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively.
 
    The components of net realized investment gain (loss) are as follows:
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
     
    (In Millions)
Fixed maturity securities:
                       
Gross gains on sales
  $ 43     $ 49     $ 40  
Gross losses on sales
    (64 )     (24 )     (57 )
Other than temporary impairments
    (32 )     (86 )     (135 )
Other
    4       13       2  
     
Total fixed maturity securities
    (49 )     (48 )     (150 )
     
 
                       
Equity securities:
                       
Gross gains on sales
    20       6       7  
Gross losses on sales
            (1 )        
Other than temporary impairments
            (1 )     (4 )
Other
    1       1       1  
     
Total equity securities
    21       5       4  
     
 
                       
Trading securities
    (8 )     8       34  
Real estate
    8       5       (3 )
Mortgage loans
    (2 )     (5 )     (3 )
Derivatives
    63       46       8  
Other investments
    (10 )     (9 )     31  
     
Total
  $ 23     $ 2       ($79 )
     

PL-27



Table of Contents

    The change in unrealized gain (loss) on investments in available for sale and trading securities is as follows:
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
     
    (In Millions)
Available for sale securities:
                       
Fixed maturity
    ($473 )     ($43 )   $ 551  
Equity
    (32 )     38       15  
     
Total
    ($505 )     ($5 )   $ 566  
     

Trading securities

    ($14 )     ($3 )   $ 53  
     
    The cumulative unrealized gain on trading securities held as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, was $4 million and $18 million, respectively.
 
    Fixed maturity securities, which have been non-income producing for the 12 months preceding December 31, 2005 and 2004, totaled $13 million and $17 million, respectively.
 
    As of December 31, 2005 and 2004, fixed maturity securities of $19 million and $14 million, respectively, were on deposit with state insurance departments to satisfy regulatory requirements. The Company had no investments that exceeded 10% of total stockholder’s equity as of December 31, 2005.
 
    Mortgage loans on real estate are collateralized by properties primarily located throughout the U.S. As of December 31, 2005, $890 million, $401 million, $390 million, $236 million and $217 million were located in California, District of Columbia, Texas, Michigan and North Carolina, respectively. As of December 31, 2005, $162 million was located in Canada.
 
    The Company had a mortgage loan general valuation allowance of $26 million as of December 31, 2005 and 2004. During the year ended December 31, 2005, one mortgage loan with a balance of $4 million was foreclosed and transferred to real estate at a value of $2 million. During the year ended December 31, 2004, the Company received a discounted loan payoff that resulted in a direct write-down of $5 million. Additionally during 2004, one mortgage loan with a balance of $6 million was foreclosed and transferred to real estate. This real estate investment was subsequently sold in 2004, resulting in a $1 million gain. During the year ended December 31, 2003, the Company recorded a specific valuation allowance of $3 million on two mortgage loans. This was in addition to a specific valuation allowance of $4 million that had been established on one of the mortgage loans during the year ended December 31, 2002. During 2003, these mortgage loans were foreclosed and transferred to real estate at a value of $28 million.
 
    The Company did not have mortgage loans with accrued interest more than 180 days past due as of December 31, 2005 or 2004.
 
    There were no real estate write-downs during the years ended December 31, 2005 and 2004. During the year ended December 31, 2003, one real estate investment, with a balance of $27 million, was considered impaired and written down by $4 million.
 
10.   DERIVATIVES AND HEDGING ACTIVITIES
 
    The Company primarily utilizes derivative instruments to manage its exposure to interest rate risk, foreign currency risk, credit risk, and equity risk. Derivative instruments are also used to manage the duration mismatch of assets and liabilities. The Company utilizes a variety of derivative instruments, including swaps, foreign exchange forward contracts, caps, floors, options, and exchange traded futures contracts.

PL-28



Table of Contents

    The Company applies hedge accounting by designating derivative instruments as either fair value or cash flow hedges on the date the Company enters into a derivative contract. The Company formally documents all relationships between hedging instruments and hedged items, as well as its risk management objectives and strategy for undertaking various hedge transactions. In this documentation, the Company specifically identifies the asset, liability, firm commitment, or forecasted transaction that has been designated as a hedged item and states how the hedging instrument is expected to hedge the risks related to the hedged item. The Company formally measures effectiveness of its hedging relationships both at the hedge inception and on an ongoing basis in accordance with its risk management policy. Hedge effectiveness is assessed quarterly by a variety of techniques, including Value-at-Risk and regression analysis. In certain circumstances, hedge effectiveness has been established because the derivative instrument was constructed such that all critical terms of the derivative exactly match the hedged risk in the hedged item.
 
    The following table is a reconciliation of the notional amount by derivative type and hedging strategy:
                                 
    December 31,                   December 31,
    2004   Additions   Terminations   2005
     
    (In Millions)
Cash flow hedges:
                               
Foreign currency interest rate swaps
  $ 9,956     $ 2,246     $ 2,165     $ 10,037  
Interest rate swaps
    666       147       218       595  
Forward starting interest rate swap agreements
    825               50       775  
Other
    46               46        
     
 
    11,493       2,393       2,479       11,407  
     
 
                               
Fair value hedges:
                               
Interest rate swaps
    950       224       140       1,034  
Foreign currency interest rate swaps
            96               96  
Credit default swaps
    150       50       200        
Other
    43                       43  
     
 
    1,143       370       340       1,173  
     
 
                               
Derivatives not designated as hedging instruments:
                               
Variable annuity riders
    6,602       5,401       535       11,468  
Synthetic GICs
    5,315       3,170       433       8,052  
Total return swaps
    546       1,321       342       1,525  
Credit default swaps
    225       76       166       135  
Floors and options
    20       375               395  
Other
    268       197       166       299  
     
 
    12,976       10,540       1,642       21,874  
     
Total
  $ 25,612     $ 13,303     $ 4,461     $ 34,454  
     

PL-29



Table of Contents

    The following table is a summary of estimated fair value by derivative type and hedging strategy:
                 
    December 31,  
    2005     2004  
     
    (In Millions)
Cash flow hedges:
               
Foreign currency interest rate swaps
    ($20 )   $ 684  
Interest rate swaps
    (3 )     (6 )
Forward starting interest rate swap agreements
    (20 )     (20 )
     
Total
    ($43 )   $ 658  
     
 
               
Fair value hedges:
               
Interest rate swaps
  $ 13       ($6 )
Foreign currency interest rate swaps
    (7 )        
Credit default swaps
            5  
Other
            1  
     
Total
  $ 6     $ 0  
     
 
               
Derivatives not designated as hedging instruments:
               
Variable annuity riders
  $ 43     $ 42  
Total return swaps
    3       (16 )
Other
    (9 )     (5 )
     
Total
  $ 37     $ 21  
     
    Although the notional amounts of derivatives do not represent amounts that must be paid or received in the future (or in the case of currency swaps represent an obligation to pay one currency and receive another), such amounts do provide an indication of their potential sensitivity to interest rates or currencies, as applicable. The market sensitivity of a derivative would approach that of a cash instrument having a face amount equal to the derivative’s notional amount.
 
    For the derivatives held as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, the majority met the short-cut or critical terms method of assuming no ineffectiveness in the hedging relationship as specified in SFAS No. 133, Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities.
 
    CASH FLOW HEDGES
 
    The Company primarily uses foreign currency interest rate swaps, forward starting interest rate swaps and interest rate swaps to manage its exposure to variability in cash flows due to changes in foreign currencies and the benchmark interest rate. These cash flows include those associated with existing assets and liabilities, as well as the forecasted interest cash flows related to anticipated investment purchases and liability issuances. Such anticipated investment purchases and liability issuances are considered probable to occur and are generally completed within 10 years of the inception of the hedge.
 
    Foreign currency interest rate swap agreements are used to convert a fixed or floating rate, foreign-denominated asset or liability to a U.S. dollar fixed rate asset or liability. The foreign currency interest rate swaps involve the exchange of an initial principal amount in two currencies, and the agreement to re-exchange the currencies at a future date, at an agreed exchange rate. There is also periodic exchange of interest payments in the two currencies at specified intervals, calculated using agreed upon rates and the exchanged principal amounts. The main currencies that the Company hedges are the Euro, British Pound, Swiss Franc, and Canadian Dollar.
 
    Forward starting interest rate swaps and financial futures contracts are used to hedge the variability in the future interest receipts or payments stemming from the anticipated purchase of fixed rate securities or issuance of fixed rate

PL-30



Table of Contents

    liabilities due to changes in benchmark interest rates. These derivatives are predominately used to lock in interest rate levels to match future cash flow characteristics of assets and liabilities. Forward starting interest rate swaps involve the exchange, at specified intervals, of interest payments resulting from the difference between fixed and floating rate interest amounts calculated by reference to an underlying notional amount to begin at a specified date in the future for a specified period of time. Generally, no cash is exchanged at the outset of the contract and no principal payments are made by either party. Financial futures contracts obligate the holder to buy or sell the underlying financial instrument at a specified future date for a set price and may be settled in cash or by delivery of the financial instrument. Price changes on futures are settled daily through the required margin cash flows. The notional amounts of the contracts do not represent future cash requirements, as the Company intends to close out open positions prior to expiration.
    Interest rate swap agreements are used to convert a floating rate asset or liability to a fixed rate to hedge the variability of cash flows of the hedged asset or liability due to changes in benchmark interest rates. These derivatives are predominately used to better match the cash flow characteristics between assets and liabilities. These agreements involve the exchange, at specified intervals, of interest payments resulting from the difference between fixed rate and floating rate interest amounts calculated by reference to an underlying notional amount. Generally, no cash is exchanged at the outset of the contract and no principal payments are made by either party.
 
    The Company has not discontinued any cash flow hedges of anticipated transactions. The Company did not record any ineffectiveness for cash flow hedges during the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003. Over the next 12 months, the Company anticipates that $15 million of deferred gains on derivative instruments in accumulated OCI will be reclassified to earnings. For the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, all of the Company’s hedged forecasted transactions were determined to be probable of occurring. No component of the hedging instrument’s fair value is excluded from the determination of effectiveness.
 
    FAIR VALUE HEDGES
 
    The Company primarily uses interest rate swaps and credit default swaps to manage its exposure to changes in the fair values of its assets and liabilities due to fluctuations in the benchmark interest rate and credit risk.
 
    Interest rate swap agreements are used to convert a fixed rate asset or liability to a floating rate to hedge the changes in fair value of the hedged asset or liability due to changes in benchmark interest rates. These derivatives are used primarily to closely match the duration of the assets supporting specific liabilities.
 
    Credit default swap agreements (buy protection) are used to reduce the exposure to credit risk in underlying securities for changes in the underlying security’s fair value attributable to changes in the obligor’s creditworthiness or changes in the credit sector spread over the benchmark interest rate. These agreements involve the payment of fixed amounts at specific intervals in exchange for the protection from potential credit events associated with the underlying security.
 
    For the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004, and 2003, the ineffectiveness related to fair value hedges was immaterial and was recorded in net realized investment gain (loss). No component of the hedging instrument’s fair value is excluded from the determination of effectiveness.
 
    DERIVATIVES NOT DESIGNATED AS HEDGING INSTRUMENTS
 
    The Company issues certain insurance and reinsurance contracts that are considered to have embedded derivatives. When it is determined that the embedded derivative possesses economic and risk characteristics that are not clearly and closely related to those of the host contract and that a separate instrument with the same terms would qualify as a derivative instrument, it is separated from the host contract and accounted for as a stand-alone derivative.
 
    The Company offers a rider on certain variable annuity contracts that guarantees net principal over a ten year holding period, as well as riders on certain variable annuity contracts that guarantee a minimum withdrawal benefit over a 14-year, 20-year, or lifetime period, subject to certain restrictions. In addition, the Company offers an equity indexed universal life product. These embedded derivatives are recorded on the consolidated statements of financial condition in future policy benefits at estimated fair value, with changes in their estimated fair value recorded in net realized investment gain (loss).

PL-31



Table of Contents

    The Company issues synthetic GICs to Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (ERISA) qualified defined contribution employee benefit plans (ERISA Plan). The ERISA Plan uses the contracts in its stable value or guaranteed fixed income option. The Company does not manage the assets underlying synthetic GICs and is not subject to the investment risk. The Company receives a fee for providing liquidity to the benefit plan sponsor in the event that qualified plan benefit requests exceed plan cash flows. To mitigate this off balance sheet risk, the Company pre-approves all investment guidelines. The Company had outstanding commitments to maintain liquidity for benefit payments on notional amounts of $8.1 billion and $5.3 billion as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively.
 
    The Company also enters into total return swaps, credit default swaps and interest rate swaps without designating the derivatives as hedging instruments. Derivatives that are not designated as hedging instruments are entered into primarily to manage the Company’s equity risk, interest rate risk, credit risk, and for yield enhancement.
 
    Put options/total return swaps are primarily used to economically hedge the changes in fair value due to equity risk associated with the variable annuity riders. These agreements generally involve the exchange of a fixed rate payment for the return of a specified index below a strike price. Generally, no cash is exchanged at the outset of the contract and neither party makes principal payments.
 
    Credit default swaps (sell protection), in combination with fixed maturity securities, are used to replicate the investment characteristics of another investment or instrument that may operate as a substitute for a cash market investment and increase the exposure to credit risk in underlying securities. The Company also enters into credit default swaps (buy protection) to economically reduce the exposure to credit risk in underlying securities for changes in the underlying security’s fair value attributable to changes in the obligor’s creditworthiness without applying hedge accounting. These agreements involve the payment of fixed amounts at specific intervals in exchange for the protection from potential credit events associated with the underlying security.
 
    Net realized investment gains (losses) for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003 include $10 million, ($17) million and $24 million, respectively, related to realized gains and losses, changes in estimated fair value, and periodic net settlements of derivative instruments not designated as hedges.
 
    CREDIT EXPOSURE
 
    In accordance with legally enforceable counterparty master agreements, credit exposure is measured on a counterparty basis as the net positive aggregate estimated fair value net of any collateral received. The Company attempts to limit its credit exposure by dealing with creditworthy counterparties, establishing risk control limits, executing legally enforceable master netting agreements, and obtaining collateral where appropriate. As of December 31, 2005, the Company received collateral of $130 million and pledged collateral of $19 million to other counterparties. In addition, each counterparty is extensively reviewed to evaluate its financial stability before entering into each agreement and throughout the period that the financial instrument is owned. All of the credit exposure for the Company from derivative contracts is with investment grade counterparties. The Company has not incurred any losses on derivative financial instruments due to counterparty nonperformance.
 
    Because exchange traded futures and options are transacted through a regulated exchange, and positions are marked to market and settled on a daily basis, the Company has little exposure to credit related losses in the event of nonperformance by counterparties to such financial instruments. The Company is required to pledge collateral for any futures contracts that are entered into. The amount of collateral that is required is determined by the exchange on which it is traded. The Company currently pledges cash and U.S. Treasury Bills to satisfy this collateral requirement.

PL-32



Table of Contents

    The following table summarizes the notional and credit exposure for all derivatives for which the Company has credit exposure to a counterparty:
                 
    December 31, 2005  
    Notional     Credit  
    Amount     Exposure  
     
    (In Millions)
AA
  $ 2,621     $ 48  
A
    891       1  
     
Total
  $ 3,512     $ 49  
     
11.   POLICYHOLDER LIABILITIES
    POLICYHOLDER ACCOUNT BALANCES
    The detail of the liability for policyholder account balances is as follows:
                 
    December 31,  
    2005     2004  
     
    (In Millions)
Universal life
  $ 16,376     $ 15,415  
Funding agreements
    7,276       7,722  
Fixed account liabilities
    4,927       5,110  
GICs
    1,564       1,405  
     
Total
  $ 30,143     $ 29,652  
     
    FUTURE POLICY BENEFITS
    The detail of the liability for future policy benefits is as follows:
                 
    December 31,  
    2005     2004  
     
    (In Millions)
Annuity reserves
  $ 3,881     $ 3,814  
Unearned revenue reserve
    594       502  
Closed block liabilities
    311       312  
Policy benefits payable
    161       165  
Life insurance
    134       100  
Other
    17       17  
     
Total
  $ 5,098     $ 4,910  
     

PL-33



Table of Contents

12.   DEBT
 
    SHORT-TERM DEBT
 
    Pacific Life maintains a $700 million commercial paper program. There was no commercial paper debt outstanding as of December 31, 2005 and 2004. In addition, Pacific Life has a bank revolving credit facility of $400 million, for which there was no debt outstanding as of December 31, 2005 and 2004. The credit facility matures in 2012. As of December 31, 2005, as well as during the year, Pacific Life was in compliance with the debt covenants related to this facility.
 
    Pacific Life is a member of the Federal Home Loan Bank of San Francisco (FHLB), which enables Pacific Life to borrow from the FHLB amounts that are based on a percentage of statutory capital and surplus. During 2005, Pacific Life could have borrowed amounts up to $788 million. Of this amount, half, or $394 million, could have been borrowed for terms other than overnight, out to a maximum term of nine months. These borrowings are at variable rates of interest, collateralized by certain mortgage loan and government securities. There were no borrowings outstanding with the FHLB as of December 31, 2005 and 2004.
 
    MLS has a broker lending agreement with a bank for a $25 million line of credit, of which $15 million and $16 million were outstanding for the years ended December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively. The loan bears interest at the Federal funds rate plus a spread; such rates reset daily and were 5.1% and 3.2% as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively. The lending agreement has no specified maturity.
 
    Included in short-term debt is $2 million of VIE debt (Note 4).
 
    LONG-TERM DEBT
 
    Pacific Life has $150 million of surplus notes outstanding at an interest rate of 7.9% maturing on December 30, 2023. Interest is payable semiannually on June 30 and December 30. The surplus notes may not be redeemed at the option of Pacific Life or any holder of the surplus notes. The surplus notes are unsecured and subordinated to all present and future senior indebtedness and policy claims of Pacific Life. Prior to the Redomestication, each payment of interest and principal on the surplus notes could be made only with the prior approval of the Insurance Commissioner of the State of California. As a result of the Redomestication, the December 30, 2005 payment and all future payments of interest and principal on the surplus notes can be made only with the prior approval of the Director of Insurance of the State of Nebraska. Interest expense amounted to $8 million and $9 million for the years ended December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively.
 
    Pacific Life entered into interest rate swaps converting the fixed interest rate surplus notes to variable rate notes based upon the London Interbank Offered Rate. As a result, interest expense on the surplus notes was reduced by earnings from the interest rate swaps of $4 million and $3 million, for the years ended December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively. In accordance with SFAS No. 133, the interest rate swaps were designated as fair value hedges of the surplus notes, and hedge effectiveness has been established because the interest rate swaps were constructed such that all critical terms of the interest rate swaps exactly match the surplus notes. The SFAS No. 133 fair value adjustment, which increased long-term debt by $10 million as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, represents the cumulative change in the estimated fair value of the interest rate swaps. An offsetting fair value adjustment has also been recorded for the interest rate swap derivative instruments.

PL-34



Table of Contents

13.   FAIR VALUE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
 
    The carrying amount and estimated fair value of the Company’s financial instruments are as follows:
                                 
    December 31, 2005     December 31, 2004  
    Carrying     Estimated     Carrying     Estimated  
    Amount     Fair Value     Amount     Fair Value  
     
    (In Millions)
Assets:
                               
Fixed maturity and equity securities (Note 9)
  $ 26,102     $ 26,102     $ 26,233     $ 26,233  
Trading securities
    72       72       226       226  
Mortgage loans
    3,925       4,109       3,286       3,483  
Policy loans
    5,904       5,904       5,629       5,629  
Interest in PIMCO (Note 5)
    368       368       606       606  
Other invested assets
    101       115       114       114  
Derivative instruments
    160       160       758       758  
Cash and cash equivalents
    672       672       836       836  
Liabilities:
                               
Funding agreements and GICs
    8,840       8,913       9,127       9,156  
Fixed account liabilities
    4,927       4,927       5,110       5,108  
Short-term debt
    17       17       16       16  
Long-term debt
    160       193       160       183  
VIE debt
    39       39                  
Derivative instruments
    160       160       79       79  
    The following methods and assumptions were used to estimate the fair value of these financial instruments as of December 31, 2005 and 2004:
 
    TRADING SECURITIES
 
    The estimated fair value of trading securities is based on quoted market prices.
 
    MORTGAGE LOANS
 
    The estimated fair value of the mortgage loan portfolio is determined by discounting the estimated future cash flows, using a market rate that is applicable to the yield, credit quality and average maturity of the composite portfolio.
 
    POLICY LOANS
 
    The carrying amounts of policy loans are a reasonable estimate of their fair values because interest rates are generally variable and based on current market rates.
 
    OTHER INVESTED ASSETS
 
    The estimated fair value of the other invested assets is based on the ownership percentage of the underlying equity of the private equity investment.

PL-35



Table of Contents

    DERIVATIVE INSTRUMENTS
 
    Derivative instruments are reported at estimated fair value based on market quotations or internally established valuations consistent with external valuation models.
 
    CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS
 
    The carrying values approximate fair values due to the short-term maturities of these instruments.
 
    FUNDING AGREEMENTS AND GICs
 
    The fair value of funding agreements and GICs is estimated using the rates currently offered for deposits of similar remaining maturities.
 
    FIXED ACCOUNT LIABILITIES
 
    Fixed account liabilities include annuity and deposit liabilities. The estimated fair value of annuity liabilities approximates carrying value and primarily includes policyholder deposits and accumulated credited interest. The estimated fair value of deposit liabilities with no defined maturities is the amount payable on demand.
 
    SHORT-TERM DEBT
 
    The carrying amount of short-term debt is a reasonable estimate of its fair value because the interest rates are variable and based on current market rates.
 
    LONG-TERM DEBT
 
    The estimated fair value of long-term debt is based on market quotes.
 
    VARIABLE INTEREST ENTITY DEBT
 
    The carrying amount of the VIE debt is a reasonable estimate of its fair value because the interest rate approximates current market rates.

PL-36



Table of Contents

14.   COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
 
    The Company displays comprehensive income and its components on the accompanying consolidated statements of stockholder’s equity. OCI is shown net of reclassification adjustments and net of deferred income taxes. The disclosure of the gross components of OCI and related taxes is as follows:
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
     
    (In Millions)
Gross holding gain (loss):
                       
Holding gain (loss) on securities available for sale
    ($529 )     ($46 )   $ 417  
Holding gain on derivatives
    125       68       56  
Income tax (expense) benefit
    140       (8 )     (167 )
Reclassification adjustment:
                       
Realized loss on sale of securities available for sale
    28       43       159  
Realized (gain) loss on derivatives
    (10 )     (8 )     8  
Income tax benefit
    (5 )     (12 )     (59 )
Net unrealized gain (loss) on discontinued operations, net of tax
    (2 )     (3 )     2  
Allocation of holding (gain) loss to DAC
    56       85       (2 )
Allocation of holding (gain) loss to future policy benefits
    (16 )     (24 )     21  
Income tax expense
    (14 )     (21 )     (7 )
     
Net unrealized gain (loss) on securities available for sale
    (227 )     74       428  
     
 
                       
Holding gain on interest in PIMCO
    28       16       33  
Income tax on holding gain
    (10 )     (7 )     (9 )
Reclassification of realized gain on sale of interest in PIMCO
    (103 )     (169 )     (327 )
Income tax on realized gain
    36       59       123  
     
Net unrealized loss on interest in PIMCO
    (49 )     (101 )     (180 )
Minimum pension liability and other adjustments
    3       (5 )     41  
     
Total
    ($273 )     ($32 )   $ 289  
     

PL-37



Table of Contents

15.   REINSURANCE
 
    The Company has reinsurance agreements with other insurance companies for the purpose of diversifying risk and limiting exposure on larger mortality risks or, in the case of a producer-owned reinsurance company, to diversify risk and retain top producing agents. Amounts receivable from reinsurers for reinsurance of future policy benefits, universal life deposits, and unpaid losses are included in other assets. All assets associated with business reinsured on a yearly renewable term and modified coinsurance basis remain with, and under the control of, the Company.
 
    Certain no lapse guarantee rider benefits of Pacific Life’s UL insurance products are subject to Actuarial Guideline 38 (AG 38) statutory reserving requirements. U.S. GAAP benefit reserves for such riders are based on SOP 03-1 and are not subject to AG 38. In October 2005, the NAIC adopted revisions to AG 38 resulting in additional statutory reserves on UL products with no lapse guarantee riders issued after June 30, 2005. The additional statutory reserves totaled $20 million as of December 31, 2005. Corresponding U.S. GAAP benefit reserves were $1 million as of December 31, 2005.
 
    Both the AG 38 and U.S. GAAP no lapse guarantee rider benefit reserves were coinsured with Pacific Alliance Reinsurance Ltd. (PAR), a Bermuda-based life reinsurance company 100% owned by Pacific LifeCorp, with reserve credits taken by Pacific Life. PAR is licensed as a long-term reinsurer in accordance with Bermuda insurance laws and regulations and was formed in 2005 to provide reinsurance exclusively to Pacific Life for no lapse guarantee benefits where no coverage was available in the commercial reinsurance market. Deposits to a trust account with Pacific Life as beneficiary and an irrevocable letter of credit of $30 million from a commercial bank, in which Pacific LifeCorp is the co-applicant with PAR, provided security for statutory reserve credits taken by Pacific Life. The reinsurance contract meets the requirements of risk transfer indicated in SFAS No. 113, Accounting and Reporting for Reinsurance of Short-Duration and Long-Duration Contracts, and qualifies for reinsurance accounting.
 
    Amounts recoverable (payable) from (to) reinsurers include the following amounts:
                 
    December 31,  
    2005     2004  
     
    (In Millions)
Universal life deposits
    ($100 )     ($106 )
Future policy benefits
    164       166  
Premiums due
    (57 )     (54 )
Paid claims
    38       45  
Unpaid claims
    10       16  
Other
    25       13  
    As of December 31, 2005, 76% of the reinsurance recoverables were from two reinsurers, of which 100% is secured by payables to the reinsurers. To the extent that the assuming companies become unable to meet their obligations under these agreements, the Company remains contingently liable. The Company does not anticipate nonperformance by the assuming companies. The components of insurance premiums are as follows:
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
     
    (In Millions)
Direct premiums
  $ 210     $ 239     $ 298  
Ceded reinsurance
    (206 )     (178 )     (155 )
Assumed reinsurance
    51       43       34  
     
Insurance premiums
  $ 55     $ 104     $ 177  
     

PL-38



Table of Contents

    Revenues and benefits are shown net of the following reinsurance transactions:
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
     
    (In Millions)
Ceded reinsurance netted against policy fees
  $ 101     $ 108     $ 103  
Ceded reinsurance netted against net investment income
    272       270       283  
Ceded reinsurance netted against interest credited
    211       200       217  
Ceded reinsurance netted against policy benefits
    173       145       139  
Assumed reinsurance included in policy benefits
    16       10       15  
16.   EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLANS
 
    PENSION PLANS
 
    Pacific Life provides a defined benefit pension plan covering all eligible employees of the Company. Certain subsidiaries do not participate in this plan. On July 1, 2000, Pacific Life converted this final average pay formula defined benefit plan to a cash balance approach. Active employees’ existing benefits in this plan were converted to opening balances and will increase over time from credits, based on years of service and compensation levels, and quarterly interest accruals. The full-benefit vesting period for all participants is five years. Pacific Life’s funding policy is to contribute amounts to the plan sufficient to meet the minimum funding requirements set forth in ERISA, plus such additional amounts as may be determined appropriate. Contributions are intended to provide not only for benefits attributed to employment to date but also for those expected to be earned in the future. All such contributions are made to a tax-exempt trust. Plan assets consist primarily of group annuity contracts issued by Pacific Life, as well as mutual funds managed by PIMCO.
 
    In addition, Pacific Life maintains supplemental employee retirement plans (SERPs) for certain eligible employees. As of December 31, 2005 and 2004, the projected benefit obligation was $35 million and $94 million, respectively. The fair value of plan assets as of December 31, 2005 and 2004 was zero. The net periodic benefit cost of the SERPs was $26 million, $9 million and $8 million for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively. New provisions of the Internal Revenue Code allowed vested participants of certain non-qualified plans to terminate participation in 2005. Accordingly, $77 million was distributed to participants electing to terminate their participation in the SERP, which resulted in a settlement expense of $16 million for the year ended December 31, 2005.
 
    In connection with the sale of the group insurance segment business to PacifiCare (Note 7), and the resulting termination of a large group of the Company’s employees, the Company incurred $8 million in curtailment, settlement and special termination costs for the year ended December 31, 2005, which are included in discontinued operations.
 
    Components of the net periodic pension expense are as follows:
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
     
    (In Millions)
Service cost — benefits earned during the year
  $ 8     $ 18     $ 16  
Interest cost on projected benefit obligation
    18       18       18  
Expected return on plan assets
    (18 )     (18 )     (13 )
Curtailment, settlement and special termination costs
    24                  
Amortization of net obligations and prior service cost
    6       4       4  
     
Net periodic pension expense
  $ 38     $ 22     $ 25  
     

PL-39



Table of Contents

    The following tables set forth the changes in benefit obligation, plan assets and funded status reconciliation:
                 
    December 31,  
    2005     2004  
     
    (In Millions)
Change in benefit obligation:
               
Benefit obligation, beginning of year
  $ 345     $ 315  
Service cost
    8       18  
Interest cost
    18       18  
Transfer of liabilities and plan amendments
            (1 )
Actuarial loss
    21       15  
Curtailment and settlement losses
    9          
Benefits paid
    (111 )     (20 )
     
Benefit obligation, end of year
  $ 290     $ 345  
     
 
               
Change in plan assets:
               
Fair value of plan assets, beginning of year
  $ 267     $ 242  
Actual return on plan assets
    14       26  
Employer contributions
    90       19  
Benefits paid
    (111 )     (20 )
     
Fair value of plan assets, end of year
  $ 260     $ 267  
     

Funded status reconciliation:

               
Funded status
    ($30 )     ($78 )
Unrecognized transition obligation
    3       3  
Unrecognized prior service cost
    2       3  
Unrecognized actuarial loss
    63       60  
     
Net amount recognized
  $ 38       ($12 )
     

PL-40



Table of Contents

                 
    December 31,  
    2005     2004  
     
    (In Millions)
Amounts recognized in the consolidated statement of financial condition consist of:
               
Prepaid benefit cost
  $ 63     $ 65  
Accrued benefit liability
    (37 )     (95 )
Intangible asset
    5       6  
Accumulated other comprehensive income
    7       12  
     
Net amount recognized
  $ 38       ($12 )
     
Other comprehensive (income) loss attributable to change in additional minimum pension liability
    ($5 )   $ 3  
     
                 
    December 31,  
    2005     2004  
     
Weighted-average assumptions used to determine benefit obligations:
               
Discount rate
    5.50 %     5.75 %
Rate of compensation increase
    4.50 %     4.00 %
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003
     
Weighted-average assumptions used to determine net periodic benefit costs:
                       
Discount Rate
    5.75 %     6.00 %     6.75 %  
Expected long-term return on plan assets
    8.00 %     8.00 %     8.00 %  
Rate of compensation increase
    4.00 %     4.00 %     4.00 %  
    In developing the expected long-term rate of return on plan assets, the Company considers many factors. These factors consist of a review of historical returns and the future expectations for returns for each asset class, as well as the target asset allocation of the plan’s portfolio. The Company also considers current market conditions, as well as the views of financial advisers and economists.
 
    Benefit payments for the year ended December 31, 2005 amounted to $111 million. Pacific Life expects to contribute $8 million to the plans in 2006. The expected benefit payments are as follows (In Millions):
         
Years Ending December 31:          
2006
  $ 21  
2007
    21  
2008
    21  
2009
    22  
2010
    22  
2011-2015
    102  

PL-41



Table of Contents

    The Company’s pension plan’s weighted-average asset allocations by asset category are as follows:
                 
    December 31,  
    2005     2004  
     
Asset category:
               
Equity-type investments
    63 %     63 %
Fixed income investments
    33 %     32 %
Other
    4 %     5 %
     
Total
    100 %     100 %
     
    It is intended that the defined benefit pension plan assets be invested in equity-type and fixed income investments, as long as the investments are consistent with the assumption that more than average risk and appropriate overall diversification is maintained and liquidity is sufficient to meet cash flow requirements. The targeted portfolio allocation is 70-80% equity-type and 20-30% fixed income investments. The defined benefit pension plan establishes and maintains a fundamental and long-term orientation in the determination of asset mix and selection of investment funds. This tolerance for more than average risk and long-term orientation provides the basis for a larger allocation to equities with some additional bias to higher risk investments for higher return.
 
    POSTRETIREMENT BENEFITS
 
    Pacific Life provides a defined benefit health care plan and a defined benefit life insurance plan (the Plans) that provide postretirement benefits for all eligible retirees and their dependents. Generally, qualified employees may become eligible for these benefits if they reach normal retirement age, have been covered under Pacific Life’s policy as an active employee for a minimum continuous period prior to the date retired, and have an employment date before January 1, 1990. The Plans contain cost-sharing features such as deductibles and coinsurance, and require retirees to make contributions, which can be adjusted annually. Pacific Life’s commitment to qualified employees who retire after April 1, 1994 is limited to specific dollar amounts. Pacific Life reserves the right to modify or terminate the Plans at any time. As in the past, the general policy is to fund these benefits on a pay-as-you-go basis.
 
    The net periodic postretirement benefit cost for each of the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003 was $1 million. As of December 31, 2005 and 2004, the accumulated benefit obligation was $22 million and $21 million, respectively. The actuarial gain due to the Medicare subsidy was $2 million as of December 31, 2005 and 2004. The fair value of the plan assets as of December 31, 2005 and 2004 was zero. The amount of accrued benefit cost included in other liabilities was $21 million and $22 million as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively.
 
    The discount rate used in determining the accumulated postretirement benefit obligation was 5.50% and 5.75% for 2005 and 2004, respectively.
 
    Benefit payments for the year ended December 31, 2005 amounted to $3 million, which included $1 million of participant contributions. The expected benefit payments are as follows (In Millions):
         
Years Ending December 31:          
2006
  $ 3  
2007
    3  
2008
    3  
2009
    3  
2010
    3  
2011-2015
    11  

PL-42



Table of Contents

    OTHER PLANS
 
    Pacific Life provides a voluntary Retirement Incentive Savings Plan (RISP) pursuant to Section 401(k) of the Internal Revenue Code covering all eligible employees of Pacific LifeCorp and certain of its subsidiaries. Pacific Life’s RISP matches 75% of each employee’s contributions, up to a maximum of 6% of eligible employee compensation, to an Employee Stock Ownership Plan (ESOP). ESOP contributions made by the Company amounted to $10 million, $11 million and $11 million for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively, and are included in operating expenses.
 
    Effective January 1, 2005, certain employees began receiving employer cash contributions into a new RISP account in lieu of future contribution credits into their defined benefit pension plan, which resulted in a contribution expense of $9 million for the year ended December 31, 2005.
 
    The ESOP was formed at the time of the Conversion and is only available to the participants of the RISP in the form of matching contributions. On January 9, 2002, Pacific Life loaned cash of $46 million to the ESOP in exchange for a 5.5% promissory note due January 9, 2017. The ESOP then purchased 2 million shares of newly issued common stock of Pacific LifeCorp at a price of $23.00 per share in exchange for cash. These newly issued shares were purchased in order for the ESOP to maintain its matching contributions to participants in the plan. Interest and principal payments made by the ESOP to Pacific Life are funded by contributions from Pacific Life.
 
    Amounts loaned to the ESOP by Pacific Life are included in unearned ESOP shares. The unearned ESOP shares account is reduced as ESOP shares are released for allocation to participants through ESOP contributions by Pacific Life. In addition, when the fair value of ESOP shares being released for allocation to participants is different from the original issue price of those shares, the difference is recorded in paid-in capital.
 
    The Company has deferred compensation plans that permit eligible employees to defer portions of their compensation and earn interest on the deferred amounts. The interest rate is determined annually. The compensation that has been deferred has been accrued and the primary expense related to this plan, other than compensation, is interest on the deferred amounts. The Company also has performance-based incentive compensation plans for its employees.
 
17.   INCOME TAXES
 
    The provision for income taxes (benefit) is as follows:
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
     
    (In Millions)
Current
  $ 38     $ 185     $ 172  
Deferred
    63       (43 )     (23 )
     
Provision for income taxes from continuing operations
    101       142       149  
Provision for income taxes on discontinued operations
    23       18       14  
Deferred income tax provision on cumulative adjustment due to change in accounting principle
            (11 )        
     
Total
  $ 124     $ 149     $ 163  
     

PL-43



Table of Contents

     The sources of the Company’s provision for deferred taxes are as follows:
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
     
    (In Millions)
DAC
  $ 97     $ 78     $ 125  
Hedging
    19       40       (13 )
Investment valuation
    16       48       42  
Partnership income
    2       34       19  
Low income housing tax credit carryover
                    74  
Policyholder reserves
    (21 )     (61 )     (113 )
Interest in PIMCO
    (57 )     (203 )     (147 )
Other
    11       15       (13 )
     
Provision for deferred taxes
    67       (49 )     (26 )
Deferred taxes from discontinued operations
    (4 )     (5 )     3  
Deferred taxes on cumulative adjustment due to change in accounting principle
            11          
     
Provision for deferred taxes from continuing operations
  $ 63       ($43 )     ($23 )
     
    A reconciliation of the provision for income taxes from continuing operations based on the prevailing corporate statutory tax rate to the provision reflected in the consolidated financial statements is as follows:
                         
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  
     
    (In Millions)
Provision for income taxes at the statutory rate
  $ 211     $ 241     $ 195  
Nontaxable investment income
    (27 )     (25 )     (16 )
Low income housing and foreign tax credits
    (33 )     (32 )     (30 )
Amounts related to prior periods
    (51 )     (42 )     (10 )
Other
    1               10  
     
Provision for income taxes from continuing operations
  $ 101     $ 142     $ 149  
     
    The Company is under continuous audit by the Internal Revenue Service (IRS). The IRS has audited the Company’s consolidated federal income tax returns through the tax year ended December 31, 2001 and is currently auditing tax years ended December 31, 2002 and 2003. The Company is pursuing administrative appeals of many of the adjustments proposed by the IRS auditors and does not expect the results of the IRS audit activity to have a material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated financial position or results of operations. Included in amounts related to prior years in the reconciliation of the provision for income taxes from continuing operations for the year ended December 31, 2005, is $36 million of tax benefits related to settlements with the IRS for various years prior to 2005. The benefits relate primarily to the separate account dividends received deduction and related interest.

PL-44



Table of Contents

    The net deferred tax liability, included in other liabilities as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, is comprised of the following tax effected temporary differences:
                 
    December 31,  
    2005     2004  
     
    (In Millions)
Deferred tax assets:
               
Policyholder reserves
  $ 401     $ 380  
Investment valuation
    62       78  
Deferred compensation
    45       36  
Interest in PIMCO
    20       (37 )
Dividends to policyholders
    7       5  
Other
    9       4  
     
Total deferred tax assets
    544       466  
     

               
Deferred tax liabilities:
               
DAC
    (619 )     (522 )
Hedging
    (62 )     (43 )
Partnership income
    (59 )     (57 )
Depreciation
    (15 )     (18 )
Retirement benefits
    (11 )     19  
     
Total deferred tax liabilities
    (766 )     (621 )
     

               
Net deferred tax liability from operations
    (222 )     (155 )
Unrealized gain on derivatives and securities available for sale
    (368 )     (489 )
Unrealized gain on interest in PIMCO
    (51 )     (77 )
Minimum pension liability and other adjustments
    3       4  
     
Net deferred tax liability
    ($638 )     ($717 )
     

PL-45



Table of Contents

18.   SEGMENT INFORMATION
 
    The Company has four operating segments: Life Insurance, Investment Management, Annuities & Mutual Funds, and Broker-Dealers. These segments are managed separately and have been identified based on differences in products and services offered. All other activity is included in Corporate and Other.
 
    The Life Insurance segment offers universal life, variable universal life and other life insurance products to individuals, small businesses and corporations through a network of distribution channels that include regional life offices, sales centers, marketing organizations, wirehouse broker-dealer firms and a national producer group that has produced over 10% of the segment’s in force business.
 
    The Investment Management segment offers investment and annuity products to pension fund sponsors and other institutional investors primarily through its home office marketing team and other intermediaries. This segment’s name was changed from Institutional Products during the year ended December 31, 2005.
 
    The Annuities & Mutual Funds segment offers variable annuities, fixed annuities and mutual funds to individuals and small businesses through National Association of Securities Dealers (NASD) firms, regional and national wirehouses, and financial institutions.
 
    The Broker-Dealers segment includes NASD registered firms that provide securities and insurance brokerage services and investment advisory services. PSD primarily serves as the underwriter/distributor of registered investment-related products and services, principally variable life and variable annuity contracts issued by the Company.
 
    Corporate and Other primarily includes investment income, expenses and assets not attributable to the operating segments, and the operations of certain subsidiaries that do not qualify as operating segments. Corporate and Other also includes the interest in PIMCO and the elimination of intersegment revenues, expenses and assets, including commission revenue and expense from the sale of the Company’s variable life and annuity products. The group insurance segment is included in Corporate and Other as discontinued operations (Note 7).
 
    The Company uses the same accounting policies and procedures to measure segment net income and assets as it uses to measure its consolidated net income and assets. Net investment income and net realized investment gain (loss) are allocated based on invested assets purchased and held as is required for transacting the business of that segment. Overhead expenses are allocated based on services provided. Interest expense is allocated based on the short-term borrowing needs of the segment and is included in net investment income. The provision for income taxes is allocated based on each segment’s actual tax provision.
 
    The operating segments are allocated equity based on formulas determined by management and receive a fixed interest rate return on interdivision debentures supporting the allocated equity. The debenture amount is reflected as investment expense in net investment income in the Corporate and Other segment and as investment income in the operating segments.
 
    The Company derives substantially all of its revenues and net income from customers located in the U.S. As of December 31, 2005 and 2004, the Company had foreign investments of $6.1 billion and $5.9 billion, respectively.

PL-46



Table of Contents

    The following is segment information as of and for the year ended December 31, 2005:
                                                 
                    Annuities                    
    Life     Investment     & Mutual     Broker-     Corporate        
    Insurance     Management     Funds     Dealers     and Other     Total  
 
REVENUES   (In Millions)
Policy fees and insurance premiums
  $ 708     $ 168     $ 485                     $ 1,361  
Net investment income
    752       828       225     $ 4     $ 112       1,921  
Net realized investment gain (loss)
    (14 )     7       26               4       23  
Realized investment gain on interest in PIMCO
                                    104       104  
Commission revenue
                    5       858       (589 )     274  
Investment advisory fees
    28               220       68       1       317  
Other income
    1       10       3       23       1       38  
     
Total revenues
    1,475       1,013       964       953       (367 )     4,038  
     
 
                                               
BENEFITS AND EXPENSES
                                               
Interest credited
    577       455       166                       1,198  
Policy benefits
    275       415       16                       706  
Commission expenses
    181       7       342       791       (589 )     732  
Operating expenses
    236       26       247       162       127       798  
     
Total benefits and expenses
    1,269       903       771       953       (462 )     3,434  
     
 
                                               
Income from continuing operations before provision for income taxes
    206       110       193             95       604  
Provision for income taxes
    44       25       13               19       101  
     
 
                                               
Income from continuing operations
    162       85       180             76       503  
Discontinued operations, net of taxes
                                    41       41  
Cumulative adjustment due to change in accounting principle
                                    (2 )     (2 )
     
Net income
  $ 162     $ 85     $ 180     $ 0     $ 115     $ 542  
     
 
                                               
Total assets
  $ 24,673     $ 14,938     $ 39,550     $ 195     $ 1,814     $ 81,170  
DAC
    1,524       75       2,188                       3,787  
Separate account assets
    5,028       151       32,761                       37,940  
Policyholder and contract liabilities
    17,760       12,836       4,645                       35,241  
Separate account liabilities
    5,028       151       32,761                       37,940  

PL-47



Table of Contents

     The following is segment information as of and for the year ended December 31, 2004:
                                                 
                    Annuities                    
    Life     Investment     & Mutual     Broker-     Corporate        
    Insurance     Management     Funds     Dealers     and Other     Total  
 
REVENUES   (In Millions)
Policy fees and insurance premiums
  $ 776     $ 198     $ 393                     $ 1,367  
Net investment income
    730       821       224     $ 2     $ 61       1,838  
Net realized investment gain (loss)
    (11 )     (25 )     51               (13 )     2  
Realized investment gain on interest in PIMCO
                                    169       169  
Commission revenue
                    4       806       (540 )     270  
Investment advisory fees
    25               177       46               248  
Other income
            4       1       20       1       26  
     
Total revenues
    1,520       998       850       874       (322 )     3,920  
     
 
                                               
BENEFITS AND EXPENSES
                                               
Interest credited
    539       425       161                       1,125  
Policy benefits
    256       438       21                       715  
Commission expenses
    253       4       262       742       (540 )     721  
Operating expenses
    250       28       190       130       72       670  
     
Total benefits and expenses
    1,298       895       634       872       (468 )     3,231  
     
 
                                               
Income from continuing operations before provision for income taxes
    222       103       216       2       146       689  
Provision for income taxes
    54       17       27       1       43       142  
     
Income from continuing operations
    168       86       189       1       103       547  
Discontinued operations, net of taxes
                                    33       33  
Cumulative adjustment due to change in accounting principle
    2               (21 )                     (19 )
     
Net income
  $ 170     $ 86     $ 168     $ 1     $ 136     $ 561  
     
 
                                               
Total assets
  $ 23,561     $ 15,665     $ 33,616     $ 176     $ 1,607     $ 74,625  
DAC
    1,322       76       1,880                       3,278  
Separate account assets
    4,730       199       27,103                       32,032  
Policyholder and contract liabilities
    16,647       13,339       4,576                       34,562  
Separate account liabilities
    4,730       199       27,103                       32,032  

PL-48



Table of Contents

     The following is segment information for the year ended December 31, 2003:
                                                 
                    Annuities                    
    Life     Investment     & Mutual     Broker-     Corporate        
    Insurance     Management     Funds     Dealers     and Other     Total  
 
REVENUES   (In Millions)
Policy fees and insurance premiums
  $ 568     $ 256     $ 285                     $ 1,109  
Net investment income
    685       876       197     $ 1     $ 11       1,770  
Net realized investment gain (loss)
    (64 )     (67 )     (7 )             59       (79 )
Realized investment gain on interest in PIMCO
                                    327       327  
Commission revenue
                    1       715       (496 )     220  
Investment advisory fees
    21               117       36               174  
Other income
            4               24       5       33  
     
Total revenues
    1,210       1,069       593       776       (94 )     3,554  
     
 
                                               
BENEFITS AND EXPENSES
                                               
Interest credited
    544       455       154                       1,153  
Policy benefits
    253       499       18                       770  
Commission expenses
    115       4       213       656       (496 )     492  
Operating expenses
    187       20       160       120       95       582  
     
Total benefits and expenses
    1,099       978       545       776       (401 )     2,997  
     
 
                                               
Income from continuing operations before provision for income taxes
    111       91       48             307       557  
Provision for income taxes
    9       11       1               128       149  
     
Income from continuing operations
    102       80       47             179       408  
Discontinued operations, net of taxes
                                    28       28  
     
Net income
  $ 102     $ 80     $ 47     $ 0     $ 207     $ 436  
     

PL-49



Table of Contents

19. TRANSACTIONS WITH AFFILIATES
Pacific Life serves as the investment adviser for the Pacific Select Fund, the investment vehicle provided to the Company’s variable life and variable annuity contract holders, and the Pacific Funds, the investment vehicle for the Company’s mutual fund product. Pacific Life charges advisory and other fees based primarily upon the net asset value of the underlying portfolios. These charges amounted to $252 million, $206 million and $141 million for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively. In addition, Pacific Life provides certain support services to the Pacific Select Fund, the Pacific Funds and other affiliates based on an allocation of actual costs. These fees amounted to $5 million, $3 million and $4 million for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively.
Included in insurance premiums are amounts ceded to a previously affiliated company of $5 million and $16 million for the quarter ended March 31, 2004 and the year ended December 31, 2003, respectively.
As discussed in Note 15, no lapse guarantee benefit riders are coinsured with PAR, an affiliated Bermuda-based reinsurer formed in 2005. U.S. GAAP reserve credits are $1 million in 2005 and premiums ceded are $2 million.
20. COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES
The Company has outstanding commitments to make investments, primarily in fixed maturity securities, mortgage loans, limited partnerships and other investments, as follows:
                 
Years Ending December 31 (In Millions) :                
2006
          $ 694  
2007 through 2010
            422  
2011 and thereafter
            8  
 
             
Total
          $ 1,124  
 
             
The Company leases office facilities under various noncancelable operating leases. Rent expense, which is included in operating expenses, in connection with these leases was $15 million, $14 million and $13 million for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively. In connection with the group insurance segment transaction (Note 7), PL&A is contingently liable for certain future rent and expense obligations, not to exceed $16 million, related to an office lease that has been assigned to PacifiCare. Aggregate minimum future commitments are as follows:
                 
Years Ending December 31 (In Millions) :                
2006
          $ 14  
2007 through 2010
            25  
2011 and thereafter
            8  
 
             
Total
          $ 47  
 
             
The Company is a respondent in a number of legal proceedings, some of which involve allegations for extra-contractual damages.
Pacific Life is a defendant in a national class action lawsuit, Cooper v. Pacific Life, pending in the United States District Court in the Southern District of Georgia. The plaintiffs in this case claim that Pacific Life failed to disclose that the tax deferral feature of a variable annuity offers no additional benefit when it is used to fund a qualified plan, and also claim that Pacific Life has a separate obligation — in addition to the obligation of broker dealers and registered representatives — to assure that each purchase of an annuity is suitable for that customer. Pacific Life disputes these claims. In May 2005, the court certified a class of nearly 120,000 members. After conducting further discovery, Pacific Life will contest the class certification. In the event that the class is de-certified, the claims of the

PL-50



Table of Contents

four original plaintiffs would be adjudicated in a single proceeding and other potential plaintiffs could be required to bring lawsuits on their own behalf. The merits of this case have not yet been adjudicated.
Although the Company is confident of its position in these matters, success is not a certainty and it is possible that in any case a judge or jury could rule against the Company. In the opinion of management, the outcome of such proceedings is not likely to have a material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated financial position or results of operations.
The Company has from time to time divested certain of its businesses. In connection with such divestitures, there may be lawsuits, claims and proceedings instituted or asserted against the Company related to the period that the businesses were owned by the Company or pursuant to indemnifications provided by the Company in connection with the respective transactions, with terms that range in duration and often are not explicitly defined. Because the amounts of these types of indemnifications often are not explicitly stated, the overall maximum amount of the obligation under such indemnifications cannot be reasonably estimated. The Company has not historically made significant payments for these indemnifications. The estimated maximum potential amount of future payments under these obligations is not determinable due to the lack of a stated maximum liability for certain matters, and therefore, no related liability has been recorded. Management believes that judgments, if any, against the Company related to such matters are not likely to have a material adverse effect on the consolidated financial position or results of operations of the Company.
The Company provides routine indemnifications relating to lease agreements. Currently, the Company has several such agreements in place with various expiration dates. Based on historical experience and evaluation of the specific indemnities, management believes that judgments, if any, against the Company related to such matters are not likely to have a material adverse effect on the consolidated financial position or results of operations of the Company.
For all derivative contracts with a counterparty, the Company enters into master agreements that may include a termination event clause associated with the Company’s credit rating. If the Company’s insurer financial strength rating falls below a specified level assigned by certain rating agencies or, in most cases, if one of the rating agencies ceases to provide an insurer financial strength rating, the counterparty can terminate the master agreement with payment due based on the estimated fair value of the underlying derivatives. As of December 31, 2005, the Company did not approach the specified level.
In relation to an asset securitization sponsored by Aviation Capital Group Holding Corp., a wholly owned subsidiary of Pacific LifeCorp, Pacific Life is obligated to purchase certain notes from the asset securitization trust to cover shortfalls in amounts due to the holders of the notes, up to certain levels as specified under the related agreements. As of December 31, 2005, the maximum potential amount of this future investment commitment was $50 million.
See Note 10 for discussion of liquidity commitments related to synthetic GICs.
In connection with the operations of certain of the Company’s broker-dealer subsidiaries, Pacific Life has made commitments to provide for additional capital funding as may be required.
The Company operates in a business environment that is subject to various risks and uncertainties. Such risks and uncertainties include, but are not limited to, interest rate risk, investment market risk, credit risk and legal and regulatory changes.
Interest rate risk is the potential for interest rates to change, which can cause fluctuations in the value of investments, the liabilities for future policy benefits and the carrying amount of DAC. To the extent that fluctuations in interest rates cause the duration of assets and liabilities to differ, the Company may have to sell assets prior to their maturity and realize losses. The Company controls its exposure to this risk by utilizing, among other things, asset/liability matching techniques that attempt to match the duration of assets and liabilities and utilization of derivative instruments. Additionally, the Company includes contractual provisions limiting withdrawal rights for certain of its products. A substantial portion of the Company’s liabilities is not subject to surrender or can be surrendered only after deduction of a surrender charge or a market value adjustment.
The Company’s investments in equity related securities and results from its variable products, including the carrying amount of DAC, are subject to changes in equity prices and the capital markets.

PL-51



Table of Contents

Credit risk is the risk that issuers of investments owned by the Company may default or that other parties may not be able to pay amounts due to the Company. The Company manages its investments to limit credit risk by diversifying its portfolio among various security types and industry sectors. The credit risk of financial instruments is controlled through credit approval procedures, limits and ongoing monitoring. Real estate and mortgage loan investment risks are limited by diversification of geographic location and property type. Management does not believe that significant concentrations of credit risk exist.
The Company is also exposed to credit loss in the event of nonperformance by the counterparties to interest rate swap contracts and other derivative securities. The Company manages this risk through credit approvals and limits on exposure to any specific counterparty and obtaining collateral. However, the Company does not anticipate nonperformance by the counterparties. The Company determines counterparty credit quality by reference to ratings from independent rating agencies or, where such ratings are not available, by internal analysis.
The Company is subject to various state and Federal regulatory authorities. The potential exists for changes in regulatory initiatives, which can result in additional, unanticipated expense to the Company. Existing Federal laws and regulations affect the taxation of life insurance or annuity products and insurance companies. There can be no assurance as to what, if any, cases might be decided or future legislation might be enacted, or if decided or enacted, whether such cases or legislation would contain provisions with possible negative effects on the Company’s life insurance or annuity products.

PL-52



Table of Contents

PART II

Part C: OTHER INFORMATION

     Item 24. Financial Statements and Exhibits

  (a)   Financial Statements
 
      Part A: None
 
      Part B:

  (1)   Registrant’s Financial Statements

Audited Financial Statements dated as of December 31, 2005 which are incorporated by reference from the 2005 Annual Report include the following for Separate Account A:

Statements of Assets and Liabilities
Statements of Operations
Statements of Changes in Net Assets
Notes to Financial Statements
Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

  (2)   Depositor’s Financial Statements

Audited Consolidated Financial Statements dated as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, and for the three year period ended December 31, 2005, included in Part B include the following for Pacific Life:

Independent Auditors’ Report
Consolidated Statements of Financial Condition
Consolidated Statements of Operations
Consolidated Statements of Stockholder’s Equity
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

  (b)   Exhibits
                 
    1.     (a)   Resolution of the Board of Directors of the Depositor authorizing establishment of Separate Account A and Memorandum establishing Separate Account A.1
 
               
          (b)   Memorandum Establishing Two New Variable Accounts—Aggressive Equity and Emerging Markets Portfolios.1
 
               
          (c)   Resolution of the Board of Directors of Pacific Life Insurance Company authorizing conformity to the terms of the current Bylaws.1

II-1

 



Table of Contents

  2.   Not applicable
                 
    3.     (a)   Distribution Agreement between Pacific Mutual Life and Pacific Select Distributors, Inc (PSD)1
 
               
          (b)   Form of Selling Agreement between Pacific Life, PSD and Various Broker-Dealers
                         
    4.     (a)     (1 )   Pacific Innovations—Form of Individual Flexible Premium Deferred Variable Annuity Contract (Form No. 10-12600)1
 
                       
                (2 )   Pacific Innovations Select—Form of Individual Flexible Premium Deferred Variable Annuity Contract (Form No. 10-10300)11

  (b)   Qualified Pension Plan Rider (Form No. R90-PEN-V)1
 
  (c)   403(b) Tax-Sheltered Annuity Rider10
 
  (d)   Section 457 Plan Rider (Form No. 24-123799)1
 
  (e)   Individual Retirement Annuity Rider (Form No. 20-18900)11
 
  (f)   Roth Individual Retirement Annuity Rider (Form No. 20-19000)11
 
  (g)   SIMPLE Individual Retirement Annuity Rider (Form No. 20-19100)11
 
  (h)   Qualified Retirement Plan Rider10
                 
  (i)     (1 )   Pacific Innovations—Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider (Form No. 20-12601)1
 
               
        (2 )   Pacific Innovations Select—Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider (Form No. 20-13500)5
 
               
  (j)     (1 )   Premier Death Benefit Rider (Form No. 20-12602)1
 
               
        (2 )   Premier Death Benefit Rider (Form No. 20-18000)11

  (k)   Guaranteed Earnings Enhancement (EEG) Rider (Form No. 20-14900)6
 
  (l)   Guaranteed Income Advantage (GIA) Rider (Form No. 20-15100)8
 
  (m)   Form of Guaranteed Protection Advantage (GPA) Rider (Form No. 20-16200)9
 
  (n)   Form of Guaranteed Protection Advantage 5 Rider (Form No. 20-19500)14
                 
  (o)     (1 )   Income Access Rider (Form No. 20-19800)12
 
               
        (2 )   Form of Income Access Rider (Form No. 20-1104)15
 
               
        (3 )   Income Access Endorsement (Form No. 15-1122)18

  (p)   Pacific Innovations Select—DCA Plus Fixed Option Rider (Form No. 20-1103)14
 
  (q)   Form of Guaranteed Income Advantage II Rider (Form No. 20-1109)15
 
  (r)   Form of Guaranteed Income Advantage 5 Rider (Form No. 20-1102)15
 
  (s)   Guaranteed Income Annuity Rider (Form No. 20-1118)16
 
  (t)   (1)   Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit Rider (Form No. 20-1119); also Known as Income Access Plus Rider16
 
      (2)   Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit Endorsement (Form No. 15-1123)18
 
  (u)   Enhanced Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit Rider (Form No. 20-1120)19
                         
    5.     (a)     (1 )   Pacific Innovations—Variable Annuity Application (Form No. 25-12610)4
 
                       
                (2 )   Pacific Innovations Select—Variable Annuity Application (Form No. 25-10350)

  (b)   Variable Annuity PAC APP1
 
  (c)   Application/Confirmation Form2
 
  (d)   Guaranteed Income Advantage (GIA) Rider Request (Form No. 1209-1A)9
 
  (e)   Form of Guaranteed Earnings Enhancement (EEG) Rider Request Application6
 
  (f)   Form of Guaranteed Protection Advantage (GPA) Rider Request (Form No. 55-16600)9
 
  (g)   Form of Guaranteed Protection Advantage 5 Rider Request Form (Form No. 2311-BA)12
 
  (h)   Form of Income Access Rider Request Form (Form No. 2315-3A)12
 
  (i)   Form of Portfolio Optimization Rider Request Form (Form No. 2311-5A)16
 
  (j)   Form of Portfolio Optimization Enrollment/Rider Request Form (Form No. 2150-5B)17
 
  (k)   Portfolio Optimization Enrollment/Rider Request Form (Form No. 2150-6B)
                 
    6.     (a)   Pacific Life’s Articles of Incorporation1
 
               
          (b)   By-laws of Pacific Life1
 
               
          (c)   Pacific Life’s Restated Articles of Incorporation
 
               
          (d)   By-laws of Pacific Life As Amended September 1, 2005

  7   Not applicable
                 
    8.     (a)   Pacific Select Fund Participation Agreement7
 
               
          (b)   Addendum to the Pacific Select Fund Participation Agreement (to add the Strategic Value and Focused 30 Portfolios)7
 
               
          (c)   Addendum to the Pacific Select Fund Participation Agreement (to add nine new Portfolios)7
 
               
          (d)   Addendum to the Pacific Select Fund Participation Agreement (to add the Equity Income and Research Portfolios)10
 
               
          (e)   Fund Participation Agreement Between Pacific Life Insurance Company, Pacific Select Distributors Inc., American Funds Insurance Services, American Funds Distributors, and Capital Research and Management Company.17
 
               
          (f)   Form of Exhibit B to the Pacific Select Fund Participation Agreement (to add International Small-Cap and Diversified Bond)

  9   Opinion and Consent of legal officer of Pacific Life as to the legality of Contracts being registered.1

II-2

 



Table of Contents

  10.   Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
 
  11.   Not applicable
 
  12.   Not applicable
 
  13.   Not applicable
 
  14.   Not applicable
 
  15.   Powers of Attorney10
 
  16.   Not applicable

1   Included in Registrant’s Form N-4, File No. 333-93059, Accession No. 0000912057-99-009849 filed on December 17, 1999 and incorporated by reference herein.
 
2   Included in Registrant’s Form N-4, File No. 333-93059, Accession No. 0000912057-00-015739 filed on March 31, 2000 and incorporated by reference herein.
 
3   Included in Registrant’s Form N-4/A, File No. 333-93059, Accession No. 0000912057-00-018010 filed on April 14, 2000 and incorporated by reference herein.
 
4   Included in Registrant’s Form N-4/B, File No. 333-93059, Accession No. 0000912057-00-052614 filed on December 7, 2000 and incorporated by reference herein.
 
5   Included in Registrant’s Form N-4/A, File No. 333-93059, Accession No. 0000912057-00-055027 filed on December 28, 2000 and incorporated by reference herein.
 
6   Included in Registrant’s Form N-4/A, File No. 333-93059 Accession No. 0000912057-01-007165 filed on March 2, 2001 and incorporated by reference herein.
 
7   Included in Registrant’s Form N-4/A, File No. 333-93059, Accession No. 0000912057-01-510459 filed on April 25, 2001 and incorporated by reference herein.
 
8   Included in Registrant’s Form N-4/A, File No. 333-93059, Accession No. 0001017062-01-500247 filed on May 10, 2001 and incorporated by reference herein.
 
9   Included in Registrant’s Form N-4/A, File No. 333-93059, Accession No. 0000898430-01-503115 filed on October 25, 2001 and incorporated by reference herein.
 
10   Included in Registrant’s Form N-4/B, File No. 333-93059, Accession No. 0001017062-02-000788 filed on April 30, 2002 and incorporated by reference herein.
 
11   Included in Registrant’s Form N-4/B, File No. 333-93059, Accession No. 0001017062-02-002149 filed on December 19, 2002 and incorporated by reference herein.
 
12   Included in Registrant’s Form N-4/B, File No. 333-93059, Accession No. 0001017062-03-000460 filed on March 18, 2003 and incorporated by reference herein.
 
13   Included in Registrant’s Form N-4/B, File No. 333-93059, Accession No. 0001017062-03-000934 filed on April 25, 2003 and incorporated by reference herein.
 
14   Included in Registrant’s Form N-4/A, File No. 333-93059, Accession No. 0001193125-03-099264 filed on December 24, 2003 and incorporated by reference herein.
 
15   Included in Registrant’s Form N-4/B, File No. 333-93059, Accession No. 0001193125-04-031276 filed on February 27, 2004 and incorporated by reference herein.
 
16   Included in Registrant’s Form N4/A, File No. 333-93059, Accession No. 0000892569-04-000882 filed on October 15, 2004 and incorporated by reference herein.
 
17   Included in Registrant’s Form N-4/B, File No. 333-93059, Accession No. 0000892569-05-000253 filed on April 19, 2005 and incorporated by reference herein.
 
18   Included in Registrant’s Form N-4/B, File No. 333-93059, Accession No. 0000892569-05-000439 filed on June 15, 2005 and incorporated by reference herein.
 
 
19   Included in Registrant’s Form N-4/A, File No. 333-93059, Accession No. 0000892569-05-000569 filed on August 2, 2005 and incorporated by reference herein.
 

Item 25. Directors and Officers of Pacific Life

     
    Positions and Offices
Name and Address   with Pacific Life
Thomas C. Sutton
  Director, Chairman of the Board, and Chief Executive Officer
 
   
 
   
Khanh T. Tran
  Director, Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer
 
   
  Director, Senior Vice President and General Counsel
 
   
Audrey L. Milfs
  Director, Vice President and Corporate Secretary
 
   
James T. Morris
  Chief Operating Officer
 
   
Edward R. Byrd
  Senior Vice President, Controller, and Chief Accounting Officer
 
   
Brian D. Klemens
  Vice President and Treasurer
 
   
Gerald W. Robinson
  Executive Vice President

The address for each of the persons listed above is as follows:

700 Newport Center Drive
Newport Beach, California 92660

II-3



Table of Contents

Item 26. Persons Controlled by or Under Common Control with Pacific Life or Separate Account A

                The following is an explanation of the organization chart of Pacific Life’s subsidiaries:

Pacific Life is a Nebraska Stock Life Insurance Company wholly-owned by Pacific LifeCorp (a Delaware Stock Holding Company), which is, in turn, 98% owned by Pacific Mutual Holding Company (a California Mutual Holding Company).

PACIFIC LIFE, SUBSIDIARIES & AFFILIATED ENTERPRISES
LEGAL STRUCTURE

         
    Jurisdiction of   Percentage of
    Incorporation or   Ownership by its
    Organization   Immediate Parent
Pacific Mutual Holding Company
  California    
Pacific LifeCorp^
  Delaware   98
Pacific Life Insurance Company +
  Nebraska   100
Pacific Life & Annuity Company
  Arizona   100
Pacific Select Distributors, Inc.
  California   100
Pacific Select Group, LLC
  Delaware   100
Associated Financial Group, Inc.
  California   100
Associated Planners Investment Advisory, Inc.
  California   100
Associated Securities Corp.
  California   100
M.L. Stern & Co., LLC
  Delaware   100
Tower Asset Management, LLC
  Delaware   100
Mutual Service Corporation
  Michigan   100
Contemporary Financial Solutions, Inc.
  Delaware   100
United Planners’ Group, Inc.
  Arizona   100
United Planners’ Financial Services of America (1)
  Arizona   See (1) below
UPFSA Insurance Agency of Arizona, Inc.
  Arizona   100
United Planners Insurance Agency of Massachusetts, Inc.
  Massachusetts   100
Waterstone Financial Group, Inc.
  Illinois   100
Sorrento Pacific Financial, LLC
  California   15
Pacific Asset Management LLC
  Delaware   100
Carson-Pacific LLC
  Delaware   40
Pacific Financial Products Inc.
  Delaware   100
Allianz Global Investors of America, Inc. (2)
  Delaware   See (2) below
Pacific TriGuard Partners LLC
  Delaware   100
Newport TriGuard Fund II LLC
  Delaware   100
Confederation Life and Annuity Company
  Georgia   100
Asset Management Finance Corporation
  Delaware   43
AMF-ACM Finance LLC
  Delaware   100
Pacific Mezzanine Associates L.L.C.
  Delaware   67
Pacific Mezzanine Investors L.L.C.
  Delaware   100
Grayhawk Golf Holdings LLC
  Delaware   95
Grayhawk Golf L.L.C.
  Arizona   100
Las Vegas Golf I, LLC
  Delaware   100
Angel Park Golf LLC
  Nevada   100
The Oaks Golf Club, LLC
  Delaware   100
CW Atlanta LLC
  Delaware   100
CityWalk Towers, LLC
  Delaware   90
College Savings Bank
  New Jersey   100
College Savings Trust
  Montana   100
Pacific Asset Funding, LLC
  Delaware   100
PL Trading Company, LLC
  Delaware   100
Pacific Life Trade Services, Limited
  Hong Kong   100
Pacific Life & Annuity Services, Inc.
  Colorado   100
Pacific Alliance Reinsurance Ltd.
  Bermuda   100
Aviation Capital Group Holding Corp.
  Delaware   100
Aviation Capital Group Corp.
  Delaware   100
ACG Acquisition Corp. V
  Delaware   100
ACG Acquisition VI LLC
  Nevada   50
ACG Acquisition VIII LLC
  Delaware   34
ACG Acquisition XIV LLC
  Delaware   20
ACG Acquisition XIX LLC
  Delaware   20
ACG XIX Holding LLC
  Delaware   100
Aviation Capital Group Trust
       
(Statutory Trust)
  Delaware   100
ACG Acquisition XV LLC
  Delaware   100
ACG Acquisition XX LLC
  Delaware   100
ACG Acquisition Ireland, Limited
  Ireland   100
ACG Acquisition Labuan Ltd.
  Labuan   100
ACG Acquisition XXI LLC
  Delaware   100
ACG Acquisition 40 LLC
  Delaware   100
ACG Acquisition 41 LLC
  Delaware   100
ACG Trust 2004 -1 Holding LLC
  Delaware   100
ACG Funding Trust 2004-1
  Delaware   100
ACG Acquisition 42 LLC
  Delaware   100
ACG Acquisition IX LLC
  Delaware   33
ACG Trust II Holding LLC
  Delaware   100
Aviation Capital Group Trust II
       
(Statutory Trust)
  Delaware   100
ACG Acquisition XXV LLC
  Delaware   100
ACG Acquisition 37-38 LLCs
  Delaware   100
ACG Acquisition Ireland II Limited
  Ireland   100
ACG Acquisition XXIX LLC
  Delaware   100
ACG Acquisition XXX LLC
  Delaware   100
ACG Acquisition 31 — 36 and 39 LLCs
  Delaware   100
ACGFS LLC
  Delaware   100
Boullioun Aviation Services Inc. #
  Washington   100
Boullioun Aviation Services (International) Inc.
  Washington   100
Boullioun Aircraft Holding Company, Inc.
  Washington   100
Boullioun Portfolio Finance III LLC
  Nevada   100
V2500 Statutory Trust
  Connecticut   100
Boullioun Portfolio Finance IV LLC
  Nevada   100
Rainier Aircraft Investment Notes Trust
       
(Statutory Trust)
  Delaware   100
Desert Rainier LLC
  Nevada   100
Boullioun Aviation Services (Bermuda) Limited
  Bermuda   100
Boullioun Aviation Services (Netherlands) BV
  Netherlands   100
ACG III Holding LLC
  Delaware   100
ACG Trust III
  Delaware   100
Bellevue Aircraft Leasing Limited
  Ireland   100
Rainier Aircraft Leasing (Ireland) Limited
  Ireland   100
RAIN I LLC
  Delaware   100
RAIN II LLC
  Delaware   100
RAIN III LLC
  Delaware   100
RAIN IV LLC
  Delaware   100
RAIN V LLC
  Delaware   100
RAIN VI LLC
  Delaware   100
RAIN VII LLC
  Delaware   100
RAIN VIII LLC
  Delaware   100
ACG Acquisition 30271 LLC
  Delaware   100
ACG Acquisition 30286 LLC
  Delaware   100
ACG Acquisition 30744 LLC
  Delaware   100
ACG Acquisition 30745 LLC
  Delaware   100
ACG Acquisition 30293 LLC
  Delaware   100
ACG Acquisition 1176 LLC
  Delaware   100
0168 Statutory Trust
  Connecticut   100
0179 Statutory Trust
  Connecticut   100
ACG Acquisition (Cyprus) Ltd.
  Cyprus   100
ACG Funding 2005-1 Holding LLC
  Delaware   100
ACG Funding Trust 2005-1
       
(Statutory Trust)
  Delaware   100
BAHC (Bermuda) One Limited
  Bermuda   100
ACG Acquisition Ireland III Limited
  Ireland   100
Bellevue Coastal Leasing LLC
  Washington   100
Northern Aircraft Leasing AS
  Norway   100
29141 Statutory Trust
  Connecticut   100
ACG Acquisition 30288 LLC
  Delaware   100
ACG Acquisition 30743 LLC
  Delaware   100
ACG Acquisition 30746 LLC
  Delaware   100
ACG 2006-ECA LLC
  Delaware   100
ACG Acquisition 2692 LLC
  Delaware   100
ACG Trust 2006-1 Holding LLC
  Delaware   100
ACG Funding Trust 2006-1
       
(Statutory Trust)
  Delaware   100
 
#   means abbreviated structure
 
(1)   United Planners Group is the general partner and holds an approximately 45% general partnership interest.
 
(2)   Allianz-PacLife Partners LLC and Pacific Financial Products, Inc. own the Class E units.
 
^   Pacific Life ESOP owns 2%
 
+   Pacific Life owns a direct membership interest in Allianz-PacLife Partners LLC

II-4



Table of Contents

Item 27. Number of Contractholders

                 
  (1) Pacific Innovations – Approximately       1,706   Qualified
          1,669   Non Qualified
 
               
  (2) Pacific Innovations Select – Approximately       57,426   Qualified
          38,878   Non Qualified
 
               

Item 28. Indemnification

  (a)   The Distribution Agreement between Pacific Life and Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (PSD) provides substantially as follows:

      Pacific Life hereby agrees to indemnify and hold harmless PSD and its officers and directors, and employees for any expenses (including legal expenses), losses, claims, damages, or liabilities incurred by reason of any untrue statement or representation of a material fact or any omission or alleged omission to state a material fact required to be stated to make other statements not misleading, if made in reliance on any prospectus, registration statement, post-effective amendment thereof, or sales materials supplied or approved by Pacific Life or the Separate Account. Pacific Life shall reimburse each such person for any legal or other expenses reasonably incurred in connection with investigating or defending any such loss, liability, damage, or claim. However, in no case shall Pacific Life be required to indemnify for any expenses, losses, claims, damages, or liabilities which have resulted from the willful misfeasance, bad faith, negligence, misconduct, or wrongful act of PSD.
 
      PSD hereby agrees to indemnify and hold harmless Pacific Life, its officers, directors, and employees, and the Separate Account for any expenses, losses, claims, damages, or liabilities arising out of or based upon any of the following in connection with the offer or sale of the contracts: (1) except for such statements made in reliance on any prospectus, registration statement or sales material supplied or approved by Pacific Life or the Separate Account, any untrue or alleged untrue statement or representation is made; (2) any failure to deliver a currently effective prospectus; (3) the use of any unauthorized sales literature by any officer, employee or agent of PSD or Broker; (4) any willful misfeasance, bad faith, negligence, misconduct or wrongful act. PSD shall reimburse each such person for any legal or other expenses reasonably incurred in connection with investigating or defending any such loss, liability, damage, or claim.

  (b)   The Form of Selling Agreement between Pacific Life, Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (PSD) and Various Broker-Dealers and Agency (Selling Entities) provides substantially as follows:

      Pacific Life and PSD agree to indemnify and hold harmless Selling Entities, their officers, directors, agents and employees, against any and all losses, claims, damages, or liabilities to which they may become subject under the Securities Act, the Exchange Act, the Investment Company Act of 1940, or other federal or state statutory law or regulation, at common law or otherwise, insofar as such losses, claims, damages or liabilities (or actions in respect thereof) arise out of or are based upon any untrue statement or alleged untrue statement of a material fact or any omission or alleged omission to state a material fact required to be stated or necessary to make the statements made not misleading in the registration statement for the Contracts or for the shares of Pacific Select Fund (the “Fund”) filed pursuant to the Securities Act, or any prospectus included as a part thereof, as from time to time amended and supplemented, or in any advertisement or sales literature provided by Pacific Life and PSD.

II-5



Table of Contents

      Selling Entities agree to, jointly and severally, hold harmless and indemnify Pacific Life and PSD and any of their respective affiliates, employees, officers, agents and directors (collectively, “Indemnified Persons”) against any and all claims, liabilities and expenses (including, without limitation, losses occasioned by any rescission of any Contract pursuant to a “free look” provision or by any return of initial purchase payment in connection with an incomplete application), including, without limitation, reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses and any loss attributable to the investment experience under a Contract, that any Indemnified Person may incur from liabilities resulting or arising out of or based upon (a) any untrue or alleged untrue statement other than statements contained in the registration statement or prospectus relating to any Contract, (b) (i) any inaccurate or misleading, or allegedly inaccurate or misleading sales material used in connection with any marketing or solicitation relating to any Contract, other than sales material provided preprinted by Pacific Life or PSD, and (ii) any use of any sales material that either has not been specifically approved in writing by Pacific Life or PSD or that, although previously approved in writing by Pacific Life or PSD, has been disapproved, in writing by either of them, for further use, or (c) any act or omission of a Subagent, director, officer or employee of Selling Entities, including, without limitation, any failure of Selling Entities or any Subagent to be registered as required as a broker/dealer under the 1934 Act, or licensed in accordance with the rules of any applicable SRO or insurance regulator.
 

II-6



Table of Contents

Item 29. Principal Underwriters

  (a)   PSD also acts as principal underwriter for Pacific Select Variable Annuity Separate Account, Separate Account B, Pacific Corinthian Variable Separate Account, Pacific Select Separate Account, Pacific Select Exec Separate Account, COLI Separate Account, COLI II Separate Account, COLI III Separate Account, Separate Account A of Pacific Life & Annuity Company, Pacific Select Exec Separate Account of Pacific Life & Annuity Company,
 
  (b)   For information regarding PSD, reference is made to Form B-D, SEC File No. 8-15264, which is herein incorporated by reference.
 
  (c)   PSD retains no compensation or net discounts or commissions from the Registrant.

Item 30. Location of Accounts and Records

      The accounts, books and other documents required to be maintained by Registrant pursuant to Section 31(a) of the Investment Company Act of 1940 and the rules under that section will be maintained by Pacific Life at 700 Newport Center Drive, Newport Beach, California 92660.

Item 31. Management Services

      Not applicable

Item 32. Undertakings

      The registrant hereby undertakes:

  (a)   to file a post-effective amendment to this registration statement as frequently as is necessary to ensure that the audited financial statements in this registration statement are never more than 16 months old for so long as payments under the variable annuity contracts may be accepted, unless otherwise permitted.
 
  (b)   to include either (1) as a part of any application to purchase a contract offered by the prospectus, a space that an applicant can check to request a Statement of Additional Information, or (2) a post card or similar written communication affixed to or included in the prospectus that the applicant can remove to send for a Statement of Additional Information, or (3) to deliver a Statement of Additional Information with the Prospectus.
 
  (c)   to deliver any Statement of Additional Information and any financial statements required to be made available under this Form promptly upon written or oral request.

II-7



Table of Contents

Additional Representations

     (a) The Registrant and its Depositor are relying upon American Council of Life Insurance, SEC No-Action Letter, SEC Ref. No. 1P-6-88 (November 28, 1988) with respect to annuity contracts offered as funding vehicles for retirement plans meeting the requirements of Section 403(b) of the Internal Revenue Code, and the provisions of paragraphs (1)-(4) of this letter have been complied with.

     (b) The Registrant and its Depositor are relying upon Rule 6c-7 of the Investment Company Act of 1940 with respect to annuity contracts offered as funding vehicles to participants in the Texas Optional Retirement Program, and the provisions of Paragraphs (a)-(d) of the Rule have been complied with.

     (c) REPRESENTATION PURSUANT TO SECTION 26(f) OF THE INVESTMENT COMPANY ACT OF 1940: Pacific Life Insurance Company and Registrant represent that the fees and charges to be deducted under the Variable Annuity Contract (“Contract”) described in the prospectus contained in this registration statement are, in the aggregate, reasonable in relation to the services rendered, the expenses expected to be incurred, and the risks assumed in connection with the Contract.

II-8



Table of Contents

SIGNATURES

     Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933 and the Investment Company Act of 1940, the Registrant certifies that it meets the requirements of Securities Act Rule 485(b) for effectiveness of this Registration Statement and has caused this Post-Effective Amendment No. 29 to the Registration Statement on Form N-4 to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned thereunto duly authorized in the City of Newport Beach, and the State of California on this 17th day of April, 2006.

         
    SEPARATE ACCOUNT A
    (Registrant)
 
       
 
       
  By:   PACIFIC LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY
 
       
  By:    
     
 
      Thomas C. Sutton*
      Chairman and Chief Executive Officer
 
       
 
       
  By:   PACIFIC LIFE INSURANCE
      COMPANY
      (Depositor)
 
       
  By:    
     
 
      Thomas C. Sutton*
      Chairman and Chief Executive Officer

     Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this Post-Effective Amendment No. 29 to the Registration Statement has been signed below by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated:

         
Signature
  Title
  Date
 

Thomas C. Sutton*
  Director, Chairman of the Board
and Chief Executive Officer
  April 17, 2006    
 

Khanh T. Tran*
  Director, Executive Vice President
and Chief Financial Officer
  April 17, 2006    
 

David R. Carmichael*
  Director, Senior Vice President
and General Counsel
  April 17, 2006    
 

Audrey L. Milfs*
  Director, Vice President and
Corporate Secretary
  April 17, 2006    
 

James T. Morris*
  Chief Operating Officer   April 17, 2006    
 

Edward R. Byrd*
  Senior Vice President, Controller, and
Chief Accounting Officer
  April 17, 2006    
 

Brian D. Klemens*
  Vice President and Treasurer   April 17, 2006    
 

Gerald W. Robinson*
  Executive Vice President   April 17, 2006    
*By: /s/ DAVID R. CARMICHAEL

David R. Carmichael
as attorney-in-fact
      April 17, 2006    

(Powers of Attorney are contained in Post-Effective Amendment No. 9 of the Registration Statement filed on Form N-4/B for Separate Account A, File No. 333-93059, Accession No. 0001017062-02-000788 filed on April 30, 2002, as Exhibit 15.)


Dates Referenced Herein   and   Documents Incorporated by Reference

This ‘485BPOS’ Filing    Date    Other Filings
12/30/23
1/9/17
4/28/08
5/1/07485BPOS
4/30/07
12/31/0624F-2NT,  N-30D,  NSAR-U
12/15/06
7/1/06
5/5/06
Effective on:5/1/06485BPOS
Filed on:4/17/06485BPOS
2/24/06
12/31/0524F-2NT,  N-30D,  NSAR-U
12/30/05
12/15/05497
10/1/05
9/23/05
9/1/05
8/2/05485APOS
8/1/05
7/1/05
6/30/05
6/15/05485BPOS
5/6/05497
5/5/05
5/2/05
5/1/05485BPOS
4/27/05
4/19/05485BPOS
2/1/05
1/1/05
12/31/0424F-2NT,  N-30D,  NSAR-U
10/15/04485APOS
7/23/04485BPOS
7/1/04
4/1/04
3/31/04
3/1/04
2/27/04485BPOS,  NSAR-U
1/1/04
12/31/0324F-2NT,  N-30D,  NSAR-U
12/24/03485APOS
12/15/03
5/1/03
4/25/03485BPOS
4/1/03
3/18/03485BPOS
2/2/03
1/1/03
12/31/0224F-2NT,  N-30D,  NSAR-U
12/19/02485BPOS
11/1/02
4/30/02485BPOS
4/17/02
1/9/02
12/31/0124F-2NT,  485BPOS,  N-30D,  NSAR-U
10/25/01485APOS
5/10/01485APOS
4/25/01485BPOS
4/9/01
4/6/01
4/5/01
4/4/01
4/3/01497
4/2/01497
3/2/01485APOS
1/4/01497
1/3/01497
1/2/01
12/28/00485APOS
12/7/00485BPOS,  497
10/2/00497
7/1/00
5/1/00
4/14/00N-4/A
3/31/00N-4/A
1/3/00
12/20/99497,  N-4
12/17/99
9/1/97
9/7/94
4/1/94
 List all Filings 


5 Subsequent Filings that Reference this Filing

  As Of               Filer                 Filing    For·On·As Docs:Size             Issuer                      Filing Agent

 4/15/24  Sep Acct A of Pacific Life Ins Co 485BPOS     5/01/24    4:15M                                    Toppan Merrill/FA
 4/17/23  Sep Acct A of Pacific Life Ins Co 485BPOS     5/01/23    3:14M                                    Toppan Merrill/FA
 4/18/22  Sep Acct A of Pacific Life Ins Co 485BPOS     5/01/22    3:52M                                    Toppan Merrill/FA
10/20/21  Sep Acct A of Pacific Life Ins Co 485BPOS    10/20/21    2:626K                                   Toppan Merrill/FA
 4/19/21  Sep Acct A of Pacific Life Ins Co 485BPOS     5/01/21    4:38M                                    Toppan Merrill/FA
Top
Filing Submission 0000892569-06-000525   –   Alternative Formats (Word / Rich Text, HTML, Plain Text, et al.)

Copyright © 2024 Fran Finnegan & Company LLC – All Rights Reserved.
AboutPrivacyRedactionsHelp — Wed., May 15, 12:59:35.4pm ET